义明灯复注(第一分)显示巴利原文
Sāratthadīpanī-ṭīkā (paṭhamo bhāgo)
开篇启端语显示巴利原文
Ganthārambhakathā
我今顶礼大悲佛陀,与无垢、殊胜之法;
亦敬礼圣众——最应供养、无有瑕疵者。
以广大功德之威光,摧伏怨敌后
已得灌顶王位,志令教法辉焕者
依止那位名为波洛迦摩巴胡的斯里兰卡王
使诸部派和合,令教法善加清净。
敬礼大长老迦叶,僧团之引导者;
于铜叶岛,成为教法兴盛之因。
修行所依,恒居林野者;
于教法中,昭然显著,犹如净空中的明月轮。
我敬礼僧团之父,于律藏中极为善巧者;
我依止于他而安住,在教法中获得了增长。
那位少长老,具大福德、善慧,以博闻著称;
其戒行无缺等清净功德生起。
多闻、具念、已调伏、寂静、得定者
我以头面礼敬那位智者,我的师长、僧团诵经师。
于通达诸阿含者中,于精通声论理趣者中;
在他的弟子比丘众中,教法得以善为安立。
我将著律藏义注,以明隐晦之义;
使其清晰易懂,圆满而无杂乱。
因为锡兰语体性难解,
在众多难解之处中,于某处略有所记。
虽由某人以摩揭陀语开始,
却夹杂了其他语言,仅有少许书写。
即便是那毫无实质的冗文繁句,在其中也随处可见;
又将那本易明了的义理,在某些地方弄得杂乱不清;
因此,以如此残缺不全者,在此处全然;
各方异域之人,如何了达其义?
因此,舍弃他方之言辞,遍取其精髓;
我将作不杂乱、完整的决断。
显示巴利原文 Mahākāruṇikaṃ buddhaṃ, dhammañca vimalaṃ varaṃ; Vande ariyasaṅghañca, dakkhiṇeyyaṃ niraṅgaṇaṃ. Uḷārapuññatejena, katvā sattuvimaddanaṃ; Pattarajjābhisekena, sāsanujjotanatthinā. Nissāya sīhaḷindena, yaṃ parakkamabāhunā; Katvā nikāyasāmaggiṃ, sāsanaṃ suvisodhitaṃ. Kassapaṃ taṃ mahātheraṃ, saṅghassa pariṇāyakaṃ; Dīpasmiṃ tambapaṇṇimhi, sāsanodayakārakaṃ. Paṭipattiparādhīnaṃ, sadāraññanivāsinaṃ; Pākaṭaṃ gagane canda-maṇḍalaṃ viya sāsane. Saṅghassa pitaraṃ vande, vinaye suvisāradaṃ; Yaṃ nissāya vasantohaṃ, vuddhippattosmi sāsane. Anutheraṃ mahāpuññaṃ, sumedhaṃ sutivissutaṃ; Avikhaṇḍitasīlādi-parisuddhaguṇodayaṃ. Bahussutaṃ satimantaṃ, dantaṃ santaṃ samāhitaṃ; Namāmi sirasā dhīraṃ, garuṃ me gaṇavācakaṃ. Āgatāgamatakkesu , saddasatthanayaññusu; Yassantevāsibhikkhūsu, sāsanaṃ suppatiṭṭhitaṃ. Vinayaṭṭhakathāyāhaṃ, līnasāratthadīpaniṃ; Karissāmi suviññeyyaṃ, paripuṇṇamanākulaṃ. Porāṇehi kataṃ yaṃ tu, līnatthassa pakāsanaṃ; Na taṃ sabbattha bhikkhūnaṃ, atthaṃ sādheti sabbaso. Duviññeyyasabhāvāya, sīhaḷāya niruttiyā; Gaṇṭhipadesvanekesu, likhitaṃ kiñci katthaci. Māgadhikāya bhāsāya, ārabhitvāpi kenaci; Bhāsantarehi sammissaṃ, likhitaṃ kiñcideva ca. Asāraganthabhāropi, tattheva bahu dissati; Ākulañca kataṃ yattha, suviññeyyampi atthato. Tato aparipuṇṇena, tādisenettha sabbaso; Kathamatthaṃ vijānanti, nānādesanivāsino. Bhāsantaraṃ tato hitvā, sāramādāya sabbaso; Anākulaṃ karissāmi, paripuṇṇavinicchayanti.
开卷启端语释显示巴利原文
Ganthārambhakathāvaṇṇanā
为了在律藏注解的开端敬礼三宝,并显示其殊胜功德相应,而说“彼以无数劫”等语。因为正是凭借殊胜功德相应,才成为应受敬礼者;对应受敬礼者行敬礼,便能成就所愿之义。在此,于注解开端敬礼三宝的用意,诸师已在各处广为解说。简而言之如此。显示巴利原文
Vinayasaṃvaṇṇanārambhe ratanattayaṃ namassitukāmo tassa visiṭṭhaguṇayogasandassanatthaṃ ‘‘yo kappakoṭīhipī’’tiādimāha. Visiṭṭhaguṇayogena hi vandanārahabhāvo, vandanārahe ca katā vandanā yathādhippetamatthaṃ sādheti. Ettha ca saṃvaṇṇanārambhe ratanattayapaṇāmakaraṇappayojanaṃ tattha tattha bahudhā papañcenti ācariyā. Tathā hi vaṇṇayanti –
在注解开端敬礼三宝,是为了让所解说的法,其本源、依止及清净得以现证;也是为了在解说诸法时,令智者生起深切敬重;进而令他们以如理恭敬,依正行道获得受持、忆持等次第的成就,最终成就一切利乐。再者,由于这是吉祥之事,是一切所作的前行,为诸贤者所践行,更是为了让未来者能见法随行,故于注解中行敬礼三宝。显示巴利原文
‘‘Saṃvaṇṇanārambhe ratanattayavandanā saṃvaṇṇetabbassa dhammassa pabhavanissayavisuddhipaṭivedanatthaṃ, taṃ pana dhammasaṃvaṇṇanāsu viññūnaṃ bahumānuppādanatthaṃ, taṃ sammadeva tesaṃ uggahaṇadhāraṇādikkamaladdhabbāya sammāpaṭipattiyā sabbahitasukhanipphādanatthaṃ. Atha vā maṅgalabhāvato , sabbakiriyāsu pubbakiccabhāvato, paṇḍitehi samācaritabhāvato, āyatiṃ paresaṃ diṭṭhānugatiāpajjanato ca saṃvaṇṇanāyaṃ ratanattayapaṇāmakiriyā’’ti.
然而,我们仅就此处特定的用意来说明。因此应知,在注解开端敬礼三宝,是为了使已承诺的注解能够无障碍地圆满成就。这正是师长在此处所确定的用意所在。正如他将说:显示巴利原文
Mayaṃ pana idhādhippetameva payojanaṃ dassayissāma. Tasmā saṃvaṇṇanārambhe ratanattayapaṇāmakaraṇaṃ yathāpaṭiññātasaṃvaṇṇanāya anantarāyena parisamāpanatthanti veditabbaṃ. Idameva hi payojanaṃ ācariyena idhādhippetaṃ. Tathā hi vakkhati –
如是,我向极应礼敬者,
敬礼三宝后,
获得广大福德之流。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Iccevamaccantanamassaneyyaṃ , Namassamāno ratanattayaṃ yaṃ; Puññābhisandaṃ vipulaṃ alatthaṃ, Tassānubhāvena hatantarāyo’’ti.
在此,由于敬礼三宝,如所承诺的解说得以无障碍地圆满成就,这是因为敬礼三宝能令智慧敏锐;而智慧之所以敏锐,则是因为去除了贪等垢秽。正如所说:显示巴利原文
Ratanattayapaṇāmakaraṇena cettha yathāpaṭiññātasaṃvaṇṇanāya anantarāyena parisamāpanaṃ ratanattayapūjāya paññāpāṭavabhāvato, tāya paññāpāṭavañca rāgādimalavidhamanato. Vuttañhetaṃ –
“大名!每当圣弟子随念如来时,那时他的心不被贪所缠,不被瞋所缠,不被痴所缠;那时他的心是正直的。”等(《增支部》11.11)。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yasmiṃ, mahānāma, samaye ariyasāvako tathāgataṃ anussarati, nevassa tasmiṃ samaye rāgapariyuṭṭhitaṃ cittaṃ hoti, na dosapariyuṭṭhitaṃ cittaṃ hoti, na mohapariyuṭṭhitaṃ cittaṃ hoti, ujugatamevassa tasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ hotī’’tiādi (a. ni. 11.11).
因此,由敬礼三宝而洗净垢秽的智慧,成就敏锐。显示巴利原文
Tasmā ratanattayapūjanena vikkhālitamalāya paññāya pāṭavasiddhi.
或者,由于敬礼三宝为智慧的近因与定因,故智慧敏锐。即说彼为定因:显示巴利原文
Atha vā ratanattayapūjanassa paññāpadaṭṭhānasamādhihetuttā paññāpāṭavaṃ. Vuttañhi tassa samādhihetuttaṃ –
「大名!如是心正直的圣弟子,获得义之觉了、获得法之觉了、获得与法相应的喜悦;喜悦者生喜;意喜者身轻安;身轻安者感受乐;有乐者心得定。」显示巴利原文
‘‘Evaṃ ujugatacitto kho, mahānāma, ariyasāvako labhati atthavedaṃ, labhati dhammavedaṃ, labhati dhammūpasaṃhitaṃ pāmojjaṃ, pamuditassa pīti jāyati, pītimanassa kāyo passambhati, passaddhakāyo sukhaṃ vediyati, sukhino cittaṃ samādhiyatī’’ti (a. ni. 11.11.).
而定为慧之近因,此义已如所说:“得定者能如实了知。”(《相应部》4.99;《弥兰陀问经》2.1.14)。依此所显发的敏锐智慧,克服仅因承诺而起的疲厌,便能无有障碍地完成解说。因此说“为无障碍而圆满成就”。显示巴利原文
Samādhissa ca paññāya padaṭṭhānabhāvo vuttoyeva ‘‘samāhito yathābhūtaṃ pajānātī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.99; mi. pa. 2.1.14). Tato evaṃ paṭubhūtāya paññāya paṭiññāmahattakataṃ khedamabhibhuyya anantarāyena saṃvaṇṇanaṃ samāpayissati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘anantarāyena parisamāpanattha’’nti.
又或者,因敬礼三宝能令寿命、容色、安乐、力量增长,应知由此能无有障碍地圆满成就。的确,由敬礼三宝,寿命、容色、安乐、力量得以增长。即如所说:显示巴利原文
Atha vā ratanattayapūjāya āyuvaṇṇasukhabalavaḍḍhanato anantarāyena parisamāpanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Ratanattayapaṇāmena hi āyuvaṇṇasukhabalāni vaḍḍhanti. Vuttañhetaṃ –
“常行敬礼、恒久尊重年长者的人,
有四法得以增长:寿命、容色、安乐与力量。(《法句经》109)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Abhivādanasīlissa , niccaṃ vuḍḍhāpacāyino; Cattāro dhammā vaḍḍhanti, āyu vaṇṇo sukhaṃ bala’’nti. (dha. pa. 109);
因此,凭借寿命、容色、安乐与力量的增上,事业必得成就,故说“为无障碍而圆满成就”。显示巴利原文
Tato āyuvaṇṇasukhabalavuḍḍhiyā hoteva kāriyaniṭṭhānamiti vuttaṃ ‘‘anantarāyena parisamāpanattha’’nti.
或者,因为对三宝的敬重能带来辩才的不退失。的确,对三宝的敬重能令其不退失。诚如所说:显示巴利原文
Atha vā ratanattayagāravassa paṭibhānāparihānāvahattā. Aparihānāvahañhi tīsupi ratanesu gāravaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ –
诸比丘,有七不退法。哪七种?敬师、敬法、敬僧、敬学、敬定、善友、易受教。(《增支部》7.34)显示巴利原文
‘‘Sattime, bhikkhave, aparihāniyā dhammā. Katame satta? Satthugāravatā dhammagāravatā saṅghagāravatā sikkhāgāravatā samādhigāravatā kalyāṇamittatā sovacassatā’’ti (a. ni. 7.34).
而且,因辩才无退失,便能如所承诺地圆满完成。显示巴利原文
Hoteva ca tato paṭibhānāparihānena yathāpaṭiññātaparisamāpanaṃ.
或者,由于在净信所依之处,供养具有殊胜的功德。如经中说其功德殊胜:显示巴利原文
Atha vā pasādavatthūsu pūjāya puññātisayabhāvato. Vuttañhi tassa puññātisayattaṃ –
若人供养应受供养者——
无论是佛陀还是声闻弟子,那些已超越戏论、度脱忧愁与悲伤者。
如此供养那些已般涅槃、无所怖畏的圣者——
功德不可计量,纵使说“仅此”亦无人能为。』(法句经195-196偈;长老譬喻1.10.1-2)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Pūjārahe pūjayato, buddhe yadiva sāvake; Papañcasamatikkante, tiṇṇasokapariddave. ‘‘Te tādise pūjayato, nibbute akutobhaye; Na sakkā puññaṃ saṅkhātuṃ, imettamapi kenacī’’ti. (dha. pa. 195-196; apa. thera 1.10.1-2);
功德殊胜,正是成就所愿的方便。如所说:显示巴利原文
Puññātisayo ca yathādhippetaparisamāpanupāyo. Yathāha –
『这是能满足人天一切所欲的宝藏;
凡所希求处,一切皆由此成就。(《小诵经》8.10)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Esa devamanussānaṃ, sabbakāmadado nidhi; Yaṃ yadevābhipatthenti, sabbametena labbhatī’’ti. (khu. pā. 8.10);
如法而行者,其事业必得成办。因为供养三宝,即是对无上福田的正觉了知,由此能生起无可计量的殊胜功德;即使在充满种种障碍的世间共住中,也足以摧破一切与障碍相系的杂染,并遮止怖畏等灾厄。因此,善说应知:于注释开端礼敬三宝,为令如所承诺的注释能无障碍而完成。显示巴利原文
Upāyesu ca paṭipannassa hoteva kāriyaniṭṭhānaṃ. Ratanattayapūjā hi niratisayapuññakkhettasaṃbuddhiyā aparimeyyappabhavo puññātisayoti bahuvidhantarāyepi lokasannivāse antarāyanibandhanasakalasaṃkilesaviddhaṃsanāya pahoti, bhayādiupaddavañca nivāreti. Tasmā suvuttaṃ ‘‘saṃvaṇṇanārambhe ratanattayapaṇāmakaraṇaṃ yathāpaṭiññātasaṃvaṇṇanāya anantarāyena parisamāpanatthanti veditabba’’nti.
如是以义相应而欲行三宝礼敬者,为首先礼敬世尊,因为其余二宝以彼为根本,故说:“那位历……(中略)……大悲者”。在此,由于他欲作注释的教说以悲为主导——不似经教说以悲与慧并为主导,亦不似阿毗达摩教说以慧为主导——因此,对世尊的赞颂唯以悲为主导而发端。这正是阿阇梨的常例:赞颂必与开端相应。正因如此,在经教说的注释开端,以悲与慧并为主导而始赞曰:“心为悲所清凉,以慧灯灭除愚痴之暗”;而在阿毗达摩教说的注释开端,则以慧为主导而始赞曰:“如于众生之悲,大仙之慧”。彼经教说之所以以悲与慧并为主导,是因为慧能分别各类众生的意乐、随眠、胜解、行等差别,而大悲于诸众生中,于此具有殊胜的作用;在经教说中,世尊多入大悲定,随顺所化众生的心相续,安立与其意乐相契的甚深义理。至于阿毗达摩教说,则纯以慧为主导,因为慧能如实通达胜义法,于此具有殊胜的作用。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ pana sappayojanaṃ ratanattayavandanaṃ kattukāmo paṭhamaṃ tāva bhagavato vandanaṃ kātuṃ tammūlakattā sesaratanānaṃ ‘‘yo kappa…pe… mahākāruṇikassa tassā’’ti āha. Ettha pana yassā desanāya saṃvaṇṇanaṃ kattukāmo, sā yasmā karuṇāppadhānā, na suttantadesanā viya karuṇāpaññāppadhānā, nāpi abhidhammadesanā viya paññāppadhānā, tasmā karuṇāppadhānameva bhagavato thomanaṃ āraddhaṃ. Esā hi ācariyassa pakati, yadidaṃ ārambhānurūpathomanā. Teneva suttantadesanāya saṃvaṇṇanārambhe ‘‘karuṇāsītalahadayaṃ, paññāpajjotavihatamohatama’’nti karuṇāpaññāppadhānaṃ, abhidhammadesanāya saṃvaṇṇanārambhe ‘‘karuṇā viya sattesu, paññā yassa mahesino’’ti paññāppadhānañca thomanaṃ āraddhaṃ. Karuṇāpaññāppadhānā hi suttantadesanā tesaṃ tesaṃ sattānaṃ āsayānusayādhimutticariyādibhedaparicchindanasamatthāya paññāya sattesu ca mahākaruṇāya tattha sātisayappavattito. Suttantadesanāya hi mahākaruṇāsamāpattibahulo veneyyasantānesu tadajjhāsayānulomena gambhīramatthapadaṃ patiṭṭhāpesi. Abhidhammadesanā ca kevalaṃ paññāppadhānā paramatthadhammānaṃ yathāsabhāvapaṭivedhasamatthāya paññāya tattha sātisayappavattito.
律的教说则不然,它不顾及众生意乐等差别,纯粹以大悲为根本。因为世尊甚至让不应听闻的普通凡夫得以听闻,让不应发问的得以发问,让不应诉说的予以诉说,由此制定学处。的确,世尊以大悲所策励的心,在大众中,即使对具有最极惭愧心的比丘,也说出世间善士所应回避的‘秃头沙门’等语,以及随其过失而作的呵责;为了审察制定各种学处的缘起,在毘兰若等地,他也忍受了身体的劳顿。因此,如同缘起、时节等论说一样,律的制定虽然也有智慧作为生起因,且智慧以其不共的特质而有殊胜的作用,但在此处,悲的作用更为殊胜,故说律的教说以大悲为根本。之所以说以大悲为根本,正是因为悲的作用更胜一筹。因此,应知此处赞颂与开端相应,唯以大悲为主导而说。显示巴利原文
Vinayadesanā pana āsayādinirapekkhaṃ kevalaṃ karuṇāya pākatikasattenapi asotabbārahaṃ suṇanto apucchitabbārahaṃ pucchanto avattabbārahañca vadanto bhagavā sikkhāpadaṃ paññapesīti karuṇāppadhānā. Tathā hi ukkaṃsapariyantagatahirottappopi bhagavā lokiyasādhujanehipi pariharitabbāni ‘‘sikharaṇīsī’’tiādīni vacanāni yathāparādhañca garahavacanāni vinayapiṭakadesanāya mahākaruṇāsañcoditamānaso mahāparisamajjhe abhāsi, taṃtaṃsikkhāpadapaññattikāraṇāpekkhāya verañjādīsu sārīrikañca khedamanubhosi. Tasmā kiñcāpi bhūmantarapaccayākārasamayantarakathānaṃ viya vinayapaññattiyāpi samuṭṭhāpikā paññā anaññasādhāraṇatāya atisayakiccavatī, karuṇāya kiccaṃ pana tatopi adhikanti karuṇāppadhānā vinayadesanā. Karuṇābyāpārādhikatāya hi desanāya karuṇāppadhānatā. Tasmā ārambhānurūpaṃ karuṇāppadhānameva ettha thomanaṃ katanti veditabbaṃ.
而且,应知由提及悲,便已含摄了具有无量威神力的全部佛德,因为其余佛德都以悲为根本。或者,由于大悲是六不共智中的一种,提及它时,与悲俱行的其余不共智自然也被包含在内,因此,依此理趣,所有佛德都已得到显示。这正是无余显示佛德的方法,即把握其理趣。否则,谁能逐句无余地彰显世尊的功德呢?正因如此,他说:显示巴利原文
Karuṇāggahaṇena ca aparimeyyappabhāvā sabbepi buddhaguṇā saṅgahitāti daṭṭhabbā taṃmūlakattā sesabuddhaguṇānaṃ. Mahākaruṇāya vā chasu asādhāraṇañāṇesu aññatarattā taṃsahacaritasesāsādhāraṇañāṇānampi gahaṇasabbhāvato sabbepi buddhaguṇā nayato dassitāva honti. Esoyeva hi niravasesato buddhaguṇānaṃ dassanupāyo yadidaṃ nayaggāho. Aññathā ko nāma samattho bhagavato guṇe anupadaṃ niravasesato dassetuṃ. Tenevāha –
“纵使是佛陀赞叹佛陀的功德,
纵使宣说长达一劫,
那漫长的劫数也会穷尽,
而如来的功德却不会穷尽。』(长部注1.304; 3.141; 中部注2.425)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Buddhopi buddhassa bhaṇeyya vaṇṇaṃ, Kappampi ce aññamabhāsamāno; Khīyetha kappo ciradīghamantare, Vaṇṇo na khīyetha tathāgatassā’’ti. (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.304; 3.141; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 2.425);
正是因此,当具寿舍利弗长老被问及是否已了达佛陀功德的边际时,他否定道:“尊者,并非如此”,而后又说:“然而,尊者,我已知晓法之类比”(长部2.146)。因此,应知他以“即使以百千万亿劫……”等语,透过悲悯之门,简要地以全分一切知智的功德赞颂了世尊。此即此处总说之义。显示巴利原文
Teneva ca āyasmatā sāriputtattherenapi buddhaguṇaparicchedanaṃ patianuyuttena ‘‘no hetaṃ, bhante’’ti paṭikkhipitvā ‘‘apica me, bhante, dhammanvayo vidito’’ti (dī. ni. 2.146) vuttaṃ. Tasmā ‘‘yo kappakoṭīhipī’’tiādinā karuṇāmukhena saṅkhepato sakalasabbaññuguṇehi bhagavantaṃ abhitthavīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ayamettha samudāyattho.
对此分句的逐词解析如下:“yo”是不定代词,它与“nātho”(依怙)一词相关联。而通过“kappakoṭīhipī”等语句,显示了以那被称为“大悲者”的悲悯之力,即使以百千万亿劫来计数亦无法计量的漫长时期,世尊为饶益世间而行极难行之事所经受的苦。正是由于悲悯的力量,世尊舍弃了唾手可得的涅槃,为了从轮回的泥沼中拔济沉沦的众生,行持了即使想也不敢想的施舍眼睛、生命、子女、妻子等极难行之事。“kappakoṭīhipi appameyyaṃ kālaṃ”的意思是:即使以百千万亿劫来计量,时间也无法被限定为“有这么多百千万亿劫”。由于不能以百千万亿劫的计数方式来限定,故说那是超过了以百千劫计数的四个不可计数劫。因为仅以百千万亿劫的方式而言,时间是无可计量的;但以不可计数劫的方式来说,则可以加以限定。“kappakoṭīhipi”中的“api”字,表示即使以百千万亿劫的方式尚不能计量,更何况以年数来计。“appameyyaṃ kālaṃ”是持续关系中的业格,如同“māsam adhīte”(他用一个月学习)。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ pana avayavattho – yoti aniyamavacanaṃ. Tassa ‘‘nātho’’ti iminā sambandho. ‘‘Kappakoṭīhipī’’tiādinā pana yāya karuṇāya so ‘‘mahākāruṇiko’’ti vuccati, tassā vasena kappakoṭigaṇanāyapi appameyyaṃ kālaṃ lokahitatthāya atidukkaraṃ karontassa bhagavato dukkhānubhavanaṃ dasseti. Karuṇāya baleneva hi so bhagavā hatthagatampi nibbānaṃ pahāya saṃsārapaṅke nimuggaṃ sattanikāyaṃ tato samuddharaṇatthaṃ cintetumpi asakkuṇeyyaṃ nayanajīvitaputtabhariyadānādikaṃ atidukkaramakāsi. Kappakoṭīhipi appameyyaṃ kālanti kappakoṭigaṇanāyapi ‘‘ettakā kappakoṭiyo’’ti pametuṃ asakkuṇeyyaṃ kālaṃ, kappakoṭigaṇanavasenapi paricchinditumasakkuṇeyyattā aparicchinnāni kappasatasahassādhikāni cattāri asaṅkhyeyyānīti vuttaṃ hoti. Kappakoṭivaseneva hi so kālo appameyyo, asaṅkhyeyyavasena pana paricchinnoyeva. ‘‘Kappakoṭīhipī’’ti apisaddo kappakoṭivasenapi tāva pametuṃ na sakkā, pageva vassagaṇanāyāti dasseti. ‘‘Appameyyaṃ kāla’’nti accantasaṃyoge upayogavacanaṃ ‘‘māsamadhīte, divasaṃ caratī’’tiādīsu viya. Karonto atidukkarānīti pañcamahāpariccāgādīni atidukkarāni karonto. Evamatidukkarāni karonto kiṃ vindīti ce? Khedaṃ gato, kāyikaṃ khedamupagato, parissamaṃ pattoti attho, dukkhamanubhavīti vuttaṃ hoti. Dukkhañhi khijjati sahitumasakkuṇeyyanti ‘‘khedo’’ti vuccati. Lokahitāyāti ‘‘anamatagge saṃsāre vaṭṭadukkhena accantapīḷitaṃ sattalokaṃ tamhā dukkhato mocetvā nibbānasukhabhāgiyaṃ karissāmī’’ti evaṃ sattalokassa hitakaraṇatthāyāti attho. Assa ca ‘‘atidukkarāni karonto’’ti iminā sambandho. Lokahitāya khedaṃ gatoti yojanāyapi natthi doso. Mahāgaṇṭhipadepi hi ‘‘atidukkarāni karonto khedaṃ gato, kimatthanti ce? Lokahitāyā’’ti vuttaṃ.
然而,若有人对此解释不以为然,而说:“世尊并非为了利益世间而承受轮回之苦,因为任何人的受苦都不可能给世间带来饶益。”这仅是他一己之见。即便依此解释,也应如此理解:行极难行之事的世尊,其受苦是为了成就利益世间之事,并非仅凭受苦本身就能成就世间利益。因为即便是依前一种解释,也不是仅靠行持难行之事就能成就世间利益。行持难行之事的人,并不能直接令有情安立于道果等中,而是通过完成那样的极难行之事,证得一切知智,再以导向解脱的教法,令有情安立于道果等中,从而成就世间利益。显示巴利原文
Yaṃ pana evaṃ yojanaṃ asambhāventena kenaci vuttaṃ ‘‘na hi bhagavā lokahitāya saṃsāradukkhamanubhavati. Na hi kassaci dukkhānubhavanaṃ lokassa upakāraṃ āvahatī’’ti, taṃ tassa matimattaṃ. Evaṃ yojanāyapi atidukkarāni karontassa bhagavato dukkhānubhavanaṃ lokahitakaraṇatthāyāti ayamattho viññāyati, na tu dukkhānubhavaneneva lokahitasiddhīti. Paṭhamaṃ vuttayojanāyapi hi na dukkarakaraṇamattena lokahitasiddhi. Na hi dukkaraṃ karonto kañci sattaṃ maggaphalādīsu patiṭṭhāpeti, atha kho tādisaṃ atidukkaraṃ katvā sabbaññubhāvaṃ sacchikatvā niyyānikadhammadesanāya maggaphalādīsu satte patiṭṭhāpento lokassa hitaṃ sādheti.
虽然此处依有情世间、诸行世间与器世间而言有三种世间,但这里所指的是饶益之行,故仅就当作为对象的有情世间来理解其义。因为在此世间,福与非福及其果报被经历,故称为“世间”。然而在某些地方,如“sanarāmaralokagaru”等中,“世间”一词也依集合体而有“群体”之义,即被经历、被施设。然而,若有人于此如此说:“以此,它包含了有情世间与生处世间,因此,将彼有情世间的此世与他世利益,或将已超越他世、已断除世间集者的、在此生处世间或器世间中称为现法乐住之利益,总揽起来,作为‘世间的、诸世间的、于世间中的利益’,保持其词形而说为‘lokahita’。”此不应信以为真,因为即使被称为现法乐住之利益,也属于有情世间的范畴,而仅以“有情世间”一词,便已囊括了那些已断除根本的漏尽者。显示巴利原文
Kāmañcettha sattasaṅkhārabhājanavasena tividho loko, hitakaraṇassa pana adhippetattā taṃvisayasseva sattalokassa vasena attho gahetabbo. So hi lokīyanti ettha puññapāpāni taṃvipāko cāti ‘‘loko’’ti vuccati. Katthaci pana ‘‘sanarāmaralokagaru’’ntiādīsu samūhatthopi lokasaddo samudāyavasena lokīyati paññāpīyatīti. Yaṃ panettha kenaci vuttaṃ ‘‘iminā sattalokañca jātilokañca saṅgaṇhāti, tasmā tassa sattalokassa idhalokaparalokahitaṃ, atikkantaparalokānaṃ vā ucchinnalokasamudayānaṃ idha jātiloke okāsaloke vā diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārasaṅkhātañca hitaṃ sampiṇḍetvā lokassa, lokānaṃ, loke vā hitanti sarūpekasesaṃ katvā lokahitamiccevāhā’’ti, na taṃ sārato paccetabbaṃ diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārasaṅkhaātahitassapi sattalokavisayattā, sattalokaggahaṇeneva ucchinnamūlānaṃ khīṇāsavānampi saṅgahitattā.
凡说到“kenaci”之处,应理解为“依《金刚智疏》的方式”。凡说到“Mahāgaṇṭhipade”或“Majjhimagaṇṭhipade”或“Cūḷagaṇṭhipade”,应理解为“在锡兰的结集中”。若仅说“gaṇṭhipade”,应理解为“以摩揭陀语书写的结集”。显示巴利原文
Sabbattha ‘‘kenacī’’ti vutte ‘‘vajirabuddhiṭīkākārenā’’ti gahetabbaṃ. ‘‘Mahāgaṇṭhipade’’ti vā ‘‘majjhimagaṇṭhipade’’ti vā ‘‘cūḷagaṇṭhipade’’ti vā vutte ‘‘sīhaḷagaṇṭhipadesū’’ti gahetabbaṃ. Kevalaṃ ‘‘gaṇṭhipade’’ti vutte ‘‘māgadhabhāsāya likhite gaṇṭhipade’’ti gahetabbaṃ.
“Nātho”意为:世间的皈依处,即世间主、世间导者。确实,世尊以拔除一切灾祸为先导,致力于无余安乐的施设,具备无上的精勤成就,对包括天人在内的一切众生有至上的饶益,并具足无量无等伦的威德殊胜功德,故是一切众生中最上者,是无数世间界中无数众生的唯一皈依处与依怙。或者,“nāthati”故为“nātho”,意思是:他以慈悯的方式,为所化导者希求、期望利益安乐。或者,“nāthati”的意思是:他烧灼所化导者心中的烦恼;或“nāthati”的意思是:他乞求。因为世尊曾通过“善哉,比丘们,比丘应时时观察自己的成就”等语,即使是以乞求的方式,也出于悲悯而激励、劝导众生行持种种利益行。或者,由于他具备最上的心自在力,能主宰、降伏一切众生,故最上自在者世尊被称为“nātho”。而所有这些含义,都应依声明论典来理解。显示巴利原文
Nāthoti lokapaṭisaraṇo, lokasāmī lokanāyakoti vuttaṃ hoti. Tathā hi sabbānatthapaahārapubbaṅgamāya niravasesahitasukhavidhānatapparāya niratisayāya payogasampattiyā sadevamanussāya pajāya accantupakāritāya aparimitanirupamappabhāvaguṇavisesasamaṅgitāya ca sabbasattuttamo bhagavā aparimāṇāsu lokadhātūsu aparimāṇānaṃ sattānaṃ ekapaṭisaraṇo patiṭṭhā. Atha vā nāthatīti nātho, veneyyānaṃ hitasukhaṃ mettāyanavasena āsīsati patthetīti attho. Atha vā nāthati veneyyagate kilese upatāpetīti attho, nāthatīti vā yācatīti attho. Bhagavā hi ‘‘sādhu, bhikkhave, bhikkhu kālena kālaṃ attasampattiṃ paccavekkheyyā’’tiādinā (a. ni. 8.7) sattānaṃ taṃ taṃ hitapaṭipattiṃ yācitvāpi karuṇāya samussāhito te tattha niyojeti. Paramena vā cittissariyena samannāgato sabbasatte īsati abhibhavatīti paramissaro bhagavā ‘‘nātho’’ti vuccati. Sabbopi cāyamattho saddasatthānusārato veditabbo.
“大悲者”是指:因悲悯而心颤,为利益世间而行极难行之种种事,历经如是轮回之苦而来者,即是大悲者。其中,“悲”(karuṇā)即“散播”,意为驱散、除去他人之苦。或者,悲是对于受苦者而生起、扩展,故称为悲。又或者,“悲”即“购买”,当面对他人之苦时,悲悯者会折磨、逼迫,或摧伏他人之苦。或者,当面对他人之苦时,令善人心颤、心生忧恼,故称为悲。又或者,“乐”(kami)是快乐,“悲”则阻碍快乐。因为悲以去除他人之苦的意愿为相,不顾自身安乐,故阻碍、逼迫悲悯者的快乐。与悲相应者,即“悲悯者”,如“守门人”之例。正如一个虽不在门岗处、却以看门为生计的人,因其不离门岗的职责而被称作“守门人”,同样,世尊虽以慈等住于悲心之外的其他状态,但因其不离悲心的行持,与悲相应,故称“悲悯者”。从大誓愿开始直至大般涅槃,世间怙主们唯以利益世间而安住。大悲悯者,即“大悲者”。虽然世尊也因其他功德而伟大,但此处由于与“悲悯者”一词连用,故应知此处的伟大是依于悲心,如“大授记”之例。如此,以“大悲者”一词,通过补特伽罗的安立。显示巴利原文
Mahākāruṇikassāti yo karuṇāya kampitahadayattā lokahitatthaṃ atidukkarakiriyāya anekappakāraṃ tādisaṃ saṃsāradukkhamanubhavitvā āgato, tassa mahākāruṇikassāti attho. Tattha kiratīti karuṇā, paradukkhaṃ vikkhipati apanetīti attho. Dukkhitesu vā kirīyati pasārīyatīti karuṇā. Atha vā kiṇātīti karuṇā, paradukkhe sati kāruṇikaṃ hiṃsati vibādheti, vināseti vā parassa dukkhanti attho. Paradukkhe sati sādhūnaṃ kampanaṃ hadayakhedaṃ karotīti vā karuṇā. Atha vā kamiti sukhaṃ, taṃ rundhatīti karuṇā. Esā hi paradukkhāpanayanakāmatālakkhaṇā attasukhanirapekkhatāya kāruṇikānaṃ sukhaṃ rundhati vibādhetīti. Karuṇāya niyuttoti kāruṇiko yathā ‘‘dovāriko’’ti. Yathā hi dvāraṭṭhānato aññattha vattamānopi dvārapaṭibaddhajīviko puriso dvārānativattavuttitāya dvāre niyuttoti ‘‘dovāriko’’ti vuccati, evaṃ bhagavā mettādivasena karuṇāvihārato aññattha vattamānopi karuṇānativattavuttitāya karuṇāya niyuttoti ‘‘kāruṇiko’’ti vuccati. Mahābhinīhārato paṭṭhāya hi yāva mahāparinibbānā lokahitatthameva lokanāthā tiṭṭhanti. Mahanto kāruṇikoti mahākāruṇiko. Satipi bhagavato tadaññaguṇānampi vasena mahantabhāve kāruṇikasaddasannidhānena vuttattā karuṇāvasenettha mahantabhāvo veditabbo yathā ‘‘mahāveyyākaraṇo’’ti. Evañca katvā ‘‘mahākāruṇikassā’’ti iminā padena puggalādhiṭṭhānena satthu mahākaruṇā vuttā hoti.
又或者,以悲、以悲悯之行为习性、为本性者,即是“悲悯者”,如同地触等以坚硬、触等为自性,悲悯之行是其自性,即悲已成为其本质。其余解释与前述相同。或者,因所缘广大、威力广大、力量广大,故悲为大,即“大悲”。世尊的悲心遍及一切无余众生,其生起方式无与伦比,且能必定成就众生现世等广大利益与安乐。与大悲相应者,即“大悲者”,一切皆可按前述之理了知。或者,拥有广大、殊胜的悲心者,即“大悲者”。此处“大”字是赞叹之词,如“大人”等例。世尊的悲心是殊胜的,因其依大悲定而生起,故无与伦比。显示巴利原文
Atha vā karuṇā karuṇāyanaṃ sīlaṃ pakati etassāti kāruṇiko, pathavīphassādayo viya kakkhaḷaphusanādisabhāvā karuṇāyanasabhāvo sabhāvabhūtakaruṇoti attho. Sesaṃ purimasadisameva. Atha vā mahāvisayatāya mahānubhāvatāya mahābalatāya ca mahatī karuṇāti mahākaruṇā. Bhagavato hi karuṇā niravasesesu sattesu pavattati, pavattamānā ca anaññasādhāraṇā pavattati, diṭṭhadhammikādibhedañca mahantameva sattānaṃ hitasukhaṃ ekantato nipphādeti, mahākaruṇāya niyuttoti mahākāruṇikoti sabbaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Atha vā mahatī pasatthā karuṇā assa atthīti mahākāruṇiko. Pūjāvacano hettha mahantasaddo ‘‘mahāpuriso’’tiādīsu viya. Pasatthā ca bhagavato karuṇā mahākaruṇāsamāpattivasenapi pavattito anaññasādhāraṇattāti.
如此,以悲心为门,简略地以一切知智功德赞叹世尊之后,现在为了赞叹正法,而说“未觉”等语。其中,“未觉”表示过去的动作,意为未觉了、未通达,即未如实通达。此处词尾“ant”表原因,如“读诵而坐”等例。“yaṃ”是对过去所作不定业的表述。“佛所修习”是其定语。其中,“佛”一词的含义,首先应依“觉了诸谛者为佛,令众生觉悟者为佛”等解说方式了知。或者,因彻底断除含随眠的无明之眠,或因智慧开显,故为“已觉者”,即“佛”,依觉醒、开显之义。或者,因无任何所了知之法未被觉了,不以所了知的特相为业而执取,无业用之欲,唯依通达之义可得施设作者,故为“已觉者”,即“佛”。从义理上说,佛是以波罗蜜所庄严、以自然智摧毁随眠、灭尽一切烦恼、具足大悲与一切知智等无量功德蕴聚的蕴相续。如所说:“佛者,即彼世尊,自然成,无师,于前所未闻之法中,自证诸谛,于彼获得一切知性,于诸力得自在。”因此,由如此具有无与伦比威力的佛所修习,即依所缘之修习与修证之修习,如理修习、经历。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ karuṇāmukhena saṅkhepato sakalasabbaññuguṇehi bhagavantaṃ thometvā idāni saddhammaṃ thometuṃ ‘‘asambudha’’ntiādimāha. Tattha asambudhanti pubbakālakiriyāniddeso, tassa asambujjhanto appaṭivijjhantoti attho, yathāsabhāvaṃ appaṭivijjhanatoti vuttaṃ hoti. Hetuattho hettha antasaddo ‘‘paṭhanto nisīdatī’’tiādīsu viya. Yanti pubbakālakiriyāya aniyamato kammaniddeso. Buddhanisevitanti tassa visesanaṃ. Tattha buddhasaddassa tāva ‘‘bujjhitā saccānīti buddho, bodhetā pajāyāti buddho’’tiādinā (mahāni. 192) niddesanayena attho veditabbo. Atha vā savāsanāya aññāṇaniddāya accantavigamato, buddhiyā vā vikasitabhāvato buddhavāti buddho jāgaraṇavikasanatthavasena. Atha vā kassacipi ñeyyadhammassa anavabuddhassa abhāvena ñeyyavisesassa kammabhāvena aggahaṇato kammavacanicchāya abhāvena avagamanatthavaseneva kattuniddeso labbhatīti buddhavāti buddho. Atthato pana pāramitāparibhāvito sayambhūñāṇena saha vāsanāya vihataviddhaṃsitaniravasesakileso mahākaruṇāsabbaññutaññāṇādiaparimeyyaguṇagaṇādhāro khandhasantāno buddho. Yathāha ‘‘buddhoti yo so bhagavā sayambhū anācariyako pubbe ananussutesu dhammesu sāmaṃ saccāni abhisambujjhi, tattha ca sabbaññutaṃ patto balesu ca vasībhāva’’nti (mahāni. 192; cūḷani. pārāyanatthutigāthāniddesa 97; paṭi. ma. 1.161). Tena evaṃ nirupamappabhāvena buddhena nisevitaṃ gocarāsevanābhāvanāsevanāhi yathārahaṃ nisevitaṃ anubhūtanti attho.
其中,涅槃唯依所缘修习而被修习;道则是由自己修习,依修习之修习而被修习;而由他人所生起的道果,当以他心智等了知时,或由自己所生起,以省察智决断时,那时也依所缘修习而被修习。在此,若以教法之摄受而间接摄受法,则教法亦因成为说法与思惟智的所缘,可说为依所缘修习而被修习。由于注释书中说:‘通达阿毗达摩法海,思惟三藏’,故教法也能获得证悟的思惟方式。因此,‘未觉’即未觉了、未证悟,由此义理可知,故应知此处也包含了教法。若未通达彼,便流转于诸有;而已了知法律者,依其义理而行持,如理行道,不久将作苦之边际。即如所说:显示巴利原文
Tattha nibbānaṃ gocarāsevanāvaseneva nisevitaṃ, maggo pana attanā bhāvito ca bhāvanāsevanāvasena sevito, parehi uppāditāni pana maggaphalāni cetopariyañāṇādinā yadā parijānāti, attanā uppāditāni vā paccavekkhaṇañāṇena paricchindati, tadā gocarāsevanāvasenapi sevitāni hontiyeva. Ettha ca pariyattidhammassapi pariyāyato dhammaggahaṇena gahaṇe sati sopi desanāsammasanañāṇagocaratāya gocarāsevanāya sevitoti sakkā gahetuṃ. ‘‘Abhidhammanayasamuddaṃ adhigacchati, tīṇi piṭakāni sammasī’’ti ca aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttattā pariyattidhammassapi sacchikiriyāya sammasanapariyāyo labbhatīti yaṃ asambudhaṃ asambujjhanto asacchikarontoti atthasambhavato sopi idha vutto evāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tampi ca appaṭivijjhanto bhavābhavaṃ gacchati, pariññātadhammavinayo pana tadatthapaṭipattiyā sammāpaṭipanno na cirasseva dukkhassantaṃ karissati. Vuttañhetaṃ –
于此法律中,不放逸而住者,
断除生死轮回,将作苦之边际。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yo imasmiṃ dhammavinaye, appamatto vihassati; Pahāya jātisaṃsāraṃ, dukkhassantaṃ karissatī’’ti. (dī. ni. 2.185; saṃ. ni. 1.185);
在此,道、果与涅槃虽也为独觉佛、佛弟子等以所缘修习等方式所修习,但此处是依最上界定而说为“佛所修习”。然而,也有论者认为,由于“佛陀”一词的通称义,佛陀、随觉佛与独觉佛也都包含于此。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca kiñcāpi maggaphalanibbānāni paccekabuddhabuddhasāvakehipi gocarāsevanādinā sevitāni honti, tathāpi ukkaṭṭhaparicchedavasena ‘‘buddhanisevita’’nti vuttaṃ. Kenaci pana buddhasaddassa sāmaññato buddhānubuddhapaccekabuddhānampi ettheva saṅgaho vutto.
“有与无”是对未来时行为的业的说明,意为“从有而有”。或者,“有与无”是就善趣与恶趣、低劣与殊胜而言,指小与大。因为“a”字母也见于表示增长义,如“无学法”等词中。因此,“无有”被称为“大有”。或者,“有”是增长,“无有”是损减。或者,“有”是常见,“无有”是断灭见。所说的“有与无”即是“有无”。他前往——这是对未来时行为的说明。有情世间即众生世间,因为以“有情”一词排除了行世间与器世间,它们没有“有无”之去来。此处应视为省略了“礼敬”一词。显示巴利原文
Bhavābhavanti aparakālakiriyāya kammaniddeso, bhavato bhavanti attho. Atha vā bhavābhavanti sugatiduggativasena hīnapaṇītavasena ca khuddakaṃ mahantañca bhavanti attho. Vuddhatthopi hi a-kāro dissati ‘‘asekkhā dhammā’’tiādīsu viya. Tasmā abhavoti mahābhavo vuccati. Atha vā bhavoti vuddhi, abhavoti hāni. Bhavoti vā sassatadiṭṭhi, abhavoti ucchedadiṭṭhi. Vuttappakāro bhavo ca abhavo ca bhavābhavo. Taṃ bhavābhavaṃ. Gacchatīti aparakālakiriyāniddeso. Jīvalokoti sattaloko. Jīvaggahaṇena hi saṅkhārabhājanalokaṃ nivatteti tassa bhavābhavagamanāsambhavato. Namo atthūti pāṭhaseso daṭṭhabbo.
“破除无明等烦恼网者”是法的定语。其中,对于不应知者而认知,是为无明。由于不应圆满之义,身恶行等名为不应知者,即不可得之义。与此相反,身善行等名为应知者,对于那应知者而不认知,是为无明;或者,对于蕴的积聚义、处的范围义、界的空义、根的主宰义、谛的如实义,使之不能了知,是为无明;或者,对于苦等以逼迫等方式所说的四种义,使之不能了知,也是无明;在无有边际的轮回中,于一切生处、趣、有、识住、有情居,令有情奔驰,是为无明;或者,在胜义上不存在的男女等中奔驰,而在存在的蕴等中不奔驰,是为无明。那无明是这些贪等之首,故为无明等;它们本身使有情染污,故为烦恼;它们本身又因束缚有情之义而似网,故为网;以戒破除它、彻底摧毁它,故为破除无明等烦恼网者。难道这里不是指包括教法的九出世间法吗?而其中只有道破除烦恼,其余则否?答:即使道也是依止涅槃而破除烦恼,故涅槃也可说破除烦恼;道的破除烦恼作用由果所成就,故果也被称为“破除烦恼者”。教法也因是破除烦恼的缘,故可称为“破除烦恼者”,如此并无过失。显示巴利原文
Avijjādikilesajālaviddhaṃsinoti dhammavisesanaṃ. Tattha avindiyaṃ vindatīti avijjā. Pūretuṃ ayuttaṭṭhena kāyaduccaritādi avindiyaṃ nāma, aladdhabbanti attho. Tabbiparītato kāyasucaritādi vindiyaṃ nāma, taṃ vindiyaṃ na vindatīti vā avijjā, khandhānaṃ rāsaṭṭhaṃ, āyatanānaṃ āyatanaṭṭhaṃ, dhātūnaṃ suññataṭṭhaṃ, indriyānaṃ adhipatiyaṭṭhaṃ, saccānaṃ tathaṭṭhaṃ aviditaṃ karotīti vā avijjā, dukkhādīnaṃ pīḷanādivasena vuttaṃ catubbidhaṃ atthaṃ aviditaṃ karotītipi avijjā, antavirahite saṃsāre sabbayonigatibhavaviññāṇaṭṭhitisattāvāsesu satte javāpetīti vā avijjā, paramatthato avijjamānesupi itthipurisādīsu javati, vijjamānesupi khandhādīsu na javatīti vā avijjā. Sā ādi yesaṃ taṇhādīnaṃ te avijjādayo, teyeva kilissanti etehi sattāti kilesā, teyeva ca sattānaṃ bandhanaṭṭhena jālasadisāti jālaṃ, taṃ viddhaṃseti sabbaso vināseti sīlenāti avijjādikilesajālaviddhaṃsī. Nanu cettha sapariyattiko navalokuttaradhammo adhippeto, tattha ca maggoyeva kilese viddhaṃseti, netareti ce? Vuccate. Maggassapi nibbānamāgamma kilesaviddhaṃsanato nibbānampi kilese viddhaṃseti nāma, maggassa kilesaviddhaṃsanakiccaṃ phalena nipphannanti phalampi ‘‘kilesaviddhaṃsī’’ti vuccati. Pariyattidhammopi kilesaviddhaṃsanassa paccayattā ‘‘kilesaviddhaṃsī’’ti vattumarahatīti na koci doso.
“那最胜法”一语,是对先前未特定说明者所作的特定说明。其中,对于依教奉行者,能护持其不堕四恶趣,故名为法。显示巴利原文
Dhammavarassa tassāti pubbe aniyamitassa niyamavacanaṃ. Tattha yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjamāne catūsu apāyesu apatamāne dhāretīti dhammo.
凡是皈依法者,不堕恶趣;
舍弃人身后,他们将圆满天身。'——(《长部》2.332;《相应部》1.37)——
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Ye keci dhammaṃ saraṇaṃ gatāse, na te gamissanti apāyabhūmiṃ; Pahāya mānusaṃ dehaṃ, devakāyaṃ paripūressantī’’ti. (dī. ni. 2.332; saṃ. ni. 1.37) –
此即是说:或谓,于轮回苦中不含弃、能持护,故名之为“法”——因证得道果,以最多七生等方式,轮回已断尽故。而在此处,对能生恶趣等烦恼的摧破,亦是持护。如是而作:圣道为成就彼义之因,涅槃亦然——此二者以非间接的方式持护;圣果以断烦恼之寂止随顺于彼,教法为证得彼之因——此二者以间接的方式持护。当如此了知。所说的法本身,因无更上者,故为最胜、殊胜、无上,是以称为“最胜法”。礼敬彼最胜法——这是关联。至此,要义已明。至于此处有人所敷陈,以及我们在此未显示者,不应视为要义。此后亦应如此看待。故从此往后,不再赘言,唯显要义。然而,若某处有人全然相违,我们也会在彼处显示。此处,以“破除无明等烦恼网者”一句,以善说等称扬法;以“最胜法”一句,因显示无有其他殊胜者,而表圆满。或谓,以第一句显示法的断德成就,以第二句显示威力成就。显示巴利原文
Hi vuttaṃ. Saṃsāradukkhe vā apatamāne katvā dhāretīti dhammo maggaphaluppattiyā sattakkhattuparamatādivasena saṃsārassa paricchinnattā. Apāyādinibbattakakilesaviddhaṃsanañcettha dhāraṇaṃ. Evañca katvā ariyamaggo tassa tadatthasiddhihetutāya nibbānañcāti ubhayameva nippariyāyato dhāreti, ariyaphalaṃ pana taṃsamucchinnakilesapaṭippassambhanena tadanuguṇatāya, pariyattidhammo tadadhigamahetutāyāti ubhayaṃ pariyāyato dhāretīti veditabbaṃ. Vuttappakāro dhammoyeva attano uttaritarābhāvena varo pavaro anuttaroti dhammavaro, tassa dhammavarassa namo atthūti sambandho. Ettāvatā cettha amhehi sārattho pakāsito. Yaṃ panettha kenaci papañcitaṃ, amhehi ca idha na dassitaṃ, na taṃ sārato paccetabbaṃ. Ito paresupi evameva daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tasmā ito paṭṭhāya ettakampi avatvā sāratthameva dassayissāma. Yattha pana kenaci accantaviruddhaṃ likhitaṃ, tampi katthaci dassayissāma. Ettha ca ‘‘avijjādikilesajālaviddhaṃsino’’ti etena svākkhātatādīhi dhammaṃ thometi, ‘‘dhammavarassā’’ti etena aññassa visiṭṭhassa abhāvadīpanato paripuṇṇatāya. Paṭhamena vā pahānasampadaṃ dhammassa dasseti, dutiyena pabhāvasampadaṃ.
如是,以一切法功德简要称赞正法已,今为称赞圣僧团,而说“以功德”等语。“以功德”一词与“具足”一词相关联。今为显示以何功德而具足,故说“戒、定”等语。其中,四遍净戒等称为“戒”。“定”指初禅等。因为以定为首,故说初禅等。“慧”指道慧。解脱与解脱智见,应言“解脱与解脱智见”,然以一分相似、一分省略故,说为“解脱智见”。以“等”字或“始”字,当知包含了“解脱”。其中,“解脱”指果。“解脱智见”指省察智。以“始”字,当知包含了六通、四无碍解等功德。此处,戒等功德随其所应,当知既指世间,亦指出世间。至于此处有人言:“戒等虽随其所应可得世间与出世间,然由最后‘圣僧’一词,故戒等四法蕴唯是出世间”——那只是他个人的见解。因为以世间功德称赞圣僧团,不见有任何过失;即使对一切知佛,亦以世间与出世间功德称赞,何况对圣僧团呢?显示巴利原文
Evaṃ saṅkhepeneva sabbadhammaguṇehi saddhammaṃ thometvā idāni ariyasaṅghaṃ thometuṃ ‘‘guṇehī’’tiādimāha. ‘‘Guṇehī’’ti padassa ‘‘yutto’’ti iminā sambandho. Idāni yehi guṇehi yutto, te dassento ‘‘sīlasamādhī’’tiādimāha. Tattha catupārisuddhisīlādi ‘‘sīla’’nti vuccati. Samādhīti paṭhamajjhānādi. Samādhisīsena hi paṭhamajjhānādayo vuttā. Paññāti maggapaññā. Vimutti ca vimuttiñāṇañca vimuttivimuttiñāṇanti vattabbe ekadesasarūpekasesanayena ‘‘vimuttiñāṇa’’nti vuttaṃ. Ādisaddapariyāyena pabhutisaddena vā vimuttiggahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Tattha vimuttīti phalaṃ. Vimuttiñāṇanti paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ. Pabhuti-saddena chaḷabhiññācatupaṭisambhidādayo guṇā saṅgahitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ettha ca sīlādayo guṇā lokiyā lokuttarā ca yathāsambhavaṃ niddiṭṭhāti veditabbā. Yaṃ panettha kenaci vuttaṃ ‘‘sīlādayo kiñcāpi lokiyalokuttarā yathāsambhavaṃ labbhanti, tathāpi ante ‘ariyasaṅgha’nti vacanato sīlādayo cattāro dhammakkhandhā lokuttarāvā’’ti, taṃ tassa matimattaṃ. Na hi ariyasaṅghassa lokiyaguṇehipi thomanāya koci doso dissati, sabbaññubuddhassapi tāva lokiyalokuttaraguṇehi thomanā hoti, kimaṅgaṃ pana ariyasaṅghassāti.
对于希求善法的人们,犹如能使善法增长的田地,故称为“田”,是以说“田是希求善法者之田”。因为田地能护持所播之种,令其结出大果,故名为“田”,即谷物豆类所生长的土地;由于圣僧团与此相似,故亦被称为“田”。以此表明圣僧团是无上福田。因为经中说“世间无上福田”。其中“taṃ”,是对前文以“yo”不定方式所述内容的确定表述。所谓“圣僧团”:此处因远离烦恼、不行非道、行于正道而称为“圣”,这是依词源学解释。或谓,因被包括诸天在内的世间所皈依,故应被亲近、可被亲近,且能成就亲近者之义利,故称为“圣”。圣者们组成的团体,即是“圣僧团”。或谓,既是如前所述的“圣”,又是以见与戒的共性而和合之团体,故为“圣僧团”——即八种圣者。向那位圣僧团。为了显示在佛陀之后,对佛宝与法宝的证悟亦依赖于僧宝,从而表明圣僧团之大恩,故应知此处特说“以头顶礼”。显示巴利原文
Kusalatthikānaṃ janānaṃ puññassa vuddhiyā khettasadisattā khettanti āha ‘‘khettaṃ janānaṃ kusalatthikāna’’nti. Khittaṃ bījaṃ mahapphalabhāvakaraṇena tāyatīti hi khettaṃ, pubbaṇṇāparaṇṇaviruhanabhūmi, taṃsadisattā ariyasaṅghopi ‘‘khetta’’nti vuccati. Iminā ariyasaṅghassa anuttarapuññakkhettabhāvaṃ dīpeti. ‘‘Anuttaraṃ puññakkhettaṃ lokassā’’ti hi vuttaṃ. Tanti pubbe ‘‘yo’’ti aniyamena vuttassa niyamavacanaṃ. Ariyasaṅghanti ettha ārakattā kilesehi, anaye na iriyanato, aye ca iriyanato ariyā niruttinayena. Atha vā sadevakena lokena saraṇanti araṇīyato upagantabbato upagatānañca tadatthasiddhito ariyā. Ariyānaṃ saṅgho samūhoti ariyasaṅgho. Atha vā ariyo ca so yathāvuttanayena saṅgho ca diṭṭhisīlasāmaññena saṃhatabhāvatoti ariyasaṅgho, aṭṭha ariyapuggalā. Taṃ ariyasaṅghaṃ. Bhagavato aparabhāge buddhadhammaratanānampi samadhigamo saṅgharatanādhīnoti ariyasaṅghassa bahūpakārataṃ dassetuṃ idheva ‘‘sirasā namāmī’’ti vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
如此,通过三首偈颂,以总赞一切功德的方式简要地向三宝致敬后,为了将此礼敬引向所期望的目的,现在说“iccevaṃ”等语。意思是:我以如上所述的方式,以绝对、专一之心,礼敬那应当礼敬、值得礼敬的三宝,当我以身语意致敬时,便获得了广大的福德之流。其中,佛等之所以称为“宝”,是因能令人生起喜悦。因为当人们以“彼世尊即是如此”等方式,随念其真实功德时,会产生成为证得不死之因的无量喜悦与欢喜。正如所说——显示巴利原文
Evaṃ gāthāttayena saṅkhepato sakalaguṇasaṃkittanamukhena ratanattayassa paṇāmaṃ katvā idāni taṃ nipaccakāraṃ yathādhippete payojane pariṇāmento āha ‘‘icceva’’miccādi. Iccevaṃ yathāvuttanayena accantaṃ ekantena namassaneyyaṃ namassitabbaṃ ratanattayaṃ namassamāno kāyavācācittehi vandamāno ahaṃ vipulaṃ yaṃ puññābhisandaṃ alatthanti sambandho. Tattha buddhādayo ratijananaṭṭhena ratanaṃ. Tesañhi ‘‘itipi so bhagavā’’tiādinā yathābhūtaguṇe āvajjentassa amatādhigamahetubhūtaṃ anappakaṃ pītipāmojjaṃ uppajjati. Yathāha –
“大名!当圣弟子忆念如来之时,那时,他的心不被贪欲所缠缚,心不被瞋恚所缠缚,心不被愚痴所缠缚,那时,他的心是正直的。大名!由于心正直,圣弟子便得义之喜,得法之喜,得与法相应的欢悦;欢悦者生起喜悦……”如这些等(《增支部》11.11)。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yasmiṃ, mahānāma, samaye ariyasāvako tathāgataṃ anussarati, nevassa tasmiṃ samaye rāgapariyuṭṭhitaṃ cittaṃ hoti, na dosapariyuṭṭhitaṃ cittaṃ hoti, na mohapariyuṭṭhitaṃ cittaṃ hoti, ujugatamevassa tasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ hoti, ujugatacitto kho pana, mahānāma, ariyasāvako labhati atthavedaṃ, labhati dhammavedaṃ, labhati dhammūpasaṃhitaṃ pāmojjaṃ, pamuditassa pīti jāyatī’’tiādi (a. ni. 11.11).
又或,“宝”的含义是备受尊崇等状态。正如所说——显示巴利原文
Cittīkatādibhāvo vā ratanaṭṭho. Vuttañhetaṃ –
为人所尊崇、价值高昂、无可比拟、难得一见,唯非凡之人得受其用,因此得名为宝。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Cittīkataṃ mahagghañca, atulaṃ dullabhadassanaṃ; Anomasattaparibhogaṃ, ratanaṃ tena vuccatī’’ti. (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.33);
而为人尊崇等种种特质,唯如来等方能证得,非其余者所能共有。显示巴利原文
Cittīkatabhāvādayo ca anaññasādhāraṇā buddhādīsuyeva labbhantīti.
“福德流”意为福德蕴集或福德相续,此为《大义疏》所说。《中义疏》与《小义疏》也将其义释为“福德流即福果”。但此处应理解为:福德流即是福德河、福德流注。因为持续不断生起的福德,具有流注之义,故称福德流。因此,《相应部注·显义灯》(《相应部注》3.5.1027)中说:显示巴利原文
‘‘Puññābhisandanti puññarāsiṃ puññappavattaṃ vā’’ti mahāgaṇṭhipade vuttaṃ. Majjhimagaṇṭhipade pana cūḷagaṇṭhipade ca ‘‘puññābhisandanti puññābhinisaṃsa’’ntipi attho vutto. Puññābhisandanti puññanadiṃ, puññappavāhanti evaṃ panettha attho veditabbo. Avicchedena pavattiyamānañhi puññaṃ abhisandanaṭṭhena ‘‘puññābhisando’’ti vuccati. Teneva sāratthapakāsiniyā saṃyuttanikāyaṭṭhakathāya (saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 3.5.1027) –
“诸比丘,有四种福德流、善流,为安乐之食。哪四种?诸比丘,于此,圣弟子对佛陀具足不坏净信:‘彼世尊即是……乃至……佛、世尊。’这是第一种福德流、善流、安乐之食。”(《相应部》5.1027)显示巴利原文
‘‘Cattārome, bhikkhave, puññābhisandā kusalābhisandā sukhassāhārā. Katame cattāro? Idha, bhikkhave, ariyasāvako buddhe aveccappasādena samannāgato hoti ‘itipi so bhagavā…pe… buddho bhagavā’ti, ayaṃ paṭhamo puññābhisando kusalābhisando sukhassāhāro’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.1027) –
在解释如是等经文之义时,说:“福德流、善流即是福德河、善河。”然《义疏》中所说“福德流即福果”则不妥当。因为礼敬三宝者在彼时并未获得福果,而是当时获得了无量的福德蕴集,其果属于来世;现世中仅是障碍被破除,那只是该福德的些许利益,且说是“以其威力而障碍被破除”。并非在福果未生起时不能以其威力破除障碍,而且这也不属于现世即受。因此,应解释为:由于那广大福德流的威力而障碍被破除,唯此义方为合理。或者,若其意图是:由礼敬所生福德本身即是福果,这样亦可成立。为显示那福德流并非微小,而是广大的,故说“vipulaṃ”,即广大、无量。“alatthaṃ”意为“我获得”“我达到”。显示巴利原文
Evamādikāya pāḷiyā atthaṃ dassento ‘‘puññābhisandā kusalābhisandāti puññanadiyo kusalanadiyo’’ti vuttaṃ. Yaṃ pana gaṇṭhipade vuttaṃ ‘‘puññābhisandanti puññaphala’’nti, taṃ na sundaraṃ . Na hi ratanattayaṃ namassamāno tasmiṃ khaṇe puññaphalaṃ alattha, kintu anappakaṃ puññarāsiṃ tadā alabhi, tassa ca phalaṃ paralokabhāgī, diṭṭhadhamme tu antarāyavighāto tassa ca puññassa ānisaṃsamattakaṃ, ‘‘tassānubhāvena hatantarāyo’’ti ca vuttaṃ, na ca puññaphale anuppanne tassānubhāvena hatantarāyabhāvo na sijjhati, na cetaṃ tasmiṃyeva khaṇe diṭṭhadhammavedanīyaṃ ahosi. Tasmā tassa mahato puññappavāhassa ānubhāvena hatantarāyoti ayameva attho yujjati. Athāpi paṇāmakiriyāya janitattā puññameva puññaphalanti tassādhippāyo siyā, evaṃ sati yujjeyya. So ca puññappavāho na appamattako, atha kho mahantoyevāti dassento āha ‘‘vipula’’nti, mahantaṃ anappakanti vuttaṃ hoti. Alatthanti alabhiṃ, pāpuṇinti attho.
“以其威力”者:即依如前所述那般福德之流所具的威力与力量。“障碍被摧破”者:障碍,是指以阻挠种种成就的方式,来到、侵入有情相续之中的事物,即现世等不利。以礼敬目的中所说的方法,障碍与灾祸已被摧破、消灭者,名为“障碍被摧破者”。此语关联到“我将解说戒律”,意为成为障碍被摧破者之后,将解说戒律。借此表明:由于那种福德之流、自身的净信成就以及三宝的福田性成就,在赞叹义理时,便具有摧破破坏性灾祸的能力。显示巴利原文
Tassānubhāvenāti tassa yathāvuttassa puññappavāhassa ānubhāvena balena. Hatantarāyoti taṃtaṃsampattiyā vibandhanavasena sattasantānassa antare vemajjhe eti āgacchatīti antarāyo, diṭṭhadhammikādianattho. Paṇāmapayojane vuttavidhinā hato viddhasto antarāyo upaddavo assāti hatantarāyo. Assa ‘‘vaṇṇayissaṃ vinaya’’nti iminā sambandho, hatantarāyo hutvā vinayaṃ vaṇṇayissanti vuttaṃ hoti. Etena tassa puññappavāhassa attano pasādasampattiyā ratanattayassa ca khettabhāvasampattiyā atthasaṃvaṇṇanāya upaghātakaupaddavānaṃ hanane samatthataṃ dīpeti.
如此,在开示了恭敬三宝的功德之后,现在为了注释律藏的含义,首先阐明律藏乃是世尊教法的根本立足之处,并加以赞叹,故说“安住于其中”等语。应当如此连接文意:对于不安住者而言,善安住者的世尊教法,一旦安住于其中,便得以建立。其中,“其中”指律藏。“安住”指于教本与义理上无有缺失,以在有惭耻者中相续流传的意义而安住。“教法”指包含增上戒学、增上心学、增上慧学的三学教法。“不安住者”指不安住于沉溺欲乐与自我折磨这两个极端之中者。因为经中说:“贤友,我无依着、无用力而渡过了暴流。”(《相应部》1.1)此义在三部锡兰义注中都有解说。然而,有义注中说:“不安住者,也指已般涅槃的世尊。”显示巴利原文
Evaṃ ratanattayassa nipaccakārakaraṇe payojanaṃ dassetvā idāni yassa vinayapiṭakassa atthaṃ saṃvaṇṇetukāmo, tassa tāva bhagavato sāsanassa mūlapatiṭṭhānabhāvaṃ dassetvā tampi thomento āha ‘‘yasmiṃ ṭhite’’tiādi. Aṭṭhitassa susaṇṭhitassa bhagavato sāsanaṃ yasmiṃ ṭhite patiṭṭhitaṃ hotīti yojetabbaṃ. Tattha yasminti yasmiṃ vinayapiṭake. Ṭhiteti pāḷito ca atthato ca anūnaṃ hutvā lajjīpuggalesu pavattanaṭṭhena ṭhiteti attho. Sāsananti adhisīlaadhicittaadhipaññāsaṅkhātasikkhattayasaṅgahitaṃ sāsanaṃ. Aṭṭhitassāti kāmasukhallikattakilamathānuyogasaṅkhāte antadvaye aṭṭhitassāti attho. ‘‘Appatiṭṭhaṃ khvāhaṃ, āvuso, anāyūhaṃ oghamatari’’nti (saṃ. ni. 1.1) hi vuttaṃ. Ayañcattho tīsupi sīhaḷagaṇṭhipadesu vuttoyeva. Gaṇṭhipade pana ‘‘aṭṭhitassāti parinibbutassapi bhagavato’’ti vuttaṃ.
“得以建立”:指正是在那些有惭耻者之中,以持续流传的意义而得以建立。“善安住者”:对此,三部义注中最初这样说:“以具足三十二大丈夫相与八十种随形好而具有善妙形相,以此显示他的色身圆满。”而义注中又说:“由于诸相安住于正确位置而得具足,故色身为善安住;由于无有身曲等过失,并具足如如之相,故名身也是善安住。”然而,有人这样说道:“或者,以四梵住对众生善妙而正确地安住之理,名为‘善安住者’。因为正是由于善安住,他纯粹为了拔除众生的痛苦,为了带来利益,对成就感到喜悦而无偏袒地开示律藏。因此,在这注释律藏的论题中,以适合的赞叹而称说‘善安住者’。”之后又说道:“义注中所说的意义,并不适合所期望的论题。”然而,对此,我们的认可如下:正因为不安住于如上所述的沉溺欲乐等两个极端,而以中道正确地安住,所以是“善安住者”,应如此理解其义。因为这样一来,所作的赞叹便与开端相应,而律的制定,大部分正是为了避开所说的两个极端,开示中道。显示巴利原文
Patiṭṭhitaṃ hotīti tesuyeva lajjīpuggalesu pavattanaṭṭhena patiṭṭhitaṃ hoti. Susaṇṭhitassāti ettha tāva tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu idaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘dvattiṃsamahāpurisalakkhaṇaasītianubyañjanehi samannāgamanavasena susaṇṭhānassāti attho. Anena assa rūpakāyasampattiṃ nidassetī’’ti. Gaṇṭhipade pana ‘‘yathāṭhāne patiṭṭhitehi lakkhaṇehi samannāgatattā rūpakāyena susaṇṭhito, kāyavaṅkādirahitattā tādilakkhaṇasamannāgatattā ca nāmakāyenapī’’ti vuttaṃ. Kenaci pana ‘‘catubrahmavihāravasena sattesu suṭṭhu sammā ca ṭhitassāti atthavasena vā susaṇṭhitassa. Susaṇṭhitattā hesa kevalaṃ sattānaṃ dukkhaṃ apanetukāmo hitaṃ upasaṃharitukāmo sampattiyā ca pamudito apakkhapatito ca hutvā vinayaṃ deseti. Tasmā imasmiṃ vinayasaṃvaṇṇanādhikāre sāruppāya thutiyā thomento āha ‘susaṇṭhitassā’’’ti vatvā ‘‘gaṇṭhipadesu vuttattho adhippetādhikārānurūpo na hotī’’ti vuttaṃ. Ayaṃ panettha amhākaṃ khanti – yathāvuttakāmasukhallikādiantadvaye aṭṭhitattāyeva majjhimāya paṭipadāya sammā ṭhitattā susaṇṭhitassāti evamattho gahetabboti. Evañhi sati ārambhānurūpathomanā katā hoti yathāvuttaantadvayaṃ vivajjetvā majjhimāya paṭipadāya vinayapaññattiyāyeva yebhuyyena pakāsanato.
“Tanti”(而)是对前文未加限定的“yasmiṃ”(其中)一词所作的限定词,它与“vinaya”(律藏)一词相关联。“Asammissaṃ”(无杂)是中性语态,意思是:将不同部派的见解无混杂、无混乱地予以注释。由于律藏即使对于像法将舍利弗长老那样堪与学处制定相应时机者,也难于完全通晓,纯属佛之境界,因此说“依前师之威力”。因为仅凭说“我将以自己的能力注释律藏”,他人是做不到的。所谓“前师之威力”,就义理而言,即前师们所注释的义注,故而各处义注都说:“前师之威力即是义注。”因此,这是说:我将依止前师们所注释的义注来进行注释,而非依靠一己之力。显示巴利原文
Tanti pubbe ‘‘yasmi’’nti aniyametvā vuttassa niyamavacanaṃ, tassa ‘‘vinaya’’nti iminā sambandho. Asammissanti bhāvanapuṃsakaniddeso, nikāyantaraladdhīhi asammissaṃ katvā anākulaṃ katvā vaṇṇayissanti vuttaṃ hoti. Sikkhāpadapaññattiyā anurūpassa kālamattassapi dhammasenāpatisāriputtattherasadisenapi duviññeyyabhāvato kevalaṃ buddhavisayaṃ vinayapiṭakaṃ attano balena vaṇṇayissāmīti vacanamattampi aññehi vattumasakkuṇeyyattā ‘‘nissāya pubbācariyānubhāva’’nti āha. Pubbācariyānubhāvo nāma atthato pubbācariyehi saṃvaṇṇitā aṭṭhakathā, tatoyeva ca ‘‘pubbācariyānubhāvo aṭṭhakathā’’ti sabbattha gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Tasmā pubbācariyehi saṃvaṇṇitaṃ aṭṭhakathaṃ nissāya vaṇṇayissaṃ, na attanoyeva balaṃ nissāyāti vuttaṃ hoti.
接着,若有人问:“既然古义注已存,再次注释律藏有何必要?”为明示古义注本无缺失,并说明自己作释的必要,故说“kāmañca”(虽则)等语。“kāmaṃ”可解为必定、随意或全部,此处与“saṃvaṇṇito”(已注释)相关联。意思是:虽则已作注释,并非未曾注释。然而,这律藏是由谁注释的呢?答道:“由前师之雄者”。“前师之雄者”是指大迦叶长老等前辈师长,他们以不可动摇的义理与最上义而堪称雄者,故称“前师之雄者”。这些前师又是怎样的呢?即说“以智水”等语。以名为最上道智之水,彻底洗净、以令未来不生之方式冲洗、清除了贪等三垢与欲漏等四漏,他们便是“以智水洗净垢漏者”。这不仅是表明他们堪为师表,更显示他们是远离了贪等垢秽、诸漏已尽的清净圣者。显示巴利原文
Atha ‘‘porāṇaṭṭhakathāsu vijjamānāsu puna vinayasaṃvaṇṇanāya kiṃ payojana’’nti yo vadeyya, tassa porāṇaṭṭhakathāya anūnabhāvaṃ attano ca saṃvaṇṇanāya payojanaṃ dassento ‘‘kāmañcā’’tiādimāha. Kāmanti ekantena, yathicchakaṃ vā, sabbasoti vuttaṃ hoti, tassa ‘‘saṃvaṇṇito’’ti iminā sambandho. Kāmaṃ saṃvaṇṇitoyeva, no na saṃvaṇṇitoti attho. Kehi pana so vinayo saṃvaṇṇitoti āha ‘‘pubbācariyāsabhehī’’ti. Mahākassapattherādayo pubbācariyā eva akampiyaṭṭhena uttamaṭṭhena ca āsabhā, tehi pubbācariyāsabhehīti vuttaṃ hoti. Kīdisā panete pubbācariyāti āha ‘‘ñāṇambū’’tiādi. Aggamaggañāṇasaṅkhātena ambunā salilena niddhotāni nissesato āyatiṃ anuppattidhammatāpādanena dhotāni vikkhālitāni visodhitāni rāgādīni tīṇi malāni kāmāsavādayo ca cattāro āsavā yehi te ñāṇambuniddhātamalāsavā, tehīti attho. Iminā ca na kevalaṃ etesu ācariyabhāvoyeva, atha kho rāgādimalarahitā khīṇāsavā visuddhasattā eteti dasseti.
虽已是漏尽者,他们却也并非干观者,而是具足如此威德的圣者。为了显示这一点,故说“与清净明及无碍解俱”。“与清净明及无碍解俱”意指拥有极清净的明与四无碍解。为显示他们已证得无碍解,且获得了敏锐的简择,故说“清净”,因为未证得一分无碍解的圣者是不存在的。“明”指三明,或八明。其中,天眼智、宿住随念智、漏尽智,此三者为三明。八明则是:显示巴利原文
Khīṇāsavabhāvepi na ete sukkhavipassakā, atha kho evarūpehipi ānubhāvehi samannāgatāti dassento āha ‘‘visuddhavijjāpaṭisambhidehī’’ti. Visuddhā accantaparisuddhā vijjā catasso ca paṭisambhidā yesaṃ te visuddhavijjāpaṭisambhidā, tehi. Ekadesena paṭisambhidaṃ appattānaṃ ariyānameva abhāvato etehi adhigatapaṭisambhidā paṭutaraladdhappabhedāti dassetuṃ visuddhaggahaṇaṃ kataṃ. Vijjāti tisso vijjā, aṭṭha vijjā vā. Tattha dibbacakkhuñāṇaṃ pubbenivāsañāṇaṃ āsavakkhayañāṇañcāti imā tisso vijjā. Aṭṭha vijjā pana –
观智、意所成神通,
种种神通及天耳,
他心智,
宿住随念智
天眼与漏尽
这些智于此处即是八明。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Vipassanāñāṇamanomayiddhi , Iddhippabhedopi ca dibbasotaṃ; Parassa cetopariyāyañāṇaṃ, Pubbenivāsānugatañca ñāṇaṃ; Dibbañca cakkhāsavasaṅkhayo ca, Etāni ñāṇāni idhaṭṭha vijjā’’ti. –
如此,与观智和意所成神变一同摄持的,正是六神通。义无碍解、法无碍解、辞无碍解、辩无碍解,这是四无碍解。其中,略而言之:于因果中的智为义无碍解,于因中的智为法无碍解,于与因果相应的言说中的智为辞无碍解,以‘此智照亮此义’的方式,在前述三智中生起的智为辩无碍解。然而,其广说过于冗长,此处不作解说。因已证得无碍解者于正法善巧,故说‘由善巧阐明正法者’。亦有说:‘即使已证得无碍解者,由于对法的精勤而有差别,故为显示其所得无碍解之殊胜而说。’‘由善巧阐明正法者’意为:在阐明名为三藏之正法、完全显了义理方面,善巧、精通、娴熟者。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ vipassanāñāṇamanomayiddhīhi saddhiṃ pariggahitā cha abhiññāyeva. Atthapaṭisambhidā dhammapaṭisambhidā niruttipaṭisambhidā paṭibhānapaṭisambhidāti catasso paṭisambhidā. Tattha saṅkhepato hetuphale ñāṇaṃ atthapaṭisambhidā, hetumhi ñāṇaṃ dhammapaṭisambhidā, hetuhetuphalānurūpaṃ vohāresu ñāṇaṃ niruttipaṭisambhidā, idaṃ ñāṇaṃ imamatthaṃ jotayatīti iminā ākārena heṭṭhā vuttesu tīsu ñāṇesu pavattañāṇaṃ paṭibhānapaṭisambhidā. Etāsaṃ pana vitthārakathā atipapañcabhāvato idha na vuccati. Paṭisambhidāppattānaṃ saddhammesu chekabhāvato āha ‘‘saddhammasaṃvaṇṇanakovidehī’’ti. ‘‘Paṭisambhidāppattānampi dhammesu abhiyogavasena viseso hotīti laddhapaṭisambhidāsu sātisayataṃ dassetuṃ āhā’’tipi vadanti. Saddhammasaṃvaṇṇanakovidehīti piṭakattayasaṅkhātassa saddhammassa saṃvaṇṇane sabbaso atthappakāsane kovidehi chekehi, kusalehīti attho.
‘Sallekho’(减损),即削减、减薄烦恼之网或资具之丰多。但此处因以漏尽者为主,故应取削减资具丰多之义。是故,在注释中说:‘sallekhiye(应减损)中,指受用有限资具的状态。’Sallekhassa的状态为sallekhiyaṃ,在那sallekhiye中,即指减损行道。‘Nosulabhūpamehi’(以难得为喻者):由于在减损行道中,与他们(漏尽者)相似、堪为其譬喻者极为难得,是故这些漏尽者没有易得之譬喻,故说‘nosulabhūpamā’。‘Mahāvihārassa’(大寺的):此乃排除了心山(Cittalapabbata)和无畏山(Abhayagiri)两个异派。‘Dhajūpamehi’(以幢幡为譬喻者):如同为了识别车乘而系于车上的幢幡,为了让不知者知道‘大寺是由某与某长老居住的’,作为识别大寺的因由,故说‘以大寺幢幡为譬喻者’。‘Saṃvaṇṇito’(已阐明):即正确、无缺地阐明。应断句为‘saṃvaṇṇito’。显示巴利原文
Kilesajālaṃ parikkhārabāhullaṃ vā saṃlikhati tanuṃ karotīti sallekho. Idha pana khīṇāsavādhikārattā parikkhārabāhullassa sallikhanavaseneva attho gahetabbo, tatoyeva ca gaṇṭhipade ‘‘sallekhiye parimitaparikkhāravuttiyā’’ti attho vutto. Sallekhassa bhāvo sallekhiyaṃ, tasmiṃ sallekhiye, sallekhapaṭipattiyanti vuttaṃ hoti. Nosulabhūpamehīti asulabhūpamehi sallekhapaṭipattiyā asukasadisāti tesaṃ upamāya anucchavikapuggalānaṃ dullabhattā natthi sulabhā upamā etesanti nosulabhūpamā. Mahāvihārassāti cittalapabbataabhayagirisesanikāyadvayaṃ paṭikkhipati. Dhajūpamehīti rathassa sañjānanahetukaṃ rathe baddhadhajaṃ viya ajānantānaṃ ‘‘asukehi ca asukehi ca therehi nivāsito mahāvihāro nāmā’’ti evaṃ mahāvihārassa sañjānanahetuttā mahāvihārassa dhajūpamehi. Saṃvaṇṇitoti sammā anūnaṃ katvā vaṇṇito. Saṃvaṇṇito ayaṃ vinayoti padacchedo kātabbo. Cittehi nayehīti anekappabhedanayattā vicittehi nayehi. Sambuddhavaranvayehīti sabbaññubuddhavaraṃ anugatehi, bhagavato adhippāyānugatehi nayehīti vuttaṃ hoti. Atha vā buddhavaraṃ anugatehi pubbācariyāsabhehīti sambandho kātabbo.
如此,显示了古注之无缺后,现在为表明自身注释的特殊用意,说‘注释’等语。此意为:虽然此律已由如前所说、具足功德的前辈大导师之首们完全阐明,但彼注释乃用锡兰岛居民之语言编撰著作,故对锡兰岛以外的他洲比丘众,不能带来任何义利,不能成就,不能完成。因此,将此注释使之与巴利理趣相顺,由名为佛吉祥(Buddhasiri)的长老劝请,现在(我)将开始著作。其中,‘注释’(saṃvaṇṇanā),即以此阐明义理,也就是义疏(aṭṭhakathā)。而该义疏,最初由结集法的长老们在结集三藏之后,依其阐明义理的方式,安立了诵出之道,故是经历三次结集、成为佛语义理阐明的论道。正是该义疏,由大玛欣德长老携至铜色岛(Tambapaṇṇi);后来,铜色岛的诸大长老为遮止异部邪见之混杂,以锡兰语安立之。故说‘由锡兰岛者’等。‘Sīhaḷa’(锡兰):因执取狮子(sīha)故为sīhaḷa,即狮子童子。因是由彼种族所生,铜色岛的刹帝利们居住于彼,故铜色岛也应知。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ porāṇaṭṭhakathāya anūnabhāvaṃ dassetvā idāni attano saṃvaṇṇanāya payojanavisesaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘saṃvaṇṇanā’’tiādimāha. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – kiñcāpi pubbācariyāsabhehi yathāvuttaguṇavisiṭṭhehi ayaṃ vinayo sabbaso vaṇṇito, tathāpi tesaṃ esā saṃvaṇṇanā sīhaḷadīpavāsīnaṃ bhāsāya saṅkhatattā racitattā dīpantare bhikkhujanassa sīhaḷadīpato aññadīpavāsino bhikkhugaṇassa kiñci atthaṃ payojanaṃ yasmā nābhisambhuṇāti na sampādeti na sādheti, tasmā imaṃ saṃvaṇṇanaṃ pāḷinayānurūpaṃ katvā buddhasirittherena ajjhiṭṭho idāni samārabhissanti. Tattha saṃvaṇṇiyati attho etāyāti saṃvaṇṇanā, aṭṭhakathā. Sā pana dhammasaṅgāhakattherehi paṭhamaṃ tīṇi piṭakāni saṅgāyitvā tassa atthavaṇṇanānurūpeneva vācanāmaggaṃ āropitattā tisso saṅgītiyo āruḷhoyeva buddhavacanassa atthasaṃvaṇṇanābhūto kathāmaggo. Soyeva ca mahāmahindattherena tambapaṇṇidīpaṃ ābhato, pacchā tambapaṇṇiyehi mahātherehi nikāyantaraladdhīhi saṅkarapariharaṇatthaṃ sīhaḷabhāsāya ṭhapito. Tenāha ‘‘sīhaḷadīpakenā’’tiādi. Sīhassa lānato gahaṇato sīhaḷo, sīhakumāro. Taṃvaṃsajātatāya tambapaṇṇidīpe khattiyānaṃ tesaṃ nivāsatāya tambapaṇṇidīpassapi sīhaḷabhāvo veditabbo, tasmiṃ sīhaḷadīpe bhūtattā sīhaḷadīpakena vākyena vacanena, sīhaḷabhāsāyāti vuttaṃ hoti.
“Pāḷinayānurūpaṃ”(与巴利理趣相符):即与巴利理趣相应,也就是转换为摩揭陀语的意思。“Ajjhesanaṃ”(劝请):即亲近应恭敬者之后,出于更崇高的目的而有所希求,是为劝请;也就是请求的意思。它与“samanussaranto”(正忆念)相关联。是谁的劝请呢?是名为佛吉祥的长老。“Buddhasiri”是一种称号、名号,那位名为佛吉祥者,他的劝请正以恭敬忆念,安放在心中。显示巴利原文
Pāḷinayānurūpanti pāḷinayassa anurūpaṃ katvā, māgadhabhāsāya parivattitvāti vuttaṃ hoti . Ajjhesananti garuṭṭhāniyaṃ payirupāsitvā garutaraṃ payojanaṃ uddissa abhipatthanā ajjhesanā, taṃ ajjhesanaṃ, āyācananti attho. Tassa ‘‘samanussaranto’’ti iminā sambandho. Kassa ajjhesananti āha ‘‘buddhasirivhayassa therassā’’ti. Buddhasirīti avhayo nāmaṃ yassa soyaṃ buddhasirivhayo, tassa, itthannāmassa therassa ajjhesanaṃ sammā ādarena samanussaranto hadaye ṭhapentoti attho.
现在,为了显示自己所做注释的方式,而说“而那个注释”等。其中应知词句关联:当他着手著作这部现在将说的注释时,将大义疏(Mahāaṭṭhakathā)作为此注释的主体——因为整个大义疏在此都应被采纳;并将大筏疏(Mahāpaccariya)中所说的裁决,以及同样在名为古伦迪(Kurundī)等著名义疏中所说的裁决,从中择取合理的义理而不舍弃,使之成为涵盖在内的“长老说”(theravāda),由此开始著作注释。在此,“义疏”(atthakathā)意为解说义理;其本身即是“aṭṭhakathā”,其中“ttha”转为“ṭṭha”,就如同“苦的逼迫义”(dukkhassa pīḷanaṭṭho)等中的用法。关于“Mahāpaccariyaṃ”(大筏疏):“paccari”意为筏,因坐于其上而作,故得此名。据说曾有一所名为古伦迪蔓(Kurundivalli)的寺院,因在该处写成,故称“古伦迪”。“ādi”一词则包含了盲暗义疏(Andhakaṭṭhakathā)和略义疏(Saṅkhepa)。显示巴利原文
Idāni attano saṃvaṇṇanāya karaṇappakāraṃ dassento ‘‘saṃvaṇṇanaṃ tañcā’’tiādimāha. Tattha tañca idāni vuccamānaṃ saṃvaṇṇanaṃ samārabhanto sakalāyapi mahāaṭṭhakathāya idha gahetabbato mahāaṭṭhakathaṃ tassā idāni vuccamānāya saṃvaṇṇanāya sarīraṃ katvā mahāpaccariyaṃ yo vinicchayo vutto, tatheva kurundīnāmādīsu vissutāsu aṭṭhakathāsu yo vinicchayo vutto, tatopi vinicchayato yuttamatthaṃ apariccajanto antogadhattheravādaṃ katvā saṃvaṇṇanaṃ samārabhissanti padatthasambandho veditabbo. Ettha ca attho kathiyati etāyāti atthakathā, sāyeva aṭṭhakathā tthakārassa ṭṭhakāraṃ katvā ‘‘dukkhassa pīḷanaṭṭho’’tiādīsu (paṭi. ma. 1.17; 2.8) viya. Mahāpaccariyanti ettha paccarīti uḷumpaṃ vuccati, tasmiṃ nisīditvā katattā tameva nāmaṃ jātaṃ. Kurundivallivihāro nāma atthi, tattha katattā kurundīti nāmaṃ jātanti vadanti. Ādisaddena andhakaṭṭhakathaṃ saṅkhepaṭṭhakathañca saṅgaṇhāti. Vissutāsūti sabbattha patthaṭāsu, pākaṭāsūti vuttaṃ hoti.
关于“正理义”(yuttamattha),这里是先从中级结节(Majjhimagaṇṭhipada)和小结节(Cūḷagaṇṭhipada)引述:“‘正理义’是指应解说处的正义,并非说那里也有不合理的义。”然而在大结节(Mahāgaṇṭhipada)中对此未作任何说明。但有人依据大义疏的体系,或依律的合理性,来说“正理义”。这看来似乎合理,因为在大筏疏等义疏中,对某些地方甚至对不合理的义理也作了说明。如果声称“我只依据义疏来作解说”,那么义疏中所宣说的诸长老主张便可能被视为外部之说;因此,作者为了将其纳入内部,便说“内含长老主张”,意思是也将长老的主张涵盖在内。“解说”一词在此表示后时行为的业格。而前面出现的“解说”一词,则应理解为与“正在开始”这一先时行为的业格关系相连。应知,在应说“sammā”之处,由于偈颂的结构,元音发生了缩短。显示巴利原文
Yuttamatthanti ettha tāva majjhimagaṇṭhipade cūḷagaṇṭhipade ca idaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘yuttamatthanti saṃvaṇṇetabbaṭṭhānassa yuttamatthaṃ, na pana tattha ayuttampi atthīti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti. Mahāgaṇṭhipade panettha na kiñci vuttaṃ. Kenaci pana ‘‘mahāaṭṭhakathānayena vinayayuttiyā vā yuttamattha’’nti vuttaṃ, taṃ yuttaṃ viya dissati mahāpaccariādīsupi katthaci ayuttassāpi atthassa upari vibhāvanato. ‘‘Aṭṭhakathaṃyeva gahetvā saṃvaṇṇanaṃ karissāmī’’ti vutte aṭṭhakathāsu vuttattheravādānaṃ bāhirabhāvo siyāti tepi antokattukāmo ‘‘antogadhatheravāda’’nti āha, theravādepi antokatvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Saṃvaṇṇananti aparakālakiriyāya kammaniddeso. Pubbe vuttaṃ tu ‘‘saṃvaṇṇana’’nti vacanaṃ tattheva ‘‘samārabhanto’’ti pubbakālakiriyāya kammabhāvena yojetabbaṃ. Sammāti vattabbe gāthābandhavasena rassabhāvo katoti veditabbo.
如此说明造论的方式之后,现在为了说明听众所应遵循的方法,而说“ta me”等语。这是说:现在所讲的我的这部注释——即法灯如来的法,也就是教法或圣典法——请那些长老、新学及中等比丘,以净信心恭敬地接受、供养,并依照所说的方法,由于具有利益,也依后文将说明的方式作为定量,生起信解,以喜悦相应之心,无有嫉妒,而仔细聆听、听闻。其中,“法灯”是指:法本身能驱散众生相续中的无明黑暗,故与灯相似,因此以法为灯者,即是世尊。这便是那位法灯如来的法。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ karaṇappakāraṃ dassetvā idāni sotūhi paṭipajjitabbavidhiṃ dassento ‘‘taṃ me’’tiādimāha. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – idāni vuccamānaṃ taṃ mama saṃvaṇṇanaṃ dhammapadīpassa tathāgatassa dhammaṃ sāsanadhammaṃ pāḷidhammaṃ vā sakkaccaṃ paṭimānayantā pūjentā thirehi sīlakkhandhādīhi samannāgatattā therā, acirapabbajitattā navā, tesaṃ majjhe bhavattā majjhimā ca bhikkhū pasannacittā yathāvuttanayena sappayojanattā upari vakkhamānavidhinā pamāṇattā ca saddahitvā pītisomanassayuttacittā issāpakatā ahutvā nisāmentu suṇantūti. Tattha dhammappadīpassāti dhammoyeva sattasantānesu mohandhakāravidhamanato padīpasadisattā padīpo assāti dhammapadīpo, bhagavā. Tassa dhammapadīpassa.
现在,为了说明自己这部注释的传承清净,并显示其定量性,而说“buddhena”等语。正如佛陀所说的法与律,佛陀的弟子们——如法将等——也同样如是了知;师子洲的诸注疏师,不舍弃那些佛弟子的意旨,于过去作了注疏。这便是此处的关联。其中,“法”包含经藏与论藏,“律”指整部律藏。至此,一切佛语都已指明,因为一切佛语依法律而分为二种。“所说”是指由世尊依圣典及义理而说。因为世尊没有未曾说明的句义,一切句的义理都已开示,故应知正是正自觉者开示了三藏的义理解释次第。实际上,世尊在各处所开示的种种教说,即是注疏。“如是了知”的意思是:正如佛陀所说,同样地,不毁坏一字一音,也不曲解意旨,而了知、通达。“不舍弃他们的意旨”是指不舍弃那些佛弟子的意旨。“作了注疏”是指作了诸注疏。有些地方可见“aṭṭhakathāmakaṃsu”的读法,其义相同,应知“ma”字母是因连音而加入的。复数的“aṭṭhakathā”则是包含了《大帕佳利》等注疏。显示巴利原文
Idāni attano saṃvaṇṇanāya āgamavisuddhiṃ dassetvā pamāṇabhāvaṃ dassento ‘‘buddhenā’’tiādimāha. Yatheva buddhena yo dhammo ca vinayo ca vutto, so tassa buddhassa yehi puttehi dhammasenāpatiādīhi tatheva ñāto, tesaṃ buddhaputtānaṃ matimaccajantā sīhaḷaṭṭhakathācariyā yasmā pure aṭṭhakathā akaṃsūti ayamettha sambandho. Tattha dhammoti suttābhidhamme saṅgaṇhāti, vinayoti sakalaṃ vinayapiṭakaṃ. Ettāvatā ca sabbampi buddhavacanaṃ niddiṭṭhaṃ hoti. Sakalañhi buddhavacanaṃ dhammavinayavasena duvidhaṃ hoti. Vuttoti pāḷito ca atthato ca buddhena bhagavatā vutto. Na hi bhagavatā abyākataṃ nāma tantipadaṃ atthi, sabbesaṃyeva attho kathito, tasmā sammāsambuddheneva tiṇṇaṃ piṭakānaṃ atthavaṇṇanākkamopi bhāsitoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tattha tattha bhagavatā pavattitā pakiṇṇakadesanāyeva hi aṭṭhakathā. Tatheva ñātoti yatheva buddhena vutto, tatheva ekapadampi ekakkharampi avināsetvā adhippāyañca avikopetvā ñāto viditoti attho. Tesaṃ matimaccajantāti tesaṃ buddhaputtānaṃ adhippāyaṃ apariccajantā. Aṭṭhakathā akaṃsūti aṭṭhakathāyo akaṃsu. Katthaci ‘‘aṭṭhakathāmakaṃsū’’ti pāṭho dissati, tatthāpi soyevattho, ma-kāro pana padasandhivasena āgatoti daṭṭhabbo. ‘‘Aṭṭhakathā’’ti bahuvacananiddesena mahāpaccariyādikaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.
“Tasmā”的意思是:因为他们不舍弃那些佛弟子的意旨,于过去作了注疏,所以。“Hi”只是小品词,因为“tasmā”一词本身已经表明了原因之义。如果注疏中所说的全部都是定量,那么其中因疏忽而写下的文字也会成为定量,因此说“除去疏忽之写”。其中,“疏忽之写”是指在后来将文字书写成册时,因疏忽而写下的错误文字。这是说:由于疏忽,未生起正念,而写下了类似在“不与取的前方便”中所说的“于真实、于虚假,皆为恶作”那样的文字,除去这些,其余一切都是定量。因为后文将说——显示巴利原文
Tasmāti yasmā tesaṃ buddhaputtānaṃ adhippāyaṃ avikopetvā pure aṭṭhakathā akaṃsu, tasmāti attho. Hīti nipātamattaṃ hetuatthassa ‘‘tasmā’’ti imināyeva pakāsitattā. Yadi aṭṭhakathāsu vuttaṃ sabbampi pamāṇaṃ, evaṃ sati tattha pamādalekhāpi pamāṇaṃ siyāti āha ‘‘vajjayitvāna pamādalekha’’nti. Tattha pamādalekhanti aparabhāge potthakāruḷhakāle pamajjitvā likhanavasena pavattaṃ pamādapāṭhaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – pamādena satiṃ apaccupaṭṭhapetvā adinnādānassa pubbapayoge ‘‘saccepi alikepi dukkaṭa’’nti vuttavacanasadisaṃ yaṃ likhitaṃ, taṃ vajjayitvā apanetvā sabbaṃ pamāṇanti. Vakkhati hi tattha –
然而,在《大注疏》中,无论是基于真实还是虚假,都只判为恶作,应知那是书写时的疏忽所致。因为在波罗夷的分位中,不与取的前方便并不存在名为恶作的罪。显示巴利原文
‘‘Mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana saccepi alikepi dukkaṭameva vuttaṃ, taṃ pamādalikhitanti veditabbaṃ. Na hi adinnādānassa pubbapayoge pācittiyaṭṭhāne dukkaṭaṃ nāma atthī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.94).
谁堪为定量?答:“即于此教法中,于诸学处具足恭敬的智者。”若问:“yasmā”一词在此处作何关联?对此,在《大结节》与《结节》中均未作任何说明,但在《中结节》与《小结节》中则有这样的表述:“因为是定量,故请以净信心谛听。”应如此看待其关联。金刚觉长老将“因为注疏中所说为定量,故此处所说亦为定量”作为补足文句而说出。其中,此处的“此”应理解为“此《一切欢喜》”。显示巴利原文
Kesaṃ pamāṇanti āha ‘‘sikkhāsu sagāravānaṃ idha paṇḍitāna’’nti. Idhāti imasmiṃ sāsane. Puna ‘‘yasmā’’ti vacanassa ko sambandhoti ce? Ettha tāva mahāgaṇṭhipade gaṇṭhipade ca na kiñci vuttaṃ, majjhimagaṇṭhipade pana cūḷagaṇṭhipade ca idaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘yasmā pamāṇaṃ, tasmā nisāmentu pasannacittā’’ti. Evamassa sambandho daṭṭhabbo. Yasmā aṭṭhakathāsu vuttaṃ pamāṇaṃ, tasmā idha vuttampi pamāṇamevāti pāṭhasesaṃ katvā vajirabuddhitthero vadati. Tattha idhāti imissā samantapāsādikāyāti attho gahetabbo.
于此,为了显示:通过首先所述的关联,已经确立了‘因为’一词在诸注疏中所说的一切皆是定量,因此现在所论述的释文,虽仅在言辞上有所不同,但在义理上即等同于注疏本身,故有此言:‘且那只是言辞的变换’等。若问:那么依据之后所述的关联,此处所说为何也是定量呢?为了显示:因为除了言辞有异之外,这本身就是注疏,故由此成为定量,而说‘且那只是言辞的变换’等。在《结文》中,将这种关联显示得非常混乱且难以理解,然而佛音尊者本是言辞明晰之人。他实在不应当如此混乱地表述,因此,我们将依照他的真实意旨,以毫不混乱、易于理解的方式,仅仅依据如实存在的关联来加以显示。如何显示呢?应当看到此处的关系是这样的:因为注疏中所说是定量,所以应当恭敬地学习。如果问:注疏中所说固然是定量,但现今所宣说的这部著作,为何也应当恭敬地学习呢?因此说道:‘且那只是言辞的变换,舍弃了……’等。其含义是:因为注疏中所说是定量,又因为这注释本身也只是以舍弃其他语言等为特点,但在意义上并无不同,且正因如此,它也将成为定量,所以应当以恭敬、尊重之心来学习。应当如此理解。显示巴利原文
Tattha ‘‘yasmā’’ti vacanassa paṭhamaṃ vuttasambandhavasena aṭṭhakathāsu vuttaṃ sabbampi pamāṇanti sādhitattā idāni vuccamānāpi saṃvaṇṇanā kevalaṃ vacanamatteneva bhinnā, atthato pana aṭṭhakathāyevāti dassetuṃ ‘‘tato ca bhāsantaramevā’’tiādimāha. Pacchā vuttasambandhavasena pana idha vuttampi kasmā pamāṇanti ce? Yasmā vacanamattaṃ ṭhapetvā esāpi aṭṭhakathāyeva, tasmā pamāṇanti dassetuṃ ‘‘tato ca bhāsantaramevā’’tiādimāha. Evamākulaṃ dubbiññeyyasabhāvañca katvā gaṇṭhipadesu sambandho dassito, anākulavacano ca bhadantabuddhaghosācariyo. Na hi so evamākulaṃ katvā vattumarahati, tasmā yathādhippetamatthamanākulaṃ suviññeyyañca katvā yathāṭhitassa sambandhavaseneva dassayissāma. Kathaṃ? Yasmā aṭṭhakathāsu vuttaṃ pamāṇaṃ, tasmā sakkaccaṃ anusikkhitabbāti evamettha sambandho daṭṭhabbo. Yadi nāma aṭṭhakathāsu vuttaṃ pamāṇaṃ, ayaṃ pana idāni vuccamānā kasmā sakkaccaṃ anusikkhitabbāti āha ‘‘tato ca bhāsantarameva hitvā’’tiādi. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yasmā aṭṭhakathāsu vuttaṃ pamāṇaṃ, yasmā ca ayaṃ saṃvaṇṇanāpi bhāsantarapariccāgādimattavisiṭṭhā, atthato pana abhinnāva, tatoyeva ca pamāṇabhūtā hessati, tasmā sakkaccaṃ ādaraṃ katvā anusikkhitabbāti. Tathā hi porāṇaṭṭhakathānaṃ pamāṇabhāvo, imissā ca saṃvaṇṇanāya bhāsantarapariccāgādimattavisiṭṭhāya atthato tato abhinnabhāvoti ubhayampetaṃ sakkaccaṃ anusikkhitabbabhāvahetūti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Na hi kevalaṃ porāṇaṭṭhakathānaṃ satipi pamāṇabhāve ayaṃ saṃvaṇṇanā tato bhinnā atthato aññāyeva ca sakkaccaṃ anusikkhitabbāti vattumarahati, nāpi imissā saṃvaṇṇanāya tatoabhinnabhāvepi porāṇaṭṭhakathānaṃ asati pamāṇabhāve ayaṃ saṃvaṇṇanā sakkaccaṃ anusikkhitabbāti vattuṃ yuttarūpā hoti, tasmā yathāvuttanayena ubhayampetaṃ sakkaccaṃ anusikkhitabbabhāvahetūti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“从那里”指从注释书。“只是转换语言而舍弃”意即去除了犹如紧身衣的僧伽罗语。“并概括了详细的方法”是指:将古注释书中上方也将提及、并在各处详加阐述的内容,例如“以白四甘马、不可动摇、堪任处所之具足戒受具足戒的比丘”(律藏·波罗夷45)此处,如同对表白等四种羯磨的详细解说那样,将类似的详细方法加以浓缩后再作注释。同样地,他将说:显示巴利原文
Tatoti aṭṭhakathāto. Bhāsantarameva hitvāti kañcukasadisaṃ sīhaḷabhāsaṃ apanetvā. Vitthāramaggañca samāsayitvāti porāṇaṭṭhakathāsu upari vuccamānampi ānetvā tattha tattha papañcitaṃ ‘‘ñatticatutthena kammena akuppena ṭhānārahena upasampannoti bhikkhū’’ti (pārā. 45) ettha apalokanādīnaṃ catunnampi kammānaṃ vitthārakathā viya tādisaṃ vitthāramaggaṃ saṅkhipitvā vaṇṇayissāmāti adhippāyo. Tathā hi vakkhati –
“在此,白四甘马只出现了一种,但立足于此,导出四种僧羯磨后,应当详细解说”,所有注释书都这样说。这些羯磨依“表白羯磨、白一羯磨、白二甘马、白四甘马”的顺序排列,引用《犍度》和《附随》末尾的《羯磨分别》中的巴利文后详细解说。我们将在《附随》末尾的《羯磨分别》中注释它们。这样一来,第一波罗夷的注释便不会过于繁重,对如实存在的巴利文的注释也容易理解,那些地方也不致空缺,因此我们只作逐词注释。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ettha ca ñatticatutthakammaṃ ekameva āgataṃ, imasmiṃ pana ṭhāne ṭhatvā cattāri saṅghakammāni nīharitvā vitthārato kathetabbānīti sabbaaṭṭhakathāsu vuttaṃ, tāni ca ‘apalokanakammaṃ ñattikammaṃ ñattidutiyakammaṃ ñatticatutthakamma’nti paṭipāṭiyā ṭhapetvā vitthārena khandhakato parivārāvasāne kammavibhaṅgato ca pāḷiṃ āharitvā kathitāni. Tāni mayaṃ parivārāvasāne kammavibhaṅgeyeva vaṇṇayissāma. Evañhi sati paṭhamapārājikavaṇṇanā ca na bhāriyā bhavissati, yathāṭhitāya ca pāḷiyā vaṇṇanā suviññeyyā bhavissati, tāni ca ṭhānāni asuññāni bhavissanti, tasmā anupadavaṇṇanameva karomā’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.45 bhikkhupadabhājanīyavaṇṇanā).
“不遗漏一切决断”是指:不遗漏也不剩下各个注释书中所说的一切决断,即不作丝毫舍弃。“以适合注释的形式,不遗漏按次第而来的巴利文而注释,并将僧伽罗注释书中注释于不合适之处的内容,安置于恰当之处予以注释”,因此说“不偏离丝毫传承次第”,意即:不逾越巴利文的丝毫次第,而依次注释。显示巴利原文
Vinicchayaṃsabbamasesayitvāti taṃtaṃaṭṭhakathāsu vuttaṃ sabbampi vinicchayaṃ asesayitvā sesaṃ akatvā, kiñcimattampi apariccajitvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Vaṇṇituṃ yuttarūpaṃ hutvā anukkamena āgataṃ pāḷiṃ apariccajitvā saṃvaṇṇanato sīhaḷaṭṭhakathāsu ayuttaṭṭhāne vaṇṇitaṃ yathāṭhāneyeva saṃvaṇṇanato ca vuttaṃ ‘‘tantikkamaṃ kiñci avokkamitvā’’ti, kiñci pāḷikkamaṃ anatikkamitvā anukkameneva vaṇṇayissāmāti adhippāyo.
“诸经句的意义”,即经藏巴利文所出语句的意义。在僧伽罗注释书中,说了“这是诸经师的责任”之后,对于未说到的部分——如《韦兰若篇》等中的禅论、入出息念、正定等经句的意义,将随顺诸经,完全阐明。“将是”意即将是,或可解为“将被做”。在此,第一种释义中,应知是以注释为主语的同一主语关系:完成了舍弃其他语言等四种工作后,这部阐明经句意义的注释将会是。在后一种释义中,应知是以尊者为同一主语关系:做了前面所说的舍弃其他语言等之后,这部阐明经句意义的注释将由我们作。“注释也”在此取了“也”字,在《小结文》中说:“因此也应当恭敬地学习,应如此连接。”其意思是:它总括了前面所说的特殊目的与标准性。而在《中结文》中,则说了“因此也应当恭敬地学习”这样的关系。此处意思是:这个注释不仅将会是,而且应当被学习,总括了这一意思。于此,我们的意见是:“也”字的意义也应只依如实存在的方式来理解。此处意思是:因为注释书中所说是标准,又因为这注释也与注释书无别,将成为标准本身,所以应当恭敬地学习。显示巴利原文
Suttantikānaṃ vacanānamatthanti suttantapāḷiyaṃ āgatānampi vacanānamatthaṃ. Sīhaḷaṭṭhakathāsu ‘‘suttantikānaṃ bhāro’’ti vatvā avuttānampi verañjakaṇḍādīsu jhānakathāānāpānassatisamaādhiādīnaṃ suttantavacanānamatthaṃ taṃtaṃsuttānurūpaṃ sabbaso paridīpayissāmīti adhippāyo. Hessatīti bhavissati, kariyissatīti vā attho. Ettha ca paṭhamasmiṃ atthavikappe bhāsantarapariccāgādikaṃ catubbidhaṃ kiccaṃ nipphādetvā suttantikānaṃ vacanānamatthaṃ paridīpayantī ayaṃ vaṇṇanā bhavissatīti vaṇṇanāya vasena samānakattukatā veditabbā. Pacchimasmiṃ atthavikappe pana heṭṭhāvuttabhāsantarapariccāgādiṃ katvā suttantikānaṃ vacanānamatthaṃ paridīpayantī ayaṃ vaṇṇanā amhehi kariyissatīti evaṃ ācariyavasena samānakattukatā veditabbā. Vaṇṇanāpīti ettha apisaddaṃ gahetvā ‘‘tasmāpi sakkaccaṃ anusikkhitabbāti yojetabba’’nti cūḷagaṇṭhipade vuttaṃ. Tattha pubbe vuttappayojanavisesaṃ pamāṇabhāvañca sampiṇḍetīti adhippāyo. Majjhimagaṇṭhipade pana ‘‘tasmā sakkaccaṃ anusikkhitabbāpī’’ti sambandho vutto. Ettha pana na kevalaṃ ayaṃ vaṇṇanā hessati, atha kho anusikkhitabbāpīti imamatthaṃ sampiṇḍetīti adhippāyo. Etthāpi yathāṭhitavaseneva apisaddassa attho gahetabboti amhākaṃ khanti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yasmā aṭṭhakathāsu vuttaṃ pamāṇaṃ, yasmā ca ayaṃ vaṇṇanāpi tato abhinnattā pamāṇabhūtāyeva hessati, tasmā sakkaccaṃ anusikkhitabbāti.
外部因缘的讲述显示巴利原文
Bāhiranidānakathā
如今,由于已承诺“我将注释那(律藏)”,为了如所承诺地作律藏的注释,而因律藏有别解脱律仪、断律仪等多种类别,在此为了显示应先确定所要注释的律藏,而说“其中”等语。其中,“其中”是指那些偈颂之中。“tāva”一词应视为“首先”之意,由此表明了先确定律藏,然后再予以注释。“应当确定”即应当限定。由此而说,意思是:因为应当确定,所以说出了“所谓律藏”等限定之语。“它的”指律藏的。“纲目”即总说,因为它处于能产生诸解释词的位置,如同母亲一般,故称为纲目。显示巴利原文
Idāni ‘‘taṃ vaṇṇayissaṃ vinaya’’nti paṭiññātattā yathāpaṭiññātavinayasaṃvaṇṇanaṃ kattukāmo saṃvaravinayapahānavinayādivasena vinayassa bahuvidhattā idha saṃvaṇṇetabbabhāvena adhippeto tāva vinayo vavatthapetabboti dassento āha ‘‘tatthā’’tiādi. Tattha tatthāti tāsu gāthāsu. Tāva-saddo paṭhamanti imasmiṃ atthe daṭṭhabbo. Tena paṭhamaṃ vinayaṃ vavatthapetvā pacchā tassa vaṇṇanaṃ karissāmīti dīpeti. Vavatthapetabboti niyametabbo. Tenetaṃ vuccatīti yasmā vavatthapetabbo, tena hetunā etaṃ ‘‘vinayo nāmā’’tiādikaṃ niyāmakavacanaṃ vuccatīti attho. Assāti vinayassa. Mātikāti uddeso. So hi niddesapadānaṃ jananīṭhāne ṭhitattā mātā viyāti mātikāti vuccati.
现在,为显示所要注释的内容,先安立总纲,而说“由谁所说”等语。此处意为:这部以“一时,佛陀、世尊住在韦兰阇”等缘起文句所庄严的律藏,是由谁所说、于何时所说、因何因缘所说、由谁所持诵、由谁所传来、在哪些人之中确立——在讲述了如上这一切之后,将接着通过多种方式来显示“一时”等文句的意义,从而对律藏进行义解。在此,虽然也想仅就“一时,佛陀、世尊”等缘起文句来说明“由谁所说、何时、何故”这些内容,但并未将其单独割裂,因为依据“以缘起为初善,以结语‘他如此说’为後善”的说法,缘起与结语也随顺于大师的教说,由此亦包含在教说之内。所以,缘起同样属于律藏正文,因此也将“由谁所说、何时、何故”的问题,仅作为与律藏相关的内容而立为总纲。正是通过总纲,所标示的“这个”——即整部律藏——得以在一切处建立起总体的关联。显示巴利原文
Idāni vaṇṇetabbamatthaṃ mātikaṃ ṭhapetvā dassento āha ‘‘vuttaṃ yenā’’tiādi. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – etaṃ ‘‘tena samayena buddho bhagavā verañjāyaṃ viharatī’’tiādinidānavacanapaṭimaṇḍitaṃ vinayapiṭakaṃ yena puggalena vuttaṃ, yasmiṃ kāle vuttaṃ, yasmā kāraṇā vuttaṃ, yena dhāritaṃ, yena ca ābhataṃ, yesu patiṭṭhitaṃ, etaṃ yathāvuttavidhānaṃ vatvā tato ‘‘tena samayenā’’tiādipāṭhassa atthaṃ anekappakārato dassayanto vinayassa atthavaṇṇanaṃ karissāmīti. Ettha ca ‘‘vuttaṃ yena yadā yasmā’’ti idaṃ vacanaṃ ‘‘tena samayena buddho bhagavā’’tiādinidānavacanamattaṃ apekkhitvā vattukāmopi visuṃ avatvā ‘‘nidānena ādikalyāṇaṃ, ‘idamavocā’ti nigamanena pariyosānakalyāṇa’’nti ca vacanato nidānanigamanānipi satthudesanāya anuvidhānattā tadantogadhānevāti nidānassapi vinayapāḷiyaṃyeva antogadhattā ‘‘vuttaṃ yena yadā yasmā’’ti idampi vinayapiṭakasambandhaṃyeva katvā mātikaṃ ṭhapesi. Mātikāya hi ‘‘eta’’nti vuttaṃ vinayapiṭakaṃyeva sāmaññato sabbattha sambandhamupagacchati.
现在,为将其单独提取出来进行显示,而说“其中,由谁所说”等语。此处“其中”,是指那些总纲的指示内容。那么,为何是特地对这一句话而说呢?解释为:“因为此”等等。“此”是指“一时,佛陀、世尊”等文句。其中“Hi”字应理解为“因为”之意,缘由是:这并非佛陀、世尊的自证现量之语。“非自证现量之语”,意思是并非世尊亲自现见而说,意旨这不是世尊亲口宣说的话。曾有人说:“‘非自证现量之语’,意旨不是当机直接所说的话。”而在《难点释》中记载:“‘非自证现量之语’,意为并非世尊在世时所说的话。”这二者义理上是相同的。现在,在提出五问之后,为次第回答前面所述的问题,而说“由具寿”等语。以这些语句限定人物,以“而此”等语句限定时间。而此由具寿优波离所说的话,从时间上来说,是在第一次结集时所诵出的,这就是它的含义。显示巴利原文
Idāni pana taṃ visuṃ nīharitvā dassento ‘‘tattha vuttaṃ yenā’’tiādimāha. Tattha tatthāti tesu mātikāpadesu. Atha kasmā idameva vacanaṃ sandhāya vuttanti āha ‘‘idañhī’’tiādi. Idanti ‘‘tena samayena buddho bhagavā’’tiādivacanaṃ . Hi-saddo yasmāti atthe daṭṭhabbo, yasmā buddhassa bhagavato attapaccakkhavacanaṃ na hoti, tasmāti vuttaṃ hoti. Attapaccakkhavacanaṃ na hotīti attano paccakkhaṃ katvā vuttavacanaṃ na hoti, bhagavatā vuttavacanaṃ na hotīti adhippāyo. ‘‘Attapaccakkhavacanaṃ na hotīti āhacca bhāsitaṃ na hotīti adhippāyo’’ti kenaci vuttaṃ. Gaṇṭhipade pana ‘‘attapaccakkhavacanaṃ na hotīti attano dharamānakāle vuttavacanaṃ na hotī’’ti likhitaṃ. Tadubhayampi atthato samānameva. Idāni pañhakaraṇaṃ vatvā anukkamena yathāvuttapañhavissajjanaṃ karonto ‘‘āyasmatā’’tiādimāha. Iminā puggalaṃ niyameti, ‘‘tañcā’’tiādinā kālaṃ niyameti. Tañca upālittherena vuttavacanaṃ kālato paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikāle vuttanti attho.
第一次大结集语释显示巴利原文
Paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā
现在,为显示这第一次大结集,并说明在此处言及它的缘由,而说“所谓第一次大结集,……应当了知”等语。“所谓第一次大结集”中的“Ca”字,在类似场合有汇集应说之事的功用,表示那是在第一次结集之时所说的,而这第一次大结集应当如此了知。或者,“Ca”字有发起开端的意涵。“发起开端”,即是语句的起首。这是诸著述者的惯例:在讲述了一些内容后,再开始讲述其他内容时,使用“Ca”字。然而,曾有人说:“‘所谓第一次大结集’中的‘Ca’字,有多余之义,由此表示还有其他。”这恰恰显示了他对著作次第的不精通。因为在此处,并不能通过“Ca”字来知解“有余”的意思。如果在此处,“Ca”字确被意旨为“有余”这一含义,那么原本就不该使用它,因为仅凭“第一”这个词,就已经表明了还有其他如第二等结集的存在。正如相对于“长”等而用“短”等词一般,这是相对于第二等而使用“第一”一词。将因种种因缘而于各处所教导和制定的、分散的法与律汇集一处,进行唱诵宣说,这称为“结集”。因此,这也包含了那些为了连接各个学处以及经典的始末与中间部分,而由结集者添加的话语。因其境界广大且堪受尊敬,故称为“大”。显示巴利原文
Idāni taṃ paṭhamamahāsaṅgītiṃ dassetukāmo tassā tantiāruḷhāya idha vacane kāraṇaṃ dassento ‘‘paṭhamamahāsaṅgīti nāma cesā…pe… veditabbā’’ti āha. Paṭhamamahāsaṅgīti nāma cesāti ca-saddo īdisesu ṭhānesu vattabbasampiṇḍanattho, tañca paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikāle vuttaṃ, esā ca paṭhamamahāsaṅgīti evaṃ veditabbāti vuttaṃ hoti. Upaññāsattho vā ca-saddo. Upaññāsoti ca vākyārambho vuccati. Esā hi ganthakārānaṃ pakati, yadidaṃ kiñci vatvā puna paraṃ vattumārabhantānaṃ casaddappayogo. Yaṃ pana kenaci vuttaṃ ‘‘paṭhamamahāsaṅgīti nāma cāti ettha ca-saddo atirekattho, tena aññāpi atthīti dīpetī’’ti. Tadeva tassa ganthakkame akovidataṃ dasseti. Na hettha casaddena atirekattho viññāyati. Yadi cettha etadatthoyeva ca-kāro adhippeto siyā, evaṃ sati na kattabboyeva paṭhamasaddeneva aññāsaṃ dutiyādisaṅgītīnampi atthibhāvassa dīpitattā. Dutiyādiṃ upādāya hi paṭhamasaddappayogo dīghādiṃ upādāya rassādisaddappayogo viya. Yathāpaccayaṃ tattha tattha desitattā paññattattā ca vippakiṇṇānaṃ dhammavinayānaṃ saṅgahetvā gāyanaṃ kathanaṃ saṅgīti. Etena taṃtaṃsikkhāpadānaṃ suttānañca ādipariyosānesu antarantarā ca sambandhavasena ṭhapitaṃ saṅgītikāravacanaṃ saṅgahitaṃ hoti. Mahāvisayattā pūjanīyattā ca mahatī saṅgīti mahāsaṅgīti, paṭhamā mahāsaṅgīti paṭhamamahāsaṅgīti. Nidānakosallatthanti nidadāti desanaṃ desakālādivasena aviditaṃ viditaṃ katvā nidassetīti nidānaṃ, tattha kosallaṃ nidānakosallaṃ, tadatthanti attho.
虽然世尊也有其他能令众生获得无上见、皈依等利益的行事,但由于与「佛陀应令众生觉悟」这一本愿相符,故能成为使应调伏者证得道果之因的行事,才是究竟意义上的佛陀事业,因此说「以转法轮为始」。其中,信根等诸法本身由于能转动的意义而称为「轮」,故为「法轮」。又或,「轮」意为教令,因其本身不离于法,所以既是法也是轮,故称「法轮」;因其以法、以正理而转动,故也称「法轮」。如所说:显示巴利原文
Sattānaṃ dassanānuttariyasaraṇādipaṭilābhahetubhūtāsu vijjamānāsupi aññāsu bhagavato kiriyāsu ‘‘buddho bodheyya’’nti paṭiññāya anulomanato veneyyānaṃ maggaphaluppattihetubhūtā kiriyā nippariyāyena buddhakiccanti āha ‘‘dhammacakkappavattanañhi ādiṃ katvā’’ti. Tattha saddhindriyādidhammoyeva pavattanaṭṭhena cakkanti dhammacakkaṃ. Atha vā cakkanti āṇā, dhammato anapetattā dhammañca taṃ cakkañcāti dhammacakkaṃ, dhammena ñāyena cakkantipi dhammacakkaṃ. Yathāha –
「既是法又是轮,故为法轮;既是轮又是法,故为法轮;以法而转动,故为法轮;以法行而转动,故为法轮」等(《无碍解道》2.40)。显示巴利原文
‘‘Dhammañca pavatteti cakkañcāti dhammacakkaṃ, cakkañca pavatteti dhammañcāti dhammacakkaṃ, dhammena pavattetīti dhammacakkaṃ, dhammacariyāya pavattetīti dhammacakka’’ntiādi (paṭi. ma. 2.40).
「已作佛事」:指已完成、已办妥的佛事,与此处这位已作佛事的世尊、世间之主相关联。由此表明,任何佛陀所应作之事皆已无有剩余。正因如此,彼世尊才入于般涅槃。难道由弟子们所调伏的有情,不就是由世尊所调伏的吗?同样地,弟子所说之经也被称为佛语,那么,难道还有弟子应调伏者尚未被调伏吗?这并无过失,因为调伏他们的方法早已安立在弟子之中。因此他说:显示巴利原文
Katabuddhakicceti kataṃ pariniṭṭhāpitaṃ buddhakiccaṃ yena, tasmiṃ katabuddhakicce bhagavati lokanātheti sambandho. Etena buddhakattabbassa kassacipi asesitabhāvaṃ dasseti. Tatoyeva hi so bhagavā parinibbutoti. Nanu ca sāvakehi vinītāpi vineyyā bhagavatāyeva vinītā honti, tathā hi sāvakabhāsitaṃ suttaṃ buddhavacananti vuccati, sāvakavineyyā ca na tāva vinītāti? Nāyaṃ doso tesaṃ vinayanūpāyassa sāvakesu ṭhapitattā. Tenevāha –
“波旬,只要比丘们尚未成为贤能、善调伏、无畏、多闻、通达法义、持法者、持律者、持论母者,未能以正法善加折伏已生起的他宗之说,宣说具足神变的法,我便不般涅槃。”等(长部2.168)。显示巴利原文
‘‘Na tāvāhaṃ pāpima parinibbāyissāmi, yāva na bhikkhū viyattā vinītā visāradā bahussutā āgatāgamā dhammadharā vinayadharā mātikādharā uppannaṃ parappavādaṃ sahadhammena suniggahitaṃ niggahetvā sappāṭihāriyaṃ dhammaṃ desessantī’’tiādi (dī. ni. 2.168).
所谓无依止涅槃因,即因缘业结净除,则是因缘。这里因缘即障碍根除,色法已除。此因缘由烦恼业染习灭尽,乃涅槃成就之根本。以业及行习烦恼灭尽为涅槃依止。此处涅槃依止意指涅槃之本体,以此为所依止,起因及作用俱可见。所谓圆满涅槃乃在涅槃处地、所缘及其因缘聚合之意。僧团长老即具资格长老所称。谓僧众规模若何时?称有一千七百位比丘。恒常对应此数,如“天子家族”等。如此时规模正是长老所与之规模。一时维卢伽村,因感受障碍消失而生信心,听闻“世尊涅槃不远矣”后,在来方比丘中一名比丘转念缺席情况,无其他,故人数按数计算无误。阿耆达大长老为传法集律,令比丘们发起精进事迹。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kusinārāya’’ntiādinā bhagavato parinibbutadesakālavisesadassanaṃ, ‘‘aparinibbuto bhagavā’’ti gāhassa micchābhāvadassanatthaṃ loke jātasaṃvaḍḍhabhāvadassanatthañca. Tathā hi manussabhāvassa supākaṭakaraṇatthaṃ mahābodhisattā carimabhave dārapariggahādīnipi karontīti. Kusinārāyanti evaṃnāmake nagare. Samīpatthe cetaṃ bhummavacanaṃ. Upavattane mallānaṃ sālavaneti tassa nagarassa upavattanabhūtaṃ mallarājūnaṃ sālavanuyyānaṃ dasseti. Tattha nagaraṃ pavisitukāmā uyyānato upecca vattanti gacchanti etenāti upavattananti sālavanaṃ vuccati. Yathā hi anurādhapurassa thūpārāmo dakkhiṇapacchimadisāyaṃ, evaṃ taṃ uyyānaṃ kusinārāya dakkhiṇapacchimadisāya hoti. Yathā ca thūpārāmato dakkhiṇadvārena nagaraṃ pavisanamaggo pācīnamukho gantvā uttarena nivattati, evaṃ uyyānato sālapanti pācīnamukhā gantvā uttarena nivattā, tasmā taṃ ‘‘upavattana’’nti vuccati. Yamakasālānamantareti yamakasālānaṃ vemajjhe. Tattha kira bhagavato paññattassa parinibbānamañcassa ekā sālapanti sīsabhāge hoti, ekā pādabhāge, tatrāpi eko taruṇasālo sīsabhāgassa āsanno hoti, eko pādabhāgassa, tasmā ‘‘yamakasālānamantare’’ti vuttaṃ. Api ca ‘‘yamakasālā nāma mūlakkhandhaviṭapapattehi aññamaññaṃ saṃsibbetvā ṭhitasālā’’tipi mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ.
『于无余涅槃界』——「执取」者,即以业与烦恼所执取之义,指果报诸蕴及因故[所摄之]色。然而,此执取在以涅槃证得中通过镇伏烦恼、行、死魔而未被舍弃;于此,则因镇伏蕴魔与死魔而被彻底舍尽,故此名为「无余涅槃界」——以「此中无有余之执取」而得此称。此处「涅槃界」所意指者,乃单纯之寂灭;此处以第七格表示如是状态之特征。「于般涅槃时」——指般涅槃之处所,或此第七格为表示因缘之用法,意为「因般涅槃而聚集者」。「僧团之长老」即「僧团长老」。问:此僧团有多少人数?故说「七十万比丘」。此类语境中,因常需对扩充说明,故必然构成复合词,如「提婆达多的大家族」之例。「七十万比丘」,即僧团长老们之七十万比丘。彼时「已集合之比丘有多少」,实难以数量衡量。盖自竹林村[世尊]以禅定压制病苦以来,诸比丘听闻「世尊不久将般涅槃」,从各处纷纷前来,无有一位比丘离去,故僧团之数超越计算。具寿大迦叶为令比丘们生起结集法与律之热情——此为上下文之关联。显示巴利原文
Anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyāti upādīyate kammakilesehīti upādi, vipākakkhandhā kaṭattā ca rūpaṃ. So pana upādi kilesābhisaṅkhāramāranimmathanena nibbānappattiyaṃ anossaṭṭho, idha khandhamaccumāranimmathanena ossaṭṭho nisesitoti ayaṃ anupādisesā nibbānadhātu natthi etissā upādisesoti katvā. Nibbānadhātūti cettha nibbutimattaṃ adhippetaṃ, itthambhūtalakkhaṇe cāyaṃ karaṇaniddeso. Parinibbāneti parinibbānaṭṭhāne, nimittatthe vā bhummavacanaṃ, parinibbānahetu sannipatitānanti attho. Saṅghassa thero saṅghatthero. So pana saṅgho kiṃparimāṇoti āha ‘‘sattannaṃ bhikkhusatasahassāna’’nti. Niccasāpekkhattā hi īdisesu samāso hotiyeva yathā ‘‘devadattassa garukula’’nti. Sattannaṃ bhikkhusatasahassānanti ca saṅghattherānaṃyeva sattannaṃ bhikkhusatasahassānaṃ. Tadā hi ‘‘sannipatitā bhikkhū ettakā’’ti pamāṇarahitā. Tathā hi veḷuvagāme vedanāvikkhambhanato paṭṭhāya ‘‘na cirena bhagavā parinibbāyissatī’’ti sutvā tato tato āgatesu bhikkhūsu ekabhikkhupi pakkanto nāma natthi, tasmā gaṇanaṃ vītivatto saṅgho ahosi. Āyasmā mahākassapo dhammavinayasaṅgāyanatthaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ ussāhaṃ janesīti sambandho.
此处,大迦叶意指因具足广大戒蕴等功德,故名大迦叶。又,因为有拘摩罗迦叶长老的缘故,这位大长老才被称为大迦叶。那么,尊者大迦叶为何发起精进,以结集法与律呢?答言:是为了结集佛陀的教法。所谓“七日”,是指佛般涅槃后的第七日,即在佛般涅槃后的七日之时进行集会。这就是所说的“佛般涅槃后七日”。那位名唤苏跋陀的老出家比丘,因老年出家,故称老出家。苏跋陀以“阿兰陀,尊者”等语作如是言。在佛般涅槃后,苏跋陀与五百余位比丘聚集在拘尸那罗的清净广场,见佛涅槃而心生忧伤,便说出了那样的话。显示巴利原文
Tattha mahākassapoti mahantehi sīlakkhandhādīhi samannāgatattā mahanto kassapoti mahākassapo, apica kumārakassapattheraṃ upādāya ayaṃ mahāthero ‘‘mahākassapo’’ti vuccati. Atha kimatthaṃ āyasmā mahākassapo dhammavinayasaṅgāyanatthaṃ ussāhaṃ janesīti āha ‘‘sattāhaparinibbute’’tiādi. Satta ahāni samāhaṭāni sattāhaṃ, sattāhaṃ parinibbutassa assāti sattāhaparinibbuto, bhagavā, tasmiṃ sattāhaparinibbute bhagavati, bhagavato parinibbānadivasato paṭṭhāya sattāhe vītivatteti vuttaṃ hoti. Subhaddena vuḍḍhapabbajitena vuttavacanaṃ samanussarantoti sambandho. Tattha subhaddoti tassa nāmaṃ, vuḍḍhakāle pana pabbajitattā vuḍḍhapabbajitoti vuccati. ‘‘Alaṃ āvuso’’tiādinā tena vuttavacanaṃ nidasseti. So hi sattāhaparinibbute bhagavati āyasmatā mahākassapattherena saddhiṃ pāvāya kusināraṃ addhānamaggappaṭipannesu pañcamattesu bhikkhusatesu avītarāge bhikkhū antarāmagge diṭṭhaājīvakassa santikā bhagavato parinibbānaṃ sutvā pattacīvarāni chaḍḍetvā bāhā paggayha nānappakāraṃ paridevante disvā evamāha.
为何他这样说?因为对世尊怀有嗔恨。据说,在《犍度》(《大品》303)中记载,当世尊从拘尸那罗出发,与一千二百五十位比丘一同前往阿菟摩时,这位曾是理发师、年老出家的苏跋陀,在阿菟摩的事缘中,听说“世尊来了”,便在他到来时,对站在沙弥地的两个儿子说:“孩子们,听说世尊与一千二百五十位比丘组成的大僧团一起来阿菟摩了。孩子们,你们拿着剃刀用具和量器,挨家挨户地巡行,收集盐、油、米和嚼食,等世尊来了,我要供养粥。”他们照做了。当世尊到达阿菟摩,进入谷仓后,苏跋陀在傍晚时分走到村口,招呼人们,乞求手工活,说:“请给我一点手工活。”当被问“尊者,我们做什么?”时,他说:“你们拿这个和那个。”让人取来所有器具,在寺院里砌了灶,自己穿上一件黑色袈裟,披上同样的一件,整夜指挥着“做这个,做那个”,花费了十万钱,让人准备了食物粥和蜜丸。所谓食物粥,是吃了之后要喝的粥,其中加入了酥油、蜂蜜、糖蜜、鱼、肉、花、果汁等一切可嚼食之物,适合想嬉戏者涂抹头部,香气芬芳。显示巴利原文
Kasmā pana so evamāha? Bhagavati āghātena. Ayaṃ kira so khandhake (mahāva. 303) āgate ātumāvatthusmiṃ nahāpitapubbako vuḍḍhapabbajito bhagavati kusinārato nikkhamitvā aḍḍhateḷasehi bhikkhusatehi saddhiṃ ātumaṃ gacchante ‘‘bhagavā āgacchatī’’ti sutvā āgatakāle ‘‘yāgudānaṃ karissāmī’’ti sāmaṇerabhūmiyaṃ ṭhite dve putte etadavoca ‘‘bhagavā kira tātā ātumaṃ āgacchati mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṃ aḍḍhateḷasehi bhikkhusatehi, gacchatha tumhe tātā khurabhaṇḍaṃ ādāya nāḷiyāvāpakena anugharakaṃ anugharakaṃ āhiṇḍatha, loṇampi telampi taṇḍulampi khādanīyampi saṃharatha, bhagavato āgatassa yāgudānaṃ karissāmī’’ti. Te tathā akaṃsu. Atha bhagavati ātumaṃ āgantvā bhusāgārakaṃ paviṭṭhe subhaddo sāyanhasamayaṃ gāmadvāraṃ gantvā manusse āmantetvā ‘‘hatthakammamattaṃ me dethā’’ti hatthakammaṃ yācitvā ‘‘kiṃ bhante karomā’’ti vutte ‘‘idañcidañca gaṇhathā’’ti sabbūpakaraṇāni gāhāpetvā vihāre uddhanāni kāretvā ekaṃ kāḷakaṃ kāsāvaṃ nivāsetvā tādisameva pārupitvā ‘‘idaṃ karotha, idaṃ karothā’’ti sabbarattiṃ vicārento satasahassaṃ vissajjetvā bhojjayāguñca madhugoḷakañca paṭiyādāpesi. Bhojjayāgu nāma bhuñjitvā pātabbayāgu, tattha sappimadhuphāṇitamacchamaṃsapupphaphalarasādi yaṃ kiñci khādanīyaṃ nāma atthi, taṃ sabbaṃ pavisati, kīḷitukāmānaṃ sīsamakkhanayoggā hoti sugandhagandhā.
那时,世尊在清晨料理好身体后,由比丘僧团围绕,面向阿菟摩村走去乞食。人们向他报告:“世尊进村乞食了,你准备的粥是给谁的?”苏跋陀就穿着那身黑色袈裟,一手拿着汤匙和勺子,像梵天一样将右膝跪在地上,顶礼后说:“尊者世尊,请接受我的粥。”于是,世尊按照《犍度》(《大品》303)中所说的方法——“如来虽知,仍会询问”——问明并听清后,呵责了那位老出家者,并以此事缘制定了“令作不净物戒”和“持剃刀用具戒”这两条学处,然后说:“比丘们,你们在无数劫中寻求食物而度过,但这对你们是不净的,吃了这非法所得的食物,将在无数千生中堕于恶趣。走开,不要接受。”说完便面向乞食而去,没有一位比丘接受任何东西。显示巴利原文
Atha bhagavā kālasseva sarīrapaṭijagganaṃ katvā bhikkhusaṅghaparivuto piṇḍāya carituṃ ātumābhimukho pāyāsi. Manussā tassa ārocesuṃ ‘‘bhagavā piṇḍāya gāmaṃ pavisati, tayā kassa yāgu paṭiyāditā’’ti. So yathānivatthapāruteheva tehi kāḷakakāsāvehi ekena hatthena dabbiñca kaṭacchuñca gahetvā brahmā viya dakkhiṇajāṇumaṇḍalaṃ bhūmiyaṃ patiṭṭhāpetvā vanditvā ‘‘paṭiggaṇhatu me bhante bhagavā yāgu’’nti āha. Tato ‘‘jānantāpi tathāgatā pucchantī’’ti khandhake (mahāva. 303) āgatanayena bhagavā pucchitvā ca sutvā ca taṃ vuḍḍhapabbajitaṃ vigarahitvā tasmiṃ vatthusmiṃ akappiyasamādāpanasikkhāpadaṃ khurabhaṇḍapariharaṇasikkhāpadañcāti dve sikkhāpadāni paññapetvā ‘‘bhikkhave anekakappakoṭiyo bhojanaṃ pariyesanteheva vītināmitā, idaṃ pana tumhākaṃ akappiyaṃ, adhammena uppannabhojanaṃ imaṃ paribhuñjitvā anekāni attabhāvasahassāni apāyesveva nibbattissanti, apetha mā gaṇhathā’’ti bhikkhācārābhimukho agamāsi, ekabhikkhunāpi na kiñci gahitaṃ.
苏跋陀心生不满,心想:“此人四处宣称‘我无所不知’。他若无意接受,理应派人来告知。烹好的食物至多能存放七日,而这本是我毕生的受用,现在全被他毁了。他这是存心要害我啊。”于是他对世尊结下嗔恨,但当十力尊在世之时,他什么也不敢说。据说他当时这样想:“他是从高贵种姓出家的大人物,我若有所言说,只会招来自责。”如今,他与大迦叶长老同来,听闻“世尊已般涅槃”,不禁如释重负,欢喜踊跃地说出了那番话。长老听闻此言,只觉得心上仿佛挨了一击,又像头上落下烧红的铁砧,心中生起法之悚惧感,寻思道:“世尊般涅槃才七日,至今身色依然如金,而世尊以极大艰辛所成就的教法中,竟这么快就生出了如此巨大的恶秽荆棘。这恶人若进一步壮大,得到同类为伴,便足以令教法衰退。”显示巴利原文
Subhaddo anattamano hutvā ‘‘ayaṃ ‘sabbaṃ jānāmī’ti āhiṇḍati, sace na gahetukāmo pesetvā ārocetabbaṃ assa, pakkāhāro nāma sabbaciraṃ tiṭṭhanto sattāhamattaṃ tiṭṭheyya, idañca mama yāvajīvaṃ pariyattaṃ assa, sabbaṃ tena nāsitaṃ, ahitakāmo ayaṃ mayha’’nti bhagavati āghātaṃ bandhitvā dasabale dharamāne kiñci vattuṃ nāsakkhi. Evaṃ kirassa ahosi ‘‘ayaṃ uccakulā pabbajito mahāpuriso, sace kiñci vakkhāmi, mamaṃyeva santajjessatī’’ti. Svāyaṃ ajja mahākassapattherena saddhiṃ āgacchanto ‘‘parinibbuto bhagavā’’ti sutvā laddhassāso viya haṭṭhatuṭṭho evamāha. Thero pana taṃ sutvā hadaye pahāraṃ viya matthake patitasukkāsaniṃ viya maññi, dhammasaṃvego cassa uppajji ‘‘sattāhamattaparinibbuto bhagavā, ajjāpissa suvaṇṇavaṇṇaṃ sarīraṃ dharatiyeva, dukkhena bhagavatā ārādhitasāsane nāma evaṃ lahuṃ mahantaṃ pāpakasaṭaṃ kaṇṭako uppanno, alaṃ kho panesa pāpo vaḍḍhamāno aññepi evarūpe sahāye labhitvā sāsanaṃ osakkāpetu’’nti.
于是,长老思惟:“如果我此时就让这大长老就地穿上粪扫衣,撒上灰之后赶出去,人们会说‘沙门乔达摩的遗体尚在,弟子们就已起纷争了’,从而归咎于我们。我暂且忍耐。世尊所说的法,恰如尚未捆束的花堆:若被风吹散,花朵便会飘落各处。同样,随着这类人造成的因缘,时日迁流,律藏中将有一两条学处灭去、消失,经藏中将有一两个问答灭去,阿毗达摩中将有一两种论母灭去。如此渐渐亏减,至根本也灭尽时,我们便将如同鬼类了。因此,我要结集法与律。这样,法、律便会如同用坚固的线捆束的花朵一般,稳固不动。世尊正是为了此事,才远迎我三伽乌他,以三次教诫授予我具足戒,与我交换袈裟,在空中挥手宣说月喻之行,并为我亲证而说法,三次将整个教法宝藏托付于我。有像我这样的比丘在,就不应让这恶人在教法中增长。只要非法尚未彰显、正法未被遮蔽,非律尚未彰显、律未被遮蔽,非法说者尚未强大、正法说者尚未衰弱,非律说者尚未强大、律说者尚未衰弱,我便要结集法与律。在此之后,比丘们各自依其能力受持,并宣说净与不净。那时,这恶人自己便会受到惩治,再也抬不起头来,而教法则会兴盛繁荣。”显示巴利原文
Tato thero cintesi ‘‘sace kho panāhaṃ imaṃ mahallakaṃ idheva pilotikaṃ nivāsetvā chārikāya okirāpetvā nīharāpessāmi, manussā ‘samaṇassa gotamassa sarīre dharamāneyeva sāvakā vivadantī’ti amhākaṃ dosaṃ dassessanti, adhivāsemi tāva. Bhagavatā hi desitadhammo asaṅgahitapuppharāsisadiso, tattha yathā vātena pahaṭapupphāni yato vā tato vā gacchanti, evameva evarūpānaṃ vasena gacchante gacchante kāle vinaye ekaṃ dve sikkhāpadāni nassissanti vinassissanti, sutte eko dve pañhavārā nassissanti, abhidhamme ekaṃ dve bhūmantarāni nassissanti, evaṃ anukkamena mūle naṭṭhe pisācasadisā bhavissāma, tasmā dhammavinayasaṅgahaṃ karissāmi, evaṃ sati daḷhasuttena saṅgahitapupphāni viya ayaṃ dhammavinayo niccalo bhavissati. Etadatthañhi bhagavā mayhaṃ tīṇi gāvutāni paccuggamanaṃ akāsi, tīhi ovādehi upasampadaṃ akāsi, kāyato cīvaraparivattanaṃ akāsi, ākāse pāṇiṃ cāletvā candopamapaṭipadaṃ kathento maññeva sakkhiṃ katvā kathesi, tikkhattuṃ sakalasāsanaratanaṃ paṭicchāpesi, mādise bhikkhumhi tiṭṭhamāne ayaṃ pāpo sāsane vaḍḍhiṃ mā alatthu, yāva adhammo na dippati, dhammo na paṭibāhīyati, avinayo na dippati, vinayo na paṭibāhīyati, adhammavādino na balavanto honti, dhammavādino na dubbalā honti, avinayavādino na balavanto honti, vinayavādino na dubbalā honti, tāva dhammañca vinayañca saṅgāyissāmi, tato bhikkhū attano attano pahonakaṃ gahetvā kappiyākappiye kathessanti, athāyaṃ pāpo sayameva niggahaṃ pāpuṇissati, puna sīsaṃ ukkhipituṃ na sakkhissati, sāsanaṃ iddhañceva phītañca bhavissatī’’ti. Cintetvā so ‘‘evaṃ nāma mayhaṃ cittaṃ uppanna’’nti kassaci anārocetvā bhikkhusaṅghaṃ samassāsetvā atha pacchā dhātubhājanadivase dhammavinayasaṅgāyanatthaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ ussāhaṃ janesi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘āyasmā mahākassapo sattāhaparinibbute…pe… dhammavinayasaṅgāyanatthaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ ussāhaṃ janesī’’ti.
其中,“alaṃ”是否定词。“āvuso”是他在向那位正在悲叹的比丘称呼。‘Mā socitthā’意为:不要因心中生起的强烈悲伤而忧愁。‘Mā paridevitthā’意为:不要用言语悲泣,因为(经中说)‘悲叹即是哀号’。现在,为了说明不应忧愁等的原因,他说‘sumuttā maya’等句。‘tena mahāsamaṇena’是处格用作具格,意为‘我们已从那位大沙门处得到了很好的解脱’,其用意是‘我们那时被困扰’。‘homa’是现在时用于过去义,意为‘ahumhā’(我们曾经是),其用意是他在随念时,因生起法之悚惧感而(这样说)。‘法之悚惧感’是指依于法的自性去思惟,由此生起的、伴随惭与智的智慧。对此,有如下言说如下——显示巴利原文
Tattha alanti paṭikkhepavacanaṃ. Āvusoti paridevante bhikkhū ālapati. Mā socitthāti citte uppannabalavasokena mā socittha. Mā paridevitthāti vācāya mā paridevittha ‘‘paridevanaṃ vilāpo’’ti vacanato. Idāni asocanādīsu kāraṇaṃ dassento ‘‘sumuttā maya’’ntiādimāha. Tena mahāsamaṇenāti nissakke karaṇavacanaṃ, tato mahāsamaṇato suṭṭhu muttā mayanti attho, upaddutā ca homa tadāti adhippāyo. Homāti vā atītatthe vattamānavacanaṃ, ahumhāti attho, anussaranto dhammasaṃvegavasenāti adhippāyo. Dhammasabhāvacintāvasena pavattaṃ sahottappañāṇaṃ dhammasaṃvego. Vuttañhetaṃ –
于一切有为法中,安住于惭的屏障;
对于智慧被遮蔽而负重担者,即名为‘法之悚惧’。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Sabbasaṅkhatadhammesu, ottappākārasaṇṭhitaṃ; Ñāṇamohitabhārānaṃ, dhammasaṃvegasaññita’’nti.
‘Ṭhānaṃ kho panetaṃ vijjati’:果报即安立于此,因其存在系属于彼,故称‘处’(ṭhāna),也就是因。‘kho’为决定词,意为此因确实存在,并非不存在。那么,是什么因呢?世尊说:‘yaṃ pāpabhikkhū…’等。此处,‘yaṃ’只是小品词,或用以指示因,其义为‘以此因故,那些恶比丘可能令教法隐没,此因确实存在’。‘pāpabhikkhū’指具足邪恶、低劣欲求的比丘。‘atītasatthukaṃ’谓导师已过去、已超越于此的,或导师已过去之教法,即佛语。‘pāvacanaṃ’即殊胜之语,指法与律。‘pakkhaṃ labhitvā’是得到无惭者的党派之后。‘na cirasseva’为不久之后。‘yāva ca dhammavinayo tiṭṭhati’意为只要法与律在有惭者中存续的期间。显示巴利原文
Ṭhānaṃ kho panetaṃ vijjatīti tiṭṭhati ettha phalaṃ tadāyattavuttitāyāti ṭhānaṃ, hetu. Khoti avadhāraṇe, etaṃ kāraṇaṃ vijjateva, no na vijjatīti attho. Kiṃ taṃ kāraṇanti āha ‘‘yaṃ pāpabhikkhū’’tiādi. Ettha yanti nipātamattaṃ, kāraṇaniddeso vā, yena kāraṇena antaradhāpeyyuṃ, tadetaṃ kāraṇaṃ vijjatīti attho. Pāpabhikkhūti pāpikāya lāmikāya icchāya samannāgatā bhikkhū. Atīto atikkanto satthā ettha, etassāti vā atītasatthukaṃ, pāvacanaṃ. Padhānaṃ vacanaṃ pāvacanaṃ, dhammavinayanti vuttaṃ hoti. Pakkhaṃ labhitvāti alajjīpakkhaṃ labhitvā. Na cirassevāti na cireneva. Yāva ca dhammavinayo tiṭṭhatīti yattakaṃ kālaṃ dhammo ca vinayo ca lajjīpuggalesu tiṭṭhati.
“此是世尊所说”:这是说,世尊躺在般涅槃床上教诫比丘们时,说了这番话。“已说、已制立”:法既是已宣说的,也是已安立的。因为,对于包含在经与阿毗达摩中的法,将其宣说、开示出来,是“说”;依其类别令所化众了知并安立于心相续中,是“制立”。因此,法也是“已说、已制立”。“已制立”即是已安立的意思。律同样也是已说、已制立。对于律藏体系中的义理,由于能调伏身语而被称为“律”,将其宣说、开示出来,是“说”;依其类别令知而无混杂地安立,是“制立”。因此,律也被称为“已说、已制立”。显示巴利原文
Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatāti parinibbānamañcake nipannena bhagavatā bhikkhū ovadantena etaṃ vuttanti attho. Desito paññattoti dhammopi desito ceva paññatto ca. Suttābhidhammasaṅgahitassa hi dhammassa abhisajjanaṃ pabodhanaṃ desanā, tasseva pakārato ñāpanaṃ vineyyasantāne ṭhapanaṃ paññāpanaṃ, tasmā dhammopi desito ceva paññatto cāti vutto. Paññattoti ca ṭhapitoti attho. Vinayopi desito ceva paññatto ca. Vinayatantisaṅgahitassa hi atthassa kāyavācānaṃ vinayanato vinayoti laddhādhivacanassa atisajjanaṃ pabodhanaṃ desanā, tasseva pakārato ñāpanaṃ asaṅkarato ṭhapanaṃ paññāpanaṃ, tasmā vinayopi desito ceva paññatto cāti vuccati.
“so vo mamaccayena”:那个法与律,在我逝去之后,就是你们的导师。这是说:我还在世时,已为你们宣说了完整的律藏——名为“大律”,以七种犯聚不可违犯为原则,于因缘发生时附有篇章,包含了二部分别。在我般涅槃后,它将通过分别“这是你们应做的,这是你们不应做的”而给予教诫,从而完成导师的职责。我还在世时,已为你们宣说了经藏——我随顺所化众的意乐,以种种方式开示这三十七菩提分法:“此为四念处、四正勤、四神足、五根、五力、七觉支、圣八支道”。在我般涅槃后,它将通过各自依行持而正确修行的教诫,来完成导师的职责。我还在世时,已为你们宣说了阿毗达摩藏——我分别了这些法:“五蕴、十二处、十八界、四谛、二十二根、九因、四食、七触、七受、七想、七思、七心;其中,这些法是欲界的,这些是色界的,这些是无色界的,这些是属(三界)的,这些是不属(三界)的,这些是世间的,这些是出世间的。”在我般涅槃后,它将通过以蕴等分别而正知,带来四谛的证悟,从而完成正等正觉者——导师——所应做的事业。如此,显示巴利原文
So vo mamaccayenāti so dhammavinayo tumhākaṃ mamaccayena satthā. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – mayā vo ṭhiteneva ‘‘idaṃ lahukaṃ, idaṃ garukaṃ, idaṃ satekicchaṃ, idaṃ atekicchaṃ, idaṃ lokavajjaṃ, idaṃ paṇṇattivajjaṃ. Ayaṃ āpatti puggalassa santike vuṭṭhāti, ayaṃ gaṇassa, ayaṃ saṅghassa santike vuṭṭhātī’’ti sattannaṃ āpattikkhandhānaṃ avītikkamanīyatāvasena otiṇṇavatthusmiṃ sakhandhakaparivāro ubhatovibhaṅgo mahāvinayo nāma desito, taṃ sakalampi vinayapiṭakaṃ mayi parinibbute tumhākaṃ satthukiccaṃ sādhessati ‘‘idaṃ vo kattabbaṃ, idaṃ vo na kattabba’’nti kattabbākattabbassa vibhāgena anusāsanato. Ṭhiteneva ca mayā ‘‘ime cattāro satipaṭṭhānā, cattāro sammappadhānā, cattāro iddhipādā, pañcindriyāni, pañca balāni, satta bojjhaṅgāni, ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo’’ti tena tena vineyyānaṃ ajjhāsayānurūpena pakārena ime sattatiṃsa bodhipakkhiyadhamme vibhajitvā suttantapiṭakaṃ desitaṃ, taṃ sakalampi suttantapiṭakaṃ mayi parinibbute tumhākaṃ satthukiccaṃ sādhessati taṃtaṃcariyānurūpaṃ sammāpaṭipattiyā anusāsanato. Ṭhiteneva ca mayā ‘‘pañcakkhandhā, dvādasāyatanāni, aṭṭhārasa dhātuyo, cattāri saccāni, bāvīsatindriyāni, nava hetū, cattāro āhārā, satta phassā, satta vedanā, satta saññā, satta cetanā, satta cittāni, tatrāpi ettakā dhammā kāmāvacarā, ettakā rūpāvacarā, ettakā arūpāvacarā, ettakā pariyāpannā, ettakā apariyāpannā, ettakā lokiyā, ettakā lokuttarā’’ti ime dhamme vibhajitvā abhidhammapiṭakaṃ desitaṃ, taṃ sakalampi abhidhammapiṭakaṃ mayi parinibbute tumhākaṃ satthukiccaṃ sādhessati, khandhādivibhāgena ñāyamānaṃ catusaccasambodhāvahattā satthārā sammāsambuddhena kattabbakiccaṃ nipphādessati. Iti sabbampetaṃ abhisambodhito yāva parinibbānā pañcacattālīsa vassāni bhāsitaṃ lapitaṃ, tīṇi piṭakāni, pañca nikāyā, navaṅgāni, caturāsīti dhammakkhandhasahassānīti evaṃ mahappabhedaṃ hoti. Iti imāni caturāsīti dhammakkhandhasahassāni tiṭṭhanti, ahaṃ ekova parinibbāyāmi, ahañca panidāni ekova ovadāmi anusāsāmi, mayi parinibbute imāni caturāsīti buddhasahassāni tumhe ovadissanti anusāsissanti ovādānusāsanīkiccassa nipphādanatoti.
“sāsanaṃ”:教法有三种,即教理、行道、通达;若就非间接义而言,则是三十七菩提分法。“addhaniyaṃ”:能行远路者,即堪任长途者。“ciraṭṭhitikaṃ”:长久存续,即此(教法)有长久的存续。关联句为:愿它(教法)成为那样。这就是说:当以何种方式,此教法能够长久流传并因而得以久住,就以那种方式结集法与律。显示巴利原文
Sāsananti pariyattipaṭipattipaṭivedhavasena tividhaṃ sāsanaṃ, nippariyāyato pana sattatiṃsa bodhipakkhiyadhammā. Addhaniyanti addhānamaggagāmīti addhaniyaṃ, addhānakkhamanti attho. Ciraṭṭhitikanti ciraṃ ṭhiti etassāti ciraṭṭhitikaṃ, sāsanaṃ, assa bhaveyyāti sambandho. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yathā yena pakārena idaṃ sāsanaṃ dīghamaddhānaṃ pavattituṃ samatthaṃ, tatoyeva ciraṭṭhitikaṃ assa, tathā tena pakārena dhammañca vinayañca saṅgāyeyyanti.
现在,为了阐明正自觉者对自己所施予的特别摄受,尊者大迦叶说道:“而我受世尊……”等语。其中,“而我”与“受摄受”相关联。句中的“而”即是“因此”、“以此因缘”之义。或者,这是指涉行为的用语,以此“受摄受”指涉摄受的行为。至于“你将持用”等语,是世尊坐在某棵树下,用手——其色如盛开的莲花——触摸尊者大迦叶所敷设的粪扫重衣时所说。此事记载于《迦叶相应》(相应部尼柯耶2.154),由尊者大迦叶亲自对阿难尊者述说,如下——显示巴利原文
Idāni sammāsambuddhena attano kataṃ anuggahavisesaṃ vibhāvento āha ‘‘yañcāhaṃ bhagavatā’’tiādi. Tattha ‘‘yañcāha’’nti etassa ‘‘anuggahito’’ti etena sambandho. Tattha yanti yasmā, yena kāraṇenāti vuttaṃ hoti. Kiriyāparāmasanaṃ vā etaṃ, tena ‘‘anuggahito’’ti ettha anuggaṇhanaṃ parāmasati. Dhāressasītiādikaṃ pana bhagavā aññatarasmiṃ rukkhamūle mahākassapattherena paññattasaṅghāṭiyaṃ nisinno taṃ cīvaraṃ vikasitapadumapupphavaṇṇena pāṇinā antare parāmasanto āha. Vuttañhetaṃ kassapasaṃyutte (saṃ. ni. 2.154) mahākassapatthereneva ānandattheraṃ āmantetvā kathentena –
“贤友,当时世尊离开道路,走向一棵树下。贤友,我便将粗布粪扫重衣折叠成四层铺好,对世尊说:‘尊者,愿世尊坐于此处,愿此能长久为我带来利益与安乐。’贤友,世尊坐在铺好的座位上;坐定后,世尊对我说:‘迦叶,你这粗布粪扫重衣真是柔软。’我说:‘尊者,愿世尊出于慈悲,接受我这粗布粪扫重衣。’世尊说:‘那么,迦叶,你能持用我这件麻布粪扫衣吗?它已破旧不堪。’我说:‘尊者,我愿持用世尊的麻布粪扫旧衣。’贤友,就这样,我将粗布粪扫重衣供奉给世尊,自己则持受了世尊的麻布粪扫旧衣。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Atha kho, āvuso, bhagavā maggā okkamma yena aññataraṃ rukkhamūlaṃ tenupasaṅkami, atha khvāhaṃ, āvuso, paṭapilotikānaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ catugguṇaṃ paññāpetvā bhagavantaṃ etadavocaṃ ‘idha, bhante, bhagavā nisīdatu, yaṃ mamassa dīgharattaṃ hitāya sukhāyā’ti. Nisīdi kho, āvuso, bhagavā paññatte āsane, nisajja kho maṃ, āvuso, bhagavā etadavoca ‘mudukā kho tyāyaṃ kassapa paṭapilotikānaṃ saṅghāṭī’ti. ‘Paṭiggaṇhātu me, bhante, bhagavā paṭapilotikānaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ anukampaṃ upādāyā’ti. ‘Dhāressasi pana me tvaṃ kassapa sāṇāni paṃsukūlāni nibbasanānī’ti. ‘Dhāressāmahaṃ, bhante, bhagavato sāṇāni paṃsukūlāni nibbasanānī’ti. So khvāhaṃ, āvuso, paṭapilotikānaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ bhagavato pādāsiṃ, ahaṃ pana bhagavato sāṇāni paṃsukūlāni nibbasanāni paṭipajji’’nti (saṃ. ni. 2.154).
其中,(相应部注疏2.2.154)「柔软啊」,意即:「你这件甚是柔软」。为何世尊如此说?乃因欲与长老交换袈裟。为何欲与之交换?乃因欲将长老安置于自己的位置上。难道舍利弗与摩嘎剌那不在吗?在,然而世尊心中如此思量:「此二人不能久住,然迦叶寿命可达二百岁,我般涅槃之后,彼将住于七叶窟中,结集法与律,令我的教法得以流传五千年。」因此,我将其安置于自己的位置,如此诸比丘将认为应恭敬听从迦叶的教导——故而如此说。又,长老因为凡称赞袈裟或钵的功德后说「请你们取走此物」,此乃惯例,故说:「尊者,请世尊接受我的(袈裟)。」而「迦叶,你能持用我的(袈裟)吗」,意即:迦叶,你能够披上这些因受用而破旧的粪扫衣吗?此话并非针对身体的气力而说,而是针对圆满修行而说。此处的真实意趣如下——我曾披上这件袈裟,那是一个名叫普纳的女奴隶死后裹尸、弃置于露天墓地,被如拇指大小的虫子密密围绕,我抖去那些虫子,安住于崇高的圣贤传统而取来的。在我取这件袈裟的当日,十千轮围世界中,大地发出巨大的轰鸣声而震动,虚空发出爆裂之声,轮围界的天人们随声叫好,赞叹道:「取用此袈裟的比丘,应当成为生来即奉行粪扫衣法者、生来即奉行住林法者、生来即奉行一座食法者、生来即奉行次第乞食法者——你能够担当此袈裟之相称者。」长老自身具有五头大象的气力,他并不思虑此事,而是以热忱之心,立志「我将圆满此修行」,欲使自身与善逝袈裟相称,故说:「尊者,我将持用。」「受持」,意即:我已受持。如此换袈裟之后,世尊披上长老所披之衣,长老则披上导师之衣。在那一刻,大地以大海为边界,发出呼啸声而震动。显示巴利原文
Tattha (saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 2.2.154) mudukā kho tyāyanti mudukā kho te ayaṃ. Kasmā bhagavā evamāhāti? Therena saha cīvaraṃ parivattetukāmatāya. Kasmā parivattetukāmo jātoti? Theraṃ attano ṭhāne ṭhapetukāmatāya. Kiṃ sāriputtamoggallānā natthīti? Atthi, evaṃ panassa ahosi ‘‘ime na ciraṃ ṭhassanti, kassapo pana vīsavassasatāyuko, ‘so mayi parinibbute sattapaṇṇiguhāyaṃ vasitvā dhammavinayasaṅgahaṃ katvā mama sāsanaṃ pañcavassasahassaparimāṇaṃ kālaṃ pavattanakaṃ karissatī’ti attano naṃ ṭhāne ṭhapemi, evaṃ bhikkhū kassapassa sussūsitabbaṃ maññissantī’’ti, tasmā evamāha. Thero pana yasmā cīvarassa vā pattassa vā vaṇṇe kathite ‘‘imaṃ tumhākaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti cārittameva, tasmā ‘‘paṭiggaṇhātu me bhante bhagavā’’ti āha. Dhāressasi pana me tvaṃ kassapāti kassapa tvaṃ imāni paribhogajiṇṇāni paṃsukūlāni pārupituṃ sakkhissasīti vadati. Tañca kho na kāyabalaṃ sandhāya, paṭipattipūraṇaṃ pana sandhāya evamāha. Ayañhettha adhippāyo – ahaṃ imaṃ cīvaraṃ puṇṇaṃ nāma dāsiṃ pārupitvā āmakasusāne chaḍḍitaṃ tumbamattehi pāṇakehi samparikiṇṇaṃ te pāṇake vidhunitvā mahāariyavaṃse ṭhatvā aggahesiṃ, tassa me imaṃ cīvaraṃ gahitadivase dasasahassacakkavāḷe mahāpathavī mahāravaṃ viravamānā kampittha, ākāsaṃ taṭataṭāyi, cakkavāḷadevatā sādhukāraṃ adaṃsu ‘‘imaṃ cīvaraṃ gaṇhantena bhikkhunā jātipaṃsukūlikena jātiāraññikena jātiekāsanikena jātisapadānacārikena bhavituṃ vaṭṭati, tvaṃ imassa cīvarassa anucchavikaṃ kātuṃ sakkhissasī’’ti. Theropi attanā pañcannaṃ hatthīnaṃ balaṃ dhāreti. So taṃ atakkayitvā ‘‘ahametaṃ paṭipattiṃ pūressāmī’’ti ussāhena sugatacīvarassa anucchavikaṃ kātukāmo ‘‘dhāressāmahaṃ bhante’’ti āha. Paṭipajjinti paṭipannosiṃ. Evaṃ pana cīvaraparivattanaṃ katvā therena pārutacīvaraṃ bhagavā pārupi, satthu cīvaraṃ thero. Tasmiṃ samaye mahāpathavī udakapariyantaṃ katvā unnadantī kampittha.
「麻布粪扫衣」:即包裹死尸弃于露天处,取用时先弹去拇指大小的蛆虫,以麻纤维制成的粪扫衣。因它置于街道、墓冢、垃圾堆等任何尘土之上,有高出之义,犹如处在尘土之上者,故称「粪扫衣」。又或,粪扫衣一词应理解为:像尘土般不净的事物,有前往、抵达(ulati)的意思。「已破旧不堪」:指已完成穿用的用途,即因受用而破烂。此处《中部复注》说:「虽是同一领袈裟,但由多个部分组成,故用复数。」关于「以自己对袈裟的共同受用」——依「以自己」之义已可了知,而「以」字在可解时,其用法可自由省略,故未明示「以自己」。既然已说「迦叶,你能持用我的这些麻布粪扫衣吗」,便应理解为仅是自身对袈裟的共同受用,而非他人所为。因为并非仅凭文字本身就能决了一切处意义,多数情况下须借助上下文等加以厘定。然而,法护长老就此说道:「关于『以自己对袈裟的共同受用』,此处应引入『以自己』一词,串作『以自己对袈裟的同等分担受用』。」显示巴利原文
Sāṇānipaṃsukūlānīti matakaḷevaraṃ pariveṭhetvā chaḍḍitāni tumbamatte kimī papphoṭetvā gahitāni sāṇavākamayāni paṃsukūlacīvarāni. Rathikasusānasaṅkārakūṭādīnaṃ yattha katthaci paṃsūnaṃ upari ṭhitattā abbhuggataṭṭhena tesu paṃsukūlamivāti paṃsukūlaṃ. Atha vā paṃsu viya kucchitabhāvaṃ ulati gacchatīti paṃsukūlanti paṃsukūlasaddassa attho daṭṭhabbo. Nibbasanānīti niṭṭhitavasanakiccāni, paribhogajiṇṇānīti attho. Ettha ‘‘kiñcāpi ekameva taṃ cīvaraṃ, anekāvayavattā pana bahuvacanaṃ kata’’nti majjhimagaṇṭhipade vuttaṃ. Cīvare sādhāraṇaparibhogenāti ettha attanā sādhāraṇaparibhogenāti viññāyamānattā viññāyamānatthassa ca-saddassa payoge kāmācārattā ‘‘attanā’’ti na vuttaṃ. ‘‘Dhāressasi pana me tvaṃ, kassapa, sāṇāni paṃsukūlānī’’ti hi vuttattā attanāva sādhāraṇaparibhogo viññāyati, nāññena. Na hi kevalaṃ saddatoyeva sabbattha atthanicchayo bhavissati atthapakaraṇādināpi yebhuyyena atthassa niyametabbattā. Ācariyadhammapālattherena panettha idaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘cīvare sādhāraṇaparibhogenāti ettha attanā samasamaṭṭhapanenāti idha attanāsaddaṃ ānetvā cīvare attanā sādhāraṇaparibhogenā’’ti yojetabbaṃ.
凡与某物有关联者,纵远隔亦能近之;
义虽不同,其相邻亦非无因。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yassa yena hi sambandho, dūraṭṭhampi ca tassa taṃ; Atthato hyasamānānaṃ, āsannattamakāraṇa’’nti.
或者,应作如下连接:世尊以共用袈裟而摄受了他,因为即使单一作格的说明,也能兼表伴随、合作与动作主体的意义。凡提到“由阿阇梨法护长老”之处,皆应理解为以经释的方式。具有共同受用,故称“共同的”,即受用。以共同受用与平等安置而摄受,应如此连接。显示巴利原文
Atha vā bhagavatā cīvare sādhāraṇaparibhogena bhagavatā anuggahitoti yojanīyaṃ ekassapi karaṇaniddesassa sahayogakattutthajotakattasambhavatoti. Sabbattha ‘‘ācariyadhammapālattherenā’’ti vutte suttantaṭīkākārenāti gahetabbaṃ. Samānaṃ dhāraṇametassāti sādhāraṇo, paribhogo. Sādhāraṇaparibhogena ceva samasamaṭṭhapanena ca anuggahitoti sambandho.
如今(相应部2.152)——显示巴利原文
Idāni (saṃ. ni. 2.152) –
诸比丘,我只要愿意,便可离欲、离不善法,有寻有伺,由离生喜乐,具足初禅而住。诸比丘,迦叶也只要愿意,便可离欲、离不善法,有寻有伺,由离生喜乐,具足初禅而住。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ahaṃ, bhikkhave, yāvade ākaṅkhāmi vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṃ savicāraṃ vivekajaṃ pītisukhaṃ paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharāmi. Kassapopi, bhikkhave, yāvade ākaṅkhati vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṃ savicāraṃ vivekajaṃ pītisukhaṃ paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati.
比丘们,我只要愿意,便能由寻伺止息,内心净信,心得一境,无寻无伺,定生喜乐,进入并安住于第二禅。比丘们,迦叶也只要愿意,便能由寻伺止息……(中略)……进入并安住于第二禅。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ahaṃ, bhikkhave, yāvade ākaṅkhāmi vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamā ajjhattaṃ sampasādanaṃ cetaso ekodibhāvaṃ avitakkaṃ avicāraṃ samādhijaṃ pītisukhaṃ dutiyaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharāmi. Kassapopi, bhikkhave, yāvade ākaṅkhati vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamā…pe… dutiyaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati.
比丘们,我只要愿意,便能离喜、住于舍,正念正知,以身受乐,即圣者们所称的‘舍、具念、乐住’,进入并安住于第三禅。比丘们,迦叶也只要愿意,便能离喜、住于舍……(中略)……进入并安住于第三禅。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ahaṃ, bhikkhave, yāvade ākaṅkhāmi pītiyā ca virāgā upekkhako ca viharāmi, sato ca sampajāno sukhañca kāyena paṭisaṃvedemi, yaṃ taṃ ariyā ācikkhanti ‘upekkhako satimā sukhavihārī’ti, tatiyaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharāmi. Kassapopi, bhikkhave, yāvade ākaṅkhati pītiyā ca virāgā upekkhako ca viharati…pe… tatiyaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati.
比丘们,我只要愿意,便能断乐、断苦,及先前的喜忧已灭,不苦不乐,舍念清净,进入并安住于第四禅。比丘们,迦叶也只要愿意,便能断乐、断苦……(中略)……进入并安住于第四禅。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ahaṃ, bhikkhave, yāvade ākaṅkhāmi sukhassa ca pahānā dukkhassa ca pahānā pubbeva somanassadomanassānaṃ atthaṅgamā adukkhamasukhaṃ upekkhāsatipārisuddhiṃ catutthaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharāmi. Kassapopi, bhikkhave, yāvade ākaṅkhati sukhassa ca pahānā dukkhassa ca pahānā pubbeva…pe… catutthaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati.
“比丘们,只要我愿意,便能完全超越一切色想,灭除有对想,不作意种种想,了知‘虚空无边’,具足空无边处而住。比丘们,迦叶也只要愿意,便能完全超越一切色想……(中略)……具足空无边处而住。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Ahaṃ , bhikkhave, yāvade ākaṅkhāmi sabbaso rūpasaññānaṃ samatikkamā paṭighasaññānaṃ atthaṅgamā nānattasaññānaṃ amanasikārā ‘ananto ākāso’ti ākāsānañcāyatanaṃ upasampajja viharāmi. Kassapopi, bhikkhave, yāvade ākaṅkhati sabbaso rūpasaññānaṃ samatikkamā…pe… ākāsānañcāyatanaṃ upasampajja viharati.
“比丘们,只要我愿意,便能完全超越空无边处,了知‘识无边’,具足识无边处而住。比丘们,迦叶也只要愿意,便能完全超越空无边处……(中略)……具足识无边处而住。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Ahaṃ, bhikkhave, yāvade ākaṅkhāmi sabbaso ākāsānañcāyatanaṃ samatikkama ‘anantaṃ viññāṇa’nti viññāṇañcāyatanaṃ upasampajja viharāmi. Kassapopi, bhikkhave, yāvade ākaṅkhati sabbaso ākāsānañcāyatanaṃ samatikkamma…pe… viññāṇañcāyatanaṃ upasampajja viharati.
“比丘们,只要我愿意,便能完全超越识无边处,了知‘无所有’,具足无所有处而住。比丘们,迦叶也只要愿意……(中略)……具足无所有处而住。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Ahaṃ , bhikkhave, yāvade ākaṅkhāmi sabbaso viññāṇañcāyatanaṃ samatikkamma ‘natthi kiñcī’ti ākiñcaññāyatanaṃ upasampajja viharāmi. Kassapopi, bhikkhave, yāvade ākaṅkhati…pe… ākiñcaññāyatanaṃ upasampajja viharati.
比丘们,只要我愿意,便能完全超越无所有处,具足非想非非想处而安住。比丘们,迦叶也是如此,只要愿意……(中略)……具足非想非非想处而安住。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ahaṃ, bhikkhave, yāvade ākaṅkhāmi sabbaso ākiñcaññāyatanaṃ samatikkamma nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ upasampajja viharāmi. Kassapopi, bhikkhave, yāvade ākaṅkhati…pe… nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ upasampajja viharati.
比丘们,只要我愿意,便能完全超越非想非非想处,具足想受灭而安住。迦叶也是如此……(中略)……具足想受灭而安住。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ahaṃ, bhikkhave, yāvade ākaṅkhāmi sabbaso nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ samatikkamma saññāvedayitanirodhaṃ upasampajja viharāmi. Kassapopi…pe… saññāvedayitanirodhaṃ upasampajja viharati.
比丘们,只要我愿意,便能现起种种神通变化:从一身变成多身,从多身成为一身;显现与隐没;穿墙、穿壁、穿山,毫无障碍,犹如行于虚空;于地中出没,犹如行于水中;于水上不破而行,犹如行于大地;在虚空中结跏趺坐而行,犹如飞鸟;以手触摸、抚摩有如此大神力、大威德的日月;乃至以身体自在往来于梵天世界。比丘们,迦叶也是如此,只要愿意……(中略)……乃至以身体自在往来于梵天世界。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ahaṃ, bhikkhave, yāvade ākaṅkhāmi anekavihitaṃ iddhividhaṃ paccanubhomi, ekopi hutvā bahudhā homi, bahudhāpi hutvā eko homi, āvibhāvaṃ tirobhāvaṃ tirokuṭṭaṃ tiropākāraṃ tiropabbataṃ asajjamāno gacchāmi seyyathāpi ākāse, pathaviyāpi ummujjanimujjaṃ karomi seyyathāpi udake, udakepi abhijjamāne gacchāmi seyyathāpi pathaviyaṃ, ākāsepi pallaṅkena kamāmi seyyathāpi pakkhī sakuṇo, imepi candimasūriye evaṃmahiddhike evaṃmahānubhāve pāṇinā parimasāmi parimajjāmi, yāva brahmalokāpi kāyena vasaṃ vattemi. Kassapopi bhikkhave yāvade ākaṅkhati anekavihitaṃ iddhividhaṃ paccanubhoti…pe… yāva brahmalokāpi kāyena vasaṃ vatteti.
比丘们,我只要愿意,便能以那清净、超越人耳的天耳界,听闻天与人两种声音,无论远近。比丘们,迦叶只要愿意,也能以天耳界……(中略)……无论远近。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ahaṃ , bhikkhave, yāvade ākaṅkhāmi dibbāya sotadhātuyā visuddhāya atikkantamānusikāya ubho sadde suṇāmi dibbe ca mānuse ca ye dūre santike ca. Kassapopi, bhikkhave, yāvade ākaṅkhati dibbāya sotadhātuyā…pe… ye dūre santike ca.
比丘们,我只要愿意,便能以自心遍知其他众生、他人的心:了知有贪心为‘有贪心’,了知离贪心为‘离贪心’;了知有瞋心……(中略)……了知离瞋心……(中略)……了知有痴心……(中略)……了知离痴心……(中略)……了知昏沉心……(中略)……了知散乱心……(中略)……了知广大心……(中略)……了知非广大心……(中略)……了知有上心……(中略)……了知无上心……(中略)……了知定心……(中略)……了知不定心……(中略)……了知解脱心……(中略)……了知未解脱心为‘未解脱心’。比丘们,迦叶只要愿意,也能以自心遍知其他众生、他人的心:了知有贪心为‘有贪心’……(中略)……了知未解脱心为‘未解脱心’。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ahaṃ , bhikkhave, yāvade ākaṅkhāmi parasattānaṃ parapuggalānaṃ cetasā ceto paricca pajānāmi, sarāgaṃ vā cittaṃ ‘sarāgaṃ citta’nti pajānāmi, vītarāgaṃ vā cittaṃ ‘vītarāgaṃ citta’nti pajānāmi, sadosaṃ vā cittaṃ…pe… vītadosaṃ vā cittaṃ…pe… samohaṃ vā cittaṃ…pe… vītamohaṃ vā cittaṃ…pe… saṃkhittaṃ vā cittaṃ…pe… vikkhittaṃ vā cittaṃ…pe… mahaggataṃ vā cittaṃ…pe… amahaggataṃ vā cittaṃ…pe… sauttaraṃ vā cittaṃ…pe… anuttaraṃ vā cittaṃ…pe… samāhitaṃ vā cittaṃ…pe… asamāhitaṃ vā cittaṃ…pe… vimuttaṃ vā cittaṃ…pe… avimuttaṃ vā cittaṃ ‘avimuttaṃ citta’nti pajānāmi. Kassapopi, bhikkhave, yāvade ākaṅkhati parasattānaṃ parapuggalānaṃ cetasā ceto paricca pajānāti, sarāgaṃ vā cittaṃ ‘sarāgaṃ citta’nti pajānāti…pe… avimuttaṃ vā cittaṃ ‘avimuttaṃ citta’nti pajānāti.
比丘们,我只要愿意,便能随念种种过去世。即:一生、二生、三生、四生、五生、十生、二十生、三十生、四十生、五十生、百生、千生、百千生,以及诸多坏劫、诸多成劫、诸多成坏劫。‘在彼处,我有如是名、如是姓、如是容貌、如是食物、如是苦乐感受、如是寿限;从彼处死后,生于彼处;在彼处,我又有如是名、如是姓、如是容貌、如是食物、如是苦乐感受、如是寿限;从彼处死后,生于此处。’我如此以细节与概要随念种种过去世。比丘们,迦叶只要愿意,也能随念种种过去世。即:一生……(中略)……如此,他以细节与概要随念种种过去世。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ahaṃ, bhikkhave, yāvade ākaṅkhāmi anekavihitaṃ pubbenivāsaṃ anussarāmi. Seyyathidaṃ – ekampi jātiṃ dvepi jātiyo tissopi jātiyo catassopi jātiyo pañcapi jātiyo dasapi jātiyo vīsampi jātiyo tiṃsampi jātiyo cattālīsampi jātiyo paññāsampi jātiyo jātisatampi jātisahassampi jātisatasahassampi anekepi saṃvaṭṭakappe anekepi vivaṭṭakappe anekepi saṃvaṭṭavivaṭṭakappe ‘amutrāsiṃ evaṃnāmo evaṃgotto evaṃvaṇṇo evamāhāro evaṃsukhadukkhappaṭisaṃvedī evamāyupariyanto, so tato cuto amutra udapādiṃ, tatrāpāsiṃ evaṃnāmo evaṃgotto evaṃvaṇṇo evamāhāro evaṃsukhadukkhappaṭisaṃvedī evamāyupariyanto, so tato cuto idhūpapanno’ti. Iti sākāraṃ sauddesaṃ anekavihitaṃ pubbenivāsaṃ anussarāmi. Kassapopi, bhikkhave, yāvade ākaṅkhati anekavihitaṃ pubbenivāsaṃ anussarati. Seyyathidaṃ – ekampi jātiṃ…pe… iti sākāraṃ sauddesaṃ anekavihitaṃ pubbenivāsaṃ anussarati.
比丘们,我若愿意,便能以清净、超越凡夫的天眼,观见众生死此生彼,或低劣或高尚,或美丽或丑陋,或往生善趣或恶趣,并了知众生各随其业而往生:‘这些众生具足身恶行、语恶行、意恶行,诽谤圣者,秉持邪见,行邪见之业;他们身坏命终后,生于苦界、恶趣、堕处、地狱。而这些众生具足身善行、语善行、意善行,不诽谤圣者,秉持正见,行正见之业;他们身坏命终后,生于善趣、天界。’比丘们,我即以这清净、超越凡夫的天眼,观见众生死此生彼,了知众生随业往生。比丘们,迦叶同样若愿意,也能以清净、超越凡夫的天眼,观见众生死此生彼……了知众生随业往生。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ahaṃ, bhikkhave, yāvade ākaṅkhāmi dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena satte passāmi cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe sugate duggate, yathākammūpage satte pajānāmi ‘ime vata bhonto sattā kāyaduccaritena samannāgatā vacīduccaritena samannāgatā manoduccaritena samannāgatā ariyānaṃ upavādakā micchādiṭṭhikā micchādiṭṭhikammasamādānā, te kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā apāyaṃ duggatiṃ vinipātaṃ nirayaṃ upapannā. Ime vā pana bhonto sattā kāyasucaritena samannāgatā vacīsucaritena samannāgatā manosucaritena samannāgatā ariyānaṃ anupavādakā sammādiṭṭhikā sammādiṭṭhikammasamādānā, te kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā sugatiṃ saggaṃ lokaṃ upapannā’ti. Iti dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena satte passāmi cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe sugate duggate, yathākammūpage satte pajānāmi. Kassapopi, bhikkhave, yāvade ākaṅkhati dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena satte passati cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe sugate duggate, yathākammūpage satte pajānāti.
比丘们,我由灭尽诸漏,即于现法中,以胜智自证无漏的心解脱、慧解脱,具足而住。比丘们,迦叶同样由灭尽诸漏,即于现法中,以胜智自证无漏的心解脱、慧解脱,具足而住。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ahaṃ, bhikkhave, āsavānaṃ khayā anāsavaṃ cetovimuttiṃ paññāvimuttiṃ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṃ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharāmi. Kassapopi, bhikkhave, āsavānaṃ khayā anāsavaṃ cetovimuttiṃ paññāvimuttiṃ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṃ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.152) –
如此,为将迦叶安立于与自己等同的地位,世尊在迦叶相应中,就九次第住、六神通等类别的超越人法,开示了这段经文。此处以略说方式,藉由“比丘们”等语起首,将其要义撮要显示。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ navānupubbavihārachaḷabhiññāppabhede uttarimanussadhamme attanā samasamaṭṭhapanatthāya bhagavatā vuttaṃ kassapasaṃyutte āgataṃ pāḷimimaṃ peyyālamukhena ādiggahaṇena ca saṅkhipitvā dassento āha ‘‘ahaṃ bhikkhave’’tiādi.
其中,“yāvade ākaṅkhāmi”意为“只要我愿意”。如《中部义释》与《小部义释》中所载:“yāvade 即 yāvadeva 的意思。”《相应部注疏》亦云:“yāvade ākaṅkhāmi 即 yāvadeva icchāmi。”同样,在《利义显明》中,阿阇梨法护长老说:“yāvadeva 此词与 yāvade 同义。”然而,某些抄本只见“yāvadeva”这一读法。此后,以“离诸欲……”等方式,宣说了四种色界唯作禅;以“完全超越色想……”等方式,宣说了四种无色定;以“完全超越非想非非想处,达到想受灭……”等方式,宣说了灭尽定;以“种种神变……”等方式,宣说了神通。其中应解说之义,《清净道论》已结合逐词注释与修习方法详尽阐明。此处,韦兰若品中也将出现四种色界禅及三明,届时当说之义,将于彼处解释。显示巴利原文
Tattha yāvade ākaṅkhāmīti yāvadeva icchāmīti attho. Tatoyeva hi majjhimagaṇṭhipade cūḷagaṇṭhipade ca ‘‘yāvadeti yāvadevāti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti likhitaṃ. Saṃyuttanikāyaṭṭhakathāyampi ‘‘yāvade ākaṅkhāmīti yāvadeva icchāmī’’ti attho vutto. Tathā hi tattha līnatthapakāsaniyaṃ ācariyadhammapālatthereneva vuttaṃ ‘‘yāvadevāti iminā samānatthaṃ yāvadeti idaṃ pada’’nti. Potthakesu pana katthaci ‘‘yāvadevā’’ti ayameva pāṭho dissati. Yāni pana ito paraṃ ‘‘vivicceva kāmehī’’tiādinā nayena cattāri rūpāvacarakiriyajhānāni, ‘‘sabbaso rūpasaññānaṃ samatikkamā’’tiādinā nayena catasso arūpasamāpattiyo, ‘‘sabbaso nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ samatikkamma saññāvedayitanirodha’’ntiādinā nayena nirodhasamāpatti, ‘‘anekavihitaṃ iddhividha’’ntiādinā nayena abhiññā ca vuttā. Tattha yaṃ vattabbaṃ siyā, taṃ anupadavaṇṇanāya ceva bhāvanāvidhānena ca saddhiṃ visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.69-70) sabbaso vitthāritaṃ. Idhāpi ca verañjakaṇḍe cattāri rūpāvacarajhānāni tisso ca vijjā āvi bhavissanti, tasmā tattha yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ tattheva vaṇṇayissāma.
于“九次第住与六神通等分类”中,所谓九次第住,即因须依次第而证入,故得此名的八种等至,包括灭尽定在内。所谓六神通,即与漏尽智合为六的五神通,如此涵盖世间与出世间的一切神通。“超越人法”:即超出常人的禅修者与圣者之法,称为超越人法。或者,“超越人法”即超越人的法;所谓人法,即十善业道法。因为不藉修习与作意,唯依本性便能由人产生,或带来人身,故称“人法”;而超越于此的禅那等,当知为“超越人法”。“将自己置于等同”:即“我于若干时间、若干等至住与神通运用,迦叶亦复如是”,以此将前述超越人法置于与自己等同。应知,这只是依九次第住、六神通等状态的共通性而作称扬。因为大迦叶尊者并不像世尊那样,每日证入二十四万亿数的等至,或运用双神变等神通。此处,“在超越人法上将自己置于等同”应知仅为举例。正如:显示巴利原文
Navānupubbavihārachaḷabhiññāppabhedeti ettha navānupubbavihārā nāma anupaṭipāṭiyā samāpajjitabbabhāvato evaṃsaññitā nirodhasamāpattiyā saha aṭṭha samāpattiyo. Chaḷabhiññā nāma āsavakkhayañāṇena saddhiṃ pañcābhiññāyoti evaṃ lokiyalokuttarabhedā sabbā abhiññāyo. Uttarimanussadhammeti uttarimanussānaṃ jhāyīnañceva ariyānañca dhammo uttarimanussadhammo. Atha vā uttari manussadhammāti uttarimanussadhammo, manussadhammo nāma dasakusalakammapathadhammo. So hi vinā bhāvanāmanasikārena pakatiyāva manussehi nibbattetabbato manussattabhāvāvahato vā ‘‘manussadhammo’’ti vuccati, tato uttari pana jhānādīni ‘‘uttarimanussadhammo’’ti veditabbāni. Attanā samasamaṭṭhapanenāti ahaṃ yattakaṃ kālaṃ yattake vā samāpattivihāre abhiññāyo ca vaḷañjemi, tathā kassapopīti evaṃ yathāvuttauttarimanussadhamme attanā samasamaṃ katvā ṭhapanena. Idañca navānupubbavihārachaḷabhiññādibhāvasāmaññena pasaṃsāmattaṃ vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Na hi āyasmā mahākassapo bhagavā viya devasikaṃ catuvīsatikoṭisatasahassasaṅkhā samāpattiyo samāpajjati, yamakapāṭihāriyādivasena vā abhiññāyo vaḷañjeti. Ettha ca ‘‘uttarimanussadhamme attanā samasamaṭṭhapanenā’’ti idaṃ nidassanamattanti veditabbaṃ. Tathā hi –
“迦叶,教诫比丘们吧!迦叶,为比丘们说法吧!迦叶,或由我教诫比丘,或由你;或由我为比丘们说法,或由你。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Ovada kassapa bhikkhū, karohi kassapa bhikkhūnaṃ dhammiṃ kathaṃ, ahaṃ vā kassapa bhikkhū ovadeyyaṃ tvaṃ vā, ahaṃ vā kassapa bhikkhūnaṃ dhammiṃ kathaṃ kareyyaṃ tvaṃ vā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.149).
即使如此,他也将自己置于与他同等的地位。除了结集法与律之外,他于我还有什么恩德呢?这是他的意图。其中,‘tassāti tassa anuggahassā’一句,在《中部义注》中有说明。或者可取‘tassa me’之意。因为在某些抄本中,确实可见‘tassa me’的读法,其含义为:除了结集法与律,他对我还有什么恩德、什么无债的状态呢?通过‘难道世尊不曾……’等语句,以譬喻的方式阐明了前面所说的意义。‘通过给予自己的铠甲与自在’中,铠甲是以衣为例而说,自在是以等至为例而说。‘令家族传承安立者’即令家族传承、家族传统得以安立的人。‘我的法脉安立者’应理解为依常时受持而作的复合词,即指:安立我的法脉、令其流转的人。忆念着世尊所说的话而摄受,即思惟着,为使比丘们发起结集法与律的精勤,这是其中的关联。在说界的那一天,令聚集于彼处的比丘们发起精勤,这是其中的意思。显示巴利原文
Evampi attanā samasamaṭṭhāne ṭhapetiyeva, tassa kimaññaṃ āṇaṇyaṃ bhavissati aññatra dhammavinayasaṅgāyanāti adhippāyo. Tattha ‘‘tassāti tassa anuggahassā’’ti majjhimagaṇṭhipade vuttaṃ. Tassa meti vā attho gahetabbo. Potthakesu hi katthaci ‘‘tassa me’’ti pāṭhoyeva dissati, dhammavinayasaṅgāyanaṃ ṭhapetvā aññaṃ kiṃ nāma tassa me āṇaṇyaṃ aṇaṇabhāvo bhavissatīti attho. ‘‘Nanu maṃ bhagavā’’tiādinā vuttamevatthaṃ upamāvasena vibhāveti. Sakakavacaissariyānuppadānenāti ettha cīvarassa nidassanavasena kavacassa gahaṇaṃ kataṃ, samāpattiyā nidassanavasena issariyaṃ gahitaṃ. Kulavaṃsappatiṭṭhāpakanti kulavaṃsassa kulappaveṇiyā patiṭṭhāpakaṃ. ‘‘Me saddhammavaṃsappatiṭṭhāpako’’ti niccasāpekkhattā samāso daṭṭhabbo, me saddhammavaṃsassa patiṭṭhāpako pavattakoti vuttaṃ hoti. Vuttavacanamanussaranto anuggahesīti cintayanto dhammavinayasaṅgāyanatthaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ ussāhaṃ janesīti sambandho, dhātubhājanadivase tattha sannipatitānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ ussāhaṃ janesīti attho.
现在,为了以经文阐明先前所说的意义,而说‘如经中所说’等。其中,‘ekamidāhaṃ’里的‘idaṃ’仅仅是一个小品词。‘ekaṃ samayaṃ’是位格意义下的对格,也就是‘于一时’的意思。‘Pāvāya’意即从波婆城,在那里托钵之后,心想‘我将前往拘尸那罗’,即已踏上长途旅程的意思。‘Addhānamaggo’即长途的道路。在此,‘addhāna’一词是长的同义词。‘与大比丘僧伽俱’是说由于功德之大与数量之多而称之为大。与比丘众、比丘僧伽、沙门众俱,即共处一处的意思。通过‘约五百’等,阐明其数量之多。这里的‘matta’一词是量度之意,如同‘于食知量’等处所说。‘一切善贤品应详细了知’意指,应将一切善贤品的内容引用于此详细说明,这是其中的意图。显示巴利原文
Idāni yathāvuttamatthaṃ pāḷiyā vibhāvento āha ‘‘yathāhā’’tiādi. Tattha ekamidāhanti ettha idanti nipātamattaṃ. Ekaṃ samayanti ca bhummatthe upayogavacanaṃ, ekasmiṃ samayeti vuttaṃ hoti. Pāvāyāti pāvānagarato, tattha piṇḍāya caritvā kusināraṃ gamissāmīti addhānamaggappaṭipannoti vuttaṃ hoti. Addhānamaggoti ca dīghamaggo vuccati. Dīghapariyāyo hettha addhānasaddo. Mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhinti guṇamahattenapi saṅkhyāmahattenapi mahatā. Bhikkhūnaṃ saṅghena bhikkhusaṅghena, samaṇagaṇena saddhiṃ ekatoti attho. ‘‘Pañcamattehī’’tiādinā saṅkhyāmahattaṃ vibhāveti. Matta-saddo cettha pamāṇavacano ‘‘bhojane mattaññutā’’tiādīsu viya. Sabbaṃ subhaddakaṇḍaṃ vitthārato veditabbanti sabbaṃ subhaddakaṇḍaṃ idha ānetvā vitthārato dassetabbanti adhippāyo.
‘tato paraṃ’意为从激起比丘们精勤之后,这是阿阇梨法护长老所说。然而在《大义注》中说:‘tato paraṃ’是指从善贤品之后。我们不应认为,只有此处才是核心。因为这种激起精勤的方式,正是‘贤友们,来吧,让我们结集法与律,以免非正法显扬……’这一段。因此,不应当只说‘从激起精勤之后’,因为在下文中,经文本身并没有述及激起精勤的方式。此处的经文顺序是——显示巴利原文
‘‘Tato paranti tato bhikkhūnaṃ ussāhajananato para’’nti ācariyadhammapālattherena vuttaṃ. Mahāgaṇṭhipade pana ‘‘tato paranti subhaddakaṇḍato para’’nti vuttaṃ. Idamevettha sārato paccetabbanti no takko. Ayameva hi ussāhajananappakāro, yadidaṃ ‘‘handa mayaṃ, āvuso, dhammañca vinayañca saṅgāyeyyāma, pure adhammo dippatī’’tiādi, tasmā ussāhajananato paranti na vattabbaṃ heṭṭhā ussāhajananappakārassa pāḷiyaṃ avuttattā. Ayañhettha pāḷikkamo –
那时,尊者大迦叶对诸比丘说:“贤友们,一时,我从波婆出发,与约五百人的大比丘僧团一起,正走在前往拘尸那罗的途中。贤友们,那时我离开道路,坐在一棵树下。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Atha kho āyasmā mahākassapo bhikkhū āmantesi, ekamidāhaṃ, āvuso, samayaṃ pāvāya kusināraṃ addhānamaggappaṭipanno mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṃ pañcamattehi bhikkhusatehi. Atha khvāhaṃ, āvuso, maggā okkamma aññatarasmiṃ rukkhamūle nisīdiṃ.
当时,有一位邪命外道从拘尸那罗拿着曼陀罗花,正走在前往波婆的途中。贤友们,我远远看见那位邪命外道走来,便对他说:‘贤友,你知道我们的导师吗?’‘是的,贤友,我知道。沙门乔达摩今天已经般涅槃七天了,我从那里拿了这朵曼陀罗花。’贤友们,在那里,那些未离欲的比丘,有的举臂哭泣,有的倒地翻滚,辗转反侧,说:‘世尊这么快就般涅槃了,善逝这么快就般涅槃了,世间之眼这么快就隐没了。’而那些已离欲的比丘,则具足正念正知,安忍地说:‘诸行无常,于此何处可得?’显示巴利原文
‘‘Tena kho pana samayena aññataro ājīvako kusinārāya mandāravapupphaṃ gahetvā pāvaṃ addhānamaggappaṭipanno hoti. Addasaṃ kho ahaṃ, āvuso, taṃ ājīvakaṃ dūratova āgacchantaṃ, disvāna taṃ ājīvakaṃ etadavocaṃ ‘apāvuso, amhākaṃ satthāraṃ jānāsī’ti ? ‘Āma, āvuso, jānāmi. Ajja sattāhaparinibbuto samaṇo gotamo, tato me idaṃ mandāravapupphaṃ gahitanti. Tatrāvuso, ye te bhikkhū avītarāgā, appekacce bāhā paggayha kandanti, chinnapātaṃ papatanti āvaṭṭanti vivaṭṭanti, ‘atikhippaṃ bhagavā parinibbuto, atikhippaṃ sugato parinibbuto, atikhippaṃ cakkhuṃ loke antarahita’nti. Ye pana te bhikkhū vītarāgā, te satā sampajānā adhivāsenti ‘aniccā saṅkhārā, taṃ kutettha labbhā’’’ti.
贤友们,那时我便对那些比丘说:‘够了,贤友们,不要忧愁,不要悲泣。贤友们,这难道不是世尊预先说过的吗?“一切可爱、可意的,都将别离、分开、变易。贤友们,在这点上,又如何能有所得呢?凡是已生、已有、有为、坏灭之法,若要它不坏灭,那是不可能的。”’显示巴利原文
‘‘Atha khvāhaṃ, āvuso, te bhikkhū etadavocaṃ – ‘alaṃ, āvuso, mā socittha mā paridevittha, nanvetaṃ, āvuso, bhagavatā paṭikacceva akkhātaṃ ‘sabbeheva piyehi manāpehi nānābhāvo vinābhāvo aññathābhāvo. Taṃ kutettha, āvuso, labbhā, yaṃ taṃ jātaṃ bhūtaṃ saṅkhataṃ palokadhammaṃ, taṃ vata mā palujjī’ti netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatī’’ti.
贤友们,那时,有一位名叫须跋陀的年长出家人坐在那个集会中。贤友们,那时,年长出家人须跋陀对那些比丘们这样说:‘够了,贤友们,不要忧愁,不要悲泣。我们从那位大沙门那里得到了充分的解脱。过去我们常被困扰:“这对你们是允许的,这对你们是不允许的。”而现在,我们想做什么就能做什么,不想做什么就不做。贤友们,来吧,让我们来结集法与律,以免非法显扬而法被压抑,非律显扬而律被压抑;以免宣说非法者强盛而宣说法者衰弱,宣说非律者强盛而宣说律者衰弱。’显示巴利原文
‘‘Tena kho pana samayena, āvuso, subhaddo nāma vuḍḍhapabbajito tassaṃ parisāyaṃ nisinno hoti. Atha kho āvuso subhaddo vuḍḍhapabbajito te bhikkhū etadavoca ‘alaṃ, āvuso, mā socittha mā paridevittha, sumuttā mayaṃ tena mahāsamaṇena, upaddutā ca mayaṃ homa’ ‘idaṃ vo kappati, idaṃ vo na kappatī’ti, ‘idāni pana mayaṃ yaṃ icchissāma, taṃ karissāma, yaṃ na icchissāma, na taṃ karissāmā’ti. Handa mayaṃ āvuso dhammañca vinayañca saṅgāyeyyāma, pure adhammo dippati, dhammo paṭibāhīyati, avinayo pure dippati, vinayo paṭibāhīyati, pure adhammavādino balavanto honti, dhammavādino dubbalā honti, pure avinayavādino balavanto honti, vinayavādino dubbalā hontī’’ti.
‘那么,尊者,请长老挑选比丘吧。’于是,具寿大迦叶挑选了四百九十九位阿罗汉。比丘们对具寿大迦叶这样说:‘尊者,这位具寿阿难虽然还是学人,却不可能因贪欲、瞋恚、愚痴、怖畏而走入非道,并且他在世尊面前领受了丰富的法与律。那么,尊者,请长老也挑选具寿阿难吧。’显示巴利原文
‘‘‘Tena hi, bhante, thero bhikkhū uccinatū’ti. Atha kho āyasmā mahākassapo ekenūnapañcaarahantasatāni uccini. Bhikkhū āyasmantaṃ mahākassapaṃ etadavocuṃ ‘ayaṃ, bhante, āyasmā ānando kiñcāpi sekkho, abhabbo chandā dosā mohā bhayā agatiṃ gantuṃ, bahu cānena bhagavato santike dhammo ca vinayo ca pariyatto. Tena hi, bhante, thero āyasmantampi ānandaṃ uccinatū’’’tiādi (cūḷava. 437).
因此,“从此之后”应理解为“从须跋陀品之后”的意思。因为“应详细了知全部须跋陀品”这句话,展示了“我们不想要的,就不做”这一范围的须跋陀品经文之后,现在为显示其余激发精进的经文,而宣说了“来吧,贤友们”等语。显示巴利原文
Tasmā tato paranti ettha subhaddakaṇḍato paranti evamattho daṭṭhabbo. ‘‘Sabbaṃ subhaddakaṇḍaṃ vitthārato veditabba’’nti hi iminā ‘‘yaṃ na icchissāma, na taṃ karissāmā’’ti etaṃ pariyantaṃ subhaddakaṇḍapāḷiṃ dassetvā idāni avasesaṃ ussāhajananappakārappavattaṃ pāḷimeva dassento ‘‘handa mayaṃ āvuso’’tiādimāha.
其中,“先前非法盛行”一句:所谓非法,是指与十善业道法相对立的非法。“先前盛行”的意思是但愿不要盛行。或者,其含义为:在非法还能压制正法之前,在那更早的时候。这里的“pure”一词用于指即将来临的未来。“dippati”意为将会盛行。因为与“pure”一词结合,此处的现在时态用于表达未来义,例如“在天将下雨之前”的用法。然而,有些人对此这样解释:“‘pure’如同对于正在赶路的人来说,将要走的路被称为‘前面’一样,此处也应这样理解。”所谓“非律”,是指与断除、防护等律相对立的非律。此处也应注意到有“iti”一词,与“据说持律者变得弱小”及“此后”相关联。但在某些抄本中未见“iti”一词,不过在经文和长部注疏中确实有“iti”一词。显示巴利原文
Tattha pure adhammo dippatīti ettha adhammo nāma dasakusalakammapathadhammapaṭipakkhabhūto adhammo. Pure dippatīti api nāma dippati. Atha vā yāva adhammo dhammaṃ paṭibāhituṃ samattho hoti, tato puretaramevāti attho. Āsanne hi anāgate ayaṃ puresaddo. Dippatīti dippissati. Pure-saddayogena hi anāgatatthe ayaṃ vattamānapayogo yathā ‘‘purā vassati devo’’ti. Keci panettha evaṃ vaṇṇayanti ‘‘pureti pacchā anāgate yathā addhānaṃ gacchantassa gantabbamaggo ‘pure’ti vuccati, tathā idha daṭṭhabba’’nti. Avinayoti pahānavinayasaṃvaravinayānaṃ paṭipakkhabhūto avinayo. ‘‘Vinayavādino dubbalā hontī’’ti evaṃ iti-saddopi ettha daṭṭhabbo, ‘‘tato paraṃ āhā’’ti iminā sambandho. Potthakesu pana katthaci iti-saddo na dissati, pāḷiyaṃ pana dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathāyañca attheva iti-saddo.
“那么”是一个表示催促的不变词。那些比丘在催促遴选时,对大迦叶长老这样说道。“请遴选比丘”的意思是:请遴选出适合结集的比丘并选定他们。通过“他掌握了全部九分教……乃至……教法”这句,显示了即使那些如前所述的、以干观者漏尽者为下限的比丘,也具备教理与证悟,但与那些具足无碍解、三明等功德的人相比,后者的教理与证悟成就达到顶点,因此对结集有更大的帮助。其中,“掌握全部九分教主教法之教理者”:所谓“全部九分教”,是指具足全部修多罗、祗夜等九分教的,或者它拥有这些的,即“全部九分教”,也就是导师的教法。因为是欲求利益者所应学习的,并且是现世等人生利益的资具,故称为“教理”,指三藏。持守这称为“全部九分教主教法”的教理者,即为“掌握全部九分教主教法之教理者”,意指那样的人。由于未破除众多各类烦恼及身见,故那些烦恼产生他们,或由那些烦恼所生,故称“凡夫”。凡夫有两种:盲目凡夫和善良凡夫。其中,对于蕴、界、处等没有学习、遍问、听闻、受持、审察的人,是盲目凡夫。具备这些的人,是善良凡夫。此处所指的显示巴利原文
Tena hīti uyyojanatthe nipāto. Uccinane uyyojentā hi taṃ mahākassapattheraṃ evamāhaṃsu. Bhikkhū uccinatūti saṅgītiyā anurūpe bhikkhū uccinitvā gaṇhātūti attho. ‘‘Sakalanavaṅga…pe… pariggahesī’’ti etena sukkhavipassakakhīṇāsavapariyantānaṃ yathāvuttapuggalānaṃ satipi āgamādhigamasabbhāve saha paṭisambhidāhi tevijjādiguṇayuttānaṃ āgamādhigamasampattiyā ukkaṃsagatattā saṅgītiyā bahūpakārataṃ dasseti. Tattha sakalanavaṅgasatthusāsanapariyattidhareti sakalaṃ suttageyyādi navaṅgaṃ ettha, etassa vā atthīti sakalanavaṅgaṃ, satthusāsanaṃ. Atthakāmena pariyāpuṇitabbato diṭṭhadhammikādipurisattapariyattabhāvato ca pariyattīti tīṇi piṭakāni vuccanti, taṃ sakalanavaṅgasatthusāsanasaṅkhātaṃ pariyattiṃ dhārentīti sakalanavaṅgasatthusāsanapariyattidharā, tādiseti attho. Bahūnaṃ nānappakārānaṃ kilesānaṃ sakkāyadiṭṭhiyā ca avihatattā tā janenti, tāhi vā janitāti puthujjanā. Duvidhā puthujjanā andhaputhujjanā kalyāṇaputhujjanāti. Tattha yesaṃ khandhadhātuāyatanādīsu uggahaparipucchāsavanadhāraṇapaccavekkhaṇāni natthi, te andhaputhujjanā. Yesaṃ tāni atthi, te kalyāṇaputhujjanā. Te idha ‘‘puthujjanā’’ti adhippetā. Samathabhāvanāsinehābhāvena sukkhā lūkhā asiniddhā vipassanā etesanti sukkhavipassakā.
“掌握三藏一切教理分类者”:三藏的集合称为“三藏”,持守此称为三藏的、依九分教等而多种分类的一切教理之分类者,即为“掌握三藏一切教理分类者”,意指那样的人。随顺地、随顺地令具足者增长、增广,故称为“随顺力”,随顺力即是“威力”,即影响力。具有大威力者,称为“大威力者”。“三明等分类者”:三明本身即是“三明”,以这些为起始的六通等,称为“三明等”,这些分类即多种类别,为那些漏尽者所具有,故称“三明等分类者”,意指那样的漏尽者。或者,拥有三明者称为“三明者”,以他为起始的六通等,称为“三明等”,这些分类为那些漏尽者所具有,故称“三明等分类者”,意指那样的人。关于那些比丘而说此语的,意思是:关于那些比丘,在结集犍度中说了“那时,具寿……”等语。显示巴利原文
Tipiṭakasabbapariyattippabhedadhareti tiṇṇaṃ piṭakānaṃ samāhāro tipiṭakaṃ, tipiṭakasaṅkhātaṃ navaṅgādivasena anekadhā bhinnaṃ sabbapariyattippabhedaṃ dhārentīti tipiṭakasabbapariyattippabhedadharā, tādiseti attho. Anu anu taṃsamaṅgīnaṃ bhāveti vaḍḍhetīti anubhāvo, anubhāvo eva ānubhāvo, pabhāvo. Mahanto ānubhāvo yesaṃ te mahānubhāvā. Tevijjādibhedeti tisso vijjāyeva tevijjā, tā ādi yesaṃ chaḷabhiññādīnaṃ te tevijjādayo, te bhedā anekappakārā bhinnā etesanti tevijjādibhedā, khīṇāsavā, tādiseti attho. Atha vā tisso vijjā etassa atthīti tevijjo, so ādi yesaṃ chaḷabhiññādīnaṃ te tevijjādayo, te bhedā yesaṃ khīṇāsavānaṃ te tevijjādibhedā, tādiseti attho. Ye sandhāya idaṃ vuttanti ye bhikkhū sandhāya idaṃ ‘‘atha kho āyasmā’’tiādivacanaṃ saṅgītikkhandhake (cūḷava. 437) vuttanti attho.
为何称为“有学”?因“他学习”,故称“有学”。或者,学习的行为即是“学”,那本身就是他的戒,故称“有学”。由于他尚未完成学习,且心倾注于此,故一向以学习为戒;不像无学者那般,学习已达究竟,于所学处止息了精进;也不像放逸凡夫那般,心中不倾注于此。或者,由圣者的出生而生于三学之中,或安住于其中,故称“有学”。或者,以此而见,称为“见”,即道果正见。与见俱有者,故称“有学”。由于上三道的作用尚未完成,故与应作之事俱有,即“有应作之事者”。对他而言,难道没有非面对面的受持吗?显示巴利原文
Kissa panāti kasmā pana. Sikkhatīti sekkho, atha vā sikkhanaṃ sikkhā, sāyeva tassa sīlanti sekkho. So hi apariyositasikkhattā ca tadadhimuttattā ca ekantena sikkhanasīlo na asekkho viya pariniṭṭhitasikkho tattha paṭipassaddhussāho, nāpi vissaṭṭhasikkho pacurajano viya tattha anadhimutto. Atha vā ariyāya jātiyā tīsu sikkhāsu jāto, tattha vā bhavoti sekkho. Atha vā ikkhati etāyāti ikkhā, maggaphalasammādiṭṭhi. Saha ikkhāyāti sekkho. Uparimaggattayakiccassa apariyositattā saha karaṇīyenāti sakaraṇīyo. Assāti anena. Asammukhā paṭiggahitaṃ nāma natthīti nanu ca –
我从佛陀处得八十二,从比丘处得二千;
八万四千法门,皆由我而流传。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Dvāsīti buddhato gaṇhiṃ, dve sahassāni bhikkhuto; Caturāsīti sahassāni, ye me dhammā pavattino’’ti. (theragā. 1027) –
既然如此,这又如何成立呢?虽说“从比丘处得二千”,但那是视作在世尊面前亲自纳受而说,因此并无矛盾。“有很大帮助”,意思是具大饶益。此处的“kāra”一词,是表作饶益之语。“对于他”,意即可有。显示巴利原文
Vuttattā kathametaṃ yujjatīti? Dve sahassāni bhikkhutoti vuttampi bhagavato santike paṭiggahitamevāti katvā vuttanti nāyaṃ virodho. Bahukārattāti bahuupakārattā. Upakāravacano hettha kārasaddo. Assāti bhaveyya.
“过于熟稔”,即极度信任。“Nanti”指阿难长老,与“教诫”一词勾连。由于阿难长老的随行弟子中多有新学,且大多还俗,大迦叶长老才说:“这个少年人,真不知分寸。”事情是这样的:大师般涅槃后,大迦叶长老在因大师般涅槃而聚集的比丘僧团中坐下,为结集法与律,拣选五百位比丘后说:“贤友们,我们在王舍城雨安居,结集法与律。雨安居前,各位各自料理了余事,便到王舍城集合。”说罢,自己便先行前往王舍城。阿难长老也带着世尊的衣钵,一边教导大众,一边前往舍卫城,又从那里启程,在南山一带游行,最后前往王舍城。那时,阿难长老身边约有三十位共住弟子,多半是些新学比丘,有戒腊一年、两年的,还有未受具足戒者,结果几乎都还俗了。他们当初为何出家,如今又为何还俗?据说,他们的父母曾想:“阿难长老是大师信赖之人,他为侍奉大师,特意乞求了八种恩许,能引导大师去任何想去的地方。我们把孩子送到他门下出家,他便能请来大师,大师来的时候,我们就可得到大恭敬了。”首先以此为缘,亲属们才让他们出了家。然而大师般涅槃之后,他们的这份期望落空了,于是就在一日之间,让他们全都还俗了。显示巴利原文
Ativiya vissatthoti ativiya vissāsiko. Nanti ānandattheraṃ, ‘‘ovadatī’’ti iminā sambandho. Ānandattherassa yebhuyyena navakāya parisāya vibbhamanena mahākassapatthero evamāha ‘‘na vāyaṃ kumārako mattamaññāsī’’ti. Tathā hi parinibbute satthari mahākassapatthero satthuparinibbāne sannipatitassa bhikkhusaṅghassa majjhe nisīditvā dhammavinayasaṅgāyanatthaṃ pañcasate bhikkhū uccinitvā ‘‘āvuso, rājagahe vassaṃ vasantā dhammavinayaṃ saṅgāyeyyāma, tumhe pure vassūpanāyikāya attano attano palibodhaṃ pacchinditvā rājagahe sannipatathā’’ti vatvā attanā rājagahaṃ gato. Ānandattheropi bhagavato pattacīvaramādāya mahājanaṃ saññāpento sāvatthiṃ gantvā tato nikkhamma rājagahaṃ gacchanto dakkhiṇagirismiṃ cārikaṃ cari. Tasmiṃ samaye ānandattherassa tiṃsamattā saddhivihārikā yebhuyyena kumārabhūtā ekavassikaduvassikabhikkhū ceva anupasampannā ca vibbhamiṃsu. Kasmā panete pabbajitā, kasmā vibbhamiṃsūti? Tesaṃ kira mātāpitaro cintesuṃ ‘‘ānandatthero satthuvissāsiko aṭṭha vare yācitvā upaṭṭhahati, icchiticchitaṭṭhānaṃ satthāraṃ gahetvā gantuṃ sakkoti, amhākaṃ dārake etassa santike pabbājessāma, so satthāraṃ gahetvā āgamissati, tasmiṃ āgate mayaṃ mahāsakkāraṃ kātuṃ labhissāmā’’ti iminā tāva kāraṇena nesaṃ ñātakā te pabbājesuṃ. Satthari pana parinibbute tesaṃ sā patthanā upacchinnā, atha ne ekadivaseneva uppabbājesuṃ.
那时,大迦叶长老见阿难长老在南山游行后回到王舍城,便如此说:“这个少年人,真不知分寸。”这在《迦叶相应》中已这样说过——显示巴利原文
Atha ānandattheraṃ dakkhiṇagirismiṃ cārikaṃ caritvā rājagahamāgataṃ disvā mahākassapatthero evamāha ‘‘na vāyaṃ kumārako mattamaññāsī’’ti. Vuttañhetaṃ kassapasaṃyutte –
那么,阿难贤友,你为何与这些新比丘——不守护根门、饮食不知量、不勤于觉醒者——一同游行呢?你似在践踏庄稼般游走,似在毁坏家族般游走。阿难贤友,你的徒众正在瓦解,你的新学众正在败坏,这个幼稚者确实不知分寸。显示巴利原文
‘‘Atha kiñcarahi tvaṃ, āvuso ānanda, imehi navehi bhikkhūhi indriyesu aguttadvārehi bhojane amattaññūhi jāgariyaṃ ananuyuttehi saddhiṃ cārikaṃ carasi, sassaghātaṃ maññe carasi, kulūpaghātaṃ maññe carasi, olujjati kho te, āvuso ānanda, parisā, palujjanti kho te āvuso navappāyā, na vāyaṃ kumārako mattamaññāsīti.
尊者迦叶,我头上已生白发,然而我们至今仍未能摆脱尊者大迦叶的“幼稚者”之称。正因为如此,阿难贤友,你与这些新比丘——不守护根门、饮食不知量、不勤于觉醒者——一同游行,你似在践踏庄稼般游走,似在毁坏家族般游走。阿难贤友,你的徒众正在瓦解,你的新学众正在败坏,这个幼稚者确实不知分寸。显示巴利原文
‘‘Api me bhante kassapa sirasmiṃ palitāni jātāni, atha ca pana mayaṃ ajjāpi āyasmato mahākassapassa kumārakavādā na muccāmāti. Tathā hi pana tvaṃ, āvuso ānanda, imehi navehi bhikkhūhi indriyesu aguttadvārehi bhojane amattaññūhi jāgariyaṃ ananuyuttehi saddhiṃ cārikaṃ carasi, sassaghātaṃ maññe carasi, kulūpaghātaṃ maññe carasi, olujjati kho te, āvuso ānanda, parisā, palujjanti kho te āvuso navappāyā, na vāyaṃ kumārako mattamaññāsī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.154).
其中,“你似在践踏庄稼般游走”意为:你如同在毁坏庄稼般地游走。“似在毁坏家族般游走”意为:你如同在破坏、伤害、打击家族般地游走。“瓦解”即败坏、破裂。“阿难贤友,你的新学众正在败坏”意为:贤友,如此,你的这些大多是新学的、戒腊一年两年的年轻比丘以及沙弥正在败坏。“这个幼稚者确实不知分寸”是长老呵责他说:“这个幼稚者确实不知自己的分量。”“未能摆脱幼稚者之讥”意为:未能摆脱“幼稚者”的指摘。“正因为如此,你”这句话是为了说明他之所以被如此指责的原因。此处的意旨是:因为你与这些不具根律仪的新学比丘一同游走,所以与幼稚者一同游走的你,理应被称为幼稚者。显示巴利原文
Tattha (saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 2.2.154) sassaghātaṃ maññecarasīti sassaṃ ghātento viya āhiṇḍasi. Kulūpaghātaṃ maññe carasīti kulāni upaghātento viya hananto viya āhananto viya āhiṇḍasi. Olujjatīti palujjati bhijjati. Palujjanti kho te āvuso navappāyāti, āvuso, evaṃ ete tuyhaṃ pāyena yebhuyyena navakā ekavassikaduvassikadaharā ceva sāmaṇerā ca palujjanti. Na vāyaṃ kumārako mattamaññāsīti ayaṃ kumārako attano pamāṇaṃ na vata jānātīti theraṃ tajjento āha. Kumārakavādā na muccāmāti kumārakavādato na muccāma. Tathā hi pana tvanti idamassa evaṃ vattabbatāya kāraṇadassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Ayañhettha adhippāyo – yasmā tvaṃ imehi navakehi bhikkhūhi indriyasaṃvararahitehi saddhiṃ vicarasi, tasmā kumārakehi saddhiṃ caranto ‘‘kumārako’’ti vattabbataṃ arahasīti.
在“na vāyaṃ kumārako mattamaññāsī”一句中,“vā”是语助词。因为“vā”可表比喻、集合、疑惑、决定、语助、选择等多种意义。例如,在“paṇḍito vāpi tena so”(《法句经》63)等处,表比喻,意为“相似”;在“taṃ vāpi dhīrā muni vedayanti”(《经集》213)等处,表集合;在“ke vā ime kassa vā”(《波罗夷》296)等处,表疑惑;在“ayaṃ vā imesaṃ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ sabbabālo sabbamūḷho”(《长部》1.181)等处,表决定;在“ye hi keci, bhikkhave, samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā”(《中部》1.170;《相应部》2.13)等处,表选择。而在此处,则应当看作是语助词。因此,阿阇梨法护长老说:“在解释‘vā’的意义时,‘na vāyaṃ kumārako mattamaññāsī’(《相应部》2.154)等句中的‘vā’,是语助词。”注释显示巴利原文
‘‘Na vāyaṃ kumārako mattamaññāsī’’ti ettha vā-saddo padapūraṇe. Vā-saddo hi upamānasamuccayasaṃsayavavassaggapadapūraṇavikappādīsu bahūsu atthesu dissati. Tathā hesa ‘‘paṇḍito vāpi tena so’’tiādīsu (dha. pa. 63) upamāne dissati, sadisabhāveti attho. ‘‘Taṃ vāpi dhīrā muni vedayantī’’tiādīsu (su. ni. 213) samuccaye. ‘‘Ke vā ime kassa vā’’tiādīsu (pārā. 296) saṃsaye. ‘‘Ayaṃ vā imesaṃ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ sabbabālo sabbamūḷho’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.181) vavassagge. ‘‘Ye hi keci, bhikkhave, samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.170; saṃ. ni. 2.13) vikappeti. Idha pana padapūraṇe daṭṭhabbo. Teneva ca ācariyadhammapālattherena vuttaṃ ‘‘vāsaddassa atthuddhāraṃ karontena ‘na vāyaṃ kumārako mattamaññāsī’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 2.154) padapūraṇe’’ti. Aṭṭhakathāyampi (saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 2.2.154) ettakameva vuttaṃ ‘‘na vāyaṃ kumārako mattamaññāsīti ayaṃ kumārako attano pamāṇaṃ na vata jānātīti theraṃ tajjento āhā’’ti. Etthāpi vatāti vacanasiliṭṭhatāya vuttaṃ. Yaṃ panettha kenaci vuttaṃ ‘‘na vāyanti ettha vāti vibhāsā, aññāsipi na aññāsipīti attho’’ti . Taṃ tassa matimattanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Na hettha ayamattho sambhavati, tasmā attano pamāṇaṃ nāññāsīti evamattho veditabbo. Tatrāti evaṃ sati. Chandāgamanaṃ viyāti ettha chandā āgamanaṃ viyāti padacchedo kātabbo, chandena āgamanaṃ pavattanaṃ viyāti attho, chandena akattabbakaraṇaṃ viyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Chandaṃ vā āgacchati sampayogavasenāti chandāgamanaṃ, tathā pavatto apāyagamanīyo akusalacittuppādo. Atha vā ananurūpaṃ gamanaṃ agamanaṃ, chandena agamanaṃ chandāgamanaṃ, chandena sinehena ananurūpaṃ gamanaṃ pavattanaṃ akattabbakaraṇaṃ viyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Asekkhapaṭisambhidāppatteti asekkhabhūtā paṭisambhidā asekkhapaṭisambhidā, taṃ patte, paṭiladdhaasekkhapaṭisambhideti attho. Anumatiyāti anuññāya, yācanāyāti vuttaṃ hoti.
“即使是有学”这句话,并非指有学者不会走向非道这一共同性,而应理解为仅仅是在拣别无学者。因为四种非道之行在初道即已断除,因此,虽然是有学,长老却仍然拣选出具寿阿难——应如此理解此处的关联。不过,不可作“即使是有学,也不能走向非道”这样的承接。而在法合诵中,为了显示他的阿罗汉身份,便借着“不能”等语,述说彼时已具的功德。其中,“以欲”即因贪欲、因爱著之义。“走向非道”即走向不应去之处,做不应做之事。这四种非道之行,在分配物品和作裁决时可被见到。其中,分配物品时,若将自己所负责的比丘们不喜欢的物品调换成喜欢的,即称为以欲走向非道;若将不属于自己负责的比丘们喜欢的物品调换成不喜欢的,即称为以嗔走向非道;若不知物品中哪些可分配及其具体状况,即称为以痴走向非道;若因害怕多言者或倚仗国王等之人,心想“若给他们不喜欢的,他们可能会加害于我”,出于恐惧而调换成喜欢的,即称为以怖走向非道。然而,若不如是而行,对所有人皆如秤之平衡、如量之公正,保持中立,该得什么便给什么,此人即名为不走向四种非道。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kiñcāpi sekkho’’ti idaṃ na sekkhānaṃ agatigamanasabbhāvena vuttaṃ, asekkhānaṃyeva pana uccinitattāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Paṭhamamaggeneva hi cattāri agatigamanāni pahīyanti, tasmā kiñcāpi sekkho, tathāpi thero āyasmantampi ānandaṃ uccinatūti evamettha sambandho veditabbo. Na pana kiñcāpi sekkho, tathāpi abhabbo agatiṃ gantunti yojetabbaṃ. ‘‘Abhabbo’’tiādinā pana dhammasaṅgītiyā tassa arahabhāvaṃ dassentā vijjamāne guṇe kathenti. Tattha chandāti chandena, sinehenāti attho. Agatiṃ gantunti agantabbaṃ gantuṃ, akattabbaṃ kātunti vuttaṃ hoti. Imāni pana cattāri agatigamanāni bhaṇḍabhājanīye ca vinicchayaṭṭhāne ca labbhanti. Tattha bhaṇḍabhājanīye tāva attano bhārabhūtānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ amanāpe bhaṇḍe sampatte taṃ parivattitvā manāpaṃ dento chandāgatiṃ gacchati nāma. Attano pana abhārabhūtānaṃ manāpe bhaṇḍe sampatte taṃ parivattitvā amanāpaṃ dento dosāgatiṃ gacchati nāma. Bhaṇḍesu bhājanīyavatthuñca ṭhitikañca ajānanto mohāgatiṃ gacchati nāma. Mukharānaṃ vā rājādinissitānaṃ vā ‘‘ime me amanāpe bhaṇḍe dinne anatthaṃ kareyyu’’nti bhayena parivattitvā manāpaṃ dento bhayāgatiṃ gacchati nāma. Yo pana evaṃ na gacchati, sabbesaṃ tulābhūto pamāṇabhūto majjhattova hutvā yaṃ yassa pāpuṇāti, tadeva tassa deti, ayaṃ catubbidhampi agatiṃ na gacchati nāma. Vinicchayaṭṭhāne pana attano bhārabhūtassa garukāpattiṃ lahukāpattiṃ katvā kathento chandāgatiṃ gacchati nāma. Itarassa lahukāpattiṃ garukāpattiṃ katvā kathento dosāgatiṃ gacchati nāma. Āpattivuṭṭhānaṃ pana samuccayakkhandhakañca ajānanto mohāgatiṃ gacchati nāma. Mukharassa vā rājapūjitassa vā ‘‘ayaṃ me garukaṃ katvā āpattiṃ kathentassa anatthampi kareyyā’’ti garukameva lahukāpattiṃ kathento bhayāgatiṃ gacchati nāma. Yo pana sabbesaṃ yathābhūtameva kathesi, ayaṃ catubbidhampi agatigamanaṃ na gacchati nāma. Theropi tādiso catunnampi agatigamanānaṃ paṭhamamaggeneva pahīnattā, tasmā saṅgāyanavasena dhammavinayavinicchaye sampatte chandādivasena aññathā akathetvā yathābhūtameva kathetīti vuttaṃ ‘‘abhabbo…pe… agatiṃ gantu’’nti. Pariyattoti adhīto, uggahitoti attho.
“以被拣选者”即通过拣选而被采纳者。他起了这样的念头:即他起了这样的思虑。“王舍城实为大行境”一句中,《小义释》和《中义释》说:“‘王舍城’是连同王舍城近郊而说的”。牛在此处行走,故为行境(牧场);如同行境一样,即是行境,指乞食行处。此城有大的行境,或在此城中有大的行境,故王舍城为大行境。“久住之业”即能长久住留的业。异类之人,如须跋陀之类。“可能会阻挠”即可能会阻止之义。他以白二甘马告知:显示巴利原文
Uccinitenāti uccinitvā gahitena. Etadahosīti etaṃ parivitakkanaṃ ahosi. Rājagahaṃ kho mahāgocaranti ettha ‘‘rājagahanti rājagahasāmantaṃ gahetvā vutta’’nti cūḷagaṇṭhipade majjhimagaṇṭhipade ca vuttaṃ. Gāvo caranti etthāti gocaro, gocaro viya gocaro, bhikkhācaraṇaṭṭhānaṃ. So mahanto assa, etthāti vā mahāgocaraṃ, rājagahaṃ. Thāvarakammanti ciraṭṭhāyikammaṃ. Visabhāgapuggalo subhaddasadiso. Ukkoṭeyyāti nivāreyyāti attho. Ñattidutiyena kammena sāvesīti –
诸尊者,请僧团听我言:若僧团时机适当,僧团当认可此五百比丘——‘于王舍城入雨安居,以合诵法与律;其他比丘不得于王舍城入雨安居。’此为动议。显示巴利原文
‘‘Suṇātu me, āvuso, saṅgho, yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṃ, saṅgho imāni pañca bhikkhusatāni sammanneyya ‘rājagahe vassaṃ vasantāni dhammañca vinayañca saṅgāyituṃ, na aññehi bhikkhūhi rājagahe vassaṃ vasitabba’nti, esā ñatti.
诸尊者,请僧团听我言:僧团认可此五百比丘——‘于王舍城入雨安居,以合诵法与律;其他比丘不得于王舍城入雨安居。’凡具寿中,认可此事者,请默然;不认可者,请发言。显示巴利原文
‘‘Suṇātu me, āvuso, saṅgho, saṅgho imāni pañca bhikkhusatāni sammannati ‘rājagahe vassaṃ vasantāni dhammañca vinayañca saṅgāyituṃ, na aññehi bhikkhūhi rājagahe vassaṃ vasitabba’nti, yassāyasmato khamati imesaṃ pañcannaṃ bhikkhusatānaṃ sammuti ‘rājagahe vassaṃ vasantānaṃ dhammañca vinayañca saṅgāyituṃ, na aññehi bhikkhūhi rājagahe vassaṃ vasitabba’nti, so tuṇhassa. Yassa nakkhamati, so bhāseyya.
僧团已认可此五百比丘——‘于王舍城入雨安居,以合诵法与律;其他比丘不得于王舍城入雨安居。’僧团既已认可,故默然。我如此受持。显示巴利原文
‘‘Sammatāni saṅghena imāni pañca bhikkhusatāni ‘rājagahe vassaṃ vasantāni dhammañca vinayañca saṅgāyituṃ, na aññehi bhikkhūhi rājagahe vassaṃ vasitabba’nti, khamati saṅghassa, tasmā tuṇhī, evametaṃ dhārayāmī’’ti (cūḷava. 437) –
他便是通过这样白二甘马的方式告知的。正是针对这一点,才说:“这应依照《合诵犍度》中所说的方法来理解。”显示巴利原文
Evaṃ ñattidutiyena kammena sāvesi. Idaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘taṃ saṅgītikkhandhake vuttanayeneva ñātabba’’nti.
然而,这道甘马语实际上是在如来般涅槃后的第二十一天所作。《长部注疏》中(长部注·第一结集论)有云:“这道甘马语是在如来般涅槃后的第二十一天所作。世尊于毗舍佉月满月日的黎明时分圆寂,随后大众以香花等供养其金色身七日,这七日称为善戏乐日。之后的七日,遗体在火葬堆中经受火化;又经七日,搭建矛枪围栏,于集会堂中供养舍利。如此便过了二十一天。在祇陀木星宿月白分第五日,分配了舍利。分配舍利当天,聚集的大比丘僧团中,有人报告了老年出家者须跋陀所行之事,于是便依照所说方式选定比丘后,宣说了这道甘马语。宣说甘马语后,长老对比丘们说:‘诸贤,现在你们还有四十天的时间,此后便不能说我们有这个障碍了。因此,在此期间,若有人有疾病障碍、或阿阇梨与和尚障碍、或父母障碍,或有需要烧制的钵、需要制作的衣服,他应断除该障,完成应做之事。’如此说完后,长老便由自己的五百随众围绕,前往王舍城;其他大长老们也各自带领随从,为抚慰被忧悲之箭射中的大众,奔赴各方。而富楼那长老则率领七百比丘随众,心想‘我当安慰来到如来般涅槃处的大众’,便留在了拘尸那。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ pana kammavācā tathāgatassa parinibbānato ekavīsatime divase katā. Vuttañhetaṃ dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.paṭhamasaṅgītikathā) ‘‘ayaṃ pana kammavācā tathāgatassa parinibbānato ekavīsatime divase katā. Bhagavā hi visākhapuṇṇamāyaṃ paccūsasamaye parinibbuto, athassa sattāhaṃ suvaṇṇavaṇṇaṃ sarīraṃ gandhamālādīhi pūjayiṃsu. Evaṃ sattāhaṃ sādhukīḷanadivasā nāma ahesuṃ. Tato sattāhaṃ citakāya agginā jhāyi, sattāhaṃ sattipañjaraṃ katvā santhāgārasālāyaṃ dhātupūjaṃ kariṃsūti ekavīsati divasā gatā. Jeṭṭhamūlasukkapakkhapañcamiyaṃ pana dhātuyo bhājayiṃsu. Etasmiṃ dhātubhājanadivase sannipatitassa mahābhikkhusaṅghassa subhaddena vuḍḍhapabbajitena kataṃ anācāraṃ ārocetvā vuttanayeneva bhikkhū uccinitvā ayaṃ kammavācā katā. Imañca pana kammavācaṃ katvā thero bhikkhū āmantesi ‘āvuso idāni tumhākaṃ cattālīsadivasā okāso, tato paraṃ ayaṃ nāma no palibodho atthīti vattuṃ na labbhā, tasmā etthantare yassa rogapalibodho vā ācariyupajjhāyapalibodho vā mātāpitupalibodho vā atthi, pattaṃ vā pana pacitabbaṃ cīvaraṃ vā kātabbaṃ, so taṃ palibodhaṃ chinditvā karaṇīyaṃ karotū’ti. Evañca pana vatvā thero attano pañcasatāya parisāya parivuto rājagahaṃ gato, aññepi mahātherā attano attano parivāraṃ gahetvā sokasallasamappitaṃ mahājanaṃ assāsetukāmā taṃ taṃ disaṃ pakkantā. Puṇṇatthero pana sattasatabhikkhuparivāro ‘tathāgatassa parinibbānaṭṭhānaṃ āgatāgataṃ mahājanaṃ assāsessāmī’ti kusinārāyameva aṭṭhāsi. Āyasmā ānando yathā pubbe aparinibbutassa, evaṃ parinibbutassapi bhagavato sayameva pattacīvaramādāya pañcahi bhikkhusatehi saddhiṃ yena sāvatthi tena cārikaṃ pakkāmi. Gacchato panassa parivārā bhikkhū gaṇanapathaṃ vītivattā’’ti. Tasmā tathāgatassa parinibbānato tīsu sattāhesu atikkantesu ekavīsatime divase imaṃ kammavācaṃ sāvetvā thero rājagahaṃ pakkantoti veditabbaṃ.
既然如此,为何在《吉祥经注疏》(小部注·第一结集论)中又说“七个善戏乐日和七个舍利供养等日过去之后”呢?在提到七个舍利供养等日时,由于两者密不可分,中间火葬堆焚烧的七日实际上也已涵盖在内,故未单独说明。若问既然如此,为何又说“半个月已过,尚有一个半月剩余”呢?这并无过失。因为略微的不足或超出并不计入精确计算,所以整体即使稍有超出,也视同未曾超出。因此,在超出半个月五天的情况下说“半个月已过”,就如同“八十二蕴篇的行仪,在有些地方说为八十蕴篇的行仪”之说一样。同样地,整体纵使稍有不足,也视同未曾不足,因此在不足一个半月五天的情况下,说“一个半月剩余”。正如在《念处分别注疏》中,对于不足六个月的半个月,也说“应作六个月的诵习”之说一样。在那里,对于皮五法等四个五法组和两个六法组,每一组顺诵五日、逆诵五日、顺逆诵五日,又与之前的五法组、六法组一起顺诵五日、逆诵五日、顺逆诵五日。这样各自做三个五日的诵习,合起来再做三个五日的诵习,然后宣说应作六个月的诵习,即类同此说。显示巴利原文
Yadi evaṃ kasmā pana idha maṅgalasuttaṭṭhakathāyañca (khu. pā. aṭṭha. 5.paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathā) ‘‘sattasu sādhukīḷanadivasesu sattasu ca dhātupūjādivasesu vītivattesū’’ti vuttaṃ? Sattasu dhātupūjādivasesu gahitesu tadavinābhāvato majjhe citakāya jhāpanasattāhampi gahitamevāti katvā visuṃ na vuttaṃ viya dissati. Yadi evaṃ atha kasmā ‘‘aḍḍhamāso atikkanto, diyaḍḍhamāso seso’’ti ca vuttanti? Nāyaṃ doso. Appakañhi ūnamadhikaṃ vā gaṇanūpagaṃ na hoti, tasmā samudāyo appakena adhikopi anadhiko viya hotīti katvā aḍḍhamāsato adhikepi pañca divase ‘‘aḍḍhamāso atikkanto’’ti vuttaṃ ‘‘dvāsītikhandhakavattānaṃ katthaci asītikhandhakavattānī’’ti vacanaṃ viya. Tathā appakena ūnopi ca samudāyo anūno viya hotīti katvā ‘‘diyaḍḍhamāsato ūnepi pañca divase diyaḍḍhamāso seso’’ti ca vuttaṃ. Satipaṭṭhānavibhaṅgaṭṭhakathāyañhi (vibha. aṭṭha. 356) chamāsato ūnepi aḍḍhamāse ‘‘cha māse sajjhāyo kātabbo’’ti vuttavacanaṃ viya. Tattha hi tacapañcakādīsu catūsu pañcakesu dvīsu ca chakkesu ekekasmiṃ anulomato pañcāhaṃ, paṭilomato pañcāhaṃ, anulomapaṭilomato pañcāhaṃ, tathā purimapurimehi pañcakachakkehi saddhiṃ anulomato pañcāhaṃ, paṭilomato pañcāhaṃ, anulomapaṭilomato pañcāhanti evaṃ visuṃ tipañcāhaṃ ekato tipañcāhañca sajjhāyaṃ katvā chamāsaṃ sajjhāyo kātabboti vacanaṃ viya. Tattha hi vakkapañcakādīsu tīsu pañcakesu dvīsu ca chakkesu visuṃ heṭṭhimehi ekato ca sajjhāye pañcannaṃ pañcannaṃ pañcakānaṃ vasena pañcamāsaparipuṇṇā labbhanti, tacapañcake pana visuṃ tipañcāhamevāti aḍḍhamāsoyeveko labbhatīti aḍḍhamāsādhikapañcamāsā labbhanti.
因此,正如在彼处,当以月为限定时,即使不足半月,诵习仍以六个月为限;为了阻止所限定的诵习进入第七月等后续月份,故说‘六个月’,并非为了显示在完整的六个月内进行诵习。同样,在此处,当以月为限定时,即使不足五天,也以一个半月为限;为了阻止所限定的时间进入第二月等后续月份,故说‘一个半月剩余’,此处含义应作如是解。否则,诸注疏之说便相互矛盾。或者,应理解为:世尊的遗体在火葬堆中仅焚烧了一日,此乃小诵师们的主张。如此,则般涅槃后,七个善戏乐日已过,第八日于火葬堆焚烧世尊遗体,此后七日举行舍利供养,如是半个月已过,夏季尚余一个半月。即便《大般涅槃经》的巴利文中,也未提及火葬堆焚烧的七日,唯提两个七日;经审察后,可取所喜之说。或以其他不相违的方式寻求理由。至于此处有人说:‘“半个月已过”一句中少了一日,那一日是朔日,名为喧闹日,故于此未计入。’此说不善,因为《大般涅槃经》的巴利文正从朔日开始说七日。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ sati yathā tattha aḍḍhamāse ūnepi māsaparicchedena paricchijjamāne sajjhāye cha māsā paricchedakā hontīti paricchijjamānassa sajjhāyassa sattamāsādimāsantaragamananivāraṇatthaṃ chamāsaggahaṇaṃ kataṃ, na sakalachamāse sajjhāyappavattidassanatthaṃ, evamidhāpi māsavasena kāle paricchijjamāne ūnepi pañcadivase diyaḍḍhamāso paricchedako hotīti paricchijjamānassa kālassa dvimāsādimāsantaragamananivāraṇatthaṃ ‘‘diyaḍḍhamāso seso’’ti diyaḍḍhamāsaggahaṇaṃ katanti evamettha attho gahetabbo. Aññathā ca aṭṭhakathāvacanānaṃ aññamaññavirodho āpajjati. Ekāhameva vā bhagavato sarīraṃ citakāya jhāyīti khuddakabhāṇakānaṃ adhippāyoti gahetabbaṃ. Evañhi sati parinibbānato sattasu sādhukīḷanadivasesu vītivattesu aṭṭhamiyaṃ citakāya bhagavato sarīraṃ jhāpetvā tato paraṃ sattasu divasesu dhātupūjaṃ akaṃsūti aḍḍhamāso atikkanto, gimhānaṃ diyaḍḍho ca māso seso hoti. Parinibbānasuttantapāḷiyampi hi citakāya jhāpanasattāhaṃ na āgataṃ, dveyeva sattāhāni āgatāni, upaparikkhitvā pana yaṃ ruccati, taṃ gahetabbaṃ. Ito aññena vā pakārena yathā na virujjhati, tathā kāraṇaṃ pariyesitabbaṃ. Yaṃ panettha kenaci vuttaṃ ‘‘aḍḍhamāso atikkantoti ettha eko divaso naṭṭho. So pāṭipadadivaso kolāhaladivaso nāma, tasmā idha na gahito’’ti. Taṃ na sundaraṃ parinibbānasuttantapāḷiyaṃ pāṭipadadivasatoyeva paṭṭhāya sattāhassa vuttattā aṭṭhakathāyañca parinibbānadivasenapi saddhiṃ tiṇṇaṃ sattāhānaṃ gahitattā. Tathā hi parinibbānadivasena saddhiṃ tiṇṇaṃ sattāhānaṃ gahitattā jeṭṭhamūlasukkapañcamī ekavīsatimo divaso hoti.
关于‘七个善戏乐日’,此处所谓的‘善戏乐’,是指反复称扬激发悚惧感之事、唱诵与无常相应的歌曲,以供养的方式进行戏乐;因为此戏乐是美妙的,故称‘善戏乐’。或者,以成就自他利益的意义而称为‘善’,他们反复称扬激发悚惧感之事而进行的戏乐即是善戏乐,意思是:由能生广大福德故,这是一种不违来世利益的戏乐安住。在此,由于前一个七日中已部分行了善戏乐,那些日子遂得‘善戏乐日’之名。然而,他们特别于供养舍利等日子方行善戏乐。也正因为如此,在《大般涅槃经》的巴利文中——显示巴利原文
Sattasu sādhukīḷanadivasesūti ettha sādhukīḷanaṃ nāma saṃvegavatthuṃ kittetvā kittetvā aniccatāpaṭisaṃyuttāni gītāni gāyitvā pūjāvasena kīḷanato sundaraṃ kīḷananti sādhukīḷanaṃ. Atha vā saparahitasādhanaṭṭhena sādhu, tesaṃ saṃvegavatthuṃ kittetvā kittetvā kīḷanaṃ sādhukīḷanaṃ, uḷārapuññapasavanato samparāyikatthāvirodhikīḷāvihāroti attho. Ettha ca purimasmiṃ sattāhe sādhukīḷāya ekadesena katattā sādhukīḷanadivasā nāma te jātā. Visesato pana dhātupūjādivasesuyeva sādhukīḷanaṃ akaṃsu. Tatoyeva ca mahāparinibbānasuttantapāḷiyaṃ –
那时,拘尸那罗的末罗人将世尊的遗体安放在集会堂中七日,四周竖立枪矛为栅,围绕弓箭为墙,以舞蹈、歌咏、奏乐、花鬘与熏香,尊敬、敬重、恭敬、供养世尊。(《长部》2.235)显示巴利原文
‘‘Atha kho kosinārakā mallā bhagavato sarīrāni sattāhaṃ santhāgāre sattipañjaraṃ karitvā dhanupākāraṃ parikkhipāpetvā naccehi gītehi vāditehi mālehi gandhehi sakkariṃsu garuṃ kariṃsu mānesuṃ pūjesu’’nti (dī. ni. 2.235).
其注释书(《长部注》2.235)中说:显示巴利原文
Etassa aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.235) vuttaṃ –
他们为何这样做呢?在之前的两个七日里,他们忙着为比丘僧团铺设坐卧之处,准备嚼食、啖食等,无暇进行善戏乐。于是他们心想:‘这七日,我们当行善戏乐。然而,若我们放逸时有人来取走舍利,那就不好了。因此,我们应先设守护,再行戏乐。’于是他们便这样做了。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kasmā panete evamakaṃsūti? Ito purimesu dvīsu sattāhesu te bhikkhusaṅghassa ṭhānanisajjokāsaṃ karontā khādanīyabhojanīyādīni saṃvidahantā sādhukīḷikāya okāsaṃ na labhiṃsu. Tato nesaṃ ahosi ‘imaṃ sattāhaṃ sādhukīḷitaṃ kīḷissāma, ṭhānaṃ kho panetaṃ vijjati, yaṃ amhākaṃ pamattabhāvaṃ ñatvā kocideva āgantvā dhātuyo gaṇheyya, tasmā ārakkhaṃ ṭhapetvā kīḷissāmā’ti, tena te evamakaṃsū’’ti.
因此,当知善戏乐主要是在供养舍利等日子举行的。由于这些日子行舍利供养,故以‘舍利供养日’等而闻名,因此说‘于七个舍利供养日等’。Upakaṭṭhā,意为临近。Vassūpanāyikā,意为‘在此入雨安居’,即进入雨安居。Ekaṃ maggaṃ gato(行一条路),是指为安慰大众而游行后,由一条路离去。应知阿奴卢塔长老等也是如此,游化各处国土,安慰大众后才离去。Yena sāvatthi, tena cārikaṃ pakkāmi(向舍卫城方向游行),意为:前往舍卫城所在之处游行,或者,朝向应前往舍卫城的方向游行。显示巴利原文
Tasmā visesato sādhukīḷikā dhātupūjādivasesuyevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Te pana dhātupūjāya katattā ‘‘dhātupūjādivasā’’ti pākaṭā jātāti āha ‘‘sattasu ca dhātupūjādivasesū’’ti. Upakaṭṭhāti āsannā. Vassaṃ upanenti upagacchanti etthāti vassūpanāyikā. Ekaṃ maggaṃ gatoti cārikaṃ caritvā mahājanaṃ assāsetuṃ ekena maggena gato. Evaṃ anuruddhattherādayopi tesu tesu janapadesu cārikaṃ caritvā mahājanaṃ assāsentā gatāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yena sāvatthi, tena cārikaṃ pakkāmīti yattha sāvatthi, tattha cārikaṃ pakkāmi, yena vā disābhāgena sāvatthi pakkamitabbā hoti, tena disābhāgena cārikaṃ pakkāmīti attho.
“Tatrā”,意为“在那里”,指在那舍卫城。“Sudaṃ”是语助词。“Aniccatādipaṭisaṃyuttāya”(与无常等相关的),是指以“诸行无常”等语句所展开的。“Jano”(众生),指:因未断除渴爱随眠,以无明渴爱所造作的业,在有之生处、趣、住、众生居处中,产生、令生起名为五蕴的个我,故称为jano;或者,能产生烦恼、已产生烦恼、将产生烦恼者,称为jano。“Mahanto jano”(广大众生)即mahājano,意为众多众生。“Saññāpetvā”(令理解后),意为安慰后。“Gandhakuṭiyā dvāraṃ vivaritvā”(打开香室的门后):应知,由于香室是受用支提,故先礼敬香室,然后打开香室的门。正如《长部注》所说:“礼敬香室后。”“Milātaṃ mālākacavaraṃ”(枯萎的花鬘垃圾),即枯萎的花鬘与垃圾。“Yathāṭhāne ṭhapetvā”(放在原处),意为不越过最初放置之处,就放回原处。“Bhagavato ṭhitakāle karaṇīyaṃ vattaṃ sabbamakāsi”(他做了世尊在世时应做的一切义务)。显示巴利原文
Tatrāti tassaṃ sāvatthiyaṃ. Sudanti nipātamattaṃ. Aniccatādipaṭisaṃyuttāyāti ‘‘sabbe saṅkhārā aniccā’’tiādinayappavattāya. Asamucchinnataṇhānusayattā avijjātaṇhābhisaṅkhatena kammunā bhavayonigatiṭhitisattāvāsesu khandhapañcakasaṅkhātaṃ attabhāvaṃ janeti abhinibbattetīti jano, kilese janeti, ajani, janissatīti vā jano, mahanto janoti mahājano, taṃ mahājanaṃ, bahujananti attho. Saññāpetvāti samassāsetvā. Gandhakuṭiyā dvāraṃ vivaritvāti paribhogacetiyabhāvato gandhakuṭiṃ vanditvā gandhakuṭiyā dvāraṃ vivarīti veditabbaṃ. Teneva dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathā) ‘‘gandhakuṭiṃ vanditvā’’ti vuttaṃ. Milātaṃ mālākacavaraṃ milātamālākacavaraṃ. Yathāṭhāne ṭhapetvāti paṭhamaṭhitaṭṭhānaṃ anatikkamitvā yathāṭhitaṭṭhāneyeva ṭhapetvāti attho. Bhagavato ṭhitakāle karaṇīyaṃ vattaṃ sabbamakāsīti senāsane kattabbavattaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Karonto ca nhānakoṭṭhake sammajjanaudakūpaṭṭhānādikālesu gandhakuṭiṃ gantvā ‘‘nanu bhagavā ayaṃ tumhākaṃ nhānakālo, ayaṃ dhammadesanākālo, ayaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ ovādadānakālo, ayaṃ sīhaseyyaṃ kappanakālo, ayaṃ mukhadhovanakālo’’tiādinā nayena paridevamānova akāsi. Tamenaṃ aññatarā devatā ‘‘bhante ānanda, tumhe evaṃ paridevamānā kathaṃ aññe assāsayissathā’’ti saṃvejesi. So tassā vacanena saṃviggahadayo santhambhitvā tathāgatassa parinibbānato pabhuti ṭhānanisajjabahulatāya ussannadhātukaṃ kāyaṃ samassāsetuṃ khīravirecanaṃ pivi. Idāni taṃ dassento ‘‘atha thero’’tiādimāha.
“Ussannadhātukaṃ”(界素增盛),指痰等界素增盛的身体。“Samassāsetuṃ”(为了安抚),指为了使其舒适。“Dutiyadivase”(在第二天),指被天女警醒那日的第二天。又有人说:“或是从进入祇园精舍那天起的第二天。”“Viriccati etenāti virecanaṃ”(由此排泄,故为泻药),即用药物浸泡的乳汁作为泻药,故称为催泻乳汁。“Yaṃ sandhāya”(关于那个),即关于那种药饮。“Aṅgasubhatāya subhoti”(因肢体美丽而名为Subha),即因此得名的善生青年。“Pahitaṃ māṇavakaṃ”(被派遣的青年),指:他听说“导师已般涅槃,据说阿难长老带着衣钵来了,大众都去拜见他”之后,心想:“若去寺院,在大众中既不便恭敬接待,也无法清净听法。不如等他来到家中,相见之后既可以恭敬接待,我也有一个疑问可以请教。”于是由善生青年派遣的那位青年。“Etadavoca”(这样说),指阿难长老说了“现在不是时候”等语。“Akālo kho”(现在不是时候),意思是今天不是适宜去的时候。若……显示巴利原文
Ussannadhātukanti upacitasemhādidhātukaṃ kāyaṃ. Samassāsetunti santappetuṃ. Dutiyadivaseti devatāya saṃvejitadivasato. ‘‘Jetavanavihāraṃ paviṭṭhadivasato vā dutiyadivase’’ti vadanti. Viriccati etenāti virecanaṃ, osadhaparibhāvitaṃ khīrameva virecananti khīravirecanaṃ. Yaṃ sandhāyāti yaṃ bhesajjapānaṃ sandhāya. Aṅgasubhatāya subhoti evaṃ laddhanāmattā subhena māṇavena. Pahitaṃ māṇavakanti ‘‘satthā parinibbuto ānandatthero kirassa pattacīvaraṃ gahetvā āgato, mahājano ca taṃ dassanāya upasaṅkamatī’’ti sutvā ‘‘vihāraṃ kho pana gantvā mahājanamajjhe na sakkā sukhena paṭisanthāraṃ vā kātuṃ dhammakathaṃ vā sotuṃ, gehaṃ āgataṃyeva naṃ disvā sukhena paṭisanthāraṃ karissāmi, ekā ca me kaṅkhā atthi, tampi naṃ pucchissāmī’’ti cintetvā subhena māṇavena pesitaṃ māṇavakaṃ. Etadavocāti etaṃ ‘‘akālo kho’’tiādikaṃ ānandatthero avoca. Akālo khoti ajja gantuṃ yuttakālo na hoti. Kasmāti ce āha ‘‘atthi me ajjā’’tiādi. Bhesajjamattāti appamattakaṃ bhesajjaṃ. Appattho hi ayaṃ mattāsaddo ‘‘mattā sukhapariccāgā’’tiādīsu viya.
“第二日”,指服用催泻乳汁之日后的第二天。“Cetakattherenāti”,指出生于支提国(Cetiyaraṭṭha)而得“支提迦(Cetaka)”之名的长老。“Subhena māṇavena puṭṭhoti”,即被善生童子所问。他这样思惟:“乔达摩尊师曾在此世间安立的那些法,在他般涅槃后是消失了呢,还是依然存在?如果存在,阿难应该知道,让我去问他吧。”于是以“阿难尊者,乔达摩尊师曾称赞哪些法,又曾劝导、安顿、安立此世间于哪些法?”等语(长部1.448)向阿难提问。于是,长老将三藏以戒蕴等三蕴摄集而开示,宣说了《善生经》:“童子,世尊称赞的是三蕴……”等。正是就此而言:“在长部中,宣说了名为《善生经》的第十经。”显示巴利原文
Dutiyadivaseti khīravirecanaṃ pītadivasato dutiyadivase. Cetakattherenāti cetiyaraṭṭhe jātattā ‘‘cetako’’ti evaṃladdhanāmena. Subhena māṇavena puṭṭhoti ‘‘yesu dhammesu bhavaṃ gotamo imaṃ lokaṃ patiṭṭhāpesi, te tassa accayena naṭṭhā nu kho, dharanti, sace dharanti, ānando jānissati, handa naṃ pucchāmī’’ti evaṃ cintetvā ‘‘yesaṃ so bhavaṃ gotamo dhammānaṃ vaṇṇavādī ahosi, yattha ca imaṃ janataṃ samādapesi nivesesi patiṭṭhāpesi, katamesānaṃ kho bho ānanda dhammānaṃ so bhavaṃ gotamo vaṇṇavādī ahosī’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.448) subhena māṇavena puṭṭho. Athassa thero tīṇi piṭakāni sīlakkhandhādīhi tīhi khandhehi saṅgahetvā dassento ‘‘tiṇṇaṃ kho, māṇava, khandhānaṃ so bhagavā vaṇṇavādī’’tiādinā subhasuttamabhāsi. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘dīghanikāye subhasuttaṃ nāma dasamaṃ suttamabhāsī’’ti.
“修补破损”中,“破损”指断裂,“破漏”指破裂。予以修补,即重新妥善修复或重新制作。王舍城,是名为王舍城的都城。此城因受曼陀多王、大瞿文达等统领,故称“王舍城”。“被丢弃、散落且污秽”的意思是被丢弃、散落且不净。这是说,前往世尊般涅槃处的比丘们所丢弃、散落的物品,又遭白蚁等啃食而狼藉遍地,且因无人清扫、杂物堆积而变得污秽。为说明此义,故说“世尊的……”等语。以分界为义,显现为环绕之相者,称为“周院”。在那里,即指那些寺院之中。与“修补破损”之事相关。“第一个月”指雨安居的第一个月,此处为表达贯穿时间的业格用法。由于制定了房舍义务,且在房舍犍度中多有相关言说,故说“被世尊……所称赞”。显示巴利原文
Khaṇḍaphullapaṭisaṅkharaṇanti ettha khaṇḍanti chinnaṃ. Phullanti bhinnaṃ. Tesaṃ paṭisaṅkharaṇaṃ puna sammā pākatikakaraṇaṃ, abhinavakaraṇanti vuttaṃ hoti. Rājagahanti evaṃnāmakaṃ nagaraṃ. Tañhi mandhatumahāgovindādīhi pariggahitattā ‘‘rājagaha’’nti vuccati. Chaḍḍitapatitauklāpāti chaḍḍitā ca patitā ca uklāpā ca ahesunti attho. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – bhagavato parinibbānaṭṭhānaṃ gacchantehi bhikkhūhi chaḍḍitā vissaṭṭhā, tatoyeva ca upacikādīhi khāditattā ito cito ca patitā, sammajjanābhāvena ākiṇṇakacavarattā uklāpā ca ahesunti. Imamevatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘bhagavato hī’’tiādi. Paricchedavasena veṇiyati dissatīti pariveṇaṃ. Tatthāti tesu vihāresu. Khaṇḍaphullapaṭisaṅkharaṇanti iminā sambandho. Paṭhamaṃ māsanti vassānassa paṭhamaṃ māsaṃ, accantasaṃyoge cetaṃ upayogavacanaṃ. Senāsanavattānaṃ paññattattā senāsanakkhandhake ca senāsanapaṭibaddhānaṃ bahūnaṃ vacanato ‘‘bhagavatā…pe… vaṇṇita’’nti vuttaṃ.
“第二日”是指从思惟“我们应作修补破损之事”的那天算起的第二天。应知,这也就是雨安居入安居日之后的第二天。那些长老在阿沙荼月满月日行布萨,于翌日新月时集会并入雨安居后,如此思惟。阿阇世王,意谓尚未出生即成为其父之敌,故得名“阿阇世”(未生怨)。据说,当他还在母胎中时,王后生起了这样的妊娠欲求:“啊,但愿我能饮国王右臂之血。”国王见她无法言语却形销色悴,亲自询问并得知后,便召来医师,以金刀割开自己的手臂,用金器盛血,和水令她饮下。占相师听闻此事后预言:“此胎儿将成为国王之敌,国王将为此子所杀。”正因占相师指出“未生即成为国王之敌”,故得名阿阇世。“Kinti”是询问原因的虚词,意为“为何”。“禀报”即是告知、报告。“无所疑虑”指心无疑惧。“令轮”即命令轮,因命令能无碍运转,故称为轮。“集会而坐之处”即众人集会安坐之处。显示巴利原文
Dutiyadivaseti ‘‘khaṇḍaphullapaṭisaṅkharaṇaṃ karomā’’ti cintitadivasato dutiyadivase. So ca vassūpanāyikadivasato dutiyadivasoti veditabbo. Te hi therā āsāḷhīpuṇṇamāya uposathaṃ katvā pāṭipade sannipatitvā vassaṃ upagantvā evaṃ cintesuṃ. Ajātasattu rājāti ajāto hutvā pituno paccatthiko jātoti ‘‘ajātasattū’’ti laddhavohāro rājā. Tasmiṃ kira kucchigate deviyā evarūpo dohaḷo uppajji ‘‘aho vatāhaṃ rañño dakkhiṇabāhuto lohitaṃ piveyya’’nti . Atha tassā kathetuṃ asakkontiyā kisabhāvaṃ dubbaṇṇabhāvañca disvā rājā sayameva pucchitvā ñatvā ca vejje pakkosāpetvā suvaṇṇasatthakena bāhuṃ phāletvā suvaṇṇasarakena lohitaṃ gahetvā udakena sambhinditvā pāyesi. Nemittakā taṃ sutvā ‘‘esa gabbho rañño sattu bhavissati, iminā rājā haññissatī’’ti byākariṃsu, tasmā ‘‘ajātoyeva rañño sattu bhavissatī’’ti nemittakehi niddiṭṭhattā ajātasattu nāma jāto. Kinti kāraṇapucchanatthe nipāto, kasmāti attho. Paṭivedesunti nivedesuṃ, jānāpesunti attho. Vissatthāti nirāsaṅkacittā. Āṇācakkanti āṇāyeva appaṭihatavuttiyā pavattanaṭṭhena cakkanti āṇācakkaṃ. Sannisajjaṭṭhānanti sannipatitvā nisīdanaṭṭhānaṃ.
“王宫的庄严”指王宫的富丽堂皇。犹如在展露微笑一般。犹如吉祥天女的居所一般。又如天、人之眼鸟共聚一处饮水:正如各种飞禽聚集于一处饮水处,一切众人的目光也都纷纷落在这曼荼普中,故说如天、人之眼鸟共聚一处。又如世间一切可爱之物汇集一处:若将世间所有可爱之物汇聚一堂,即如彼曼荼普一般。三处义注中说:“‘应见之精粹庄严’,如同去除了边材的精粹,如同脱离了渣滓的清净,在应见、值得见的诸物中,是为精粹、是为清净。”应见,即可爱、可观赏;精粹,即殊胜;庄严,即装饰、严饰;具足此者即是“应见之精粹庄严”,即指曼荼普——此处应如此取其义,此为我等之见,审查后当取更为合理者。曼荼普,即遮阳之物。“种种……华美华盖”中,花鬘即是垂挂的花鬘。此处应见修饰语后置,意为垂挂的花鬘。此中有种种、多类,如流泻、涌出般华美的华盖,故为“种种花鬘垂挂、流泻华美华盖的曼荼普”,应连接为“庄严着此曼荼普”。“如同宝石杂饰的摩尼地面”一句,是指因以种种散花供养而缤纷善成的地面,犹如……显示巴利原文
Rājabhavanavibhūtinti rājabhavanasampattiṃ. Avahasantamivāti avahāsaṃ kurumānaṃ viya. Siriyā niketamivāti siriyā vasanaṭṭhānamiva. Ekanipātatitthamiva ca devamanussanayanavihaṅgānanti ekasmiṃ pānīyatitthe sannipatantā pakkhino viya sabbesaṃ janānaṃ cakkhūni maṇḍapeyeva nipatantīti devamanussānaṃ nayanasaṅkhātavihaṅgānaṃ ekanipātatitthamiva ca. Lokarāmaṇeyyakamiva sampiṇḍitanti ekattha sampiṇḍitaṃ rāsikataṃ loke ramaṇīyabhāvaṃ viya. Yadi loke vijjamānaṃ ramaṇīyattaṃ sabbameva ānetvā ekattha sampiṇḍitaṃ siyā, taṃ viyāti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Daṭṭhabbasāramaṇḍanti pheggurahitasāraṃ viya kasaṭavinimuttaṃ pasannabhūtaṃ viya ca daṭṭhabbesu daṭṭhuṃ araharūpesu sārabhūtaṃ pasannabhūtañcā’’ti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Daṭṭhabbo dassanīyo sārabhūto visiṭṭhataro maṇḍo maṇḍanaṃ alaṅkāro etassāti daṭṭhabbasāramaṇḍo, maṇḍapoti evamettha attho gahetabboti amhākaṃ khanti, upaparikkhitvā yuttataraṃ gahetabbaṃ. Maṇḍaṃ sūriyarasmiṃ pāti nivāretīti maṇḍapo. Vividha…pe… cāruvitānanti ettha kusumadāmāni ca tāni olambakāni cāti kusumadāmaolambakāni. Ettha ca visesanassa paranipāto daṭṭhabbo, olambakakusumadāmānīti attho. Tāni vividhāni anekappakārāni viniggalantaṃ vamentaṃ nikkhāmentamiva cāru sobhanaṃ vitānaṃ etthāti vividhakusumadāmaolambakaviniggalantacāruvitāno, maṇḍapo, taṃ alaṅkaritvāti yojetabbaṃ. Ratanavicitramaṇikaoṭṭimatalamivāti nānāpupphūpahāravicittasupariniṭṭhitabhūmikammattāyeva nānāratanehi vicittabhūtamaṇikoṭṭimatalamivāti attho. Ettha ca ratanavicittaggahaṇaṃ nānāpupphūpahāravicittatāya nidassanaṃ, maṇikoṭṭimatalaggahaṇaṃ supariniṭṭhitabhūmiparikammatāyāti veditabbaṃ. Maṇiyo koṭṭetvā katatalattā maṇikoṭṭanena nibbattatalanti maṇikoṭṭimatalaṃ. Nanti maṇḍapaṃ. Pupphūpahāro pupphapūjā. Uttarābhimukhanti uttaradisābhimukhaṃ. Āsanārahanti nisīdanārahaṃ. Dantakhacitanti dantehi racitaṃ, dantehi katanti vuttaṃ hoti. Etthāti āsane. Niṭṭhitaṃ bhante mama kiccanti mayā kattabbakiccaṃ niṭṭhitanti attho.
然而在那一天,有些比丘针对具寿阿难这样说:“在这比丘僧团中,有一位比丘散发着臭味在游走。”长老听闻此言,心生悚惧,想道:“在这比丘僧团中,并没有其他散发着臭味游走的比丘,他们必定是在说我。”另有些人直接对他说:“贤友,明日有集会”等。如今为了显示此义,才说“比丘们对具寿阿难说”等语。因此,即由此之故。他转向,即他引导心朝向。无执取,即不以渴爱与邪见的方式执取任何法,或者不执取他所解脱的一切烦恼的丝毫,这是其含义。从诸漏中,即从被称为漏的烦恼中,这些烦恼从有乃至有顶,或从法乃至无种姓者,因能听闻、能流转,故称为漏。而且“从诸漏中”是表示特征的用语,由于处于同一处,实际上是从一切烦恼、一切恶法中,心确实得到解脱。心解脱,即在阿罗汉道刹那,心正在从诸漏中解脱,而在阿罗汉果刹那,心已解脱,这是其含义。以经行,即通过经行的动作。由此而作了、累积了成为解脱之亲依止缘的福德,故为已作福德者,意思是已为证得阿罗汉果而作了准备。应致力于精勤,即应致力于精进,应为了证得阿罗汉果而努力,这是其义。显示巴利原文
Tasmiṃ pana divase ekacce bhikkhū āyasmantaṃ ānandaṃ sandhāya evamāhaṃsu ‘‘imasmiṃ bhikkhusaṅghe eko bhikkhu vissagandhaṃ vāyanto vicaratī’’ti. Thero taṃ sutvā ‘‘imasmiṃ bhikkhusaṅghe añño vissagandhaṃ vāyanto vicaraṇakabhikkhu nāma natthi, addhā ete maṃ sandhāya vadantī’’ti saṃvegaṃ āpajji. Ekacce naṃ āhaṃsuyeva ‘‘sve, āvuso, sannipāto’’tiādi. Idāni taṃ dassento āha ‘‘bhikkhū āyasmantaṃ ānandaṃ āhaṃsū’’tiādi. Tenāti tasmā. Āvajjesīti upanāmesi. Anupādāyāti taṇhādiṭṭhivasena kañci dhammaṃ agahetvā, yehi vā kilesehi sabbehi vimuccati, tesaṃ lesamattampi agahetvāti attho. Āsavehīti bhavato ābhavaggaṃ dhammato vā āgotrabhuṃ savanato pavattanato āsavasaññitehi kilesehi. Lakkhaṇavacanañcetaṃ āsavehīti, tadekaṭṭhatāya pana sabbehipi kilesehi, sabbehipi pāpadhammehi cittaṃ vimuccatiyeva. Cittaṃ vimuccīti cittaṃ arahattamaggakkhaṇe āsavehi vimuccamānaṃ katvā arahattaphalakkhaṇe vimuccīti attho. Caṅkamenāti caṅkamanakiriyāya. Vivaṭṭūpanissayabhūtaṃ kataṃ upacitaṃ puññaṃ etenāti katapuñño, arahattādhigamāya katādhikāroti attho. Padhānamanuyuñjāti vīriyaṃ anuyuñja, arahattādhigamāya anuyogaṃ karohīti attho. Kathādoso nāma natthīti kathāya aparajjhaṃ nāma natthi. Accāraddhaṃ vīriyanti ativiya āraddhaṃ vīriyaṃ. Uddhaccāyāti uddhatabhāvāya. Vīriyasamataṃ yojemīti caṅkamanavīriyassa adhimattattā tassa pahānavasena samādhinā samarasatāpādanena vīriyasamataṃ yojemi.
第二天,即长老证得阿罗汉果那日之后的第二天。在法堂中集会,即在半月的第五日集会。长老想要告知自己证得阿罗汉果,是因为:他想“由于是有学,虽不适合参与法结集,但因多闻,他们将会接纳我”,为了让坐着这样想的长老们生起欢喜心,为了显示“应不放逸”这一教诫已得成果,也为了不将此事归诸自身,以及因为世尊赞叹了无问自说。依长幼顺序,即不逾越长幼的次序。有些人,即仅指中部诵者中的一些人。应知先前所说的一切,也都是中部诵者所说。然而长部诵者在此处这样说:显示巴利原文
Dutiyadivaseti therena arahattappattadivasato dutiyadivase. Dhammasabhāyaṃ sannipatitāti pakkhassa pañcamiyaṃ sannipatiṃsu. Attano arahattappattiṃ ñāpetukāmoti ‘‘sekkhatāya dhammasaṅgītiyā gahetuṃ ayuttampi bahussutattā gaṇhissāmā’’ti cintetvā nisinnānaṃ therānaṃ ‘‘idāni arahattappatto’’ti somanassuppādanatthaṃ ‘‘appamatto hohī’’ti dinnaovādassa saphalatādīpanatthaṃ attupanāyikaṃ akatvā aññabyākaraṇassa bhagavatā saṃvaṇṇitattā ca thero attano arahattappattiṃ ñāpetukāmo ahosīti veditabbaṃ. Yathāvuḍḍhanti vuḍḍhapaṭipāṭiṃ anatikkamitvā. Eketi majjhimabhāṇakānaṃyeva eke. Pubbe vuttampi hi sabbaṃ majjhimabhāṇakā vadantiyevāti veditabbaṃ. Dīghabhāṇakā (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathā) panettha evaṃ vadanti –
那时,具寿阿难已证阿罗汉,便前往集会。他是如何前往的呢?他心想“现今我已有资格进入集会之中”,怀着喜悦满足的心,将袈裟搭于一肩,如同从束缚中解脱的棕榈果,如同安放在红毯上的天然宝石,如同无云夜空中升起的满月,如同在晨光柔触下绽放、花粉淡黄的莲花,以清净、洁白、光耀、庄严的殊胜面容,仿佛宣告已证阿罗汉果一般,前往集会。那时,具寿大迦叶看见他后,心想:“确实,阿难证得阿罗汉果,容光焕发!若导师还在世,今日必定会对阿难称叹善哉。好吧,我现在就给予导师应给予的善哉。”于是三次称叹善哉。显示巴利原文
‘‘Atha kho āyasmā ānando arahā samāno sannipātaṃ agamāsi. Kathaṃ agamāsi? ‘Idānimhi sannipātamajjhaṃ pavisanāraho’ti haṭṭhatuṭṭhacitto ekaṃsaṃ cīvaraṃ katvā bandhanā muttatālapakkaṃ viya paṇḍukambale nikkhittajātimaṇi viya vigatavalāhake nabhe samuggatapuṇṇacando viya bālātapasamphassavikasitareṇupiñjaragabbhaṃ padumaṃ viya ca parisuddhena pariyodātena sappabhena sassirikena mukhavarena attano arahattappattiṃ ārocayamāno viya ca agamāsi. Atha naṃ disvā āyasmato mahākassapassa etadahosi ‘sobhati vata bho arahattappatto ānando, sace satthā dhareyya, addhā ajja ānandassa sādhukāraṃ dadeyya, handa imassāhaṃ idāni satthārā dātabbaṃ sādhukāraṃ dadāmī’ti tikkhattuṃ sādhukāramadāsī’’ti.
有些人说“从空中来而坐”等,这不过是因为他们各以不同的方式理解他前来之事,在种种说法之外并无特殊原因。然而,优波提舍长老说:“对于那次历时七个月的法结集,有人说因为他曾有时潜入地中而来,故持此说;有人说因为他曾有时从空中而来,故持彼说。”显示巴利原文
Ākāsena āgantvā nisīdītipi eketi ettha pana tesaṃ tesaṃ tathā tathā gahetvā āgatamattaṃ ṭhapetvā visuṃ visuṃ vacane aññaṃ visesakāraṇaṃ natthīti vadanti. Upatissatthero panāha ‘‘sattamāsaṃ katāya dhammasaṅgītiyā kadāci pathaviyaṃ nimujjitvā āgatattā taṃ gahetvā eke vadanti. Kadāci ākāsena āgatattā taṃ gahetvā eke vadantī’’ti.
“对诸比丘说”,意为招呼、言说、令诸比丘了知,这是此处的含义。但在其他地方,也有用于告知的意思,如所说:“诸比丘,我告知你们,我向你们宣说。”也见于召唤,如所说:“来,比丘,你以我的话去招呼舍利弗。”“贤友”,是显示招呼的方式。“以谁为首”,即以谁为最上首。“难道阿难不够格吗?”这是注释书老师们提出的问题。“不够格”,即不能。“此中第一”,意即这是最上的,因为这是以词性变异所作的表述。“所谓”,即“那即是”的意思,应连接为“所谓五蕴”等。“选定”,即使之被认可。“应向优波离询问律”,由于动词“问”带有两个宾语,故如此说。“持扇”,在此处应知是说法者的惯例。因为世尊也是为了显示说法者的惯例而手持彩扇。否则,作为一切世间的庄严、达到最上境界的学与防护的诸佛,其月轮般的面容是不应被遮挡的。“贤友优波离,第一波罗夷在何处制定?”为何这样说呢?难道在结集之前,它的第一性不合理吗?并非不合理,因为依世尊制定的次第和诵巴帝摩卡的次第,第一性是成立的。因为大体上,三藏是在世尊住世时,便依已确立的次第显示巴利原文
Bhikkhūāmantesīti bhikkhū ālapi abhāsi sambodhesīti ayamettha attho. Aññatra pana ñāpanepi hoti. Yathāha – ‘‘āmantayāmi vo, bhikkhave, (dī. ni. 2.218) paṭivedayāmi vo, bhikkhave’’ti (a. ni. 7.72). Pakkosanepi dissati. Yathāha ‘‘ehi tvaṃ, bhikkhu, mama vacanena sāriputtaṃ āmantehī’’ti (a. ni. 9.11). Āvusoti āmantanākāradīpanaṃ. Kaṃ dhuraṃ katvāti kaṃ jeṭṭhakaṃ katvā. Kiṃ ānando nappahotīti aṭṭhakathācariyehi ṭhapitapucchā. Nappahotīti na sakkoti. Etadagganti eso aggo. Liṅgavipallāsena hi ayaṃ niddeso. Yadidanti ca yo ayanti attho, yadidaṃ khandhapañcakanti vā yojetabbaṃ. Sammannīti sammataṃ akāsi. Upāliṃ vinayaṃ puccheyyanti pucchadhātussa dvikammakattā vuttaṃ. Bījaniṃ gahetvāti ettha bījanīgahaṇaṃ dhammakathikānaṃ dhammatāti veditabbaṃ. Bhagavāpi hi dhammakathikānaṃ dhammatādassanatthameva vicittabījaniṃ gaṇhāti. Na hi aññathā sabbassapi lokassa alaṅkārabhūtaṃ paramukkaṃsagatasikkhāsaṃyamānaṃ buddhānaṃ mukhacandamaṇḍalaṃ paṭicchādetabbaṃ hoti. ‘‘Paṭhamaṃ, āvuso upāli, pārājikaṃ kattha paññatta’’nti kasmā vuttaṃ, nanu tassa saṅgītiyā purimakāle paṭhamabhāvo na yuttoti? No na yutto bhagavatā paññattānukkamena pātimokkhuddesānukkamena ca paṭhamabhāvassa siddhattā. Yebhuyyena hi tīṇi piṭakāni bhagavato dharamānakāle ṭhitānukkameneva saṅgītāni, visesato vinayābhidhammapiṭakānīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kismiṃ vatthusmiṃ methunadhammeti ca nimittatthe bhummavacanaṃ.
“也问了事由”等,是以“在何处制定”等方式,连同其余未显示的部分一并含摄而说的。那么,在这第一波罗夷的巴利文中,是否有任何应删除或应添加的呢?佛陀世尊所说中,没有应删除的。因为诸佛如来不说任何无意义的音节。然而,弟子们或诸天所说中,有应删除的,结集法藏的长老们便将其删除;也有应增添的,他们就各处适宜之处增添。哪些是增添的呢?就是“那时”、“尔时”、“当时”、“如是说时”、“说了此”等,仅仅作为文句连接之用。如此将应增添的增添后,他们便定立为“这是第一波罗夷”。第一波罗夷结集完毕后,五百位阿罗汉依结集时所采用的方式共同诵习。当他们开始诵习“那时,佛陀世尊住在韦兰贾”时,大地犹如给予赞叹一般震动至水界。他们以同样的方法将其余波罗夷结集后,定立为“这是波罗夷品”。如此,宣说“十三桑喀地谢沙”等,将二百二十条学处定为“大分别”后而立名。大分别结束时,大地也如前方式震动。接着,在比丘尼分别中,说了“八条波罗夷学处名为波罗夷品”等,将三百零四条学处定为“比丘尼分别”后显示巴利原文
Vatthumpi pucchītiādi ‘‘kattha paññatta’’ntiādinā dassitena saha tato avasiṭṭhampi saṅgahetvā dassanavasena vuttaṃ. Kiṃ panettha paṭhamapārājikapāḷiyaṃ kiñci apanetabbaṃ vā pakkhipitabbaṃ vā āsi nāsīti? Buddhassa bhagavato bhāsite apanetabbaṃ nāma natthi. Na hi tathāgatā ekabyañjanampi niratthakaṃ vadanti, sāvakānaṃ pana devatānaṃ vā bhāsite apanetabbampi hoti, taṃ dhammasaṅgāhakattherā apanayiṃsu, pakkhipitabbaṃ pana sabbatthāpi atthi, tasmā yaṃ yattha pakkhipituṃ yuttaṃ, taṃ tattha pakkhipiṃsuyeva. Kiṃ pana tanti ce? ‘‘Tena samayenā’’ti vā ‘‘tena kho pana samayenā’’ti vā ‘‘atha kho’’iti vā ‘‘evaṃ vutte’’ti vā ‘‘etadavocā’’ti vā evamādikaṃ sambandhavacanamattaṃ. Evaṃ pakkhipitabbayuttaṃ pakkhipitvā pana idaṃ paṭhamapārājikanti ṭhapesuṃ . Paṭhamapārājike saṅgahamāruḷhe pañca arahantasatāni saṅgahaṃ āropitanayeneva gaṇasajjhāyamakaṃsu. ‘‘Tena samayena buddho bhagavā verañjāyaṃ viharatī’’ti ca nesaṃ sajjhāyārambhakāleyeva sādhukāraṃ dadamānā viya mahāpathavī udakapariyantaṃ katvā kampittha. Te eteneva nayena sesapārājikānipi saṅgahaṃ āropetvā ‘‘idaṃ pārājikakaṇḍa’’nti ṭhapesuṃ. Evaṃ terasa saṅghādisesāni ‘‘terasaka’’ntiādīni vatvā vīsādhikāni dve sikkhāpadasatāni ‘‘mahāvibhaṅgo’’ti kittetvā ṭhapesuṃ. Mahāvibhaṅgāvasānepi purimanayeneva mahāpathavī akampittha. Tato bhikkhunivibhaṅge aṭṭha sikkhāpadāni ‘‘pārājikakaṇḍaṃ nāmā’’tiādīni vatvā tīṇi sikkhāpadasatāni cattāri ca sikkhāpadāni ‘‘bhikkhunivibhaṅgo’’ti kittetvā ‘‘ayaṃ ubhatovibhaṅgo nāma catusaṭṭhibhāṇavāro’’ti ṭhapesuṃ. Ubhatovibhaṅgāvasānepi vuttanayeneva pathavī akampittha. Etenevupāyena asītibhāṇavāraparimāṇaṃ khandhakaṃ pañcavīsatibhāṇavāraparimāṇaṃ parivārañca saṅgahaṃ āropetvā ‘‘idaṃ vinayapiṭakaṃ nāmā’’ti ṭhapesuṃ. Vinayapiṭakāvasānepi vuttanayeneva pathavīkampo ahosi. Taṃ āyasmantaṃ upālittheraṃ paṭicchāpesuṃ ‘‘āvuso, idaṃ tuyhaṃ nissitake vācehī’’ti evamettha avuttopi viseso veditabbo.
结集律藏后,他们继而结集了经藏。为说明此事,现在说“结集律已”等语。大迦叶长老向阿难长老问法——此处当知有此顺序:阿难长老手持镶牙拂尘坐于法座时,尊者大迦叶长老问诸比丘:“贤友们,我们应先结集哪一部藏?”“经藏,尊者。”“经藏有四集,其中先结集哪一集?”“《长集》,尊者。”“《长集》有三十四经、三品,其中先结集哪一品?”“《戒蕴品》,尊者。”“《戒蕴品》有十三经,其中先结集哪一经?”“名为《梵网经》的,尊者,该经以三种戒庄严,摧破种种邪命、诡诈与虚谈等,解开六十二见之网,震动一万世界,我们先结集此经。”于是,尊者大迦叶对尊者阿难说:“贤友阿难,《梵网经》说于何处?”显示巴利原文
Evaṃ vinayapiṭakaṃ saṅgahamāropetvā suttantapiṭakaṃ saṅgāyiṃsu. Idāni taṃ dassento āha ‘‘vinayaṃ saṅgāyitvā’’tiādi. Mahākassapatthero ānandattheraṃ dhammaṃ pucchīti ettha ayamanukkamo veditabbo – ānandatthere dantakhacitaṃ bījaniṃ gahetvā dhammāsane nisinne āyasmā mahākassapatthero bhikkhū pucchi ‘‘kataraṃ, āvuso, piṭakaṃ paṭhamaṃ saṅgāyāmā’’ti? ‘‘Suttantapiṭakaṃ, bhanteti. Suttantapiṭake catasso saṅgītiyo, tāsu paṭhamaṃ kataraṃ saṅgītinti? Dīghasaṅgītiṃ, bhanteti. Dīghasaṅgītiyaṃ catuttiṃsa suttāni, tayo ca vaggā, tesu paṭhamaṃ kataraṃ vagganti. Sīlakkhandhavaggaṃ, bhanteti. Sīlakkhandhavagge terasa suttantā, tesu paṭhamaṃ kataraṃ suttanti? Brahmajālasuttaṃ nāma bhante tividhasīlālaṅkataṃ nānāvidhamicchājīvakuhanalapanādividdhaṃsanaṃ dvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhijālaviniveṭhanaṃ dasasahassilokadhātupakampanaṃ, taṃ paṭhamaṃ saṅgāyāmā’’ti. Atha kho āyasmā mahākassapo āyasmantaṃ ānandaṃ etadavoca ‘‘brahmajālaṃ, āvuso ānanda, kattha bhāsita’’nti?
“尊者,在王舍城与那兰陀之间”——此处“antarā”(之间)一词,见于原因、刹那、心、中间、空隙等义。例如:“除了如来,谁能知其中(原因)?”“人们聚集议论,我和他之间(有何事)?”等句中,“antarā”用于原因义。“尊者,我见一女人在闪电光中洗器皿”等句中,用于刹那义。“若人内心无忿”等句中,用于心义。“于中途证入灭尽定”等句中,用于中间义。“而且,此多婆达河从两大地狱间的空隙流来”等句中,用于空隙义。此处即用于空隙义,故应知此处义为“在王舍城与那兰陀之间的空隙处”。因与“antarā”结合,此处用业格。在此类处,文法家们如说“于村与河之间而行”,仅用一个“antarā”词,而该词须与第二词亦结合。若不结合,则不得业格,因为与“antarā”结合时若用属格则不恰当,而此处意欲用业格。然此处结合后如此说。于王舍堂——此处,为王游戏故,建有一座随念变化、色彩绚丽的殿堂,称为王舍堂,于其中。芒果树园——是王的花园。据说其门附近有一棵幼芒果树,称为芒果树。因其不远故,花园亦以“芒果树园”为名。显示巴利原文
Antarāca bhante rājagahaṃ antarā ca nāḷandanti ettha antarā-saddo kāraṇakhaṇacittavemajjhavivarādīsu dissati. Tathā hi ‘‘tadantaraṃ ko jāneyya aññatra tathāgatā’’ti (a. ni. 6.44; 10.75) ca, ‘‘janā saṅgamma mantenti, mañca tañca kimantara’’nti (saṃ. ni. 1.228) ca ādīsu kāraṇe antarāsaddo vattati. ‘‘Addasa maṃ bhante aññatarā itthī vijjantarikāya bhājanaṃ dhovantī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.149) khaṇe. ‘‘Yassantarato na santi kopā’’tiādīsu (udā. 20) citte. ‘‘Antarā vosānamāpādī’’tiādīsu vemajjhe. ‘‘Api cāyaṃ tapodā dvinnaṃ mahānirayānaṃ antarikāya āgacchatī’’tiādīsu (pārā. 231) vivare. Svāyamidha vivare vattati, tasmā rājagahassa ca nāḷandāya ca vivareti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo, antarāsaddena pana yuttattā upayogavacanaṃ kataṃ. Īdisesu ca ṭhānesu akkharacintakā ‘‘antarā gāmañca nadiñca yātī’’ti evaṃ ekameva antarāsaddaṃ payujjanti, so dutiyapadenapi yojetabbo hoti. Ayojiyamāne upayogavacanaṃ na pāpuṇāti sāmivacanappasaṅge antarāsaddayogena upayogavacanassa icchitattā. Idha pana yojetvā evaṃ vutto. Rājāgāraketi tattha rañño kīḷanatthaṃ paṭibhānacittavicitraṃ agāraṃ akaṃsu, taṃ rājāgārakanti pavuccati, tasmiṃ. Ambalaṭṭhikāti rañño uyyānaṃ. Tassa kira dvārasamīpe taruṇo ambarukkho atthi, taṃ ambalaṭṭhikāti vadanti. Tassa avidūrabhavattā uyyānampi ambalaṭṭhikātveva saṅkhyaṃ gataṃ ‘‘varuṇānagara’’ntiādīsu viya.
“游方者须毘耶”——此处,须毘耶是其名,游方者是指散阇耶的弟子,即隐士游方者。“与梵授学童”——此处,梵授是其名。学童,亦可指众生、盗贼、青年。即如:显示巴利原文
Suppiyañca paribbājakanti ettha suppiyoti tassa nāmaṃ, paribbājakoti sañjayassa antevāsī channaparibbājako. Brahmadattañca māṇavakanti ettha brahmadattoti tassa nāmaṃ. Māṇavoti sattopi coropi taruṇopi vuccati. Tathā hi –
那些被天使催促却仍放逸的人,
他们将长久忧愁,投生于卑劣之身。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Coditā devadūtehi, ye pamajjanti māṇavā; Te dīgharattaṃ socanti, hīnakāyūpagā narā’’ti. (ma. ni. 3.271; a. ni. 3.36) –
在“Ādīsu”等句中,众生被称为青年。在“无论造业与否,皆与青年交往”等句(《中部》2.149)中,是指盗贼。在“安巴塔青年、安伽卡青年”等句(《长部》1.258-261, 316)中,是指青年人。此处亦同。此即:“这是就一位名为梵授的年轻男子而言。”吉瓦卡芒果园,即儿科医生吉瓦卡的芒果园。那么,为何不问“关于谁”,而问“与谁一起”呢?此经并非全由世尊宣说,国王亦说了“如同这些种种工巧处”等语,故应知是因此而为说。“韦提希之子”:意为拘萨罗王女儿之子,并非韦提希王之子;而“韦提希”是智者的称谓。能以此了知,故为“吠陀”,即智慧之名。以智慧而行动、努力、精进,故为“韦提希”。韦提希之子,即韦提希之子,依此。显示巴利原文
Ādīsu satto māṇavoti vutto. ‘‘Māṇavehipi samāgacchanti katakammehipi akatakammehipī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.149) coro. ‘‘Ambaṭṭhamāṇavo aṅgako māṇavo’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.258-261, 316) taruṇo māṇavoti vutto. Idhāpi ayameva adhippeto. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti ‘‘brahmadattaṃ nāma taruṇapurisaṃ ārabbhā’’ti. Jīvakambavaneti jīvakassa komārabhaccassa ambavane. Atha ‘‘kaṃ ārabbhā’’ti avatvā ‘‘kenasaddhi’’nti kasmā vuttaṃ? Na etaṃ suttaṃ bhagavatā eva vuttaṃ, raññāpi ‘‘yathā nu kho imāni puthusippāyatanānī’’tiādinā kiñci kiñci vuttaṃ atthi, tasmā evaṃ vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Vedehiputtenāti ayaṃ kosalarañño dhītāya putto, na videharañño, ‘‘vedehī’’ti pana paṇḍitādhivacanametaṃ. Vidanti etenāti vedo, ñāṇassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Vedena īhati ghaṭati vāyamatīti vedehī, vedehiyā putto vedehiputto, tena.
所谓“以此方法,于五部中提问”,此处应知顺序如下:依前述方式,在《梵网经》的问答结束时,五百位阿罗汉进行了诵习。同样依前述方式,出现了地震。如此结集了《梵网经》之后,又依“阿难贤友,《沙门果经》是于何处宣说”等问答顺序,连同《梵网经》共结集了十三部经,命名为“戒蕴品”而作安置。其后结集《大品》,再后结集《波提迦品》。如此结集了包含三品、庄严三十四部经、篇幅为六十四诵分的经典,称为“此乃《长部》”,随后托付给具寿阿难长老:“贤友,请将此教予你所摄受的弟子。”接着,结集了篇幅为八十诵分的《中部》,托付给法将舍利弗长老所摄受的弟子们:“你们护持此经。”接着,结集了篇幅为一百诵分的《相应部》,托付给大迦叶长老:“尊者,请将此教予您所摄受的弟子。”接着,结集了篇幅为一百二十诵分的《增支部》,托付给阿那律长老:“请将此教予您所摄受的弟子。”显示巴利原文
Etenevupāyena pañca nikāye pucchīti ettha ayamanukkamo veditabbo. Vuttanayena brahmajālassa pucchāvisajjanāvasāne pañca arahantasatāni sajjhāyamakaṃsu. Vuttanayeneva ca pathavīkampo ahosi. Evaṃ brahmajālaṃ saṅgāyitvā tato paraṃ ‘‘sāmaññaphalaṃ panāvuso ānanda, kattha bhāsita’’ntiādinā pucchāvisajjanānukkamena saddhiṃ brahmajālena terasasuttantaṃ saṅgāyitvā ‘‘ayaṃ sīlakkhandhavaggo nāmā’’ti kittetvā ṭhapesuṃ. Tadanantaraṃ mahāvaggaṃ, tadanantaraṃ pāthikavagganti evaṃ tivaggasaṅgahaṃ catuttiṃsasuttantapaṭimaṇḍitaṃ catusaṭṭhibhāṇavāraparimāṇaṃ tantiṃ saṅgāyitvā ‘‘ayaṃ dīghanikāyo nāmā’’ti vatvā āyasmantaṃ ānandattheraṃ paṭicchāpesuṃ ‘‘āvuso, imaṃ tuyhaṃ nissitake vācehī’’ti. Tato anantaraṃ asītibhāṇavāraparimāṇaṃ majjhimanikāyaṃ saṅgāyitvā dhammasenāpatisāriputtattherassa nissitake paṭicchāpesuṃ ‘‘imaṃ tumhe pariharathā’’ti. Tadanantaraṃ bhāṇavārasataparimāṇaṃ saṃyuttanikāyaṃ saṅgāyitvā mahākassapattheraṃ paṭicchāpesuṃ ‘‘bhante, imaṃ tumhākaṃ nissitake vācethā’’ti. Tadanantaraṃ vīsatibhāṇavārasatapaamāṇaṃ aṅguttaranikāyaṃ saṅgāyitvā anuruddhattheraṃ paṭicchāpesuṃ ‘‘imaṃ tumhākaṃ nissitake vācethā’’ti.
“《法集论》《分别论》《论事》与《人施设论》,
《界论》、《双论》、《发趣论》,此即名为阿毗达摩。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Dhammasaṅgaṇiṃ vibhaṅgañca, kathāvatthuñca puggalaṃ; Dhātuyamakaṃ paṭṭhānaṃ, abhidhammoti vuccatī’’ti. –
如此结集了这部被赞叹为微妙智行境的经典,言“此名为《阿毗达摩藏》”后,五百位阿拉汉进行了诵习。依前述方式,大地震动。此后,又结集了《本生经》、《大义释》、《无碍解道》、《譬喻经》、《经集》、《小诵》、《法句经》、《自说经》、《如是语经》、《天宫事》、《饿鬼事》、《长老偈》、《长老尼偈》这些经典,言“此名为《小部》”,并将其归入《阿毗达摩藏》——这是长部诵师的说法。而中部诵师则说:“连同《行藏》和《佛种姓经》,这一切《小部》经典都包含在经藏之中。”此中意趣:像《本生》等属于小部的经典,大多为法义解说性质,适合归入《阿毗达摩藏》,而不适合像《长部》等那样归入经藏,也不适合归入以施设解说为性的律藏。长部诵师言:“《本生》等归入《阿毗达摩藏》。”此处未单独提及《行藏》和《佛种姓经》,是因它们属于《本生》一类。中部诵师则认为:像《本生》等是依事缘而说,具有随顺教说的性质,因此适合归入经藏,而不适合归入以自性法解说为性、依法教说的《阿毗达摩藏》,故他们主张《本生》等包含在经藏中。对此应审察后采纳。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ saṃvaṇṇitaṃ sukhumañāṇagocaraṃ tantiṃ saṅgāyitvā ‘‘idaṃ abhidhammapiṭakaṃ nāmā’’ti vatvā pañca arahantasatāni sajjhāyamakaṃsu. Vuttanayeneva pathavīkampo ahosi. Tato paraṃ jātakaṃ mahāniddeso paṭisambhidāmaggo apadānaṃ suttanipāto khuddakapāṭho dhammapadaṃ udānaṃ itivuttakaṃ vimānavatthu petavatthu theragāthā therīgāthāti imaṃ tantiṃ saṅgāyitvā ‘‘khuddakagantho nāma aya’’nti ca vatvā abhidhammapiṭakasmiṃyeva saṅgahaṃ āropayiṃsūti dīghabhāṇakā vadanti. Majjhimabhāṇakā pana ‘‘cariyāpiṭakabuddhavaṃsehi saddhiṃ sabbampi taṃ khuddakaganthaṃ suttantapiṭake pariyāpanna’’nti vadanti. Ayamettha adhippāyo – jātakādike khuddakanikāyapariyāpanne yebhuyyena ca dhammaniddesabhūte tādise abhidhammapiṭake saṅgaṇhituṃ yuttaṃ, na pana dīghanikāyādippakāre suttantapiṭake, nāpi paññattiniddesabhūte vinayapiṭaketi. Dīghabhāṇakā ‘‘jātakādīnaṃ abhidhammapiṭake saṅgaho’’ti vadanti. Cariyāpiṭakabuddhavaṃsānañcettha aggahaṇaṃ jātakagatikattā. Majjhimabhāṇakā pana aṭṭhuppattivasena desitānaṃ jātakādīnaṃ yathānulomadesanābhāvato tādise suttantapiṭake saṅgaho yutto, na pana sabhāvadhammaniddesabhūte yathādhammasāsane abhidhammapiṭaketi jātakādīnaṃ suttapariyāpannataṃ vadanti. Tattha yuttaṃ vicāretvā gahetabbaṃ. Khuddakanikāyassa sesanikāyānaṃ viya apākaṭattā sese ṭhapetvā khuddakanikāyaṃ pākaṭaṃ katvā dassento ‘‘tattha khuddakanikāyo nāmā’’tiādimāha. Tatthāti tesu nikāyesu. Tatthāti khuddakanikāye.
如此,从相状、目的、时间、地点、作者、方式等方面展示了第一次大结集后,为显示其中所确立的法与律的种种善巧,以及一类等分类,故说“这一切”等。其中,“无上正等觉”:此处,以无碍智为近因的道智,及以道智为近因的无碍智,称为“正等觉”。“或由观察者”:此指以自说等方式而转起的法。“解脱味”:指阿拉汉果之味;或因能成就最上果,故称解脱成就;或因能彻底解脱烦恼,故称解脱作用。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ nimittapayojanakāladesakārakakaraṇappakārehi paṭhamamahāsaṅgītiṃ dassetvā idāni tattha vavatthāpitesu dhammavinayesu nānappakārakosallatthaṃ ekavidhādibhede dassetuṃ ‘‘tadetaṃ sabbampī’’tiādimāha. Tattha anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhinti ettha anāvaraṇañāṇapadaṭṭhānaṃ maggañāṇaṃ maggañāṇapadaṭṭhānañca anāvaraṇañāṇaṃ ‘‘sammāsambodhī’’ti vuccati. Paccavekkhantena vāti udānādivasena pavattadhammaṃ sandhāyāha. Vimuttirasanti arahattaphalassādaṃ vimuttisampattikaṃ vā aggaphalanipphādanato, vimuttikiccaṃ vā kilesānaṃ accantavimuttisampādanato.
虽然总体而言,一切佛语因能去除烦恼故而皆为律,因能令依教奉行者不堕恶趣等故而皆为法,但为了在此处所意指的“法”与“律”中作出简别,故说“其中,律藏……”等语。由于以蕴等门类广说自性法,故说“其余佛语是法”。或者,虽然法本身就是律——譬如教法即是法,但因“法”此词与“律”此词并列,并以不同的所依而使用,故能显示与律藏相对的经藏,如同“福德与智慧资粮”“牛与劣弱之牛”等说法。显示巴利原文
Kiñcāpi avisesena sabbampi buddhavacanaṃ kilesavinayanena vinayo, yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjamāne apāyapatanādito dhāraṇena dhammo ca hoti , idhādhippete pana dhammavinaye niddhāretuṃ ‘‘tattha vinayapiṭaka’’ntiādimāha. Khandhādivasena sabhāvadhammadesanābāhullato āha ‘‘avasesaṃ buddhavacanaṃ dhammo’’ti. Atha vā yadipi dhammoyeva vinayo pariyattiādibhāvato, tathāpi vinayasaddasannidhāno abhinnādhikaraṇabhāvena payutto dhammasaddo vinayatantiviparītaṃ tantiṃ dīpeti yathā ‘‘puññañāṇasambhāro, gobalībadda’’ntiādi.
“多生轮回”这一偈颂,是世尊在观察自己以一切知智为近因的阿罗汉果证得时,于第十九种观察智之后无间而说。因此说“这是第一佛语”。据说,这是诸佛皆不弃舍的感兴语。其略义为(《法句经注》2.154):我为了寻找这自身存在的造作者——渴爱工匠,以能见到它的智慧,为成就那菩提智,曾在燃灯佛足下发愿;于此长时,在多生轮回中,即在以百千生为计量的轮回流转中,不息止、不停歇地流转、轮回,却未曾找到、未曾获得那智慧。因为夹杂着老、病、死,所谓的“生”是反复去经历的苦,而若未见到那造作者,它便不会止息,因此我为了寻找它而流转。这是其义。显示巴利原文
Anekajātisaṃsāranti ayaṃ gāthā bhagavatā attano sabbaññutaññāṇapadaṭṭhānaṃ arahattappattiṃ paccavekkhantena ekūnavīsatimassa paccavekkhaṇañāṇassa anantaraṃ bhāsitā. Tenāha ‘‘idaṃ paṭhamabuddhavacana’’nti. Idaṃ kira sabbabuddhehi avijahitaudānaṃ. Ayamassa saṅkhepattho (dha. pa. aṭṭha. 2.154) – ahaṃ imassa attabhāvagehassa kārakaṃ taṇhāvaḍḍhakiṃ gavesanto yena ñāṇena taṃ daṭṭhuṃ sakkā, tassa bodhiñāṇassatthāya dīpaṅkarapādamūle katābhinīhāro ettakaṃ kālaṃ anekajātisaṃsāraṃ anekajātisatasahassasaṅkhyaṃ saṃsāravaṭṭaṃ anibbisaṃ anibbisanto taṃ ñāṇaṃ avindanto alabhantoyeva sandhāvissaṃ saṃsariṃ. Yasmā jarābyādhimaraṇamissatāya jāti nāmesā punappunaṃ upagantuṃ dukkhā, na ca sā tasmiṃ adiṭṭhe nivattati, tasmā taṃ gavesanto sandhāvissanti attho.
“已见”意为:如今我通过证悟一切知智,已经见到了你。“不再造屋”意为:你不再造作、不再建造这个名为自身存在的我的房屋。你所有无余的、如同椽子般的烦恼,已被我摧毁。这个由你造作的自身存在之屋的顶心——名为无明的椽子圈,已被拆解、已被破坏。通过以无行涅槃为所缘,我的心已到达、已进入;而我已证得、已获得、已达到名为渴爱灭尽的阿罗汉道或阿罗汉果。这是其义。而在《结句释》中,也这样解释:“‘心已入无行’——心本身已证得、已获得、已达到名为渴爱灭尽的阿罗汉道或阿罗汉果。”这是最初之意所行法。他们说:“‘当诸法确实显现时’一偈,则是最初之语所行法。”据说,世尊是以内心默念的方式说了“多生轮回”等语。显示巴利原文
Diṭṭhosīti idāni mayā sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ paṭivijjhantena diṭṭho asi. Puna gehanti puna imaṃ attabhāvasaṅkhātaṃ mama gehaṃ na kāhasi na karissasi. Tava sabbā anavasesā kilesaphāsukā mayā bhaggā. Imassa tayā katassa attabhāvagehassa kūṭaṃ avijjāsaṅkhātaṃ kaṇṇikamaṇḍalaṃ visaṅkhataṃ viddhaṃsitaṃ. Visaṅkhāraṃ nibbānaṃ ārammaṇakaraṇavasena gataṃ anupaviṭṭhaṃ idāni mama cittaṃ, ahañca taṇhānaṃ khayasaṅkhātaṃ arahattamaggaṃ arahattaphalaṃ vā ajjhagā adhigato pattosmīti attho. Gaṇṭhipadesu pana ‘‘visaṅkhāragatanti cittameva taṇhānaṃ khayasaṅkhātaṃ arahattamaggaṃ arahattaphalaṃ vā ajjhagā adhigato patto’’ti evampi attho vutto. Ayaṃ manasā pavattitadhammānaṃ ādi. ‘‘Yadā have pātubhavanti dhammāti ayaṃ pana vācāya pavattitadhammānaṃ ādī’’ti vadanti. Antojappanavasena kira bhagavā ‘‘anekajātisaṃsāra’’ntiādimāha.
“有些人”是指《犍度》诵者。而首先所说的,应知是《法句》诵者的主张。在此,《犍度》诵者这样说:“《法句》诵者的偈颂因为是意中所说,所以当时并未对大众有所饶益;而我们的偈颂则是通过语表而说,当时令听闻的天与梵天众得到饶益,因此这才是第一佛语。”《法句》诵者则说:“说法对众生饶益与否,并非判定的标准;正由于它是世尊以意所说,所以这才是第一佛语。”因此应知,两者并不相违。若问:“如果‘多生轮回’是以意所说,那为何《法句经注》(《法句经注》2.153-154)中说:‘导师坐在菩提树下,以感兴语的方式发出“多生轮回”此法教后,后来被阿难长老请问而开示’呢?”对此,也应理解为“以意发出感兴语”。若再问:“如果理解为纯粹以意所说,有何理由?”答:如果它是通过语表而说,就应被收入《感兴语》圣典中;正因为它未被收入《感兴语》圣典,这便是它未通过语表、而是以意所说的理由。显示巴利原文
Kecīti khandhakabhāṇakā. Paṭhamaṃ vutto pana dhammapadabhāṇakānaṃ adhippāyoti veditabbo. Ettha ca khandhakabhāṇakā vadanti ‘‘dhammapadabhāṇakānaṃ gāthā manasā desitattā tadā mahato janassa upakārāya na hoti, amhākaṃ pana gāthā vacībhedaṃ katvā desitattā tadā suṇantānaṃ devabrahmānaṃ upakārāya ahosi, tasmā idameva paṭhamabuddhavacana’’nti. Dhammapadabhāṇakā pana ‘‘desanāya janassa upakārānupakārabhāvo lakkhaṇaṃ na hoti, bhagavatā manasā desitattāyeva idaṃ paṭhamabuddhavacana’’nti vadanti, tasmā ubhayampi aññamaññaṃ viruddhaṃ na hotīti veditabbaṃ. Nanu ca yadi ‘‘anekajātisaṃsāra’’nti manasā desitaṃ, atha kasmā dhammapadaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (dha. pa. aṭṭha. 2.153-154) ‘‘anekajātisaṃsāranti imaṃ dhammadesanaṃ satthā bodhirukkhamūle nisinno udānavasena udānetvā aparabhāge ānandattherena puṭṭho kathesī’’ti vuttanti? Tatthāpi manasā udānetvāti evamattho gahetabbo. Atha vā manasāva desitanti evaṃ gahaṇe kiṃ kāraṇanti ce? Yadi vacībhedaṃ katvā desitaṃ siyā, udānapāḷiyaṃ āruḷhaṃ bhaveyya, tasmā udānapāḷiyaṃ anāruḷhabhāvoyeva vacībhedaṃ akatvā manasā desitabhāve kāraṇanti vadanti.
“当诸法确实显现时”中,“iti”一词是“等”的意思。以此摄取了“于热忱者、禅修者婆罗门,彼时他的一切疑惑皆尽除,因为他了知有因之法”等最初三偈。“感兴偈”一词,是依于出生(类别)的单数表达,应知那里也只是取第一偈而说。在此,应说的内容将在《犍度》中阐明。关于“在入雨安居日”,不应与“已证得一切知性者”相连,而应与“观察者的……生起”相连。因为世尊正是在卫塞月满月日的黎明时分证得一切知性的。以喜悦相应智,即与喜悦相应的智慧。“我宣说”意为:我告知、我令觉悟。“有灭法者”,通过无常相,也阐明诸行的苦相与无我相,因为经中说:“凡无常者,彼是苦;凡苦者,彼是无我”(《相应部》3.15)。应见:正是通过阐明三相的方式,展示以彼为所缘的观智,从而开示了非一切外道所能及的、唯佛独有的、以四圣谛为业处基础的、无颠倒的、导向涅槃之道。现在,他以“以不放逸成就之”来劝勉于此正行。或者,以“诸行有灭法”简要地激发悚惧,再以“以不放逸成就之”简要地开示无余的正行。因为“不放逸”一词,总摄三学,含摄了完全圆满显示巴利原文
Yadā have pātubhavanti dhammāti ettha itisaddo ādiattho. Tena ‘‘ātāpino jhāyato brāhmaṇassa, athassa kaṅkhā vapayanti sabbā. Yato pajānāti sahetudhamma’’nti ādigāthāttayaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Udānagāthanti pana jātiyā ekavacanaṃ, tatthāpi paṭhamagāthaṃyeva vā gahetvā vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Ettha pana yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ khandhake āvi bhavissati. Pāṭipadadivaseti idaṃ ‘‘sabbaññubhāvappattassā’’ti na etena sambandhitabbaṃ, ‘‘paccavekkhantassa uppannā’’ti etena pana sambandhitabbaṃ. Visākhapuṇṇamāyameva hi bhagavā paccūsasamaye sabbaññutaṃ pattoti. Somanassamayañāṇenāti somanassasampayuttañāṇena. Āmantayāmīti nivedayāmi, bodhemīti attho. Vayadhammāti aniccalakkhaṇamukhena dukkhānattalakkhaṇampi saṅkhārānaṃ vibhāveti ‘‘yadaniccaṃ taṃ dukkhaṃ, yaṃ dukkhaṃ tadanattā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.15) vacanato. Lakkhaṇattayavibhāvananayeneva tadārammaṇaṃ vipassanaṃ dassento sabbatitthiyānaṃ avisayabhūtaṃ buddhāveṇikaṃ catusaccakammaṭṭhānādhiṭṭhānaṃ aviparītaṃ nibbānagāminiṃ paṭipadaṃ pakāsetīti daṭṭhabbaṃ . Idāni tattha sammāpaṭipattiyaṃ niyojeti ‘‘appamādena sampādethā’’ti. Atha vā ‘‘vayadhammā saṅkhārā’’ti etena saṅkhepena saṃvejetvā ‘‘appamādena sampādethā’’ti saṅkhepeneva niravasesaṃ sammāpaṭipattiṃ dasseti. Appamādapadañhi sikkhattayasaṅgahitaṃ kevalaparipuṇṇaṃ sāsanaṃ pariyādiyitvā tiṭṭhatīti. Antareti antarāḷe, vemajjheti attho.
所谓“经藏”(Suttantapiṭaka):在此,应知如同“业处”(kammanta)即是“业”(kamma)一样,“经”(suttanta)即是“经”(sutta)。所谓“未结集者”(Asaṅgītaṃ),指如《犍度品》《论事》等。然而,有些人说“《须跋经》在第一次结集中未被结集”,那是不合理的。因为阿阇梨法护长老曾说:“在第一次结集之前,阿难尊者住在祇园精舍时,就已为须跋童子开示了。”而《须跋经》是以“如是我闻:一时,阿难尊者住于舍卫城祇树给孤独园,世尊般涅槃后不久……”(长部1.444)等开头出现的。在那里,“如是我闻”等语句,在第一次结集中由阿难尊者亲口说出是不合适的。因为阿难尊者不可能自己开示了《须跋经》后,又说“如是我闻”等。他应当这样说:“尊者,一时我住于舍卫城祇树给孤独园……”。因此,《须跋经》看起来像是被第二、第三次结集的参与者以“如是我闻”等开头纳入结集的。然而,阿阇梨法护长老的意图可能是:“《须跋经》虽由阿难尊者亲口所说,但大迦叶尊者等希望将其纳入第一次结集、确立为圣典,便如同在其他经中所用的方式那样,以‘如是我闻’等开头将其确立为圣典。”若是如此,便合理了。或者,应知意图是:阿难尊者虽亲自开示《须跋经》,但他是依照世尊在《沙门果经》等中所开示的方式而开示的,由于是立足于从世尊面前所得的教法而开示,他不将世尊所说的法归于自己,故说了“如是我闻”等开头语。显示巴利原文
Suttantapiṭakanti ettha yathā kammameva kammantaṃ, evaṃ suttameva suttantanti veditabbaṃ. Asaṅgītanti saṅgītikkhandhakakathāvatthuppakaraṇādi. Keci pana ‘‘subhasuttampi paṭhamasaṅgītiyaṃ asaṅgīta’’nti vadanti, taṃ na yujjati. ‘‘Paṭhamasaṅgītito puretarameva hi āyasmatā ānandattherena jetavane viharantena subhassa māṇavassa desita’’nti ācariyadhammapālattherena vuttaṃ. Subhasuttaṃ pana ‘‘evaṃ me sutaṃ – ekaṃ samayaṃ āyasmā ānando sāvatthiyaṃ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme aciraparinibbute bhagavatī’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.444) āgataṃ. Tattha ‘‘evaṃ me suta’’ntiādivacanaṃ paṭhamasaṅgītiyaṃ āyasmatā ānandatthereneva vattuṃ yuttarūpaṃ na hoti. Na hi ānandatthero sayameva subhasuttaṃ desetvā ‘‘evaṃ me suta’’ntiādīni vadati. Evaṃ pana vattabbaṃ siyā ‘‘ekamidāhaṃ, bhante, samayaṃ sāvatthiyaṃ viharāmi jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme’’ti, tasmā dutiyatatiyasaṅgītikārakehi ‘‘evaṃ me suta’’ntiādinā subhasuttaṃ saṅgītimāropitaṃ viya dissati. Atha ācariyadhammapālattherassa evamadhippāyo siyā ‘‘ānandatthereneva vuttampi subhasuttaṃ paṭhamasaṅgītiṃ āropetvā tantiṃ ṭhapetukāmehi mahākassapattherādīhi aññesu suttesu āgatanayeneva ‘evaṃ me suta’ntiādinā tanti ṭhapitā’’ti, evaṃ sati yujjeyya. Atha vā āyasmā ānandatthero subhasuttaṃ sayaṃ desentopi sāmaññaphalādīsu bhagavatā desitanayeneva desesīti bhagavato sammukhā laddhanaye ṭhatvā desitattā bhagavatā desitaṃ dhammaṃ attani adahanto ‘‘evaṃ me suta’’ntiādimāhāti evamadhippāyo veditabbo.
“两部巴帝摩卡”:指比丘巴帝摩卡与比丘尼巴帝摩卡。“两部分别”:即比丘分别与比丘尼分别这两部分别。“二十二犍度”:即《大品》《小品》中所出的二十二个犍度。“十六附随”:因以十六个附随为特征,故说“十六附随”。正如在《附随》巴利中,有“由彼世尊、知者、见者、阿拉汉、正自觉者,第一波罗夷在何处制定……”等(附随1)的“制定品”;此后,有“行淫法者犯多少罪……”等(附随157)的“犯制品”;有“行淫法者所犯之罪,属于四种违犯中的几种违犯……”等分类(附随182)的“违犯品”;有“行淫法者所犯之罪,被七种罪聚中的几种罪聚所摄……”等分类(附随183)的“摄品”;有“行淫法者所犯之罪,由六种犯缘中的几种犯缘而生起……”等(附随184)的“生起品”;有“行淫法者所犯之罪,是四种诤事中的哪一种诤事……”等(附随185)的“诤事品”;有“行淫显示巴利原文
Ubhayāni pātimokkhānīti bhikkhubhikkhunīpātimokkhavasena. Dve vibhaṅgānīti bhikkhubhikkhunīvibhaṅgavaseneva dve vibhaṅgāni. Dvāvīsati khandhakānīti mahāvaggacūḷavaggesu āgatāni dvāvīsati khandhakāni. Soḷasaparivārāti soḷasahi parivārehi upalakkhitattā soḷasaparivārāti vuttaṃ. Tathā hi parivārapāḷiyaṃ ‘‘yaṃ tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena paṭhamaṃ pārājikaṃ kattha paññatta’’ntiādinā (pari. 1) paññattivāro, tato paraṃ ‘‘methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevanto kati āpattiyo āpajjatī’’tiādinā (pari. 157) katāpattivāro, ‘‘methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevantassa āpattiyo catunnaṃ vipattīnaṃ kati vipattiyo bhajantī’’tiādippabhedo (pari. 182) vipattivāro, ‘‘methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevantassa āpattiyo sattannaṃ āpattikkhandhānaṃ katihi āpattikkhandhehi saṅgahitā’’tiādippabhedo (pari. 183) saṅgahavāro, ‘‘methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevantassa āpattiyo channaṃ āpattisamuṭṭhānānaṃ katihi samuṭṭhānehi samuṭṭhantī’’tiādinā (pari. 184) samuṭṭhānavāro, ‘‘methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevantassa āpattiyo catunnaṃ adhikaraṇānaṃ katamaṃ adhikaraṇa’’ntiādinā (pari. 185) adhikaraṇavāro, ‘‘methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevantassa āpattiyo sattannaṃ samathānaṃ katihi samathehi sammantī’’tiādippabhedo (pari. 186) samathavāro, tadanantaraṃ samuccayavāro cāti aṭṭha vārā vuttā. Tato paraṃ ‘‘methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevanapaccayā pārājikaṃ kattha paññatta’’ntiādinā (pari. 188) nayena puna paccayavasena eko paññattivāro, tassa vasena purimasadisā eva katāpattivārādayo satta vārāti evaṃ aparepi aṭṭha vārā vuttā. Iti imāni aṭṭha, purimānipi aṭṭhāti mahāvibhaṅge soḷasa vārā dassitā. Tato paraṃ teneva nayena bhikkhunivibhaṅgepi soḷasa vārā āgatāti imehi soḷasahi vārehi upalakkhitattā soḷasaparivārāti vuccati. Potthakesu pana katthaci ‘‘parivāro’’ti ettakameva dissati, bahūsu pana potthakesu dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathāyaṃ abhidhammaṭṭhakathāyañca ‘‘soḷasaparivārā’’ti evameva vuttattā ayampi pāṭho na sakkā paṭibāhitunti tassevattho vutto.
“包含梵网等三十四经”:意为梵网经等三十四部经集于此,或以此而集,故称“包含梵网等三十四经”。又,此即所说数量诸经之集合,故称“包含梵网等三十四经”。对于其余诸部,也应如此理解。显示巴利原文
Brahmajālādicatuttiṃsasuttasaṅgahoti brahmajālasuttādīni catuttiṃsa suttāni saṅgayhanti ettha, etenāti vā brahmajālādicatuttiṃsasuttasaṅgaho. Vuttappamāṇānaṃ vā suttānaṃ saṅgaho etassāti brahmajālādicatuttiṃsasuttasaṅgahoti. Evaṃ sesesupi veditabbaṃ.
“因有种种差别理趣故”:为解释此颂义,而说“种种……”等。应知:“令坚固与令放松的作用”:即对于世间违犯的学处,依次有令其坚固的作用;对于制定违犯的学处,则有令其放松的作用。“为遮止违越故”:违越,即超越防护界限而现行的行为,亦是违犯;为遮止此故,这是其义。“因此”:即基于种种理趣等理由。“此”:即“因有种种差别理趣故”等颂文。“此的”:指律藏。“另一”:指经藏。显示巴利原文
Vividhavisesanayattāti imissā gāthāya atthaṃ vibhāvento āha ‘‘vividhā hī’’tiādi. Daḷhīkammasithilakaraṇappayojanāti yathākkamaṃ lokavajjesu sikkhāpadesu daḷhīkammappayojanā, paṇṇattivajjesu sithilakaraṇappayojanāti veditabbaṃ. Ajjhācāranisedhanatoti saññamavelaṃ atibhavitvā pavatto ācāro ajjhācāro, vītikkamo, tassa nisedhanatoti attho. Tenāti vividhanayattādihetunā. Etanti ‘‘vividhavisesanayattā’’tiādigāthāvacanaṃ. Etassāti vinayassa. Itaraṃ panāti suttaṃ.
今为阐明以‘意义之指示’等开首的偈颂含义,而说‘因为那个’等语。在自利、利他等分类中,凡讽诵、听闻、教授、思惟、宣说该经者,由经所摄持的戒等意义亦属于彼;由此而应成就他人,故亦属于他人——这双重的意义,该经皆能指示、显明。同样地,对于现法利益、后世利益、世间利益、出世间利益等种种分类的意义,则以‘等’字来统摄。而且,此处‘意义’一词是作为利益一词的同义语,并非指所诠表之义。若指所诠表之义,便会成为‘经既指示自身的所诠义,也指示他人的所诠义’这样的意思;然而,经所阐明的意义只属于其自身,并不因此就指示了他人的意义。既没有所谓被指示的、应被遮止的他人意义存在,便不应执取‘自利’一词。既没有脱离自利、利他的所诠义存在,也就不应执取‘等’字。因此,由于上述那种作为利益同义语的意义在经中并不存在,所以是依据持经之人而说自利与利他。显示巴利原文
Idāni atthānaṃ sūcanatotiādigāthāya atthaṃ pakāsento āha ‘‘tañhī’’tiādi. Attatthaparatthādibhedeti yo taṃ suttaṃ sajjhāyati suṇāti vāceti cinteti deseti ca, suttena saṅgahito sīlādiattho tassapi hoti, tena parassa sādhetabbato parassapi hotīti tadubhayaṃ taṃ suttaṃ sūceti dīpeti. Tathā diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikatthe lokiyalokuttaratthe cāti evamādibhede atthe ādisaddena saṅgaṇhāti. Atthasaddo cāyaṃ hitapariyāyavacano, na bhāsitatthavacano. Yadi siyā, suttaṃ attanopi bhāsitatthaṃ sūceti parassapīti ayamattho vutto siyā, suttena ca yo attho pakāsito, so tasseva hoti, na tena parattho sūcito hotīti. Tena sūcetabbassa paratthassa nivattetabbassa abhāvā attaggahaṇañca na kattabbaṃ. Attatthaparatthavinimuttassa bhāsitatthassa abhāvā ādiggahaṇañca na kattabbaṃ, tasmā yathāvuttassa hitapariyāyassa atthassa sutte asambhavato suttādhārassa puggalassa vasena attatthaparatthā vuttā.
或者,不依凭经本身,那些自利等意义的分类——如对‘无有其他目的,唯赞叹与利养’此句的释义(《大义释》63)中所说的:自利、利他、俱利、现法利益、后世利益、显了义、深奥义、隐秘义、遮蔽义、应导义、已导义、无过义、离垢义、清净义、胜义——这些意义,经皆能指示,应作如是理解。因为,虽然那些自利等意义是不依凭经而说的,并未被指定为经义,然而其中没有任何一种意义分类能逾越被经所显明的范围,故而说‘经指示这些意义’。而在此意义分别中,此‘意义’一词,也可作为所诠义的同义语。在此,前五种意义分类是利益同义语,其后的六种是所诠义的分类,最后一种则兼具二者之性。其中,由于难以通达、难以阐明而无底深邃者为‘深奥义’;不显露者为‘隐秘义’;如树根之水等被尘沙、文字排列等所覆障者为‘遮蔽义’;须简择而令知者为‘应导义’;依文而可知者为‘已导义’。‘无过义’、‘离垢义’、‘清净义’是依同义语而说,或是依善异熟、唯作法的角度而说。‘胜义’即涅槃,或即诸法之不颠倒自性。显示巴利原文
Atha vā suttaṃ anapekkhitvā ye attatthādayo atthappabhedā ‘‘na haññadatthatthi pasaṃsalābhā’’ti etassa padassa niddese (mahāni. 63) vuttā attattho, parattho, ubhayattho, diṭṭhadhammiko attho, samparāyiko attho, uttāno attho, gambhīro attho, guḷho attho, paṭicchanno attho, neyyo attho, nīto attho, anavajjo attho, nikkileso attho, vodāno attho, paramatthoti, te atthe suttaṃ sūcetīti attho gahetabbo. Tathā hi kiñcāpi suttanirapekkhaṃ attatthādayo vuttā suttatthabhāvena aniddiṭṭhattā, tesu pana ekopi atthappabhedo suttena dīpetabbataṃ nātikkamati, tasmā te atthe suttaṃ sūcetīti vuccati. Imasmiñca atthavikappe attha-saddoyaṃ bhāsitatthapariyāyopi hoti. Ettha hi purimakā pañca atthappabhedā hitapariyāyā, tato pare cha bhāsitatthabhedā, pacchimakā pana ubhayasabhāvā. Tattha duradhigamatāya vibhāvane agādhabhāvo gambhīro, na vivaṭo guḷho, mūludakādayo viya paṃsunā akkharasannivesādinā tirohito paṭicchanno. Niddhāretvā ñāpetabbo neyyo, yathārutavasena veditabbo nīto. Anavajjanikkilesavodānā pariyāyavasena vuttā, kusalavipākakiriyadhammavasena vā. Paramattho nibbānaṃ, dhammānaṃ aviparītasabhāvo eva vā.
或者说,自己少欲,即指示自利;又为他人作少欲之说,即指示利他。如此,应将‘自己远离杀生’等经(《增支部》4.99)配合起来理解。又,应区别于律与阿毗达摩而说‘经’一词的含义,因此,依随应调伏者之意乐而起的教说,由于以自利、利他等为核心,故而特胜地开示了自利、利他等义;而非依随教令、法性而起的教说——正因如此,才说‘由指示诸义故为经’。作了这样的区分之后,诸如‘此是彼世尊的经中所来、经中所摄’(《波逸提》655)以及‘自宗中有五百经’(《法集论注·缘起语》)等处的‘经’字,应知是依借代而用的。显示巴利原文
Atha vā attanā ca appiccho hotīti attatthaṃ, appicchākathañca paresaṃ kattā hotīti paratthaṃ sūceti. Evaṃ ‘‘attanā ca pāṇātipātā paṭivirato hotī’’tiādīni (a. ni. 4.99) suttāni yojetabbāni. Vinayābhidhammehi ca visesetvā suttasaddassa attho vattabbo, tasmā veneyyajjhāsayavasappavattāya desanāya attahitaparahitādīni sātisayaṃ pakāsitāni honti tappadhānabhāvato, na āṇādhammasabhāvavasappavattāyāti idameva atthānaṃ sūcanato suttanti vuttaṃ. Evañca katvā ‘‘ettakaṃ tassa bhagavato suttāgataṃ suttapariyāpanna’’nti (pāci. 655) ca ‘‘sakavāde pañca suttasatānī’’ti (dha. sa. aṭṭha. nidānakathā) ca evamādīsu suttasaddo upacaritoti gahetabbo.
在诸经中,是教令与法性随顺于应调伏者之意乐,而非如律藏与阿毗达摩那般,令应调伏者之意乐去随顺教令与法性。因此,经的教说能令应调伏者获得一向之利益,故说“此处诸义善说”等。而“经的教说能令获得一向之利益”这句,也是就经的教说专以令应调伏者成就利益为务而言的。此专以为务,须知即是随顺于应调伏者之意乐。正因如此,他说“由于是随顺应调伏者之意乐而说”。意思是:不似律藏教说那般,依自在者之地位、以制定学处的方式而行教诫;乃是随顺于应调伏者之意乐,称其根性相应而说,故为已善说。显示巴利原文
Suttesu āṇādhammasabhāvā ca veneyyajjhāsayaṃ anuvattanti, na vinayābhidhammesu viya veneyyajjhāsayo āṇādhammasabhāve, tasmā veneyyānaṃ ekantahitapaṭilābhasaṃvattanikā suttantadesanā hotīti ‘‘suvuttā cettha atthā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Ekantahitapaṭilābhasaṃvattanikā suttantadesanā’’ti idampi veneyyānaṃ hitasampāpane suttantadesanāya tapparabhāvaṃyeva sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tapparabhāvo ca veneyyajjhāsayānulomato daṭṭhabbo. Tenevāha ‘‘veneyyajjhāsayānulomena vuttattā’’ti . Vinayadesanaṃ viya issarabhāvato āṇāpatiṭṭhāpanavasena adesetvā veneyyānaṃ ajjhāsayānulomena cariyānurūpaṃ vuttattā desitattāti attho.
为显示依渐次修学等而于异时成就,他说“如藤蔓之果”。“pasavati”意为结果、令成就。为显示唯有具足方便者方能成就,他说“如母牛之乳”。因为,即使对于母牛,也唯有具足方便者才能获得乳汁。若不以方便,于非时挤那未产犊之母牛,或纵使适时却执其角而挤,则绝不得乳。为阐明“善救护”之义,而说“它善能救护他们”。显示巴利原文
Anupubbasikkhādivasena kālantare abhinipphattiṃ dassento āha ‘‘sassamiva phala’’nti. Pasavatīti phalati, nipphādetīti attho. Upāyasamaṅgīnaṃyeva nipphajjanabhāvaṃ dassento ‘‘dhenu viya khīra’’nti āha. Dhenutopi hi upāyavantānaṃyeva khīrapaṭilābho hoti. Anupāyena hi akāle ajātavacchaṃ dhenuṃ dohanto kālepi vā visāṇaṃ gahetvā dohanto neva khīraṃ paṭilabhati. ‘‘Suttāṇā’’ti etassa atthaṃ pakāsetuṃ ‘‘suṭṭhu ca ne tāyatī’’ti vuttaṃ.
“Suttasabhāga”意指与经相似。为显示与经相似的状态,他说“正如……”等。“木匠的线”即木匠的黑线。它成为标准,是因为依循它来刨削。同样地,这也成为智者的标准:如同展开黑线并作标记后,便知什么当取、什么当舍,同样地,当争论生起时,一经引入经典,智者便清楚知道“此应取,此应舍”,争论因而平息。因此,这部经也成为智者的标准,这是其含义。现在,为以另一种方式显示与经相似的状态,他说“又如……”等。由于如线般成为标准,且如线般具有汇集作用,故被称为“如线之经”。在此,经在阐明自利等时的标准性,以及它对自利等的汇集作用,应当结合理解,因为经以阐明其义理为主。其与律藏、阿毗达摩的差别,也应依前文所述之理结合理解。“Etaṃ”指“由于指示诸义”等对义理的说明。“Etassā”指这部经的。显示巴利原文
Suttasabhāganti suttasadisaṃ. Suttasabhāgataṃyeva dassento āha ‘‘yathā hī’’tiādi. Tacchakānaṃ suttanti vaḍḍhakīnaṃ kāḷasuttaṃ. Pamāṇaṃ hotīti tadanusārena tacchanato. Evametampi viññūnanti yathā kāḷasuttaṃ pasāretvā saññāṇe kate gahetabbaṃ vissajjetabbañca paññāyati, evaṃ vivādesu uppannesu sutte ānītamatte ‘‘idaṃ gahetabbaṃ, idaṃ vissajjetabba’’nti viññūnaṃ pākaṭattā vivādo vūpasammatīti etampi suttaṃ viññūnaṃ pamāṇaṃ hotīti attho. Idāni aññathāpi suttasabhāgataṃ dassento āha ‘‘yathā cā’’tiādi. Suttaṃ viya pamāṇattā saṅgāhakattā ca suttamiva suttanti vuttaṃ hoti. Ettha ca attatthādividhāne suttassa pamāṇabhāvo attatthādīnaṃyeva ca saṅgāhakattaṃ yojetabbaṃ tadatthappakāsanapadhānattā suttassa. Vinayābhidhammehi visesattañca pubbe vuttanayeneva yojetabbaṃ. Etanti ‘‘atthānaṃ sūcanato’’tiādikaṃ atthavacanaṃ. Etassāti suttassa.
“Yaṃ”意为“因为”。“Ettha”指在阿毗达摩中。“Abhikkamantī”中,“abhi”前缀在“kama”动作上彰显增长、超越之义,故说:“于‘abhikkamantī’等词中,它用于增长义。”“Abhiññātā”意为通过半月等特征而被认知、了知、显明。因为半月等形态是夜晚的观相标记:半月为初八,亏缺为十四,圆满为十五。“Abhilakkhitā”在此处也应作同样理解。由于“abhilakkhita”是“abhiññāta”的同义词,故说:“于‘abhiññātā abhilakkhitā’等词中,它用于标记义。”在此,通过并列其他表诠词,不变词仅成为其义的阐明者,因此阐明“lakkhita”义的“abhi”前缀被说为用于标记义。“Rājābhirājā”意为值得诸王供养的国王。“Pūjite”意为应受供养者。显示巴利原文
Yanti yasmā. Etthāti abhidhamme. Abhikkamantīti ettha abhi-saddo kamanakiriyāya vuḍḍhibhāvaṃ atirekataṃ dīpetīti āha ‘‘abhikkamantītiādīsu vuḍḍhiyaṃ āgato’’ti. Abhiññātāti aḍḍhacandādinā kenaci saññāṇena ñātā paññātā pākaṭāti attho. Aḍḍhacandādibhāvo hi rattiyā upalakkhaṇavasena saññāṇaṃ hoti, yasmā aḍḍho cando, tasmā aṭṭhamī, yasmā ūno, tasmā cātuddasī, yasmā puṇṇo, tasmā pannarasīti. Abhilakkhitāti etthāpi ayamevattho veditabbo. Abhilakkhitasaddapariyāyo abhiññātasaddoti āha ‘‘abhiññātā abhilakkhitātiādīsu lakkhaṇe’’ti. Ettha ca vācakasaddantarasannidhānena nipātānaṃ tadatthajotakamattattā lakkhitasaddatthajotako abhisaddo lakkhaṇe vattatīti vutto. Rājābhirājāti rājūhi pūjetuṃ araho rājā. Pūjiteti pūjārahe.
“Abhidhamme”指远离与律制混淆的法,例如:“虽梦遗无犯,但不善思仍可被察觉”等。也有说:“因前后无矛盾,且诸法本身互不混淆的法”。“杀生是不善”等也是如此:对意图致死者,生起令命根断绝之加行的思是不善,而非名为“有情”的命根断绝称为“杀”;同样地,对于他人所有而未给予之物,名为“取”的表色是无记法,而生起该表色的偷盗思是不善法。通过诸如此类的方式,应理解为互不混淆的法。“Abhivinaye”此处,说“不应接受金银”时,是在律中教导。有说:“说‘如此接受者波逸提,如此者恶作’时,是在阿毗律中教导。”因此,以偷盗心取他人金银者,依事分别有波罗夷、偷兰遮、恶作之一;以库藏官身份取者,波逸提;为己用而取者,舍堕;仅因贪欲而取者,不可触摸恶作;被指定为弃钱者如法处理者,无犯。如此,应理解为在互不混淆的律中可教导之义。“Abhikkantenā”中,“abhi”前缀彰显“kanti”的增上,故说“在增上义中”。显示巴利原文
Abhidhammeti ‘‘supinantena sukkavissaṭṭhiyā anāpattibhāvepi akusalacetanā upalabbhatī’’tiādinā vinayapaññattiyā saṅkaravirahite dhamme. ‘‘Pubbāparavirodhābhāvato dhammānaṃyeva ca aññamaññasaṅkaravirahite dhamme’’tipi vadanti. ‘‘Pāṇātipāto akusala’’nti evamādīsu ca maraṇādhippāyassa jīvitindriyupacchedakapayogasamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā akusalaṃ, na pāṇasaṅkhātajīvitindriyassa upacchedasaṅkhāto atipāto, tathā adinnassa parasantakassa ādānasaṅkhātā viññatti abyākato dhammo, taṃviññattisamuṭṭhāpikā theyyacetanā akusalo dhammoti evamādināpi aññamaññasaṅkaravirahite dhammeti attho veditabbo. Abhivinayeti ettha ‘‘jātarūparajataṃ na paṭiggahetabba’’nti vadanto vinaye vineti nāma. Ettha ‘‘evaṃ paṭiggaṇhato pācittiyaṃ, evaṃ dukkaṭanti vadanto ca abhivinaye vineti nāmā’’ti vadanti. Tasmā jātarūparajataṃ theyyacittena parasantakaṃ gaṇhantassa yathāvatthu pārājikathullaccayadukkaṭesu aññataraṃ, bhaṇḍāgārikasīsena gaṇhantassa pācittiyaṃ, attatthāya gaṇhantassa nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ. Kevalaṃ lolatāya gaṇhantassa anāmāsadukkaṭaṃ, rūpiyachaḍḍakassa sammatassa anāpattīti evaṃ aññamaññasaṅkaravirahite vinaye paṭibalo vinetunti attho veditabbo. Abhikkantenāti ettha kantiyā adhikattaṃ abhisaddo dīpetīti āha ‘‘adhike’’ti.
难道不是这样吗?在“abhikkamantī”中,“abhi”前缀在“kama”动作上彰显增长、超越;在“abhiññātā abhilakkhitā”中,由于智与标记动作极为明显,它彰显差别;在“abhikkantenā”中,它彰显“kanti”的增上、殊胜。这些是合理的,因为前缀是动作的差别者。然而,在“abhirājā abhivinayo”中,“abhi”前缀用于应受供养的国王与应被限定的律,这如何合理呢?若问:在此也无过失,因为它彰显了供养与限定的动作,且国王与律与那些动作相应。因此,在此处,如同“ati”在“atimāla”等词中那样,“abhi”前缀连同其成就者,表达了动作。所以,“abhirāja”与“abhivinaya”二词得以成立。同样地,在“abhidhamma”一词中,“abhi”前缀连同其成就者,彰显了增长等动作。应知此义已被显示。显示巴利原文
Nanu ca ‘‘abhikkamantī’’ti ettha abhisaddo kamanakiriyāya vuḍḍhibhāvaṃ atirekataṃ dīpeti, ‘‘abhiññātā abhilakkhitā’’ti ettha ñāṇalakkhaṇakiriyānaṃ supākaṭattā visesaṃ, ‘‘abhikkantenā’’ti ettha kantiyā adhikattaṃ visiṭṭhataṃ dīpetīti idaṃ tāva yuttaṃ kiriyāvisesakattā upasaggassa, ‘‘abhirājā abhivinayo’’ti pana pūjitaparicchinnesu rājavinayesu abhisaddo vattatīti kathametaṃ yujjeyyāti ce? Idhāpi natthi doso pūjanaparicchedanakiriyādīpanato, tāhi ca kiriyāhi rājavinayānaṃ yuttattā, tasmā ettha atimālādīsu atisaddo viya abhisaddo saha sādhanena kiriyaṃ vadatīti abhirājaabhivinayasaddā siddhā, evaṃ abhidhammasadde abhisaddo saha sādhanena vuḍḍhiyādikiriyaṃ dīpetīti ayamattho dassitoti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“Etthacāti”指于阿毗达摩中。“Bhāvetī”是说心的增长。“Pharitvā”是说所缘的增长。“Vuḍḍhimantoti”意为:由于修习与遍满的增长,诸法亦被称为具有增长者。“Ārammaṇādīhīti”指依所缘、相应、业门、行道等。“Lakkhaṇīyattāti”指因应被认知故。唯独出世间法全然具有应受供养性,故以“有学诸法”等显示只有出世间法被供养。“Sabhāvaparicchinnattāti”指因被触等自性所限定故。“Adhikāpi dhammā vuttā”:于此,因比欲界法更为广大,广大法亦被称为“增上”,故它们与增上法一同被说出。显示巴利原文
Etthacāti abhidhamme. Bhāvetīti cittassa vaḍḍhanaṃ vuttaṃ. Pharitvāti ārammaṇassa vaḍḍhanaṃ vuttaṃ. Vuḍḍhimantoti bhāvanāpharaṇavuḍḍhīhi vuḍḍhimantopi dhammā vuttāti attho. Ārammaṇādīhīti ārammaṇasampayuttakammadvārapaṭipadādīhi. Lakkhaṇīyattāti sañjānitabbattā. Ekantato lokuttaradhammānaṃyeva pūjārahattā ‘‘sekkhā dhammā’’tiādinā lokuttarāyeva pūjitāti dassitā. Sabhāvaparicchinnattāti phusanādisabhāvena paricchinnattā. Adhikāpi dhammā vuttāti ettha kāmāvacarehi mahantabhāvato mahaggatā dhammāpi adhikā nāma hontīti tehi saddhiṃ adhikā dhammā vuttā.
“Yaṃ panettha avisiṭṭhanti”:在律藏等三者中,彼此各有殊胜,其中那不殊胜、共通的意义,即是“藏”这个词的意思。因为律、经、论这三个词,由于彼此不共通而称为殊胜,而“藏”这个词,由于与这三者皆共通,则称为不殊胜。“Mā piṭakasampadānenāti”是说:莫因圣典的传达方式而执取。“Kudālañca piṭakañca kudālapiṭakaṃ”,其中“ku”指大地,因劈开、掘开大地,一种铁制的特殊工具称为“锄”;用棕榈叶、藤条等制成的特殊容器称为“篮”;拿着那个(篮)的意思。如前面所说,即“如此有二种意义”等所说的方式。显示巴利原文
Yaṃ panettha avisiṭṭhanti ettha vinayādīsu tīsu aññamaññavisiṭṭhesu yaṃ avisiṭṭhaṃ samānaṃ, taṃ piṭakasaddanti attho. Vinayādayo hi tayo saddā aññamaññaṃ asādhāraṇattā visiṭṭhā nāma, piṭakasaddo pana tehi tīhipi sādhāraṇattā avisiṭṭhoti vuccati. Mā piṭakasampadānenāti pāḷisampadānavasena mā gaṇhathāti vuttaṃ hoti. Kudālañca piṭakañca kudālapiṭakaṃ. Tattha ku vuccati pathavī, tassā dālanato vidālanato ayomayo upakaraṇaviseso kudālaṃ nāma, tālapaṇṇavettalatādīhi kato bhājanaviseso piṭakaṃ nāma, taṃ ādāya gahetvāti attho. Yathāvuttenāti ‘‘evaṃ duvidhatthenā’’tiādinā vuttappakārena.
“Desanāsāsanakathābhedanti”:此处,对应说之义,由说者将教诫等规约加以连接、令觉悟,称为“说法”;依应教之人,随其所犯等应被教诫的状态而教导、调伏,称为“教诫”;对应说之防护、不防护等义进行讲述,使其与言语相连,称为“论说”。因此,相对于说法者世尊而有说法,依应教之人而有教诫,依应说之义而有论说——应如此了知此处说法等的差别。这里说法等并非不观待应说等,但教诫等特别依于说者等,故依各各特殊关联而说示说法等的区分。同样,教诫的制定特别依于堪受教诫者,因为于彼有善巧关联。如此,世俗、胜义的制定也依于制定者,故说教诫等规约依于说者。教诫特别随顺罪过与意乐,也随顺法,如此观待应调伏之人,故依应教之人而说教诫。如同防护与不防护的名色,对于应破除的邪见,若有言说,则言语之事不虚,故特别依于此,依应说之义而说论说。“bheda”一词应分别连接:“应随宜阐明说法之差别、教诫之差别、论说之差别”。“bheda”即差异之义。于他们藏中,学、断与甚深性,即学断。显示巴利原文
Desanāsāsanakathābhedanti ettha kathetabbānaṃ atthānaṃ desakāyattena āṇādividhinā abhisajjanaṃ pabodhanaṃ desanā. Sāsitabbapuggalagatena yathāparādhādinā sāsitabbabhāvena anusāsanaṃ vinayanaṃ sāsanaṃ. Kathetabbassa saṃvarāsaṃvarādino atthassa kathanaṃ vacanapaṭibaddhatākaraṇaṃ kathāti vuccati. Tasmā desitāraṃ bhagavantamapekkhitvā desanā, sāsitabbapuggalavasena sāsanaṃ, kathetabbassa atthassa vasena kathāti evamettha desanādīnaṃ nānākaraṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Ettha ca kiñcāpi desanādayo desetabbādinirapekkhā na honti, āṇādayo pana visesato desakādiadhīnāti taṃtaṃvisesayogavasena desanādīnaṃ bhedo vutto. Tathā hi āṇāvidhānaṃ visesato āṇārahādhīnaṃ tattha kosallayogato. Evaṃ vohāraparamatthavidhānāni ca vidhāyakādhīnānīti āṇādividhino desakāyattatā vuttā. Aparādhajjhāsayānurūpaṃ viya dhammānurūpampi sāsanaṃ visesato, tathā vinetabbapuggalāpekkhanti sāsitabbapuggalavasena sāsanaṃ vuttaṃ. Saṃvarāsaṃvaranāmarūpānaṃ viya viniveṭhetabbāya diṭṭhiyāpi kathanaṃ sati vācāvatthusmiṃ nāsatīti visesato tadadhīnanti kathetabbassa atthassa vasena kathā vuttā. Bhedasaddo visuṃ visuṃ yojetabbo ‘‘desanābhedaṃ sāsanabhedaṃ kathābhedañca yathārahaṃ paridīpaye’’ti. Bhedanti ca nānattanti attho. Tesu piṭakesu sikkhā ca pahānāni ca gambhīrabhāvo ca sikkhāpahānagambhīrabhāvaṃ, tañca yathārahaṃ paridīpayeti attho. Pariyattibhedañca vibhāvayeti sambandho.
所谓“教法分类”,即所学之分类的意思。其中,“Yahinti”是指在律藏等某一藏中。无论是成就还是衰败,随其如何获得,这一切都予以阐明——这是句义的连接。或者,也可这样连接:教法的分类、成就与衰败,在何处、如何获得,这一切都予以阐明。此处,“yathā”是指:凭借非难等因、教法的学习等方式,即通过非难与出离、作为法之库藏与守护之因的学习、善行与恶行这些方式而说。显示巴利原文
Pariyattibhedanti ca pariyāpuṇanabhedanti attho. Yahinti yasmiṃ vinayādike piṭake. Yaṃ sampattiñca vipattiñca yathā pāpuṇāti, tampi sabbaṃ vibhāvayeti sambandho. Atha vā yaṃ pariyattibhedaṃ sampattiñca vipattiñcāpi yahiṃ yathā pāpuṇāti, tampi sabbaṃ vibhāvayeti yojetabbaṃ. Ettha yathāti yehi upārambhādihetupariyāpuṇanādippakārehi upārambhanissaraṇadhammakosakarakkhaṇahetupariyāpuṇanaṃ suppaṭipatti duppaṭipattīti etehi pakārehīti vuttaṃ hoti.
“阐明与解释”,这是随顺前文所说而作的说明,但就义理而言,二者是同一回事。“以堪受教诫者”是指:能领受教诫者,即世尊。世尊因具足正等正觉与大悲悯,以无颠倒的利益教导者之身份,其言为量,故堪能颁布教诫;又因世俗与胜义皆有可能,故说“以教诫为多”。此后诸处,道理亦同。显示巴利原文
Paridīpanā vibhāvanā cāti heṭṭhā vuttassa anurūpato vuttaṃ, atthato pana ekameva. Āṇārahenāti āṇaṃ ṭhapetuṃ arahatīti āṇāraho, bhagavā. So hi sammāsambuddhatāya mahākāruṇikatāya ca aviparītahitopadesakabhāvena pamāṇavacanattā āṇaṃ paṇetuṃ arahati, vohāraparamatthānampi sambhavato āha ‘‘āṇābāhullato’’ti. Ito paresupi eseva nayo.
“第一”即指律藏。“多有过失者”指像Seyyasaka长老等那样的人。他们因多有过失,故被称为“多有过失者”。“众多”即大量、繁多的意思;“过失”即罪过、违犯;具有众多过失的人,便是“多有过失者”。在“种种意乐”等语句中,“意乐”即内心深处之倾向。就义理而言,它既是见也是智;但就分类而言,则有四种。即:依过去所行,在未来因缘成熟时当生的、称为常见与断见的邪见,以及称为顺谛智、业自作智的正见,这些都称为“意乐”。故有此言:显示巴利原文
Paṭhamanti vinayapiṭakaṃ. Pacurāparādhā seyyasakattherādayo. Te hi dosabāhullato ‘‘pacurāparādhā’’ti vuttā. Pacuro bahuko bahulo aparādho doso vītikkamo yesaṃ te pacurāparādhā. Anekajjhāsayātiādīsu āsayova ajjhāsayo. So ca atthato diṭṭhi ñāṇañca, pabhedato pana catubbidhaṃ hoti. Tathā hi pubbacariyavasena āyatiṃ sati paccaye uppajjamānārahā sassatucchedasaṅkhātā micchādiṭṭhi saccānulomikañāṇakammassakataññāṇasaṅkhātā sammādiṭṭhi ca ‘‘āsayo’’ti vuccati. Vuttañhetaṃ –
‘‘Sassatucchedadiṭṭhi ca, khanti cevānulomikā; Yathābhūtañca yaṃ ñāṇaṃ, etaṃ āsayasaññita’’nti.
就此四种意乐而言:因众生依止其中,故称为“意乐”。随眠有七种:欲贪、有贪、见、嗔、疑、慢、无明。如同鼠毒,一遇因缘便当生起;那些未来当生的烦恼,以及过去、现在的烦恼,也如此称说。因为诸法的自性并不会因时间的差异而有所改变。“Cariyā”即是行,有贪行等六种根本行;若依内部分类则有多种,依交往方式则有六十三种。或者,“cariyā”即所行,有善行与恶行二种。“Adhimutti”(胜解),《结文》中说:“名为胜解,即如‘我今日当出家,我今日当证阿罗汉果’等,以心向彼的状态而生起的决意。”而阿阇梨法护长老说:“众生依过去所行而有其喜好。”此喜好有二种:劣与胜。随顺,即随顺意乐等。“我、我所”之想,即依见、慢、爱而生起的“我、我所”想。“如法者”,即了知此处无我、无我所,唯有法而已——如此随顺法之自性。显示巴利原文
Idañca catubbidhaṃ āsayanti ettha sattā nivasantīti āsayoti vuccati. Anusayā kāmarāgabhavarāgadiṭṭhipaṭighavicikicchāmānāvijjāvasena satta. Mūsikavisaṃ viya kāraṇalābhe uppajjanārahā anāgatā kilesā, atītā paccuppannā ca tatheva vuccanti. Na hi kālabhedena dhammānaṃ sabhāvabhedo atthīti. Cariyāti rāgacariyādikā cha mūlacariyā, antarabhedena anekavidhā, saṃsaggavasena pana tesaṭṭhi honti. Atha vā cariyāti caritaṃ, taṃ sucaritaduccaritavasena duvidhaṃ. ‘‘Adhimutti nāma ‘ajjeva pabbajissāmi, ajjeva arahattaṃ gaṇhissāmī’tiādinā tanninnabhāvena pavattamānaṃ sanniṭṭhāna’’nti gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Ācariyadhammapālattherena pana ‘‘sattānaṃ pubbacariyavasena abhirucī’’ti vuttaṃ. Sā duvidhā hīnapaṇītabhedena. Yathānulomanti ajjhāsayādīnaṃ anurūpaṃ. Ahaṃ mamāti saññinoti diṭṭhimānataṇhāvasena ahaṃ mamāti evaṃ pavattasaññino. Yathādhammanti natthettha attā attaniyaṃ vā, kevalaṃ dhammamattametanti evaṃ dhammasabhāvānurūpanti attho.
“防护与不防护”:此处,防护即守护,以身业、语业不违犯。大防护为不防护。因这里的前缀“a-”有增长义,如“asekkhā dhammā”(无学之法),故其义为小防护与大防护。“见解的解开”:即从见解中解脱。关于增上戒学等的分类,将在后文《初波罗夷》的注释中阐明。在经藏语中,因以“远离诸欲”等广泛开示定,故说“经藏中的增上心学”。“对违犯的断除”:即对那些杂染法或业杂染——以身、语门违犯者——的断除。由于随眠而于相续中流转的烦恼,即使因获得条件而现起,也会因戒的破坏而无法违犯,故说“戒是对治违犯的”。“对现起的断除”:烦恼以给予机会的方式,占据并压制心中善法的生起,称为现起;断除它,即断除烦恼于心相续中生起的现起。“对随眠的断除”:随眠是以未断除的状态在相续中一再沉睡、因获得条件而适合生起者。它们是获得适当条件后适合生起、已具力量的七种烦恼,即欲贪等;断除它们即是随眠断除。而这些随眠完全由圣道智慧所断除,故说“慧是对治随眠的”。显示巴利原文
Saṃvarāsaṃvaroti ettha saṃvaraṇaṃ saṃvaro, kāyavācāhi avītikkamo. Mahanto saṃvaro asaṃvaro. Vuḍḍhiattho hi ayaṃ a-kāro yathā ‘‘asekkhā dhammā’’ti, tasmā khuddako mahanto ca saṃvaroti attho. Diṭṭhiviniveṭhanāti diṭṭhiyā vimocanaṃ. Adhisīlasikkhādīnaṃ vibhāgo parato paṭhamapārājikasaṃvaṇṇanāya āvi bhavissati. Suttantapāḷiyaṃ ‘‘vivicceva kāmehī’’tiādinā samādhidesanābāhullato ‘‘suttantapiṭake adhicittasikkhā’’ti vuttaṃ. Vītikkamappahānaṃ kilesānanti saṃkilesadhammānaṃ kammakilesānaṃ vā yo kāyavacīdvārehi vītikkamo, tassa pahānaṃ. Anusayavasena santāne anuvattantā kilesā kāraṇalābhe pariyuṭṭhitāpi sīlabhedavasena vītikkamituṃ na labhantīti āha ‘‘vītikkamapaṭipakkhattā sīlassā’’ti. Pariyuṭṭhānappahānanti okāsadānavasena kilesānaṃ citte kusalappavattiṃ pariyādiyitvā uṭṭhānaṃ pariyuṭṭhānaṃ, tassa pahānaṃ cittasantānesu uppattivasena kilesānaṃ pariyuṭṭhānassa pahānanti vuttaṃ hoti. Anusayappahānanti appahīnabhāvena santāne anu anu sayanakā kāraṇalābhe uppattiarahā anusayā. Te pana anurūpaṃ kāraṇaṃ laddhā uppajjanārahā thāmagatā kāmarāgādayo satta kilesā, tesaṃ pahānaṃ anusayappahānaṃ. Te ca sabbaso ariyamaggapaññāya pahīyantīti āha ‘‘anusayapaṭipakkhattā paññāyā’’ti.
“彼分断”:犹如以灯光对治黑暗,以布施等福行事所摄的种种善分,断除种种不善分,称为“彼分断”。在此处,应知以种种善戒分断除种种恶戒分,为“彼分断”。“镇伏断与正断”:此处,以近行定与安止定所摄的定,通过阻止其生起,如同以棍棒击打水面浮苔一般,以镇伏的方式断除种种障碍法,为镇伏断。由于修习四圣道,在相应道者的相续中,以彻底不再生起的方式断除属于集谛的烦恼群,为正断。“对恶行杂染的断除”:身恶行等是恶行,或被烦恼所染污的行为是恶行。其生起之处,即正确地染污、逼迫、烧灼该相续,故为杂染;断除它,即以彼分的方式,断除以身语恶行方式生起的杂染。由于定是对治欲贪的,在经藏中说为断除渴爱杂染。由于开示离我执等的自性法,在论藏中说为断除见杂染。显示巴利原文
Tadaṅgappahānanti dīpālokeneva tamassa dānādipuññakiriyavatthugatena tena tena kusalaṅgena tassa tassa akusalaṅgassa pahānaṃ ‘‘tadaṅgappahāna’’nti vuccati. Idha pana tena tena susīlyaṅgena tassa tassa dussīlyaṅgassa pahānaṃ ‘‘tadaṅgappahāna’’nti veditabbaṃ. Vikkhambhanasamaucchedappahānānīti ettha upacārappanābhedena samādhinā pavattinivāraṇena ghaṭappahāreneva jalatale sevālassa tesaṃ tesaṃ nīvaraṇānaṃ dhammānaṃ vikkhambhanavasena pahānaṃ vikkhambhanappahānaṃ. Catunnaṃ ariyamaggānaṃ bhāvitattā taṃtaṃmaggavato santāne samudayapakkhikassa kilesagaṇassa accantaṃ appavattisaṅkhātasamucchedavasena pahānaṃ samucchedappahānaṃ. Duccaritasaṃkilesassa pahānanti kāyaduccaritādi duṭṭhu caritaṃ, kilesehi vā dūsitaṃ caritanti duccaritaṃ. Tadeva yattha uppannaṃ, taṃ santānaṃ sammā kileseti bādhayati upatāpeti cāti saṃkileso, tassa pahānaṃ, kāyavacīduccaritavasena pavattasaṃkilesassa tadaṅgavasena pahānanti vuttaṃ hoti. Samādhissa kāmacchandapaṭipakkhattā suttantapiṭake taṇhāsaṃkilesassa pahānaṃ vuttaṃ. Attādivinimuttasabhāvadhammappakāsanato abhidhammapiṭake diṭṭhisaṃkilesassa pahānaṃ vuttaṃ.
“于每一者中”:此处应理解为在这三藏中的每一藏中。“法即圣典”:此处,由于开显殊胜的戒等义,由于是自性、是自然语言,以及由佛等所说,故殊胜的语之相续为圣典,即教理之法。在《甘提帕达》中说:“‘法即圣典’:此处,开显世尊所说之义与名称的音声本身,即名为圣典。”然而,在阿毗达摩注释所写的锡兰《甘提帕达》中,这样说:“世尊以心随顺自性义与自性名称而安立的施设,称为圣典。”如果只有音声是圣典,那么圣典与说法应有差异。而以心安立的圣典,除了发出言音之外,与说法并无差异。同样,在开示说法时,除了发出言音之外,说法与以心安立的圣典被说为无别。而且,后面说“说法即施设”,由此,说法与圣典无别,即说明了圣典的施设性。再者,如果说法与圣典是别异的,则应说“对圣典及圣典之义与说法如实通达”,然而未如此说,而说“对圣典及圣典之义如实通达”,由此显示了圣典与说法无别。如此,后面开示“说法名为施设”时,由与说法无别,即已说明了圣典的施设性。显示巴利原文
Ekamekasmiñcetthāti etesu tīsu piṭakesu ekamekasmiṃ piṭaketi attho daṭṭhabbo. Dhammoti pāḷīti ettha pakaṭṭhānaṃ ukkaṭṭhānaṃ sīlādiatthānaṃ bodhanato sabhāvaniruttibhāvato buddhādīhi bhāsitattā ca pakaṭṭhānaṃ vacanappabandhānaṃ āḷīti pāḷi, pariyattidhammo. ‘‘Dhammoti pāḷīti ettha bhagavatā vuccamānassa atthassa vohārassa ca dīpano saddoyeva pāḷi nāmā’’ti gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Abhidhammaṭṭhakathāya likhite sīhaḷagaṇṭhipade pana idaṃ vuttaṃ – sabhāvatthassa sabhāvavohārassa ca anurūpavasena bhagavatā manasā vavatthāpitā paṇḍatti pāḷīti vuccati. Yadi saddoyeva pāḷi siyā, pāḷiyā desanāya ca nānattena bhavitabbaṃ. Manasā vavatthāpitāya ca pāḷiyā vacībhedakaraṇamattaṃ ṭhapetvā desanāya nānattaṃ natthi. Tathā hi desanaṃ dassentena manasā vavatthāpitāya pāḷiyā desanāti vacībhedakaraṇamattaṃ vinā pāḷiyā saha desanāya anaññathā vuttā. Tathā ca upari ‘‘desanāti paññattī’’ti vuttattā desanāya anaññabhāvena pāḷiyā paṇṇattibhāvo kathito hoti. Apica yadi pāḷiyā aññāyeva desanā siyā, ‘‘pāḷiyā ca pāḷiatthassa ca desanāya ca yathābhūtāvabodho’’ti vattabbaṃ siyā, evaṃ pana avatvā ‘‘pāḷiyā ca pāḷiatthassa ca yathābhūtāvabodho’’ti vuttattā pāḷiyā desanāya ca anaññabhāvo dassito hoti. Evañca katvā upari ‘‘desanā nāma paññattī’’ti dassentena desanāya anaññabhāvato pāḷiyā paṇṇattibhāvo kathitova hotīti.
在此,若问:于“唯音声方名为巴利”这一主张中,由于法亦以音声为自性,那么法与说法有何差别?应知:以开显各别义而了知、且通过领受等方式先前已确立的音声相续,是法;之后为令他人了知而发起、开显彼义的音声,是说法。或者,所说音声的等起心为说法,因为“以这些起心而生起音声,故为说法”,如同妄语等。于此,等起妄语等的思,亦以妄语等音声来称呼。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca ‘‘saddoyeva pāḷi nāmā’’ti imasmiṃ pakkhe dhammassapi saddasabhāvattā dhammadesanānaṃ ko visesoti ce? Tesaṃ tesaṃ atthānaṃ bodhakabhāvena ñāto uggahaṇādivasena ca pubbe vavatthāpito saddappabandho dhammo, pacchā paresaṃ avabodhanatthaṃ pavattito tadatthappakāsako saddo desanāti veditabbaṃ. Atha vā yathāvuttasaddasamuṭṭhāpako cittuppādo desanā ‘‘desīyati samuṭṭhāpīyati saddo etenā’’ti katvā musāvādādayo viya. Tatthāpi hi musāvādādisamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā musāvādādisaddena voharīyati.
于此三者中,所谓“法、义、教说、通达”:此处,巴利之义、巴利之教说、巴利义之通达,此三者属巴利所摄的范围。因此,律藏等作为其义、其教说及其通达的所依,是合理的。然而,若问:三藏即是巴利本身,它们又如何能作为“法”的所依?答:因为巴利总集是其组成部分——巴利的所依。总集对于部分,被说为所依,如“树上的树枝”。在此,由于法等难以通达,故以这些法为因,律等甚深。如是,律等亦具四种甚深性。因此,正是法等因难以通达而甚深,并非律等。不应如此责难,因为律等本身的甚深性,是直接从“境”与“有境者”的角度而被述说的。因为“法”即是律等,它们的“境”是“义”,而“教说”与“通达”是以法与义为境。其中,由于通达难以达成,应知法与义的难以通达;由于教说之智难以达成,应知教说的难以通达。又由于通达不能被生起,且生起以彼为境之智是困难的,应知通达的难以通达。“难以通达的”意为“被苦所通达的”。以一分通达的劣慧者,不能获得立足处,故说“且是不可获”……显示巴利原文
Tīsupi cetesu ete dhammatthadesanāpaṭivedhāti ettha pāḷiattho pāḷidesanā pāḷiatthapaṭivedho cāti ime tayo pāḷivisayā hontīti vinayapiṭakādīnaṃ atthassa desanāya paṭivedhassa ca ādhārabhāvo yutto, piṭakāni pana pāḷiyoyevāti tesaṃ dhammassa ādhārabhāvo kathaṃ yujjeyyāti ce? Pāḷisamudāyassa avayavapāḷiyā ādhārabhāvato. Avayavassa hi samudāyo ādhārabhāvena vuccati yathā ‘‘rukkhe sākhā’’ti. Ettha ca dhammādīnaṃ dukkhogāhabhāvato tehi dhammādīhi vinayādayo gambhīrāti vinayādīnampi catubbidho gambhīrabhāvo vuttoyeva, tasmā dhammādayo eva dukkhogāhattā gambhīrā, na vinayādayoti na codetabbametaṃ sammukhena visayavisayīmukhena ca vinayādīnaṃyeva gambhīrabhāvassa vuttattā. Dhammo hi vinayādayo, tesaṃ visayo attho, dhammatthavisayā ca desanāpaṭivedhāti. Tattha paṭivedhassa dukkarabhāvato dhammatthānaṃ, desanāñāṇassa dukkarabhāvato desanāya ca dukkhogāhabhāvo veditabbo. Paṭivedhassa pana uppādetuṃ asakkuṇeyyattā taṃvisayañāṇuppattiyā ca dukkarabhāvato dukkhogāhatā veditabbā. Dukkhena ogayhantīti dukkhogāhā. Ekadesena ogāhantehipi mandabuddhīhi patiṭṭhā laddhuṃ na sakkāti āha ‘‘alabbhaneyyapatiṭṭhā cā’’ti. Ekamekasminti ekekasmiṃ piṭake. Etthāti etesu piṭakesu. Niddhāraṇe cetaṃ bhummavacanaṃ.
现在,为了显示亦依因、因之果等而有的甚深性,说“另一理趣”等。“因”即缘。因为它施设、安立自己的果,故被称为“法”。为了让人了解此处“法”字作为“因”的同义词,说“因为这样说”等。若问:通过“于因的智是法无碍解”这句话,如何能知“法”即是因?答:因为显示“法无碍解”这一复合词的分解义时,说了“于因的智”。在“对法的无碍解是法无碍解”中,显示“法”义时说了“于因”,显示“无碍解”义时说了“智”。因此,通过说明“因”与“法”同义、“智”与“无碍解”同义,成立了“法”即是因。同样地,通过“于因之果的智是义无碍解”这句话,也应知成立了“义”是因之果。因之果,即因之果。而它因为随顺因而被了知、被证得、被达到,故被称为“义”。显示巴利原文
Idāni hetuhetuphalādīnaṃ vasenapi gambhīrabhāvaṃ dassento āha ‘‘aparo nayo’’tiādi. Hetūti paccayo. So hi attano phalaṃ dahati vidahatīti dhammoti vuccati. Dhammasaddassa cettha hetupariyāyatā kathaṃ viññāyatīti āha ‘‘vuttañheta’’ntiādi. Nanu ca ‘‘hetumhi ñāṇaṃ dhammapaṭisambhidā’’ti etena vacanena dhammassa hetubhāvo kathaṃ viññāyatīti ce? Dhammapaṭisambhidāti etassa samāsapadassa avayavapadatthaṃ dassentena ‘‘hetumhi ñāṇa’’nti vuttattā. ‘‘Dhamme paṭisambhidā dhammapaṭisambhidā’’ti ettha hi ‘‘dhamme’’ti etassa atthaṃ dassentena ‘‘hetumhī’’ti vuttaṃ, ‘‘paṭisambhidā’’ti etassa atthaṃ dassentena ‘‘ñāṇa’’nti, tasmā hetudhammasaddā ekatthā ñāṇapaṭisambhidāsaddā cāti imamatthaṃ vadantena sādhito dhammassa hetubhāvo. Hetuphale ñāṇaṃ atthapaṭisambhidāti etena vacanena sādhito atthassa hetuphalabhāvopi evameva daṭṭhabbo. Hetuno phalaṃ hetuphalaṃ. Tañca yasmā hetuanusārena arīyati adhigamīyati sampāpuṇīyati, tasmā atthoti vuccati.
在“如法”(yathādhamma)一词中,此处的“法”字摄尽因、因之果及一切。此“法”字乃表自性者,非表教典或因性者,因此“如法”的意思是:某种某种的无明等、行等法,即于其各自之中。或者,“如法”即“随顺于法”之意。教说亦如证悟,由开显不颠倒的境而随顺于法转起,正因如此,它被称为“不颠倒的言说”。“法言说”(dhammābhilāpa)即不颠倒的言说,具足义与文。于此,“被言说”(abhilappati)故为“言说”(abhilāpa),此指声音。由此显示了“于彼,于法之词句、言说中的智是词无碍解”(《分别论》718)中所说的“法之词句”,因为教说具有声音的自性。事实上,在《无碍解分别》的巴利中(《分别论》718等),已说词无碍解有有限所缘等状态。在注释书中(《分别论》注718),也通过“以彼自性词句、声音为所缘”等,显示了以声音为所缘。同样,在确定了“此声音为此义之能诠”这种能诠与所诠之义后,由于随顺地开显各各言说之义而转起,声音被称为“教说”。意图显示巴利原文
Yathādhammanti ettha dhammasaddo hetuṃ hetuphalañca sabbaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Sabhāvavācako hesa dhammasaddo, na pariyattihetubhāvavācako, tasmā yathādhammanti yo yo avijjādisaṅkhārādidhammo, tasmiṃ tasminti attho. Dhammānurūpaṃ vā yathādhammaṃ. Desanāpi hi paṭivedho viya aviparītavisayavibhāvanato dhammānurūpaṃ pavattati, tatoyeva ca aviparītābhilāpoti vuccati. Dhammābhilāpoti atthabyañjanako aviparītābhilāpo. Ettha ca abhilappatīti abhilāpoti saddo vuccati. Etena ‘‘tatra dhammaniruttābhilāpe ñāṇaṃ niruttipaṭisambhidā’’ti (vibha. 718) ettha vuttaṃ dhammaniruttiṃ dasseti saddasabhāvattā desanāya. Tathā hi niruttipaṭisambhidāya parittārammaṇādibhāvo paṭisambhidāvibhaṅgapāḷiyaṃ (vibha. 718 ādayo) vutto. Aṭṭhakathāyañca (vibha. aṭṭha. 718) ‘‘taṃ sabhāvaniruttiṃ saddaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā’’tiādinā saddārammaṇatā dassitā. Tathā hi imassa atthassa ayaṃ saddo vācakoti vacanavacanatthe vavatthapetvā taṃtaṃvacanatthavibhāvanavasena pavattito saddo desanāti vuccati. Adhippāyoti etena ‘‘desanāti paññattī’’ti etaṃ vacanaṃ dhammaniruttābhilāpaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, na tato vinimuttaṃ paññattiṃ sandhāyāti adhippāyaṃ dasseti. Desīyati attho etenāti hi desanā, pakārena ñāpīyati etena, pakārato ñāpetīti vā paññattīti dhammaniruttābhilāpo vuccati. Evaṃ ‘‘desanā nāma saddo’’ti imasmiṃ pakkhe ayamattho veditabbo. ‘‘Desanāti paññattī’’ti ettha paññattivādino pana evaṃ vadanti – kiñcāpi ‘‘dhammābhilāpo’’ti ettha abhilappatīti abhilāpoti saddo vuccati, na paṇṇatti, tathāpi sadde vuccamāne tadanurūpaṃ vohāraṃ gahetvā tena vohārena dīpitassa atthassa jānanato sadde kathite tadanurūpā paṇṇattipi kāraṇūpacārena kathitāyeva hoti. Atha vā ‘‘dhammābhilāpoti attho’’ti avatvā ‘‘dhammābhilāpoti adhippāyo’’ti vuttattā desanā nāma saddo na hotīti dīpitamevāti.
现在,为了说明证悟,他说:“证悟即是现观。”能证悟的智被称为证悟;或者,藉由它而证悟,故为证悟。现观即完全通达,或者藉由它而完全通达,故为现观。现在,为了从现观的分类、现观的方式、所缘以及自性方面使之明了,他说:“那个现观有世间与出世间”等。从境与不迷乱而通达,这是句子的关联。其中,从境而言,随顺义等而通达法等,即:以无明等法为所缘、以行等义为所缘、以彼二者之施设为所缘的世间通达。然而,从不迷乱而言,随顺义等而通达法等,则是以涅槃为所缘、与道相应、摧毁对如前所述的法、义、施设之迷乱的出世间现观。正如是:“此是因,此是彼之果,此是随顺彼二者之假名”——如此,以作所缘的方式,世间智从境而证悟;而出世间智则由于以道智断除了对因、因之果等之迷乱,故从不迷乱而证悟。“随顺义而于法中”:无明是因,诸行是因所生;无明令诸行生起——如此,随顺果而于因中,这是其义。或者,在福行、非福行、不动行三者中,与非福行相应的无明是缘,对其余二者则随顺相应等——如此,随顺果而于因中证悟,这是其义。“随顺法而于义中”:如“以无明为缘而有诸行”等,随顺因而于果中通达,这是其义。“随顺施设之路而于施设中”:随顺施设所表述的法而于施设中通达,这是其义。显示巴利原文
Idāni paṭivedhaṃ niddisanto āha ‘‘paṭivedhoti abhisamayo’’ti. Paṭivijjhatīti ñāṇaṃ paṭivedhoti vuccati. Paṭivijjhanti etenāti vā paṭivedho , abhisametīti abhisamayo, abhisamenti etenāti vā abhisamayo. Idāni abhisamayappabhedato abhisamayappakārato ārammaṇato sabhāvato ca pākaṭaṃ kātuṃ ‘‘so ca lokiyalokuttaro’’tiādimāha. Visayato asammohato ca avabodhoti sambandho. Tattha visayato atthādianurūpaṃ dhammādīsu avabodho nāma avijjādidhammārammaṇo saṅkhārādiatthārammaṇo tadubhayapaññāpanārammaṇo lokiyo avabodho. Asammohato atthādianurūpaṃ dhammādīsu avabodho pana nibbānārammaṇo maggayutto yathāvuttadhammatthapaññattīsu sammohaviddhaṃsano lokuttaro abhisamayo. Tathā hi ‘‘ayaṃ hetu, idamassa phalaṃ, ayaṃ tadubhayānurūpo vohāro’’ti evaṃ ārammaṇakaraṇavasena lokiyañāṇaṃ visayato paṭivijjhati, lokuttarañāṇaṃ pana hetuhetuphalādīsu sammohassa maggañāṇena samucchinnattā asammohato paṭivijjhati. Atthānurūpaṃ dhammesūti avijjā hetu, saṅkhārā hetusamuppannā, saṅkhāre uppādeti avijjāti evaṃ kāriyānurūpaṃ kāraṇesūti attho. Atha vā puññābhisaṅkhāraapuññābhisaṅkhāraāneñjābhisaṅkhāresu tīsu apuññābhisaṅkhārassa sampayuttaavijjā paccayo, itaresaṃ yathānurūpantiādinā kāriyānurūpaṃ kāraṇesu paṭivedhoti attho. Dhammānurūpaṃ atthesūti ‘‘avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā’’tiādinā kāraṇānurūpaṃ kāriyesu avabodhoti attho. Paññattipathānurūpaṃ paññattīsūti paññattiyā vuccamānadhammānurūpaṃ paṇṇattīsu avabodhoti attho.
为了通过如前所述的法等来显示诸藏的甚深性,现在他说:“如今,由于在这些藏中”等。“法类”即因的差别,或即因本身。“义类”即果的差别,或即果本身。而此教说——这是句子的关联。而在此处,即在这些各各藏中的法、义教说中,那个证悟——这是其义。“难通达”:在此,由于无明、行等法义难以证悟,故为难通达;由于对它们的施设难以做到,以及由于无法使称为证悟的教说与证悟生起并成为境,故应知为难通达。“如此亦”:此“亦”字总括了前文所说的其他方式。“在此”:即在这三藏中。“义已说”:已说、已注释之义为此所有,故为“义已说”。显示巴利原文
Yathāvuttehi dhammādīhi piṭakānaṃ gambhīrabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘idāni yasmā etesu piṭakesū’’tiādimāha. Dhammajātanti kāraṇappabhedo kāraṇameva vā. Atthajātanti kāriyappabhedo kāriyameva vā. Yā cāyaṃ desanāti sambandho. Yo cetthāti etāsu taṃtaṃpiṭakagatāsu dhammatthadesanāsu yo paṭivedhoti attho. Dukkhogāhanti ettha avijjāsaṅkhārādīnaṃ dhammatthānaṃ duppaṭivijjhatāya dukkhogāhatā. Tesaṃ paññāpanassa dukkarabhāvato desanāya paṭivedhanasaṅkhātassa paṭivedhassa ca uppādanavisayīkaraṇānaṃ asakkuṇeyyatāya dukkhogāhatā veditabbā. Evampīti pisaddo pubbe vuttappakārantaraṃ sampiṇḍeti. Etthāti etesu tīsu piṭakesu. Vuttatthāti vutto saṃvaṇṇito attho assāti vuttatthā.
“在三藏中”:在此,应从“各各”这一增补之义,或从论典的角度来理解。“教法类别”:“教法”即学习。此处“教法”一词是表学习义,并非圣典的同义词,因此,此处应如此领会其义:“在三藏中,应见到、应了知各别的学习方式。”正因如此,三本《结集注》中说:“教法即学习方式。”又或者,以三种方式应被学习的圣典本身被称为教法,正因如此,载于《阿毗达摩注》的锡兰《结集注》中说:“教法即圣典次第。”如此,即使从与蛇喻学习方式相关联的角度,也可将蛇喻教法说为圣典,这样安立之后,后文“为诘难等因而学习的蛇喻”这一解释便顺理成章。因为在那里,正是被恶执取、被学习的圣典可以如此说。“蛇喻”:蛇的执取是此处的比喻,故为蛇喻。在此,应知“蛇的执取”是以“蛇”一词来表示。如同“食饼者”中,以“饼”一词表示食饼一般,在此是以蛇的执取来比喻所执取的教法,而非以蛇本身为喻。或者,应说“蛇执取喻”,而省略中间词,说为“蛇喻”,如同“唇口”等词。在此,“蛇”指毒蛇。“毒”是毒性的名称。而它对于彼是足够、完全的,因此它拥有完全、圆满的毒,如此,省略鼻……显示巴利原文
Tīsupiṭakesūti ettha ‘‘ekekasmi’’nti adhikārato pakaraṇato vā veditabbaṃ. Pariyattibhedoti pariyāpuṇanaṃ pariyatti. Pariyāpuṇanavācako hettha pariyattisaddo, na pāḷipariyāyo, tasmā evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo ‘‘tīsu piṭakesu ekekasmiṃ pariyāpuṇanappakāro daṭṭhabbo ñātabbo’’ti. Tatoyeva ca ‘‘pariyattiyo pariyāpuṇanappakārā’’ti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Atha vā tīhi pakārehi pariyāpuṇitabbā pāḷiyo eva pariyattīti vuccanti, tatoyeva ca ‘‘pariyattiyo pāḷikkamā’’ti abhidhammaṭṭhakathāya likhite sīhaḷagaṇṭhipade vuttaṃ. Evampi hi alagaddūpamāpariyāpuṇanayogato alagaddūpamā pariyattīti pāḷipi sakkā vattuṃ, evañca katvā ‘‘duggahitā upārambhādihetu pariyāpuṭā alagaddūpamā’’ti parato niddesavacanampi upapannaṃ hoti. Tattha hi pāḷiyeva duggahitā pariyāpuṭāti vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Alagaddūpamāti alagaddo alagaddaggahaṇaṃ upamā etissāti alagaddūpamā. Alagaddassa gahaṇañhettha alagaddasaddena vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Āpūpiko’’ti ettha apūpasaddena apūpakhādanaṃ viya alagaddaggahaṇena gahitapariyatti upamīyati, na pana alagaddena. ‘‘Alagaddaggahaṇūpamā’’ti vā vattabbe majjhepadalopaṃ katvā ‘‘alagaddūpamā’’ti vuttaṃ ‘‘oṭṭhamukho’’tiādīsu viya. Alagaddoti cettha āsīviso vuccati. Gadoti hi visassa nāmaṃ. Tañca tassa alaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ atthi, tasmā alaṃ pariyatto paripuṇṇo gado assāti anunāsikalopaṃ dakārāgamañca katvā ‘‘alagaddo’’ti vuccati. Atha vā alaṃ jīvitaharaṇe samattho gado assāti alagaddo. Nissaraṇatthāti vaṭṭadukkhato nissaraṇaṃ attho payojanaṃ etissāti nissaraṇatthā. Bhaṇḍāgārikapariyattīti ettha bhaṇḍāgāre niyutto bhaṇḍāgāriko, bhaṇḍāgāriko viya bhaṇḍāgāriko, dhammaratanānupālako. Aññaṃ atthaṃ anapekkhitvā bhaṇḍāgārikasseva sato pariyatti bhaṇḍāgārikapariyatti.
“恶执取”:即被恶劣地执取。为了阐明恶执取的状态,他说:“为诘难等因而学习”,其意为:为了诘难、为了从议论中逃脱等因而学习。为利养、恭敬等因而学习也应知即摄在此中。这在《蛇喻经注》中已说。显示巴利原文
Duggahitāti duṭṭhu gahitā. Duggahitabhāvameva vibhāvento āha ‘‘upārambhādihetu pariyāpuṭā’’ti, upārambhā itivādappamokkhādihetu uggahitāti attho. Lābhasakkārādihetu pariyāpuṇanampi ettheva saṅgahitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ alagaddasuttaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.239) –
“若有人为了利养、恭敬等因而学习佛语,心想:‘我将如此获得衣服等,或将在四众之中为人所知’,对于他而言,那种教法即名为蛇喻教法。因为,与其如此学习,不如不学习佛语而默然离去更为殊胜。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Yo hi buddhavacanaṃ ‘evaṃ cīvarādīni vā labhissāmi, catuparisamajjhe vā maṃ jānissantī’ti lābhasakkārādihetu pariyāpuṇāti, tassa sā pariyatti alagaddapariyatti nāma. Evaṃ pariyāpuṇanato hi buddhavacanaṃ apariyāpuṇitvā niddokkamanaṃ varatara’’nti.
难道不是以捉蛇为譬喻的教理,才被称为蛇喻吗?若是如此,善巧掌握的教理也可称为蛇喻,因为经中正是以捉蛇作为譬喻而说的。正如所说——显示巴利原文
Nanu ca alagaddaggahaṇūpamā pariyatti alagaddūpamāti vuccati, evañca sati suggahitāpi pariyatti alagaddūpamāti vattuṃ vaṭṭati tatthāpi alagaddaggahaṇassa upamābhāvena pāḷiyaṃ vuttattā. Vuttañhetaṃ –
“诸比丘,譬如有人需要蛇,寻求蛇,四处搜寻蛇。他看见一条大蛇,用叉形棍牢牢制伏它,用叉形棍牢牢制伏后,再紧紧抓住它的颈部。诸比丘,即使那条蛇用身体缠绕那人的手、臂或其他肢体,他也不会因此而死或遭受濒死之苦。为什么呢?诸比丘,因为那条蛇已被牢牢抓住了。同样地,诸比丘,在此教法中,有些善男子学习法——契经、应颂……”显示巴利原文
‘‘Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, puriso alagaddatthiko alagaddagavesī alagaddapariyesanaṃ caramāno, so passeyya mahantaṃ alagaddaṃ, tamenaṃ ajapadena daṇḍena suniggahitaṃ niggaṇheyya, ajapadena daṇḍena suniggahitaṃ niggahetvā gīvāya suggahitaṃ gaṇheyya. Kiñcāpi so, bhikkhave, alagaddo tassa purisassa hatthaṃ vā bāhaṃ vā aññataraṃ vā aṅgapaccaṅgaṃ bhogehi paliveṭheyya, atha kho so neva tatonidānaṃ maraṇaṃ vā nigaccheyya maraṇattaṃ vā dukkhaṃ. Taṃ kissa hetu, suggahitattā, bhikkhave, alagaddassa, evameva kho, bhikkhave, idhekacce kulaputtā dhammaṃ pariyāpuṇanti suttaṃ geyya’’ntiādi (ma. ni. 1.239).
因此,此处唯是错误掌握的教理才被称为蛇喻——这一区别从何可知,即为何错误掌握、为了批评等目的而学习的教理被称为蛇喻?诚然如此,但应知这是通过排除法而说的。正因为以出离为目的的教理和以库藏为目的的教理被单独列出,由排除法可知,以错误捉蛇为譬喻的教理是蛇喻。因为善巧掌握的教理,要么是以出离为目的的教理,要么是以库藏为目的的教理。因此,善说:‘错误掌握、为了批评等目的而学习的教理是蛇喻。’所谓‘针对……’,是指针对那种教理的错误掌握。所谓‘已说’,是指在《蛇喻经》中所说。显示巴利原文
Tasmā idha duggahitā eva pariyatti alagaddūpamāti ayaṃ viseso kuto viññāyati, yena duggahitā upārambhādihetu pariyāpuṭā alagaddūpamāti vuccatīti? Saccametaṃ, idaṃ pana pārisesañāyena vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tathā hi nissaraṇatthabhaṇḍāgārikapariyattīnaṃ visuṃ gahitattā pārisesato alagaddassa duggahaṇūpamā pariyatti alagaddūpamāti viññāyati. Suggahaṇūpamā hi pariyatti nissaraṇatthā vā hoti bhaṇḍāgārikapariyatti vā, tasmā suvuttametaṃ ‘‘duggahitā upārambhādihetu pariyāpuṭā alagaddūpamā’’ti. Yaṃ sandhāyāti yaṃ pariyattiduggahaṇaṃ sandhāya. Vuttanti alagaddasutte vuttaṃ.
“求蛇者”即需求毒蛇者。“寻蛇”指凭藉戒行而寻找、寻求蛇,故称“寻蛇者”。“正到处寻找蛇”意为为了寻找蛇而四处行走。“身”指躯体。“手或臂”中,自腕关节至指尖应知为“手”,连同前臂的其余部分为“臂”。然而,有些地方又说“自肘至指尖为手”。“其余肢节”指除了已说明特征的手与臂之外,身上的其余部分应知为“肢节”。“以此之故”即以此为因、以此为由的意思。这是将前句省略了格位变化而作的说明。本来应当说“以手等处的咬伤为因、为缘由,故为‘以此为因’”,却说成“以此之故”,是将前句的“从……”格改为“于……”格,并且未作省略而作的说明。“这是什么原因呢?”意思是:所说的手等处的咬伤,以及以此为因而导致死亡等,这是什么原因、什么理由呢?“在此”指在此教法中。“某些愚人”指某些空虚之人。“法”指经教之法。“学习”意为掌握,即通过诵读令其熟记于心并持守。“义”指如实的所说义与目的义。“不审察”指不把握、不善思。这是说:他们对于所说义与目的义,并不如此把握——“此处说戒,此处说定,此处说慧,我们应当圆满这些”。显示巴利原文
Alagaddatthikoti āsīvisatthiko. Alagaddaṃ gavesati pariyesati sīlenāti alagaddagavesī. Alagaddapariyesanaṃ caramānoti alagaddapariyesanatthaṃ caramāno. Bhogeti sarīre. Hatthe vā bāhāyavāti ettha maṇibandhako yāva agganakhā ‘‘hattho’’ti veditabbo, saddhiṃ aggabāhāya avasesā ‘‘bāhā’’ti. Katthaci pana ‘‘kapparato paṭṭhāyapi yāva agganakhā hattho’’ti vuccati. Aññatarasmiṃ vā aṅgapaccaṅgeti vuttalakkhaṇaṃ hatthañca bāhañca ṭhapetvā avasesaṃ sarīraṃ ‘‘aṅgapaccaṅga’’nti veditabbaṃ. Tatonidānanti taṃnidānaṃ, taṃkāraṇāti vuttaṃ hoti. Purimapade hi vibhattialopaṃ katvā niddeso. Taṃ hatthādīsu ḍaṃsanaṃ nidānaṃ kāraṇaṃ etassāti taṃnidānanti hi vattabbe ‘‘tatonidāna’’nti purimapade paccatte nissakkavacanaṃ katvā tassa ca lopaṃ akatvā niddeso. Taṃ kissa hetūti yaṃ vuttaṃ hatthādīsu ḍaṃsanaṃ taṃnidānañca maraṇādiupagamanaṃ, taṃ kissa hetu kena kāraṇenāti ce. Idhāti imasmiṃ sāsane. Ekacce moghapurisāti ekacce tucchapurisā. Dhammanti pāḷidhammaṃ. Pariyāpuṇantīti uggaṇhantīti attho, sajjhāyanti ceva vācuggatā karontā dhārenti cāti vuttaṃ hoti. Atthanti yathābhūtaṃ bhāsitatthaṃ payojanatthañca. Na upaparikkhantīti na pariggaṇhanti na vicārenti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ‘‘imasmiṃ ṭhāne sīlaṃ kathitaṃ, idha samādhi, idha paññā kathitā, mayañca taṃ pūressāmā’’ti evaṃ bhāsitatthaṃ payojanatthañca ‘‘sīlaṃ samādhissa kāraṇaṃ, samādhi vipassanāyā’’tiādinā na pariggaṇhantīti. Anupaparikkhatanti anupaparikkhantānaṃ. Na nijjhānaṃ khamantīti nijjhānapaññaṃ nakkhamanti, nijjhāyitvā paññāya disvā rocetvā gahetabbā na hontīti adhippāyo. Tena imamatthaṃ dīpeti ‘‘tesaṃ paññāya atthaṃ anupaparikkhantānaṃ te dhammā na upaṭṭhahanti, ‘imasmiṃ ṭhāne sīlaṃ, samādhi, vipassanā, maggo, phalaṃ, vaṭṭaṃ, vivaṭṭaṃ kathita’nti evaṃ jānituṃ na sakkā hontī’’ti.
“他们以批评为利益”意思是:他们以将过失加于他人言论为利益而学习。“以辩解脱为利益”意思是:他们以“如此”通过此教理学习而辩解脱为利益,即为了从他人加于自己的论难中解脱出来而学习法。这是说:当他人对自己的主张提出过失时,他们怀着“我们将如此这般地解脱那过失”的动机而学习。 或者,种种言论称为“如是说”,从如是说中解脱称为“如是说解脱”,以如是说解脱为利益者称为“以辩解脱为利益”,即从种种言论中解脱为利益。“他们为了什么目的而学习法”指:于此教法中,善男子们为了圆满戒等,或为了道、果、涅槃的目的而学习法。“他们却未证得那目的”指:这些错误掌握者并未证得、未获得那为法所摄、以圆满戒等为目的的义利。显示巴利原文
Te upārambhānisaṃsā cevāti te paresaṃ vāde dosāropanānisaṃsā hutvā pariyāpuṇantīti attho. Itivādappamokkhānisaṃsā cāti iti evaṃ etāya pariyattiyā vādappamokkhānisaṃsā, attano upari parehi āropitavādassa niggahassa pamokkhappayojanā hutvā dhammaṃ pariyāpuṇantīti attho. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – parehi sakavāde dose āropite taṃ dosaṃ evañca evañca mocessāmāti iminā ca kāraṇena pariyāpuṇantīti. Atha vā so so vādo itivādo, itivādassa pamokkho itivādappamokkho, itivādappamokkho ānisaṃso etesanti itivādappamokkhānisaṃsā, taṃtaṃvādappamocanānisaṃsā cāti attho . Yassa catthāya dhammaṃ pariyāpuṇantīti yassa ca sīlādipūraṇassa maggaphalanibbānassa vā atthāya imasmiṃ sāsane kulaputtā dhammaṃ pariyāpuṇanti. Tañcassa atthaṃ nānubhontīti tañca assa dhammassa sīlādiparipūraṇasaṅkhātaṃ atthaṃ ete duggahitagāhino nānubhonti na vindanti.
或者,那些愚人为了指责他人或为了从言论中开脱而学习法,当被他人指出“并非此义”时,正因其自身所学不善巧,便不能阐明“这正是此义”。他们既无力对他人的言论加以指责,也无法使自己的言论免于指责,就这样不能通达那个意义——应当如此理解此义。“长夜导致不利与痛苦”的意思是:由于他们那些法被错误地执取,以指责、慢心、覆藏、恼害等为因,长夜导致不利与痛苦。此处是以果称因,说“那些法导致不利与痛苦”。因为,尽管那些法本身并不导致不利与痛苦,但由于按照前述方式学习的人,在诵习时和争论时,以那些法为根源的指责等众多不善法将会生起,所以以果称因地宣说“那些法导致不利与痛苦”。“那是什么原因呢?”在此,“那”是指如前所述不能通达义理,以及那些法导致不利与痛苦。显示巴利原文
Atha vā yassa upārambhassa itivādappamokkhassa vā atthāya ye moghapurisā dhammaṃ pariyāpuṇanti, te parehi ‘‘ayamattho na hotī’’ti vutte duggahitattāyeva soyevatthoti paṭipādanakkhamā na hontīti parassa vāde upārambhaṃ āropetuṃ attano vādā taṃ mocetuñca asakkontāpi taṃ atthaṃ nānubhontiyevāti evamattho daṭṭhabbo. Dīgharattaṃ ahitāya dukkhāya saṃvattantīti tesaṃ te dhammā duggahitattā upārambhamānadappamakkhapalāsādihetubhāvena dīgharattaṃ ahitāya dukkhāya saṃvattanti. Ettha hi kāraṇe phalavohārena ‘‘te dhammā ahitāya dukkhāya saṃvattantī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tathā hi kiñcāpi na te dhammā ahitāya dukkhāya saṃvattanti, tathāpi vuttanayena pariyāpuṇantānaṃ sajjhāyakāle vivādasamaye ca taṃmūlakānaṃ upārambhādīnaṃ anekesaṃ akusalānaṃ uppattisabbhāvato ‘‘te dhammā ahitāya dukkhāya saṃvattantī’’ti kāraṇe phalavohārena vuttaṃ. Taṃ kissa hetūti ettha tanti yathāvuttassatthassa anabhisambhuṇanaṃ tesañca dhammānaṃ ahitāya dukkhāya saṃvattanaṃ parāmasati.
「戒蕴等的圆满」一句中,以「等」字应知包含了定、观等。若有人学习佛语后,于戒出现之处圆满戒,于定出现之处令心入定,于观出现之处安立观,于道果出现之处修习道、现证果——如此学习,他的教理学习才名为「为出离而学」。所谓「依此而说」,是指依此善学教理而在《蛇喻经》中所说。「长夜导致利益与安乐」的意思是:那些在戒等出现之处圆满戒等的人,乃至证得阿罗汉后,于众中说法,受用由说法所获信众供养的四资具,或以如法方式评断他论,或去除自论过失——这些法皆长夜导致利益与安乐。因为,依善学教理不仅能成就道之修习与果之现证,亦能成就折伏他论、安立己论。正如所说:「将生起的他论以如法方式善加折伏后……」等。显示巴利原文
Sīlakkhandhādipāripūriṃyevāti ettha ādisaddena samādhivipassanādīnaṃ saṅgaho veditabbo. Yo hi buddhavacanaṃ uggaṇhitvā sīlassa āgataṭṭhāne sīlaṃ pūretvā samādhino āgataṭṭhāne samādhigabbhaṃ gaṇhāpetvā vipassanāya āgataṭṭhāne vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā maggaphalānaṃ āgataṭṭhāne maggaṃ bhāvessāmi, phalaṃ sacchikarissāmīti uggaṇhāti, tasseva sā pariyatti nissaraṇatthā nāma hoti. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttanti yaṃ pariyattisuggahaṇaṃ sandhāya alagaddasutte vuttaṃ. Dīgharattaṃ hitāya sukhāya saṃvattantīti sīlādīnaṃ āgataṭṭhāne sīlādīni pūrentānampi arahattaṃ patvā parisamajjhe dhammaṃ desetvā dhammadesanāya pasannehi upanīte cattāro paccaye paribhuñjantānampi paresaṃ vāde sahadhammena upārambhaṃ āropentānampi sakavādato dosaṃ harantānampi dīgharattaṃ hitāya sukhāya saṃvattanti. Tathā hi na kevalaṃ suggahitapariyattiṃ nissāya maggabhāvanāphalasacchikiriyādīneva, paravādaniggahasakavādapatiṭṭhāpanānipi ijjhanti. Tathā ca vuttaṃ ‘‘uppannaṃ parappavādaṃ sahadhammena suniggahitaṃ niggahetvā’’tiādi (dī. ni. 2.168).
「遍知蕴者」是指以遍知苦而遍知蕴者。「已断烦恼者」是指以断集而断烦恼者。「已证不动者」是指已证阿罗汉果者。「不动」即不扰动,这是阿罗汉果的名称。虽然四种道与四种果皆具不动之性,然而七种有学圣者因各自名称有别,向上获得不同称谓,故其道果不被称为「不动」;阿罗汉则恒时名为阿罗汉,因此唯其果被称为「不动」。以此显示此义:「唯漏尽者的教理学习名为库藏教理学习」。他已无未遍知、未断、未修、未证者,故学习佛语时,是作为经教持守者、传承保护者、世系守护者而学习。因此说「为保护传承」等。其中,「传承」指法相续,即法无间断地流转之义。「为守护世系」指为守护佛陀世尊的世系。应知,此世系即同于传承之义。显示巴利原文
Pariññātakkhandhoti dukkhaparijānanena pariññātakkhandho. Pahīnakilesoti samudayappahānena pahīnakileso. Paṭividdhākuppoti paṭividdhaarahattaphalo. Na kuppatīti akuppanti hi arahattaphalassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Satipi hi catunnaṃ maggānaṃ catunnañca phalānaṃ akuppasabhāve sattannaṃ sekkhānaṃ sakasakanāmapariccāgena uparūpari nāmantarappattito tesaṃ maggaphalāni ‘‘akuppānī’’ti na vuccanti, arahā pana sabbadāpi arahāyeva nāmāti tasseva phalaṃ ‘‘akuppa’’nti vuttaṃ. Iminā ca imamatthaṃ dasseti ‘‘khīṇāsavasseva pariyatti bhaṇḍāgārikapariyatti nāmā’’ti. Tassa hi apariññātaṃ appahīnaṃ abhāvitaṃ asacchikataṃ vā natthi, tasmā buddhavacanaṃ pariyāpuṇanto tantidhārako paveṇīpālako vaṃsānurakkhako ca hutvā uggaṇhāti. Tenevāha ‘‘paveṇīpālanatthāyā’’tiādi. Tattha paveṇīti dhammasantati, dhammassa avicchedena pavattīti attho. Vaṃsānurakkhaṇatthāyāti buddhassa bhagavato vaṃsānurakkhaṇatthaṃ. Tassa vaṃsopi atthato paveṇīyevāti veditabbaṃ.
问:若为保护传承而学习佛语即是库藏教理学习,为何特别说「漏尽者」呢?有些凡夫也存在这样的情况。例如,有些比丘在饥荒等怖畏时,当持典者无法安住一处时,自己不以乞食为苦,心想「愿无比甘美的佛语不要消失,我将持守经教,安立世系,保护传承」而学习。那么,他的教理学习为何不也称为库藏教理学习?答:虽如此,凡夫的教理学习不名为库藏教理学习。因为,凡夫虽然以「我将保护传承」的意乐而学习,但由于他自己尚未渡越有爱之流,他的教理学习名为出离教理学习。因此应知:凡夫的教理学习或是蛇喻式的,或是为出离的;七种有学的教理学习唯是为出离的;漏尽者的教理学习唯是库藏教理学习。漏尽者因与库藏官相似而被称为库藏官。正如库藏官保管诸般庄严宝物,于庄严时将适合的宝物呈献国王,为之庄严;同样地,漏尽者受持法宝之藏,观见有因缘、堪能证得解脱的众生后,便开演契合的法义,以道支、觉支等出世间的庄严而为庄严,故被称为库藏官。显示巴利原文
Nanu ca yadi paveṇīpālanatthāya buddhavacanassa pariyāpuṇanaṃ bhaṇḍāgārikapariyatti, kasmā ‘‘khīṇāsavo’’ti visesetvā vuttaṃ. Ekaccassa puthujjanassapi hi ayaṃ nayo labbhati. Tathā hi ekacco bhikkhu chātakabhayādīsu ganthadharesu ekasmiṃ ṭhāne vasituṃ asakkontesu sayaṃ bhikkhācārena akilamamāno atimadhuraṃ buddhavacanaṃ mā nassatu, tantiṃ dhāressāmi, vaṃsaṃ ṭhapessāmi, paveṇiṃ pālessāmīti pariyāpuṇāti, tasmā tassapi pariyatti bhaṇḍāgārikapariyatti nāma kasmā na hotīti? Vuccate – evaṃ santepi puthujjanassa pariyatti bhaṇḍāgārikapariyatti nāma na hoti. Kiñcāpi hi puthujjano ‘‘paveṇiṃ pālessāmī’’ti ajjhāsayena pariyāpuṇāti, attano pana bhavakantārato anittiṇṇattā tassa pariyatti nissaraṇapariyatti nāma hoti, tasmā puthujjanassa pariyatti alagaddūpamā vā hoti nissaraṇatthā vā, sattannaṃ sekkhānaṃ nissaraṇatthāva, khīṇāsavānaṃ bhaṇḍāgārikapariyattiyevāti veditabbaṃ. Khīṇāsavo ca bhaṇḍāgārikasadisattā bhaṇḍāgārikoti vuccati. Yathā hi bhaṇḍāgāriko alaṅkārabhaṇḍaṃ paṭisāmetvā pasādhanakāle tadupiyaṃ alaṅkārabhaṇḍaṃ rañño upanāmetvā alaṅkaroti, evaṃ khīṇāsavopi dhammaratanabhaṇḍaṃ sampaṭicchitvā mokkhādhigamassa bhabbarūpe sahetuke satte passitvā tadanurūpaṃ dhammadesanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā maggaṅgabojjhaṅgādisaṅkhātena lokuttarena alaṅkārena alaṅkarotīti bhaṇḍāgārikoti vuccati.
如此区分三种教法后,为了详述三藏中各自相应的成就与过失,而说“然而在律中……”等。在“依止戒成就而证得三明”等语句中,当戒得以净化时,凭借念与正知之力以及业自性智之力,从杂染垢秽中清净并达到圆满;因此,戒成就圆满时,以成为亲依止缘的成就方式,令念力与智力现前。由此应知,戒成就作为三明的亲依止缘,乃由同分因的成就。因为依念力而成就宿住随念明;依正知——即于一切所行善巧而作之熟习——而成就与死生智相连的第二明;由于无违犯而断除杂染,依还灭亲依止缘之力,由意乐清净而成就第三明。先前已成就的定与慧,若未以此而得圆满,则戒作为漏尽智的亲依止缘,应由纯观漏尽者来阐明。依“得定者如实知”之说,定成就为六通的亲依止缘。依“由瑜伽实生慧”之说,通过先前修习、亲近师长、处所、语言善巧、读诵、遍问等所培育的慧成就,为无碍解差别的亲依止缘。而在此处,由于说了“依止戒成就”,对于作为定之展现的六通全部未成就者,依最高界限而言即无定成就,因此,即使明是通的一部分,也只取由戒成就所生的三明。正如由慧成就……显示巴利原文
Evaṃ tisso pariyattiyo vibhajitvā idāni tīsupi piṭakesu yathārahaṃ sampattivipattiyo vitthāretvā dassento āha ‘‘vinaye panā’’tiādi. Sīlasampattiṃ nissāya tisso vijjā pāpuṇātītiādīsu yasmā sīlaṃ visujjhamānaṃ satisampajaññabalena kammassakataññāṇabalena ca saṃkilesamalato visujjhati, pāripūriñca gacchati, tasmā sīlasampadā sijjhamānā upanissayasampattibhāvena satibalaṃ ñāṇabalañca paccupaṭṭhapetīti tassā vijjattayūpanissayatā veditabbā sabhāgahetusampadānato. Satibalena hi pubbenivāsavijjāsiddhi, sampajaññena sabbakiccesu sudiṭṭhakāritāparicayena cutūpapātañāṇānubaddhāya dutiyavijjāya siddhi, vītikkamābhāvena saṃkilesappahānasabbhāvato vivaṭṭūpanissayatāvasena ajjhāsayasuddhiyā tatiyavijjāsiddhi. Puretarasiddhānaṃ samādhipaññānaṃ pāripūriṃ vinā sīlassa āsavakkhayañāṇūpanissayatā sukkhavipassakakhīṇāsavehi dīpetabbā. ‘‘Samāhito yathābhūtaṃ pajānātī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.99; 3.5; netti. 40; mi. pa. 2.1.14) vacanato samādhisampadā chaḷabhiññatāya upanissayo. ‘‘Yogā ve jāyati bhūrī’’ti (dha. pa. 282) vacanato pubbayogena garuvāsadesabhāsākosallauggahaṇaparipucchādīhi ca paribhāvitā paññāsampatti paṭisambhidāppabhedassa upanissayo. Ettha ca ‘‘sīlasampattiṃ nissāyā’’ti vuttattā yassa samādhivijambhanabhūtā anavasesā cha abhiññā na ijjhanti, tassa ukkaṭṭhaparicchedavasena na samādhisampadā atthīti satipi vijjānaṃ abhiññekadesabhāve sīlasampattisamudāgatā eva tisso vijjā gahitā. Yathā hi paññāsampattisamudāgatā catasso paṭisambhidā upanissayasampannassa maggeneva ijjhanti maggakkhaṇe eva tāsaṃ paṭilabhitabbato. Evaṃ sīlasampattisamudāgatā tisso vijjā samādhisampattisamudāgatā ca cha abhiññā upanissayasampannassa maggeneva ijjhantīti maggādhigameneva tāsaṃ adhigamo veditabbo. Paccekabuddhānaṃ sammāsambuddhānañca paccekabodhisammāsambodhidhammasamadhigamasadisā hi imesaṃ ariyānaṃ ime visesādhigamāti.
在“正是它们”及“于彼处有分别说”这一句中,“正是它们”这一限定,是就律藏中未对应六通与四无碍解的证得而作分别说而言的。因为在《鞞兰若品》中,只分别了三明。第二个“正是它们”的限定,是相对于四无碍解而作的,并非相对于三明。因为三明已包含在六通之中,在经藏中已作了分别。而“及它们”中的“及”字,表示其余者在那里也存在。因为在《阿毗达摩藏》中,确实说了三明、六通与四无碍解。然而,为了显示无碍解在其他地方未被分别说,而唯独在此处被正确地分别了,所以未如前文所述的方式作限定,而是转换言辞,以“唯独于彼处”确立了限定。显示巴利原文
Tāsaṃyeva ca tattha pabhedavacanatoti ettha tāsaṃyevāti avadhāraṇaṃ pāpuṇitabbānaṃ chaḷabhiññācatupaṭisambhidānaṃ vinaye pabhedavacanābhāvaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Verañjakaṇḍe hi tisso vijjāva vibhattāti. Dutiye tāsaṃyevāti avadhāraṇaṃ catasso paṭisambhidā apekkhitvā kataṃ, na tisso vijjā. Tā hi chasu abhiññāsu antogadhattā sutte vibhattāyevāti. Tāsañcāti ettha ca-saddena sesānampi tattha atthibhāvaṃ dīpeti. Abhidhammapiṭake hi tisso vijjā cha abhiññā catasso ca paṭisambhidā vuttāyeva. Paṭisambhidānaṃ pana aññattha pabhedavacanābhāvaṃ tattheva ca sammā vibhattabhāvaṃ dīpetukāmo heṭṭhā vuttanayena avadhāraṇaṃ akatvā ‘‘tatthevā’’ti parivattetvā avadhāraṇaṃ ṭhapesi.
现在,为了说明“在律中恶行者,不见淫欲违犯之过,认为‘如同触柔软的敷具等,触女人也是可以的’,从而成就戒的失败”,而说“然而在律中恶行者”等。其中,“乐触”指触感舒适之物,即敷具、衣被等。执受触即女人触,属淫欲法。所说之因缘,如阿利吒比丘所言。他多闻、能说法,对于业障、烦恼障、异熟障、诽谤障、违圣教障这五种障碍中的其余障碍,他皆知晓;但由于不精通律,他不知违犯制戒的障碍。他独处时这样思惟:“这些在家众受用五种欲功德,也有成为须陀洹、斯陀含、阿那含的。比丘们也观看可意的眼所识之色……触身所识之触,受用柔软的敷具衣被等,这一切都是可以的,为什么唯独女人的色、声、香、味、触不可以?这些也是可以的啊。”他将无过失地受用资具之味,与有过失地受用欲乐之味混为一谈,将带有贪欲的受用等同于离贪欲的受用,如同以粗毛线捻合极细之丝,如同将芥子与须弥山相比拟,生起邪恶的恶见:“世尊为何以极大努力,如同围堵大海一般,制定了第一波罗夷?这其中没有过失。”他违逆一切知智,排斥无畏智,向圣道中投掷……显示巴利原文
Idāni ‘‘vinaye duppaṭipanno ‘mudukānaṃ attharaṇādīnaṃ samphasso viya itthisamphassopi vaṭṭatī’ti methunavītikkame dosaṃ adisvā sīlavipattiṃ pāpuṇātī’’ti dassento āha ‘‘vinaye pana duppaṭipanno’’tiādi. Tattha sukho samphasso etesanti sukhasamphassāni, attharaṇapāvuraṇādīni. Upādinnaphasso itthiphasso, methunadhammoti vuttaṃ hoti. Vuttampi hetanti ariṭṭhena bhikkhunā vuttaṃ. So hi bahussuto dhammakathiko kammakilesavipākaupavādaāṇāvītikkamavasena pañcavidhesu antarāyikesu sesantarāyike jānāti, vinaye pana akovidattā paṇṇattivītikkamantarāyike na jānāti, tasmā rahogato evaṃ cintesi ‘‘ime agārikā pañca kāmaguṇe paribhuñjantā sotāpannāpi sakadāgāminopi anāgāminopi honti. Bhikkhūpi manāpikāni cakkhuviññeyyāni rūpāni passanti…pe… kāyaviññeyye phoṭṭhabbe phusanti, mudukāni attharaṇapāvuraṇādīni paribhuñjanti, etaṃ sabbaṃ vaṭṭati, kasmā itthīnaṃyeva rūpasaddagandharasaphoṭṭhabbā na vaṭṭanti, etepi vaṭṭantī’’ti anavajjena paccayaparibhuñjanarasena sāvajjakāmaguṇaparibhogarasaṃ saṃsanditvā sacchandarāgaparibhogañca nicchandarāgaparibhogañca ekaṃ katvā thūlavākehi saddhiṃ atisukhumasuttaṃ ghaṭento viya sāsapena saddhiṃ sineruno sadisataṃ upasaṃharanto viya pāpakaṃ diṭṭhigataṃ uppādetvā ‘‘kiṃ bhagavatā mahāsamuddaṃ bandhantena viya mahatā ussāhena paṭhamapārājikaṃ paññattaṃ, natthi ettha doso’’ti sabbaññutaññāṇena saddhiṃ paṭivirujjhanto vesārajjañāṇaṃ paṭibāhanto ariyamagge khāṇukaṇṭakādīni pakkhipanto ‘‘methunadhamme doso natthī’’ti jinassa āṇācakke pahāramadāsi. Tenāha ‘‘tathāhaṃ bhagavatā dhammaṃ desitaṃ ājānāmī’’tiādi.
其中,“障碍”:以阻碍种种成就的方式,进入并存在于有情相续的中间,故称为障碍,即现世等不利。以不可逾越之义系属于该障碍,或应受障碍之果,或具足造作障碍的习性,故名为“障碍者”,即是作天界与解脱的障碍者。它们依业、烦恼、异熟、诽谤、违犯圣教而有五种。其详细解说将于后文阿利吒学处中明了。然而,此处文句的关联如下:世尊所说、所开示、所制定的“这些法是障碍者、能作障碍”,若有人随顺他们,我便如此了知世尊所说的法——那些法,无论以何种方式,对于作天界与解脱的障碍来说,都是不充分、不有效的。由此,他成就了恶戒的状态,即由于认为无有过失而违犯之后,便成就了恶戒的状态。显示巴利原文
Tattha antarāyikāti taṃtaṃsampattiyā vibandhanavasena sattasantānassa antare vemajjhe eti āgacchatīti antarāyo, diṭṭhadhammikādianattho. Anatikkamanaṭṭhena tasmiṃ antarāye niyuttā, antarāyaṃ vā phalaṃ arahanti, antarāyassa vā karaṇasīlāti antarāyikā, saggamokkhānaṃ antarāyakarāti vuttaṃ hoti. Te ca kammakilesavipākaupavādaāṇāvītikkamavasena pañcavidhā. Tesaṃ vitthārakathā parato ariṭṭhasikkhāpade (pāci. 417) āvi bhavissati. Ayaṃ panettha padatthasambandho – ye ime dhammā antarāyikā antarāyakarāti bhagavatā vuttā desitā ceva paññattā ca, te dhamme paṭisevato paṭisevantassa yathā yena pakārena te dhammā antarāyāya saggamokkhānaṃ antarāyakaraṇatthaṃ nālaṃ samatthā na honti, tathā tena pakārenāhaṃ bhagavatā desitaṃ dhammaṃ ājānāmīti. Tato dussīlabhāvaṃ pāpuṇātīti tato anavajjasaññībhāvahetuto vītikkamitvā dussīlabhāvaṃ pāpuṇāti.
“诸比丘,有此四种……”等。显示巴利原文
Cattārome, bhikkhavetiādinā –
“诸比丘,世间有四种人。哪四种?一种为自利而行,不为他利;一种为他利而行,不为自利;一种既不为自利而行,也不为他利;一种既为自利而行,也为他利而行。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Cattārome, bhikkhave, puggalā santo saṃvijjamānā lokasmiṃ. Katame cattāro, attahitāya paṭipanno hoti, no parahitāya, parahitāya paṭipanno hoti, no attahitāya, neva attahitāya paṭipanno hoti no parahitāya, attahitāya ceva paṭipanno hoti parahitāya cā’’ti (a. ni. 4.96; pu. pa. mātikā, catukkauddesa 24) –
“等”字所示,涵盖与补特伽罗教说相应的经典文句。所谓不了知意趣,是指不了知世尊的意趣:“此补特伽罗教说是随顺世俗言说而设,并非依于胜义。”实际上,佛陀世尊的教法共有两类:世俗教说与胜义教说。凡是涉及“补特伽罗、有情、女人、男人、刹帝利、婆罗门、天、魔”等,属于世俗教说;凡是涉及“无常、苦、无我、蕴、界、处、念处”等,则属于胜义教说。对此,若有众生听闻依世俗施设的教法便能通达义理、断除愚痴、证得殊胜,世尊便为他们宣说世俗教说;若有众生听闻依胜义施设的教法方能通达义理、断除愚痴、证得殊胜,世尊便为他们宣说胜义教说。显示巴利原文
Ādinā puggaladesanāpaṭisaṃyuttasuttantapāḷiṃ nidasseti. Adhippāyaṃ ajānantoti ‘‘ayaṃ puggaladesanā vohāravasena, na paramatthato’’ti evaṃ bhagavato adhippāyaṃ ajānanto. Buddhassa hi bhagavato duvidhā desanā sammutidesanā paramatthadesanā cāti. Tattha ‘‘puggalo satto itthī puriso khattiyo brāhmaṇo devo māro’’ti evarūpā sammutidesanā. ‘‘Aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ anattā khandhā dhātuyo āyatanāni satipaṭṭhānā’’ti evarūpā paramatthadesanā. Tattha bhagavā ye sammutivasena desanaṃ sutvā atthaṃ paṭivijjhitvā mohaṃ pahāya visesamadhigantuṃ samatthā, tesaṃ sammutidesanaṃ deseti. Ye pana paramatthavasena desanaṃ sutvā atthaṃ paṭivijjhitvā mohaṃ pahāya visesamadhigantuṃ samatthā, tesaṃ paramatthadesanaṃ deseti.
就此,有一譬喻:好比一位精通各地方言的老师,为三部吠陀注解义理。若学生能理解泰米尔语所阐释的义理,他便用泰米尔语为其讲解;若学生能理解安达卡语等某一语言,他便用那种语言为其讲解。如此一来,那些学生依止这位善巧、聪明的老师,便能很快掌握这门技艺。在这个譬喻中,老师犹如佛陀世尊;三部吠陀犹如应被宣说的三藏;精通各地方言犹如善巧于世俗与胜义;操持不同方言的学生犹如能依世俗或胜义而悟入的应度众生;老师用泰米尔语等语言教导,则犹如世尊为众生开示世俗或胜义之法。对此,有偈言:显示巴利原文
Tatrāyaṃ upamā – yathā hi desabhāsākusalo tiṇṇaṃ vedānaṃ atthasaṃvaṇṇako ācariyo ye damiḷabhāsāya vutte atthaṃ jānanti, tesaṃ damiḷabhāsāya ācikkhati, ye andhakabhāsādīsu aññatarāya, tesaṃ tāya bhāsāya, evaṃ te māṇavā chekaṃ byattaṃ ācariyamāgamma khippameva sippaṃ uggaṇhanti. Tattha ācariyo viya buddho bhagavā, tayo vedā viya kathetabbabhāve ṭhitāni tīṇi piṭakāni, desabhāsāya kosallamiva sammutiparamatthakosallaṃ, nānādesabhāsāmāṇavakā viya sammutiparamatthavasena paṭivijjhanasamatthā veneyyasattā, ācariyassa damiḷabhāsādiācikkhanaṃ viya bhagavato sammutiparamatthavasenapi desanā veditabbā. Āha cettha –
“正自觉者,于诸言说者中最为殊胜,宣说了两种真理:
世俗与胜义,第三种不可得。
约定之言为真实,以世间共许为因;
胜义之言为真实,以诸法真实为因。
因此,善巧言说的世间怙主、导师,随顺世俗言说时,即不生妄语。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Duve saccāni akkhāsi, sambuddho vadataṃ varo; Sammutiṃ paramatthañca, tatiyaṃ nūpalabbhati. ‘‘Saṅketavacanaṃ saccaṃ, lokasammutikāraṇā; Paramatthavacanaṃ saccaṃ, dhammānaṃ bhūtakāraṇā. ‘‘Tasmā vohārakusalassa, lokanāthassa satthuno; Sammutiṃ voharantassa, musāvādo na jāyatī’’ti. (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.57; a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.170);
再者,世尊基于八种理由而说补特伽罗之论:为阐明惭愧、为阐明业自属、为阐明个人造作、为阐明无间业、为阐明梵住、为阐明宿住随念、为阐明布施清净,以及为不舍世间共许。若说“蕴、界、处有惭愧”,大众不明,心生迷惑,便会起诤:“什么叫做蕴、界、处有惭愧?”若说“女人有惭愧,男人、刹帝利、婆罗门、天、魔有惭愧”,大众便了知,不迷惑,不起诤。因此,世尊为阐明惭愧而说补特伽罗之论。若说“蕴是业自属者,界、处是业自属者”,道理也是如此。因此,世尊为阐明业自属而说补特伽罗之论。若说“竹林等大寺院是由蕴所造、由界所造、由处所造”,道理也是如此。因此,世尊为阐明个人造作而说补特伽罗之论。若说“蕴夺取母命、夺取父命、夺取阿罗汉命、出佛身血、破和合僧,界、处也是如此”,道理也是如此。因此,世尊为阐明无间业而说补特伽罗之论。显示巴利原文
Apica aṭṭhahi kāraṇehi bhagavā puggalakathaṃ katheti – hirottappadīpanatthaṃ kammassakatādīpanatthaṃ paccattapurisakāradīpanatthaṃ ānantariyadīpanatthaṃ brahmavihāradīpanatthaṃ pubbenivāsadīpanatthaṃ dakkhiṇāvisuddhidīpanatthaṃ lokasammutiyā appahānatthañcāti. ‘‘Khandhā dhātuyo āyatanāni hiriyanti ottappantī’’ti vutte mahājano na jānāti, sammohamāpajjati, paṭisattu hoti ‘‘kimidaṃ khandhā dhātuyo āyatanāni hiriyanti ottappanti nāmā’’ti. ‘‘Itthī hiriyati ottappati, puriso khattiyo brāhmaṇo devo māro’’ti vutte mahājano jānāti, na sammohamāpajjati, na paṭisattu hoti, tasmā bhagavā hirottappadīpanatthaṃ puggalakathaṃ katheti. ‘‘Khandhā kammassakā dhātuyo āyatanānī’’ti vuttepi eseva nayo. Tasmā bhagavā kammassakatādīpanatthaṃ puggalakathaṃ katheti. ‘‘Veḷuvanādayo mahāvihārā khandhehi kārāpitā, dhātūhi āyatanehī’’ti vuttepi eseva nayo. Tasmā bhagavā paccattapurisakāradīpanatthaṃ puggalakathaṃ katheti. ‘‘Khandhā mātaraṃ jīvitā voropenti, pitaraṃ arahantaṃ, ruhiruppādakammaṃ saṅghabhedaṃ karonti, dhātuyo āyatanānī’’ti vuttepi eseva nayo. Tasmā bhagavā ānantariyadīpanatthaṃ puggalakathaṃ katheti.
若说“蕴修习慈”“界、处修习慈”,其理亦同。因此,世尊为阐明梵住而宣说补特伽罗之论。若说“蕴忆念宿住”“界、处忆念宿住”,其理亦同。因此,世尊为阐明宿住随念而宣说补特伽罗之论。若说“蕴接受布施”“界、处接受布施”,众人便不知晓,心生迷惑,成为诘难者:“什么叫做蕴、界、处接受布施?”然而,若说“具戒者、具善法者等补特伽罗接受布施”,众人便知,不陷迷惑,不成为诘难者。因此,世尊为阐明布施清净而宣说补特伽罗之论。再者,诸佛世尊不舍世间共许,安住于世间通称、世间言语、世间表达而说法。因此,世尊也为不舍世间共许而宣说补特伽罗之论。由此意趣,世尊的补特伽罗教说并非胜义教说——不知此意趣者,即说为“不了知意趣”。显示巴利原文
‘‘Khandhā mettāyanti, dhātuyo āyatanānī’’ti vuttepi eseva nayo. Tasmā bhagavā brahmavihāradīpanatthaṃ puggalakathaṃ katheti. ‘‘Khandhā pubbenivāsaṃ anussaranti, dhātuyo āyatanānī’’ti vuttepi eseva nayo. Tasmā bhagavā pubbenivāsadīpanatthaṃ puggalakathaṃ katheti. ‘‘Khandhā dānaṃ paṭiggaṇhanti, dhātuyo āyatanānī’’ti vuttepi mahājano na jānāti, sammohamāpajjati, paṭisattu hoti ‘‘kimidaṃ khandhā dhātuyo āyatanāni paṭiggaṇhanti nāmā’’ti. ‘‘Puggalā paṭiggaṇhanti sīlavanto kalyāṇadhammā’’ti vutte pana jānāti, na sammohamāpajjati, na paṭisattu hoti. Tasmā bhagavā dakkhiṇāvisuddhidīpanatthaṃ puggalakathaṃ katheti. Lokasammutiñca buddhā bhagavanto na vijahanti, lokasamaññāya lokaniruttiyā lokābhilāpe ṭhitāyeva dhammaṃ desenti. Tasmā bhagavā lokasammutiyā appahānatthampi puggalakathaṃ katheti , tasmā iminā ca adhippāyena bhagavato puggaladesanā, na paramatthadesanāti evaṃ adhippāyaṃ ajānantoti vuttaṃ hoti.
“错误执取”:即如“我如此了知世尊所说法:正是此识流转轮回,而非其他”等,以错误方式执取,也就是颠倒执取。所谓“错误执取”,是抽象中性名词的表述。“针对那”即针对那错误执取。以自己错误执取的法——应知此处有省略文句。或者,“错误执取”即错误执取的行为。而“以自己”是属格意义的具格,故说“以自己错误的执取、颠倒的执取”。“既诽谤我等”:即对我们作诽谤。“又伤害自己”:即挖除自己的善根,名为伤害自己。显示巴利原文
Duggahitaṃ gaṇhātīti ‘‘tathāhaṃ bhagavatā dhammaṃ desitaṃ ājānāmi, yathā tadevidaṃ viññāṇaṃ sandhāvati saṃsarati, anañña’’ntiādinā duggahitaṃ katvā gaṇhāti, viparītaṃ gaṇhātīti vuttaṃ hoti. Duggahitanti hi bhāvanapuṃsakaniddeso. Yaṃ sandhāyāti yaṃ duggahitagāhaṃ sandhāya. Attanā duggahitena dhammenāti pāṭhaseso veditabbo. Atha vā duggahaṇaṃ duggahitaṃ. Attanāti ca sāmiatthe karaṇavacanaṃ, tasmā attano duggahaṇena viparītagāhenāti vuttaṃ hoti. Amhe ceva abbhācikkhatīti amhākañca abbhācikkhanaṃ karoti. Attānañca khanatīti attano kusalamūlāni khananto attānaṃ khanati nāma.
“法思”:即了知法的自性。“极度奔逸”:指不立于应住之界限,而以“仅凭心生起即成布施,心本身即是自己的所缘,一切心皆以无自性法为所缘”等说,极度奔逸、逾越而行。“四者”,指佛境界、神通境界、业异熟境界、世间思惟境界这四种。此即所说:显示巴利原文
Dhammacintanti dhammasabhāvavijānanaṃ. Atidhāvantoti ṭhātabbamariyādāyaṃ aṭṭhatvā ‘‘cittuppādamattena dānaṃ hoti, sayameva cittaṃ attano ārammaṇaṃ hoti, sabbaṃ cittaṃ asabhāvadhammārammaṇa’’nti evamādinā atidhāvanto atikkamitvā pavattamāno. Cattārīti buddhavisayaiddhivisayakammavipākalokavisayasaṅkhātāni cattāri. Vuttañhetaṃ –
诸比丘,有四种不应思惟、不可思惟之事,若人思惟此事,便会招致狂乱与恼害。哪四种?诸比丘,佛之境界不应思惟、不可思惟,若思惟之,则得狂乱与恼害。诸比丘,禅那之境界不应思惟、不可思惟……诸比丘,业之异熟不应思惟、不可思惟……诸比丘,世间思惟不应思惟、不可思惟……诸比丘,此四种即是不应思惟、不可思惟之事,若思惟之,则得狂乱与恼害。(《增支部》4.77)显示巴利原文
‘‘Cattārimāni, bhikkhave, acinteyyāni na cintetabbāni, yāni cintento ummādassa vighātassa bhāgī assa. Katamāni cattāri? Buddhānaṃ bhikkhave buddhavisayo acinteyyo na cintetabbo, yaṃ cintento ummādassa vighātassa bhāgī assa. Jhāyissa, bhikkhave, jhānavisayo acinteyyo na cintetabbo…pe… kammavipāko, bhikkhave, acinteyyo na cintetabbo…pe… lokacintā bhikkhave acinteyyā na cintetabbā…pe… imāni, bhikkhave, cattāri acinteyyāni na cintetabbāni, yāni cintento ummādassa vighātassa bhāgī assā’’ti (a. ni. 4.77).
其中,“不应思惟”是显示其自性;“不可思惟”是显示对此应行之事。其中,“不应思惟”的意思,即不能思惟,不具备可思惟的相状。正因为是不应思惟,所以才不可思惟。诚然,虽不应思惟,然而忆念六不共法等,由于它们能成为善法生起之因,故可思惟;但这四种并非如此,因为它们思惟无果,故不可思惟,这正是用意所在。因此说:“若思惟之,则得狂乱与恼害。”“他们”的意思,是指那些精通三藏的比丘们。显示巴利原文
Tattha ‘‘acinteyyānī’’ti tesaṃ sabhāvanidassanaṃ. ‘‘Na cintetabbānī’’ti tattha kattabbatānidassanaṃ. Tattha acinteyyānīti cintetumasakkuṇeyyāni, cintetuṃ araharūpāni na hontīti attho. Acinteyyattā eva na cintetabbāni, kāmaṃ acinteyyānipi cha asādhāraṇādīni anussarantassa kusaluppattihetubhāvato tāni cintetabbāni, imāni pana evaṃ na hontīti aphalabhāvato na cintetabbānīti adhippāyo. Tenevāha ‘‘yāni cintento ummādassa vighātassa bhāgī assā’’ti. Tesanti tesaṃ piṭakānaṃ.
“此”的意思,指此佛语。“三品所摄”的意思:因为这些经被戒蕴品、大品、波提迦品这三种品所摄,所以称为三品所摄。“仅三十四经”的意思,应依偈颂这样了知义理的连结:某一部类的经数只有三十四经,而依品的摄属有三品,故为三品摄。这第一部即是《长部》。“随顺”并非相违:因为随顺义理之故,所以得到“随顺”的名称。显示巴利原文
Etanti etaṃ buddhavacanaṃ. Tivaggasaṅgahānīti sīlakkhandhavaggamahāvaggapāthikavaggasaṅkhātehi tīhi vaggehi saṅgaho etesanti tivaggasaṅgahāni. Catuttiṃseva suttantāti gāthāya evamatthayojanā veditabbā – yassa nikāyassa suttagaṇanāto catuttiṃseva ca suttantā vaggasaṅgahavasena tayo vaggā assa saṅgahassāti tivaggo saṅgaho. Esa paṭhamo nikāyo dīghanikāyoti anulomiko apaccanīko, atthānulomanato anvatthanāmoti vuttaṃ hoti.
因随顺义理,故称随顺;为阐明随顺性本身,乃说“然而为何”等语。“一部”者,即一个集合。“如是种种”者,即如是种种差别。“如这些”者,即如这些。波尼迦族与奇迦利迦族为刹帝利,其住处称为波尼迦部、奇迦利迦部。诸如此类的例证,在此处对于“部”一词有集合与住处之义,皆可从教法与世间两方面得证。其中第一例为从教法证成之语,第二例当知是从世间证成。显示巴利原文
Atthānulomanato anulomiko, anulomikattaṃyeva vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘kasmā panā’’tiādimāha. Ekanikāyampīti ekasamūhampi. Evaṃ cittanti evaṃ vicittaṃ. Yathayidanti yathā ime. Poṇikā cikkhallikā ca khattiyā, tesaṃ nivāso poṇikanikāyo cikkhallikanikāyoti vuccati. Evamādīni cettha sādhakāni sāsanato ca lokato cāti evamādīni udāharaṇāni ettha nikāyasaddassa samūhanivāsānaṃ vācakabhāve sāsanato ca vohārato ca sādhakāni pamāṇānīti attho. Ettha paṭhamamudāharaṇaṃ sāsanato sādhakavacanaṃ, dutiyaṃ lokatoti veditabbaṃ.
“十五品所摄”者,指由根本品类品等十五品所摄,故为十五品所摄。“一百五十又二经”者:以半为第二,故称“一又二分之一”;“一又二分之一百”即一百五十,再加二经,合为一百五十二经。此处所言“于某处”,即指于某部中。“十五品所摄”者,指由十五品所摄、所集。显示巴利原文
Pañcadasavaggasaṅgahānīti mūlapariyāyavaggādīhi pañcadasahi vaggehi saṅgaho etesanti pañcadasavaggasaṅgahāni. Diyaḍḍhasataṃ dve ca suttānīti aḍḍhena dutiyaṃ diyaḍḍhaṃ, ekaṃ sataṃ dve paññāsasuttāni cāti attho. Yatthāti yasmiṃ nikāye. Pañcadasavaggapariggahoti pañcadasahi vaggehi pariggahito saṅgahitoti attho.
“七千七百经”者:于此文句中,应连接为“七千经与七百经”。然而,某处亦有“七千经、七百经”的文本。“相应摄”者,即相应部之摄。显示巴利原文
Suttantānaṃ sahassāni sattasuttasatāni cāti pāṭhe suttantānaṃ satta sahassāni satta satāni cāti yojetabbaṃ. Katthaci pana ‘‘satta suttasahassāni satta suttasatāni cā’’tipi pāṭho. Saṃyuttasaṅgahoti saṃyuttanikāyassa saṅgaho.
“前已所示”者,即于经藏解说中已指出。为了以另一种方式略述所说之义,而说“除四部外,其余佛语”。这正是以另一种方式,略说了先前由“全部律藏”等所解说之义。因此说“除彼四者”等。“彼余”者,指那四部之外其余者。显示巴利原文
Pubbe nidassitāti suttantapiṭakaniddese nidassitā. Vuttameva pakārantarena saṅkhipitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘ṭhapetvā cattāro nikāye avasesaṃ buddhavacana’’nti vuttaṃ. Sakalaṃ vinayapiṭakantiādinā niddiṭṭhameva hi iminā pakārantarena saṅkhipitvā vuttaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘ṭhapetvā caturopete’’tiādi. Tadaññanti tehi catūhi nikāyehi aññaṃ avasesanti attho.
“此一切”者,即是这一切佛语。“九分”者:此处如何成为九分呢?实则应以九支安立,彼此不相混杂。若如此,则不具有经之自性者便成为祇夜等支,或具有经之自性者便成为祇夜等支。若如是,则“经”作为单独一支便不存在了;这样一来,教法便成了八支。又,注释书中说:“有偈的经为祇夜,无偈的经为记说”。所谓经,或是有偈,或是无偈,由此二支便涵盖了这两类。而除此两者之外,再无别的经可冠以优陀那等特殊名称而成为经支。纵使设想有单独的经支,那么《吉祥经》等或因无偈颂而不归于经支(如同《法句》等),或因有偈颂而归于祇夜支(如同有偈品等)。同样地,在两部《分别》等中含有偈颂的部分又当如何?答:显示巴利原文
Sabbameva2 hidanti sabbameva idaṃ buddhavacanaṃ. Navappabhedanti ettha kathaṃ panetaṃ navappabhedaṃ hoti. Tathā hi navahi aṅgehi vavatthitehi aññamaññasaṅkararahitehi bhavitabbaṃ, tathā ca sati asuttasabhāvāneva geyyaṅgādīni siyuṃ, atha suttasabhāvāneva geyyaṅgādīni, evaṃ sati suttanti visuṃ suttaṅgameva na siyā, evaṃ sante aṭṭhaṅgaṃ sāsananti āpajjati. Apica ‘‘sagāthakaṃ suttaṃ geyyaṃ, niggāthakaṃ suttaṃ veyyākaraṇa’’nti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ. Suttañca nāma sagāthakaṃ vā siyā niggāthakaṃ vāti aṅgadvayeneva tadubhayaṃ saṅgahitanti tadubhayavinimuttañca suttaṃ udānādivisesasaññārahitaṃ natthi, yaṃ suttaṅgaṃ siyā, athāpi kathañci visuṃ suttaṅgaṃ siyā, maṅgalasuttādīnaṃ suttaṅgasaṅgaho vā na siyā gāthābhāvato dhammapadādīnaṃ viya, geyyaṅgasaṅgaho vā siyā sagāthakattā sagāthakavaggassa viya, tathā ubhatovibhaṅgādīsu sagāthakappadesānanti? Vuccate –
“经”为总称之法,其余为别别之法;
因有相状而约定俗成,与彼共俱,非从他处。
所述过失,于此无有渗入;
故导师之教法,确是无混杂之九分教。
显示巴利原文 Suttanti sāmaññavidhi, visesavidhayo pare; Sanimittā niruḷhattā, sahatāññena nāññato. Yathāvuttassa dosassa, natthi etthāvagāhaṇaṃ; Tasmā asaṅkaraṃyeva, navaṅgaṃ satthusāsanaṃ.
对于一切佛语而言,“经”乃是一个通称。正如“此是彼世尊经中所来、属于经摄,在《舍卫城经分别》中,于自宗论有五百经”等语所示,即使在律藏、阿毗达摩藏等特定教理中,也可看到“经”的运用。也正因如此,大迦旃延尊者在《导论》中说“九种经的寻求”。在那里,对以经为首的九分教的寻求、探究与义理审察,便被称为“九种经的寻求”。而于其中,祇夜等特殊分类,则依各自的特征而确立。例如,有偈颂是祇夜的特征,这便是它得名的根据,因为在世间,人们也将有诗颂、有偈颂的散文著作称为祇夜。若没有偈颂,而以提问然后解答的方式,则是记说的特征,这是它得名的根据,因为问答被称为“记说”,记说即是记别。既然如此,那些有偈颂的经典,若也是以提问然后解答的方式展开,是否也应成为记说呢?不会。因为祇夜等名称在“有容身之处”与“无容身之处”的规则中,以无容身之处的规则更强,并且已由“如果没有偈颂”作了限定。例如,在《法句》等纯偈颂的作品中,在有偈颂且与喜悦、智所成偈颂相应的经典中,在那些以“此是世尊所说”等显示巴利原文
Sabbassapi hi buddhavacanassa suttanti ayaṃ sāmaññavidhi. Tathā hi ‘‘ettakaṃ tassa bhagavato suttāgataṃ suttapariyāpannaṃ, sāvatthiyā suttavibhaṅge, sakavāde pañca suttasatānī’’tiādivacanato vinayābhidhammapariyattivisesesupi suttavohāro dissati. Teneva ca āyasmā mahākaccāno nettiyaṃ (netti. saṅgahavāra) āha – ‘‘navavidhasuttantapariyeṭṭhī’’ti. Tattha hi suttādivasena navaṅgassa sāsanassa pariyeṭṭhi pariyesanā atthavicāraṇā ‘‘navavidhasuttantapariyeṭṭhī’’ti vuttā. Tadekadesesu pana geyyādayo visesavidhayo tena tena nimittena patiṭṭhitā. Tathā hi geyyassa sagāthakattaṃ tabbhāvanimittaṃ. Lokepi hi sasilokaṃ sagāthakaṃ vā cuṇṇiyaganthaṃ ‘‘geyya’’nti vadanti. Gāthāvirahe pana sati pucchaṃ katvā visajjanabhāvo veyyākaraṇassa tabbhāvanimittaṃ. Pucchāvisajjanañhi ‘‘byākaraṇa’’nti vuccati. Byākaraṇameva veyyākaraṇaṃ. Evaṃ sante sagāthakādīnampi pucchaṃ katvā visajjanavasena pavattānaṃ veyyākaraṇabhāvo āpajjatīti? Nāpajjati. Geyyādisaññānaṃ anokāsabhāvato saokāsato anokāsavidhi balavāti ‘‘gāthāvirahe satī’’ti visesitattā ca. Tathā hi dhammapadādīsu kevalaṃ gāthābandhesu sagāthakattepi somanassañāṇamayikagāthāyuttesu ‘‘vuttañheta’’ntiādivacanasambandhesu abbhutadhammapaṭisaṃyuttesu ca suttavisesesu yathākkamaṃ gāthāudānaitivuttakaabbhutadhammasaññā patiṭṭhitā. Ettha hi satipi saññantaranimittayoge anokāsasaññānaṃ balavabhāveneva gāthādisaññā patiṭṭhitā, tathā satipi gāthābandhabhāve bhagavato atītāsu jātīsu cariyānubhāvappakāsakesu jātakasaññā patiṭṭhitā, satipi pañhāvisajjanabhāve sagāthakatte ca kesuci suttantesu vedassa labhāpanato vedallasaññā patiṭṭhitāti evaṃ tena tena sagāthakattādinā nimittena tesu tesu suttavisesesu geyyādisaññā patiṭṭhitāti visesavidhayo suttaṅgato pare geyyādayo. Yaṃ panettha geyyaṅgādinimittarahitaṃ, taṃ suttaṅgaṃ visesasaññāparihārena sāmaññasaññāya pavattanato.
难道不是这样:即便如此,有偈颂的经是祇夜,无偈颂的经是记说,那么经分就不存在了?这种责难仍是老样子吗?并非老样子,因为已经作了澄清。前面已经澄清:在没有偈颂的情况下,以问答为特征,便是记说得名的根据。又,所谓“因无偈颂,《吉祥经》等不应归入经分”,这也不成立,因为已是约定俗成。因为《吉祥经》等作为“经”的身份,已是约定俗成。它们并非像《法句》、《佛种姓》等那样以无偈颂而闻名,而是恰恰以“经”的身份而闻名。正因如此,在注疏中才取了“名为经”的名称。又,所谓“因有偈颂,应归入祇夜分”,这也不成立。因为“伴随”意味着与另一者共存。所谓共存,在意义上就是与另一者同在;“与偈颂一起”便是有偈颂。而在《吉祥经》等中,没有任何一段经文是脱离偈颂而可被称为“与偈颂一起”的。难道不是偈颂的集合与偈颂本身是不同的事物,因此可以依此集合而称为“与偈颂一起”即有偈颂吗?这不成立,因为并不存在脱离组成部分的所谓集合。又,所谓“在《二分别》等中的有偈颂段落应归入祇夜分”,这也不成立,因为是来自他处。那些偈颂其实是显示巴利原文
Nanu ca evaṃ santepi sagāthakaṃ suttaṃ geyyaṃ, niggāthakaṃ suttaṃ veyyākaraṇanti suttaṅgaṃ na sambhavatīti codanā tadavatthā evāti? Na tadavatthā. Sodhitattā. Sodhitañhi pubbe gāthāvirahe sati pucchāvisajjanabhāvo veyyākaraṇassa tabbhāvanimittanti. Yañca vuttaṃ ‘‘gāthābhāvato maṅgalasuttādīnaṃ suttaṅgasaṅgaho na siyā’’ti, taṃ na, niruḷhattāti. Niruḷho hi maṅgalasuttādīnaṃ suttabhāvo. Na hi tāni dhammapadabuddhavaṃsādayo viya gāthābhāvena paññātāni, atha kho suttabhāveneva. Teneva hi aṭṭhakathāyaṃ suttanāmakanti nāmaggahaṇaṃ kataṃ. Yaṃ pana vuttaṃ ‘‘sagāthakattā geyyaṅgasaṅgaho siyā’’ti, tampi natthi. Yasmā sahatāññena. Sahabhāvo hi nāma atthato aññena hoti, saha gāthāhīti ca sagāthakaṃ. Na ca maṅgalasuttādīsu gāthāvinimutto koci suttappadeso atthi, yo ‘‘saha gāthāhī’’ti vucceyya. Nanu ca gāthāsamudāyo gāthāhi añño hoti, tathā ca tassa vasena saha gāthāhīti sagāthakanti sakkā vattunti? Taṃ na. Na hi avayavavinimutto samudāyo nāma koci atthi. Yampi vuttaṃ ‘‘ubhatovibhaṅgādīsu sagāthakappadesānaṃ geyyaṅgasaṅgaho siyā’’ti, tampi na aññato. Aññāyeva hi tā gāthā jātakādipariyāpannattā. Atho na tāhi ubhatovibhaṅgādīnaṃ geyyaṅgabhāvoti evaṃ suttādīnaṃ aṅgānaṃ aññamaññasaṅkarābhāvo veditabbo.
现在,为分别开示经等九分教,他说:“其中,两部分别、义释、犍度、附随”等。其中,所谓义释,是在《经集》中——显示巴利原文
Idāni suttādīni navaṅgāni vibhajitvā dassento āha ‘‘tattha ubhatovibhaṅganiddesakhandhakaparivārā’’tiādi. Tattha niddeso nāma suttanipāte –
“欲求欲乐之人,当彼所求成就时;”
“获得所欲之凡夫,确实心生欢喜。”(《经集》772)——
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Kāmaṃ kāmayamānassa, tassa cetaṃ samijjhati; Addhā pītimano hoti, laddhā macco yadicchatī’’ti. (su. ni. 772) –
以这些偈颂为开端的《八颂品》义释显示巴利原文
Ādinā āgatassa aṭṭhakavaggassa,
‘‘Kenassu nivuto loko, (iccāyasmā ajito;) Kenassu nappakāsati; Kissābhilepanaṃ brūsi, Kiṃsu tassa mahabbhaya’’nti. (su. ni. 1038) –
以这些为开端的《彼岸道品》的义释,显示巴利原文
Ādinā āgatassa pārāyanavaggassa,
“于一切众生中,放下棍杖,”
不伤害他们中任何一个;
不希求儿子,何况同伴,
应如犀牛角般独自游行。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Sabbesu bhūtesu nidhāya daṇḍaṃ, Aviheṭhayaṃ aññatarampi tesaṃ; Na puttamiccheyya kuto sahāyaṃ, Eko care khaggavisāṇakappo’’ti. (su. ni. 35) –
以上述为开端的《犀牛角经》的义释,以及依其义理分别,由具寿法将舍利弗长老以与导师相仿的方式所造,被称为《大义释》与《小义释》。应知,在此处,义释归入经分,这是具寿佛音阿阇梨所显示的;而在其他地方,如《长部注》等中,处处皆说“二分别、义释、犍度、附随”,亦已显示义释归入经分。阿阇梨法护长老亦于《导论注》中,如此说此归入经分。然而,有些人说义释归入祇夜与记说两分。这是《义释注》中优波先那长老所说:显示巴利原文
Ādinā āgatassa khaggavisāṇasuttassa ca tadatthavibhāgavasena satthukappena āyasmatā dhammasenāpatisāriputtattherena kato niddeso mahāniddeso cūḷaniddesoti ca vuccati. Evamidha niddesassa suttaṅgasaṅgaho bhadantabuddhaghosācariyena dassitoti veditabbo. Aññatthāpi ca dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathādīsu sabbattha ubhatovibhaṅganiddesakhandhakaparivārāti niddesassa suttaṅgasaṅgaho eva dassito. Ācariyadhammapālattherenapi nettipakaraṇaṭṭhakathāyaṃ evametassa suttaṅgasaṅgahova kathito. Keci pana niddesassa gāthāveyyākaraṇaṅgesu dvīsu saṅgahaṃ vadanti. Vuttañhetaṃ niddesaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ upasenattherena –
此即是律藏、经藏、论藏三藏中的经藏所摄,于长部、中部、相应部、增支部、小部五部尼柯耶中,为小部尼柯耶所摄;于契经、祇夜、记说、偈颂、自说、如是语、本生、未曾有法、方广九分教中,随其所应,为偈颂与记说二分所摄。显示巴利原文
‘‘Tadetaṃ vinayapiṭakaṃ suttantapiṭakaṃ abhidhammapiṭakanti tīsu piṭakesu suttantapiṭakapariyāpannaṃ, dīghanikāyo majjhimanikāyo saṃyuttanikāyo aṅguttaranikāyo khuddakanikāyoti pañcasu mahānikāyesu khuddakamahānikāye pariyāpannaṃ, suttaṃ geyyaṃ veyyākaraṇaṃ gāthā udānaṃ itivuttakaṃ jātakaṃ abbhutadhammaṃ vedallanti navasu satthusāsanaṅgesu yathāsambhavaṃ gāthāveyyākaraṇaṅgadvayasaṅgahita’’nti (mahāni. aṭṭha. ganthārambhakathā).
在此,首先由于部分内容具有问答的性质,义释的一部分归入记说分,这或许还说得通;然而,归入偈颂分又如何能说得通呢?这是此处应当审察的。因为,只是纯粹以偈颂编排的形式——如同《法句》等那样——才是成为偈颂分的近因。在《法句》等纯粹以偈颂编排的经典中,才确立了‘偈颂’的名称;而在义释中,则完全找不到任何纯粹以偈颂编排的段落。因为法将(舍利弗)只是对正自觉者所说的、含摄于《八颂品》等中的那些偈颂作了义释。为了分析义理而引用的那些属于《八颂品》等、应被解释的根本偈颂,由于另外属于《经集》所摄,故不计入义释之数;正如那些虽出现于《两分别》等中,却不获得该名称的、属于《本生》等所摄的偈颂一样。因此,在此应当寻求其他理由,或者采取更为合理的解释。显示巴利原文
Ettha tāva katthaci pucchāvisajjanasabhāvato niddesekadesassa veyyākaraṇaṅgasaṅgaho yujjatu nāma , gāthaṅgasaṅgaho pana kathaṃ yujjeyyāti idamettha vīmaṃsitabbaṃ. Dhammapadādīnaṃ viya hi kevalaṃ gāthābandhabhāvo gāthaṅgassa tabbhāvanimittaṃ. Dhammapadādīsu hi kevalaṃ gāthābandhesu gāthāsamaññā patiṭṭhitā, niddese ca na koci kevalo gāthābandhappadeso upalabbhati. Sammāsambuddhena bhāsitānaṃyeva hi aṭṭhakavaggādisaṅgahitānaṃ gāthānaṃ niddesamattaṃ dhammasenāpatinā kataṃ. Atthavibhajanatthaṃ ānītāpi hi tā aṭṭhakavaggādisaṅgahitā niddisitabbā mūlagāthāyo suttanipātapariyāpannattā aññāyevāti na niddesasaṅkhyaṃ gacchanti ubhatovibhaṅgādīsu āgatabhāvepi taṃ vohāraṃ alabhamānā jātakādigāthāpariyāpannā gāthāyo viya, tasmā kāraṇantaramettha gavesitabbaṃ, yuttataraṃ vā gahetabbaṃ.
《那罗迦经》与《迅速经》:此处,《那罗迦经》乃世尊为那罗迦长老所说、阐明牟尼行道的经典。这位那罗迦长老,是阿私陀仙人的外甥,因其见到莲花胜佛的声闻弟子修行牟尼道后,心生渴仰,从此历经十万劫圆满诸波罗蜜而来至此。在转法轮日后的第七天,他以“已了知此”等两首偈颂请问牟尼行道,世尊便以“我将为你开示牟尼”等(《经集》706)偈颂为他开示,由此说出了《那罗迦经》。而《迅速经》则是:当大集会经说法之时,聚集的众天中,有些天人生起了“证得阿罗汉的修行是怎样的呢?”之心,世尊为阐明其义,令化佛以“我请问你,太阳的亲族”等(《经集》921;《大义释》150)发起请问,自己又以“了知戏论之根已”等(《经集》922)说出了此经。如是,既显示了此《经集》中所出《吉祥经》等契经的分摄属,也将显示即在此中所出、不名为经的纯粹偈颂的偈颂分摄属。既然如此,在《经集》注释的开端——显示巴利原文
Nālakasuttatuvaṭṭakasuttānīti ettha nālakasuttaṃ nāma padumuttarassa bhagavato sāvakaṃ moneyyapaṭipadaṃ paṭipannaṃ disvā tadatthaṃ abhikaṅkhamānena tato pabhuti kappasatasahassaṃ pāramiyo pūretvā āgatena asitassa isino bhāgineyyena nālakattherena dhammacakkappavattitadivasato sattame divase ‘‘aññātameta’’ntiādīhi dvīhi gāthāhi moneyyapaṭipadaṃ puṭṭhena bhagavatā ‘‘moneyyaṃ te upaññissa’’ntiādinā (su. ni. 706) nālakattherassa bhāsitaṃ moneyyapaṭipadāparidīpakaṃ suttaṃ. Tuvaṭṭakasuttaṃ pana mahāsamayasuttantadesanāya sannipatitesu devesu ‘‘kā nu kho arahattappattiyā paṭipattī’’ti uppannacittānaṃ ekaccānaṃ devatānaṃ tamatthaṃ pakāsetuṃ ‘‘pucchāmi taṃ ādiccabandhū’’tiādinā (su. ni. 921; mahāni. 150 ) nimmitabuddhena attānaṃ pucchāpetvā ‘‘mūlaṃ papañcasaṅkhāyā’’tiādinā (su. ni. 922) bhāsitaṃ suttaṃ. Evamidhasuttanipāte āgatānaṃ maṅgalasuttādīnaṃ suttaṅgasaṅgaho dassito, tattheva āgatānaṃ asuttanāmikānaṃ suddhikagāthānaṃ gāthaṅgasaṅgahañca dassayissati, evaṃ sati suttanipātaṭṭhakathārambhe –
聚集上百偈颂,兼具祇夜与记说之相;
为何名为《经集》呢?因为它是通过结集而来之故。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Gāthāsatasamākiṇṇo , geyyabyākaraṇaṅkito; Kasmā suttanipātoti, saṅkhamesa gatoti ce’’ti. (su. ni. aṭṭha. 1.ganthārambhakathā) –
为何将整部《经集》归摄于祇夜与记说二分?这并不相违。因为应作如是解:诘难者只取其中某些处的问答形式及带有偈颂这一特征,而作了简单的诘难。否则,若《经集》中并无不带偈颂的经典,就不应对其归入记说分提出诘难。应将《有偈品》配属为祇夜。至于‘所谓不以八分摄属者,如《无碍解道》等’,这在三本《结文》中均有记载。然而,有些人说《无碍解道》为祇夜与记说二分所摄,因为在《无碍解道注释》中确实说过:‘于九分教中,随其所应,为祇夜与记说二分所摄。’显示巴利原文
Sakalassapi suttanipātassa geyyaveyyākaraṇaṅgasaṅgaho kasmā coditoti? Nāyaṃ virodho. Kevalañhi tattha codakena sagāthakattaṃ katthaci pucchāvisajjanamattañca gahetvā codanāmattaṃ katanti gahetabbaṃ. Aññathā suttanipāte niggāthakassa suttasseva abhāvato veyyākaraṇaṅgasaṅgaho na codetabbo siyāti. Sagāthāvaggo geyyanti yojetabbaṃ. ‘‘Aṭṭhahi aṅgehi asaṅgahitaṃ nāma paṭisambhidādī’’ti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Keci pana paṭisambhidāmaggassa geyyaveyyākaraṇaṅgadvayasaṅgahaṃ vadanti. Vuttañhetaṃ paṭisambhidāmaggaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 1.ganthārambhakathā) ‘‘navasu satthusāsanaṅgesu yathāsambhavaṃ geyyaveyyākaraṇaṅgadvayasaṅgahita’’nti.
‘Nosuttanāmikā’意为‘不名为经者’。‘所谓纯粹偈颂,即事缘偈颂’,这三本《结文》均有记载。其中,所谓事缘偈颂即:显示巴利原文
Nosuttanāmikāti asuttanāmikā. ‘‘Suddhikagāthā nāma vatthugāthā’’ti tīsu gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Tattha vatthugāthāti –
从往昔可爱的拘萨罗国,前往南方之路;
这位通达咒语的婆罗门,正渴望着无所有。’(《经集》982)——
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Kosalānaṃ purā rammā, agamā dakkhiṇāpathaṃ; Ākiñcaññaṃ patthayāno, brāhmaṇo mantapāragū’’ti. (su. ni. 982) –
这些乃是由具寿阿难长老在结集时,为引出《彼岸道品》的序缘而诵出的五十六偈颂;以及同样由具寿阿难长老在结集时,为引出《那罗迦经》的序缘而诵出的——显示巴利原文
Ādinā pārāyanavaggassa nidānaṃ āropentena āyasmatā ānandattherena saṅgītikāle vuttā chappaññāsa ca gāthāyo, ānandatthereneva saṅgītikāle nālakasuttassa nidānaṃ āropentena vuttā –
‘当三十三天众满怀欢喜与喜悦时,
以及帝释天与身着净衣的诸天;
手执天衣,极度称扬赞叹,
阿私陀仙人在日间静处得见。”(《经集》684)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Ānandajāte tidasagaṇe patīte, Sakkañca indaṃ sucivasane ca deve; Dussaṃ gahetvā atiriva thomayante, Asito isi addasa divāvihāre’’ti. (su. ni. 684) –
此外,还诵出约二十首以这些为首的偈颂。对此,注释中说:“《那罗迦经》的事缘偈颂即计入《那罗迦经》之数。”这在《经集注释》中确实说过。显示巴利原文
Ādikā vīsatimattā gāthāyo ca vuccanti. Tattha ‘‘nālakasuttassa vatthugāthāyo nālakasuttasaṅkhyaṃyeva gacchantī’’ti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ suttanipātaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (su. ni. aṭṭha. 2.685) –
然而,世尊般涅槃后,在具寿大迦叶主持结集时,具寿阿难被问及那牟尼行道——即那罗迦是何时、如何受教导而请问世尊的——为了将这一切清楚展示出来,他诵出了以“当三十三天众欢喜”为首的二十首事缘偈颂,然后予以开示。这一切都被称为《那罗迦经》。显示巴利原文
‘‘Parinibbute pana bhagavati saṅgītiṃ karontena āyasmatā mahākassapena āyasmā ānando tameva moneyyapaṭipadaṃ puṭṭho yena yadā ca samādapito nālako bhagavantaṃ pucchi, taṃ sabbaṃ pākaṭaṃ katvā dassetukāmo ‘ānandajāte’tiādikā vīsati vatthugāthāyo vatvā abhāsi. Taṃ sabbampi nālakasuttanti vuccatī’’ti.
因此,《那罗迦经》的事缘偈颂已由收录《那罗迦经》所摄,故在此应将《彼岸道品》的事缘偈颂作为纯粹偈颂来理解。然而,就在该《彼岸道品》中,阿耆多学童等十六位婆罗门的问偈与世尊的答偈,在此也可视为纯粹偈颂。因为这些偈颂在圣典中并不以“经”为名,而是以“阿耆多学童问”“帝须弥勒学童问”等形式出现(《经集》1038-1048),且不与长行相混,故可称为“不名为经的纯粹偈颂”。显示巴利原文
Tasmā nālakasuttassa vatthugāthāyo nālakasuttaggahaṇeneva saṅgahitāti pārāyanikavaggassa vatthugāthāyo idha suddhikagāthāti gahetabbaṃ. Tattheva panassa pārāyaniyavagge ajitamāṇavakādīnaṃ soḷasannaṃ brāhmaṇānaṃ pucchāgāthā bhagavato visajjanagāthā ca idha suddhikagāthāti evampi vattuṃ yujjati. Tāpi hi pāḷiyaṃ suttanāmena avatvā ‘‘ajitamāṇavakapucchā tissamettayyamāṇavakapucchā’’tiādinā (su. ni. 1038-1048) āgatattā cuṇṇiyaganthehi amissattā ca nosuttanāmikā suddhikagāthā nāmāti vattuṃ vaṭṭati.
现在,为了从自性上界定“优陀那”,他说“与由喜与智所生的偈颂相连结”等。然而,依什么义而称此为“优陀那”呢?依“发出”(udānana)之义。什么是这“优陀那”呢?是由喜悦之冲动所激起的言说。犹如油等所量之物,量器容纳不了时,便溢出流走,这称为“溢出”;又犹如水为湖池所不能容时,便漫溢流走,这称为“大洪水”;同样地,当由喜悦之冲动所激起的寻思波浪,内心无法持住时,它便变得过剩,不安住于内,而从外部通过语门流出,成为不顾听者的特别言说,这便称为“优陀那”。以法之悚惧为因,也会出现这种形态。此优陀那,有些处以偈颂进行,有些处以长行进行。正如:显示巴利原文
Idāni udānaṃ sarūpato vavatthapento āha ‘‘somanassañāṇamayikagāthāpaṭisaṃyuttā’’tiādi. Kenaṭṭhena (udā. aṭṭha. ganthārambhakathā) panetaṃ ‘‘udāna’’nti vuccati? Udānanaṭṭhena. Kimidaṃ udānaṃ nāma? Pītivegasamuṭṭhāpito udāhāro. Yathā hi yaṃ telādi minitabbavatthu mānaṃ gahetuṃ na sakkoti, vissanditvā gacchati, taṃ ‘‘avaseko’’ti vuccati, yañca jalaṃ taḷākaṃ gahetuṃ na sakkoti, ajjhottharitvā gacchati, taṃ ‘‘mahogho’’ti vuccati, evameva yaṃ pītivegasamuṭṭhāpitaṃ vitakkavipphāraṃ hadayaṃ sandhāretuṃ na sakkoti, so adhiko hutvā anto asaṇṭhahitvā bahi vacīdvārena nikkhanto paṭiggāhakanirapekkho udāhāraviseso ‘‘udāna’’nti vuccati. Dhammasaṃvegavasenapi ayamākāro labbhateva. Tayidaṃ katthaci gāthābandhavasena katthaci vākyavasena pavattaṃ. Tathā hi –
“那时,世尊以与涅槃相连系的法语,教导、劝勉、激励、令诸比丘欢喜。那些比丘作意、用心,以全心专注,倾耳谛听正法。那时,世尊了知此义,就在那时发出此优陀那:‘诸比丘,有彼处,那里无地、无水……’”显示巴利原文
‘‘Tena kho pana samayena bhagavā bhikkhū nibbānapaṭisaṃyuttāya dhammiyā kathāya sandasseti samādapeti samuttejeti sampahaṃseti. Tedha bhikkhū aṭṭhiṃ katvā manasi katvā sabbaṃ cetasā samannāharitvā ohitasotā dhammaṃ suṇanti. Atha kho bhagavā etamatthaṃ viditvā tāyaṃ velāyaṃ imaṃ udānaṃ udānesi ‘atthi, bhikkhave, tadāyatanaṃ, yattha neva pathavī na āpo’’’ti (udā. 71-72) –
在“有彼处”等开头的语句中,是以由喜与智所生起的语句形式进行的。显示巴利原文
Ādīsu somanassañāṇasamuṭṭhitavākyavasena pavattaṃ.
岂不是如此吗:所谓优陀那,是由喜与悦所激发的、或由法之悚惧感所激发的、不拘泥于听法者的言说,在一切处皆如是出现。然而,为何此处世尊在发出优陀那时,却召唤了比丘们呢?是为了令那些比丘们了知。因为世尊向那些比丘们宣说了与涅槃相连系的法后,以随念涅槃功德而生起的喜与悦,发出优陀那。他了知那些比丘们心中生起这样的思虑:'在此,除涅槃之外,一切自性法皆依缘而存在,并非不顾缘;然而,此涅槃法,如何是无缘而存在的呢?'为了令他们了知,而说:'诸比丘,有彼处……'(《优陀那》71)等开头语。应知这并非绝对地将他们作为听法者。显示巴利原文
Nanu ca udānaṃ nāma pītisomanassasamuṭṭhāpito dhammasaṃvegasamuṭṭhāpito vā dhammapaṭiggāhakanirapekkho udāhāro tathā ceva sabbattha āgataṃ, idha kasmā bhagavā udānento bhikkhū āmantesīti? Tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ saññāpanatthaṃ. Nibbānapaṭisaṃyuttañhi bhagavā tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ dhammaṃ desetvā nibbānaguṇānussaraṇena uppannapītisomanassena udānaṃ udānento ‘‘idha nibbānavajjo sabbo sabhāvadhammo paccayāyattavuttikova upalabbhati, na paccayanirapekkho, ayaṃ pana nibbānadhammo kathamappaccayo upalabbhatī’’ti tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ cetoparivitakkamaññāya tesaṃ ñāpetukāmo ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, tadāyatana’’nti (udā. 71)-ādimāha. Na ekantato te paṭiggāhake katvāti veditabbaṃ.
若你们畏惧于苦,若苦于你们为不悦;
则无论显明或隐密,皆莫造作恶业。”(《优陀那》44)——
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Sace bhāyatha dukkhassa, sace vo dukkhamappiyaṃ; Mākattha pāpakaṃ kammaṃ, āvi vā yadi vā raho’’ti. (udā. 44) –
而应知,像这样的,乃是以对法的悚惧感为因而发起的优陀那。显示巴利原文
Evamādikaṃ pana dhammasaṃvegavasappavattaṃ udānanti veditabbaṃ.
诸有情希求安乐,若有人以杖棒加害,
彼为自己寻求安乐,死后却不得安乐。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Sukhakāmāni bhūtāni, yo daṇḍena vihiṃsati; Attano sukhamesāno, pecca so na labhate sukha’’nti. (dha. pa. 131; udā. 13) –
这也被称为因法之悚惧感而发出的优陀那。例如:一时,众多牧童在舍卫城与祇树给孤独园之间用杖棒打一条蛇。那时,世尊正前往舍卫城乞食,途中看见那些孩童用杖棒打蛇,便问:“童子们,你们为什么用杖棒打这条蛇?”他们回答:“尊者,因为害怕被咬。”世尊便生起法之悚惧感:“这些人为了让自己安乐而打这条蛇,却将在所生之处遭受苦。啊,真是被无明欺骗的拙劣把戏!”正是以此法之悚惧感,世尊发出了此优陀那。如是,当知此优陀那:有些地方以偈颂形式展开,有些地方以散文语句展开,有些地方依于喜悦而展开,有些地方依于法之悚惧感而展开。因此,注释书中所说的优陀那特征——“与由喜与智所成的偈颂相连结”,应理解为此是就多数情况而言。因为优陀那多数是以偈颂形式所说,并且是由喜与悦所引生的。显示巴利原文
Idampi dhammasaṃvegavasappavattaṃ udānanti vadanti. Tathā hi ekasmiṃ samaye sambahulā gopālakā antarā ca sāvatthiṃ antarā ca jetavanaṃ ahiṃ daṇḍehi hananti. Tena ca samayena bhagavā sāvatthiṃ piṇḍāya gacchanto antarāmagge te dārake ahiṃ daṇḍena hanante disvā ‘‘kasmā kumārakā imaṃ ahiṃ daṇḍena hanathā’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘ḍaṃsanabhayena bhante’’ti ca vutte ‘‘ime ‘attano sukhaṃ karissāmā’ti imaṃ paharantā nibbattaṭṭhāne dukkhaṃ anubhavissanti, aho avijjāya nikatikosalla’’nti dhammasaṃvegaṃ uppādesi. Teneva ca dhammasaṃvegena imaṃ udānaṃ udānesi. Evametaṃ katthaci gāthābandhavasena katthaci vākyavasena katthaci somanassavasena katthaci dhammasaṃvegavasena pavattanti veditabbaṃ. Tasmā aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘somanassañāṇamayikagāthāpaṭisaṃyuttānī’’ti yaṃ udānalakkhaṇaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ yebhuyyavasena vuttanti gahetabbaṃ. Yebhuyyena hi udānaṃ gāthābandhavasena bhāsitaṃ pītisomanassasamuṭṭhāpitañca.
此优陀那有三种:一切知佛所说、独觉佛所说、声闻所说。其中,独觉佛所说者——显示巴利原文
Tayidaṃ sabbaññubuddhabhāsitaṃ paccekabuddhabhāsitaṃ sāvakabhāsitanti tividhaṃ hoti. Tattha paccekabuddhabhāsitaṃ –
‘‘Sabbesu bhūtesu nidhāya daṇḍaṃ, Aviheṭhayaṃ aññatarampi tesa’’nti. –
“于一切众生中放下杖棒”等,出自《犀角经》(《经集》35)。声闻所说者亦然——显示巴利原文
Ādinā khaggavisāṇasutte (su. ni. 35) āgatameva. Sāvakabhāsitānipi –
我已断尽一切贪,已根除一切嗔;
我的一切痴已尽断,清凉、寂灭。”——
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Sabbo rāgo pahīno me, sabbo doso samūhato; Sabbo me vihato moho, sītibhūtosmi nibbuto’’ti. –
以“我断尽了一切贪”等开头的,见于《长老偈》(《长老偈》79),显示巴利原文
Ādinā theragāthāsu (theragā. 79),
我以身防护,以语及意防护;
连根拔除渴爱,我已清凉,已证寂灭。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Kāyena saṃvutā āsiṃ, vācāya uda cetasā; Samūlaṃ taṇhamabbhuyha, sītibhūtāmhi nibbutā’’ti. –
这些也见于《长老尼偈》第15偈。此外,还有帝释等诸天所说的,如“啊,布施!最上布施,善安立于迦叶处”等(《优陀那》27),以及种德婆罗门等人类所说的,如“礼敬彼世尊”等(《长部》2.371;《中部》1.290)。这些确实是被收入三次结集的优陀那,但并非此处所指。唯有那些由正自觉者亲自、直接所说,成为胜者之语的,才被结集法藏者结集为“优陀那”。正是针对这些,在将世尊教法分为九分来解说时,才称作优陀那。显示巴利原文
Therigāthāsu (therīgā. 15) ca āgatāni. Aññānipi sakkādīhi devehi bhāsitāni ‘‘aho dānaṃ paramadānaṃ kassape supatiṭṭhita’’ntiādīni (udā. 27), soṇadaṇḍabrāhmaṇādīhi manussehi ca bhāsitāni ‘‘namo tassa bhagavato’’tiādīni (dī. ni. 2.371; ma. ni. 1.290) tisso saṅgītiyo āruḷhāni udānāni santi eva, na tāni idha adhippetāni. Yāni pana sammāsambuddhena sāmaṃ āhaccabhāsitāni jinavacanabhūtāni, tāneva ca dhammasaṅgāhakehi ‘‘udāna’’nti saṅgītaṃ. Etāniyeva ca sandhāya bhagavato pariyattidhammaṃ navavidhā vibhajitvā uddisantena udānanti vuttaṃ.
而“多生轮回”等偈颂,是世尊在菩提树下以优陀那的方式宣说,也是数十万正自觉者的优陀那之来源。这些偈颂后来由持法藏长老根据世尊的教导,未被结集者收入《优陀那》巴利中,而是收入了《法句》。至于“憍陈如确实已了知”这句优陀那,是世尊所宣说,其音声遍满一万世界,令诸天与人悉皆了知。这也如同“比丘们确实曾在一个时期令我满意”等语(《中部》1.225)一样,是在《转法轮经》说法结束时,世尊为了省察自己所证得的一部分法义,是否如所教示的那样,已由弟子中最初的长老所证得;由此省察自己的辛劳已得成果,心生喜悦而发出的感叹之语,并非像“当诸法确实显现时”等语(《大品》1-3;《优陀那》1-3)那样,是在宣说流转或还灭的道理。因此,应知结集者并未将其结集入《优陀那》巴利中。显示巴利原文
Yā pana ‘‘anekajātisaṃsāra’’ntiādigāthā bhagavatā bodhiyā mūle udānavasena pavattitā anekasatasahassānaṃ sammāsambuddhānaṃ udānabhūtā ca, tā aparabhāge dhammabhaṇḍāgārikassa bhagavatā desitattā dhammasaṅgāhakehi udānapāḷiyaṃ saṅgahaṃ anāropetvā dhammapade saṅgahitā. Yañca ‘‘aññāsi vata bho koṇḍañño’’ti udānavacanaṃ dasasahassilokadhātuyā devamanussānaṃ pavedanasamatthanigghosavipphāraṃ bhagavatā bhāsitaṃ, tadapi paṭhamabodhiyaṃ sabbesaṃ eva bhikkhūnaṃ sammāpaṭipattipaccavekkhaṇahetukaṃ ‘‘ārādhayiṃsu vata maṃ bhikkhū ekaṃ samaya’’ntiādivacanaṃ (ma. ni. 1.225) viya dhammacakkappavattanasuttadesanāpariyosāne attanā adhigatadhammekadesassa yathādesitassa ariyamaggassa sāvakesu sabbapaṭhamaṃ therena adhigatattā attano parissamassa saphalabhāvapaccavekkhaṇahetukaṃ pītisomanassajanitaṃ udāhāramattāṃ, na ‘‘yadā have pātubhavanti dhammā’’tiādivacanaṃ (mahāva. 1-3; udā. 1-3) viya pavattiyā nivattiyā vā pakāsananti na dhammasaṅgāhakehi udānapāḷiyaṃ saṅgītanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
在《优陀那》巴利中,从《菩提品》等八品,每品各十经,共结集了八十经。因此,在《优陀那注》(《优陀那注·序论》)中,阿阇梨法护长老说:显示巴利原文
Udānapāḷiyañca bodhivaggādīsu aṭṭhasu vaggesu dasa dasa katvā asītiyeva suttantā saṅgītā , tatoyeva ca udānaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (udā. aṭṭha. ganthārambhakathā) ācariyadhammapālattherena vuttaṃ –
“正是八十经,略摄为八品;
所宣说之《优陀那》偈颂,共有九十五颂。”
以诵分计,有八又半诵分;
同样,《优陀那》中相关联的章节,共计八十一处。
智者计算出此《优陀那》的语句数,
《优陀那》的文句,总计二万一千一百句。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Asīti eva suttantā, vaggā aṭṭha samāsato; Gāthā ca pañcanavuti, udānassa pakāsitā. ‘‘Aḍḍhūnanavamattā ca, bhāṇavārā pamāṇato; Ekādhikā tathāsīti, udānassānusandhayo. ‘‘Ekavīsasahassāni, satameva vicakkhaṇo; Padānetānudānassa, gaṇitāni viniddise. –
就偈颂的音步而言——显示巴利原文
Gāthāpādato pana –
共有八千四百音步;
这些是《优陀那》的语句,计有二十三句。
字母共有七千六百七十个;
同样,《优陀那》的字母被宣说为八十三个。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Aṭṭhasahassamattāni, cattāreva satāni ca; Padānetānudānassa, tevīsati ca niddise. ‘‘Akkharānaṃ sahassāni, saṭṭhi satta satāni ca; Tīṇi dvāsīti ca tathā, udānassa paveditā’’ti.
然而此处说“八十二经”,并不相符,故应以“八十经”的读法为准。显示巴利原文
Idha pana ‘‘dvāsīti suttantā’’ti vuttaṃ, taṃ na sameti, tasmā ‘‘asīti suttantā’’ti pāṭhena bhavitabbaṃ.
世尊曾这样说:“‘阿罗汉所说’为我所闻。比丘们,应断一法,我为你们作不还果的保证。哪一法呢?比丘们,应断贪这一法,我为你们作不还果的保证。”如此,以这一法、二法、三法、四法的分类方式,被收摄于《如是语》巴利中的一百一十二经,即名为《如是语》,因而说“世尊曾这样说”等。关于“一百一十经”,此处亦应取“一百一十二经”的读法。实际上,《一法集》中有二十七经,《二法集》中有二十二经,《三法集》中有五十经,《四法集》中有十三经,如此,《如是语》巴利中正好有一百一十二经。正是由于这个原因,在巴利文中——显示巴利原文
Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā – ‘‘vuttamarahatāti me sutaṃ. Ekadhammaṃ, bhikkhave, pajahatha, ahaṃ vo pāṭibhogo anāgāmitāya. Katamaṃ ekadhammaṃ? Lobhaṃ, bhikkhave, ekadhammaṃ pajahatha, ahaṃ vo pāṭibhogo anāgāmitāyā’’ti evamādinā ekakadukatikacatukkavasena itivuttakapāḷiyaṃ (itivu. 1) saṅgahamāropitāni dvādasuttarasatasuttantāni itivuttakaṃ nāmāti dassento āha ‘‘vuttañheta’’ntiādi. Dasuttarasatasuttantāti etthāpi ‘‘dvādasuttarasatasuttantā’’ti pāṭhena bhavitabbaṃ. Tathā hi ekakanipāte tāva sattavīsati suttāni, dukanipāte dvāvīsati, tikanipāte paññāsa, catukkanipāte terasāti dvādasuttarasatasuttantāneva itivuttakapāḷiyaṃ āgatāni. Tatoyeva ca pāḷiyaṃ –
“贪、嗔、痴,
忿与覆,合为第五;
慢,一切又为慢,
贪与嗔,共十三法。
痴、忿与覆,
五盖,以渴爱为第五;
二种有学的断与和合,
恶心与地狱,合为十三法。
净信、一、无畏、人,以过去为第五;
如是,有依福德,二十七法已显明。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Lobho doso ca moho ca, Kodho makkhena pañcamaṃ; Māno sabbaṃ puna māno, Lobho dosena terasa. ‘‘Moho kodho puna makkho, Nīvaraṇā taṇhāya pañcamaṃ; Dve sekkhabhedā sāmaggī, Paduṭṭhanirayena terasa. ‘‘Pasannā ekamābhāyi, puggalaṃ atītena pañcamaṃ; Evañce opadhikaṃ puññaṃ, sattavīsa pakāsitā’’ti. –
通过这些摄颂,计有一百一十二经被显示出来。也正因如此,在注释书(《如是语注·序论》)中也说:显示巴利原文
Evamādinā uddānagāthāhi dvādasuttarasatasuttāni gaṇetvā dassitāni. Teneva ca aṭṭhakathāyampi (itivu. aṭṭha. ganthārambhakathā) –
“从经数上来说,《一法集》中有二十七经,《二法集》中有二十二经,《三法集》中有五十经,《四法集》中有十三经,合计收录一百一十二经。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Suttato ekakanipāte tāva sattavīsati suttāni, dukanipāte dvāvīsati, tikanipāte paññāsa, catukkanipāte terasāti dvādasādhikasatasuttasaṅgaha’’nti –
如果说,这里稍有不足或超出便不计入数目的话,那么如同应当说“八十二犍度事”却说成“八十犍度事”一样,应当说“一百一十二经”却说成“一百一十经”,也可以这样说。然而,在这样的地方,显示标准的人应当如实显示,所以应以“一百一十二经”这一读法为准。显示巴利原文
Vuttaṃ. Kāmañcettha appakaṃ ūnamadhikaṃ vā gaṇanūpagaṃ na hotīti katvā ‘‘dvāsīti khandhakavattānī’’ti vattabbe ‘‘asīti khandhakavattānī’’ti vuttavacanaṃ viya ‘‘dvādasuttarasatasuttantā’’ti vattabbe ‘‘dasuttarasatasuttantā’’ti vuttantipi sakkā vattuṃ, tathāpi īdise ṭhāne pamāṇaṃ dassentena yāthāvatova niyametvā dassetabbanti ‘‘dvādasuttarasatasuttantā’’ icceva pāṭhena bhavitabbaṃ.
将已生、已成、过去曾住的世尊的前世行迹,歌咏、讲说、阐明的经典,便称为本生。显示巴利原文
Jātaṃ bhūtaṃ purāvutthaṃ bhagavato pubbacaritaṃ kāyati katheti pakāsetīti jātakaṃ.
“诸比丘,阿难有四种稀有、未曾有法。哪四种?诸比丘,若有比丘众前来见阿难,仅见便心生喜悦;若阿难于其处说法,亦因说法而心生喜悦;乃至阿难默然时,比丘众犹不餍足。若有比丘尼众……(中略)……优婆塞众……(中略)……优婆夷众前来见阿难,仅见便心生喜悦;若阿难于其处说法,亦因说法而心生喜悦;乃至阿难默然时,优婆夷众犹不餍足。诸比丘,这便是阿难所具有的四种稀有、未曾有法。”(《增支部》4.129)为说明以如此方式宣说、一切与稀有未曾有法相关的经典,故名为《未曾有法》,而说“诸比丘,有四种”等。显示巴利原文
‘‘Cattārome , bhikkhave, acchariyā abbhutā dhammā ānande. Katame cattāro? Sace, bhikkhave, bhikkhuparisā ānandaṃ dassanāya upasaṅkamati, dassanenapi sā attamanā hoti. Tattha ce ānando dhammaṃ bhāsati, bhāsitenapi sā attamanā hoti, atittāva, bhikkhave, bhikkhuparisā hoti, atha ānando tuṇhī bhavati. Sace bhikkhunīparisā…pe… upāsakaparisā…pe… upāsikā parisā ānandaṃ dassanāya upasaṅkamati, dassanenapi sā attamanā hoti. Tattha ce ānando dhammaṃ bhāsati, bhāsitenapi sā attamanā hoti, atittāva, bhikkhave, upāsikāparisā hoti, atha ānando tuṇhī bhavati. Ime kho, bhikkhave, cattāro acchariyā abbhutā dhammā ānande’’ti (a. ni. 4.129) evamādinayappavattā sabbepi acchariyaabbhutadhammapaṭisaṃyuttā suttantā abbhutadhammaṃ nāmāti dassento āha ‘‘cattārome, bhikkhave’’tiādi.
于《小有明经》等(中部1.460起),应知此经由一位名叫毗舍佉的优婆塞请问、一位名叫法授的比丘尼所说,故称《小有明经》。而《大有明经》(中部1.449起)则由大拘絺罗长老请问、尊者舍利弗长老所说。《正见经》(中部1.89起)亦由众比丘请问、同由尊者舍利弗长老所说,此诸经属于中部经典。又,《帝释问经》(长部2.344起)由帝释请问、世尊所说,应知该经属于长部经典。《大满月经》(中部3.85起)乃于该布萨日、十五满月之夜,由一位比丘请问、世尊所说,应知该经属于中部经典。‘Veda’意为智。‘Tuṭṭhi’意为在领解所说之法教后,以‘善哉,圣尼!善哉,贤友!’等方式生起的随喜之喜。‘Laddhā laddhā’意为得已复得,即一再地得到。显示巴利原文
Cūḷavedallādīsu (ma. ni. 1.460 ādayo) visākhena nāma upāsakena puṭṭhāya dhammadinnāya nāma bhikkhuniyā bhāsitaṃ suttaṃ cūḷavedallanti veditabbaṃ. Mahāvedallaṃ (ma. ni. 1.449 ādayo) pana mahākoṭṭhikattherena pucchitena āyasmatā sāriputtattherena bhāsitaṃ. Sammādiṭṭhisuttampi (ma. ni. 1.89 ādayo) bhikkhūhi puṭṭhena tenevāyasmatā sāriputtattherena bhāsitaṃ. Etāni majjhimanikāyapariyāpannāni. Sakkapañhaṃ (dī. ni. 2.344 ādayo) pana sakkena puṭṭho bhagavā abhāsi, tañca dīghanikāyapariyāpannanti veditabbaṃ. Mahāpuṇṇamasuttampi (ma. ni. 3.85 ādayo) tadahuposathe pannarase puṇṇamāya rattiyā aññatarena bhikkhunā puṭṭhena bhagavatā bhāsitaṃ, taṃ pana majjhimanikāyapariyāpannanti veditabbaṃ. Vedanti ñāṇaṃ. Tuṭṭhinti yathābhāsitadhammadesanaṃ viditvā ‘‘sādhu ayye, sādhāvuso’’tiādinā abbhanumodanavasappavattaṃ pītisomanassaṃ. Laddhā laddhāti labhitvā labhitvā, punappunaṃ labhitvāti vuttaṃ hoti.
如此从支分方面分析了一切佛语之后,现在欲从法蕴方面分析而说,因此说“如何以法蕴的方式”等。其中,“以法蕴的方式”即是以法聚的方式。“八万二千法蕴我从佛处受持,二千法蕴从比丘处受持”,这是语句的关联。其中,“从佛处受持”意为从正自觉者处领受,即从导师那里获得了八万二千法蕴,多出二千法蕴。“二千从比丘处”意为从比丘处学习了二千法蕴,即从法将等比丘们那里获得。正是依据舍利弗长老等所说的《正见经》等,而说“二千从比丘处”。“八万四千”是将那两者合计,即八万四千法蕴,多出四千法蕴。“我所流传的法”是指我所弘扬、流传、熟练、能背诵、烂熟于心的法,这些法正是八万四千法蕴。然而,有些人将“ye ime”读断,说:“这些由佛世尊和比丘们所流传的法,由他们所说,在这当中,我从佛所受持八万二千法蕴,从比丘所受持二千法蕴,如此一共八万四千法蕴”,他们对此处作了这样的连接解释。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ aṅgavasena sakalampi buddhavacanaṃ vibhajitvā idāni dhammakkhandhavasena vibhajitvā kathetukāmo āha ‘‘kathaṃ dhammakkhandhavasenā’’tiādi. Tattha dhammakkhandhavasenāti dhammarāsivasena. Dvāsīti sahassāni buddhato gaṇhiṃ, dve sahassāni bhikkhuto gaṇhinti sambandho. Tattha buddhato gaṇhinti sammāsambuddhato uggaṇhiṃ, dvesahassādhikāni asīti dhammakkhandhasahassāni satthu santikā adhigaṇhinti attho. Dve sahassāni bhikkhutoti dve dhammakkhandhasahassāni bhikkhuto uggaṇhiṃ, dhammasenāpatiādīnaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ santikā adhigaṇhiṃ. Sāriputtattherādīhi bhāsitānaṃ sammādiṭṭhisuttantādīnaṃ vasena hi ‘‘dve sahassāni bhikkhuto’’ti vuttaṃ. Caturāsīti sahassānīti tadubhayaṃ samodhānetvā catusahassādhikāni asīti sahassāni. Ye me dhammā pavattinoti ye dhammā mama pavattino pavattamānā paguṇā vācuggatā jivhagge parivattanti, te dhammā caturāsīti dhammakkhandhasahassānīti vuttaṃ hoti. Keci pana ‘‘ye ime’’ti padacchedaṃ katvā ‘‘ye ime dhammā buddhassa bhagavato bhikkhūnañca pavattino, tehi pavattitā, tesvāhaṃ dvāsīti sahassāni buddhato gaṇhiṃ, dve sahassāni bhikkhutoti evaṃ caturāsīti dhammakkhandhasahassānī’’ti evamettha sambandhaṃ vadanti.
于此,便有一问:《妙相经》(长部1.444起)和《瞿波迦目犍连经》(中部3.79起)是在世尊般涅槃后由阿难长老所说的,它们是否摄于八万四千法蕴之中?对此,《无碍解道义释》中首先这样说:“应知这是把从比丘处所受持的法蕴也计入自己所说的法蕴之内而说的。”然而,由于弟子们是依于世尊所赋予的教说方式而说法,因此即使是自己所说的法蕴,也将之纳入“从佛处受持”这一说法中而说,此处的这种解释似更合理。正因如此,在第三结集时,由目犍连子帝须长老所说的《论事》也被称作佛说;也正因此,尊者阿难长老在将自己所说的《妙相经》等纳入结集时,也称作“如是我闻”。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca subhasuttaṃ (dī. ni. 1.444 ādayo) gopakamoggallānasuttañca (ma. ni. 3.79 ādayo) parinibbute bhagavati ānandattherena vuttattā caturāsītidhammakkhandhasahassesu antogadhaṃ hoti, na hotīti? Tattha paṭisambhidāgaṇṭhipade tāva idaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘sayaṃ vuttadhammakkhandhānaṃ bhikkhuto gahiteyeva saṅgahetvā evamāhāti daṭṭhabba’’nti. Bhagavatā pana dinnanaye ṭhatvā bhāsitattā sayaṃ vuttadhammakkhandhānampi ‘‘buddhato gaṇhi’’nti ettha saṅgahaṃ katvā vuttanti evamettha vattuṃ yuttataraṃ viya dissati. Bhagavatāyeva hi dinnanaye ṭhatvā sāvakā dhammaṃ desenti. Teneva hi tatiyasaṅgītiyañca moggaliputtatissattherena bhāsitampi kathāvatthuppakaraṇaṃ buddhabhāsitaṃ nāma jātaṃ, tatoyeva ca attanā bhāsitampi subhasuttādi saṅgītiṃ āropentena āyasmatā ānandattherena ‘‘evaṃ me suta’’nti vuttaṃ.
“以如此阐明的法蕴的方式”:当瞿波迦目犍连婆罗门问道:“你以多闻在佛教中著称,导师所说的、你所受持的法,数目有多少?”时,尊者阿难长老回答他,说“八万二千我从佛处受持”等,这便是以此所阐明的法蕴的方式。“单一连贯的经”,比如《念处经》等。因为《念处经》以“比丘们,这是唯一的道路,为了众生的清净……”等为开端,宣说了四念处后,为显示其分别而展开,所以称为“单一连贯”。“多种连贯的”是指具有多种连贯的经,如《般涅槃经》等。因为《般涅槃经》是在多处、以多种法教的方式展开的,所以称为“多种连贯”。在偈颂结集中有问难——显示巴利原文
Evaṃ paridīpitadhammakkhandhavasenāti gopakamoggallānena brāhmaṇena ‘‘tvaṃ bahussutoti buddhasāsane pākaṭo, kittakā dhammā te satthārā bhāsitā, tayā dhāritā’’ti pucchite tassa paṭivacanaṃ dentena āyasmatā ānandattherena evaṃ ‘‘dvāsīti buddhato gaṇhi’’ntiādinā paridīpitadhammakkhandhānaṃ vasena. Ekānusandhikaṃ suttaṃ satipaṭṭhānādi. Satipaṭṭhānasuttañhi ‘‘ekāyano ayaṃ, bhikkhave, maggo sattānaṃ visuddhiyā’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 2.373) cattāro satipaṭṭhāne ārabhitvā tesaṃyeva vibhāgadassanavasena pavattattā ‘‘ekānusandhika’’nti vuccati. Anekānusandhikanti nānānusandhikaṃ parinibbānasuttādi. Parinibbānasuttañhi nānāṭhānesu nānādhammadesanānaṃ vasena pavattattā ‘‘anekānusandhika’’nti vuccati. Gāthābandhesu pañhapucchananti –
应断多少、应舍多少、应修多少更上者?比丘度越多少结缚,方得称为度暴流者?
断五、舍五、更上修五,比丘度越五结缚,即名为度暴流者。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Kati chinde kati jahe, kati cuttari bhāvaye; Kati saṅgātigo bhikkhu, ‘oghatiṇṇo’ti vuccatī’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 1.5) –
如此展开的问难,即是一个法蕴,这便是其含义。显示巴利原文
Evamādinayappavattaṃ pañhapucchanaṃ eko dhammakkhandhoti attho.
应知三法二法的分析,是依《安置品》与《义释品》的方式进行。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Pañca chinde pañca jahe, pañca cuttari bhāvaye; Pañca saṅgātigo bhikkhu, ‘oghatiṇṇo’ti vuccatī’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 1.5) –
是故,于诸如‘善法、不善法、无记法,与乐受相应之法,与苦受相应之法,与不苦不乐受相应之法’等三法中,为分析善三法而于《安置品》(法集985-987)中所说者——显示巴利原文
Evamādinayappavattaṃ visajjananti veditabbaṃ. Tikadukabhājanaṃ nikkhepakaṇḍaaṭṭhakathākaṇḍavasena veditabbaṃ. Tasmā ‘‘kusalā dhammā, akusalā dhammā, abyākatā dhammā, sukhāya vedanāya sampayuttā dhammā, dukkhāya vedanāya sampayuttā dhammā, adukkhamasukhāya vedanāya sampayuttā dhammā’’ti evamādīsu tikesu kusalattikassa vibhajanavasena yaṃ vuttaṃ nikkhepakaṇḍe (dha. sa. 985-987) –
哪些法是善?即三善根——无贪、无嗔、无痴;与此相应的受蕴、想蕴、行蕴、识蕴;以及由此生起的身业、语业、意业。这些法为善。显示巴利原文
‘‘Katame dhammā kusalā? Tīṇi kusalamūlāni alobho adoso amoho, taṃsampayutto vedanākkhandho saññākkhandho saṅkhārakkhandho viññāṇakkhandho, taṃsamuṭṭhānaṃ kāyakammaṃ vacīkammaṃ manokammaṃ. Ime dhammā kusalā.
哪些法是不善?即三不善根——贪、嗔、痴;与它们俱起的诸烦恼;与此相应的受蕴……乃至……意业。这些法为不善。显示巴利原文
‘‘Katame dhammā akusalā? Tīṇi akusalamūlāni lobho doso moho, tadekaṭṭhā ca kilesā, taṃsampayutto vedanākkhandho…pe… manokammaṃ. Ime dhammā akusalā.
哪些法是无记?善法与不善法的异熟——属于欲界、色界、无色界、出世间界的受蕴……乃至……识蕴;那些唯作、既非善亦非不善、且非业异熟的法;以及一切色法和无为界。这些法为无记。显示巴利原文
‘‘Katame dhammā abyākatā? Kusalākusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ vipākā kāmāvacarā rūpāvacarā arūpāvacarā apariyāpannā vedanākkhandho …pe… viññāṇakkhandho, ye ca dhammā kiriyā neva kusalā nākusalā na ca kammavipākā sabbañca rūpaṃ asaṅkhatā ca dhātu. Ime dhammā abyākatā’’ti –
这是一个法蕴。同样地,应知其余每一三法组的分别解说,也各是一个法蕴。显示巴利原文
Ayameko dhammakkhandho. Evaṃ sesattikānampi ekekassa tikassa vibhajanaṃ ekeko dhammakkhandhoti veditabbaṃ.
同样地,在“因法”等诸二法组中,依每一二法组的分别解说而说:显示巴利原文
Tathā ‘‘hetū dhammā’’ti evamādikesu dukesu ekekassa dukassa vibhajanavasena yaṃ vuttaṃ –
“哪些法是因?三种善因、三种不善因、三种无记因。”(《法集论》1059)显示巴利原文
‘‘Katame dhammā hetū? Tayo kusalā hetū, tayo akusalā hetū, tayo abyākatā hetū’’ti (dha. sa. 1059) –
等。于此,每一二法组的分别解说亦各为一个法蕴。又在注释部分(《法集论》1384-1386)中:显示巴利原文
Ādi, tatthāpi ekekassa dukassa vibhajanaṃ ekeko dhammakkhandho. Puna aṭṭhakathākaṇḍe (dha. sa. 1384-1386) –
哪些法是善?四地所摄的善。这些法是善。哪些法是不善?十二种不善心。这些法是不善。哪些法是无记?四地中的异熟、三地中的唯作无记,以及色法和涅槃——这些法是无记。显示巴利原文
‘‘Katame dhammā kusalā? Catūsu bhūmīsu kusalaṃ. Ime dhammā kusalā. Katame dhammā akusalā? Dvādasa akusalacittuppādā. Ime dhammā akusalā. Katame dhammā abyākatā? Catūsu bhūmīsu vipāko tīsu bhūmīsu kiriyābyākataṃ rūpañca nibbānañca. Ime dhammā abyākatā’’ti –
如此,依善等三法组等的分别解说而展开的诸三法分别中,每一三法组的分别各为一个法蕴。同样地:显示巴利原文
Evamādinā kusalattikādivibhajanavasena pavattesu tikabhājanesu ekekassa tikassa bhājanaṃ ekeko dhammakkhandho. Tathā –
“哪些法是因?三种善因、三种不善因、三种无记因。”(《法集论》1441)显示巴利原文
‘‘Katame dhammā hetū? Tayo kusalā hetū, tayo akusalā hetū, tayo abyākatā hetū’’ti (dha. sa. 1441) –
如此,在以类推方式展开的二法分别中,每一二法分别即是一法蕴。因此,于此应知,依三法分别与二法分别而作的法蕴分类。显示巴利原文
Ādinayappavattesu dukabhājanesu ekamekaṃ dukabhājanaṃ ekeko dhammakkhandhoti evamettha tikadukabhājanavasena dhammakkhandhavibhāgo veditabbo.
又,每一心路分别,于此:显示巴利原文
Ekamekañca cittavārabhājananti ettha pana –
当欲界善心生起时,伴有喜、与智相应、以色为所缘……乃至……那时有触……乃至……有不散乱。(《法集论》1)显示巴利原文
‘‘Yasmiṃ samaye kāmāvacaraṃ kusalaṃ cittaṃ uppannaṃ hoti somanassasahagataṃ ñāṇasampayuttaṃ rūpārammaṇaṃ vā…pe… tasmiṃ samaye phasso hoti…pe… avikkhepo hotī’’ti (dha. sa. 1) –
依如是等理路次第展开的《心生起品》中,每一种心的分别当知各为一个法蕴。此处“一个法蕴”,因前已说“每一三法、二法分别,每一心路分别”,故应知其意为“各各为一法蕴”。即使不说“各各”,此义在道理上也自然明了,因而说为“一个法蕴”。在“有事物”等之中,“事物”即指善施品等。“总纲”即“凡比丘已具足比丘之学与活命”等(《经分别》44),是于一一违犯中所制定的学处。“句分别”即就各学处,以“凡者,即无论何种”等(《经分别》45)而展开的分别解说。“中间罪”即“接受后举起,犯恶作”等(《波逸提》355),如此在诸学处之间所制定的罪。“无罪”即“无知者、不认可者、疯狂者、心散乱者、受痛苦者、最初犯者无罪”等所开示的类别。又如“超过十日,有超过想者,舍堕波逸提;超过十日,有疑者,舍堕波逸提;超过十日,有未超过想者,舍堕波逸提”(《经分别》468)等,像这样展开的三分波逸提、三分恶作等分类,即称为三分判别。显示巴利原文
Evamādinayappavatte cittuppādakaṇḍe ekamekaṃ cittavārabhājanaṃ ekeko dhammakkhandhoti gahetabbaṃ. Eko dhammakkhandhoti ettha ‘‘ekekatikadukabhājanaṃ ekamekaṃ cittavārabhājana’’nti vuttattā ekeko dhammakkhandhoti attho veditabbo. ‘‘Ekeko’’ti avuttepi hi ayamattho atthato viññāyamānova hotīti ‘‘eko dhammakkhandho’’ti vuttaṃ. Atthi vatthūtiādīsu vatthu nāma sudinnakaṇḍādi . Mātikāti ‘‘yo pana bhikkhu bhikkhūnaṃ sikkhāsājīvasamāpanno’’tiādinā (pārā. 44) tasmiṃ tasmiṃ ajjhācāre paññattasikkhāpadaṃ. Padabhājanīyanti tassa tassa sikkhāpadassa ‘‘yo panāti yo yādiso’’tiādinayappavattaṃ (pārā. 45) vibhajanaṃ. Antarāpattīti ‘‘paṭilātaṃ ukkhipati, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (pāci. 355) evamādinā sikkhāpadantaresu paññattā āpatti. Anāpattīti ‘‘anāpatti ajānantassa asādiyantassa ummattakassa khittacittassa vedanāṭṭassa ādikammikassā’’tiādinayappavatto kacchedoti ‘‘dasāhātikkante atikkantasaññī nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ, dasāhātikkante vematiko nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ, dasāhātikkante anatikkantasaññī nissaggiyaṃ pācittiya’’nti (pārā. 468) evamādinayappavatto tikapācittiyatikadukkaṭādibhedo tikaparicchedo.
今为说明:如此,在由大迦叶尊者为首的圣众,以众多神变瑞相所庄严的结集中,将此藏经确定为律、确定为中等所说的佛语等——即以“此是法,此是律……乃至……此八万四千法蕴”等,从无差别、一味、力用等方面,将佛陀教语依法律等差别确定后而结集。并非仅仅依上述分类确定后便行结集,还有其他,为了显示这一点而说“并非仅将此”等。其中,摄颂是结集法的长老们,为显示对第一波罗夷等中所说因缘、事例等的要略摄集而说:显示巴利原文
Idāni evametaṃ abhedato rasavasena ekavidhantiādinā ‘‘ayaṃ dhammo, ayaṃ vinayo…pe… imāni caturāsīti dhammakkhandhasahassānī’’ti buddhavacanaṃ dhammavinayādibhedena vavatthapetvā saṅgāyantena mahākassapapamukhena vasīgaṇena anekacchariyapātubhāvapaṭimaṇḍitāya saṅgītiyā imassa piṭakassa vinayabhāvo majjhimabuddhavacanādibhāvo ca vavatthāpitoti dasseti. Na kevalaṃ imamevimassa yathāvuttappabhedaṃ vavatthapetvā saṅgītaṃ, atha kho aññampīti dassento āha ‘‘na kevalañca imamevā’’tiādi. Tattha uddānasaṅgaho paṭhamapārājikādīsu āgatānaṃ vinītavatthuādīnaṃ saṅkhepato saṅgahadassanavasena dhammasaṅgāhakehi kathitā –
猕猴、跋耆子、在家者、裸体外道、
童女、优婆罗色,以及依特征而别的二者。”(《经分别》66)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Makkaṭī vajjiputtā ca, gihī naggo ca titthiyā; Dārikuppalavaṇṇā ca, byañjanehipare duve’’ti. (pārā. 66) –
初偈颂等。依戒蕴品、根本法门品等而作的结集,称为品结集。依上人法重颂、青莲重颂等之确立而作的结集,称为重颂结集。在增支部等中,依一集等而作的结集,称为集结集。在相应部中,依天相应等而作的结集,称为相应结集。在中部等中,依根本五十经等而作的结集,称为五十经结集。显示巴利原文
Ādikā gāthāyo. Sīlakkhandhavaggamūlapariyāyavaggādivasena saṅgaho vaggasaṅgaho. Uttarimanussadhammapeyyālanīlacakkapeyyālādivavatthāpanavasena peyyālasaṅgaho. Aṅguttaranikāyādīsu ekakanipātādisaṅgaho. Saṃyuttanikāye devatāsaṃyuttādivasena saṃyuttasaṅgaho. Majjhimanikāyādīsu mūlapaṇṇāsakādivasena paṇṇāsakasaṅgaho.
正如在佛陀教法的结集终了时,大众给予赞叹之声,这是关联。震动:即向上而行,剧烈震动。遍震动:即上下而行,遍震动。遍颤栗:即向四方而行,剧烈颤栗。适合弹指者,即种种神变,如花雨、举衣等。所谓第一大会结集,即由法之结集者大迦叶尊者等五百位比丘所完成的结集。因为集会有五百人,故称“五百结集”;又因是由长老们所举行,由大迦叶等长老主导,世间尊称为“长老结集”,这就是第一大会结集。这是关联。显示巴利原文
Assa buddhavacanassa saṅgītipariyosāne sādhukāraṃ dadamānā viyāti sambandho. Saṅkampīti uddhaṃ uddhaṃ gacchantī suṭṭhu kampi. Sampakampīti uddhaṃ adho ca gacchantī sampakampi. Sampavedhīti catūsu disāsu gacchantī suṭṭhu pavedhi. Accharaṃ paharituṃ yuttāni acchariyāni, pupphavassacelukkhepādīni . Yā paṭhamamahāsaṅgīti dhammasaṅgāhakehi mahākassapādīhi pañcahi satehi yena katā saṅgītā, tena pañcasatāni etissā atthīti ‘‘pañcasatā’’ti ca, thereheva katattā therā mahākassapādayo etissā atthīti ‘‘therikā’’ti ca loke vuccati, ayaṃ paṭhamamahāsaṅgīti nāmāti sambandho.
开示了第一次大结集之后,为了以结语说明其在此昭示的目的,而说“imissā”等语。由具寿优波离长老所说的“tena samayenā”等下文所述的一切,皆为因缘序言。然而,在此讲述法与律的结集时,为何要说因缘序言呢?难道不是只应结集世尊所说的话吗?答曰:为了使教法得以安立、不忘失、令人信受。因为,藉由时间、地点、说法者、听众等因缘条件所安立的教法,才能久住世间、不忘失且令人信受,正如世间判决需依地点、时间、当事人、事由、证据等条件方可成立。正是因此,具寿大迦叶以“贤友优波离,第一波罗夷在何处制立”等语询问地点等,而具寿优波离长老在作答时,便以“tena samayenā”等语讲述了第一波罗夷的因缘。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ paṭhamamahāsaṅgītiṃ dassetvā yadatthaṃ sā idha nidassitā, taṃ nigamanavasena dassento ‘‘imissā’’tiādimāha. Āyasmatā upālittherena vuttanti ‘‘tena samayenā’’tiādi vakkhamānaṃ sabbaṃ nidānavacanaṃ vuttaṃ. Kimatthaṃ panettha dhammavinayasaṅgahe kathiyamāne nidānavacanaṃ vuttaṃ, nanu ca bhagavatā bhāsitavacanasseva saṅgaho kātabboti? Vuccate – desanāya ṭhitiasammosasaddhaeyyabhāvasampādanatthaṃ. Kāladesadesakaparisāpadesehi upanibandhitvā ṭhapitā hi desanā ciraṭṭhitikā hoti asammosadhammā saddheyyā ca, desakālakattuhetunimittehi upanibandho viya vohāravinicchayo. Teneva ca āyasmatā mahākassapena ‘‘paṭhamapārājikaṃ āvuso, upāli, kattha paññatta’’ntiādinā desādipucchāsu katāsu tāsaṃ visajjanaṃ karontena āyasmatā upālittherena ‘‘tena samayenā’’tiādinā paṭhamapārājikassa nidānaṃ bhāsitaṃ.
再者,说因缘序言是为了彰显教法的圆满成就。因为,世尊的一切行为皆为智与悲所摄持,既无无意义的举动,亦非为了自利。因此,正自觉者的一切身语意业,纯为利他而发起。当如实宣说时,它便依现世利益、来世利益与究竟义,随宜成为对众生的教诫。这才是“教法”,而非诗词创作。而这部由导师善巧构筑的教法,在各处都通过因缘序言,连同时间、地点、说法者、听众等条件,被恰当地阐明。显示巴利原文
Apica sāsanasampattipakāsanatthaṃ nidānavacanaṃ. Ñāṇakaruṇāpariggahitasabbakiriyassa hi bhagavato natthi niratthakā paṭipatti attahitatthā vā, tasmā paresaṃyevatthāya pavattasabbakiriyassa sammāsambuddhassa sakalampi kāyavacīmanokammaṃ yathāpavattaṃ vuccamānaṃ diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaparamatthehi yathārahaṃ sattānaṃ anusāsanaṭṭhena sāsanaṃ, na kabbaracanā. Tayidaṃ satthuracitaṃ kāladesadesakaparisāpadesehi saddhiṃ tattha tattha nidānavacanehi yathārahaṃ pakāsīyati.
再者,之所以陈述因缘序言,是为了通过彰显导师的权威性,来显示教法的权威性。应知,这种权威性的显示,正是由“佛陀、世尊”这两个词来阐明的。因为,以“佛陀”一词,开显了如来所具有的、不与一切世间所共通的极清净智慧等殊胜功德;以“世尊”一词,则开显了如来断除贪、嗔、痴等一切烦恼垢秽与恶行等过失,并由此彰显其于一切众生中最上殊胜的地位。此义由此得以全面开显。以上是对此处因缘序言作用之要义的简略说明。显示巴利原文
Apica satthuno pamāṇabhāvappakāsanena sāsanassa pamāṇabhāvadassanatthaṃ nidānavacanaṃ, tañcassa pamāṇabhāvadassanaṃ ‘‘buddho bhagavā’’ti iminā padadvayena vibhāvitanti veditabbaṃ. Buddhoti hi iminā tathāgatassa anaññasādhāraṇasuparisuddhañāṇādiguṇavisesayogaparidīpanena, bhagavāti ca iminā rāgadosamohādisabbakilesamaladuccaritādidosappahānadīpanena, tato eva ca sabbasattuttamabhāvadīpanena ayamattho sabbathā pakāsito hotīti idamettha nidānavacanappayojanassa mukhamattanidassanaṃ.
其中,“此即师师相承”的意思是:在赡部洲洲,这是诸师相承的传统与次第。所谓“优波离、达萨卡”等,优波离长老自然是众所周知的,而达萨卡长老等人则应如此了知:据说,在毘舍离,有一位名叫达萨卡的婆罗门青年,作为三百名弟子的上首弟子,在老师跟前学习技艺。他年仅十六岁,便通晓了三吠陀。一日,他带领弟子,前往住在婆利迦园结集了法与律的具寿优波离长老处,就自己所学吠陀中的一切疑难向长老请教。长老一一解答后,自己也问了一个问题。长老针对他的名而问道:“青年,有一法贯穿于一切法中;青年,一切法亦归入于一法中。青年,那是哪一法呢?”那位青年不解问题的含义,便说:“诸位尊者,这些出家人说的是什么呀?”旁人回答:“青年,这是佛陀的教言。”青年又问:“诸位尊者,这也能传授给我吗?”答道:“可以的,青年。你若能接受我们所受的出家,便可以传授给你。”青年说:“太好了,诸位尊者。”他答应后,征得父母和老师的许可,便与三百名弟子一起在长老跟前出家。年满二十岁后,他受了具足戒,证得了阿罗汉果。长老便以他为上首,为千位漏尽者开示佛陀的教言。显示巴利原文
Tatrāyaṃ ācariyaparamparāti tasmiṃ jambudīpe ayaṃ ācariyānaṃ paramparā paveṇī paṭipāṭi. Upāli dāsakotiādīsu upālitthero pākaṭoyeva, dāsakattherādayo pana evaṃ veditabbā . Vesāliyaṃ kira eko dāsako nāma brāhmaṇamāṇavo tiṇṇaṃ antevāsikasatānaṃ jeṭṭhantevāsiko hutvā ācariyassa santike sippaṃ uggaṇhanto dvādasavassikoyeva tiṇṇaṃ vedānaṃ pāragū ahosi. So ekadivasaṃ antevāsikaparivuto dhammavinayaṃ saṅgāyitvā vālikārāme nivasantaṃ āyasmantaṃ upālittheraṃ upasaṅkamitvā attano vedesu sabbāni gaṇṭhiṭṭhānāni theraṃ pucchi. Theropi sabbaṃ byākaritvā sayampi ekaṃ pañhaṃ pucchanto nāmaṃ sandhāya imaṃ pañhaṃ pucchi ‘‘ekadhammo kho, māṇava, sabbesu dhammesu anupatati, sabbepi, māṇava, dhammā ekadhammasmiṃ osaranti, katamo nu kho so, māṇavaka, dhammo’’ti. Sopi kho māṇavo pañhassa atthaṃ ajānanto ‘‘kimidaṃ bho pabbajitā’’ti āha. Buddhamantoyaṃ māṇavāti. Sakkā panāyaṃ bho mayhampi dātunti. Sakkā, māṇava, amhehi gahitapabbajjaṃ gaṇhantassa dātunti. ‘‘Sādhu kho bho pabbajitā’’ti māṇavo sampaṭicchitvā attano mātaraṃ pitaraṃ ācariyañca anujānāpetvā tīhi antevāsikasatehi saddhiṃ therassa santike pabbajitvā paripuṇṇavīsativasso upasampadaṃ labhitvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇi. Thero taṃ dhuraṃ katvā khīṇāsavasahassassa piṭakattayaṃ vācesi.
索纳卡则是达萨卡长老的共住弟子。据说,他是迦尸国一位商人的儿子,年方十五岁时,有一次随父母经商前往王舍城。在那里,他与五十五位青年一同前往竹林精舍,见到达萨卡长老及其眷属后,生起极大净信,便乞求出家。长老让他先征得父母同意。他说:“你去出家吧。”他便去父母那里禀明此事,父母起初不肯,他便绝食,最终令父母许可。于是,他与那五十五位青年一起在长老跟前出家,受了具足戒后,证得了阿罗汉果。长老将全部佛陀教言教授于他。后来,他也成为众人之首,为许多人教授法与律。显示巴利原文
Soṇako pana dāsakattherassa saddhivihāriko. So kira kāsīsu ekassa vāṇijakassa putto hutvā pañcadasavassuddesiko ekaṃ samayaṃ mātāpitūhi saddhiṃ vāṇijjāya giribbajaṃ gato. Tato pañcapaññāsadārakehi saddhiṃ veḷuvanaṃ gantvā tattha dāsakattheraṃ saparisaṃ disvā ativiya pasanno pabbajjaṃ yācitvā therena mātāpitaro anujānāpetvā ‘‘pabbajāhī’’ti vutto mātāpitusantikaṃ gantvā tamatthaṃ ārocetvā tesu anicchantesu chinnabhatto hutvā mātāpitaro anujānāpetvā pañcapaññāsāya dārakehi saddhiṃ therassa santike pabbajitvā laddhūpasampado arahattaṃ pāpuṇi. Taṃ thero sakalaṃ buddhavacanaṃ uggaṇhāpesi. Sopi gaṇapāmokkho hutvā bahūnaṃ dhammavinayaṃ vācesi.
西伽婆长老是索纳长老的共住弟子。据说,他本是华氏城大臣之子,名叫西伽婆,住在适合三季的三座宫殿中享受荣华。某一天,他带着同伴长者之子旃陀跋耆族及随从们,一同前往鸡园。在那里,他见索纳长老入灭尽定而坐,便顶礼长老,但长老并未与他说话。他回去向比丘僧团询问此事,比丘们告诉他:“入定者是不说话的。”他又问:“尊者,他们如何出定?”比丘们告诉他:“或因佛陀的召唤、或因僧团的召唤、或因预定的时限、或因寿尽,而从定中出起。”比丘们观察到他和随从们的善根因缘后,便请求僧团,令索纳长老从灭尽定中出起。西伽婆见到索纳长老后,问道:“尊者,您为何不与我说话?”长老回答:“年轻人,我们刚才在享用可享用之物。”他问:“尊者,我们也能享用那个吗?”长老说:“年轻人,若成为像我这样的人,便能享用。”他向父母禀告此事,得到允许后,便与同伴旃陀跋耆族以及那五百位男子,一同在索纳长老座下出家并受具足戒。在那里,西伽婆和旃陀跋耆族两位,便在各自的戒师座下学习法与律。显示巴利原文
Siggavatthero pana soṇakattherassa saddhivihāriko ahosi. So kira pāṭaliputte siggavo nāma amaccaputto hutvā tiṇṇaṃ utūnaṃ anucchavikesu tīsu pāsādesu sampattiṃ anubhavamāno ekadivasaṃ attano sahāyena caṇḍavajjinā seṭṭhiputtena saddhiṃ saparivāro kukkuṭārāmaṃ gantvā tattha soṇakattheraṃ nirodhasamāpattiṃ samāpajjitvā nisinnaṃ disvā vanditvā attanā saddhiṃ anālapantaṃ ñatvā gantvā taṃ kāraṇaṃ bhikkhusaṅghaṃ pucchitvā bhikkhūhi ‘‘samāpattiṃ samāpannā nālapantī’’ti vutto ‘‘kathaṃ, bhante, samāpattito vuṭṭhahantī’’ti puna pucchitvā tehi ca bhikkhūhi ‘‘satthuno ceva saṅghassa ca pakkosanāya yathāparicchinnakālato āyusaṅkhayā ca vuṭṭhahantī’’ti vatvā tassa saparivārassa upanissayaṃ disvā saṅghassa vacanena nirodhā vuṭṭhāpitaṃ soṇakattheraṃ disvā ‘‘kasmā, bhante, mayā saddhiṃ nālapitthā’’ti pucchitvā therena ‘‘bhuñjitabbakaṃ kumāra bhuñjimhā’’ti vutte ‘‘sakkā nu kho, bhante, amhehipi taṃ bhojetu’’nti pucchitvā ‘‘sakkā, kumāra, amhādise katvā bhojetu’’nti vutte tamatthaṃ mātāpitūnaṃ ārocetvā tehi anuññāto attano sahāyena caṇḍavajjinā tehi ca pañcahi purisasatehi saddhiṃ soṇakattherassa santike pabbajitvā upasampanno ahosi. Tattha siggavo ca caṇḍavajjī ca dve upajjhāyasseva santike dhammavinayaṃ pariyāpuṇitvā aparabhāge chaḷabhiññā ahesuṃ.
而帝须·目犍连子的次第传记,将在后文阐明。“Vijitāvī”意谓:因已战胜一切烦恼之敌对,故为已胜者。“Paramparāya”意谓:依次第、循序渐进。“Jambusirivhaye”意谓:名为阎浮树者,即称为阎浮;因为此岛以一株大阎浮树为显著标志,故岛亦名阎浮。“Acchijjamānaṃ avinassamānaṃ katvā”意谓:使其不被切断、不被毁灭。显示巴利原文
Tissassa pana moggaliputtassa anupubbakathā parato āvi bhavissati. Vijitāvinoti vijitasabbakilesapaṭipakkhattā vijitavanto. Paramparāyāti paṭipāṭiyā, anukkamenāti vuttaṃ hoti. Jambusirivhayeti jambusadisanāme, jambunāmaketi vuttaṃ hoti. Mahantena hi jamburukkhena abhilakkhitattā dīpopi ‘‘jambū’’ti vuccati. Acchijjamānaṃ avinassamānaṃ katvā.
“Vinayavaṃsa”等三个词是同义词,所指正是律藏本身。“Pakataññu”意谓:熟练、善巧。“Dhuraggāho ahosi”意谓:成为精勤的承担者,即成为一切人之首而执持。“Bhikkhusamudāyo”意谓:比丘的集合、团体,也就是沙门众。显示巴利原文
Vinayavaṃsantiādīhi tīhi vinayapāḷiyeva kathitā pariyāyavacanattā. Pakataññutanti veyyattiyaṃ, paṭubhāvanti vuttaṃ hoti. Dhuraggāho ahosīti padhānaggāhī ahosi, sabbesaṃ pāmokkho hutvā gaṇhīti vuttaṃ hoti. Bhikkhūnaṃ samudāyo samūho bhikkhusamudāyo, samaṇagaṇoti attho.
第二结集故事解释显示巴利原文
Dutiyasaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā
“Yadā nibbāyiṃsū”是关联词。“Jotayitvā ca sabbadhī”指将那正法普照于一切处。“Jutimanto”因诗律关系而作“jutīmanto”,意指具足智慧光明者,或具威德者,即大威力者。“Nibbāyiṃsū”指以无余涅槃界般涅槃。“Anālayā”指已断一切烦恼,故于任何处皆无爱着之贪,即离欲者。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yadā nibbāyiṃsū’’ti sambandho. Jotayitvā ca sabbadhīti tameva saddhammaṃ sabbattha pakāsayitvā. ‘‘Jutimanto’’ti vattabbe gāthābandhavasena ‘‘jutīmanto’’ti vuttaṃ, paññājotisampannāti attho, tejavantoti vā, mahānubhāvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Nibbāyiṃsūti anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbāyiṃsu. Pahīnasabbakilesattā natthi etesaṃ katthaci ālayo taṇhāti anālayā, vītarāgāti vuttaṃ hoti.
“Vassasataparinibbute bhagavatīti”:世尊般涅槃已过百年,即世尊入般涅槃后百年。“Vesālikāti”:毗舍离城的居民。“Vajjiputtakāti”:跋耆国毗舍离城的族姓子。“Kappati siṅgīloṇakappoti”:允许用角器携带盐,需要时取出与无盐的团食同食,此不视为储食。“Kappati dvaṅgulakappoti”:允许在日影超过两指宽时非时进食。“Kappati gāmantarakappoti”:已受请食、食毕,若称“我将往他村”,则允许再食非残食。“Kappati āvāsakappoti”:允许在同一界内、不同住处分别举行布萨等僧团羯磨。“Kappati anumatikappoti”:允许在比丘缺席时,先由别众僧团作羯磨,事后取得他们的同意,此不构成别众羯磨。“Kappati āciṇṇakappoti”:允许遵循戒师、依止师所行持的惯例。但须知,有些惯例是显示巴利原文
Vassasataparinibbute bhagavatīti vassasataṃ parinibbutassa assāti vassasataparinibbuto, bhagavā, tasmiṃ parinibbānato vassasate atikkanteti vuttaṃ hoti. Vesālikāti vesālīnivāsino. Vajjiputtakāti vajjiraṭṭhe vesāliyaṃ kulānaṃ puttā. Kappati siṅgīloṇakappoti siṅgena loṇaṃ pariharitvā pariharitvā aloṇakapiṇḍapātena saddhiṃ bhuñjituṃ kappati, na sannidhiṃ karotīti adhippāyo. Kappati dvaṅgulakappoti dvaṅgulaṃ atikkantāya chāyāya vikāle bhojanaṃ bhuñjituṃ kappatīti attho. Kappati gāmantarakappoti ‘‘gāmantaraṃ gamissāmī’’ti pavāritena anatirittabhojanaṃ bhuñjituṃ kappatīti attho. Kappati āvāsakappoti ekasīmāyaṃ nānāsenāsanesu visuṃ visuṃ uposathādīni saṅghakammāni kātuṃ vaṭṭatīti attho. Kappati anumatikappoti ‘‘anāgatānaṃ āgatakāle anumatiṃ gahessāmī’’ti tesu anāgatesuyeva vaggena saṅghena kammaṃ katvā pacchā anumatiṃ gahetuṃ kappati, vaggakammaṃ na hotīti adhippāyo. Kappati āciṇṇakappoti ācariyupajjhāyehi āciṇṇo kappatīti attho. So pana ekacco kappati dhammiko, ekacco na kappati adhammikoti veditabbo. Kappati amathitakappoti yaṃ khīraṃ khīrabhāvaṃ vijahitaṃ dadhibhāvaṃ asampattaṃ, taṃ bhuttāvinā pavāritena anatirittaṃ bhuñjituṃ kappatīti attho. Kappati jalogiṃ pātunti ettha jalogīti taruṇasurā. Yaṃ majjasambhāraṃ ekato kataṃ majjabhāvamasampattaṃ, taṃ pātuṃ vaṭṭatīti adhippāyo. Jātarūparajatanti sarasato vikāraṃ anāpajjitvā sabbadā jātaṃ rūpameva hotīti jātaṃ rūpametassāti jātarūpaṃ, suvaṇṇaṃ. Dhavalasabhāvatāya rājatīti rajataṃ, rūpiyaṃ. Susunāgaputtoti susunāgassa putto.
“Kākaṇḍakaputtoti”:迦干陀迦婆罗门之子。“Vajjīsūti”因是地域名称,故用复数。单一地区亦可依习惯以复数称之。“Yena vesālī, tadavasarīti”:他朝着毗舍离的方向而去,或抵达了毗舍离所在之处。“Mahāvane kūṭāgārasālāyanti”此处:“大林”指有边界的、自然生长或人工种植的大森林。而迦毗罗卫城附近的大林,则是与喜马拉雅山相连、无有边界、一直延伸至大海的森林;然此处的大林并非如此,而是指有边界的大森林。“重阁讲堂”则建于依大林而建的寺院中,是一座重阁,其顶作鹅颈状覆盖,呈鹅卵圆形。显示巴利原文
Kākaṇḍakaputtoti kākaṇḍakabrāhmaṇassa putto. Vajjīsūti janapadavacanattā bahuvacanaṃ kataṃ. Ekopi hi janapado ruḷhīsaddattā bahuvacanena vuccati. Yena vesālī, tadavasarīti yena disābhāgena vesālī avasaritabbā, yasmiṃ vā padese vesālī, tadavasari, taṃ pattoti attho. Mahāvane kūṭāgārasālāyanti ettha mahāvanaṃ nāma sayaṃjātamaropimaṃ saparicchedaṃ mahantaṃ vanaṃ. Kapilavatthusāmantā pana mahāvanaṃ himavantena saha ekābaddhaṃ aparicchedaṃ hutvā mahāsamuddaṃ āhacca ṭhitaṃ, idaṃ tādisaṃ na hotīti saparicchedaṃ mahantaṃ vananti mahāvanaṃ. Kūṭāgārasālā pana mahāvanaṃ nissāya kate ārāme kūṭāgāraṃ anto katvā haṃsavaṭṭakacchannena haṃsamaṇḍalākārena katā.
“Tadahuposathe”在此处:“tadahū”意为在那天、在那日。“uposatho”指人们于此受持(upavasanti)的日子,即应受持斋戒的日子。而“upavasantī”意为:或以戒律,或以完全断食之不食,或仅饮用牛乳、蜂蜜等少量之食,如此亲近(upetā)而住。然而,这个日子有三种,即初八、十四、十五日。在某些地方,“uposatha”一词也用于指巴帝摩卡、戒律、斋戒乃至假名。例如,在“来吧,迦宾那贤友,我们去参加布萨吧”等语句中,它指巴帝摩卡诵。在“维沙卡,如此具足八支的布萨已被受持”等语句中,它指戒律。在“纯净者确实常有树皮汁,纯净者常有布萨”等语句中,它指斋戒。在“名为布萨的龙王”等语句中,它指假名。其中,因应亲近而住,巴帝摩卡诵称为布萨;因应具足亲近而住,或应安住于相续,戒律称为布萨;因亲近断食等节制而住,斋戒称为布萨;对于那样的象、马等特殊之物,仅依名称而称为布萨,这是假名。但在此处,如同“诸比丘,不应在布萨日有比丘共住的住处”等语句一样,它意指布萨日。显示巴利原文
Tadahuposatheti ettha tadahūti tasmiṃ ahani, tasmiṃ divaseti attho. Upavasanti etthāti uposatho, upavasitabbadivaso. Upavasantīti ca sīlena vā sabbaso āhārassa ca abhuñjanasaṅkhātena anasanena vā khīrapānamadhupānādimattena vā upetā hutvā vasantīti attho. So panesa divaso aṭṭhamīcātuddasīpannarasībhedena tividho. Katthaci pana pātimokkhepi sīlepi upavāsepi paññattiyampi uposathasaddo āgato. Tathā hesa ‘‘āyāmāvuso kappina, uposathaṃ gamissāmā’’tiādīsu pātimokkhuddese āgato. ‘‘Evaṃ aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgato kho visākhe uposatho upavuttho’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 8.43) sīle. ‘‘Suddhassa ve sadā pheggu, suddhassuposatho sadā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.79) upavāse. ‘‘Uposatho nāma nāgarājā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.246; ma. ni. 3.258) paññattiyañca āgato. Tattha upecca vasitabbato uposatho pātimokkhuddeso. Upetena samannāgatena hutvā vasitabbato santāne vāsetabbato uposatho sīlaṃ. Asanādisaṃyamādiṃ vā upecca vasantīti uposatho upavāso. Tathārūpe hatthiassavisese uposathoti samaññāmattato uposatho paññatti. Idha pana ‘‘na, bhikkhave, tadahuposathe sabhikkhukā āvāsā’’tiādīsu (mahāva. 181) viya uposathadivaso adhippeto, tasmā tadahuposatheti tasmiṃ uposathadivaseti attho. Kaṃsapātinti suvaṇṇapātiṃ. Kahāpaṇampītiādīsu kahāpaṇassa samabhāgo aḍḍho. Pādo catutthabhāgo. Māsakoyeva māsakarūpaṃ. Sabbaṃ tāva vattabbanti iminā sattasatikakkhandhake (cūḷava. 446 ādayo) āgatā sabbāpi pāḷi idha ānetvā vattabbāti dasseti. Sā kuto vattabbāti āha ‘‘yāva imāya pana vinayasaṅgītiyā’’tiādi. Saṅgāyitasadisameva saṅgāyiṃsūti sambandho.
“Pubbe kataṃ upādāya”意为依先前所作,即依第一次结集。与此关联的是:这个结集。“tesu”指那些结集长老中。“vissutā”意为以众中之首的身份而闻名,于一切处所周知。在那次集会中,有八位众中之首的大长老,其中瓦萨巴伽弥和须摩那两位长老是阿那律长老的共住弟子,其余六位是阿难长老的弟子。而且,这八位大长老都曾见过世尊。现在,为了具体表明那些长老,说:“一切欲者”等。“Sāṇasambhūto”指住在麻衣国的桑菩塔长老。与此关联的是:第二次结集。“pannabhārā”意为已卸下重担。因为经中说:“实然,五取蕴是重担。”“katakiccā”意为已作所作,因为对于四圣谛,依四道所应作的十六种事——遍知、断、证、修——已究竟完成。显示巴利原文
Pubbe kataṃ upādāyāti pubbe kataṃ paṭhamasaṅgītimupādāya. Sā panāyaṃ saṅgītīti sambandho. Tesūti tesu saṅgītikārakesu theresu. Vissutāti gaṇapāmokkhatāya vissutā sabbattha pākaṭā. Tasmiñhi sannipāte aṭṭheva gaṇapāmokkhā mahātherā ahesuṃ, tesu ca vāsabhagāmī sumanoti dve therā anuruddhattherassa saddhivihārikā, avasesā cha ānandattherassa. Ete pana sabbepi aṭṭha mahātherā bhagavantaṃ diṭṭhapubbā. Idāni te there sarūpato dassento āha ‘‘sabbakāmī cā’’tiādi. Sāṇasambhūtoti sāṇadesavāsī sambhūtatthero . Dutiyo saṅgahoti sambandho. Pannabhārāti patitakkhandhabhārā. ‘‘Bhārā have pañcakkhandhā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.22) hi vuttaṃ. Katakiccāti catūsu saccesu catūhi maggehi kattabbassa pariññāpahānasaachakiriyābhāvanāsaṅkhātassa soḷasavidhassapi kiccassa pariniṭṭhitattā katakiccā.
“Abbuda”他们说是指灾祸,也指盗贼业,因为偷取世尊之语以阐明己说。但在《义注》中则说:“abbuda”是疮。“ima”是即将说出的内容的指示。“sandissamānā mukhā”意为面对面。“为生于上梵天界而修习的道”指为了生于上梵天界所培育的禅那。因为禅那是生于彼处的方便,所以在此称为“道”。因为方便称为“道”。而此处的词义应如此理解:它寻求、探寻、产生、成就各各投生,故为“道”。从意义上说,此道或是思心所,或是与思相应的诸法,或是这两者。因为在《中部》中说:“舍利弗,我知地狱,亦知趣向地狱之道”,此处思心所称为道。显示巴利原文
Abbudanti upaddavaṃ vadanti corakammampi bhagavato vacanaṃ thenetvā attano vacanassa dīpanato . Gaṇṭhipade pana ‘‘abbudaṃ gaṇḍo’’ti vuttaṃ. Imanti vakkhamānanidassanaṃ. Sandissamānā mukhā sammukhā. Uparibrahmalokūpapattiyā bhāvitamagganti uparibrahmaloke upapattiyā uppāditajjhānaṃ. Jhānañhi tatrūpapattiyā upāyabhāvato idha ‘‘maggo’’ti vuttaṃ. Upāyo hi ‘‘maggo’’ti vuccati. Vacanattho panettha – taṃ taṃ upapattiṃ maggati gavesati janeti nipphādetīti maggoti evaṃ veditabbo. Atthato cāyaṃ maggo nāma cetanāpi hoti cetanāsampayuttadhammāpi tadubhayampi. ‘‘Nirayañcāhaṃ, sāriputta, jānāmi nirayagāmiñca magga’’nti (ma. ni. 1.153) hi ettha cetanā maggo nāma.
信、惭、善法、布施
这些诸法为善士所遵行;
他们说,这便是天界之道,
依此而行,得生天界。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Saddhā hiriyaṃ kusalañca dānaṃ, Dhammā ete sappurisānuyātā; Etañhi maggaṃ diviyaṃ vadanti, Etena hi gacchati devaloka’’nti. (a. ni. 8.32; kathā. 479) –
此处,与思相应的诸法称为道。在《行生经》等经中,“诸比丘,此是道,此是行道”,思心所及与思相应的诸法都称为道。而此处以禅那为所指,故应取与思相应的诸法。显示巴利原文
Ettha cetanāsampayuttadhammā maggo nāma. ‘‘Ayaṃ bhikkhave maggo ayaṃ paṭipadā’’ti saṅkhārūpapattisuttādīsu (ma. ni. 3.161) cetanāpi cetanāsampayuttadhammāpi maggo nāma. Imasmiṃ ṭhāne jhānassa adhippetattā cetanāsampayuttadhammā gahetabbā.
“Moggalibrāhmaṇassā”指世间公认的、无子的名为目伽利的婆罗门。难道不是曾有“将在目伽利婆罗门家中结生”这样的说法吗?已证得能生上界之禅定者,也会在欲界投生吗?会的。应知,那是已作广大福德者依心愿而发生的,并非所有人皆如此。那么,广大的重业如何能障碍自身的果报,而让微小的业得到果报的机会呢?在此,首先在三本《义注》中这样说:“仅由欲贪之力,禅那退失,从退失的禅那中投生。”但有些人说:“应审察在无盖障的状态下,由欲贪导致禅那退失,然后取此义。”并在此处说明理由:“即使没有能障碍广大业果报的微小业,依‘诸比丘,持戒者的心愿因清净而得成就’这句经文,在欲有中,心愿能障碍广大业的果报,而让微小业的果报获得机会。”显示巴利原文
Moggalibrāhmaṇassāti lokasammatassa aputtakassa moggalināmabrāhmaṇassa. Nanu ca kathametaṃ nāma vuttaṃ ‘‘moggalibrāhmaṇassa gehe paṭisandhiṃ gahessatī’’ti. Kiṃ uparūpapattiyā paṭiladdhasamāpattīnampi kāmāvacare uppatti hotīti? Hoti. Sā ca katādhikārānaṃ mahāpuññānaṃ cetopaṇidhivasena hoti, na sabbesanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Atha mahaggatassa garukakammassa vipākaṃ paṭibāhitvā parittakammaṃ kathamattano vipākassa okāsaṃ karotīti? Ettha ca tāva tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu idaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘nikantibaleneva jhānā parihāyati, tato parihīnajjhānā nibbattantī’’ti. Keci pana ‘‘anīvaraṇāvatthāya nikantiyā jhānassa parihāni vīmaṃsitvā gahetabbā’’ti vatvā evamettha kāraṇaṃ vadanti ‘‘satipi mahaggatakammuno vipākapaṭibāhanasamatthassa parittakammassapi abhāve ‘ijjhati, bhikkhave, sīlavato cetopaṇidhi visuddhattā’ti (dī. ni. 3.337; a. ni. 8.35; saṃ. ni. 4.352) vacanato kāmabhave cetopaṇidhi mahaggatakammassa vipākaṃ paṭibāhitvā parittakammuno vipākassa okāsaṃ karotī’’ti.
“贤善人”:此处“贤”是表示请求的不变词,意为“我们请求”。“爽然畅快”:由于内心喜悦而一再满足。“举扬不退”:因生起身相变化的喜悦而高举不退。具喜之人由于身心高举、昂扬,故称“举扬”。以“贤”回应:即给予“贤”的回答。“涤清”:即完成、结束。“复来复往”:即再次回来。“那时”:指举行第二结集的那个时候,意为“在那个时刻”。“新者”:为阐明前文所说之义,而说“年轻比丘”。他们未能处理那件事:即未能判决、未能处理由跋耆子比丘们引发的那件事。“未能”:此为连接词。此“刀杖业”:是就现在要说的内容而言。“尽其寿命而住,然后般涅槃”:此为连接词,意为各自住满寿命的限量,然后般涅槃。显示巴利原文
Sādhusappurisāti ettha sādhūti āyācanatthe nipāto, taṃ yācāmāti attho. Haṭṭhapahaṭṭhoti cittapīṇanavasena punappunaṃ santuṭṭho. Udaggudaggoti sarīravikāruppādanapītivasena udaggudaggo. Pītimā hi puggalo kāyacittānaṃ uggatattā abbhuggatattā ‘‘udaggo’’ti vuccati. Sādhūti paṭissuṇitvāti ‘‘sādhū’’ti paṭivacanaṃ datvā. Tīretvāti niṭṭhapetvā. Puna paccāgamiṃsūti puna āgamiṃsu. Tena kho pana samayenāti yasmiṃ samaye dutiyasaṅgītiṃ akaṃsu, tasmiṃ samayeti attho. Navakāti vuttamevatthaṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘daharabhikkhū’’ti vuttaṃ. Taṃ adhikaraṇaṃ na sampāpuṇiṃsūti taṃ vajjiputtakehi uppāditaṃ adhikaraṇaṃ vinicchinituṃ na sampāpuṇiṃsu nāgamiṃsu. No ahuvatthāti sambandho. Idaṃ daṇḍakammanti idāni vattabbaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Yāvatāyukaṃ ṭhatvā parinibbutāti sambandho, yāva attano attano āyuparimāṇaṃ, tāva ṭhatvā parinibbutāti attho.
那么,那些长老做了什么之后而般涅槃呢?因此说“作了第二结集”等,意思是:他们为未来正法的增长建立了因缘之后,才般涅槃。接着,为令人心生悚惧而教诫道:“如此具有大威德的长老们,尚且归于无常,何况其他人呢?”于是又说“漏尽者”等。“归于无常”:即无常的自在状态,意为被无常所支配、所系属。如此了知这卑劣、低贱、难以达成、不可克服、无法超越的无常之后——此为连接词。然而,有些人将“难以达成”理解为“无法达到”,并说其连接关系为:“那难以达成的常与不死之境,智者应努力去证得。”“以一切方式”:意即以一切方式、毫无遗漏地解释了第二结集。显示巴利原文
Kiṃ pana katvā te therā parinibbutāti āha ‘‘dutiyaṃ saṅgahaṃ katvā’’tiādi. Anāgatepi saddhammavuḍḍhiyā hetuṃ katvā parinibbutāti sambandho. Idāni ‘‘tepi nāma evaṃ mahānubhāvā therā aniccatāya vasaṃ gatā, kimaṅgaṃ pana aññe’’ti saṃvejetvā ovadanto āha ‘‘khīṇāsavā’’tiādi. Aniccatāvasanti aniccatāvasattaṃ, aniccatāyattabhāvaṃ aniccatādhīnabhāvanti vuttaṃ hoti. Jammiṃ lāmakaṃ durabhisambhavaṃ anabhibhavanīyaṃ atikkamituṃ asakkuṇeyyaṃ aniccataṃ evaṃ ñatvāti sambandho. Keci pana ‘‘durabhisambhava’’nti ettha ‘‘pāpuṇituṃ asakkuṇeyya’’nti imamatthaṃ gahetvā ‘‘yaṃ durabhisambhavaṃ niccaṃ amataṃ padaṃ, taṃ pattuṃ vāyame dhīro’’ti sambandhaṃ vadanti. Sabbākārenāti sabbappakārena vattabbaṃ kiñcipi asesetvā dutiyasaṅgīti saṃvaṇṇitāti adhippāyo.
第三结集故事解释显示巴利原文
Tatiyasaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā
然而,在那次结集中,被结集法的长老们驱逐的那一万名跋耆子比丘,寻求朋党,各自觅得与自己相应的弱势朋党后,另行建立了一个名为“大众部”的师承宗派。由此分裂之后,又产生了另外两个师承宗派:鸡胤部和一说部。从鸡胤部再分裂之后,又产生了另外两个师承宗派:施设论部和多闻部,多闻部也是他们的名称。在他们之中,又兴起了名为制多山部的其他师承宗派。如是,在第二个百年,从大众部师承宗派分出了五个部派,与大众部合起来共为六部。显示巴利原文
Imissā pana saṅgītiyā dhammasaṅgāhakattherehi nikkaḍḍhitā te dasasahassā vajjiputtakā bhikkhū pakkhaṃ pariyesamānā attano attano anurūpaṃ dubbalapakkhaṃ labhitvā visuṃ mahāsaṅghikaṃ ācariyakulaṃ nāma akaṃsu, tato bhijjitvā aparāni dve ācariyakulāni jātāni gokulikā ca ekabyohārikā ca. Gokulikanikāyato bhijjitvā aparāni dve ācariyakulāni jātāni paṇṇattivādā ca bāhuliyā ca. Bahussutikātipi tesaṃyeva nāmaṃ, tesaṃyeva antarā cetiyavādā nāma apare ācariyavādā uppannā. Evaṃ mahāsaṅghikācariyakulato dutiye vassasate pañcācariyakulāni uppannāni, tāni mahāsaṅghikehi saddhiṃ cha honti.
就在这第二个百年中,从上座部分裂出了两个师承宗派:化地部与跋耆子部。其中,从跋耆子部再分裂后,又产生了四个师承宗派:法上部、贤胄部、密林山部与正量部。同样在这第二个百年,从化地部分裂后,产生了说一切有部与法护部两个师承宗派。从说一切有部再分裂后,产生了名为饮光部的派别;从饮光部分裂后,产生了名为说转部的派别;从说转部分裂后,产生了名为经量部的派别。如此,从上座部分裂后,共产生了这十一个师承宗派,与上座部合起来则为十二个。这样一来,这十二个宗派与大众部的六个师承宗派,合计在第二个百年中共产生了十八个师承宗派。所谓十八部派、十八师承宗派,皆是这些派别的名称。然而应知,在这十八部派中,十七派是分裂而出的,唯有上座部未曾分裂。这在《岛史》中也有记载:显示巴利原文
Tasmiṃyeva dutiye vassasate theravādato bhijjitvā dve ācariyavādā uppannā mahisāsakā ca vajjiputtakā ca. Tattha vajjiputtakavādato bhijjitvā apare cattāro ācariyavādā uppannā dhammuttarikā bhaddayānikā channāgārikā samitikāti. Puna tasmiṃyeva dutiye vassasate mahisāsakavādato bhijjitvā sabbatthivādā dhammaguttikāti dve ācariyavādā uppannā. Puna sabbatthivādakulato bhijjitvā kassapikā nāma jātā, kassapikesupi bhinnesu apare saṅkantikā nāma jātā, saṅkantikesu bhinnesu suttavādā nāma jātāti theravādato bhijjitvā ime ekādasa ācariyavādā uppannā, te theravādena saddhiṃ dvādasa honti. Iti ime ca dvādasa mahāsaṅghikānañca cha ācariyavādāti sabbe aṭṭhārasa ācariyavādā dutiye vassasate uppannā. Aṭṭhārasa nikāyātipi aṭṭhārasācariyakulānītipi etesaṃyeva nāmaṃ. Etesu pana sattarasa vādā bhinnakā, theravādoveko asambhinnakoti veditabbo. Vuttampi cetaṃ dīpavaṃse –
那些恶比丘跋耆子们,被长老们驱逐之后,
他们寻得了另一群党羽,成为了众多执持非法之说者。
一万人聚集之后,举行了法的结集;
因此,这次法的结集称为大结集。
他们将经典结集于别处,于别处造作了它;
他们破坏了义理与法,对律和五部也是如此。
无论是方便说示的,还是如实说示的;
了义与不了义,比丘们皆不了知;
他们依一义而说,却安立为另一义。
舍弃了一部分甚深的经与律;
他们另作了相似的经和律。
《附随》《义摄》、六部阿毗达摩,
《无碍解道》《义释》,以及一部分《本生经》;
他们舍去了如此多的部分,另作了其他的。
名称、标志、资具与威仪作法;
他们舍弃了本然的状态,改作种种。
那些大结集的始作俑者,是分裂论者的先驱;
随顺他们故,诸多分裂论者便出现。
之后,又过些时,于彼处便生起分裂;
比丘们分裂为鸡胤部与一说部二派。
鸡胤部后来,又分化出两种部派;
多闻部与施设论部,比丘众分成两派。
制多山部与再论者,是大结集的分裂者;
这五种论说,皆以大结集为根源。
他们破坏了义理与法,以及一部分结集;
他们舍弃了一部分结集,另立他说。
在犊子部的教说中,又产生了四种分裂;
法上部、贤胄部、密林山部及正量部。
化地部,于后时生起两种分裂;
说一切有部的比丘们,分裂为法藏部等二部。
从说一切有部,又分出迦叶部与说转部;
从说转部中,经说部渐次分裂。
这十一种教说,从上座部分裂而出;
他们分裂了义理与法,以及部分结集;
他们舍弃了一部分结集,另作他种。
名称、形相、资具及威仪作法等,
他们舍弃了本来的状态,另作他种。
有十七种分裂的教说,一种未分裂的教说;
加上那分裂的教说,共计为十八种。
无减无增,纯然是胜者的教法;
其余教说,犹如荆棘生于树上。
初百年中尚无,第二百年间;
在胜者的教法中,生起了十七种分裂的教说。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Nikkaḍḍhitā pāpabhikkhū, therehi vajjiputtakā; Aññaṃ pakkhaṃ labhitvāna, adhammavādī bahū janā. ‘‘Dasasahassā samāgantvā, akaṃsu dhammasaṅgahaṃ; Tasmāyaṃ dhammasaṅgīti, mahāsaṅgīti vuccati. ‘‘Mahāsaṅgītikā bhikkhū, vilomaṃ akaṃsu sāsane; Bhinditvā mūlasaṅgahaṃ, aññaṃ akaṃsu saṅgahaṃ. ‘‘Aññatra saṅgahitaṃ suttaṃ, aññatra akariṃsu te; Atthaṃ dhammañca bhindiṃsu, vinaye nikāyesu ca pañcasu. ‘‘Pariyāyadesitañcāpi , atho nippariyāyadesitaṃ; Nītatthañceva neyyatthaṃ, ajānitvāna bhikkhavo. ‘‘Aññaṃ sandhāya bhaṇitaṃ, aññaṃ atthaṃ ṭhapayiṃsu te; Byañjanacchāyāya te bhikkhū, bahuṃ atthaṃ vināsayuṃ. ‘‘Chaḍḍetvāna ekadesaṃ, suttaṃ vinayagambhiraṃ; Patirūpaṃ suttaṃ vinayaṃ, tañca aññaṃ kariṃsu te. ‘‘Parivāraṃ atthuddhāraṃ, abhidhammaṃ chappakaraṇaṃ; Paṭisambhidañca niddesaṃ, ekadesañca jātakaṃ; Ettakaṃ vissajjetvāna, aññāni akariṃsu te. ‘‘Nāmaṃ liṅgaṃ parikkhāraṃ, ākappakaraṇāni ca; Pakatibhāvaṃ vijahitvā, tañca aññaṃ akaṃsu te. ‘‘Pubbaṅgamā bhinnavādā, mahāsaṅgītikārakā; Tesañca anukārena, bhinnavādā bahū ahu. ‘‘Tato aparakālamhi, tasmiṃ bhedo ajāyatha; Gokulikā ekabyohāri, dvidhā bhijjittha bhikkhavo. ‘‘Gokulikānaṃ dve bhedā, aparakālamhi jāyatha; Bahussutikā ca paññatti, dvidhā bhijjittha bhikkhavo. ‘‘Cetiyā ca punavādī, mahāsaṅgītibhedakā; Pañca vādā ime sabbe, mahāsaṅgītimūlakā. ‘‘Atthaṃ dhammañca bhindiṃsu, ekadesañca saṅgahaṃ; Ganthañca ekadesañhi, chaḍḍetvā aññaṃ akaṃsu te. ‘‘Nāmaṃ liṅgaṃ parikkhāraṃ, ākappakaraṇāni ca; Pakatibhāvaṃ vijahitvā, tañca aññaṃ akaṃsu te. ‘‘Visuddhattheravādamhi, puna bhedo ajāyatha; Mahisāsakā vajjiputtakā, dvidhā bhijjittha bhikkhavo. ‘‘Vajjiputtakavādamhi, catudhā bhedo ajāyatha; Dhammatturikā bhaddayānikā, channāgārikā ca samiti. ‘‘Mahisāsakānaṃ dve bhedā, aparakālamhi ajāyatha; Sabbatthivādā dhammaguttā, dvidhā bhijjittha bhikkhavo. ‘‘Sabbatthivādānaṃ kassapikā, saṅkanti kassapikena ca; Saṅkantikānaṃ suttavādī, anupubbena bhijjatha. ‘‘Ime ekādasa vādā, pabhinnā theravādato; Atthaṃ dhammañca bhindiṃsu, ekadesañca saṅgahaṃ; Ganthañca ekadesañhi, chaḍḍetvā aññaṃ akaṃsu te. ‘‘Nāmaṃ liṅgaṃ parikkhāraṃ, ākappakaraṇāni ca; Pakatibhāvaṃ vijahitvā, tañca aññaṃ akaṃsu te. ‘‘Sattarasa bhinnavādā, ekavādo abhinnako; Sabbevaṭṭhārasa honti, bhinnavādena te saha; Nigrodhova mahārukkho, theravādānamuttamo. ‘‘Anūnaṃ anadhikañca, kevalaṃ jinasāsanaṃ; Kaṇṭakā viya rukkhamhi, nibbattā vādasesakā. ‘‘Paṭhame vassasate natthi, dutiye vassasatantare; Bhinnā sattarasa vādā, uppannā jinasāsane’’ti.
此后,又出现了雪山部、王山部、义成部、东山部、西山部、金刚部等另外六种师说。当先前十八种师说在教法中流传时,法王阿育王生起信心,每日为佛供养十万,为法供养十万,为僧供养十万,为自己的老师尼拘律长老供养十万,为四城门医药供养十万,合计每日供养五十万,在教法中兴起广大利养与恭敬。那时,目犍连子帝须长老为了净化教法中因利养恭敬而染污、由外道所生起的种种学说垢秽,率领一千位通达三藏、证得无碍解的比丘,如同大迦叶长老与耶舍长老结集法与律那样,进行了第三结集。现在为了从根源详细说明这第三结集,而说:‘帝须大梵天从梵天界死后,在目犍连婆罗门家中结生’等。显示巴利原文
Aparāparaṃ pana hemavatā rājagirikā siddhatthikā pubbaseliyā aparaseliyā vājiriyāti aññepi cha ācariyavādā uppannā. Purimakānaṃ pana aṭṭhārasannaṃ ācariyavādānaṃ vasena pavattamāne sāsane asoko dhammarājā paṭiladdhasaddho divase divase buddhapūjāya satasahassaṃ, dhammapūjāya satasahassaṃ, saṅghapūjāya satasahassaṃ, attano ācariyassa nigrodhattherassa satasahassaṃ, catūsu dvāresu bhesajjatthāya satasahassanti pañca satasahassāni pariccajanto sāsane uḷāraṃ lābhasakkāraṃ pavattesi. Tadā hatalābhasakkārehi titthiyehi uppāditaṃ anekappakāraṃ sāsanamalaṃ visodhetvā moggaliputtatissatthero tipiṭakapariyattidharānaṃ pabhinnapaṭisambhidānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ sahassamekaṃ gahetvā yathā mahākassapatthero ca yasatthero ca dhammañca vinayañca saṅgāyiṃsu, evameva saṅgāyanto tatiyasaṅgītiṃ akāsi. Idāni taṃ tatiyasaṅgītiṃ mūlato pabhuti vitthāretvā dassento āha ‘‘tissopi kho mahābrahmā brahmalokato cavitvā moggalibrāhmaṇassa gehe paṭisandhiṃ aggahesī’’tiādi.
其中,“在家中结生”意为:在目犍连婆罗门家中、婆罗门女的胎内结生。由于家是所依处,依于所依处而用其名称,故说“在家中结生”,如同说“床铺们发出高声,全村都来了”。“七年”是表示持续结合的业格。“你们想越过”意思是:越过此处去别处,因为这里得不到施食,应去其他地方寻求——这是他话中的意图。“诸位出家者”等,是婆罗门因不希望自家有获得施食的因缘而说。“从已准备好的食物”指从已经备好并放置的食物。“适合的”指与所施相应的。“见到寂静后”:反复见长老身心的寂静后,便能了知;因为由展现威仪寂静,即可了知与之相应的内心如理之寂静。“更加净信后”:再三地、特别地、更增上地净信。“为了进行施食”:为了完成施食的胜事。“接受后”:同意之后。显示巴利原文
Tattha gehe paṭisandhiṃ aggahesīti moggalibrāhmaṇassa gehe brāhmaṇiyā kucchimhi paṭisandhiṃ aggahesīti attho. Gehassa pana tannissayattā nissite nissayavohāravasena ‘‘gehe paṭisandhiṃ aggahesī’’ti vuttaṃ yathā ‘‘mañcā ukkuṭṭhiṃ karonti, sabbo gāmo āgato’’ti. Sattavassānīti accantasaṃyoge upayogavacanaṃ. Aticchathāti atikkamitvā icchatha, idha bhikkhā na labbhati, ito aññattha gantvā bhikkhaṃ pariyesathāti adhippāyo. ‘‘Bho pabbajitā’’tiādi brāhmaṇo attano gehe bhikkhālābhaṃ anicchanto āha. Paṭiyāditabhattatoti sampādetvā ṭhapitabhattato. Tadupiyanti tadanurūpaṃ. Upasamaṃ disvāti therassa kāyacittavūpasamaṃ punappunaṃ disvā, ñatvāti attho. Iriyāpathavūpasamasandassanena hi tannibandhino cittassa yoniso pavattiupasamopi viññāyati. Bhiyyoso mattāya pasīditvāti punappunaṃ visesato adhikataraṃ pasīditvā. Bhattavissaggakaraṇatthāyāti bhattakiccakaraṇatthāya. Adhivāsetvāti sampaṭicchitvā.
“称为十六岁”:应被称为十六岁,应被如此称呼,故为“十六岁之称”,他即是“称为十六岁者”。或者说,他值得被称为十六岁,故为“称为十六岁者”;或者说,他有十六年应被指称,故为“称为十六岁者”;或者说,他有“十六岁”这一称呼,故为“称为十六岁者”,其实际意思是“十六岁的人”。“通达三吠陀”:对于梨俱吠陀、夜柔吠陀、娑摩吠陀这三种吠陀,通过熟练掌握而达至彼岸,故称“通达者”。此处“通达者”一词,应知是因常需依止而作复合词等。“悬挂后”即垂下之后。“没有任何”中的“ca”字是限定词,意思是“任何谈话都不生起”。“座位”指应坐的座处。“将生起”于此也应与“谈话”一词连接来理解。忿怒、不悦:因忿怒而忿怒,因忧恼而不悦。具足忧恼之人,由于喜乐而内心不悦、不自在,故称“不悦者”。或者,“不悦者”意为心不处于自己的掌控之中。显示巴利原文
Soḷasavassuddesikoti soḷasavassoti uddisitabbo voharitabboti soḷasavassuddeso, soyeva soḷasavassuddesiko. Soḷasavassoti vā uddisitabbataṃ arahatīti soḷasavassuddesiko, soḷasavassāni vā uddisitabbāni assāti soḷasavassuddesiko, soḷasavassoti uddeso vā assa atthīti soḷasavassuddesiko, atthato pana soḷasavassikoti vuttaṃ hoti. Tiṇṇaṃ vedānaṃ pāragūti iruvedayajuvedasāmavedasaṅkhātānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ vedānaṃ paguṇakaraṇavasena pāraṃ gatoti pāragū. Pāragūti cettha niccasāpekkhatāya samāsādikaṃ veditabbaṃ. Laggetvāti olambetvā. Na ca kācīti ettha ca-saddo avadhāraṇe, kāci kathā neva uppajjatīti attho. Pallaṅkanti nisīditabbāsanaṃ. Uppajjissatīti etthāpi ‘‘kathā’’ti idaṃ ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Kupito anattamanoti kopena kupito, anattamano domanassena. Domanassasamaṅgī hi puggalo pītisukhehi na attamano na attacittoti anattamanoti vuccati. Na sakamanoti vā anattamano attano vase aṭṭhitacittattā.
“凶恶性状”:此中,凶恶者指粗暴、顽固之人,其状态名为凶恶性,即顽固状态。但此处因说“凶恶性状”,当将凶恶本身视为凶恶性,因此“凶恶性状”此处应理解为顽固状态。“某种咒术”即某种明咒。“其他人谁会知道呢?”意为无人知晓。长老安住于己分之智,故说“通过询问能够知道”。唯有具一切知之佛才会以“年轻人,你问吧,无论你想问什么”等方式,展现不与独觉等共通的、一切知者的邀请。而声闻弟子们安住于部分智,故会说“听了之后我们会知道”或“通过询问能够知道”。显示巴利原文
Caṇḍikkabhāveti caṇḍiko vuccati caṇḍo thaddhapuggalo, tassa bhāvo caṇḍikkaṃ, thaddhabhāvoti attho. Idha pana ‘‘caṇḍikkabhāve’’ti vuttattā caṇḍikoyeva caṇḍikkanti gahetabbaṃ, tena ‘‘caṇḍikkabhāve’’ti ettha thaddhabhāveti attho veditabbo. Kiñci mantanti kiñci vedaṃ. Aññe ke jānissantīti na keci jānissantīti adhippāyo. Pucchitvā sakkā jānitunti attano padesañāṇe ṭhitattā thero evamāha. Sabbaññubuddhā eva hi ‘‘puccha, māṇava, yadākaṅkhasī’’tiādinā paccekabuddhādīhi asādhāraṇaṃ sabbaññupavāraṇaṃ pavārenti. Sāvakā pana padesañāṇe ṭhitattā ‘‘sutvā vedissāmā’’ti vā ‘‘pucchitvā sakkā jānitu’’nti vā vadanti.
“于三吠陀中”等:三吠陀如前所述。词汇书是阐明树木等名称同义词的论书,阐明同义词即说明同义词语的意思,也就是对每一个意义显示多种同义表达。这仅是举例,因为该论书也通过显示一词多义的表述而得以成立。以能表述与所表述的关系,将意义和词语分解、分别显示,故称为“分解”;此处将kha音变为gha音,从而说为“词汇书”。“仪轨”是关于诗人创作规则与变化的辅助论书。其中,创作规则与变化是指以言语分别等为特征的创作被规定、分别,故名创作规则,而它因音、词、句、义等的分类而有多种分别,故称创作规则与变化。这是针对根本创作规则论书而言的。那是一部有十万颂的、包含引导等师承的著作。从词义上说,它引导创作等的分类,或者因为它无余穷尽地引导、完成,故称“仪轨”。合词汇书与仪轨,称为“有词汇书和仪轨的”,亦即三吠陀。在那些有词汇书和仪轨的之中。“字母分别”是通过发音部位、方式等的分类及词源解释的分类而分别字母,即语音学和语法学。合字母分别,称为“有字母分别的”,在那些有字母分别的之中。显示巴利原文
Tīsu vedesūtiādīsu tayo vedā pubbe vuttanayā eva. Nighaṇḍūti nāmanighaṇḍurukkhādīnaṃ vevacanappakāsakaṃ satthaṃ, vevacanappakāsakanti ca pariyāyasaddadīpakanti attho, ekekassa atthassa anekapariyāyavacanavibhāvakanti vuttaṃ hoti. Nidassanamattañcetaṃ anekesaṃ atthānaṃ ekasaddassa vacanīyatāvibhāvanavasenapi tassa ganthassa pavattattā. Vacanīyavācakabhāvena atthaṃ saddañca nikhaṇḍeti bhindati vibhajja dassetīti nikhaṇḍu, so eva idha kha-kārassa gha-kāraṃ katvā nighaṇḍūti vutto. Keṭubhanti kiriyākappavikappo kavīnaṃ upakārasatthaṃ. Ettha ca kiriyākappavikappoti vacībhedādilakkhaṇā kiriyā kappīyati vikappīyati etenāti kiriyākappo, so pana vaṇṇapadabandhapadatthādivibhāgato bahuvikappoti kiriyākappavikappoti vuccati. Idañca mūlakiriyākappaganthaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. So hi satasahassaparimāṇo nayādicariyādikaṃ pakaraṇaṃ. Vacanatthato pana kiṭati gameti kiriyādivibhāgaṃ, taṃ vā anavasesapariyādānato gamento pūretīti keṭubhanti vuccati, saha nighaṇḍunā keṭubhena ca sanighaṇḍukeṭubhā, tayo vedā. Tesu sanighaṇḍukeṭubhesu. Ṭhānakaraṇādivibhāgato nibbacanavibhāgato ca akkharā pabhedīyanti etenāti akkharappabhedo, sikkhā ca nirutti ca. Saha akkharappabhedenāti sākkharappabhedā, tesu sākkharappabhedesu. Itihāsapañcamesūti athabbanavedaṃ catutthaṃ katvā ‘‘itiha āsa itiha āsā’’ti īdisavacanapaṭisaṃyutto purāṇakathāsaṅkhāto itihāso pañcamo etesanti itihāsapañcamā, tayo vedā. Tesu itihāsapañcamesu. Neva attanā passatīti neva sayaṃ passati, neva jānātīti attho. Puccha, byākarissāmīti ‘‘sabbāpi pucchā vedesuyeva antogadhā’’ti sallakkhento evamāha.
“若有人心”等两个问题,是就具足死心的漏尽者,在其死心生起刹那而说的。其中,第一个问题中的“生起”,是指由具足生起刹那而称为生起;“不灭”,是指由于尚未到达灭的刹那而称为不灭。“他的心”一句是问:那个人从此以后,心是否将灭而不再生?而在“或者若有人”等第二个问题中,“将会灭”是指有人心若到达坏灭刹那便将灭去;“将不生”是指在坏灭之后,自身或他心都将不再生起,问的是:那个人的心是否生起而不灭?然而,这两个问题中,第一个问题是应分别解答的。因此,当被问“若有人心生起而不灭,他的心将会灭而不再生吗?”时,应这样解答:“在最后心的生起刹那,那些人的心生起而不灭,将会灭而不再生;在其他心的生起刹那,那些人的心生起而不灭,将会灭,并且还会再生。”因为对于已断尽有限轮回之苦的漏尽者,在一切最后死心的生起刹那,那死心本身将会灭而不再生。由于达到了生起,故称为生起;由于尚未达到坏灭,故称为不灭。达到坏灭之后,他们的那个心将会灭,由于不再结生,其他心将不再生起。除了具有最后心的漏尽者之外,其余有学、无学、凡夫的生起刹那相应心,显示巴利原文
Yassa cittantiādipañhadvayaṃ cuticittasamaṅgino khīṇāsavassa cuticittassa uppādakkhaṇaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tattha paṭhamapañhe uppajjatīti uppādakkhaṇasamaṅgitāya uppajjati. Na nirujjhatīti nirodhakkhaṇaṃ appattatāya na nirujjhati. Tassa cittanti tassa puggalassa tato paṭṭhāya cittaṃ nirujjhissati nuppajjissatīti pucchati. Yassa vā panātiādike pana dutiyapañhe nirujjhissatīti yassa cittaṃ bhaṅgakkhaṇaṃ patvā nirujjhissati. Nuppajjissatīti bhaṅgato parabhāge sayaṃ vā aññaṃ vā nuppajjissati, tassa puggalassa cittaṃ uppajjati na nirujjhatīti pucchati. Imesaṃ pana pañhānaṃ paṭhamo pañho vibhajjabyākaraṇīyo, tasmā ‘‘yassa cittaṃ uppajjati na nirujjhati, tassa cittaṃ nirujjhissati nuppajjissatī’’ti (yama. 2.cittayamaka.63) evaṃ puṭṭhena satā evamayaṃ pañho ca vissajjetabbo ‘‘pacchimacittassa uppādakkhaṇe tesaṃ cittaṃ uppajjati na nirujjhati nirujjhissati na uppajjissati, itaresaṃ cittassa uppādakkhaṇe tesaṃ cittaṃ uppajjati na nirujjhati, nirujjhissati ceva uppajjissati cā’’ti (yama. 2.cittayamaka.63). Yesañhi paricchinnavaṭṭadukkhānaṃ khīṇāsavānaṃ sabbapacchimassa cuticittassa uppādakkhaṇe vattati, tesaṃ tadeva cuticittaṃ nirujjhissati nuppajjissatīti. Uppādappattatāya uppajjati nāma, bhaṅgaṃ appattatāya na nirujjhati. Bhaṅgaṃ pana patvā taṃ tesaṃ cittaṃ nirujjhissati, tato appaṭisandhikattā aññaṃ na uppajjissati. Ṭhapetvā pana pacchimacittasamaṅgikhīṇāsavaṃ itaresaṃ sekkhāsekkhaputhujjanānaṃ uppādakkhaṇasamaṅgicittaṃ uppādappattatāya uppajjati nāma, bhaṅgaṃ appattatāya na nirujjhati. Bhaṅgaṃ pana patvā nirujjhissateva, aññaṃ pana tasmiṃ vā aññasmiṃ vā attabhāve uppajjissati ceva nirujjhissati ca. Dutiyo pana pañho arahato cuticittassa uppādakkhaṇe niyamitattā ekaṃsabyākaraṇīyo, tasmā ‘‘yassa vā pana cittaṃ nirujjhissati na uppajjissati, tassa cittaṃ uppajjati na nirujjhatī’’ti puṭṭhena ‘‘āmantā’’ti vattabbaṃ. Khīṇāsavassa hi uppādakkhaṇasamaṅgicuticittaṃ bhaṅgaṃ patvā nirujjhissati nāma, tato paraṃ nuppajjissati. Uppādakkhaṇasamaṅgitāya pana uppajjati ceva bhaṅgaṃ appattatāya na nirujjhati cāti vuccati.
而这位青年因不能解答这些问题,陷入了苦恼,因此说“青年不能向上或向下引导”等。其中,“不能向上或向下引导”的意思是:无法从义理上将上句连接到下句,或将下句连接到上句,也就是不能前后贯通以确定问题的含义。他首先教导了三十二身分的业处,说“于此身中有……”等,并说“这是心的近行”。由于须陀洹于戒已圆满修习,其所受持的戒不会退失,故说“现在不可能从教法退转”。“增长”是指为了更高的道而增长业处。“应少事务而持佛语”的意思是:因证得阿罗汉果而所作已办。为了在世俗表达方式上善巧,而说了“戒师派我来亲近您,尊者”等。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ pana māṇavo evamime pañhe vissajjetumasakkonto vighātaṃ pāpuṇi, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘māṇavo uddhaṃ vā adho vā harituṃ asakkonto’’tiādi. Tattha uddhaṃ vā adho vā harituṃ asakkontoti uparimapade vā heṭṭhimapadaṃ, heṭṭhimapade vā uparimapadaṃ atthato samannāharituṃ asakkontoti attho, pubbenāparaṃ yojetvā pañhassa atthaṃ paricchindituṃ asakkontoti vuttaṃ hoti. Dvattiṃsākārakammaṭṭhānaṃ tāva ācikkhīti ‘‘atthi imasmiṃ kāye’’tiādikaṃ dvattiṃsākārakammaṭṭhānaṃ ‘‘mantassa upacāro aya’’nti paṭhamaṃ ācikkhi. Sotāpannānaṃ sīlesu paripūrakāritāya samādinnasīlato natthi parihānīti āha ‘‘abhabbo dāni sāsanato nivattitu’’nti. Vaḍḍhetvāti uparimaggatthāya kammaṭṭhānaṃ vaḍḍhetvā. Appossukko bhaveyya buddhavacanaṃ gahetunti arahattappattiyā katakiccabhāvatoti adhippāyo. Vohāravidhimhi chekabhāvatthaṃ ‘‘upajjhāyo maṃ bhante tumhākaṃ santikaṃ pahiṇī’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
他准备了水与齿木,即为了受用而将水及齿木备好放置。由于以之清洁牙齿,故齿木被称为“净牙者”。因为具德者应被摄受,长老为了亲自验证沙弥的忍辱、精进、侍奉等品德,不靠神通而以自然的方式考验他,又做了扫地等事务。也有说:“是为了调伏沙弥的心而做。”他开始教授佛语,即开始让沙弥学习佛语。关于“除了律藏”,在三本《结缚处》中说:“因为沙弥学习律藏并非义务,所以除了律藏,让他学习了其余的佛语。”“虽是雨安居者”的意思是:从受具足戒以来,尚未满一个雨安居。由于目犍连子帝须长老心中所安立的佛语,通过世俗表达而安立在他手中,故说“将全部佛语安立在他手中”。“他们尽寿住世而般涅槃”的意思是:由于目犍连子帝须长老手中安立了全部教法,他们从第二结集者所施加的处罚中解脱,尽寿住世而般涅槃。显示巴利原文
Udakadantaponaṃ upaṭṭhāpesīti paribhogatthāya udakañca dantakaṭṭhañca paṭiyādetvā ṭhapesi. Dante punanti visodhenti etenāti dantaponaṃ vuccati dantakaṭṭhaṃ. Guṇavantānaṃ saṅgahetabbabhāvato thero sāmaṇerassa ca khantivīriyaupaṭṭhānādiguṇe paccakkhakaraṇatthaṃ vināva abhiññāya pakatiyā vīmaṃsamāno puna sammajjanādiṃ akāsi. ‘‘Sāmaṇerassa cittadamanatthaṃ akāsī’’tipi vadanti. Buddhavacanaṃ paṭṭhapesīti buddhavacanaṃ uggaṇhāpetuṃ ārabhi. Ṭhapetvā vinayapiṭakanti ettha ‘‘sāmaṇerānaṃ vinayapariyāpuṇanaṃ cārittaṃ na hotīti ṭhapetvā vinayapiṭakaṃ avasesaṃ buddhavacanaṃ uggaṇhāpesī’’ti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Avassikova samānoti upasampadato paṭṭhāya aparipuṇṇaekavassoti adhippāyo. Moggaliputtatissattherassa hadaye patiṭṭhāpitampi buddhavacanaṃ vohāravasena tassa hatthe patiṭṭhāpitaṃ nāma hotīti katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘hatthe sakalaṃ buddhavacanaṃ patiṭṭhāpetvā’’ti. Yāvatāyukaṃ ṭhatvā parinibbāyiṃsūti moggaliputtatissattherassa hatthe sakalasāsanapatiṭṭhāpanena dutiyasaṅgītikārakāropitadaṇḍakammato muttā hutvā yāvatāyukaṃ ṭhatvā parinibbāyiṃsu.
“宾度萨罗王有一百个儿子”中,宾度萨罗是释迦族后裔,旃陀掘多王之子。如同在维度哒跋战斗时,从迦毗罗卫出离的释迦族人在末利城所建,出身刹帝利家族的旃陀掘多王子成为华氏城的国王。他的儿子宾度萨罗王子在父王去世后成为国王,是一百个儿子的父亲。“一百”即一加上一百,意为超过一百。“同母者”指同一母亲所生,也就是自己的同胞兄弟。他尚未统一王国,故说“未经灌顶而治理王国”。“统一王国的灌顶”是指以整个赡部洲洲的独尊统治而举行的灌顶。这些王权神通本应由福德威力感得,如同由阿罗汉道而来的无碍解等其他殊胜功德,乃是修行成就的体现;然而他仅凭灌顶的威力便获得了,所以说“他的这些王权神通是由灌顶的威力而来的”。显示巴利原文
Bindusārassa rañño ekasataputtāti ettha bindusāro nāma sakyakulappasuto candaguttassa nāma rañño putto. Tathā hi viṭaṭūbhasaṅgāme kapilavatthuto nikkhantasakyaputtehi māpite moriyanagare khattiyakulasambhavo candaguttakumāro pāṭaliputte rājā ahosi. Tassa putto bindusāro nāma rājakumāro pitu accayena rājā hutvā ekasataputtakānaṃ janako ahosi. Ekasatanti ekañca satañca ekasataṃ, ekenādhikaṃ satanti attho. Ekāva mātā assāti ekamātikaṃ, attanā sahodaranti vuttaṃ hoti. Na tāva ekarajjaṃ katanti āha ‘‘anabhisittova rajjaṃ kāretvā’’ti. Ekarajjābhisekanti sakalajambudīpe ekādhipaccavasena kariyamānaṃ abhisekaṃ. Puññappabhāvena pāpuṇitabbāpi rājiddhiyo arahattamaggena āgatā paṭisambhidādayo avasesavisesā viya payogasampattibhūtā abhisekānubhāveneva āgatāti āha ‘‘abhisekānubhāvena cassa imā rājiddhiyo āgatā’’ti.
其中,“王权神通”指随国王身份而来的威力。“从那里”指从十六个水壶那里。“于教法中生起信心”指在佛陀教法中获得了信心。“阿散提弥多”是她的名字。据说她身上看不到关节,故得此名;也有说即因此得名。关联:天神每天带来。“每天”即日日。“阿伽陀余甘子”指只需少量即能净化身体、去除一切疾病的药余甘子。阿伽陀诃梨勒同样也是诃梨勒。据说她在这两者中任意享用一种。从六牙湖,即从六牙湖附近的天宫或如意树那里得来。也有人说:“六牙湖中有那样的特别树木,从此而来。”天界饮品即天界果味的饮品。“非线织成”指由如意树产生的天衣,因非由线织成,故称非线织成。“须摩那花布”指处处有细密而高耸的花朵,故名须摩那花布。“自生稻”指自然生长的稻谷,此处依集合义用单数,意指稻谷。关于“九千车”,在《经集》注释等中说:“四把为一拘都婆,四拘都婆为一钵他,四钵他为一阿罗迦,四阿罗迦为一东那,四东那为一摩尼迦,四摩尼迦为一迦利,二十迦利为一瓦诃,此即一车。”但此处说“两车为一瓦诃”。“他们除去谷壳”指除去谷壳。显示巴利原文
Tattha rājiddhiyoti rājabhāvānugatappabhāvā. Yatoti yato soḷasaghaṭato. Sāsane uppannasaddhoti buddhasāsane paṭiladdhasaddho. Asandhimittāti tassāva nāmaṃ. Tassā kira sarīre sandhayo na paññāyanti, tasmā evaṃnāmikā jātātipi vadanti. Devatā eva divase divase āharantīti sambandho. Devasikanti divase divase. Agadāmalakanti appakeneva sarīrasodhanādisamatthaṃ sabbadosaharaṇaṃ osadhāmalakaṃ. Agadaharītakampi tādisameva harītakaṃ. Tesu kira dvīsu yathākāmamekaṃ paribhuñjati. Chaddantadahatoti chaddantadahasamīpe ṭhitadevavimānato kapparukkhato vā. ‘‘Chaddantadahe tādisā rukkhavisesā santi, tato āharantī’’tipi vadanti. Dibbañca pānakanti dibbaphalarasapānakañca. Asuttamayikanti kapparukkhato nibbattadibbadussattā suttehi na katanti asuttamayikaṃ. Sumanapupphapaṭanti sabbattha sukhumaṃ hutvā uggatapupphānaṃ atthitāya sumanapupphapaṭaṃ nāma jātaṃ. Uṭṭhitassa sālinoti sayaṃjātasālino. Samudāyāpekkhañcettha ekavacanaṃ, sālīnanti attho. Nava vāhasahassānīti ettha ‘‘catasso muṭṭhiyo eko kuḍuvo, cattāro kuḍuvā eko pattho, cattāro patthā eko āḷhako, cattāro āḷhakā ekaṃ doṇaṃ, cattāro doṇā ekamānikā, catasso mānikā ekakhārī, vīsati khāriyo eko vāho, tadeva ekaṃ sakaṭa’’nti suttanipātaṭṭhakathādīsu (su. ni. aṭṭha. 2.kokālikasuttavaṇṇanā; saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.181; a. ni. 3.10; 89) vuttaṃ. Idha pana ‘‘dve sakaṭāni eko vāho’’ti vadanti. Nitthusakaṇe karontīti thusakuṇḍakarahite karonti. Madhuṃ karontīti āgantvā samīpaṭṭhāne madhuṃ karonti. Balikammaṃ karontīti sabbattha balikammakārakā raṭṭhavāsino viya madhurasaraṃ vikūjantā baliṃ karonti. ‘‘Āgantvā ākāseyeva saddaṃ katvā attānaṃ ajānāpetvā gacchantī’’ti vadanti.
“金链结”即金链的束缚,意为金链结。四佛,指拘留孙佛等四位佛陀。“已得见色身”,即已获得见色身。据说,此人寿命长达一劫,故亲眼得见四位佛陀的色身成就。关于“唤来名为黑的龙王”:此处应知,那位龙王因恒河中放置的金链而来,自觉金链落在自己脚上,因而前来。难道阿育王的命令不是在下方一由旬以上起作用,而此龙王的宫殿却建立在由旬范围的下方吗?那么这位龙王如何能因王命而来呢?虽然其宫殿位于由旬范围的下方,但因与王命起作用之处连为整体,故他执行了王的命令。正如住在国境边地的居民,虽受各自国王的统治,却随各自国王的命令而行动,据说此理相同。显示巴利原文
Suvaṇṇasaṅkhalikāyeva bandhanaṃ suvaṇṇasaṅkhalikabandhanaṃ. Catunnaṃ buddhānanti kakusandhādīnaṃ catunnaṃ buddhānaṃ. Adhigatarūpadassananti paṭiladdharūpadassanaṃ. Ayaṃ kira kappāyukattā catunnampi buddhānaṃ rūpasampattiṃ paccakkhato addakkhi. Kāḷaṃ nāmanāgarājānaṃ ānayitvāti ettha so pana nāgarājā gaṅgāyaṃ nikkhittasuvaṇṇasaṅkhalikāya gantvā attano pādesu patitasaññāya āgatoti veditabbo. Nanu ca asokassa rañño āṇā heṭṭhā yojanato upari pavattati, imassa ca vimānaṃ yojanaparicchedato heṭṭhā patiṭṭhitaṃ, tasmā kathaṃ ayaṃ nāgarājā rañño āṇāya āgatoti? Kiñcāpi attano vimānaṃ yojanaparicchedato heṭṭhā patiṭṭhitaṃ, tathāpi rañño āṇāpavattiṭṭhānena saha ekābaddhatāya tassa āṇaṃ akāsi. Yathā hi rajjasīmantaravāsino manussā tehi tehi rājūhi nippīḷiyamānā tesaṃ tesaṃ āṇāya pavattanti, evaṃsampadamidanti vadanti.
“令现前”即令出现在面前,令成为所缘境的意思。此与“观看由他所化现的佛像”连属。为了说明那佛像是什么样的,说“全身散布……”等。其中,“由福业威力所生”的取用,应理解为:由他所化现的、具足八十随形好与三十二大人相的佛像,与世尊由福业威力所生的八十随形好等相似,因为当时他所化现的种种形相佛像,不能说是由世尊的福业威力所生。八十随形好,如铜色、鼻梁高隆等;三十二大人相,如足下安平立相等。如绽放……乃至……水面,即如被日光触及而绽放、盛开的红莲——以“装饰(kam)”与“何(alaṅkarotī)”之义得名“莲花(kamala)”——以及青莲等各种莲花,与称为白莲的芬陀利花所装饰、遍布的水面一般。如星群……乃至……天空,即如遍布各处的星群,以其光芒之网般明净闪耀的光辉、美丽而灿烂、正确照耀的天空一般。如晚霞……乃至……金山峰顶,即如被傍晚时分所生的晚霞光彩、彩虹和闪电所环绕、四周遍围的金山峰顶一般。关于“无垢光鬘”,此处有人说:“所谓光鬘,是从头部发出、在头顶上方聚集成堆而显现。显示巴利原文
Āpāthaṃ karohīti sammukhaṃ karohi, gocaraṃ karohīti attho. Tena nimmitaṃ buddharūpaṃ passantoti sambandho. Kīdisaṃ taṃ buddharūpanti āha ‘‘sakalasarīravippakiṇṇā’’tiādi. Tattha puññappabhāvanibbattaggahaṇaṃ tena nimmitānampi asītianubyañjanapaṭimaṇḍitānaṃ dvattiṃsamahāpurisalakkhaṇānaṃ bhagavato puññappabhāvanibbattaasītianubyañjanādīhi sadisattā katanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Na hi tena tadā nimmitaṃ anekākāraparipuṇṇaṃ buddharūpaṃ bhagavato puññappabhāvena nibbattanti sakkā vattuṃ. Asītianubyañjanaṃ tambanakhatuṅganāsādi. Dvattiṃsamahāpurisalakkhaṇaṃ suppatiṭṭhitapādatādi. Vikasita…pe… salilatalanti sūriyarasmisamphassena vikasitehi vikāsamupagatehi kaṃ alaṅkarotīti ‘‘kamala’’nti laddhanāmehi rattapadumehi nīluppalādibhedehi uppalehi ceva setapadumasaṅkhātehi puṇḍarīkehi ca paṭimaṇḍitaṃ samantato sajjitaṃ jalatalamiva. Tārāgaṇa…pe… gaganatalanti sabbattha vippakiṇṇatārakagaṇassa rasmijālavisadehi vipphuritāya bhāsamānāya sobhāya kantiyā samujjalaṃ sammā bhāsamānaṃ gaganatalamiva ākāsatalamiva. Sañjhāppabhā…pe… kanakagirisikharanti sañjhākālasañjātappabhānurāgehi indacāpehi vijjulatāhi ca parikkhittaṃ samantato parivāritaṃ kanakagirisikharamiva suvaṇṇapabbatakūṭamiva. Vimalaketumālāti ettha ‘‘ketumālā nāma sīsato nikkhamitvā upari muddhani puñjo hutvā dissamānarasmirāsī’’ti vadanti. ‘‘Muddhani majjhe paññāyamāno unnatappadesotipi vadantī’’ti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Yasmā pana asoko dhammarājā sañjātapītisomanasso sattāhaṃ nirāhāro hutvā yathāṭhitova avikkhittacitto pasādasommehi cakkhūhi nirantaraṃ buddharūpameva olokesi, tasmā akkhīhi pūjā katā nāma hotīti āha ‘‘akkhipūjaṃ nāma akāsī’’ti. Atha vā cakkhūnaṃ tādisassa iṭṭhārammaṇassa upaṭṭhāpanena akkhīnaṃ pūjā katā nāma hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘akkhipūjaṃ nāma akāsī’’ti.
而此事是因神通显示之章节的因缘而说,并非依顺序叙述。此处的次第如下:据说,阿育大王按照下文将述的次第,从狮窗观望,见到尼拘律沙弥具足威仪,吸引着龙众的目光,直视约一弓的距离,即心生净信,爱敬与尊重油然而生,便召请他前来,请他坐于白伞下的狮子座上,供养饮食。依沙弥所言,他得见如镜中所现的十力之法身,对三宝生起净信,与眷属一同安住皈依与戒。从此以后,信心日益增长,他将此前供养的六万外道逐出,为六万比丘备办以良米炊煮的饭食,供奉天人所献的阿耨达池水与龙蔓齿木,常行供养僧众。一日,他放下金链结,唤来名为黑的龙王,观看由龙王所化现、如前所述具足吉祥光辉的佛像,以长远不动的目光,七日之中作眼供养。显示巴利原文
Iddhivibhāvanādhikārappasaṅgena cetaṃ vatthu vuttaṃ, nānukkamena. Ayañhettha anukkamo – asoko kira mahārājā upari vakkhamānānukkamena sīhapañjarena olokento nigrodhasāmaṇeraṃ iriyāpathasampannaṃ nāgarajananayanāni ākaḍḍhantaṃ yugamattaṃ pekkhamānaṃ disvā pasīditvā sañjātapemo sabahumāno āmantāpetvā setacchattassa heṭṭhā sīhāsane nisīdāpetvā bhojetvā sāmaṇerassa vacanādāse dissamānaṃ dasabalassa dhammakāyaṃ disvā ratanattaye pasīditvā sapariso saraṇasīlesu patiṭṭhāya tato paṭṭhāya abhivaḍḍhamānasaddho pubbe bhojiyamānāni titthiyasaṭṭhisahassāni nīharitvā bhikkhūnaṃ saṭṭhisahassānaṃ suvakāhatasālisampāditabhattaṃ paṭṭhapetvā devatopanītaṃ anotattasalilaṃ nāgalatādantakaṭṭhañca upanāmetvā niccasaṅghupaṭṭhānaṃ karonto ekadivasaṃ suvaṇṇasaṅkhalikabandhanaṃ vissajjetvā kāḷaṃ nāgarājānaṃ ānayitvā tena nimmitaṃ vuttappakāraṃ sirīsobhaggasampannaṃ buddharūpaṃ passanto dīghaputhulaniccalanayanappabhāhi sattāhaṃ akkhipūjamakāsi.
现在,为了按次第连接而显示他进入教法的过程,说“据说,王获得灌顶后”等。外道,即外道所宣说的宗义。因为外道所宣说的宗义,对众生撒下、布下渴爱之网与邪见之网,故称为“外道(pāsaṇḍa)”。他审察、检验而后摄受。宾度娑罗是婆罗门的供养者,即从其父旃陀掘多王的时代起便亲近婆罗门。据说,旃陀掘多王子由名为旃陀迦的婆罗门鼓励,依其教导而统治全赡部洲为一国,因此,出于对那位婆罗门生起的极大尊重,从旃陀掘多时代起,约有六万婆罗门种姓者,成为该王族的常供者。婆罗门,指未成为白衣游方者等状态者。而白衣游方者等也是婆罗门种姓,故说“婆罗门种姓的外道”。此处,因撒下邪见之网等,故白衣游方者等被称为“外道”。狮窗,即大窗。以寂静之外者,即远离寂静者,意为无寂静。带入后宫,即令进入后宫、唤来的意思。显示巴利原文
Idāni pana yathānusandhiṃ ghaṭetvā anukkamena tassa sāsanāvatāraṃ dassento āha ‘‘rājā kira abhisekaṃ pāpuṇitvā’’tiādi. Bāhirakapāsaṇḍanti bāhirakappaveditaṃ samayavādaṃ. Bāhirakappaveditā hi samayavādā sattānaṃ taṇhāpāsaṃ diṭṭhipāsañca ḍenti oḍḍentīti ‘‘pāsaṇḍā’’ti vuccanti. Pariggaṇhīti vīmaṃsamāno pariggahesi. Bindusāro brāhmaṇabhatto ahosīti attano pitu candaguttassa kālato paṭṭhāya brāhmaṇesu sambhatto ahosi. Candakena nāma kira brāhmaṇena samussāhito candaguttakumāro tena dinnanaye ṭhatvā sakalajambudīpe ekarajjamakāsi, tasmā tasmiṃ brāhmaṇe sañjātabahumānavasena candaguttakālato paṭṭhāya saṭṭhisahassamattā brāhmaṇajātikā tasmiṃ rājakule niccabhattikā ahesuṃ. Brāhmaṇānanti paṇḍaraṅgaparibbājakādibhāvamanupagate dasseti. Paṇḍaraṅgaparibbājakādayo ca brāhmaṇajātivantoti āha ‘‘brāhmaṇajātiyapāsaṇḍāna’’nti. Ettha pana diṭṭhipāsādīnaṃ oḍḍanato paṇḍaraṅgādayova ‘‘pāsaṇḍā’’ti vuttā. Sīhapañjareti mahāvātapāne. Upasamaparibāhirenāti upasamato paribāhirena, upasamarahitenāti attho. Antepuraṃ atiharathāti antepuraṃ pavesetha, ānethāti vuttaṃ hoti.
“Amaccā”(大臣)意为“于诸事务中同在者”,即执行国王事务之人。“Devā”(天人)是对国王的称呼。国王们确实因五欲功德而嬉戏享乐,或住于其中;因具备胜利的能力,渴望战胜敌人;又行持或处理权势地位等的施恩纳礼、种种教诫利导之事;凭借依福德威力所获得的光辉而照耀,故被称为“天人”。同样,他们以四摄事令民众欢喜,自身也因上述种种殊胜功德而照耀、发光、庄严,故也被称为“rājāno”(王者)。“Nigaṇṭhādayo”(尼乾陀等)之中,所谓尼乾陀,是宣称“我们没有缠缚的烦恼,没有在轮回中起系缚作用的贪等烦恼,没有田地、宅舍、子女、妻子等执取对象,我们是离烦恼结者”而得名的外道。显示巴利原文
Amā saha bhavanti kiccesūti amaccā, rajjakiccavosāpanakā. Devāti rājānaṃ ālapanti. Rājāno hi dibbanti kāmaguṇehi kīḷanti, tesu vā viharanti vijayasamatthatāyogena paccatthike vijetuṃ icchanti, issariyaṭhānādisakkāradānagahaṇaṃ taṃ taṃ atthānusāsanaṃ vā karonti voharanti, puññānubhāvappattāya jutiyā jotantīti vā ‘‘devā’’ti vuccanti . Tathā hi te catūhi saṅgahavatthūhi janaṃ rañjentā sayaṃ yathāvuttehi visesehi rājanti dippanti sobhantīti ‘‘rājāno’’ti ca vuccanti. Nigaṇṭhādayoti ettha nigaṇṭho nāma ‘‘amhākaṃ gaṇṭhanakileso saṃsāre palibuddhanakicco rāgādikileso khettavatthuputtadārādivisayo natthi, kilesagaṇṭhirahitā maya’’nti evaṃ vāditāya ‘‘nigaṇṭhā’’ti laddhanāmā titthiyā.
“Uccāvacānī”意为高与低,即大与小,或殊胜与低劣。“Bhaddapīṭhakesu”指藤编的椅子。“Sāro”指戒等功德的核心。“Rājaṅgaṇena”指王宫门口开阔的空地。所谓“aṅgaṇa”(庭院),在某些语境中指烦恼,如“贪是污点”等。因为贪等令具足它们的人陷入卑劣,故称为“aṅgaṇa”。在某些语境中,指污垢或泥泞,如“为断除彼尘垢或污点而精勤”等。因“añjati”(涂抹、染污),故称“aṅgaṇa”,即污垢等。在某些语境中,指类似的开阔场所,如“塔院”、“菩提树院”等。因“añjati”(彰显),即以其极美彰显屹立其中者,故称“aṅgaṇa”,此处即取开阔地之义。“Danta”(已调伏)等之中,因心远离烦恼躁动而称为调伏;因恒常现起正念守护而称为防护;因眼等诸根寂静而称为诸根寂静;因具足安详的威仪而称为威仪圆满。现在为了具体说明尼拘律沙弥,说:“这位名为尼拘律的是谁?”等。显示巴利原文
Uccāvacānīti uccāni ca avacāni ca, mahantāni ceva khuddakāni ca, atha vā visiṭṭhāni ceva lāmakāni cāti attho. Bhaddapīṭhakesūti vettamayapīṭhesu. Sāroti sīlādiguṇasāro. Rājaṅgaṇenāti rājanivesanadvāre vivaṭena bhūmippadesena. Aṅgaṇanti hi katthaci kilesā vuccanti ‘‘rāgo aṅgaṇa’’ntiādīsu (vibha. 924). Rāgādayo hi aṅganti etehi taṃsamaṅgīpuggalā nihīnabhāvaṃ gacchantīti aṅgaṇānīti vuccanti. Katthaci malaṃ vā paṅko vā ‘‘tasseva rajassa vā aṅgaṇassa vā pahānāya vāyamatī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.184). Añjati sammakkhetīti hi aṅgaṇaṃ, malādi. Katthaci tathārūpo vivaṭappadeso ‘‘cetiyaṅgaṇaṃ bodhiyaṅgaṇa’’ntiādīsu. Añjati tattha ṭhitaṃ atisundaratāya abhibyañjetīti hi aṅgaṇaṃ, vivaṭo bhūmippadeso. Idhāpi soyeva adhippeto. Dantantiādīsu kilesavipphandarahitacittatāya dantaṃ, niccaṃ paccupaṭṭhitasatārakkhatāya guttaṃ, cakkhādiindriyānaṃ santatāya santindriyaṃ, pāsādikena iriyāpathena samannāgatattā sampannairiyāpathaṃ. Idāni nigrodhasāmaṇeraṃ sarūpato vibhāvetukāmo āha ‘‘ko panāyaṃ nigrodho nāmā’’tiādi.
在此,次第叙述如下:据说,宾度娑罗王的一百位儿子之中,摩利耶族出身的达摩提妃所生的两位王子——阿育王子与帝须王子,其中长子阿育王子治理阿槃提国。受父王派遣,他从华氏城出发,在五十由旬外的、因畏惧维度哒跋王而迁来的释迦族居住处,到达了名为毗提舍的城市,在那里娶了名为毗提舍的长者之女。在优禅尼王都治国期间,他生了名为玛欣德的王子和僧伽蜜多公主,与他们一同享受王权之乐。听闻父王病重,他便舍弃优禅尼,急速赶往华氏城,侍奉父王。父王去世后,他夺取了王位。副王苏摩那闻讯大怒,说道:“今日不是我死,便是我得王位!”他率领九十八位兄弟,如大海中涌起的波涛般铺天盖地而来。于是,优禅尼王阿育投身战斗,摧破敌军,擒获名为苏摩那的王子并将其处死。因此说道:“据说,在宾度娑罗王衰弱的时期,阿育王子舍弃了自己所得的优禅尼王国赶来,将全城掌控于手中,擒获了名为苏摩那的王子。”显示巴利原文
Tatrāyaṃ anupubbikathāti ettha bindusārassa kira ekasataputtesu moriyavaṃsajāya dhammadeviyā asokatissanāmānaṃ dvinnaṃ puttānaṃ majjhe jeṭṭho asokakumāro avantiraṭṭhaṃ bhuñjati. Pitarā pesito pāṭaliputtato paññāsayojanamatthake viṭaṭūbhabhayāgatānaṃ sākiyānamāvāsaṃ veṭisaṃ nāma nagaraṃ patvā tattha veṭisaṃ nāma seṭṭhidhītaraṃ ādāya ujjenīrājadhāniyaṃ rajjaṃ karonto mahindaṃ nāma kumāraṃ saṅghamittañca kumārikaṃ labhitvā tehi saddhiṃ rajjasukhamanubhavanto pituno gilānabhāvaṃ sutvā ujjeniṃ pahāya sīghaṃ pāṭaliputtaṃ upagantvā pitu upaṭṭhānaṃ katvā tassa accayena rajjaṃ aggahesi. Taṃ sutvā yuvarājā sumanābhidhāno kujjhitvā ‘‘ajja me maraṇaṃ vā hotu rajjaṃ vā’’ti aṭṭhanavutibhātikaparivuto saṃvaṭṭasāgare jalataraṅgasaṅghāto viya ajjhottharanto upagacchati. Tato asoko ujjenīrājā saṅgāmaṃ pakkhanditvā sattumaddanaṃ karonto sumanaṃ nāma rājakumāraṃ gahetvā ghātesi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘bindusārarañño kira dubbalakāleyeva asokakumāro attanā laddhaṃ ujjenīrajjaṃ pahāya āgantvā sabbanagaraṃ attano hatthagataṃ katvā sumanaṃ nāma rājakumāraṃ aggahesī’’ti.
“胎已成熟”指胎儿已成熟。“一座全遮蔽的宫殿”指一座全部遮蔽的宫殿。传说她凭借天神威力,在宫殿中不为大众所见而居住。“常行义务”指规定“一天做这么多”而制定的常规义务。“因缘成就”指亲依止于阿罗汉道的福德成就。“剃刀结束时”意为就在剃刀工作结束之际,即取皮肤等五业处,在把握该业处的同时,于最后发髻落下时,证得阿罗汉果。“整理身体”指以嚼齿木、洗脸等做好身体的清洁。显示巴利原文
Paripuṇṇagabbhāti paripakkagabbhā. Ekaṃ sālanti sabbaparicchannaṃ ekaṃ pāsādaṃ. ‘‘Devatāya pana ānubhāvena tasmiṃ pāsāde mahājanena adissamānā hutvā vāsaṃ kappesī’’ti vadanti. Nibaddhavattanti ‘‘ekassa divasassa ettaka’’nti niyāmetvā ṭhapitavattaṃ. Hetusampadanti arahattūpanissayapuññasampadaṃ. Khuraggeyevāti khurakammapariyosāneyeva, tacapañcakakammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā taṃ pariggaṇhanto antimāya kesavaṭṭiyā voropanāya samakālameva ca arahattaṃ pāpuṇīti vuttaṃ hoti. Sarīraṃ jaggitvāti dantakaṭṭhakhādanamukhadhovanādīhi sarīraparikammaṃ katvā.
“在狮笼附近经行”指在狮笼旁来回经行。“就在那一刹那”指就在那个刹那。他看见在王宫庭院中往来的人群而说:“这些人”。“如迷鹿般”指因不安住、具足身掉举而与迷乱之鹿相似。“极为庄严”是连接语。关于“观前顾后”,其中“观前”指向前看,正面观看称为“观前”;“顾后”指随方看,即朝某方看后随之看向该方附近的意思。“屈”指关节的弯曲。“伸”指那些关节的伸展。“出世间法”指在其余众人中不存在的殊胜之法。“爱著建立”意为爱著建立,即生起。“曾是商贾”意为曾是蜜商。显示巴利原文
Sīhapañjare caṅkamatīti sīhapañjarasamīpe aparāparaṃ caṅkamati. Taṅkhaṇaññevāti tasmiṃ khaṇeyeva. Ayaṃ janoti rājaṅgaṇe caramānaṃ janaṃ disvā vadati. Bhantamigappaṭibhāgoti anavaṭṭhitattā kāyacāpallena samannāgatattā bhantamigasadiso. Ativiya sobhatīti sambandho. Ālokitavilokitanti ettha ālokitaṃ nāma puratopekkhanaṃ. Abhimukholokanañhi ‘‘ālokita’’nti vuccati. Vilokitanti anudisāpekkhanaṃ, yaṃ disābhimukhaṃ oloketi, tadanugatadisāpekkhananti attho. Samiñjanaṃ pabbasaṅkocanaṃ. Pasāraṇañca tesaṃyeva pasāraṇaṃ. Lokuttaradhammoti sesajanesu avijjamāno visiṭṭhadhammo. Pemaṃ saṇṭhahīti pemaṃ patiṭṭhāsi, uppajjīti attho. Vāṇijako ahosīti madhuvāṇijako ahosi.
据说过去有三位兄弟,是蜜商。其中幼弟卖蜜,另两位从林中采蜜。那时,有一位独觉佛患了黄疸病。另一位独觉佛为了替他乞蜜而行脚入城。入城时,一位陶瓶女仆正要去渡口取水,看见了他。见后便上前询问,得知来意后说:‘尊者,蜜商们住在这里,请往那边去。’并伸手指示蜜铺。那位独觉佛便去了那里。幼弟蜜商看见他,心生欢喜,问道:‘尊者,您为何而来?’得知缘由后,便取钵盛满蜂蜜。正在布施时,他看见满钵的蜂蜜溢出,从钵口流下滴落地面,心生净信,发愿道:‘尊者,愿我以此善业,能于赡部洲洲作一统之王,愿我的号令遍及空中与地上各一由旬。’独觉佛说:‘居士,愿如此成就。’便前往香山,为那位独觉佛制药。显示巴利原文
Atīte kira tayo bhātaro madhuvāṇijakā ahesuṃ. Tesu kaniṭṭho madhuṃ vikkiṇāti, itare araññato āharanti. Tadā eko paccekabuddho paṇḍukarogāturo ahosi. Aparo pana paccekabuddho tadatthaṃ madhubhikkhāya caramāno nagaraṃ pāvisi. Paviṭṭhañca taṃ ekā kumbhadāsī udakaharaṇatthaṃ titthaṃ gacchamānā addasa. Disvā ca pucchitvā āgatakāraṇañca ñatvā ‘‘ettha, bhante, madhuvāṇijakā vasanti, tattha gacchathā’’ti hatthaṃ pasāretvā madhuāpaṇaṃ dassesi. So ca tattha agamāsi. Taṃ disvā kaniṭṭho madhuvāṇijo sañjātapītisomanasso ‘‘kenāgatāttha, bhante’’ti pucchitvā tamatthaṃ viditvā pattaṃ gahetvā madhuno pūretvā dadamāno pattapuṇṇaṃ madhuṃ uggantvā mukhato vissanditvā bhūmiyaṃ patamānaṃ disvā pasannamānaso ‘‘imināhaṃ, bhante, puññakammena jambudīpe ekarajjaṃ kareyyaṃ, āṇā ca me ākāse pathaviyañca yojanappamāṇe ṭhāne pharatū’’ti patthanamakāsi. Paccekabuddho ca ‘‘evaṃ hotu upāsakā’’ti vatvā gandhamādanaṃ gantvā paccekabuddhassa bhesajjamakāsi.
幼弟蜜商布施了蜂蜜之后,坐在家中,见两位兄长从森林归来,便说:“兄长们,请生净信,我取了我们兄弟二人的蜂蜜,盛满那位独觉佛的钵,供养了他。”长兄听后恼怒地说:“披袈裟者中也有旃陀罗,从你手中接过蜂蜜而去的,不正是旃陀罗吗?”中兄也恼怒地说:“把你的独觉佛抓去扔进外海!”后来,两位兄长听了幼弟讲述关于布施果报的关联法义,也都随喜了。那位陶瓶女仆则发愿道:“愿我能成为那位施蜜者的正妃。”后来,幼弟成为无忧法王;陶瓶女仆获得极为殊胜的容貌,成为他的正妃,名为阿僧祇蜜多;那位说“外海”的中兄,便在此铜掌岛成为具有大威力的天爱帝须王;长兄则因说了“旃陀罗”,生于旃陀罗村,成为一位名为尼拘陀的沙弥。因此古德说:“据说往昔造善业时,这位国王的长兄,原是一位商人。”显示巴利原文
Kaniṭṭho pana madhuvāṇijo madhuṃ datvā gehe nisinno itare araññato āgate disvā evamāha ‘‘tumhākaṃ bhātaro cittaṃ pasādetha, mamañca tumhākañca madhuṃ gahetvā īdisassa nāma paccekabuddhassa pattaṃ pūretvā adāsi’’nti. Tesu jeṭṭho kujjhitvā evamāha ‘‘caṇḍālāpi kāsāvanivāsino honti, nanu tava hatthato madhuṃ paṭiggahetvā gato caṇḍālo bhavissatī’’ti. Majjhimo pana kujjhitvā ‘‘tava paccekabuddhaṃ gahetvā parasamudde nikkhipāhī’’ti āha. Pacchā pana tepi dve bhātaro kaniṭṭhena vuccamānaṃ dānānisaṃsapaṭisaṃyuttakathaṃ sutvā anumodiṃsuyeva. Sāpi ca kumbhadāsī ‘‘tassa madhudāyakassa aggamahesī bhaveyya’’nti patthanamakāsi. Tesu kaniṭṭho asoko dhammarājā ahosi, sā ca kumbhadāsī ativiya rūpasobhaggappattā asandhimittā nāma tassa aggamahesī ahosi. Parasamuddavādī pana majjhimo imasmiṃyeva tambapaṇṇidīpe devānaṃpiyatisso nāma mahānubhāvo rājā ahosi. Jeṭṭho pana caṇḍālavāditāya caṇḍālagāme jāto nigrodho nāma sāmaṇero ahosi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘pubbe hi kira puññakaraṇakāle esa rañño jeṭṭhabhātā vāṇijako ahosī’’ti.
在“pubbe va sannivāsenā”(过去因共住)一句中,应知为顺应偈颂韵律,将“vā”字略作缩短,其意为“pubbe sannivāsena vā”(或因过去共住)。其中,“pubbe”指过去生。“sannivāsena”指共同居住。此处的“saṃ”字含有“一同”的意思。“paccuppannahitena vā”指因在现世存在中行持的利益。如此,由这两种原因,名为情爱的亲爱便生起、产生。意思是:亲爱确实由两种原因生起——过去世中,或为母、或为父、或为女、或为子、或为兄、或为弟、或为姐、或为妹、或为夫、或为妻、或为同伴、或为朋友,曾与某人同住共处,由于这种“过去因共住”,即使在另一生中,那份情爱仍相续不舍;再加上此生所作的“现世利益”。如是,由这两种原因,称为亲爱之情便生起。譬如说什么呢?即“uppalaṃ va yathodake”(犹如莲花在水中)。此处也应知“vā”字依前法缩短。这里的“vā”字有“未说完集”的意义,以此涵盖红莲等。“yathā”是比喻之词。显示巴利原文
Pubbe va sannivāsenāti ettha (jā. aṭṭha. 2.2.174) gāthābandhavasena vā-saddassa rassattaṃ katanti veditabbaṃ, pubbe sannivāsena vāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tattha pubbeti atītajātiyaṃ. Sannivāsenāti sahavāsena. Sahasaddattho hi ayaṃ saṃsaddo. Paccuppannahitena vāti paccuppanne vattamānabhave hitacaraṇena vā. Evaṃ imehi dvīhi kāraṇehi sinehasaṅkhātaṃ pemaṃ jāyate uppajjati. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – pemaṃ nāmetaṃ dvīhipi kāraṇehi jāyati, purimabhave mātā vā pitā vā dhītā vā putto vā bhātā vā bhaginī vā pati vā bhariyā vā sahāyo vā mitto vā hutvā yo yena saddhiṃ ekaṭṭhāne nivutthapubbo, tassa iminā pubbe vā sannivāsena bhavantarepi anubandhanto so sineho na vijahati, imasmiṃ attabhāve katena paccuppannena hitena vāti evaṃ imehi dvīhi kāraṇehi taṃ pemaṃ nāma jāyatīti. Kiṃ viyāti āha ‘‘uppalaṃ va yathodake’’ti. Etthāpi vā-saddassa vuttanayeneva rassattaṃ katanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Avuttasampiṇḍanattho cettha vāsaddo. Tena padumādayo saṅgaṇhāti. Yathā-saddo upamāyaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yathā uppalañca sesañca padumādi udake jāyamānaṃ dve kāraṇāni nissāya jāyati udakañceva kalalañca, tathā etehi dvīhi kāraṇehi pemaṃ jāyatīti.
“Rañño hatthe”指已来到近前、在国王手中。“Rañño anurūpaṃ”:因国王杀害了九十九位兄弟,性行残暴,又立于王位,他心想“此人是放逸而住者”,于是开始宣说与之相应的《法句·不放逸品》。其中,“appamādo”(不放逸)即不远离念,是对恒常现起之念的称呼。“Amatapadaṃ”(不死之道):所谓“不死”,即是涅槃。因为它不生,所以不老、不死,故称不死。“不死之道”即通往不死之道,意为证得不死的方法。“Pamādo”(放逸)即放逸的状态,是对名为忘念、舍弃念的称呼。“Maccuno”(死魔)指死亡。“Padaṃ”(途径)指方法、道路。因为放逸者不能超越生,出生之后,便老、死,故说放逸是死魔的途径,意即导向死亡。显示巴利原文
Rañño hattheti santikaṃ upagatassa rañño hatthe. Rañño anurūpanti ekūnasatabhātukānaṃ ghātitattā caṇḍapakatitāya rajje ṭhitattā ca ‘‘pamādavihārī aya’’nti maññamāno tadanurūpaṃ dhammapade appamādavaggaṃ desetuṃ ārabhi. Tattha (dha. pa. aṭṭha. 1.23) appamādoti satiyā avippavāso, niccaṃ upaṭṭhitāya satiyā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Amatapadanti amataṃ vuccati nibbānaṃ. Tañhi ajātattā na jīyati na mīyati, tasmā ‘‘amata’’nti vuccati. Amatassa padaṃ amatapadaṃ, amatassa adhigamupāyoti vuttaṃ hoti. Pamādoti pamajjanabhāvo, muṭṭhassaccasaṅkhātassa satiyā vossaggassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Maccunoti maraṇassa. Padanti upāyo maggo. Pamatto hi jātiṃ nātivattati, jāto pana jīyati ceva mīyati cāti pamādo maccuno padaṃ nāma hoti, maraṇaṃ upanetīti vuttaṃ hoti.
“已知了,贤友,请结束吧”这句话,表明了他自己的领悟:“我仅凭‘应恒常以不放逸而住’这一句便已了知,请您结束说法吧。”这显示他对该法生起了自己想要修行的意愿,从而激发说法者结束说法、进行讲述的精勤。然而,有些人认为:“‘abhāsī’一词,应取‘我将说、我思惟’之义,因为已经确定‘我将宣说全部的不放逸品’,所以用了‘abhāsī’;但国王听了半偈便说‘已知了,贤友,请结束吧’,因此‘他未再往下说’。”但在三部《结文》中,都指出此说并不合理。“Dhuvabhattānī”意指常设的供养食。“Vajjāvajjaṃ upanijjhāyatī”:因为观察过失与无过,故称为“亲教师”(upajjhāya),意为“见过失与无过后,予以指责、提醒的人”。其中,“vajjāvajjaṃ”指的是小过失与大过失。“指责者”是指出言“你做了这恶行,你说了这恶语”等,进行呵责的人。“提醒者”是指对那些忘记自身过失的人,令其生起忆念,或在正行之道上提醒、令其安住的人。显示巴利原文
Aññātaṃ tāta, pariyosāpehīti iminā ‘‘sadā appamādena hutvā vattitabbanti ettakeneva mayā ñātaṃ, tumhe dhammadesanaṃ niṭṭhapethā’’ti tasmiṃ dhamme attano paṭipajjitukāmataṃ dīpento dhammadesanāya pariyosānaṃ pāpetvā kathane ussāhaṃ janeti. Keci pana ‘‘abhāsīti ettha ‘bhāsissāmi vitakkemī’ti atthaṃ gahetvā ‘sabbaṃ appamādavaggaṃ bhāsissāmī’ti sallakkhitattā abhāsīti vuttaṃ, raññā pana aḍḍhagāthaṃ sutvāva ‘aññātaṃ tāta, pariyosāpehī’ti vuttattā ‘upari na kathesī’’’ti vadanti. ‘‘Taṃ pana yuttaṃ na hotī’’ti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Dhuvabhattānīti niccabhattāni. Vajjāvajjaṃ upanijjhāyatīti upajjhāyoti āha ‘‘vajjāvajjaṃ disvā codetā sāretā cā’’ti. Tattha vajjāvajjanti khuddakaṃ mahantañca vajjaṃ. Codetāti ‘‘idaṃ tayā dukkaṭaṃ, idaṃ dubbhāsita’’ntiādīni vatvā codetā. Sāretāti attano vajjaṃ assarantassa satiṃ uppādetā, sammāpaṭipattiyaṃ vā sāretā, pavattetāti attho.
“应如此诵习佛语,应如此前进,应如此后退”等,由于教导行仪,故称“阿阇梨”,因此说他是“在此教法中,令弟子安立于应学诸法的人”。其中,“应学之法”即全部佛语以及戒等诸法。“出家与具足戒”——这是就可获得的情况而说的。应当以“阿阇梨与和尚”来连接“出家与具足戒”,而用“我的”则仅连接“出家”。那时,由于尼拘陀尚处沙弥阶段,是就未来将得的具足戒而言,故两者皆可连接。由于依皈依三宝而成就出家,故应知比丘僧团也是出家的依止处。依剃发仪式也可获得依止,应如此理解。“日日令增长”,即依所说的方法,日日从各方面令功德成倍增长。“以凡夫的方式”,即随顺凡夫状态的方式。因为是以赞叹尼拘陀长老的威德为主,所以将前已说及后应说的内容汇集一处,说:“国王又建造了名为阿育园的大寺”等。“以塔庙庄严”中,应恭敬、应供养的对象为塔,或因由砖等堆砌而成故称为塔,以诸塔庙而庄严、装饰者,即为以塔庙庄严。“依法”,即不偏离于法。显示巴利原文
‘‘Evaṃ tayā buddhavacanaṃ sajjhāyitabbaṃ, evaṃ abhikkamitabbaṃ, evaṃ paṭikkamitabba’’ntiādinā ācārassa sikkhāpanato ācariyo nāmāti āha ‘‘imasmiṃ sāsane sikkhitabbakadhammesu patiṭṭhāpetā’’ti. Tattha sikkhitabbakadhammo nāma sakalaṃ buddhavacanaṃ sīlādayo ca dhammā. ‘‘Pabbajjā ca upasampadā cā’’ti idaṃ labbhamānavasena vuttaṃ . Ācariyupajjhāyānanti iminā pabbajjā upasampadā ca yojetabbā, mama cāti iminā pana pabbajjāva. Tadā sāmaṇerabhūmiyaṃ ṭhitattā nigrodhassa bhāviniṃ vā upasampadaṃ sandhāya ubhayampi yojetabbaṃ. Saraṇagamanavasena pabbajjāsiddhito bhikkhusaṅghassapi pabbajjāya nissayabhāvo veditabbo. Bhaṇḍukammavasenapi nissayabhāvo labbhatevāti gahetabbaṃ. Divase divase vaḍḍhāpentoti vuttanayeneva divase divase tato tato diguṇaṃ katvā vaḍḍhāpento. Pothujjanikenāti puthujjanabhāvānurūpena. Nigrodhattherassa ānubhāvakittanādhikārattā pubbe vuttampi pacchā vattabbampi sampiṇḍetvā āha ‘‘puna rājā asokārāmaṃ nāma mahāvihāraṃ kāretvā’’tiādi . Cetiyapaṭimaṇḍitānīti ettha cayitabbaṃ pūjetabbanti cetiyaṃ, iṭṭhakādīhi citattā vā cetiyaṃ, cetiyehi paṭimaṇḍitāni vibhūsitānīti cetiyapaṭimaṇḍitāni. Dhammenāti dhammato anapetena.
为了详细阐明已说的内容,说道:“据说某一天”等。“在阿育园作大布施”——此处是就后来建造的园林,依建造者国王之名而惯用的称呼,故说“阿育园”。然而,有些人说:“那一天,国王就在自己家中,令全体比丘僧团就座,供养饮食后,问了这个问题。”所谓作大布施,即供养饮食后,更以布施一切资具的方式进行广大布施。此说在《岛史》中亦有记载。显示巴利原文
Vuttamevatthaṃ vitthārato vibhāvento āha ‘‘ekadivasaṃ kirā’’tiādi. Asokārāme mahādānaṃ datvāti ettha kate ārāme pacchā kārāpakassa rañño nāmavasena niruḷhaṃ nāmapaṇṇattiṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘asokārāme’’ti. Keci pana ‘‘tasmiṃ divase rājā attano ghareyeva sabbaṃ bhikkhusaṅghaṃ nisīdāpetvā bhojetvā imaṃ pañhaṃ pucchī’’ti vadanti. Mahādānaṃ datvāti bhojetvā sabbaparikkhāradānavasena mahādānaṃ datvā. Vuttañhetaṃ dīpavaṃse –
引入宫殿,请坐于座;
粥、种种嚼食,及殊胜饮食;
以清净之手,随其所欲,尽其所需而施与。
敬礼后,无忧法王退坐一面;
国王坐下后,以资具邀请比丘僧团。
比丘们所欲求的,我皆随其所愿而施与;
以资具令其满足,又以资具发出邀请;
此后,他询问了甚深、善说的法蕴。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Nivesanaṃ pavesetvā, nisīdāpetvāna āsane; Yāguṃ nānāvidhaṃ khajjaṃ, bhojanañca mahārahaṃ; Adāsi payatapāṇi, yāvadatthaṃ yadicchakaṃ. ‘‘Bhuttāvibhikkhusaṅghassa, onītapattapāṇino; Ekamekassa bhikkhuno, adāsi yugasāṭakaṃ. ‘‘Pādaabbhañjanaṃ telaṃ, chattañcāpi upāhanaṃ; Sabbaṃ samaṇaparikkhāraṃ, adāsi phāṇitaṃ madhuṃ. ‘‘Abhivādetvā nisīdi, asokadhammo mahīpati; Nisajja rājā pavāresi, bhikkhusaṅghassa paccayaṃ. ‘‘Yāvatā bhikkhū icchanti, tāva demi yadicchakaṃ; Santappetvā parikkhārena, pavāretvāna paccaye; Tato apucchi gambhīraṃ, dhammakkhandhaṃ sudesita’’nti.
“大王,就支而言,有九支”等,据说是目犍连子帝须长老所说。他设立了工程监理:在八万四千寺中,对于所应进行的营造工程,设立了监理与管事者。据说,所有城邑的信函在同一天送达:即在一切寺院,据传皆于罗睺捉月之日开工,又于罗睺捉月之日竣工,因此说信函在同一天到达。八支戒,即八支布萨戒。“以一切庄严而庄严”,这是就未受持布萨支的人而言。阿摩罗瓦提王城,即三十三天城。“已庄严、已整备”,即通过庄严而一切就绪。显示巴利原文
Aṅgato, mahārāja, nava aṅgānītiādi moggaliputtatissattherena vuttanti vadanti. Navakammādhiṭṭhāyakaṃ adāsīti caturāsītivihārasahassesu kattabbassa navakammassa adhiṭṭhāyakaṃ vidhāyakaṃ katvā adāsi. Ekadivasameva sabbanagarehi paṇṇāni āgamiṃsūti sabbavihāresu kira rāhunā candassa gahaṇadivase navakammaṃ ārabhitvā puna rāhunā candassa gahaṇadivaseyeva niṭṭhāpesuṃ, tasmā ekadivasameva paṇṇāni āgamiṃsūti vadanti. Aṭṭha sīlaṅgānīti aṭṭha uposathaṅgasīlāni. ‘‘Sabbālaṅkāravibhūsitāyā’’ti idaṃ asamādinnuposathaṅgānaṃ vasena vuttaṃ. Amaravatiyā rājadhāniyāti tāvatiṃsadevanagare. Alaṅkatapaṭiyattanti alaṅkatakaraṇavasena sabbasajjitaṃ.
“Adhikaṃ kāraṃ adhikāraṃ, adhikaṃ kiriyanti vuttaṃ hoti.”意为:增上的所作即增上事,增上的行为。所谓“世界显露”,是他们示现了神变——此处,能令数以千计的器世间与其所居有情世间显露出来的神变,名为世界显露。而作此神变时,具神通者或令黑暗成光明,或令隐蔽成显露,或令不在视野者入于视野。如何成就呢?此中,若欲令自己或他人显现,即使隐蔽,或立于远处,自己或他人也能被看见。为此,从安止定出定后,作意:“愿此黑暗处成光明”或“愿此隐蔽处成显露”或“愿此不在视野者入于视野”,再入安止定,出定后决意。与决意同时,便如所决意的那样成就。他人即使立于远处也能得见,若自己欲见也能得见,如同世尊从天而降之时。世尊在天界讲说完阿毗达摩后,下降至桑伽沙城时,立于须弥山顶,眺望东方世界,数千铁围山皆显露无余,犹如一片平地。如同东方,西方、北方、南方也都能见到一切显露。下方直至无间地狱,上方直到色究竟天,全都得见。人看见天,天也看见人。在那里,人无须仰视,天不须俯视,一切众生皆面对面互相看见。那一日便名为世界显露。显示巴利原文
Adhikaṃ kāraṃ adhikāraṃ, adhikaṃ kiriyanti vuttaṃ hoti. Lokavivaraṇaṃ nāma pāṭihāriyaṃ akaṃsūti ettha anekasahassasaṅkhyassa okāsalokassa tannivāsīsattalokassa ca vivaṭabhāvakaraṇapāṭihāriyaṃ lokavivaraṇaṃ nāma. Taṃ pana karonto iddhimā andhakāraṃ vā ālokaṃ karoti, paṭicchannaṃ vā vivaṭaṃ, anāpāthaṃ vā āpāthaṃ karoti. Kathaṃ? Ayañhi yathā paṭicchannopi dūre ṭhitopi attā vā paro vā dissati, evaṃ attānaṃ vā paraṃ vā pākaṭaṃ kātukāmo pādakajjhānato vuṭṭhāya ‘‘idaṃ andhakāraṭṭhānaṃ ālokajātaṃ hotū’’ti vā ‘‘idaṃ paṭicchannaṃ vivaṭaṃ hotū’’ti vā ‘‘idaṃ anāpāthaṃ āpāthaṃ hotū’’ti vā āvajjetvā puna pādakajjhānaṃ samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya adhiṭṭhāti. Saha adhiṭṭhānena yathādhiṭṭhitameva hoti. Apare dūre ṭhitāpi passanti, sayampi passitukāmo passati bhagavā viya devorohaṇe. Bhagavā hi devaloke abhidhammadesanaṃ niṭṭhapetvā saṅkassanagaraṃ otaranto sinerumuddhani ṭhatvā puratthimaṃ lokadhātuṃ olokesi, anekāni cakkavāḷasahassāni vivaṭāni viya hutvā ekaṅgaṇaṃ viya hutvā pakāsiṃsu. Yathā ca puratthimena, evaṃ pacchimenapi uttarenapi dakkhiṇenapi sabbaṃ vivaṭamaddasa. Heṭṭhāpi yāva avīci upari ca yāva akaniṭṭhabhavanaṃ, tāva addasa. Manussāpi deve passanti, devāpi manusse. Tattha neva manussā uddhaṃ ullokenti, na devā adho olokenti, sabbe sammukhasammukhāva aññamaññaṃ passanti, taṃ divasaṃ lokavivaraṇaṃ nāma ahosi.
再者,在铜掌岛(锡兰),塔朗迦罗住者法授长老也曾示现此神通。据说,有一天他坐在大寺的塔院里,开示《无厄经》(增支部3.16):“比丘们,具足三法的比丘,已行于无厄之道。”说法时,他将扇子向下扇,从无间地狱起一切皆成一片平地;然后向上扇,直至梵天界一切皆成一片平地。长老以地狱之苦令众怖畏,又以天界之乐令众欣求,然后说法。与会中,有些人证得须陀洹,有些人证得斯陀含、阿那含、阿拉汉。如是,在那一天也出现了所谓的“世界显露”。而这些比丘,如同法王阿育王站在阿育园中,环顾四方,遍见以海为界的整个赡部洲,以及八万四千寺院以盛大的寺院大供养而熠熠生辉那般,如此决意后,便示现了名为“世界显露”的神通。显示巴利原文
Apica tambapaṇṇidīpe taḷaṅgaravāsī dhammadinnattheropi imaṃ pāṭihāriyaṃ akāsi. So kira ekadivasaṃ tissamahāvihāre cetiyaṅgaṇamhi nisīditvā ‘‘tīhi, bhikkhave, dhammehi samannāgato bhikkhu apaṇṇakapaṭipadaṃ paṭipanno hotī’’ti apaṇṇakasuttaṃ (a. ni. 3.16) kathento heṭṭhāmukhaṃ bījaniṃ akāsi, yāva avīcito ekaṅgaṇaṃ ahosi, tato uparimukhaṃ akāsi, yāva brahmalokā ekaṅgaṇaṃ ahosi. Thero nirayabhayena tajjetvā saggasukhena ca palobhetvā dhammaṃ desesi. Keci sotāpannā ahesuṃ, keci sakadāgāmī anāgāmī arahantoti evaṃ tasmiṃ divasepi lokavivaraṇaṃ nāma ahosi. Ime pana bhikkhū yathā asoko dhammarājā asokārāme ṭhito catuddisā anuvilokento samantato samuddapariyantaṃ jambudīpaṃ passati, caturāsīti ca vihārasahassāni uḷārāya vihāramahapūjāya virocamānāni, evaṃ adhiṭṭhahitvā lokavivaraṇaṃ nāma pāṭihāriyaṃ akaṃsu.
“寺院大供养”是指称为寺院盛典的供养。“辉煌”指成就。如此这般的“喜悦与欢喜”,是指以舍离为根本的喜悦与欢喜。“将重担交给了目犍连子帝须长老”是指:由于长老有大威德,比丘僧团心想“若还有应说之事,他自会宣说”,便将国王所问问题的解答付托给了长老。“我是教法的继承者,或不是”意为:我是教法的亲族、内部人,或不是。对于那些在教法中出家的人,若无子女,他们便不会将教法中应做之事视为自己的责任而承担——针对此义,长老如此说道:“大王,仅凭此,并不成为教法的继承者。”“那么,尊者,如何才成为教法的继承者?”在此,“carahi”这一小品词表达了不满。其意为:既然作了这样的舍离,还不算教法的继承者,那么要如何做才算呢?显示巴利原文
Vihāramahapūjāyāti vihāramahasaṅkhātāya pūjāya. Vibhūtinti sampattiṃ. Evarūpaṃ pītipāmojjanti īdisaṃ pariccāgamūlakaṃ pītipāmojjaṃ. Moggaliputtatissattherassa bhāramakāsīti therassa mahānubhāvattā ‘‘uttaripi ce kathetabbaṃ atthi, tampi soyeva kathessatī’’ti maññamāno bhikkhusaṅgho raññā pucchitapañhassa visajjanaṃ therassa bhāramakāsi. Sāsanassa dāyādo homi, na homīti sāsanassa ñātako abbhantaro homi, na homīti attho. Yesaṃ sāsane pabbajitā puttadhītaro na santi, na te sāsane kattabbakiccaṃ attano bhāraṃ katvā vahantīti imamatthaṃ sandhāya thero evamāha ‘‘na kho, mahārāja, ettāvatā sāsanassa dāyādo hotī’’ti. Kathañcarahi, bhante, sāsanassa dāyādo hotīti ettha carahīti nipāto akkhantiṃ dīpeti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yadi evarūpaṃ pariccāgaṃ katvāpi sāsanassa dāyādo na hoti, aññaṃ kiṃ nāma katvā hotīti.
“从帝须王子出家之时起”是指:帝须王子何时出家、因何因缘出家,这一切将在后文详细阐明。“你能”即“你能够”。“心生欢喜”即已生起欢喜。“得到子女的心”在此,应知女儿也因通称而以“子”字表述;或者应视为“子与女”合称为“子女”的省略说法。据声明学者说,当“子”字与“女”字连用时,仅“子”字留存,“女”字则隐没。“令住于学处”是指:就在那结界场内,通过给予学处认可,劝令受持从不杀生到不非时食为止的六条学处,使其安住于学处。即使是六十岁的沙弥尼,也必须受持“我受持不杀生学处,两年不违犯”等六条学处而修学。因为,若沙弥尼在这六条学处上未修学满两年,则不得令其受具足戒。“灌顶后六年”即“六个灌顶年”,意指灌顶以来已度过六年。显示巴利原文
Tissakumārassa pabbajitakālato pabhutīti yadā ca tissakumāro pabbajito, yena ca kāraṇena pabbajito, taṃ sabbaṃ vitthārato uttari āvi bhavissati. Sakkhasīti sakkhissasi. Pāmojjajātoti sañjātapāmojjo. Puttānaṃ manaṃ labhitvāti ettha puttīpi sāmaññato puttasaddena vuttāti veditabbā, putto ca dhītā ca puttāti evaṃ ekasesanayena vā evaṃ vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Dhītusaddena saha payujjamāno hi puttasaddo ekova avasissati, dhītusaddo nivattatīti saddasatthavidū vadanti. Sikkhāya patiṭṭhāpesunti tasmiṃyeva sīmamaṇḍale sikkhāsammutiṃ datvā pāṇātipātāveramaṇiādīsu vikālabhojanāveramaṇipariyosānāsu chasu sikkhāsu samādapanavasena sikkhāya patiṭṭhāpesuṃ. Saṭṭhivassāyapi hi sāmaṇeriyā ‘‘pāṇātipātāveramaṇiṃ dve vassāni avītikkamma samādānaṃ samādiyāmī’’tiādinā (pāci. 1078-1079) cha sikkhāyo samādiyitvā sikkhitabbāyeva. Na hi etāsu chasu sikkhāpadesu dve vassāni asikkhitasikkhaṃ sāmaṇeriṃ upasampādetuṃ vaṭṭati. Cha vassāni abhisekassa assāti chabbassābhiseko, abhisekato paṭṭhāya atikkantachavassoti vuttaṃ hoti.
“一切皆是上座说”是指:在此,应知“上座部”即两次结集所载的圣典本身。因为那是大迦叶等大长老之说,故称为“上座部”。“贡塔子帝须长老”:在此,贡塔鸟是一种紧那罗族类。三部《结文》中说:“其中,卧于一位紧那罗母胎中的人类种姓者,由国王抚养,名为贡塔子帝须长老。”《大史》中也有记载。显示巴利原文
Sabbaṃ theravādanti dve saṅgītiyo āruḷhā pāḷiyevettha ‘‘theravādo’’ti veditabbā. Sā hi mahākassapapabhutīnaṃ mahātherānaṃ vādattā ‘‘theravādo’’ti vuccati. Kontaputtatissattheroti ettha kontasakuṇiyo nāma kinnarajātiyo. ‘‘Tāsu ekissā kucchiyaṃ sayito manussajātiko raññā posito kontaputtatissatthero nāmā’’ti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Mahāvaṃsepi cetaṃ vuttaṃ –
往昔,有一位林居者从华氏城出发,漫游于林中;
据说,他与一位贡塔紧那罗女同居。
于大婆噜那长老的时代,他们于长老座下出家;
二人俱证得阿拉汉,具足六通功德。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Pure pāṭaliputtamhā, vane vanacaro caraṃ; Kontakinnariyā saddhiṃ, saṃvāsaṃ kira kappayi. ‘‘Tena saṃvāsamanvāya, sā putte janayī duve; Tisso jeṭṭho kaniṭṭho tu, sumitto nāma nāmato. ‘‘Mahāvaruṇattherassa , kāle pabbaji santike; Arahattaṃ pāpuṇiṃsu, chaḷabhiññāguṇaṃ ubho’’ti.
然而,有些人这样说:“贡塔是生于木车王族的一位王女。她被金翅鸟机关带到森林,一位林居者将她带回,与她共住。她为他生了两个儿子。其中,长子以母名得名‘贡塔子’。”据说,在木车王的城中,所有富贵之人都制作了类似金翅鸟的机关,用于河流与山岳的游戏等,如同木车王乘着金翅鸟车游行一般。显示巴利原文
Keci pana evaṃ vadanti ‘‘kontā nāma kaṭṭhavāhanarañño vaṃse jātā ekā rājadhītā. Taṃ garuḷayantena araññagataṃ eko vanacarako ānetvā tāya saddhiṃ saṃvāsaṃ kappesi. Sā tassa ubho putte vijāyi. Tatrāyaṃ jeṭṭhako mātunāmena kontaputto nāma jāto’’ti. Kaṭṭhavāhanarañño kira nagare sabbepi vibhavasampannā nadīpabbatakīḷādīsu garuḷasakuṇasadisaṃ yantaṃ kāretvā kaṭṭhavāhanarājā viya garuḷavāhanena vicaranti.
“为治病而依乞食行仪次第巡行,却连一握之量的酥油也未得到”:据说,那时长兄贡塔子帝须长老腹痛发作。幼弟须弥陀长老见他被剧烈的苦受所逼迫,便问道:“尊者,在此应当求取何物?”帝须长老说:“贤友,应当求取一握之量的酥油。”他拒绝了向国王禀报、为了病缘而在非时寻求酥油的做法,说:“你就在乞食时,为乞食而巡行,若有可能得到,便如此巡行,将所得之物带来。”幼弟依所说的方式以乞食行仪巡行,却连一握之量的酥油也未能得到。然而,那腹痛极为剧烈,纵使以百罐酥油也无法平息。长老便因此病力而般涅槃。然而,有些人说:“长老被名为蝎子的虫毒所咬,因毒力而生起极重苦受,为平息此苦,依前述方式未得到一握之量的酥油,便般涅槃了。”《大史》中如是说:显示巴利原文
Byādhipaṭikammatthaṃ bhikkhācāravattena āhiṇḍanto pasatamattaṃ sappiṃ alabhitvāti tadā kira jeṭṭhassa kontaputtatissattherassa kucchivāto samuṭṭhāsi. Taṃ bāḷhāya dukkhavedanāya pīḷitaṃ kaniṭṭho sumitto nāma thero disvā ‘‘kimettha, bhante, laddhuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti pucchi. Tissatthero, ‘‘āvuso, pasatamattaṃ sappiṃ laddhuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti vatvā rañño nivedanaṃ tassa gilānapaccayaṃ pacchābhattaṃ sappiatthāya caraṇañca paṭikkhipitvā ‘‘bhikkhācāravelāyameva piṇḍāya carantena tayā yadi sakkā laddhuṃ, evaṃ vicaritvā yaṃ laddhaṃ, taṃ āharā’’ti āha. Kaniṭṭhopi vuttanayeneva bhikkhācāravattena caranto pasatamattampi sappiṃ nālattha. So pana kucchivāto balavataro sappighaṭasatenapi vūpasametuṃ asakkuṇeyyo ahosi. Thero teneva byādhibalena kālamakāsi. Keci pana ‘‘vicchikanāmakena kīṭavisena ḍaṭṭho thero tassa visavegena adhimattāya dukkhavedanāya samannāgato taṃ vūpasametuṃ vuttanayeneva pasatamattaṃ sappiṃ alabhitvā parinibbuto’’ti vadanti. Vuttañhetaṃ mahāvaṃse –
脚被虫毒所螫,长兄苦受缠身;
当幼弟问起时,他说:“药是一握酥油。”
长老拒绝向国王呈报,也拒绝以病缘、
以及为酥油而于食后巡行。
行乞时,你若得到酥油,便带回来;
这位帝沙长老便对最胜长老苏弥陀这样说:
他行乞时,并未得到一捧酥油;
纵有百罐酥油,所生之病亦无法治愈。
他安坐虚空中,依火界之力;
如其所愿决意后,身体入般涅槃。
火焰从身中发出,烧尽无肉之骨灰;
长老的全身虽焚,骨骸却不被烧。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Pāde kīṭavisenāsi, ḍaṭṭho jeṭṭho savedano; Āha puṭṭho kaniṭṭhena, bhesajjaṃ pasataṃ ghataṃ. ‘‘Rañño nivedanaṃ thero, gilānapaccayepi ca; Sappiatthañca caraṇaṃ, pacchābhattaṃ paṭikkhipi. ‘‘Piṇḍāya ce caraṃ sappiṃ, labhase tvaṃ tamāhara; Iccāha tissatthero so, sumittaṃ theramuttamaṃ. ‘‘Piṇḍāya caratā tena, na laddhaṃ pasataṃ ghataṃ; Sappikumbhasatenāpi, byādhi jāto asādhiyo. ‘‘Teneva byādhinā thero, patto āyukkhayantikaṃ; Ovaditvappamādena, nibbātuṃ mānasaṃ akā. ‘‘Ākāsamhi nisīditvā, tejodhātuvasena so; Yathāruci adhiṭṭhāya, sarīraṃ parinibbuto. ‘‘Jālā sarīrā nikkhamma, nimaṃsachārikaṃ ḍahi; Therassa sakalaṃ kāyaṃ, aṭṭhikāni tu no ḍahī’’ti.
以不放逸教诫:即这样以不放逸教诫说:“如同我们这样的人,这些资具也是难得的;你们在获得资具时,应不放逸地修行沙门法。”结跏趺坐:即双腿盘结、四周以大腿绑定的坐姿。此处的具格,是表示如此状态的用法。入火界定:即入取火界遍为所缘的禅定。向长老致敬:即对长老的舍利致敬。于四门造池,盛满药物:即于每一门各造四池,其中一池盛满酥油,一池盛满蜂蜜,一池盛满糖浆,一池盛满糖。其余诸门也如此造作,据说。显示巴利原文
Appamādena ovaditvāti ‘‘amhādisānampi evaṃ paccayā dullabhā, tumhe labhamānesu paccayesu appamajjitvā samaṇadhammaṃ karothā’’ti evaṃ appamādena ovaditvā. Pallaṅkenāti samantato ūrubaddhāsanena. Itthambhūtalakkhaṇe cetaṃ karaṇavacanaṃ. Tejodhātuṃ samāpajjitvāti tejodhātukasiṇārammaṇaṃ jhānaṃ samāpajjitvā. Therassa sakkāraṃ katvāti therassa dhātusakkāraṃ katvā. Catūsu dvāresu pokkharaṇiyo kārāpetvā bhesajjassa pūrāpetvāti ekasmiṃ dvāre catasso pokkharaṇiyo kārāpetvā tattha ekaṃ pokkharaṇiṃ sappissa pūrāpetvā ekaṃ madhuno, ekaṃ phāṇitassa, ekaṃ sakkarāya pūrāpesi. Sesadvāresupi evameva kārāpesīti vadanti.
于集会堂有十万:即在城中央的裁判堂中有十万。以此显示从全城生起的收入。国王得到五十万:这是除去从国土所生起的收入而说。从那里:即从所说的五十万。每日为尼拘陀长老支出十万:如何为长老支出十万呢?据说,国王一天三次更换衣服时,总会问:“长老的衣服送去了吗?”听到“是的,已送去”后才更换。长老也一天三次更换三衣。他的三衣放在象背上,与五百香盒和五百花环一起,早晨便已送去;白天和傍晚也是如此。长老并不捆扎包裹而存放,而是给予前来的同梵行者。据说那时在赡部洲,比丘僧团大多拥有尼拘陀长老所施的衣服。如此,长老日日支出十万。广大利养恭敬:此处,所得、所获称为利养,这是四资具的异名。应恭敬地做、应给予,称为恭敬,也就是四资具。因为将资具做得精良美好、优美殊胜而作,故称为恭敬。或者,他人应行的尊重行为,或以花等供养,也称为恭敬。显示巴利原文
Sabhāyaṃ satasahassanti nagaramajjhe vinicchayasālāyaṃ satasahassaṃ. Iminā sakalanagarato samuṭṭhitaṃ āyaṃ nidasseti. Pañcasatasahassāni rañño uppajjantīti ca raṭṭhato uppajjanakaṃ āyaṃ ṭhapetvā vuttaṃ. Tatoti yathāvuttapañcasatasahassato. Nigrodhattherassa devasikaṃ satasahassaṃ visajjesīti kathaṃ pana therassa satasahassaṃ visajjesi? Rājā kira divasassa tikkhattuṃ sāṭake parivattento ‘‘therassa cīvaraṃ nīta’’nti pucchitvā ‘‘āma nīta’’nti sutvāva parivatteti. Theropi divasassa tikkhattuṃ ticīvaraṃ parivatteti. Tassa hi ticīvaraṃ hatthikkhandhe ṭhapetvā pañcahi ca gandhasamuggasatehi pañcahi ca mālāsamuggasatehi saddhiṃ pātova āharīyittha, tathā divā ceva sāyañca. Theropi na bhaṇḍikaṃ bandhitvā ṭhapesi, sampattasabrahmacārīnaṃ adāsi. Tadā kira jambudīpe bhikkhusaṅghassa yebhuyyena nigrodhattherasseva santakaṃ cīvaraṃ ahosi. Evaṃ therassa divase divase satasahassaṃ visajjesi. Uḷāro lābhasakkāroti ettha labbhati pāpuṇīyatīti lābho, catunnaṃ paccayānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Sakkaccaṃ kātabbo dātabboti sakkāro, cattāro paccayāyeva. Paccayā eva hi paṇītapaṇītā sundarasundarā abhisaṅkharitvā katā ‘‘sakkāro’’ti vuccanti. Atha vā parehi kātabbagāravakiriyā pupphādīhi pūjā vā sakkāro.
所谓“见取”:此处,见本身就是见取,如同“粪聚”“尿聚”“行聚”等用法。或者,因为没有可去之处,仅成为见的去处,故为见取,意为仅仅是执取见。又或者,见的种类即是见取,也就是指邪见的差别。在世间语法中,“种类”“去处”“类别”等词被视为同义。然而,住在他们中间的人不能平息此事:因为住在他们中间,便落入他们之中,所说的话不可信受,所以他这样想。那时,由于住于该处没有安乐住,因此舍弃它,只取所期望的安乐住,故说“自己想要以安乐住而住”。阿诃恒伽山:即如此名称的山。以法、以律、以大师的教法:此处,“法”指真实的事由;“律”指举罪与忆念;“大师的教法”指白众成就与甘马语成就。因此,以真实的事由举罪、忆念后,通过白众成就与甘马语成就,以举罪等羯磨加以呵责,这便是所说的意思。脓疱:偷盗义;垢秽:令染污义;荆棘:刺穿义。侍奉火:即如同事火者那样供奉火。以五火炙烤:即在四处点燃火堆,站在中间,以太阳的热力炙烤。随转太阳:即从日出时起,注视太阳,直到日落,面朝太阳而行。我们将摧毁:即他们努力宣称“我们将消灭”。不能:即显示巴利原文
Diṭṭhigatānīti ettha diṭṭhiyeva diṭṭhigataṃ ‘‘gūthagataṃ muttagataṃ (ma. ni. 2.119), saṅkhāragata’’ntiādīsu (mahāni. 41) viya. Gantabbābhāvato vā diṭṭhiyā gatamattaṃ diṭṭhigataṃ, diṭṭhiyā gahaṇamattanti attho. Diṭṭhippakāro vā diṭṭhigataṃ, diṭṭhibhedoti vuttaṃ hoti. Lokiyā hi vidhayuttagatappakārasadde samānatthe icchanti. Na kho panetaṃ sakkā imesaṃ majjhe vasantena vūpasametunti tesañhi majjhe vasanto tesuyeva antogadhattā ādeyyavacano na hoti, tasmā evaṃ cintesi. Tadā tasmiṃ ṭhāne vasantassa sukhavihārābhāvato taṃ pahāya icchitabbasukhavihāramattaṃ gahetvā vuttaṃ ‘‘attanā phāsukavihārena viharitukāmo’’ti. Ahogaṅgapabbatanti evaṃnāmakaṃ pabbataṃ. Dhammena vinayena satthusāsanenāti ettha dhammoti bhūtaṃ vatthu. Vinayoti codanā sāraṇā ca. Satthusāsananti ñattisampadā anusāvanasampadā ca, tasmā bhūtena vatthunā codetvā sāretvā ñattisampadāya anusāvanasampadāya ca ukkhepanīyādikammavasena niggayhamānāpīti vuttaṃ hoti. Abbudaṃ thenanaṭṭhena, malaṃ kiliṭṭhabhāvakaraṇaṭṭhena, kaṇṭakaṃ vijjhanaṭṭhena. Aggiṃ paricarantīti aggihuttakā viya aggiṃ pūjenti . Pañcātape tappantīti catūsu ṭhānesu aggiṃ katvā majjhe ṭhatvā sūriyātapena tappanti. Ādiccaṃ anuparivattantīti udayakālato pabhuti sūriyaṃ olokayamānā yāvatthaṅgamanā sūriyābhimukhāva parivattanti. Vobhindissāmāti paggaṇhiṃsūti vināsessāmāti ussāhamakaṃsu. Avisahantoti asakkonto.
七日间接受王位:即七日之内暂且享受王位之乐。令他理解那件事:即令他理解所追悔的事。如何令他理解呢?如“据说他……”等所述。称心如意:即随顺心意,意为如其所欲。为何?即由于什么原因。喂!你这死期已定之人:意为七日后死期已定。心得安稳:即心无疑虑,指没有死亡恐惧,无所畏惧。观察依止于呼吸的死:即怀着“啊!但愿我能在这一息之间活着,在吸气后呼气,或呼气后吸气的间隙,能作意世尊的教法,那我便做了很多”的想法,如此精勤修习死随念,观察依止于出入息流转时刻的死。其中,出息:即向外呼出的鼻风;入息:即向内吸入的风。也有说与此相反的。显示巴利原文
Sattadivasenarajjaṃ sampaṭicchāti sattadivase rajjasukhaṃ tāva anubhava. Tamatthaṃ saññāpesīti kukkuccāyitamatthaṃ bodhesi. Kathaṃ saññāpesīti āha ‘‘so kirā’’tiādi. Cittarūpanti cittānurūpaṃ, yathākāmanti vuttaṃ hoti. Kissāti kena kāraṇena. Are tvaṃ nāma paricchinnamaraṇanti sattahi divasehi paricchinnamaraṇaṃ. Vissatthoti nirāsaṅkacitto, maraṇasaṅkārahito nibbhayoti vuttaṃ hoti. Assāsapassāsanibaddhaṃ maraṇaṃ pekkhamānāti ‘‘aho vatāhaṃ tadantaraṃ jīveyyaṃ, yadantaraṃ assasitvā passasāmi passasitvā vā assasāmi, bhagavato sāsanaṃ manasi kareyyaṃ, bahu vata me kataṃ assā’’ti evaṃ maraṇassatiyā anuyuñjanato assāsapassāsappavattikālapaṭibaddhaṃ maraṇaṃ pekkhamānā. Tattha assāsoti bahinikkhamananāsavāto. Passāsoti antopavisanavāto. Vuttavipariyāyenapi vadanti.
“出猎”:为猎杀野兽而出动,心想“我要到林中搜寻野兽”。其中,“猎”指对野兽的追踪、寻找、围捕,由此得名。“臾那大法护长老”:指在臾那地区出生、来到此处出家、名为法护的大长老。“象龙”:指大象。据说“龙”一词也有广大之义;或者说,为区别于蛇龙等,而称为“象龙”。“其心志”:指他的意向、内心的倾向。“当他看着时”:是表示不关顾的属格,意为“就在他眼看着的时候”。“在空中飞腾而起”——此处并非变化神通,因为对在家众也显现了这种神通。所谓变化神通,指“舍弃本来形貌,显现童子形貌或龙形,或示现种种军阵”,像这样生起的神通,由于依于舍弃本来形貌的变化而生起,故称变化神通。然而,决意神通则不被禁止。正如《小品·犍度注释》中将要说到的:“在‘神通变化’中,变化神通是被禁止的,但决意神通不被禁止,应当了知。”“悬挂”:指在空中铺开腰带,将衣物悬挂其上。显示巴利原文
Migavaṃ nikkhamitvāti migamāraṇatthāya ‘‘araññe migapariyesanaṃ carissāmī’’ti nikkhamitvā. Tattha migavanti migānaṃ vānanato hesanato bādhanato ‘‘migava’’nti laddhasamaññaṃ migavaṃ. Yonakamahādhammarakkhitattheranti yonakavisaye jātaṃ idhāgantvā pabbajitaṃ dhammarakkhitanāmadheyyaṃ mahātheraṃ. Hatthināgenāti mahāhatthinā. Mahantapariyāyopi hi nāgasaddoti vadanti. Ahināgādito vā visesanatthaṃ ‘‘hatthināgenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tassāsayaṃ tassa ajjhāsayaṃ. Tassa passantassevāti anādare sāmivacanaṃ, tasmiṃ passanteyevāti attho. Ākāse uppatitvāti ettha ayaṃ vikubbaniddhi na hotīti gihissapi imaṃ iddhipāṭihāriyaṃ dassesi. Sā hi ‘‘pakativaṇṇaṃ vijahitvā kumārakavaṇṇaṃ vā dasseti nāgavaṇṇaṃ vā, vividhampi senābyūhaṃ dassetī’’ti evaṃ āgatā iddhi pakativaṇṇavijahanavikāravasena pavattattā vikubbaniddhi nāma. Adhiṭṭhāniddhiyā pana paṭikkhepo natthi. Tathā ca vakkhati khuddakavatthukkhandhakavaṇṇanāyaṃ (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 252) ‘‘iddhipāṭihāriyanti ettha vikubbaniddhipāṭihāriyaṃ paṭikkhittaṃ, adhiṭṭhāniddhi pana appaṭikkhittāti veditabbā’’ti. Laggetvāti ākāse kāyabandhanaṃ pasāretvā tattha cīvaraṃ laggetvā.
“喜庆装束”指令人欢喜的装束,也就是节庆的装束。“预先备办”意为心想“等他们到时再寻找衣钵等会很麻烦”,因此事先准备好了衣钵。“精勤堂”指适合精勤修习、与勇猛精进相应的寂静住处。“他也”是就国王的外甥而说。“随同出家”指跟随拥有广大财富的刹帝利人而出家。“去”指以神通而去。“善心倾向”指心意柔和。“心生疑惑”指心想“这些比丘说法不一致”,因而生起疑惑。“各以一千比丘为眷属”指每一位各有不超过一千比丘的眷属。虽然说了“带他们来”,但长老比丘们心想“他有能力护持教法”,视之为“法事”而前往。因为于如此场合不应心生疑悔。这确实是如法的教令,并非与在家事务相关。“长老没有来”——虽然即使说“国王召请”,为了法事而来也是可以的,但据说虽两次派人去请,他也没有来。因为长老各处闻名而受尊重,且受尊重者应办之事已经成就,故以不当言辞为借口而没有来。“尊者长老是否年迈了?”——虽然国王以前见过长老,但据说因为未能记住名字,所以这样问。“车乘”指上部类似凉亭、以木……显示巴利原文
Chaṇavesanti tuṭṭhijananavesaṃ, ussavavesanti attho. Paṭiyādesunti ‘‘āgatakāle cīvarādīnaṃ pariyesanaṃ bhāriya’’nti paṭhamameva pattacīvarāni sampādesuṃ. Padhānagharanti bhāvanānuyogavasena vīriyārambhassa anurūpaṃ vivittasenāsanaṃ. Sopīti rañño bhāgineyyaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Anupabbajitoti uḷāravibhavena khattiyajanena anugantvā pabbajito. Gantvāti iddhiyā gantvā. Kusalādhippāyoti manāpajjhāsayo. Dveḷhakajātoti ‘‘ime bhikkhū na ekamaggena kathentī’’ti saṃsayamāpanno. Ekekaṃ bhikkhusahassaparivāranti ekekassa ekekasahassaparicchinnaṃ bhikkhuparivārañca. Gaṇhitvā āgacchathāti vuttepi ‘‘sāsanaṃ paggaṇhituṃ samattho’’ti vuttattā therā bhikkhū ‘‘dhammakamma’’nti maññamānā gatā. Īdisesu hi ṭhānesu kukkuccaṃ na kātabbaṃ. Kappiyasāsanañhetaṃ na gihikammapaṭisaṃyuttaṃ. Thero nāgacchīti kiñcāpi ‘‘rājā pakkosatī’’ti vuttepi dhammakammatthāya āgantuṃ vaṭṭati, dvikkhattuṃ pana pesitepi na āgato kira. Thero hi sabbattha vikhyātavasena sambhāvanuppattito sambhāvitassa ca uddhaṃ kattabbakiccasiddhito asāruppavacanalesena na āgacchīti. Mahallako nu kho bhante theroti kiñcāpi rājā theraṃ diṭṭhapubbo, nāmaṃ pana sallakkhetuṃ asakkonto evaṃ pucchīti vadanti. Vayhanti upari maṇḍapasadisaṃ padaracchannaṃ, sabbapaliguṇṭhimaṃ vā chādetvā kataṃ sakaṭavisesaṃ vayhanti vadanti. Nāvāsaṅghāṭaṃ bandhitvāti ettha nāvāti poto. So hi orato pāraṃ patati gacchatīti poto, satte netīti nāvāti ca vuccati. Ekato saṅghaṭitā nāvā nāvāsaṅghāṭaṃ, tathā taṃ bandhitvāti attho.
由于教法的敌对者众多,故说“安排了守护”。“yanti”意为“由于”“以什么原因”。基于“不作恶,故称为龙”的说法,他们认为沙门因不造恶,在此应称为龙,于是授记说:“大王,那一位沙门龙将握住您的右手。”“他们拉拽”指他们用力拉。有人说:“抓住国王的手如同游戏一般而为,是何原因?”这是提出了责问。“从外面”指从园林的外面。在观看者看来显得极为困难,所以说“局部地震是困难的”。然而在此,就决意而言,并没有单独的困难性。“踏入界内”指踏入界内的内部。“作为神通基础”指作为神通的基础、立足处。因为变化神通已被禁止,所以他决意使大地震动。“车子的界内停立的轮子震动了”——这里“足”指车轮。因其对于车子的行驶作用与足相似,故在此称为“足”。“他能”指他将能够。“这个道理”指没有思心所,则恶不可能发生的道理。“思心所”——这里应作“思心所,我”这样的分词。“思惟之后”指生起思心所之后。“显明鹧鸪”指因其能显明自己所在之处而得此名的鹧鸪。猎……显示巴利原文
Sāsanapaccatthikānaṃ bahubhāvato āha ‘‘ārakkhaṃ saṃvidhāyā’’ti. Yanti yasmā, yena kāraṇenāti attho. ‘‘Āguṃ na karotīti nāgo’’ti (cūḷava. mettagūmāṇavapūcchāniddesa 27) vacanato pāpakaraṇābhāvato samaṇo idha nāgo nāmāti maññamānā ‘‘eko taṃ mahārāja samaṇanāgo dakkhiṇahatthe gaṇhissatī’’ti byākariṃsu. Abbāhiṃsūti ākaḍḍhiṃsu. ‘‘Rañño hatthaggahaṇaṃ līḷāvasena kataṃ viya hotīti kasmātiādicodanaṃ kata’’nti vadanti. Bāhiratoti uyyānassa bāhirato. Passantānaṃ atidukkaraṃ hutvā paññāyatīti āha ‘‘padesapathavīkampanaṃ dukkara’’nti. Adhiṭṭhāne panettha visuṃ dukkaratā nāma natthi. Sīmaṃ akkamitvāti antosīmaṃ sīmāya abbhantaraṃ akkamitvā. Abhiññāpādakanti abhiññāya patiṭṭhābhūtaṃ. Vikubbaniddhiyā eva paṭikkhittattā pathavīcalanaṃ adhiṭṭhahi. Rathassa antosīmāya ṭhito pādova calīti ettha pādoti rathacakkaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tañhi rathassa gamanakiccasādhanato pādasadisattā idha ‘‘pādo’’ti vuttaṃ. Sakkhatīti sakkhissati. Etamatthanti vinā cetanāya pāpassa asambhavasaṅkhātaṃ atthaṃ. Cetanāhanti ettha ‘‘cetanaṃ aha’’nti padacchedo kātabbo. Cetayitvāti cetanaṃ pavattayitvā. Dīpakatittiroti attano nisinnabhāvassa dīpanato evaṃladdhanāmo tittiro. Yaṃ araññaṃ netvā sākuṇiko tassa saddena āgatāgate tittire gaṇhāti.
问苦行者:据说过去在一个边远村庄,有一位捕鸟人捕获一只花斑鹧鸪,悉心训练后放入笼中饲养。他带着这只鹧鸪进入森林,利用它的叫声引诱其他鹧鸪前来并加以捕捉。鹧鸪心想:“因我之故,众多亲属丧命,这是我的恶业。”于是便默不出声。捕鸟人知道它沉默后,用竹片敲打它的头。鹧鸪因痛苦而发出叫声。捕鸟人就这样依靠它捕捉鹧鸪维持生计。后来鹧鸪又想:“我并没有‘让它们死’的意图,然而由此而生的业却触及了我。因为当我不出声时,它们不来;当我出声时,它们才来。捕鸟人将来者捉住,令其丧命。这其中究竟有我的恶业,还是没有?”从此以后,它一边寻找能断此疑的智者,一边度日。有一天,捕鸟人捉了许多鹧鸪,装满篮子,说“我要喝水”,便前往菩萨的草庵——菩萨出家为苦行者,证得禅那与神通后住在林中。捕鸟人把笼子放在菩萨近处,喝了水,躺在沙地上睡着了。鹧鸪知道捕鸟人已入睡,心想:“我要向这位苦行者请问我的疑惑,他若知道,定会告诉我。”于是便安坐笼中——显示巴利原文
Tāpasaṃ pucchīti atīte kira ekasmiṃ paccantagāme eko sākuṇiko ekaṃ dīpakatittiraṃ gahetvā suṭṭhu sikkhāpetvā pañjare pakkhipitvā paṭijaggati. So taṃ araññaṃ netvā tassa saddena āgatāgate tittire gaṇhāti. Tittiro ‘‘maṃ nissāya bahū mama ñātakā nassanti, mayhetaṃ pāpa’’nti nissaddo ahosi. So tassa nissaddabhāvaṃ ñatvā veḷupesikāya taṃ sīse paharati. Tittiro dukkhāturatāya saddaṃ karoti. Evaṃ so sākuṇiko taṃ nissāya tittire gahetvā jīvikaṃ kappesi. Atha so tittiro cintesi ‘‘ime marantūti mayhaṃ cetanā natthi, paṭicca kammaṃ pana maṃ phusati. Mayi saddaṃ akaronte hi ete nāgacchanti, karonteyevāgacchanti, āgatāgate ayaṃ gahetvā jīvitakkhayaṃ pāpeti, atthi nu kho ettha mayhaṃ pāpaṃ, natthī’’ti. So tato paṭṭhāya ‘‘ko nu kho me imaṃ kaṅkhaṃ chindeyyā’’ti tathārūpaṃ paṇḍitaṃ upadhārento carati. Athekadivasaṃ so sākuṇiko bahuke tittire gahetvā pacchiṃ pūretvā ‘‘pānīyaṃ pivissāmī’’ti bodhisattassa tāpasapabbajjāya pabbajitvā jhānābhiññāyo nibbattetvā araññe vasantassa assamaṃ gantvā taṃ pañjaraṃ bodhisattassa santike ṭhapetvā pānīyaṃ pivitvā vālikātale nipanno niddaṃ okkami. Tittiro tassa niddamokkantabhāvaṃ ñatvā ‘‘mama kaṅkhaṃ imaṃ tāpasaṃ pucchissāmi, jānanto me kathessatī’’ti pañjare nisinnoyeva –
“我们的亲戚正安坐”,于是众人纷纷前来;
缘于业而感受果报,对此我心存疑惑。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Ñātako no nisinnoti, bahu āgacchate jano; Paṭicca kammaṃ phusati, tasmiṃ me saṅkate mano’’ti. (jā. 1.4.75) –
向苦行者请问。其含义(本生经注 3.75)是:尊者,倘若我不发出叫声,这些鹧鸪便不会前来;然而当我发出叫声时,众人以为“我们的亲戚正安坐”,便纷纷前来。捕鸟人把来者一一捉住,令其丧命。缘于我、依于我,这杀生之业便被触及、被领受、被感受。对于这缘于我而造的恶业,我内心如此疑惑、犹豫,生起追悔:“这恶业是否归属于我?”显示巴利原文
Tāpasaṃ pucchi. Tassattho (jā. aṭṭha. 3.75) – bhante, sacāhaṃ saddaṃ na kareyyaṃ, ayaṃ tittirajano na āgaccheyya, mayi pana saddaṃ karonte ‘‘ñātako no nisinno’’ti ayaṃ bahujano āgacchati, taṃ āgatāgataṃ luddo gahetvā jīvitakkhayaṃ pāpento maṃ paṭicca maṃ nissāya etaṃ pāṇātipātakammaṃ phusati paṭilabhati vindati, tasmiṃ maṃ paṭicca kate pāpe ‘‘mama nu kho etaṃ pāpa’’nti evaṃ me mano saṅkati parisaṅkati kukkuccaṃ āpajjatīti.
而“不缘彼而业触及”等由苦行者所说偈颂的含义是:若你的心不因恶行而染污,不倾向于彼、不沉溺于彼,那么捕鸟人缘你而造的恶业便不会触及你、不会附着于你。因为对于恶行无有热衷、无有贪着、善良、清净、具念的你,由于没有杀生的思,那恶业不会沾染你,不会附着你的心。显示巴利原文
Na paṭicca kammaṃ phusatītiādikāya pana tāpasena vuttagāthāya ayamattho – yadi tava pāpakiriyāya mano na padussati, tanninno tappoṇo na hoti, evaṃ sante luddena taṃ paṭicca katampi pāpakammaṃ taṃ na phusati na allīyati. Pāpakiriyāya hi appossukkassa nirālayassa bhadrassa parisuddhassa sato tava pāṇātipātacetanāya abhāvā taṃ pāpaṃ na upalimpati, tava cittaṃ na allīyatīti.
“令其掌握教义”即令他掌握自己正自觉者的教说。“令围绕布幔”中,“布幔”为工具格用作宾格,意思是:为了让他们看不见自己和长老,用布幔从四周围绕起来;或者应理解为:用布幔从四周围绕起来。“在布幔之内”即在布幔的内部。“同一教说者”即持同一教说者。“以‘我’说什么”即持何论者。或者,何种论为“何论”,持有此论者即“持何论者”。那些以“我”宣说、安立“自我与世界是常”者,即“常见论者”。或者,依此而说为“论”,这是对“见”的称谓。“常论”即“常见”,持此见者即“常见论者”,意为持常见者。若问:为何说他们具有“常论”?因为他们所执取的是“自我与世界是常”,而非执取“论”本身,不是吗?确实如此。然而,由于与“常”相伴而行,故“论”也被称为“常”,如同“矛在行走”的说法。或者应视为省略了“iti”一词,即“常”是他们的论。那些执取色等中的某一法为“我”及“世界”,并安立彼为常、不死、恒常、稳固者,应知为常见论者。正如《义释》及《无碍解道》中所说——显示巴利原文
Samayaṃ uggaṇhāpesīti attano sammāsambuddhassa laddhiṃ uggaṇhāpesi. Sāṇipākāraṃ parikkhipāpetvāti ettha sāṇipākāranti karaṇatthe upayogavacanaṃ, attānañca therañca yathā te bhikkhū na passanti, evaṃ sāṇipākārena samantato parikkhipāpetvāti attho, sāṇipākāraṃ vā samantato parikkhipāpetvāti evamettha attho gahetabbo. Sāṇipākārantareti sāṇipākārassa abbhantare. Ekaladdhiketi samānaladdhike. Kiṃ vadati sīlenāti kiṃvādī. Atha vā ko katamo vādo kiṃvādo, so etassa atthīti kiṃvādī. Sassataṃ attānañca lokañca vadanti paññapenti sīlenāti sassatavādino. Atha vā vadanti etenāti vādo, diṭṭhiyā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Sassato vādo sassatavādo, so etesaṃ atthīti sassatavādino, sassatadiṭṭhinoti attho. Atha sassato vādo etesamatthīti kasmā vuttaṃ, tesañhi attā loko ca sassatoti adhippeto, na vādoti? Saccametaṃ. Sassatasahacaritatāya pana vādopi sassatoti vutto yathā ‘‘kuntā pacarantī’’ti. Sassatoti vādo etesanti vā itisaddalopo daṭṭhabbo. Ye rūpādīsu aññataraṃ attāti ca lokoti ca gahetvā taṃ sassataṃ amataṃ niccaṃ dhuvaṃ paññapenti, te sassatavādinoti veditabbā. Vuttañhetaṃ niddese paṭisambhidāyañca –
“色是我、是世界、是常”,他们如此安立我与世界;“受……想……行……识是我、是世界、是常”,他们如此安立我与世界。显示巴利原文
‘‘Rūpaṃ attā ceva loko ca sassato cāti attānañca lokañca paññapenti. Vedanaṃ… saññaṃ… saṅkhāre… viññāṇaṃ attā ceva loko ca sassato cāti attānañca lokañca paññapentī’’ti.
此义乃基于“观色是我、观受是我、观想是我、观行是我、观识是我”这五种身见而说。而依“我中有色”等十五种身见,则是指各各执取四蕴为“我”,并将其余者安立为“世界”。同理,执取一蕴为“我”,其余诸蕴为“我”所受用的“世界”;或执取同一相续中的诸蕴为“我”,其余为“世界”,如此安立时,此中义理应如是了知。于众生或诸行中,有一部分是常,此即“一分常”;执持一分常见者,即“一分常见论者”。他们有两种:于众生执一分常者,于诸行执一分常者。其中,主张“自在天是常,其余众生无常”者,便是于众生执一分常者,如自在天论者。主张“梵天是常,其余众生无常”者,亦应知是于众生执一分常者。主张“极微是常,二微等无常”者,是于诸行执一分常者,如胜论派等。主张“眼等诸根无常,识是常”者,亦应知是于诸行执一分常者。显示巴利原文
Ayañca attho ‘‘rūpaṃ attato samanupassati, vedanaṃ… saññaṃ… saṅkhāre… viññāṇaṃ attato samanupassatī’’ti imissā pañcavidhāya sakkāyadiṭṭhiyā vasena vutto. ‘‘Rūpavantaṃ attāna’’ntiādikāya pana pañcadasavidhāya sakkāyadiṭṭhiyā vasena cattāro cattāro khandhe ‘‘attā’’ti gahetvā tadañño lokoti paññapentīti ayañca attho labbhati. Tathā ekaṃ khandhaṃ ‘‘attā’’ti gahetvā añño attano upabhogabhūto lokoti, sasantatipatite vā khandhe ‘‘attā’’ti gahetvā tadañño lokoti paññapentīti evamettha attho veditabbo. Sattesu saṅkhāresu vā ekaccaṃ sassataṃ etassāti ekaccasassato, ekaccasassatavādo. So etesamatthīti ekaccasassatikā, ekaccasassatavādino. Te duvidhā honti sattekaccasassatikā saṅkhārekaccasassatikāti . Tattha ‘‘issaro nicco, aññe sattā aniccā’’ti evaṃ pavattavādā sattekaccasassatikā seyyathāpi issaravādā. ‘‘Nicco brahmā, aññe sattā aniccā’’ti evaṃ pavattavādāpi sattekaccasassatikāti veditabbā. ‘‘Paramāṇavo niccā, dviaṇukādayo aniccā’’ti evaṃ pavattavādā saṅkhārekaccasassatikā seyyathāpi kaṇādavādādayo. ‘‘Cakkhādayo aniccā, viññāṇaṃ nicca’’nti evaṃvādinopi saṅkhārekaccasassatikāti veditabbā.
难道不是这样吗?在“某些法是常,某些法是无常”这一主张中,对于眼等诸根无常性的确认,恰恰是如实地了知自性,这如何能成为邪见呢?又有谁曾这样说——“对眼等诸根无常性的确认就是邪见”?实际上,只是对某些本是无常的法,生起恒常性的执著,在此才是邪见。然而,当这种邪见一旦生起,对眼等诸根无常性的了知便被染污了,因为与之混杂的缘故;就像全部的生酥被毒物混杂后,便不能发挥其本有的作用一样,它不配归入正见之列。再者,即使眼等诸根被确认为无常,那些执见者仍然将其执取为被赋予了命我的自性,因此无法避免对其了知的邪见性。这样一来,依无为界与有为界,依次说“某些法是常,某些法是无常”而起的分别论者,也就成了部分常论者——这样的责难便无从安立,因为这是对法性无颠倒的证得。虽然在此,于前一种常见中,将无常法执为常,是特别显著的邪见;但将常法执为常,则不是邪见,因为是如实执取自性。然而,之所以说此论不同于他论,是因为它是在应被执取的法中,对“唯某些无常法为常”作出了区分。在此,并不能说:由于部分含摄于整体中,一分常的执取便归入显示巴利原文
Nanu ‘‘ekacce dhammā sassatā, ekacce asassatā’’ti etasmiṃ vāde cakkhādīnaṃ asassatabhāvasanniṭṭhānaṃ yathāsabhāvāvabodho eva, tayidaṃ kathaṃ micchādassananti? Ko vā evamāha – ‘‘cakkhādīnaṃ asassatabhāvasanniṭṭhānaṃ micchādassana’’nti, asassatesuyeva pana kesañci dhammānaṃ sassatabhāvābhiniveso idha micchādassanaṃ. Tena pana ekavāre pavattamānena cakkhādīnaṃ asassatabhāvāvabodho vidūsito saṃsaṭṭhabhāvato, visasaṃsaṭṭho viya sabbo sappimaṇḍo sakiccakaraṇāsamatthatāya sammādassanapakkhe ṭhapetabbataṃ nārahatīti. Asassatabhāvena nicchitāpi vā cakkhuādayo samāropitajīvasabhāvā eva diṭṭhigatikehi gayhantīti tadavabodhassa micchādassanabhāvo na sakkā nivāretuṃ. Evañca katvā asaṅkhatāya ca saṅkhatāya ca dhātuyā vasena yathākkamaṃ ekacce dhammā sassatā, ekacce asassatāti evaṃ pavatto vibhajjavādopi ekaccasassatavādo āpajjatīti evaṃpakārā codanā anavakāsā hoti aviparītadhammasabhāvasampaṭipattibhāvato. Kāmañcettha purimasassatavādepi asassatānaṃ dhammānaṃ sassatāti gahaṇaṃ visesato micchādassanaṃ, sassatānaṃ pana sassatāti gāho na micchādassanaṃ yathāsabhāvaggahaṇabhāvato. Asassatesuyeva pana kecideva dhammā sassatāti gahetabbadhammesu vibhāgappavattiyā imassa vādassa vādantaratā vuttā. Na cettha samudāyantogadhattā ekadesassa sappadesasassataggāho nippadesasassataggāhe samodhānaṃ gacchatīti sakkā vattuṃ vāditabbisayavisesavasena vādadvayassa pavattattā. Aññe eva hi diṭṭhigatikā ‘‘sabbe dhammā sassatā’’ti abhiniviṭṭhā, aññe ekaccasassatāti saṅkhārānaṃ anavasesapariyādānaṃ ekadesapariggaho ca vādadvayassa paribyattoyevāti.
关于“有边无边”:此处,“边”是指自性在此终结、至此为尽,即界限;对它的否定即是“无边”。那么,这是谁的边或无边呢?所谓“世间”,是由寻求从轮回中出离的执见者们所“世间”(执取),或者他们在此中“世间”(造作)福、非福及其异熟;此“世间”即是被计为假名、似相等自性的自我。边与无边、亦有边亦无边、非有边非无边,以总称或省略的方式说为“有边无边”,如同“缘名色故而有六处”的说法。与有边无边相伴的论说,称为有边无边论,如说“矛在行进”;或以有边无边为所依,如说“床在喧哗”。他们具有此论,故为有边无边论者,亦即执持有边无边论者。其含义是:他们依“此世界有边、此世界无边、此世界亦有边亦无边、此世界非有边非无边”而发起论说。有边无边论者共有四种:有边论者、无边论者、亦有边亦无边论者、非有边非无边论者。例如,有人将似相局限于轮围世界之内而不向外扩展,执取其为“世间”,便成为于世间持有边想者。若将遍相扩展到以轮围世界为界限,则成为持无边想者。若不向上、向下扩展,而向横向扩展,则于上下持有边想,于横向持无边想。又有人因为:被称作世间的自我,有时被证得殊胜的大仙们显示巴利原文
Antānantikāti ettha amati gacchati ettha sabhāvo osānanti anto, mariyādā. Tappaṭisedhena ananto. Kassa panāyaṃ antānantoti? Lokīyati saṃsāranissaraṇatthikehi diṭṭhigatikehi, lokīyati vā ettha tehi puññāpuññaṃ tabbipāko cāti lokoti saṅkhyaṃ gatassa paṭibhāganimittādisabhāvassa attano. Anto ca ananto ca antānanto ca nevantanānanto cāti antānanto sāmaññaniddesena, ekasesena vā ‘‘nāmarūpapaccayā saḷāyatana’’ntiādīsu viya. Antānantasahacarito vādo antānanto yathā ‘‘kuntā pacarantī’’ti. Antānantasannissayo vā yathā ‘‘mañcā ukkuṭṭhiṃ karontī’’ti. So etesamatthīti antānantikā, antānantavādino. ‘‘Antavā ayaṃ loko, ananto ayaṃ loko, antavā ca ayaṃ loko ananto ca, nevāyaṃ loko antavā na panānanto’’ti evaṃ antaṃ vā anantaṃ vā antānantaṃ vā nevantanānantaṃ vā ārabbha pavattavādāti attho. Catubbidhā hi antānantavādino antavādī anantavādī antānantavādī nevantanānantavādīti. Tathā hi koci paṭibhāganimittaṃ cakkavāḷapariyantaṃ avaḍḍhetvā taṃ ‘‘loko’’ti gahetvā antasaññī lokasmiṃ hoti. Cakkavāḷapariyantaṃ katvā vaḍḍhitakasiṇe pana anantasaññī hoti. Uddhamadho avaḍḍhetvā pana tiriyaṃ vaḍḍhetvā uddhamadho antasaññī tiriyaṃ anantasaññī hoti. Koci pana yasmā lokasaññito attā adhigatavisesehi mahesīhi kadāci ananto sakkhidiṭṭho anusuyyati, tasmā nevantavā. Yasmā pana tehiyeva kadāci antavā sakkhidiṭṭho anusuyyati, tasmā na pana anantoti evaṃ nevantanānantasaññī lokasmiṃ hoti. Keci pana yadi panāyaṃ attā antavāsiyā, dūradese upapajjamānānussaraṇādikiccanipphatti na siyā. Atha ananto idha ṭhitassa devalokanirayādīsu sukhadukkhānubhavanampi siyā. Sace pana antavā ca ananto ca, tadubhayapaṭisedhadosasamāyogo, tasmā antavā anantoti ca abyākaraṇīyo attāti evaṃ takkanavasena nevantanānantasaññī hotīti vaṇṇayanti.
在此,前三种论者因其论说依于“边”、“无边”、“亦有边亦无边”而成立,故称“有边无边论者”,这尚且合理;但最后一种论者,因其论说依于对那两者的否定而成立,又如何可称“有边无边论者”呢?答:正是因为它依于对那两者的否定而成立。因为否定有边无边的论说,也仍以有边无边为其所缘,依此而成立。正因如此,前面才说“依……而发起论说”。即便如此,后两种论说可称“有边无边论者”尚且合理,因其论说以有边与无边两者为所缘;但前两种论说,各自如何能单独称为“有边无边论者”呢?这是依转借用法而说的。因为“有边无边”一语,是在总括有边论与无边论时使用的,既已约定俗成,故也单独用于各有边论者与各无边论者;如同“八解脱”一语也单独用于各无色定,又如世间说“刀床”。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca yuttaṃ tāva purimānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ vādīnaṃ antañca anantañca antānantañca ārabbha pavattavādattā antānantikattaṃ, pacchimassa pana tadubhayapaṭisedhanavasena pavattavādattā kathaṃ antānantikattanti? Tadubhayapaṭisedhanavasena pavattavādattā eva. Yasmā antānantapaasedhavādopi antānantavisayo eva taṃ ārabbha pavattattā. Etadatthameva hi ārabbha ‘‘pavattavādā’’ti heṭṭhā vuttaṃ, evaṃ santepi yuttaṃ tāva pacchimavādadvayassa antānantikattaṃ, antānantānaṃ vasena ubhayavisayattā etesaṃ vādassa, purimavādadvayassa pana kathaṃ visuṃ antānantikattanti? Upacāravuttiyā. Samuditesu hi antānantavādesu pavattamāno antānantikasaddo tattha niruḷhatāya paccekampi antānantavādīsu pavattati yathā arūpajjhānesu paccekaṃ aṭṭhavimokkhapariyāyo, yathā ca loke sattisayoti.
不死矫乱者——此处,“不死”即不死亡、不灭尽。那是什么呢?即依“我并非如此,我并非如彼,我并非其他,我并非不,我并非非不”这样的言说方式,而成为无有边际的邪见者的见解与言语。以“我并非如此”等种种不同的方式,对其他论者进行扰乱、抛掷,称为矫乱;依不死的见解或言语而行矫乱,便是不死矫乱;具有此不死矫乱者,称不死矫乱者。或者,依不死的见解或言语而行矫乱者,称不死矫乱者;不死矫乱者即是不死矫乱者。又或者,有一种名为不死的鱼,在水中以浮沉等方式游动,无可捕捉;同样,这种论说于任何自性皆不确立,四处游移,不可把握,因此被称为如不死鱼般的矫乱,即不死矫乱。当此不死矫乱者被问及“这是善”或“这是不善”时,他始终不作明确回答。若被问“这是善吗”,他说“我并非如此”。接着若被问“那是不善吗”,他说“我并非如彼”。若被问“那是两者皆非的其他情况吗”,他说“我并非其他”。接着若被问“那么三者皆非,你的见解是什么”,他说“我并非不”。接着若被问“那么你的见解是‘非不’吗”,他说“我并非非不”。显示巴利原文
Amarāvikkhepikāti ettha na marati na upacchijjatīti amarā. Kā sā? ‘‘Evantipi me no, tathātipi me no, aññathātipi me no, notipi me no, no notipi me no’’ti (dī. ni. 1.62) evaṃ pavattavādavasena pariyantarahitā diṭṭhigatikassa diṭṭhi ceva vācā ca. ‘‘Evantipi me no’’tiādinā vividho nānappakāro khepo paravādīnaṃ khipanaṃ vikkhepo, amarāya diṭṭhiyā vācāya vā vikkhepo amarāvikkhepo, so etesamatthīti amarāvikkhepikā. Atha vā amarāya diṭṭhiyā vācāya vikkhipantīti amarāvikkhepino, amarāvikkhepino eva amarāvikkhepikā. Atha vā amarā nāma macchajāti, sā ummujjananimujjanādivasena udake sandhāvamānā gahetuṃ na sakkā, evameva ayampi vādo ekasmiṃ sabhāve anavaṭṭhānato ito cito ca sandhāvati, gāhaṃ na upagacchatīti amarāya vikkhepo viyāti amarāvikkhepoti vuccati. Ayañhi amarāvikkhepiko ‘‘idaṃ kusala’’nti vā ‘‘akusala’’nti vā puṭṭho na kiñci byākaroti. ‘‘Idaṃ kusala’’nti vā puṭṭho ‘‘evantipi me no’’ti vadati. Tato ‘‘kiṃ akusala’’nti vutte ‘‘tathātipi me no’’ti vadati. ‘‘Kiṃ ubhayato aññathā’’tipi vutte ‘‘aññathātipi me no’’ti vadati. Tato ‘‘tividhenapi na hoti, kiṃ te laddhī’’ti vutte ‘‘notipi me no’’ti vadati. Tato ‘‘kiṃ no no te laddhī’’ti vutte ‘‘no notipi me no’’ti vadati. Evaṃ vikkhepameva āpajjati, ekamekasmimpi pakkhe na tiṭṭhati. Tato ‘‘atthi paro loko’’tiādinā puṭṭhopi evameva vikkhipati, na ekasmiṃ pakkhe tiṭṭhati. So vuttappakāro amarāvikkhepo etesamatthīti amarāvikkhepikā.
难道不是所有这些不死矫乱者,由于对善等法及他世存在等事不能如实了知,在被问及各处问题时,只是对问题加以扰乱而已吗?既然如此,他如何能成为邪见者呢?因为,并非像不愿说话的人那样,仅仅由于对问题不知而作扰乱,就能合理地称为邪见者吧?答曰:并非仅仅因为对问题作扰乱,他就成为邪见者,而是由于邪执,即由于执取常见。正是那邪执之人,因智慧迟钝,对善等法及他世存在等事不能如实通达,既无法将自己不了知的义理令他人了知,又因害怕妄语等过患,所以才陷入矫乱。正如所说:‘七种是断见,其余是常见。’或者,由于对福罪及其果报不能了知且不信受,便对涉及这些内容的问题,生起‘扰乱本身就是好的’这样的忍可与喜好,并执取之,由此生起一种单独的见解,如同七分见一样,应如此看待。正因如此,才说‘无有边际的邪见者的见解与言语’。显示巴利原文
Nanu cāyaṃ sabbopi amarāvikkhepiko kusalādayo dhamme paralokatthikādīni ca yathābhūtaṃ anavabujjhamāno tattha tattha pañhaṃ puṭṭho pucchāya vikkhepanamattaṃ āpajjati, tassa kathaṃ diṭṭhigatikabhāvo. Na hi avattukāmassa viya pucchitaṃ ajānantassa vikkhepakaraṇamattena diṭṭhigatikatā yuttāti? Vuccate – na heva kho pucchāya vikkhepakaraṇamattena tassa diṭṭhigatikatā, atha kho micchābhinivesavasena sassatābhinivesato. Micchābhiniviṭṭhoyeva hi puggalo mandabuddhitāya kusalādidhamme paralokatthikādīni ca yāthāvato asampaṭipajjamāno attanā aviññātassa atthassa paraṃ viññāpetuṃ asakkuṇeyyatāya musāvādādibhayena ca vikkhepaṃ āpajjatīti. Tathā ca vuttaṃ ‘‘satteva ucchedadiṭṭhiyo, sesā sassatadiṭṭhiyo’’ti. Atha vā puññapāpānaṃ tabbipākānañca anavabodhena asaddahanena ca tabbisayāya pucchāya vikkhepakaraṇaṃyeva sundaranti khantiṃ ruciṃ uppādetvā abhinivisantassa uppannā visuṃyeva cesā ekā diṭṭhi sattabhaṅgadiṭṭhi viyāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tatoyeva ca vuttaṃ ‘‘pariyantarahitā diṭṭhigatikassa diṭṭhi ceva vācā cā’’ti.
无因生论者:此处,“无因”是指某物在不具备任何原因的情况下随意生起。认为“我及世间是无因而生”的见解,即称为无因生见。因为被称为“我”与“世间”的那些蕴,这种见以无因生起的行相为所缘,依止于此行相而生起,且与此行相相伴,故称为无因生,正如“床会出声,矛会行走”的说法一样。持有这种见解的人,便称为无因生论者。显示巴利原文
Adhiccasamuppannikāti ettha adhicca yadicchakaṃ yaṃ kiñci kāraṇaṃ vinā samuppanno attā ca loko cāti dassanaṃ adhiccasamuppannaṃ. Attalokasaññitānañhi khandhānaṃ adhiccuppattiākārārammaṇaṃ dassanaṃ tadākārasannissayavasena pavattito tadākārasahacaritatāya ca adhiccasamuppannanti vuccati yathā ‘‘mañcā ghosanti, kuntā pacarantī’’ti ca. Taṃ etesamatthīti adhiccasamuppannikā.
有想论者:他们持有“有想”的论点,故称有想论者,正如“有觉,故为觉者”的说法。或者,依伴随“有想”的方式而转起的论说,称为有想论。具有有想论的人,即是有想论者。也就是:“我是有色、无病、死后有想,他们如此施设;我是无色、死后有想;我是亦有色亦无色、死后有想;我是非有色非无色、死后有想。我是有边、死后有想;我是无边、死后有想;我是亦有边亦无边、死后有想;我是非有边非无边、死后有想。我是一想、死后有想;我是异想、死后有想。我是少想、死后有想;我是无量想、死后有想。我是一向乐、死后有想;我是一向苦、死后有想。我是苦乐、死后有想;我是非苦非乐、无病、死后有想,他们如此施设。”这就是以十六种方式分别的论说。显示巴利原文
Saññīvādāti saññī vādo etesamatthīti saññīvādā ‘‘buddhaṃ assa atthīti buddho’’ti yathā. Atha vā saññīti pavatto vādo saññīsahacaraṇanayena. Saññī vādo yesaṃ te saññīvādā. ‘‘Rūpī attā hoti arogo paraṃ maraṇā, saññīti naṃ paññapenti, arūpī attā hoti, rūpī ca arūpī ca attā hoti, neva rūpī nārūpī ca attā hoti. Antavā attā hoti, anantavā attā hoti, antavā ca anantavā ca attā hoti, nevantavā nānantavā attā hoti. Ekattasaññī attā hoti, nānattasaññī attā hoti. Parittasaññī attā hoti, appamāṇasaññī attā hoti. Ekantasukhī attā hoti, ekantadukkhī attā hoti. Sukhadukkhī attā hoti, adukkhamasukhī attā hoti arogo paraṃ maraṇā, saññīti naṃ paññapentī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.76) evaṃ soḷasavidhena vibhattavādānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ.
无想论者与非想非非想论者,应依有想论中所说的方法来理解。区别仅在于:执取“我是有想”的人,称为有想论者;执取“我是无想”及“我是非想非非想”的人,则称为无想论者与非想非非想论者,应如此理解。其中,无想论者有八种分别:“我是有色、无病、死后无想,他们如此施设;我是无色、死后无想;我是亦有色亦无色、死后无想;我是非有色非无色、死后无想。我是有边、死后无想;我是无边、死后无想;我是亦有边亦无边、死后无想;我是非有边非无边、无病、死后无想,他们如此施设。”非想非非想论者也同样有这八种分别,如:“我是有色、无病、死后非想非非想,他们如此施设”等,应如此理解。显示巴利原文
Asaññīvādā nevasaññīnāsaññīvādā ca saññīvāde vuttanayeneva veditabbā. Kevalañhi ‘‘saññī attā’’ti gaṇhantānaṃ vasena saññīvādā vuttā, ‘‘asaññī’’ti ca ‘‘nevasaññīnāsaññī’’ti ca gaṇhantānaṃ vasena asaññīvādā ca nevasaññīnāsaññīvādā ca vuttāti veditabbā. Tattha asaññīvādā ‘‘rūpī attā hoti arogo paraṃ maraṇā, asaññīti naṃ paññapenti, arūpī attā hoti, rūpī ca arūpī ca attā hoti, neva rūpī nārūpī attā hoti. Antavā attā hoti, anantavā attā hoti, antavā ca anantavā ca attā hoti, nevantavā nānantavā attā hoti arogo paraṃ maraṇā, asaññīti naṃ paññapentī’’ti evaṃ aṭṭhavidhena vibhattā. Nevasaññīnāsaññīvādāpi evameva ‘‘rūpī attā hoti arogo paraṃ maraṇā, nevasaññīnāsaññīti naṃ paññapentī’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.82) aṭṭhavidhena vibhattāti veditabbā.
断灭论者:即‘此我由四大种所成、父母所生,身坏时断灭、消失,死后不存在’等,依此类方式转起的断灭见,称为断灭。依惯常称说,持断灭论者称为断灭论者;或因其有断灭论,故称断灭论者;或因其宣说断灭,故称断灭论者。显示巴利原文
Ucchedavādāti ‘‘ayaṃ attā rūpī cātumahābhūtiko mātāpettikasambhavo kāyassa bhedā ucchijjati vinassati, na hoti paraṃ maraṇā’’ti (dī. ni. 1.85) evamādinā nayena pavattaṃ ucchedadassanaṃ ucchedo sahacaraṇanayena. Ucchedo vādo yesaṃ te ucchedavādā, ucchedavādo vā etesamatthīti ucchedavādā, ucchedaṃ vadantīti vā ucchedavādā.
现法涅槃论者:此处,“现法”是指以现见之智所证得的法,即现量亲证之法,这是对在各处所获得的生命体的代称。“现法涅槃”即是在此生命体中苦的止息。宣说此者,称为现法涅槃论者。然而,他们以“朋友,当此自我具足、圆满地享受五种欲乐时,到此程度,此自我即已达到最上的现法涅槃”(《长部》1.94)等方式,就在现法中施设涅槃。因为他们认为,那些享受人间欲乐者——如享受类似曼陀多王欲乐者,以及那些享受天界欲乐者——如享受类似他化自在天王欲乐者,他们就在现法中证得涅槃。显示巴利原文
Diṭṭhadhammanibbānavādāti ettha diṭṭhadhammo nāma dassanabhūtena ñāṇena upaladdhadhammo, paccakkhadhammoti attho. Tattha tattha paṭiladdhattabhāvassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Diṭṭhadhamme nibbānaṃ diṭṭhadhammanibbānaṃ, imasmiṃyeva attabhāve dukkhavūpasamanti attho. Taṃ vadantīti diṭṭhadhammanibbānavādā. Te pana ‘‘yato kho bho ayaṃ attā pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samappito samaṅgībhūto paricāreti, ettāvatā kho bho ayaṃ attā paramadiṭṭhadhammanibbānappatto hotī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.94) evamādinā nayena diṭṭheva dhamme nibbānaṃ paññapenti. Te hi mandhātukāmaguṇasadise mānusake kāmaguṇe, paranimmitavasavattidevarājassa kāmaguṇasadise dibbe ca kāmaguṇe upagatānaṃ diṭṭheva dhamme nibbānappattiṃ vadanti.
“分别说者”:如韦兰阇篇中所说的方法,分别解说调伏者等状态而说,故为分别说者。显示巴利原文
Vibhajjavādīti verañjakaṇḍe āgatanayeneva venayikādibhāvaṃ vibhajja vadatīti vibhajjavādī.
在那里,世尊先说了“婆罗门,我为了调伏而说断除贪欲之法”等语,接着又以“并非如你所指的那样说”等方式,向韦兰阇婆罗门分别解说自己作为调伏者等的特质。又因分别解说了喜悦等与衣等之应受用与不应受用,故为分别说者;或因分别解说了常见与断见,故为分别说者;或因搁置了“我与世界是常”等应搁置的问题,转而宣说贪等灭尽之常,以及贪等身恶行等之断灭,故为分别说者;因不接近常与断两个极端,而宣说作为中道的缘起,故世尊为分别说者。摧破他论:这是针对在第三结集时生起之论说,以及从彼时起直至正法隐没之间未来将生起之论说而说的。在那次集会中,这位长老为了破斥当时生起的一切事端,以及未来将生起的一切,依导师所给之理趣——即依如来所安立的论母,分别解说,于自论中援引五百经,于他论中援引五百经,合计一千经,摧破当时生起的论说,故为摧破他论者;又因具有遮止未来将生起论说之特相,故造作《论事》,该论具有遮止未来之特相。显示巴利原文
Tattha hi bhagavatā ‘‘ahañhi, brāhmaṇa, vinayāya dhammaṃ desemi rāgassā’’tiādiṃ vatvā ‘‘no ca kho yaṃ tvaṃ sandhāya vadesī’’tiādinā verañjabrāhmaṇassa attano venayikādibhāvo vibhajja vuttoti. Apica somanassādīnaṃ cīvarādīnañca sevitabbāsevitabbabhāvaṃ vibhajja vadatīti vibhajjavādī, sassatucchedavāde vā vibhajja vadatīti vibhajjavādī, ‘‘sassato attā ca loko cā’’tiādīnaṃ ṭhapanīyānaṃ pañhānaṃ ṭhapanato rāgādikhayasaṅkhātassa sassatassa rāgādikāyaduccaritādiucchedassa vacanato vibhajjavādī, sassatucchedabhūte ubho ante anupaggamma majjhimapaṭipadābhūtassa paṭiccasamuppādassa desanato vibhajjavādī, bhagavā. Parappavādaṃ maddantoti tasmiṃ tatiyasaṅgītikāle uppannaṃ vādaṃ, tato paṭṭhāya yāva saddhammantaradhānā āyatiṃ uppajjanakavādañca sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tasmiñhi samāgame ayaṃ thero yāni ca tadā uppannāni vatthūni, yāni ca āyatiṃ uppajjissanti, sabbesampi tesaṃ paṭibāhanatthaṃ satthārā dinnanayavaseneva tathāgatena ṭhapitamātikaṃ vibhajanto sakavāde pañca suttasatāni, paravāde pañcāti suttasahassaṃ āharitvā tadā uppannavādassa maddanato parappavādamaddanaṃ āyatiṃ uppajjanakavādānaṃ paṭisedhanalakkhaṇabhāvato āyatiṃ paṭisedhalakkhaṇaṃ kathāvatthuppakaraṇaṃ akāsi.
师承次第说之解释显示巴利原文
Ācariyaparamparakathāvaṇṇanā
在回答“由谁传来”这一问题时,他先展示了赡部洲洲的师承次第,直至第三结集。现在为了显示师子洲的师承次第,而开始宣说“然而自第三结集之后”等语。“此岛”即是此铜叶岛。“于某时”是指于某一时。“古师”指诸注疏师。“跋陀名”即跋陀沙罗长老——有时也以名称的一部分来称呼,如“提婆达多”称为“达多”。“不行恶故”为“龙”,此句与“诵习了律藏”相连。“铜叶”是处格。他诵习了五部尼柯耶,也就是除了律藏和论藏之外的长部等五尼柯耶;还诵习了七部论,即《法集论》《分别论》等七部阿毗达摩论。如同闪电在山峰上粉碎烦恼,故名为“慧”;或以快速领受、忆持之义为“慧”,即智慧,具此者称为“有慧者”。“三藏者”即拥有三藏的人,也就是“持三藏者”,意为受持三藏教法。“星之王”指星王,即是月亮。“极照耀”指极为闪耀。“花名”指大莲花长老。“正法传承巧者”指精通正法经典者。“花名”指须摩那长老。“住于赡部洲洲”:据说须摩那长老曾于某个时候,当师子洲的教法衰微时,前往赡部洲洲求学,而后为了守护教法而住于那里。“道巧者”指精通天界道与解脱道之人。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kenābhata’’nti imaṃ pañhaṃ visajjentena jambudīpe tāva ācariyaparamparā yāva tatiyasaṅgīti, tāva dassetvā idāni sīhaḷadīpe ācariyaparamparaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tatiyasaṅgahato pana uddha’’ntiādi āraddhaṃ. Imaṃ dīpanti imaṃ tambapaṇṇidīpaṃ. Kañci kālanti kismiñci kāle. Porāṇāti aṭṭhakathācariyā. Bhaddanāmoti bhaddasālatthero. Nāmassa ekadesenapi hi vohāro dissati ‘‘devadatto datto’’ti yathā. Āguṃ na karontīti nāgā. Vinayapiṭakaṃ vācayiṃsūti sambandho. Tambapaṇṇiyāti bhummavacanaṃ. Nikāye pañca vācesunti vinayābhidhammavajje dīghanikāyādike pañca nikāye ca vācesuṃ. Satta ceva pakaraṇeti dhammasaṅgaṇīvibhaṅgādike satta abhidhammappakaraṇe ca vācesunti attho. Asani viya siluccaye kilese medhati hiṃsatīti medhā, khippaṃ gahaṇadhāraṇaṭṭhena vā medhā, paññā, sā etassa atthīti medhāvī. Tipeṭakoti tīṇi piṭakāni etassa atthīti tipeṭako, tepiṭakoti vuttaṃ hoti, tipiṭakapariyattidharoti attho. Tārakānaṃ rājāti tārakarājā, candimā. Atirocathāti ativiya virocittha. Pupphanāmoti mahāpadumatthero. Saddhammavaṃsakovidoti saddhammatantiyā kovido. Pupphanāmoti sumanatthero. Jambudīpe patiṭṭhitoti sumanatthero kira ekasmiṃ samaye sīhaḷadīpamhi sāsane osakkamāne jambudīpaṃ gantvā uggaṇhitvā sāsanaṃ anurakkhanto tattheva patiṭṭhāsi. Maggakovidāti saggamaggamokkhamaggesu kovidā.
“令承担”:即把教法的重担交给那些比丘,意为令其担负责任。为了详细显示前面略说的“他派遣那些比丘到各处”之义,而说“派遣末阐提长老到迦湿弥罗和犍陀罗地区”等语。“摩醯娑曼陀罗”:即指安达罗国。“林居”:即林居国。“以自己为第五”:即他们以自己为第五位,意思是每个方向各有五位比丘前往。显示巴利原文
Bhāraṃkatvāti tesaṃ tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ sāsanaṃ bhāraṃ katvā, paṭibaddhaṃ katvāti attho. ‘‘Te te bhikkhū tattha tattha pesesī’’ti saṅkhepato vuttamevatthaṃ vitthāretvā dassento āha ‘‘majjhantikattheraṃ kasmīragandhāraraṭṭhaṃ pesesī’’tiādi. Mahiṃsakamaṇḍalanti andhakaraṭṭhaṃ vadanti. Vanavāsinti vanavāsiraṭṭhaṃ. Attā pañcamo etesanti attapañcamā, taṃ taṃ disābhāgaṃ pañca pañceva bhikkhū agamaṃsūti vuttaṃ hoti.
如今,为了显示那些去往各处长老所作事业的威力,他先说明中部长老所到之处的作为,而说:“那时,在迦湿弥罗和犍陀罗国……”等语。“Karakavassa”:即降雪之雨。“Harāpetvā”:意为被水流冲走。“Aravāḷadahapiṭṭhiyaṃ”:意为在阿拉瓦拉湖的水面上。“Chinnabhinnapaṭadharo”:指穿着被刀割裂、被染料弄坏而变色的衣服,故名为穿着割裂坏色衣者;或者因穿着被刀割断、如同在家白衣的袈裟,故称为穿着割裂坏色衣者。“Bhaṇḍu”:指秃头者。“Kāsāvavasano”:指穿着袈裟衣者。“Makkhaṃ asahamāno”:意为不能忍受、不能克制、不能平息那因长老而于自己相续中生起的、以抹杀他人功德为特征的伪善。“Bhiṃsanakāni”:指恐怖的所缘。为了显示这些,而说“从各处吹来强风”等语。“Bhusā vātā”:意为能摧折树木、击落山峰的暴风。“Asaniyo phalantī”:意为霹雳炸裂,即坠落。“Paharaṇavuṭṭhiyo”:意为各种武器之雨。“Niddhamatha”。显示巴利原文
Idāni tattha tattha gatānaṃ therānaṃ kiccānubhāvaṃ dassetukāmo majjhantikattherassa gataṭṭhāne kiccaṃ tāva dassento ‘‘tena kho pana samayena kasmīragandhāraraṭṭhe’’tiādimāha. Karakavassanti himapātanakavassaṃ. Harāpetvāti udakoghena harāpetvā. Aravāḷadahapiṭṭhiyanti aravāḷadahassa udakapiṭṭhiyaṃ. Chinnabhinnapaṭadharoti satthakena chinnaṃ raṅgena bhinnaṃ vaṇṇavikāramāpannaṃ paṭaṃ dhāretīti chinnabhinnapaṭadharo. Atha vā satthakena chinnānaṃ gihivatthavisabhāgānaṃ kāsāvānaṃ dhāraṇato chinnabhinnapaṭadharo. Bhaṇḍūti muṇḍako. Kāsāvavasanoti kāsāvavatthanivattho. Makkhaṃ asahamānoti theraṃ paṭicca attano santāne uppannaṃ paresaṃ guṇamakkhanalakkhaṇaṃ makkhaṃ asahamāno sandhāretuṃ adhisahituṃ vūpasametuṃ asakkonto. Bhiṃsanakānīti bheravārammaṇāni. Tāni dassetuṃ ‘‘tato tato bhusā vātā vāyantī’’tiādimāha. Bhusā vātāti rukkhabhedanapabbatakūṭanipātanasamatthā balavavātā. Asaniyo phalantīti asaniyo bhijjanti, patantīti vuttaṃ hoti. Paharaṇavuṭṭhiyoti anekappakārā āvudhavuṭṭhiyo. Niddhamathāti gahetvā apanetha. Bhiṃsanakanti nāgarājassa kāyikavācasikapayogajanitabhayanimittaṃ vippakāraṃ.
此句的连接意为:不能、不会生起我的怖畏恐惧。其中,“怖畏恐惧”是指微细的恐惧。或者,“怖畏”指心的惊惧,这是对嗔恚所生怖畏的称谓;“恐惧”指能生起怖畏的所缘。“Sacepi tvaṃ mahiṃ sabbanti”意为:大龙王,纵使你将整个大地连同海洋和山脉一同举起,掷于我的头顶,也绝不能生起我的怖畏恐惧。“Aññadatthu”意为必定。“Uragādhipāti”意为:龙王啊,必定只有你会有恼害、痛苦与伤害。显示巴利原文
Me bhayabheravaṃ janetuṃ paṭibalo na assa na bhaveyyāti sambandho. Tattha bhayabheravaṃ nāma khuddānukhuddakaṃ bhayaṃ. Atha vā bhayanti cittutrāsabhayaṃ, paṭighabhayassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Bheravanti bhayajanakamārammaṇaṃ. Sacepi tvaṃ mahiṃ sabbanti sacepi tvaṃ mahānāga sabbaṃ mahiṃ samuddena saha sasamuddaṃ pabbatena saha sapabbataṃ ukkhipitvā mamūpari mayhaṃ sīsopari khipeyyāsīti attho. Me bhayabheravaṃ janetuṃ neva sakkuṇeyyāsīti sambandho. Aññadatthūti ekaṃsena. Tavevassa vighāto uragādhipāti uragānaṃ nāgānaṃ adhipati rāja tava eva vighāto dukkhaṃ vihiṃsā assa bhaveyyāti attho.
“以法语开示”等,意为:以适合当时场合的说法,开示现世与来世的利益,劝导并令其受持善法,又激励他、令他奋发,进而以这份奋发及其他现有的功德,称赞他、令他欢喜。为显示长老对龙王的教诫,而说“那时,尊者”等语。其中,“ito uddhaṃ yathā pure”意为:如同你们从前未闻正法时,曾对他人起嗔怒,从今以后,未来切莫再起嗔怒;也不要对亲生之子断绝慈爱,作毁灭一切根本、杀害庄稼之事。“Sukhakāmā hi pāṇino”中的“hi”字是提示原因,意为:因为一切众生都喜爱快乐,所以不要断绝他们的利益安乐,不要作杀害庄稼之事。显示巴利原文
Dhammiyā kathāya sandassetvātiādīsu taṅkhaṇānurūpāya dhammadesanāya diṭṭhadhammasamparāyikaṃ atthaṃ sandassetvā kusale dhamme samādapetvā gaṇhāpetvā tattha ca naṃ samuttejetvā saussāhaṃ katvā tāya ca saussāhatāya aññehi ca vijjamānaguṇehi sampahaṃsetvā tosetvāti attho. Therena kataṃ nāgānusāsanaṃ dassento ‘‘athāyasmā’’tiādimāha. Tattha ito uddhaṃ yathā pureti yathā tumhe ito pure saddhammasavanuppattivirahitakāle parassa kodhaṃ uppādayittha, idāni ito paṭṭhāya uddhaṃ anāgate kodhañca mā janayittha, vijātamātuyāpi putte sinehacchedanaṃ sabbavināsamūlakaṃ sassaghātakañca mā karitthāti attho. Sukhakāmā hi pāṇinoti ettha hi-saddo kāraṇopadese, yasmā sabbe sattā sukhakāmā, tasmā hitasukhaupacchedakaraṃ sassaghātañca mā karothāti vuttaṃ hoti.
“Yathānusiṭṭhaṃ”:指凡是所教诫的,便按照所教诫而行;或解作不逾越教诫,即不违背长老所给予的教诫。“Dhammābhisamayo ahosi”:他们说,即获得了初道果。“Kulasatasahassaṃ”:以此“十万家族”显示十万男子。“Kasmīragandhārā”:意为迦湿弥罗和犍陀罗国的居民。“Kāsāvapajjotā”:意为被比丘们所穿着的袈裟映照而照亮。“Isivātapaṭivātā”:意为比丘们穿着袈裟行走时带起的风,以及伸展手足等动作所生的风,从四面八方吹拂着。“Duṭṭhaṃ”:意为愤怒的。“Bandhanā”:意为脱离轮回的束缚。显示巴利原文
Yathānusiṭṭhanti yaṃ yaṃ anusiṭṭhaṃ yathānusiṭṭhaṃ, anusiṭṭhaṃ anatikkamma vā yathānusiṭṭhaṃ, therena dinnovādaṃ anatikkammāti vuttaṃ hoti. Dhammābhisamayo ahosīti paṭhamamaggaphalādhigamo ahosīti vadanti. Kulasatasahassanti iminā purisānaṃ satasahassaṃ dasseti. Kasmīragandhārāti kasmīragandhāraraṭṭhavāsino. Kāsāvapajjotāti bhikkhūnaṃ nivatthapārutakāsāvavatthehi obhāsitā. Isivātapaṭivātāti bhikkhūnaṃ nivāsanapārupanavātena ceva hatthapādānaṃ samiñjanapasāraṇādivātena ca samantato bījiyamānā ahesuṃ. Duṭṭhanti kupitaṃ. Bandhanāti saṃsārabandhanato.
法眼指下三道智。然而,有些人在这里说:“他们只获得了初道智。”“以天使激励”的意思是:依《天使经》的教说,通过幼童、老人、病人、受刑罚者或行刑罚者、死者这五位天使来激励与教诫,令其生起悚惧。因为在那里,幼童等即被称为“天使”。譬如,幼童实际上这样说:“诸位请看,我也有和你们一样的手足,却陷在自己的粪尿之中,无力自行起身沐浴,也不能说‘我脏了,请为我沐浴’。我因未脱离生,才成了这般模样。然而不仅是我,你们也尚未脱离生。正如生已降临于我,它也会降临于你们。因此,在它到来之前,你们应行诸善。”因此,他被称为天使。显示巴利原文
Dhammacakkhunti heṭṭhāmaggattaye ñāṇaṃ. Keci panettha ‘‘paṭhamamaggañāṇameva te paṭilabhiṃsū’’ti vadanti. Codetvā devadūtehīti (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 3.263 ādayo) devadūtasuttantadesanāvasena (ma. ni. 3.261 ādayo) daharakumāro jarājiṇṇasatto gilānasatto kammakāraṇā kammakāraṇikā vā matasattoti imehi pañcahi devadūtehi codetvā ovaditvā, saṃvegaṃ uppādetvāti attho. Daharakumārādayo hi tattha ‘‘devadūtā’’ti vuccanti. Tathā hi daharakumāro atthato evaṃ vadati nāma ‘‘passatha bho mayhampi tumhākaṃ viya hatthapādā atthi, sake panamhi muttakarīse palipanno, attano dhammatāya uṭṭhahitvā nahāyituṃ na sakkomi, ‘ahaṃ kiliṭṭho, nahāpetha ma’nti vattumpi na sakkomi, jātitomhi aparimuttatāya ediso jāto, na kho panāhameva, tumhepi jātito aparimuttāva. Yatheva hi mayhaṃ, evaṃ tumhākampi jāti āgamissati, iti tassā pure āgamanāva kalyāṇaṃ karothā’’ti. Tenesa devadūto nāma jāto.
老人也实际上这样说:“诸位请看,我也曾像你们一样年轻,具足腿力、臂力与速度,然而这些力量与速疾的成就已从我身上消失,手足已不能发挥手足的作用。我因未脱离老,才变成这个样子。然而不仅是我,你们也未能从老中解脱。正如老已降临于我,它也将降临于你们。因此,在它到来之前,你们应行诸善。”因此,他被称为天使。显示巴利原文
Jarājiṇṇasattopi atthato evaṃ vadati nāma ‘‘passatha bho ahampi tumhe viya taruṇo ahosiṃ ūrubalabāhubalajavasampanno, tassa me tā balajavasampattiyo antarahitā, hatthapādā hatthapādakiccañca na karonti, jarāyamhi aparimuttatāya ediso jāto, na kho panāhameva, tumhepi jarāya aparimuttāva. Yatheva hi mayhaṃ, evaṃ tumhākampi jarā āgamissati, iti tassā pure āgamanāva kalyāṇaṃ karothā’’ti. Tenesa devadūto nāma jāto.
病人也实际上这样说:“请看,诸贤友,我也曾像你们一样无病,现在却被疾病击倒,陷在自己的粪尿之中,连起身都不能。虽然我的手足还在,却无法行使手足的功能。我因未脱离病,才变成这个样子。然而并非只有我如此,你们也未能从疾病中解脱。正如疾病已降临于我,它也将降临于你们。因此,在它到来之前,你们应行诸善。”因此,他被称为天使。显示巴利原文
Gilānasattopi atthato evaṃ vadati nāma ‘‘passatha bho ahampi tumhe viya nirogo ahosiṃ, somhi etarahi byādhinā abhihato sake muttakarīse palipanno, uṭṭhātumpi na sakkomi, vijjamānāpi me hatthapādā hatthapādakiccaṃ na karonti, byādhitomhi aparimuttatāya ediso jāto, na kho panāhameva, tumhepi byādhito aparimuttāva. Yatheva hi mayhaṃ, evaṃ tumhākampi byādhi āgamissati, iti tassa pure āgamanāva kalyāṇaṃ karothā’’ti. Tenesa devadūto nāma jāto.
应知,造业或造业者即为第四类天神使者。这其中,就造业方面而言,三十二种造业从法义上如此说道:“我们生起时,并非生于树端或石上,而是生于像你们这样的身体之中。因此,在我们生起之前,你们便应行善。”由此,它们被称为天神使者。就造业者方面,从法义上也如此说道:“我们造作三十二种业时,并非在树木等处造作,而是直接于像你们这样的众生身上造作。因此,在我们于你们身上造业之前,你们便应行善。”由此,它们也被称为天神使者。显示巴利原文
Kammakāraṇā kammakāraṇikā vā catuttho devadūtoti veditabbā. Tattha kammakāraṇapakkhe dvattiṃsa tāva kammakāraṇā atthato evaṃ vadanti nāma ‘‘mayaṃ nibbattamānā na rukkhe vā pāsāṇe vā nibbattāma, tumhādisānaṃ sarīre nibbattāma, iti amhākaṃ pure nibbattitova kalyāṇaṃ karothā’’ti. Tenetā devadūtā nāma jātā. Kammakāraṇikāpi atthato evaṃ vadanti nāma ‘‘mayaṃ dvattiṃsa kammakāraṇā karontā na rukkhādīsu karoma, tumhādisesu sattesuyeva karoma, iti amhākaṃ tumhesu pure kammakāraṇākāraṇatova kalyāṇaṃ karothā’’ti. Tenetepi devadūtā nāma jātā.
死者天神使者从法义上如此说道:“请看,贤友,我被弃置于荒冢间,已呈膨胀等相。我因未能从死亡解脱,方成此状。然而并非唯我如此,你们也同样未能从死亡解脱。正如死亡降于我身,它亦将降于你们。因此,在它到来之前,你们便应行善。”由此,他被称为天神使者。因此,幼童等在此处应被理解为“天神使者”。显示巴利原文
Matakasattopi atthato evaṃ vadati nāma ‘‘passatha bho maṃ āmakasusāne chaḍḍitaṃ uddhumātakādibhāvaṃ pattaṃ, maraṇatomhi aparimuttatāya ediso jāto, na kho panāhameva, tumhepi maraṇato aparimuttāva. Yatheva hi mayhaṃ, evaṃ tumhākampi maraṇaṃ āgamissati, iti tassa pure āgamanāva kalyāṇaṃ karothā’’ti. Tenesa devadūto nāma jāto. Tasmā daharakumārādayo ettha ‘‘devadūtā’’ti veditabbā.
“无始”:即与无始相应(《相应部》2.124)。“令饮法甘露”:意指通过使之获得出世间法甘露之饮,故说“令饮”。“更多”:即连同更多。此处“共”字为“俱”义。“仙人”:因寻求、探寻、遍求戒蕴等法蕴,故称仙人。“五国”:指五种支那国。应联系理解为:前往雪山,开示转法轮,令夜叉众获得净信。显示巴利原文
Anamataggiyanti anamataggasaṃyuttaṃ (saṃ. ni. 2.124). Dhammāmataṃ pāyesīti lokuttaradhammāmataṃ pānaṃ paṭilābhakaraṇavasena pāyesīti attho. Samadhikānīti sahādhikāni. Sahattho hettha saṃsaddo. Isīti sīlakkhandhādayo dhammakkhandhe esi gavesi pariyesīti isīti vuccati. Pañca raṭṭhānīti pañcavidhacīnaraṭṭhāni. Himavantaṃ gantvā dhammacakkappavattanaṃ pakāsento yakkhasenaṃ pasādayīti yojetabbaṃ.
“而在那时”是指那个时候,即他们出发之前的阶段。“将已获得”指将从毗沙门天王那里获得。“迅速”即以很快的速度。“四周设护”是指以“从此以后,不得进入”的决意,在四周设立防护。“三千五百”即第四之半,也就是三个半千,意为三千五百有余。“一千五百”即第二之半,也就是一个半千,意为一千五百有余。“索努达罗”即索纳与乌达罗二人。“驱逐后”即赶走之后。“教示了”即教导了。显示巴利原文
Tena ca samayenāti tasmiṃ samaye tesaṃ gamanato pubbabhāgakāle. Laddhaṃ bhavissatīti vessavaṇasantikā laddhaṃ bhavissati. Vegasāti vegena. Samantato ārakkhaṃ ṭhapesīti ‘‘ito paṭṭhāya mā pavisantū’’ti adhiṭṭhānavasena samantā ārakkhaṃ ṭhapesi. Aḍḍhuḍḍhāni sahassānīti aḍḍhena catutthāni aḍḍhuḍḍhāni, atirekapañcasatāni tīṇi sahassānīti vuttaṃ hoti. Diyaḍḍhasahassanti aḍḍhena dutiyaṃ diyaḍḍhaṃ, atirekapañcasataṃ ekaṃ sahassanti attho. Soṇuttarāti soṇo ca uttaro ca soṇuttarā. Niddhametvānāti palāpetvāna. Adesisunti adesayuṃ.
“被请求”意为被命令。“复今”中的“今”只是一个小品词,意思是“我们或许再来,或许不来”。“绕王舍城”是指避开王舍城,从城外右绕而行,或依那条绕行之道而行。现在,为了说明长老母亲住在韦提萨城的理由,为了显示该城是她的出生地以及长老事迹的缘由,因此说“据说无忧在王子时”等等。显示巴利原文
Ajjhiṭṭhoti āṇatto. Puna dānīti ettha dānīti nipātamattaṃ, puna āgaccheyyāma vā na vāti attho. Rājagahanagaraparivattakenāti rājagahanagaraṃ parivajjetvā tato bahi taṃ padakkhiṇaṃ katvā gatamaggena gamanena vā. Idāni theramātuyā veṭisanagare nivāsakāraṇaṃ dassetuṃ tassa nagarassa tassā jātibhūmibhāvaṃ therassa ca aṭṭhuppattiṃ dassento ‘‘asoko kira kumārakāle’’tiādimāha.
然而,此处有次第叙述:据说过去,生于孔雀族的名为旃陀掘多王的儿子,名为宾度萨罗的王子,在父王去世后,于华氏城成为国王。他有两个同母儿子,另有约九十九个异母兄弟。国王将副王位和阿槃提国赐予他们中最年长的无忧王子。某日,见他前来侍奉,便命令道:“儿啊,副王,去你的国土,住在那里优禅尼城吧。”他遵从父命前往优禅尼,途中在韦提萨山城一位名叫韦提萨的富豪家中住宿,见到富豪的女儿——具足相好、青春年少的韦提萨山少女,心生爱恋,向父母求请后,得到他们的应允,与她共住。她因与他共住而怀孕,后被带到优禅尼,生下玛欣德王子。此后过了两年,又得一女僧伽蜜多,与副王一同住在那里。然而,副王的父亲宾度萨罗卧于临终之床,忆起儿子无忧王子,便派人去优禅尼召他。他们去到优禅尼,向无忧报告此事。他听从他们的话,急速赶往父亲身边,途中将妻儿安置在韦提萨山城,然后前往父王所在的华氏城。刚到不久,父王便去世了。他令人办完父王的后事,随后杀了约九十九个异母兄弟,除去荆棘,在那里升伞即王位。那时,长老的母亲将孩子们送到国王身边,自己仍住在韦提萨山城。因此说“那时他的母亲住在亲族家中”。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ panettha anupubbikathā – pubbe kira moriyavaṃse jātassa candaguttassa nāma rañño putto bindusāro nāma kumāro pitu accayena pāṭaliputtamhi nagare rājā ahosi. Tassa dve puttā saudariyā ahesuṃ, tesaṃ ekūnasatamattā vemātikabhātaro ahesuṃ. Rājā pana tesaṃ sabbajeṭṭhakassa asokakumārassa uparajjaṭṭhānañca avantiraṭṭhañca datvā athekadivasaṃ attano upaṭṭhānaṃ āgataṃ disvā ‘‘tāta, uparāja, tava raṭṭhaṃ gantvā tattha ujjenīnagare vasāhī’’ti āṇāpesi. So pitu vacanena taṃ ujjeniṃ gacchanto antarāmagge veṭisagirinagare veṭisanāmakassa seṭṭhissa ghare nivāsaṃ upagantvā tassa seṭṭhissa dhītaraṃ lakkhaṇasampannaṃ yobbanappattaṃ veṭisagiriṃ nāma kumāriṃ disvā tāya paṭibaddhacitto mātāpitūnaṃ kathāpetvā taṃ tehi dinnaṃ paṭilabhitvā tāya saddhiṃ saṃvāsaṃ kappesi. Sā tena saṃvāsena sañjātagabbhā hutvā tato ujjeniṃ nītā mahindakumāraṃ janayi. Tato vassadvaye atikkante saṅghamittañca dhītaraṃ upalabhitvā uparājena saddhiṃ tattha vasati. Uparājassa pana pitā bindusāro maraṇamañce nipanno puttaṃ asokakumāraṃ saritvā taṃ pakkosāpetuṃ ujjeniṃ manusse pesesi. Te tato ujjeniṃ gantvā asokassa taṃ pavattiṃ ārocesuṃ. Tesaṃ vacanena so pitu santikaṃ turitagamanenāgacchanto antarāmagge veṭisagirinagaramhi puttadāre ṭhapetvā pitu santakaṃ pāṭaliputtanagaraṃ gantvā gatasamanantarameva kālakatassa pituno sarīrakiccaṃ kārāpetvā tato ekūnasatamatte vemātikabhātaro ca ghātāpetvā vihatakaṇṭako hutvā tattha chattaṃ ussāpetvā abhisekaṃ gaṇhi. Tadāpi theramātā dārake rañño santikaṃ pesetvā sayaṃ tattheva veṭisagirinagare vasi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘sā tassa mātā tena samayena ñātighare vasī’’ti.
“Āropesīti”意思是“使实行、使成就”。他说“我们在此应做之事已毕”,是针对见到母亲一事已经成办而说的。“愿他先受用我父所派遣的灌顶……”等,关于灌顶派遣等的详细叙述,将在后文展现。“Chaṇattha”意思是“为了庆典”,即“以庆典为因缘”,这是说明他自己不想参与庆典游戏。据说那时,天爱帝须王在杰咤木罗月满月之日宣布星宿节,命令大臣们“举办水戏庆典”,而他自己想去狩猎,便前往了弥沙迦山。“弥沙迦山”因其土石混杂而得此名。“已见谛者”是指以不还道证得谛理,也就是已证得不还果。据说他听闻长老为自己母后所说的法后,便证得了不还果,当知他是长老的外甥。原来长老的母后之妹有一女,此女生下此子。这在《大史》中也有记载——显示巴利原文
Āropesīti paṭipādesi. Amhākaṃ idha kattabbakiccaṃ niṭṭhitanti mātu dassanassa katabhāvaṃ sandhāyāha. Anubhavatu tāva me pitarā pesitaṃ abhisekantiādīsu abhisekapesanādikathā vitthārena uttarato āvi bhavissati. Chaṇatthanti chaṇanimittaṃ, chaṇahetūti attho, sayaṃ chaṇakīḷaṃ akātukāmoti vuttaṃ hoti. Tadā kira devānaṃpiyatisso jeṭṭhamūlamāsapuṇṇamiyaṃ nakkhattaṃ ghosāpetvā ‘‘salilakīḷāchaṇaṃ karothā’’ti amacce āṇāpetvā sayaṃ migavaṃ kīḷitukāmo missakapabbataṃ agamāsi. Missakapabbatanti paṃsupāsāṇamissakattā evaṃladdhanāmaṃ pabbataṃ. Diṭṭhasaccoti anāgāmimaggena paṭividdhasacco, anāgāmiphalaṃ pattoti vuttaṃ hoti. So kira therena attano mātudeviyā desitaṃ dhammaṃ sutvā anāgāmiphalaṃ sacchākāsi, so ca therassa bhāgineyyoti veditabbo. Tathā hi therassa mātudeviyā bhaginī tassā dhītā, tassā ayaṃ putto. Vuttañhetaṃ mahāvaṃse –
王后姐妹之女,有子名婆努迦;
他听闻长老为王后所说的法,
证得不还果后,便安住于长老身边。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Deviyā bhaginī dhītu, putto bhaṇḍukanāmako; Therena deviyā dhammaṃ, sutvā desitameva tu; Anāgāmiphalaṃ patvā, vasi therassa santike’’ti.
“你们已被正自觉者授记”是说:在菩提树下,以佛眼观照世间,见到铜叶岛后,正自觉者预见该岛未来的昌盛,而为你们授记,说:“未来将有一位名为玛欣德的比丘,令铜叶岛生起净信。”其中,“铜叶岛”指岛上居民。能知根器上下与习性随眠之智,名为“佛眼”。然而,若不以根器上下等智,则不能见其他,故此处不说“正在观察”,而说“观察后”。此段文意,即是“未来将有一位名为玛欣德的比丘,令铜叶岛生起净信”这一义理。显示巴利原文
Sammāsambuddhena ca tumhe byākatāti bodhimūle eva buddhacakkhunā lokaṃ voloketvā tambapaṇṇidīpaṃ disvā anāgate tassa dīpassa sampattiṃ diṭṭhena sammāsambuddhena ‘‘anāgate mahindo nāma bhikkhu tambapaṇṇidīpaṃ pasādessatī’’ti tumhe byākatā. Tattha tambapaṇṇidīpanti dīpavāsino vuttā. Indriyaparopariyattañāṇaṃ āsayānusayañāṇañca ‘‘buddhacakkhū’’ti vuccati. Tena pana indriyaparoparādiṃ vinā aññaṃ na sakkā daṭṭhunti ‘‘volokento’’ti avatvā ‘‘voloketvā’’ti vuttaṃ. Etamatthanti ‘‘anāgate mahindo nāma bhikkhu tambapaṇṇidīpaṃ pasādessatī’’ti imamatthaṃ.
“在韦提萨山的王舍寺”是指王后所建的寺院。“正是出行之时,我们前往最胜之岛吧”——应当这样连接,这也是对他们内心思虑的展示。“腾空”是说他们跃入空中。“于空中”即在天空之中。为显示他们跃入空中后做了什么,便说他们降落在支提山,即:“如此腾空而起的诸位长老,降落在最胜之城。”接着,为了说明那座山所在之处以及长老们在那里降落之处,而说出“在胜者之城前方……”等偈颂。“前方”指东面的区域。“胜者之城”指名为阿努罗陀补罗的殊胜都城。“如云”是说山色四周蔚蓝,如同大片的蓝云一般。“在尸罗峰”意为在那样称呼的山峰上。“如天鹅于山顶”是说犹如天鹅般降落在山顶。显示巴利原文
Veṭisagirimhi rājagaheti deviyā katavihāre. Kālova gamanassa, gacchāma dīpamuttamanti yojetabbaṃ. Idañca tesaṃ parivitakkanidassanaṃ. Paḷināti ākāsaṃ pakkhandiṃsu. Ambareti ākāse. Evamākāsaṃ pakkhanditvā kiṃ te akaṃsūti cetiyapabbate nipatiṃsūti dassento āha ‘‘evamuppatitā therā, nipatiṃsu naguttame’’ti. Idāni tassa pabbatassa patiṭṭhitaṭṭhānaṃ therānañca tattha nipatitaṭṭhānaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘purato puraseṭṭhassā’’tiādigāthamāha. Puratoti pācīnadisābhāge. Puraseṭṭhassāti anurādhapurasaṅkhātassa puravarassa. Meghasannibheti samantato nīlavaṇṇattā nīlamahāmeghasadise. Sīlakūṭamhīti evaṃnāmake pabbatakūṭe. Haṃsāva nagamuddhanīti pabbatamuddhani haṃsā viya.
那么,它是在何时成立的呢?答:“如此,与伊提耶等一起……”等。“从般涅槃起”,是指从世尊般涅槃那一年算起,除去作为界限的那一年,此后在二百年之后的第三十六年。应作此解。如何得知呢?答:“因为阿阇世王……”等。“就在那一年”,据说就在世尊般涅槃的那一年、那一天,维阇耶王子来到了这座岛屿。正如所说——显示巴利原文
Tattha pana patiṭṭhahanto kadā patiṭṭhahīti āha ‘‘evaṃ iṭṭiyādīhi saddhi’’ntiādi. Parinibbānatoti parinibbānavassato taṃ avadhibhūtaṃ muñcitvā tato uddhaṃ dvinnaṃ vassasatānaṃ upari chattiṃsatime vasseti attho gahetabbo. Kathaṃ veditabboti āha ‘‘ajātasattussa hī’’tiādi. Tasmiṃyeva vasseti ettha yasmiṃ saṃvacchare yasmiñca divase bhagavā parinibbuto, tasmiṃ saṃvacchare tasmiṃyeva ca divase vijayakumāro imaṃ dīpamāgatoti vadanti. Vuttañhetaṃ –
在楞伽岛,有一位名叫维阇耶的王子,
他智慧坚固,登上了铜叶岛。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Laṅkāyaṃ vijayasanāmako kumāro, Otiṇṇo thiramati tambapaṇṇidīpe; Sālānaṃ yamakaguṇānamantarasmiṃ, Nibbātuṃ sayitadine tathāgatassā’’ti.
“狮子子”:应知,此处指迦陵伽王女腹中由狮子所生的王子,故称为狮子子。由于先前此处是无人住处,故说“他建立了人住处”。“在第十四年”意为在第十四年到来时。“在此处,维阇耶命终”意为:维阇耶王子于铜叶岛治国三十八年后,在此命终。阿阇世王在位三十二年,优陀耶跋陀罗在位十六年,以此推算,以阿阇世王第八年为维阇耶来此的第一年,此后阿阇世王尚有二十四年,优陀耶跋陀罗十四年,如是维阇耶满三十八年。正如所说——显示巴利原文
Sīhakumārassa puttoti ettha kāliṅgarājadhītu kucchismiṃ sīhassa jāto kumāro sīhakumāroti veditabbo, pubbe amanussāvāsattā āha ‘‘manussāvāsaṃ akāsī’’ti. Cuddasame vasseti cuddasame vasse sampatte. Idha vijayo kālamakāsīti imasmiṃ tambapaṇṇidīpe vijayarājakumāro aṭṭhatiṃsa vassāni rajjaṃ kāretvā kālamakāsi. Tathā hi ajātasattu rājā dvattiṃsa vassāni rajjaṃ kāresi, udayabhaddo soḷasa vassāni, tasmā ajātasattussa aṭṭhamavassaṃ idha vijayassa paṭhamavassanti katvā tato uddhaṃ ajātasattussa catuvīsati vassāni udayabhaddassa cuddasa vassānīti vijayassa aṭṭhatiṃsa vassāni paripūriṃsu. Tathā ca vuttaṃ –
维阇耶来至楞伽,正值导师般涅槃之日;
他降伏夜叉,治世三十八载。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Vijayo laṅkamāgamma, satthu nibbānavāsare; Aṭṭhatiṃsa samākāsi, rajjaṃ yakkhavimaddako’’ti.
据称:“优陀耶跋陀罗第十五年,名般度婆苏提婆者于此岛登王位”,故应了知:在优陀耶跋陀罗第十四年间,于此岛,维阇耶与般度婆苏提婆之间,锡兰处于无王状态。因彼年维阇耶王的大臣们以优波帝须大臣为首,住于以其名号所建的优波帝须村,治理无王之国土。即如所说——”显示巴利原文
‘‘Udayabhaddassa pañcadasame vasse paṇḍuvāsudevo nāma imasmiṃ dīpe rajjaṃ pāpuṇī’’ti vuttattā udayabhaddassa cuddasamavassasaṅkhātaṃ ekaṃ vassaṃ imasmiṃ dīpe vijayassa paṇḍuvāsudevassa ca antare sīhaḷaṃ arājikaṃ hutvā ṭhitanti veditabbaṃ. Tasmiñhi vasse vijayarājassa amaccā upatissaṃ nāma amaccaṃ jeṭṭhakaṃ katvā tassa nāmena kate upatissagāme vasantā arājikaṃ rajjamanusāsiṃsu. Vuttañhetaṃ –
他去世后,大臣们期盼着刹帝利种姓的到来;
他们住在优波帝须村,治理国家。
维阇耶王去世后,在刹帝利种姓到来之前;
这一年,此楞伽岛处于无王状态。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Tasmiṃ mate amaccā te, pekkhantā khattiyāgamaṃ; Upatissagāme ṭhatvāna, raṭṭhaṃ samanusāsisuṃ. ‘‘Mate vijayarājamhi, khattiyāgamanā purā; Ekaṃ vassaṃ ayaṃ laṅkā-dīpo āsi arājiko’’ti.
“在那里”指赡部洲洲。“在此处,般度婆苏提婆命终”意为在此锡兰岛,般度婆苏提婆治国三十年后命终。如此,在优陀耶跋陀罗之后,阿努鲁陀和蒙陀治国八年,其后那伽达娑迦治国二十四年,因此,优陀耶跋陀罗的第十五年与第十六年,加上阿努鲁陀和蒙陀的八年,以及那伽达娑迦二十四年中的二十年,般度婆苏提婆王满三十年。正因如此而说——显示巴利原文
Tatthāti jambudīpe. Idha paṇḍuvāsudevo kālamakāsīti imasmiṃ sīhaḷadīpe paṇḍuvāsudevo tiṃsa vassāni rajjamanusāsitvā kālamakāsi. Tathā hi udayabhaddassa anantaraṃ anuruddho ca muṇḍo ca aṭṭha vassāni rajjamanusāsiṃsu, tadanantaraṃ nāgadāsako catuvīsati vassāni, tasmā udayabhaddassa pañcadasamasoḷasamavassehi saddhiṃ anuruddhassa ca muṇḍassa ca aṭṭha vassāni, nāgadāsakassa ca catuvīsativassesu vīsati vassānīti paṇḍuvāsudevassa rañño tiṃsa vassāni paripūriṃsu. Teneva vuttaṃ –
‘‘Tato paṇḍuvāsudevo, rajjaṃ tiṃsa samā akā’’ti;
此处,指赡部洲洲。第十七夏,即第十七年到来时。因为那迦达萨王之后,须修那伽王统治王国十八年,因此除去那迦达萨王二十四年中的二十年,将剩余的四年加上须修那伽王十八年中的十六年,在此阿跋耶王的二十年便得圆满。此义已说:显示巴利原文
Tatthāti jambudīpe. Sattarasame vasseti sattarasame vasse sampatte. Tathā hi nāgadāsakassa anantarā susunāgo aṭṭhārasa vassāni rajjaṃ kāresi, tasmā nāgadāsakassa catuvīsativassesu vīsati vassāni ṭhapetvā sesehi catūhi vassehi saddhiṃ susunāgassa aṭṭhārasasu vassesu soḷasa vassānīti idha abhayarañño vīsati vassāni paripūriṃsu. Vuttañhetaṃ –
‘‘Abhayo vīsati vassāni, laṅkārajjamakārayī’’ti;
“大盗”指制造战争的盗贼。然而般度迦阿跋耶是阿跋耶的外甥,本就是国王,并非盗贼,但因以武力夺取王权,故被称为“大盗”。“夺取王国”是指夺取了一部分国土。因为阿跋耶在位的第二十年,他尚未夺取全部国土。事实上,从第二十年开始,阿跋耶的九个兄弟——即他的舅舅们——在各处作战,并被杀害,而般度迦阿跋耶尚未灌顶,如此过了十七年,因此那些年被称为“无王之年”。此义已说:显示巴利原文
Dāmarikoti yuddhakārako coro. Paṇḍukābhayo pana abhayassa bhāgineyyo rājāyeva, na coro, balakkārena pana rajjassa gahitattā ‘‘dāmariko’’ti vuttaṃ. Rajjaṃ aggahesīti ekadesassa gahitattā vuttaṃ. Abhayassa hi vīsatime vasse na tāva sabbaṃ rajjamaggahesīti. Tathā hi vīsatimavassato paṭṭhāya abhayassa nava bhātike attano mātule tattha tattha yuddhaṃ katvā ghātentassa anabhisittasseva sattarasa vassāni atikkamiṃsu, tatoyeva ca tāni rājasuññāni nāma ahesuṃ. Tathā ca vuttaṃ –
在般度迦阿跋耶王与阿跋耶王之间,
王位虚悬的年数,共经历了十七年。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Paṇḍukābhayarañño ca, abhayassa ca antare; Rājasuññāni vassāni, ahesuṃ dasa satta cā’’ti.
此处指赡部洲洲。“般度迦”即般度迦阿跋耶,因为有时以简称称呼,例如称“提婆达多”为“达多”。“十七年圆满”是指在尚未灌顶的情况下已满十七年。其中,除去黑阿育王第十六年,取其前十五年,并取须修那伽王第十七、十八年中的两年,合计为十七年。这些加上之前的一年则成十八年。因此,那十七年无王之年,加上最初毗阇耶王与般度瓦苏提婆王之间的一年无王期,共称为十八年无王之年。显示巴利原文
Tatthāti jambudīpe. Paṇḍukassāti paṇḍukābhayassa. Bhavati hi ekadesenapi vohāro ‘‘devadatto datto’’ti yathā. Sattarasa vassāni paripūriṃsūti anabhisittasseva paripūriṃsu. Ettha ca kāḷāsokassa soḷasamavassaṃ ṭhapetvā pannarasa vassāni heṭṭhā susunāgassa sattarasamaaṭṭhārasamavassāni ca dve gahetvā sattarasa vassāni gaṇitabbāni. Tāni heṭṭhā ekena vassena saha aṭṭhārasa hontīti tāni rājasuññāni sattarasa vassāni heṭṭhā vijayapaṇḍuvāsudevarājūnamantare arājikena ekena vassena saddhiṃ aṭṭhārasa rājasuññavassāni nāma honti.
在旃陀罗笈多王第十四年,此铜掌岛上的般度迦阿跋耶王命终,他统治了七十年。是故:须修那迦之子黑阿育王统治二十八年,其后他的儿子十兄弟统治二十二年,之后九难陀王统治二十二年,旃陀罗笈多王统治二十四年。其中,黑阿育王二十八年中前十五年已计入前文,除去后剩十三年;十兄弟的二十二年;九难陀的二十二年;从旃陀罗笈多王的统治中除去第十四年取十三年;如此般度迦阿跋耶王的七十年得以圆满。此义已说。显示巴利原文
Candaguttassacuddasame vasse idha paṇḍukābhayo kālamakāsīti candaguttassa cuddasame vasse imasmiṃ tambapaṇṇidīpe paṇḍukābhayo nāma rājā sattati vassāni rajjamanusāsitvā kālamakāsi. Tathā hi susunāgassa putto kāḷāsoko aṭṭhavīsati vassāni rajjaṃ kāresi. Tato tassa puttā dasa bhātukā dvevīsati vassāni rajjaṃ kāresuṃ, tesaṃ pacchā nava nandā dvevīsati, candagutto catuvīsati vassāni rajjaṃ kāresi. Tattha kāḷāsokassa aṭṭhavīsativassesu pannarasa vassāni heṭṭhā gahitānīti tāni ṭhapetvā sesāni terasa vassāni, dasabhātukānaṃ dvevīsati, tathā navanandānaṃ dvevīsati, candaguttassa cuddasamavassaṃ ṭhapetvā terasa vassānīti paṇḍukābhayassa sattati vassāni paripūriṃsu. Tathā ca vuttaṃ –
‘‘Paṇḍukābhayanāmassa, rañño vassāni sattatī’’ti;
在阿育法王第十七年,此赡部洲洲的穆他悉婆王命终,他统治了六十年。是故:旃陀罗笈多之子宾度萨罗统治二十八年,其后他的儿子阿育法王获得王位。旃陀罗笈多王如前所述二十四年中,已计入十三年,剩余十一年;加上宾度萨罗的二十八年;阿育王未灌顶的四年;灌顶后的十七年;如此穆他悉婆王在此处的六十年得以圆满。此义已说。显示巴利原文
Tattha asokadhammarājassa sattarasame vasse idha muṭasivarājā kālamakāsīti tasmiṃ jambudīpe asokadhammarājassa sattarasame vasse idha muṭasivo nāma rājā saṭṭhi vassāni rajjamanusāsitvā kālamakāsi . Tathā hi candaguttassa putto bindusāro aṭṭhavīsati vassāni rajjaṃ kāresi, tato tassa putto asokadhammarājā rajjaṃ pāpuṇi, tasmā candaguttassa heṭṭhā vuttesu catuvīsativassesu terasa vassāni gahitānīti tāni ṭhapetvā sesāni ekādasa vassāni, bindusārassa aṭṭhavīsati vassāni, asokassa anabhisittassa cattāri vassāni, abhisittassa sattarasa vassānīti evaṃ saṭṭhi vassāni idha muṭasivassa paripūriṃsu. Tathā ca vuttaṃ –
‘‘Muṭasivo saṭṭhi vassāni, laṅkārajjamakārayī’’ti;
天爱帝须王登位,是在阿育法王第十八年。今为显示从世尊般涅槃后,依阿阇世王等的年数计算,于般涅槃后合共二百三十六年,故说“正自觉者般涅槃后”等。其中,阿阇世王的二十四年,是除去被称为般涅槃年的第八年之后所说。应知十兄弟王是黑阿育王的儿子:跋陀塞那、拘兰陀凡那、曼古罗、萨般阇诃、阇利迦、乌跋迦、散阇耶、拘罗毗耶、难提跋陀那。这些便是十兄弟王。应知九难陀是:郁伽塞那难陀、般度迦难陀、般度迦提难陀、菩陀波罗难陀、罗陀波罗难陀、瞿毗萨那迦难陀、萨毗陀迦难陀(Sa显示巴利原文
Devānaṃpiyatisso rajjaṃ pāpuṇīti asokadhammarājassa aṭṭhārasame vasse pāpuṇi. Idāni parinibbute bhagavati ajātasattuādīnaṃ vassagaṇanāvasena parinibbānato dvinnaṃ vassasatānaṃ upari chattiṃsati vassāni ekato gaṇetvā dassento āha ‘‘parinibbute ca sammāsambuddhe’’tiādi. Tattha ajātasattussa catuvīsatīti parinibbānavassasaṅkhātaṃ aṭṭhamavassaṃ muñcitvā vuttaṃ. Asokassa puttakā dasa bhātukarājānoti kāḷāsokassa puttā bhaddaseno koraṇḍavaṇṇo maṅkuro sabbañjaho jāliko ubhako sañcayo korabyo nandivaḍḍhano pañcamakoti ime dasa bhātukarājānoti veditabbā. Uggasenanando paṇḍukanando paṇḍugatinando bhūtapālanando raṭṭhapālanando govisāṇakanando saviddhakanando kevaṭṭakanando dhananandoti ime nava nandāti veditabbā. Etena rājavaṃsānusārenāti etena jambudīpavāsirājūnaṃ vaṃsānusārena veditabbametanti attho.
对于铜掌岛的居民,也应依诸王而如此计算:以正自觉者般涅槃之年作为毗阇耶的第一年,除去该年,从般涅槃年后,为毗阇耶的三十七年;其后,无王的一年;般度瓦苏提婆的三十年;阿跋耶的二十年;般度迦阿跋耶灌顶前的十七年,灌顶后的七十年;穆他悉婆的六十年;天爱帝须的第一年。如是应知,般涅槃后合计二百三十六年。显示巴利原文
Tambapaṇṇidīpavāsīnampi puna rājūnaṃ vasena evaṃ gaṇanā veditabbā – sammāsambuddhassa parinibbānavassaṃ idha vijayassa paṭhamaṃ vassanti katvā taṃ apanetvā parinibbānavassato uddhaṃ vijayassa sattatiṃsa vassāni, tato arājikamekavassaṃ, paṇḍuvāsudevassa tiṃsa vassāni, abhayassa vīsati vassāni, paṇḍukābhayassa abhisekato pubbe sattarasa vassāni, abhisittassa sattati vassāni, muṭasivassa saṭṭhi vassāni, devānaṃpiyatissassa paṭhamaṃ vassanti evaṃ parinibbānato dvinnaṃ vassasatānaṃ upari chattiṃsa vassāni veditabbāni.
“在长月的满月日,若逢长星或根星”,因此说“名为长根星”。应知,在那个星宿时举行的节庆,也因依于该星宿而得此同一名称。“鹿苑”是指对鹿进行杀害、折磨、逼迫,因而得到“鹿苑”之称的地方。“红鹿形”是指如牛耳羚羊那样的鹿形。“弓”是指弓弦。“随行”是指以脚步追随。关于“愿国王只看见我”,应知:此处他以“若见到我们众多人,国王会极度恐惧”为由,为了只显示自己而决意“只看见我”。在说了“他思惟”之后,为了显示其思惟方式,而说“生于这个岛”等语。长老了知他的心思后,为了讲述自己的真实身份并安慰他,而说“大王,我们是沙门”等语。其意为:“大王,我们是名为沙门者,你不要心生疑惑。”“为了悲悯你”,意指“正是为了悲悯你而来,并非为了敌对”。若问:“对于一个不知‘这些是沙门’的人,长老为何说‘大王,我们是沙门’?”这是为了提醒他,先前由阿育法王派遣的使者已让他对沙门留下了印象,所以才这样说。为了阐明此义,而说“那时”等语。显示巴利原文
Jeṭṭhamāsassa puṇṇamiyaṃ jeṭṭhanakkhattaṃ mūlanakkhattaṃ vā hotīti āha ‘‘jeṭṭhamūlanakkhattaṃ nāma hotī’’ti. Tasmiṃ pana nakkhatte kattabbachaṇampi tannissayattā tameva nāmaṃ labhatīti veditabbaṃ. Migavanti migānaṃ vānanato hesanato bādhanato migavanti laddhasamaññaṃ migavaṃ. Rohitamigarūpanti gokaṇṇamigavesaṃ. Jiyanti dhanujiyaṃ. Anubandhantoti padasā anudhāvanto. Mamaṃyeva rājā passatūti ettha ‘‘amhesu bahūsu diṭṭhesu rājā ativiya bhāyissatī’’ti iminā kāraṇena attānameva dassetuṃ ‘‘mamaṃyeva passatū’’ti adhiṭṭhāsīti veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Cintesī’’ti vatvā tassa cintanākāraṃ dassento āha ‘‘imasmiṃ dīpe jāto’’tiādi. Thero tassa parivitakkaṃ jānitvā attano sabhāvaṃ kathetvā taṃ assāsetukāmo ‘‘samaṇā mayaṃ mahārājā’’tiādimāha. Mahārāja mayaṃ samaṇā nāma, tvaṃ parivitakkaṃ mā akāsīti vuttaṃ hoti. Taveva anukampāyāti tava anukampatthāya eva āgatā, na vimukhabhāvatthāyāti adhippāyo. ‘‘Ime samaṇā nāmā’’ti ajānantassa ‘‘samaṇā mayaṃ, mahārājā’’ti kasmā thero āhāti ce? Asokadhammarājena pesitasāsaneneva pubbe gahitasamaṇasaññaṃ sāretuṃ evamāhāti. Imamatthaṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘tena ca samayenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
“未曾见面而成为朋友者”即“未见之友”,意为彼此未曾相见便成为朋友。“在遮山山脚”是指在名为遮车山的山脚。据说,那座山位于阿努拉德普勒城东南方,相距超过两由旬,矗立在那里。后来,一位名为萨陀提沙的大王在该处建造了一座寺院,人们称之为“遮寺”。“‘如车辕之量’是指长度和周长都与车刺棒相等”,这在三处义注中都有说明。《大史》中也说:显示巴利原文
Adiṭṭhā hutvā sahāyakāti adiṭṭhasahāyakā, aññamaññaṃ adisvāva sahāyakabhāvaṃ upagatāti vuttaṃ hoti. Chātapabbatapādeti chātavāhassa nāma pabbatassa pāde. Taṃ kira pabbataṃ anurādhapurā pubbadakkhiṇadisābhāge atirekayojanadvayamatthake tiṭṭhati. Tamhi ṭhāne pacchā saddhātisso nāma mahārājā vihāraṃ kārāpesi, taṃ ‘‘chātavihāra’’nti vohariṃsu. ‘‘Rathayaṭṭhippamāṇāti āyāmato ca āvaṭṭato ca rathapatodena samappamāṇā’’ti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Mahāvaṃsepi vuttaṃ –
“遮山脚处,有三宽辐之轮辐;
从车刺棒之处生出,大小皆相等。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Chātapabbatapādamhi , tisso ca veḷuyaṭṭhiyo; Jātā rathapatodena, samānā parimāṇato’’ti.
《义注》中则说:“‘如车辕之量’意为如同车上的旗杆之量。”“生起”是指在他灌顶的同时便生起。应知,后面将要叙述的诸种奇迹的显现也是如此。《大史》中亦说:显示巴利原文
Gaṇṭhipade pana ‘‘rathayaṭṭhippamāṇāti rathassa dhajayaṭṭhippamāṇā’’ti vuttaṃ. Uppajjiṃsūti tassa abhisekasamakālameva uppajjiṃsu. Evamuttaripi vakkhamānānaṃ acchariyānaṃ pātubhāvo veditabbo. Tathā ca vuttaṃ mahāvaṃse –
天爱帝须王,于父王去世后即位;
与他的灌顶同时,有众多稀有之事出现。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Devānaṃpiyatisso so, rājāsi pituaccaye; Tassābhisekena samaṃ, bahūnacchariyānahū’’ti.
“有一藤蔓,名为杖”——这是指一根因以金藤为饰而得此名的杖。那装饰后出现的藤蔓,是指将那根银色的杖装饰后,如同就地而作的彩绘一般显现的藤蔓。“显现”即被看见。“花蕊”即须。应知,这些在花杖上的蓝花等,以及在鸟杖上的种种兽鸟,都如同就地而作的彩绘一般显现。“白色的,如同银杖”,意为有一根杖是白色的,恰如一根银杖。“藤蔓”即指如同就地而作的彩绘一般显现的藤蔓。“蓝等,无论何种花”,是说世间有怎样的蓝花等,在花杖上便显现怎样的花。显示巴利原文
Ekā latā yaṭṭhi nāmāti kañcanalatāya paṭimaṇḍitattā evaṃladdhanāmā ekā yaṭṭhi ahosi. Taṃ alaṅkaritvā uppannalatāti taṃ rajatavaṇṇaṃ yaṭṭhiṃ alaṅkaritvā tattheva cittakammakatā viya uppannalatā. Khāyatīti dissati. Kiñjakkhānīti kesarāni. Etāni ca pupphayaṭṭhiyaṃ nīlapupphādīni sakuṇayaṭṭhiyañca nānappakārā migapakkhino tattheva cittakammakatā viya paññāyantīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Setā rajatayaṭṭhīvāti rajatamayayaṭṭhi viya ekā yaṭṭhi setavaṇṇāti attho. Latāti tattheva cittakammakatā viya dissamānalatā. Nīlādi yādisaṃ pupphanti yādisaṃ loke nīlādipupphaṃ atthi, tādisaṃ pupphayaṭṭhimhi khāyatīti attho.
“生起了各种宝物”,意为各种宝物从海中自行登上岸,在岸边如同被波浪冲击所成的边际线一般生起,即涌出后停在那里。而在“铜掌岛生起了八颗珍珠”这句中,也应了知,在铜掌岛,有八颗珍珠从海中自行涌出,依前述方式停留在海边。这在《大史》中也有说:显示巴利原文
Anekavihitaṃ ratanaṃ uppajjīti anekappakāraṃ ratanaṃ samuddato sayameva tīraṃ āruhitvā velante ūmivegābhijātamariyādavaṭṭi viya uppajji, uṭṭhahitvā aṭṭhāsīti attho. Tambapaṇṇiyaṃ pana aṭṭha muttā uppajjiṃsūti etthāpi tambapaṇṇiyaṃ samuddato sayameva uṭṭhahitvā jātito aṭṭha muttā samuddatīre vuttanayeneva ṭhitāti veditabbā. Vuttañhetaṃ mahāvaṃse –
整个锡兰岛上,宝藏和诸般珍宝异常丰盛;
它们从地中涌出,升上地面。
在楞伽岛附近,又有来自破船的珍宝,
那些在那里生起的宝物,都登上了陆地。
马宝、象宝、车宝、余甘子果宝、手镯宝、指环宝,
顶髻宝、天然宝,如是种类,共有八种。
珍珠从海中升起,如圆轮立于岸畔;
此乃天爱帝须王一切功德的显现。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Laṅkādīpamhi sakale, nidhayo ratanāni ca; Antoṭhitāni uggantvā, pathavītalamāruhuṃ. ‘‘Laṅkādīpasamīpamhi, bhinnanāvāgatāni ca; Tatra jātāni ca thalaṃ, ratanāni samāruhuṃ. ‘‘Hayagajā rathāmalakā, valayaṅguliveṭhakā; Kakudhaphalā pākatikā, iccetā aṭṭha jātito. ‘‘Muttā samuddā uggantvā, tīre vaṭṭi viya ṭhitā; Devānaṃpiyatissassa, sabbapuññavijambhita’’nti.
“Hayamuttā”指马形珍珠;“Gajamuttā”指象形珍珠。如此,一切珍珠当依各自形状而了知其分类。“Aṅguliveṭhakamuttā”指戒指形珍珠,即印章形珍珠。“Kakudhaphalamuttā”指形状如迦拘陀树果实的众多非海产珍珠。“Rājakakudhabhaṇḍānī”指适合国王的最上等物品。为显示其自相,而说“伞盖、拂尘”等。并送去了其他多种礼品,应如此连接文义。“Saṅkha”指用于灌顶洒水的右旋海螺。“Anotattodaka”即所谓“恒河水”。“Vaḍḍhamāna”指装饰用的香粉,也有说是“沐浴粉”。“Vaṭaṃsaka”指耳饰,即耳环,也有说指垂挂于耳垂的饰物。“Bhiṅgāra”指黄金打造的大水瓶,也有说是摩羯鱼口形状、为作供养等而制作的容器工艺品。“Nandiyāvaṭṭa”指乌鸦爪形状、为吉祥而打造的黄金容器工艺品。“Kañña”指刹帝利少女。“Adhovimaṃ dussayugaṃ”意为“一套下衣”。显示巴利原文
Hayamuttāti assarūpasaṇṭhānamuttā. Gajamuttāti hatthirūpasaṇṭhānā. Evaṃ sabbattha taṃtaṃsaṇṭhānavasena muttābhedo veditabbo. Aṅguliveṭhakamuttāti aṅgulīyakasaṇṭhānā, muddikāsaṇṭhānāti attho. Kakudhaphalamuttāti kakudharukkhaphalākārā bahū asāmuddikā muttā. Rājakakudhabhaṇḍānīti rājārahauttamabhaṇḍāni. Tāni sarūpena dassento āha ‘‘chattaṃ cāmara’’ntiādi. Aññañca bahuvidhaṃ paṇṇākāraṃ pahiṇīti sambandho. Saṅkhanti abhisekāsiñcanakaṃ sāmuddikaṃ dakkhiṇāvaṭṭaṃ saṅkhaṃ. Anotattodakameva ‘‘gaṅgodaka’’nti vuttaṃ. Vaḍḍhamānanti alaṅkāracuṇṇaṃ. ‘‘Nahānacuṇṇa’’nti keci. Vaṭaṃsakanti kaṇṇapiḷandhanavaṭaṃsakanti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Vaṭaṃsakaṃ kaṇṇacūḷikaṭṭhāne olambaka’’ntipi vadanti. Bhiṅgāranti suvaṇṇamayaṃ mahābhiṅgāraṃ. ‘‘Makaramukhasaṇṭhānā balikammādikaraṇatthaṃ katā bhājanavikatī’’tipi vadanti. Nandiyāvaṭṭanti kākapadasaṇṭhānā maṅgalatthaṃ katā suvaṇṇabhājanavikati. Kaññanti khattiyakumāriṃ. Adhovimaṃ dussayuganti kiliṭṭhe jāte aggimhi pakkhittamatte parisuddhabhāvamupagacchantaṃ adhovimaṃ dussayugaṃ. Hatthapuñchananti pītavaṇṇaṃ mahagghaṃ hatthapuñchanapaṭaṃ. Haricandananti harivaṇṇacandanaṃ, suvaṇṇavaṇṇacandananti attho. Lohitacandanaṃ vā, gositacandananti attho. Taṃ kira uddhane kuthitatelamhi pakkhittamattaṃ sakalampi telaṃ aggiñca nibbāpanasamatthaṃ candanaṃ. Teneva ‘‘gositacandana’’nti vuccati. Gosaddena hi jalaṃ vuccati, taṃ viya sitaṃ candanaṃ gositacandanaṃ. Nāgabhavanasambhavaṃ aruṇavaṇṇamattikaṃ. Harītakaṃ āmalakanti agadaharītakaṃ agadāmalakaṃ. Taṃ khippameva sarīramalasodhanādikaraṇasamatthaṃ hoti.
“Uṇhīsa”指头巾。“Veṭhana”指缠头布。“Sārapāmaṅga”指最上等的宝石项链绳。“Vatthakoṭika”即一对布料。“Nāgamāhaṭa”指由龙带来的,‘ma’是连音字。“Amatosadha”是一种名为“不死药”的丸药,因其作用犹如不死甘露而得名。据说,此丸药是由那些消除障碍、于一切处成就的人,以无过失的药料混合搓制而成。此药在国王们洁面沐浴后,以隆重的仪仗呈上。他们以此制作涂身香。制作时,应知是依适合的方式,在两处或三处以无过失的药料色点,于额头、肩头、胸口等处作标记,而作涂身香。此丸药也能消除蛇蝎等毒,因此也被称为“不死药”。显示巴利原文
Uṇhīsanti uṇhīsapaṭṭaṃ. Veṭhananti sīsaveṭhanaṃ. Sārapāmaṅganti uttamaṃ ratanapāmaṅgasuttaṃ. Vatthakoṭikanti vatthayugameva. Nāgamāhaṭanti nāgehi āhaṭaṃ. Ma-kāro padasandhikaro. Amatosadhanti evaṃnāmikā guḷikajāti, amatasadisakiccattā evaṃ vuccati. Taṃ kira paripanthaṃ vidhametvā sabbattha sādhentehi agadosadhasambhārehi yojetvā vaṭṭetvā kataṃ guḷikaṃ. Taṃ pana rājūnaṃ mukhasodhananahānapariyosāne mahatā parihārena upanenti. Tena te aṅgarāgaṃ nāma karonti, karontā ca yathārahaṃ dvīhi tīhi agadosadharaṅgatilakāhi nalāṭakaaṃsakūṭauramajjhasaṅkhātaṃ aṅgaṃ sajjetvā aṅgarāgaṃ karontīti veditabbaṃ. Sā pana guḷikā ahivicchikādīnampi visaṃ hanati, tenapi taṃ vuccati ‘‘amatosadha’’nti.
在“我皈依佛”等句中:于一切法如实觉悟、彻悟者,称为佛,即正自觉者;已证道、现证灭,并依教奉行而不堕恶趣者,能持故,称为法,即包括教法在内的九种出世间法;因见与戒的共住和合,称为僧,即圣弟子僧团——我皈依、归投、亲近、依止他们。或者,能害故,为皈依:以净信与尊重摧破烦恼,以归投的状态所生起的心,对于归投者,即以此皈依之行,能杀害、灭除怖畏、恐惧、苦、恶趣与杂染,故为皈依,这是三宝的异名。再者,正自觉者以利益众生、遮止不利,能害众生之怖畏,故称为皈依。法亦以度脱有之荒漠、给予安慰,能害众生之怖畏,故称为皈依。僧亦以令微小之业获得广大果报,能害众生之怖畏,故称为皈依。以此义,三宝为皈依处,我即以此因而了知皈依,意为知晓。“宣示优婆塞身份”指:他宣示了“皈依三宝者即是优婆塞”这样的优婆塞身份已确立于我,以言语表明,意为“我从今日起,尽形寿皈依,成为优婆塞”。“在释迦子的教法中”指:释迦净饭王之子,彼世尊是释迦子,在他的教法中。“以信”指:以信心,如同“亲自证知、现证”等句中一样,应视为省略了‘ya’。显示巴利原文
Ahaṃ buddhañcātiādīsu sabbadhamme yāthāvato abujjhi paṭibujjhīti buddhoti saṅkhyaṃ gataṃ sammāsambuddhañca, adhigatamagge sacchikatanirodhe yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjamāne ca apāyesu apatamāne dhāretīti dhammoti saṅkhyaṃ gataṃ pariyattiyā saddhiṃ nava lokuttaradhammañca, diṭṭhisīlasāmaññena saṃhatattā saṅghoti saṅkhyaṃ gataṃ ariyasāvakasaṅghañca ahaṃ saraṇaṃ gato parāyaṇanti upagato, bhajiṃ sevinti attho. Atha vā hiṃsati tappasādataggarukatāhi vihatakilesena tapparāyaṇatākārappavattena cittuppādena saraṇagatānaṃ teneva saraṇagamanena bhayaṃ santāsaṃ dukkhaṃ duggatiṃ parikilesaṃ hanati vināsetīti saraṇaṃ, ratanattayassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Apica sammāsambuddho hite pavattanena ahitā ca nivattanena sattānaṃ bhayaṃ hiṃsatīti saraṇanti vuccati. Dhammopi bhavakantārā uttāraṇena assāsadānena ca sattānaṃ bhayaṃ hiṃsatīti saraṇanti vuccati. Saṅghopi appakānampi kārānaṃ vipulaphalapaṭilābhakaraṇena sattānaṃ bhayaṃ hiṃsatīti saraṇanti vuccati. Iminā atthena saraṇabhūtaṃ ratanattayaṃ teneva kāraṇena saraṇanti gato avagato, jāninti attho. Upāsakattaṃ desesinti ratanattayaṃ upāsatīti upāsakoti evaṃ dassitaṃ upāsakabhāvaṃ mayi abhiniviṭṭhaṃ vācāya pakāsesinti attho, ‘‘upāsakohaṃ ajjatagge pāṇupetaṃ saraṇaṃ gato’’ti evaṃ upāsakattaṃ paṭivedesinti vuttaṃ hoti. Sakyaputtassa sāsaneti sakyassa suddhodanassa putto so bhagavā sakyaputto, tassa sakyaputtassa sāsaneti attho. Saddhāti saddhāya, ‘‘sayaṃ abhiññā sacchikatvā’’tiādīsu viya yakāralopo daṭṭhabbo. Upehīti upagaccha.
“由阿育王遣使的灌顶”指由阿育王遣使送来的灌顶用具。当时,诸天所爱之天爱帝须大王,向他的朋友法阿育王,从楞伽岛送去了竹杖等极为贵重的礼物。法阿育王见到这些礼物后,心生净信,极为欢喜,心想:“我要以何等更为珍贵、更贵重的礼物,作为回礼赠予我的朋友呢?”便与大臣们商议,询问了楞伽岛的灌顶仪轨。听说“那里没有这样的灌顶仪轨”后,便说:“善哉!我要为我的朋友送去灌顶仪轨。”于是,他送来了海螺等三只螺贝、恒河水、红莲色泥土、八位刹帝利少女、八位婆罗门少女、八位家主少女,以及用金、银、铜、土制成的瓶罐,还有八个首富家族和八个大臣家族——这一切名为“一切八数”,并说:“以此为我朋友再次举行灌顶。”此外,还送来了许多用于灌顶的礼物。因此说“由阿育王遣使的灌顶”。灌顶后经过一个月者,称为“一月灌顶者”。如何得知他当时是灌顶后一个月呢?答曰:“因为他的灌顶是在卫塞月满月日举行的。”意思是,即便先前已举行过灌顶,但由阿育王遣使送来的无价仪轨,是在卫塞月满月日再次为他举行的。这在《大史》中如此说——显示巴利原文
Asokaraññā pesitena abhisekenāti asokaraññā pesitena abhisekupakaraṇena. Yadā hi devānaṃpiyatisso mahārājā attano sahāyassa dhammāsokarañño ito veḷuyaṭṭhiyādayo mahārahe paṇṇākāre pesesi. Tadā sopi te disvā pasīditvā ativiya tuṭṭho ‘‘imehi atirekataraṃ kiṃ nāma mahagghaṃ paṭipaṇṇākāraṃ sahāyassa me pesessāmī’’ti amaccehi saddhiṃ mantetvā laṅkādīpe abhisekaparihāraṃ pucchitvā ‘‘na tattha īdiso abhisekaparihāro atthī’’ti sutvā ‘‘sādhu vata me sahāyassa abhisekaparihāraṃ pesessāmī’’ti vatvā sāmuddikasaṅkhādīni tīṇi saṅkhāni ca gaṅgodakañca aruṇavaṇṇamattikañca aṭṭhaṭṭha khattiyabrāhmaṇagahapatikaññāyo ca suvaṇṇarajatalohamattikāmayaghaṭe ca aṭṭhahi seṭṭhikulehi saddhiṃ aṭṭha amaccakulāni cāti evaṃ sabbaṭṭhakaṃ nāma idha pesesi ‘‘imehi me sahāyassa puna abhisekaṃ karothā’’ti, aññañca abhisekatthāya bahuṃ paṇṇākāraṃ pesesi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘asokaraññā pesitena abhisekenā’’ti. Eko māso abhisittassa assāti ekamāsābhisitto. Kathaṃ pana tassa tadā ekamāsābhisittatā viññāyatīti āha ‘‘visākhapuṇṇamāyaṃ hissa abhisekamakaṃsū’’ti, pubbe katābhisekassapi asokaraññā pesitena anagghena parihārena visākhapuṇṇamāyaṃ puna abhisekamakaṃsūti attho. Vuttañhetaṃ mahāvaṃse –
于米伽尸罗月日月同辉之日;
忠于主人的大臣们为楞伽王灌顶。
听闻法阿育王之言,以主君之利为乐;
众人再度灌顶,欣然于楞伽之利乐。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Te migasiramāsassa, ādicandodayaṃ dine; Abhisittañca laṅkindaṃ, amaccā sāmibhattino. ‘‘Dhammāsokassa vacanaṃ, sutvā sāmihite ratā; Punāpi abhiseciṃsu, laṅkāhitasukhe rata’’nti.
《岛史》中亦有所载:显示巴利原文
Dīpavaṃsepi cetaṃ vuttaṃ –
卫塞月第十二日,自阎浮洲来至此处;
灌顶与随从,由法阿育王所遣。
过一月后,于逝瑟吒月的布萨日;
玛欣德作为第七位,从阎浮洲来至此地。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Visākhamāse dvādasiyaṃ, jambudīpā idhāgatā; Abhisekaṃ saparivāraṃ, asokadhammena pesitaṃ. ‘‘Dutiyaṃ abhisiñcittha, rājānaṃ devānaṃpiyaṃ; Abhisitto dutiyābhisekena, visākhamāse uposathe. ‘‘Tato māse atikkamma, jeṭṭhamāse uposathe; Mahindo sattamo hutvā, jambudīpā idhāgato’’ti.
然,因当时那位国王的灌顶在卫塞月满月日举行,从此以后至今,灌顶便一直在卫塞月满月日举行。此处的灌顶仪轨应如是了知:于为灌顶吉祥而装饰庄严的殿堂内,在搭建的榕树枝棚中央,安立稳固的榕树吉祥座上,令堪受灌顶、出身纯正的刹帝利端坐。首先,由佩戴吉祥饰物、出身高贵的刹帝利少女,以双手恭敬捧持盛满恒河水的右旋海螺,举至其头顶,将灌顶之水浇灌于其头上,如是说:‘大王,一切刹帝利众为保护自身,以此灌顶令您成为灌顶大王。您当安住于王法,以法、以平等治理国家。对于这些刹帝利众,您应以如子般的慈爱与悲悯,心怀利益与关切,平等慈爱,并以守护、屏障、保护,成为他们的保护者。’显示巴利原文
Tadā pana tassa rañño visākhapuṇṇamāya abhisekassa katattā tato pabhuti yāvajjatanā visākhapuṇṇamāyameva abhisekakaraṇamāciṇṇaṃ. Abhisekavidhānañcettha evaṃ veditabbaṃ – abhisekamaṅgalatthaṃ alaṅkatappaṭiyattassa maṇḍapassa anto katassa udumbarasākhamaṇḍapassa majjhe suppatiṭṭhite udumbarabhaddapīṭhamhi abhisekārahaṃ abhijaccaṃ khattiyaṃ nisīdāpetvā paṭhamaṃ tāva maṅgalābharaṇabhūsitā jātisampannā khattiyakaññā gaṅgodakapuṇṇaṃ sāmuddikaṃ dakkhiṇāvaṭṭasaṅkhaṃ ubhohi hatthehi sakkaccaṃ gahetvā sīsopari ussāpetvā tena tassa muddhani abhisekodakaṃ abhisiñcati, evañca vadeti ‘‘deva, taṃ sabbepi khattiyagaṇā attānamārakkhaṇatthaṃ iminā abhisekena abhisekikaṃ mahārājaṃ karonti, tvaṃ rājadhammesu ṭhito dhammena samena rajjaṃ kārehi, etesu khattiyagaṇesu tvaṃ puttasinehānukampāya sahitacitto hitasamamettacitto ca bhava, rakkhāvaraṇaguttiyā tesaṃ rakkhito ca bhavāhī’’ti.
然后,国师也按照符合国师身份的装扮装束齐整,恭敬地双手捧持盛满恒河水的银螺贝,举至他的头顶上方,以此灌顶之水浇灌于他的头顶,并这样说:“王啊,所有婆罗门众为保护自身,以此灌顶使您成为灌顶大王。您应安住于王法,以正法、以平等治理国家。对于这些婆罗门,您应以如子的慈爱与悲悯,心怀关切与饶益,平等慈爱,并以守护、屏障与保护,成为他们的保护者。”显示巴利原文
Tato puna purohitopi purohiccaṭṭhānānurūpālaṅkārehi alaṅkatappaṭiyatto gaṅgodakapuṇṇaṃ rajatamayasaṅkhaṃ ubhohi hatthehi sakkaccaṃ gahetvā tassa sīsopari ussāpetvā tena tassa muddhani abhisekodakaṃ abhisiñcati, evañca vadeti ‘‘deva, taṃ sabbepi brāhmaṇagaṇā attānamārakkhaṇatthaṃ iminā abhisekena abhisekikaṃ mahārājaṃ karonti, tvaṃ rājadhammesu ṭhito dhammena samena rajjaṃ kārehi, etesu brāhmaṇesu tvaṃ puttasinehānukampāya sahitacitto hitasamamettacitto ca bhava, rakkhāvaraṇaguttiyā tesaṃ rakkhito ca bhavāhī’’ti.
然后,长者也按照符合长者身份的装饰装扮齐整,恭敬地双手捧持盛满恒河水的宝螺贝,举至他的头顶上方,以此灌顶之水浇灌于他的头顶,并这样说:“王啊,所有居士众为保护自身,以此灌顶使您成为灌顶大王。您应安住于王法,以正法、以平等治理国家。对于这些居士众,您应以如子的慈爱与悲悯,心怀关切与饶益,平等慈爱,并以守护、屏障与保护,成为他们的保护者。”显示巴利原文
Tato puna seṭṭhipi seṭṭhiṭṭhānānurūpabhūsanabhūsito gaṅgodakapuṇṇaṃ ratanamayasaṅkhaṃ ubhohi hatthehi sakkaccaṃ gahetvā tassa sīsopari ussāpetvā tena tassa muddhani abhisekodakaṃ abhisiñcati, evañca vadeti ‘‘deva taṃ sabbepi gahapatigaṇā attānamārakkhaṇatthaṃ iminā abhisekena abhisekikaṃ mahārājaṃ karonti, tvaṃ rājadhammesu ṭhito dhammena samena rajjaṃ kārehi, etesu gahapatigaṇesu tvaṃ puttasinehānukampāya sahitacitto hitasamamettacitto ca bhava, rakkhāvaraṇaguttiyā tesaṃ rakkhito ca bhavāhī’’ti.
然而,当他们这样对他说时,应视为他们仿佛在诅咒国王:“若你依我们之言治理国家,是为善;若不治理,愿你的头颅裂为七瓣。”但在岛上,据传正是由法阿育王遣来的刹帝利少女,以盛满阿耨达池水的右旋螺贝,在天爱帝须王的头顶浇灌了灌顶水。此外,上述灌顶仪轨,在《中部·小狮子吼经》的注释——锡兰注中,也以“首先,对于接受灌顶的国王,应获得金制等三种螺贝、恒河水以及刹帝利少女”等语作了说明。显示巴利原文
Te pana tassa evaṃ vadantā ‘‘sace tvaṃ amhākaṃ vacanānurūpena rajjaṃ kāressasi, iccetaṃ kusalaṃ. No ce kāressasi, tava muddhā sattadhā phalatū’’ti evaṃ rañño abhisapanti viyāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Imasmiṃ pana dīpe devānaṃpiyatissassa muddhani dhammāsokeneva idha pesitā khattiyakaññāyeva anotattodakapuṇṇena sāmuddikadakkhiṇāvaṭṭasaṅkhena abhisekodakaṃ abhisiñcīti vadanti. Idañca yathāvuttaṃ abhisekavidhānaṃ majjhimanikāye cūḷasīhanādasuttavaṇṇanāyaṃ sīhaḷaṭṭhakathāyampi ‘‘paṭhamaṃ tāva abhisekaṃ gaṇhantānaṃ rājūnaṃ suvaṇṇamayādīni tīṇi saṅkhāni ca gaṅgodakañca khattiyakaññañca laddhuṃ vaṭṭatī’’tiādinā vuttanti vadanti.
他说着和合之语:因能引生名为喜悦与欢喜的和合,且适于和合之故,而说和合之语,如‘尊者,可堪忍否?可生活否?您等少病、少恼、轻安、有力、安乐住否?’等语。示现六人:为了令与国王同来之人了知‘这些非夜叉,乃是人’,当优婆塞跋拏杜迦被带来时,连同他一并示现,共为六人。三明者:具足宿命明、天眼明、漏尽明三种明。得神通者:获得种种神变智。善知他心者:善巧了知他人心念。如是,此处就其自身而说五种神通,天耳通则依他们之力自然已得。众多:如此具足六通的佛弟子众多,不可计数,遍行于整个赡部洲洲,令袈裟光辉闪耀。然而,有部分人说:‘三明者、得神通者、漏尽者、善知他心者中,有些是漏尽者’,从而将‘阿罗汉’与‘干观者’分开结合而说。显示巴利原文
Sammodanīyaṃ kathaṃ kathayamānoti pītipāmojjasaṅkhātasammodajananato sammodituṃ yuttabhāvato ca sammodanīyaṃ ‘‘kacci bhante khamanīyaṃ, kacci yāpanīyaṃ, kacci vo appābādhaṃ appātaṅkaṃ lahuṭṭhānaṃ balaṃ phāsuvihāro’’ti evamādikathaṃ kathayamāno. Cha jane dassesīti raññā saddhiṃ āgatānaṃ ‘‘na ime yakkhā, manussā ime’’ti sañjānanatthaṃ bhaṇḍukassa upāsakassa ānītattā tena saddhiṃ cha jane dassesi. Tevijjāti pubbenivāsadibbacakkhuāsavakkhayasaṅkhātāhi tīhi vijjāhi samannāgatā. Iddhippattāti iddhividhañāṇaṃ pattā. Cetopariyakovidāti paresaṃ cittācāre kusalā. Evamettha pañca abhiññā sarūpena vuttā, dibbasotaṃ pana tāsaṃ vasena āgatameva hoti. Bahūti evarūpā chaḷabhiññā buddhasāvakā bahū gaṇanapathaṃ atikkantā sakalajambudīpaṃ kāsāvapajjotaṃ katvā vicarantīti. Keci pana ‘‘tevijjā iddhippattā ca khīṇāsavā cetopariyakovidā keci khīṇāsavāti visuṃ yojetvā ‘arahanto’ti iminā sukkhavipassakā vuttā’’ti vadanti.
智慧明敏:即智慧之灵巧,意指智慧锐利、明晰。近:即立于近处。‘善哉,大王,您是智者’:这是称赞国王。再次审察后,问道:‘大王,您是否有……’等。讲说《小象迹喻经》:他心想:‘这位国王并不了解这些沙门是如此这般,他们的戒等行道也是如此这般。来吧,我以这《小象迹喻经》的教说,令他了知进入沙门身份与沙门的行道。’如此思惟后,首先讲说了《小象迹喻经》。其中:显示巴利原文
Paññāveyyattiyanti paññāpāṭavaṃ, paññāya tikkhavisadabhāvanti attho. Āsannanti āsanne ṭhitaṃ. Sādhu mahārāja paṇḍitosīti rājānaṃ pasaṃsati. Puna vīmaṃsanto ‘‘atthi pana te mahārājā’’tiādimāha. Cūḷahatthipadopamasuttantaṃ kathesīti ‘‘ayaṃ rājā ‘ime samaṇā nāma īdisā, sīlādipaṭipatti ca tesaṃ īdisī’ti ca na jānāti, handa naṃ imāya cūḷahatthipadopamasuttantadesanāya samaṇabhāvūpagamanaṃ samaṇapaṭipattiñca viññāpessāmī’’ti cintetvā paṭhamaṃ cūḷahatthipadopamasuttantaṃ kathesi. Tattha hi –
‘正是如此,婆罗门,此处如来出现于世,他是阿拉汉、正自觉者、明行具足……他开示有义有文、完全圆满、完全清净的梵行。有居士、居士子,或出生于其他某一家族的人,听闻此法。他听闻此法后,于如来获得信心。他具足此信后,如是思惟:‘居家是拥挤的尘垢之道,出家则是空旷的。住在家里,要修习完全圆满、完全清净、如螺贝般光洁的梵行,实非易事。我何不剃除须发,披上袈裟衣,从家出离,趣于非家?’后来,他舍弃了小财富聚或大财富聚,舍弃了小亲族圈或大亲族圈,剃除须发,披上袈裟衣,从家出离,趣于非家。显示巴利原文
‘‘Evameva kho, brāhmaṇa, idha tathāgato loke uppajjati arahaṃ sammāsambuddho vijjācaraṇasampanno…pe… sātthaṃ sabyañjanaṃ kevalaparipuṇṇaṃ parisuddhaṃ brahmacariyaṃ pakāseti, taṃ dhammaṃ suṇāti gahapati vā gahapatiputto vā aññatarasmiṃ vā kule paccājāto, so taṃ dhammaṃ sutvā tathāgate saddhaṃ paṭilabhati, so tena saddhāpaṭilābhena samannāgato iti paṭisañcikkhati ‘sambādho gharāvāso rajopatho, abbhokāso pabbajjā, nayidaṃ sukaraṃ agāraṃ ajjhāvasatā ekantaparipuṇṇaṃ ekantaparisuddhaṃ saṅkhalikhitaṃ brahmacariyaṃ carituṃ, yannūnāhaṃ kesamassuṃ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṃ pabbajeyya’nti. So aparena samayena appaṃ vā bhogakkhandhaṃ pahāya mahantaṃ vā bhogakkhandhaṃ pahāya appaṃ vā ñātiparivaṭṭaṃ pahāya mahantaṃ vā ñātiparivaṭṭaṃ pahāya kesamassuṃ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṃ pabbajati.
他如此出家后,便受持比丘的学处与活命:舍弃杀生,远离杀生,放下棍棒与刀杖,有惭耻,具足悲悯,为一切有命众生的利益与安乐而安住。显示巴利原文
‘‘So evaṃ pabbajito samāno bhikkhūnaṃ sikkhāsājīvasamāpanno pāṇātipātaṃ pahāya pāṇātipātā paṭivirato hoti nihitadaṇḍo nihitasattho, lajjī dayāpanno sabbapāṇabhūtahitānukampī viharati.
他舍弃不与取,远离不与取,只受取所施与的,期待所施与的,以清净、无偷盗的自身而安住。显示巴利原文
‘‘Adinnādānaṃ pahāya adinnādānā paṭivirato hoti dinnādāyī dinnapāṭikaṅkhī, athenena sucibhūtena attanā viharatī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.291-292) –
以如是等方式,开示了在教法中得信、由得信者出家、以及出家者所应行的戒蕴等法。显示巴利原文
Evamādinā sāsane saddhāpaṭilābhaṃ paṭiladdhasaddhehi ca pabbajjupagamanaṃ pabbajitehi ca paṭipajjitabbā sīlakkhandhādayo dhammā pakāsitā.
国王在听闻该经的同时便已了知,因为此经(《中部》1.293)中曾说:“他远离损害种子与植物,是一食者,夜间不食,远离非时食。”因此,他听闻的当下便已了知。“我们将住在此处”:因当时夜晚尚未到来,故为未来时之说。“已得果”:指阿那含果,意为已证得阿那含果。又依此殊胜,因对大师教法已无颠倒了知,故称“已知教法者”。“现在将出家”:因在家相所应作之事已经完毕,故如此说。“国王离去不久”:即国王离去不久。“决意后”:他决意“令聚集于铜掌岛内的人众听闻”之后。显示巴利原文
Rājā suttantaṃ suṇantoyeva aññāsīti ‘‘so bījagāmabhūtagāmasamārambhā paṭivirato hoti, ekabhattiko hoti rattuparato virato vikālabhojanā’’ti evaṃ tasmiṃ suttante (ma. ni. 1.293) āgatattā taṃ suṇantoyeva aññāsi. Idheva vasissāmāti na tāva rattiyā upaṭṭhitattā anāgatavacanamakāsi. Āgataphaloti anāgāmiphalaṃ sandhāyāha, sampattaanāgāmiphaloti attho. Tatoyeva ca visesato aviparītaviditasatthusāsanattā viññātasāsano. Idāni pabbajissatīti gihiliṅgena ānītakiccassa niṭṭhitattā evamāha. Acirapakkantassa raññoti raññe acirapakkanteti attho. Adhiṭṭhahitvāti antotambapaṇṇidīpe samāgatā suṇantūti adhiṭṭhahitvā.
“以地铺之略说”:即依地铺的方式而说。“占兆师”:即相师,意为占相之人。“现在大地已被他们抓住”:因为座位铺在地上,所以那样说。作“将安立”之思惟者:此处应知,由于这一原因,教法的安立尚不存在,因而他觉察到教法必将安立的预兆——他正是以此先兆之相而觉察。“以殊胜”:即以最上。“亲手”:亲手令满足,即充分满足、令完全饱足,尽其所需之义。讲说《饿鬼事》《天宫事》及与谛相应者:应知,那位善巧于说法方式的尊者,为使大众生起悚惧,先讲《饿鬼事》;其后,为安慰已生悚惧的大众,以天论讲说《天宫事》;再其后,为了令已得安慰者生起证悟谛理的精进,说:“莫于此中贪味,除涅槃之外,无任何行法是常。故为证得最上安稳之涅槃,应当精勤。”于最后讲说与谛相应者。显示巴利原文
Bhūmattharaṇasaṅkhepenāti bhūmattharaṇākārena. Uppātapāṭhakāti nimittapāṭhakā, nemittakāti attho. Gahitā dāni imehi pathavīti āsanānaṃ pathaviyaṃ atthatattā evamāhaṃsu. Patiṭṭhahissatīti cintentoti ettha tena kāraṇena sāsanapatiṭṭhānassa abhāvato avassaṃ patiṭṭhahantassa sāsanassa pubbanimittamidanti evaṃ pubbanimittabhāvena sallakkhesīti veditabbaṃ. Paṇītenāti uttamena. Sahatthāti sahatthena santappetvāti suṭṭhu tappetvā, paripuṇṇaṃ suhitaṃ yāvadatthaṃ katvāti attho. Petavatthuṃ vimānavatthuṃ saccasaṃyuttañca kathesīti desanāvidhikusalo thero janassa saṃvegaṃ janetuṃ paṭhamaṃ petavatthuṃ kathetvā tadanantaraṃ saṃvegajātaṃ janaṃ assāsetuṃ saggakathāvasena vimānavatthuñca kathetvā tadanantaraṃ paṭiladdhassāsānaṃ ‘‘mā ettha assādaṃ karotha nibbānaṃ vinā na aññaṃ kiñci saṅkhāragataṃ dhuvaṃ nāma atthi, tasmā paramassāsakaṃ nibbānamadhigantuṃ vāyamathā’’ti saccapaṭivedhatthāya ussāhaṃ janento ante saccasaṃyuttaṃ kathesīti veditabbaṃ.
“闻已”:即从那些长老处听闻了功德之谈。“令王知晓”:即向王禀报,意为告知国王。“去往农舍”:他如此反驳说,是因为离城太近,并不合适。“名为云林的园林”:即大云林园。据说,在取得该园土地的那一天,非时的大云升起,降下雨水,注满所有池塘与莲池,如同护持被热季摧残的树木与藤蔓一般。因此之故,该园得名大云林园。这在《大史》中也有记载。显示巴利原文
Tesaṃ sutvāti tesaṃ santikā therānaṃ guṇakathaṃ sutvā. Rañño saṃviditaṃ katvāti rañño nivedanaṃ katvā, rājānaṃ paṭivedayitvāti attho. Alaṃ gacchāmāti purassa accāsannattā sāruppaṃ na hotīti paṭipakkhipanto āha. Meghavanaṃ nāma uyyānanti mahāmeghavanuyyānaṃ. Tassa kira uyyānassa bhūmiggahaṇadivase akālamahāmegho uṭṭhahitvā sabbataḷākapokkharaṇiyo pūrento gimhābhihatarukkhalatādīnaṃ anuggaṇhantova pāvassi, tena kāraṇena taṃ mahāmeghavanaṃ nāma uyyānaṃ jātaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ mahāvaṃse –
当取得园地之际,非时的大云
降下雨水,由此该园成为大云林园。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Uyyānaṭṭhānaggahaṇe, mahāmegho akālajo; Pāvassi tena uyyānaṃ, mahāmeghavanaṃ ahū’’ti.
“问及安睡情况”即这样问道:“尊者,您在此处睡得安稳吗?您在此处的住处舒适吗?”这样问过安睡情况后,长老答道:“大王,我睡得安稳,此园对比丘们十分舒适。”国王听后心想:“既然如此,我便将此园布施给你们。”于是问道:“尊者,比丘僧团可以接受精舍吗?”(这里所说的“经”,是指在竹林精舍建立时所说的那部经;“水”指净水。)他便布施了大云林园,并说:“我将此大云林园布施给僧团。”于季夏黑月的第二天完成了布施。虽然大寺与净水洒下同时建立,但那时精舍建筑尚未落成,因此说“这将成为第一座精舍之处”。“第二天”即黑月的第二天。“八千五百”即八千五百,也就是八千加上五百。“光明显现之处”即智慧之光明显现之处。“不放逸经”即《增支部》中的《大不放逸经》,又称为《王教诫经》。显示巴利原文
Sukhasayitabhāvaṃ pucchitvāti ‘‘kacci, bhante, idha sukhaṃ sayittha, tumhākaṃ idha nivāso sukha’’nti evaṃ sukhasayitabhāvaṃ pucchitvā tato therena ‘‘sukhasayitamhi, mahārāja, bhikkhūnaṃ phāsukamidaṃ uyyāna’’nti vutte ‘‘evaṃ sati idaṃ no uyyānaṃ dassāmī’’ti cintetvā ‘‘kappati, bhante, bhikkhusaṅghassa ārāmo’’ti pucchi. Imaṃ suttanti veḷuvanārāmapaṭiggahaṇe vuttamimaṃ suttaṃ. Udakanti dakkhiṇodakaṃ. Mahāmeghavanuyyānaṃ adāsīti ‘‘imaṃ mahāmeghavanuyyānaṃ saṅghassa dammī’’ti vatvā jeṭṭhamāsassa kāḷapakkhe dutiyadivase adāsi. Mahāvihārassa dakkhiṇodakapāteneva saddhiṃ patiṭṭhitabhāvepi na tāva tattha vihārakammaṃ niṭṭhitanti āha ‘‘idañca paṭhamaṃ vihāraṭṭhānaṃ bhavissatī’’ti. Punadivasepīti kāḷapakkhassa dutiyadivaseyeva. Aḍḍhanavamānaṃ pāṇasahassānanti aḍḍhena navamānaṃ pāṇasahassānaṃ, pañcasatādhikānaṃ aṭṭhasahassānanti attho. Jotipātubhāvaṭṭhānanti ñāṇālokassa pātubhāvaṭṭhānaṃ. Appamādasuttanti aṅguttaranikāye mahāappamādasuttaṃ, rājovādasuttanti vuttaṃ hoti.
“Mahaccanti”是具格意义的体格,意为“以广大之王威”。“你们应知”是连接词。“名为阿利陀的大臣”即国王的外甥、名为阿利陀的大臣。此处“五十五”当为“四十五”。如此,后面所说的“六十二位阿罗汉”才相吻合。正因如此,以僧伽罗语书写的《大史》中作“与四十五人一起”。“为十兄弟所充满的王族”,即由木叉西瓦诸子——阿巴耶、天爱帝须、大龙、乌提耶、末陀阿巴耶、苏罗帝须等十位兄弟所构成的王族。“在支提山入雨安居”,即在阿沙荼月满月日,接受国王所布施的精舍后,于次日入雨安居。“自恣后”,即于大自恣中作自恣之后。“在迦提迦月满月日”,即后迦提迦月满月日。因为大玛欣德长老在前迦提迦月入雨安居,住满雨季,于大自恣中作自恣,此后又过了一个月,于四个月满月日,在圣众围绕下来到王宫,于用餐结束时说:“大王,我们很久未见正等正觉者了”等语。如此,后面才会说“于四个月满月日,大雄在此”。然而,有人对此处说:“‘住满雨季自恣后’是指四个月的自恣,或是于第一次自恣后,又在那里住了一个月,在迦提迦月满月日说,否则‘在满月日,大雄’……”显示巴利原文
Mahaccanti karaṇatthe paccattavacanaṃ, mahatā rājānubhāvenāti attho. Tumhe jānanatthanti sambandho. Ariṭṭho nāma amaccoti rañño bhāgineyyo ariṭṭho nāma amacco. Pañcapaṇṇāsāyāti ettha ‘‘catupaṇṇāsāyā’’ti vattabbaṃ. Evañhi sati upari vuccamānaṃ ‘‘dvāsaṭṭhi arahanto’’ti vacanaṃ sameti. Teneva ca sīhaḷabhāsāya likhite mahāvaṃse ‘‘catupaṇṇāsāya saddhi’’nti vuttaṃ. Dasabhātikasamākulaṃ rājakulanti muṭasivassa puttehi abhayo devānaṃpiyatisso mahānāgo uttiyo mattābhayo sūratissoti evamādīhi dasahi bhātikehi samākiṇṇaṃ rājakulaṃ. Cetiyagirimhi vassaṃ vasiṃsūti āsāḷhīpuṇṇamadivase raññā dinnavihāreyeva paṭiggahetvā pāṭipadadivase vassaṃ vasiṃsu. Pavāretvāti mahāpavāraṇāya pavāretvā. Kattikapuṇṇamāyanti aparakattikapuṇṇamāyaṃ. Mahāmahindatthero hi purimikāyaṃ upagantvā vutthavasso mahāpavāraṇāya pavāretvā tato ekamāsaṃ atikkamma cātumāsiniyaṃ puṇṇamadivase ariyagaṇaparivuto rājakulaṃ gantvā bhojanāvasāne ‘‘mahārāja, amhehi ciradiṭṭho sammāsambuddho’’tiādivacanamabrvi. Evañca katvā vakkhati ‘‘puṇṇamāyaṃ mahāvīro, cātumāsiniyā idhā’’ti. Yaṃ panettha kenaci vuttaṃ ‘‘vutthavasso pavāretvāti cātumāsiniyā pavāraṇāyāti attho, paṭhamapavāraṇāya vā pavāretvā ekamāsaṃ tattheva vasitvā kattikapuṇṇamiyaṃ avoca, aññathā ‘puṇṇamāyaṃ mahāvīro’ti vuttattā na sakkā gahetu’’nti, tattha cātumāsiniyā pavāraṇāyāti ayamatthavikappo na yujjati. Na hi purimikāya vassūpagatā cātumāsiniyaṃ pavārenti. Ciradiṭṭho sammāsambuddhoti satthussa sarīrāvayavo ca sammāsambuddhoyevāti katvā avayave samudāyavohāravasena evamāhāti daṭṭhabbaṃ yathā ‘‘samuddo diṭṭho’’ti.
国王搁置了长老所说的离去理由,仅显示在此安居的意义,意欲阻止离去,故说:“尊者,我……”等。“礼敬等”中,见到老师而行礼,称为礼敬。又,在老师所住的方位,调整威仪,面向老师行礼后行走、行礼后站立、行礼后坐下或行礼后躺卧,这也称为礼敬。从远处见到老师便起身迎接,称为起迎。见到老师后,将合掌置于头顶,向老师致敬,无论老师住在哪个方位,都面朝其所在方位同样致敬,行走、站立、坐下时皆合掌致敬,这称为合掌。做适宜之事,称为行适宜之礼。在布施衣服等时,所施之衣并非随便拿一件就行,而是要给出贵重的、价值百钱、五百钱乃至十万钱之衣;饮食等也是如此。这称为行适宜之礼。“舍利”即身体的部分。“已知”即已经了知,我已明白之意。“从哪里得到呢”,即从哪里获得。“与苏摩那商议”,当理解为:因为最初便对沙弥说过,或是知道“他了解我们的意图”,所以才这样说。显示巴利原文
Therena vuttampi gamanakāraṇaṃ ṭhapetvā idha vāse payojanameva dassetvā gamanaṃ paṭisedhetukāmo āha ‘‘ahaṃ bhante tumhe’’tiādi. Abhivādanādīsu ācariyaṃ disvā abhivādanakaraṇaṃ abhivādanaṃ nāma. Yasmiṃ vā disābhāge ācariyo vasati iriyāpathe kappento, tato abhimukhova vanditvā gacchati, vanditvā tiṭṭhati, vanditvā nisīdati, vanditvā nipajjati, idaṃ abhivādanaṃ nāma. Ācariyaṃ pana dūratova disvā paccuṭṭhāya paccuggamanakaraṇaṃ paccuṭṭhānaṃ nāma. Ācariyaṃ pana disvā añjaliṃ paggayha sīse ṭhapetvā ācariyaṃ namassati, yasmiṃ disābhāge so vasati, tadabhimukhopi tatheva namassati, gacchantopi ṭhitopi nisinnopi añjaliṃ paggayha namassatiyevāti idaṃ añjalikammaṃ nāma. Anucchavikakammassa pana karaṇaṃ sāmīcikaraṇaṃ nāma. Cīvarādīsu hi cīvaraṃ dento na yaṃ vā taṃ vā deti, mahagghaṃ satamūlagghampi pañcasatamūlagghampi satasahassamūlagghampi detiyeva. Piṇḍapātādīsupi eseva nayo. Idaṃ sāmīcikaraṇaṃ nāma. Sarīradhātuyoti sarīrāvayavā. Aññātanti aññātaṃ, viditaṃ mayāti attho. Kuto lacchāmāti kuto labhissāma. Sumanena saddhiṃ mantehīti paṭhamameva sāmaṇerassa kathitattā vā ‘‘jānāti esa amhākamadhippāya’’nti ñatvā vā evamāhāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“Appossukko tvaṃ mahārājāti”的意思是:大王,对于获得舍利一事,你切勿费心操劳,不要在此事上忙碌,去做你应做的其他事情吧。接着,为指出国王此时应做之事,便说“清扫街道”等。“Sabbatāḷāvacare upaṭṭhāpetvāti”:于此中敲击铜钹等乐器,故称“tāḷāvacara”,指所有皮膜乐器、体鸣乐器等一切乐器。正因如此,《般涅槃经注》中说:“‘sabbañca tāḷāvacaraṃ sannipātethāti’此处,‘sabbañca tāḷāvacaraṃ’即指一切乐器。”而在此处,依伴随之理,所有乐器的演奏者也可包含在内,故说“召集、集合所有这些(演奏者)”。“Lacchasīti”即“你将得到”。长老们前往支提山:他们从王宫出来后,再次前往支提山。显示巴利原文
Appossukko tvaṃ mahārājāti mahārāja tvaṃ dhātūnaṃ paṭilābhe mā ussukkaṃ karohi, mā tvaṃ tattha vāvaṭo bhava, aññaṃ tayā kattabbaṃ karohīti adhippāyo. Idāni tadeva raññā kattabbakiccaṃ dassento ‘‘vīthiyo sodhāpetvā’’tiādimāha. Sabbatāḷāvacare upaṭṭhāpetvāti kaṃsatāḷāditāḷaṃ avacarati etthāti tāḷāvacaraṃ vuccati ātatavitatādi sabbaṃ tūriyabhaṇḍaṃ. Teneva parinibbānasuttaṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘sabbañca tāḷāvacaraṃ sannipātethāti ettha sabbañca tāḷāvacaranti sabbaṃ tūriyabhaṇḍa’’nti vuttaṃ. Ettha pana sahacaraṇanayena sabbatūriyabhaṇḍānaṃ vādakāpi gahetuṃ vaṭṭantīti te sabbe upaṭṭhāpetvā sannipātetvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Lacchasīti labhissasi. Therā cetiyagirimeva agamaṃsūti rājanivesanato nikkhamitvā puna cetiyagirimeva agamaṃsu.
“Tāvadeva”意为“就在那一刻”。“Pāṭaliputtadvāre”指“在华氏城城门”。问:“尊者苏摩那,你为何游走?”意思是:苏摩那,你不修沙门法,为何到处游走?“Cetiyagirimhiyeva patiṭṭhāpetvā”:因为以后可期望在那里安住,所以将舍利安放在支提山。“Vaḍḍhamānakacchāyāya”意为午后,因为此时影子才增长。接着他生起这样的念头:见到舍利匣后,如此思惟。“Chattaṃ apanamatū”意为:愿此白伞自动从我头顶移开,朝向舍利匣低垂。“Mayhaṃ matthake patiṭṭhātū”意为:愿这舍利匣连同舍利从长老手中而来,安立在我头顶上。“Pokkharavassaṃ”名为“莲叶雨”,即云层中生起如莲叶大小的云,逐渐扩展,只滋润想要滋润之处,降下大雨。“Mahāvīra”即“大雄”。此处因是大雄的部分,所以沿用对佛陀的称呼,直接指称舍利。这一偈颂是就舍利身的来临而说。显示巴利原文
Tāvadevāti taṃ khaṇaṃyeva. Pāṭaliputtadvāreti pāṭaliputtanagaradvāre. Kiṃ bhante sumana āhiṇḍasīti sumana tvaṃ samaṇadhammaṃ akatvā kasmā vicarasīti pucchati. Cetiyagirimhiyeva patiṭṭhāpetvāti pacchā tattha vihāratthāya ākaṅkhitabbabhāvato cetiyagirimhiyeva patiṭṭhāpetvā. Vaḍḍhamānakacchāyāyāti pacchābhattanti attho. Pacchābhattameva hi chāyā vaḍḍhati. Athassa etadahosīti dhātucaṅkoṭakaṃ disvā evaṃ cintesi. Chattaṃ apanamatūti idaṃ setacchattaṃ sayameva me sīsoparito dhātucaṅkoṭakābhimukhaṃ hutvā namatūti attho. Mayhaṃ matthake patiṭṭhātūti idaṃ dhātucaṅkoṭakaṃ therassa hatthato dhātuyā saha āgantvā sirasmiṃ me patiṭṭhātūti attho. Pokkharavassaṃ nāma pokkharapattappamāṇaṃ valāhakamajjhe uṭṭhahitvā kamena pharitvā temetukāmeyeva temayamānaṃ mahantaṃ hutvā vassati. Mahāvīroti mahāparakkamo. Mahāvīrāvayavattā cettha satthuvohārena dhātuyo eva niddiṭṭhā. Dhātusarīrenāgamanañhi sandhāya ayaṃ gāthā vuttā.
“Pacchimadisābhimukhova hutvā apasakkanto”意为:步步后退,背向西方,即“离去”。虽然他并没有回头看西方,但因为是朝西方而去,所以说“面向西方”。“Puratthimena dvārena nagaraṃ pavisitvā”:此处应理解为,他步步后退着来到,到达城门时转身,径直进入城中。“Mahejavatthu nāma”:应知是由名为Maheja的夜叉占据的一处天祠。“Paribhogacetiyaṭṭhāna”:在此处,收藏受用过的资具而建造的塔,应视为受用塔。因为塔有三种:受用塔、舍利塔、法塔。其中,受用塔如前所述;舍利塔是收藏舍利而建造的;而收藏写有缘起等经典的函匣而建造的,则称为法塔。也有人说塔有三种:身舍利塔、受用塔、纪念塔。这一分类更为善巧,因为佛像也包含在纪念塔中。显示巴利原文
Pacchimadisābhimukhova hutvā apasakkantoti piṭṭhito piṭṭhitoyeva pacchimadisābhimukho hutvā osakkanto, gacchantoti attho. Kiñcāpi esa pacchimadisaṃ na oloketi, tathāpi pacchimadisaṃ sandhāya gacchatīti ‘‘pacchimadisābhimukho’’ti vuttaṃ. Puratthimena dvārena nagaraṃ pavisitvāti ettha piṭṭhito piṭṭhitoyeva āgantvā dvāre sampatte parivattetvā ujukeneva nagaraṃ pāvisīti veditabbaṃ. Mahejavatthu nāmāti mahejanāmakena yakkhena pariggahitaṃ ekaṃ devaṭṭhānanti veditabbaṃ . Paribhogacetiyaṭṭhānanti ettha paribhuttūpakaraṇāni nidahitvā kataṃ cetiyaṃ paribhogacetiyanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tividhañhi cetiyaṃ vadanti paribhogacetiyaṃ dhātucetiyaṃ dhammacetiyanti. Tattha paribhogacetiyaṃ vuttanayameva. Dhātucetiyaṃ pana dhātuyo nidahitvā kataṃ. Paṭiccasamuppādādilikhitapotthakaṃ nidahitvā kataṃ pana dhammacetiyaṃ nāma. Sārīrikaṃ paribhogikaṃ uddissakanti evampi tippabhedaṃ cetiyaṃ vadanti. Ayaṃ pana pabhedo paṭimārūpassapi uddissakacetiyeneva saṅgahitattā suṭṭhutaraṃ yujjati.
问:“此地如何成为三位佛陀的受用塔地?”答:“据说在过去……”等。“Pajjarakena”:此处pajjaraka是指一种病,应知是由夜叉的威力而生起的。据说那时有位名为Puṇṇakāḷa的夜叉,以自己的威力使人们身上生起名为pajjaraka的病。《大史》中如此记载:……显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ pana idaṃ ṭhānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ buddhānaṃ paribhogacetiyaṭṭhānaṃ ahosīti āha ‘‘atīte kirā’’tiādi. Pajjarakenāti ettha pajjarako nāma rogo vuccati. So ca yakkhānubhāvena samuppannoti veditabbo. Tadā kira puṇṇakāḷo nāma yakkho attano ānubhāvena manussānampi sarīre pajjarakaṃ nāma rogaṃ samuṭṭhāpesi. Vuttañhetaṃ mahāvaṃse –
‘‘Rakkhasehi janassettha, rogo pajjarako ahū’’ti;
《岛史》中也如此说:显示巴利原文
Dīpavaṃsepi cetaṃ vuttaṃ –
彼处众多罗刹,并流行巴闍罗迦病;
由于pajjaraka病,许多众生在殊胜岛上灭亡。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Rakkhasā ca bahū tattha, pajjarā ca samuṭṭhitā; Pajjarena bahū sattā, nassanti dīpamuttame’’ti.
Anayabyasananti:其中,anaya即不利、衰损;byasana指破坏、消灭身心的安乐,故称为苦、灾祸。虽然经中说“以佛眼观察世间”,但根据“见彼众生遭遇衰损灾祸”一语,应理解为:首先以佛眼观察世间,而后以一切知智观察世间,见彼众生遭遇衰损灾祸。因为以倾向、随眠等为所缘的佛眼,并不能见到那些众生遭遇衰损灾祸。Dubbuṭṭhikāti:因降雨不均等,恶劣、不好的雨即是恶雨,意指那里没有成为谷物生长之因、能产生身乐、利益众生的正雨。正因如此,才说“dubbhikkhaṃ dussassaṃ”。Dubbhikkhaṃ:没有食物,或食物难得,即是饥馑,意谓那里食物不易得。Dussassaṃ:没有谷物,或谷物不成熟。Devo:此是云雨的名称。Sammādhāramanupavecchīti:正确地释放了水流,正确地降下了雨。显示巴利原文
Anayabyasananti ettha anayoti avaḍḍhi. Kāyikaṃ cetasikañca sukhaṃ byasati vikkhipati vināsetīti byasananti dukkhaṃ vuccati. Kiñcāpi ‘‘buddhacakkhunā lokaṃ olokento’’ti vuttaṃ, tathāpi ‘‘te satte anayabyasanamāpajjante disvā’’ti vacanato paṭhamaṃ buddhacakkhunā lokaṃ oloketvā pacchā sabbaññutaññāṇena lokaṃ olokento te satte anayabyasanamāpajjante disvāti gahetabbaṃ. Na hi āsayānusayādibuddhacakkhussa te sattā anayabyasanaṃ āpajjantā dissanti. Dubbuṭṭhikāti visamavassādivasena duṭṭhā asobhanā vuṭṭhiyeva dubbuṭṭhikā, sassuppattihetubhūtā kāyasukhuppattisappāyā sattupakārā sammā vuṭṭhi tattha na hotīti adhippāyo. Tatoyeva ca ‘‘dubbhikkhaṃ dussassa’’nti vuttaṃ. Bhikkhāya abhāvo , dullabhabhāvo vā dubbhikkhaṃ, sulabhā tattha bhikkhā na hotīti vuttaṃ hoti. Sassānaṃ abhāvo, asampannatā vā dussassaṃ. Devoti meghassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Sammādhāramanupavecchīti udakadhāraṃ sammā vimuñci, sammā anupavassīti vuttaṃ hoti.
“发生大纷争”:据说,当时胜军大王与国王的弟弟——具财太子副王——一起,在此岛引发了一场大战。因此经中说:“那时,曼陀岛发生大纷争。”“发生”是动词,此处依时间而用现在时,但纷争实属过去,由“那时”一词即可了知。此处由邻近词语可知过去时,如“说时即是增长之时”。在所有此类情形中,都应如此理解现在时的用法。“已生起争吵与争斗”中,争吵是指达到顶点的身争吵和语争吵。其中,以动手拉拽等由身体进行的争吵是身争吵;以刺痛要害等由语言进行的争吵是语争吵。而采取对立立场、在争吵前阶段生起的相互敌对执取,称为争斗。或者,争吵是语争吵;彼此以动手拉拽等方式进行的不善、敌对执取是争斗,即身争吵。所说的争吵与争斗在他们之中已生起、已发生,故说“已生起争吵与争斗”,意指已生起争吵与争斗者。显示巴利原文
Mahāvivādo hotīti tasmiṃ kira kāle jayantamahārājena ca tassa rañño kaniṭṭhabhātukena samiddhakumāranāmakena uparājena ca saddhiṃ imasmiṃ dīpe mahāyuddhaṃ upaṭṭhitaṃ. Tenetaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘tena kho pana samayena maṇḍadīpe mahāvivādo hotī’’ti. Hotīti kiriyā kālamapekkhitvā vattamānapayogo, vivādassa pana atītakālikattaṃ ‘‘tena kho pana samayenā’’ti imināva viññāyati. Saddantarasannidhānena hettha atītakālāvagamo yathā ‘‘bhāsate vaḍḍhate tadā’’ti. Evaṃ sabbattha īdisesu ṭhānesu vattamānapayogo daṭṭhabbo. Kalahaviggahajātāti ettha kalaho nāma matthakappatto kāyakalahopi vācākalahopi. Tattha hatthaparāmāsādivasena kāyena kātabbo kalaho kāyakalaho. Mammaghaṭṭanādivasena vācāya kātabbo kalaho vācākalaho. Vipaccanīkagahaṇaṃ viggaho. Kalahassa pubbabhāge uppanno aññamaññaviruddhagāho. Atha vā kalaho nāma vācākalaho. Aññamaññaṃ hatthaparāmāsādivasena virūpaṃ viruddhaṃ vā gahaṇaṃ viggaho kāyakalaho. Yathāvutto kalaho ca viggaho ca jāto sañjāto etesanti kalahaviggahajātā, sañjātakalahaviggahāti attho.
当教理、证悟、修行这三种教法隐没时,那些塔便随之灭去。因为般涅槃有三种:烦恼般涅槃、蕴般涅槃与界般涅槃,而这些应依我们世尊的情况来理解。他的烦恼般涅槃发生于菩提座,蕴般涅槃发生于拘尸那罗,界般涅槃则将在未来发生。据说在教法衰微之时,此铜掌岛上的舍利将聚集并前往大塔,从大塔前往龙岛的王御苑塔,再由此前往大菩提座。从龙界、天界、梵天界而来的舍利也都将前往大菩提座,即使小如芥子的舍利也不会于中途灭去。一切舍利在大菩提座聚集成堆,如同一块纯金般成为一体,放出六色光芒,遍照一万世界。那时,一万轮围世界的诸天聚集,心想:“今日导师般涅槃,今日教法衰微,这是我们最后一次瞻仰了。”他们将生起比十力尊般涅槃之日更为深切的悲悯,除了不来者与漏尽者之外,其余有情皆无法以自性安住。舍利中火界将生起,上腾至梵天界;即便仅存芥子许的舍利,也将化为一片火焰。当舍利完全耗尽时,火焰便熄灭。如此示现大威力后,随着舍利消失,教法便称为隐没。显示巴利原文
Tāni sāsanantaradhānena nassantīti pariyattipaṭivedhapaṭipattisaṅkhātassa tividhassapi sāsanassa antaradhānena dhātuparinibbāne sati tāni cetiyāni vinassanti. Tīṇi (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 3.161; vibha. aṭṭha. 809) hi parinibbānāni kilesaparinibbānaṃ khandhaparinibbānaṃ dhātuparinibbānanti, tāni pana amhākaṃ bhagavato vasena evaṃ veditabbāni. Tassa hi kilesaparinibbānaṃ bodhipallaṅke ahosi, khandhaparinibbānaṃ kusinārāyaṃ. Dhātuparinibbānaṃ anāgate bhavissati. Sāsanassa kira osakkanakāle imasmiṃ tambapaṇṇidīpe dhātuyo sannipatitvā mahācetiyaṃ gamissanti, mahācetiyato nāgadīpe rājāyatanacetiyaṃ, tato mahābodhipallaṅkaṃ gamissanti, nāgabhavanatopi devalokatopi brahmalokatopi dhātuyo mahābodhipallaṅkameva gamissanti, sāsapamattāpi dhātu na antarā nassissati. Sabbā dhātuyo mahābodhipallaṅke rāsibhūtā suvaṇṇakkhandho viya ekagghanā hutvā chabbaṇṇarasmiyo vissajjessanti, tā dasasahassilokadhātuṃ pharissanti. Tato dasasahassacakkavāḷe devatā sannipatitvā ‘‘ajja satthā parinibbāti, ajja sāsanaṃ osakkati, pacchimadassanaṃ dāni idaṃ amhāka’’nti dasabalassa parinibbutadivasato mahantataraṃ kāruññaṃ karissanti, ṭhapetvā anāgāmikhīṇāsave avasesā sakabhāvena saṇṭhātuṃ na sakkhissanti. Dhātūsu tejodhātu uṭṭhahitvā yāva brahmalokā uggacchissati, sāsapamattiyāpi dhātuyā sati ekajālāva bhavissati, dhātūsu pariyādānaṃ gatāsu paricchijjissati. Evaṃ mahantaṃ ānubhāvaṃ dassetvā dhātūsu antarahitāsu sāsanaṃ antarahitaṃ nāma hoti.
所谓“白天在菩提树处的象舍中站立”,据说是指:白天为了勘察场地而腾出空间,从那里取得舍利放入罐中,便带着舍利站在那里。这在《大史》中曾说过:显示巴利原文
Divā bodhirukkhaṭṭhāne hatthisālāyaṃ tiṭṭhatīti divā vatthuvicinanāya okāsaṃ kurumāno tato dhātuṃ gahetvā kumbhe ṭhapetvā sadhātukova hutvā tiṭṭhatīti vadanti. Vuttañhetaṃ mahāvaṃse –
“夜间龙象绕行,那地方连同舍利;”
在菩提处的厅堂中,白天他安奉舍利而住立。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Rattiṃ nāgonupariyāti, taṃ ṭhānaṃ so sadhātukaṃ; Bodhiṭṭhānamhi sālāyaṃ, divā ṭhāti sadhātuko’’ti.
“绕行塔的安立地”:从塔顶将舍利安立在那里后,于夜间绕行安有舍利的塔基,意即周遍巡行。“小腿量”:指花座的大小,因为塔腹以下部分,人们称为塔的小腿。“为了卸下舍利”:为了从象驮宝罐中卸下舍利匣。“全城与国土”:城邑居民与国土居民,无分别地以城邑与国土之词合称,如同说“全村都来了,床座发出欢呼”等说法。“大众群”:即大众人群,此处“群”字是集合的同义词。“双神变”:从每一处舍利中放出火与水等,成双成对地生起的神变。“六色光芒”:应连接理解为六种颜色的光芒。此处也有人解释为“六种颜色的水流”来连接。“即使在世尊般涅槃后,也依其威力而有如此神变”,为显示此义,而说“如此不可思议”等偈颂。“佛法”:此处指佛陀的功德。显示巴利原文
Thūpapatiṭṭhānabhūmiṃ pariyāyatīti matthakato dhātuṃ tattha patiṭṭhāpetvā sadhātukaṃ thūpapatiṭṭhānabhūmiṃ rattibhāge pariyāyati, samantato vicaratīti attho. Jaṅghappamāṇanti pupphaṭṭhānappamāṇaṃ. Thūpakucchito heṭṭhābhāgañhi thūpassa jaṅghāti vadanti. Dhātuoropanatthāyāti hatthikumbhato dhātukaraṇḍakassa oropanatthāya. Sakalanagarañca janapado cāti nagaravāsino janapadavāsino ca abhedato nagarajanapadasaddehi vuttā ‘‘sabbo gāmo āgato, mañcā ukkuṭṭhiṃ karontī’’tiādīsu viya. Mahājanakāyeti mahājanasamūhe. Samūhapariyāyo hettha kāyasaddo. Ekekadhātuppadesato tejodakanikkhamanādivasena yamakayamakaṃ hutvā pavattaṃ pāṭihāriyaṃ yamakapāṭihāriyaṃ. Channaṃ vaṇṇānaṃ rasmiyo cāti sambandho kātabbo. Channaṃ vaṇṇānaṃ udakadhārā cāti evampettha sambandhaṃ vadanti. Parinibbutepi bhagavati tassānubhāvena evarūpaṃ pāṭihāriyamahosiyevāti dassetuṃ ‘‘evaṃ acintiyā’’tiādigāthamāha. Buddhadhammāti ettha buddhaguṇā.
世尊在世时也曾三次到来:据说世尊于成正自觉后第九个月,在弗沙月满月日,前往夜叉所居的楞伽岛。在岛中央长三由旬、宽一由旬的大那伽林园,于大夜叉集会时,世尊立于虚空中,令大雨狂风如劫初一般降下,现起如地狱间般可怖的大黑暗,带来如寒地狱般的极重寒冷,并发出如坏劫时狂风雷云激荡般、震裂虚空与大地的巨响,使诸夜叉生起大怖畏。他们请求无畏后,世尊说:‘你们齐心给我坐处。’他们说:‘我们把整个岛给您,尊者,请赐我们无畏。’世尊便止息一切灾祸,将一张兽皮铺在夜叉所献之地,安坐其上。他将燃烧的兽皮向四方扩展,示现出犹如劫初大火遍燃、逼迫诸夜叉畏于大海之水而奔散于海岸周边的山岛景象。令他们安住彼处之后,他便收起兽皮而坐。那时,他在云集的众多天众中说法,令无数百千众生得法现观。受住于须摩那峰、已证须陀洹果的大须摩那天王祈请而受供养,世尊以手摩其顶,将一把如拳大的青莲色发舍利授予他后,返回阎浮洲。显示巴利原文
Dharamānakālepi tikkhattuṃ āgamāsīti bhagavā kira abhisambodhito navame māse phussapuṇṇamadivase yakkhādhivāsaṃ laṅkādīpamupagantvā laṅkāmajjhe tiyojanāyate yojanavitthate mahānāgavanuyyāne mahāyakkhasamāgame upariākāse ṭhatvā kappuṭṭhānasamaye samuṭṭhitavuṭṭhivātanibbisesavassavāyunā ca lokantarikanirayandhakārasadisaghorandhakāranikāyena ca sītanarakanibbisesabahalasītena ca saṃvaṭṭakālasañjātavātasaṅkhubhitehi meghanabhagajjitasadisena gaganamedanīninnādena ca yakkhānaṃ bhayaṃ santāsaṃ janetvā tehi yācitābhayo ‘‘detha me samaggā nisīdanaṭṭhāna’’nti vatvā ‘‘dema te sakaladīpaṃ, dehi no, mārisa, abhaya’’nti vutte sabbaṃ taṃ upaddavaṃ antaradhāpetvā yakkhadattabhūmiyā cammakhaṇḍaṃ pattharitvā tattha nisinno samantato jalamānaṃ cammakhaṇḍaṃ pasāretvā kappuṭṭhānaggisadisadahanābhibhūtānaṃ jaladhisalilabhītānaṃ samantā velante bhamantānaṃ yakkhānaṃ giridīpaṃ dassetvā tesu tattha patiṭṭhitesu taṃ yathāṭhāne patiṭṭhāpetvā cammakhaṇḍaṃ saṅkhipitvā nisinno tadā samāgate anekadevatāsannipāte dhammaṃ desetvā anekapāṇakoṭīnaṃ dhammābhisamayaṃ katvā sumanakūṭavāsinā mahāsumanadevarājena samadhigatasotāpattiphalena yācitapūjanīyo sīsaṃ parāmasitvā muṭṭhimattā nīlāmalakesadhātuyo tassa datvā jambudīpamagamāsi.
第二次,是成正觉后第五年。那时,为了争夺宝床,住在水中与陆地的舅甥二龙王——小腹与大腹,即将爆发一场巨大的战事。世尊见到诸龙将遭大毁灭,便于黑分月布萨日清晨,由名为成就善心的树神撑伞,来到龙王所守护的龙岛。在战场中央,世尊坐于空中的宝床之上,放出可怖的黑暗使诸龙惊惧,随后安慰他们,并示现光明。对心生喜悦的诸龙宣说和合之法后,受舅甥二龙王供养,坐于落在地上的宝床,又受诸龙以天馔饮食供养,令住在水中与陆地的八千万龙安住于皈依与戒中。诸龙为礼敬世尊,将宝床及王苑树安置彼处,随后世尊返回阎浮洲。显示巴利原文
Dutiyaṃ abhisambodhito pañcame saṃvacchare cūḷodaramahodarānaṃ jalathalanivāsīnaṃ mātulabhāgineyyānaṃ nāgarājūnaṃ maṇipallaṅkaṃ nissāya upaṭṭhitamahāsaṅgāme nāgānaṃ mahāvināsaṃ disvā cittamāsakāḷapakkhassa uposathadivase pātova samiddhasumanena nāma rukkhadevaputtena chattaṃ katvā dhāritarājāyatano nāgadīpaṃ samāgantvā saṅgāmamajjhe ākāse pallaṅkena nisinno ghorandhakārena nāge santāsetvā assāsento ālokaṃ dassetvā sañjātapītisomanassānaṃ upagatanāgānaṃ sāmaggikaraṇīyaṃ dhammaṃ desetvā mātulabhāgineyyehi dvīhi nāgarājūhi pūjite pathavītalagate maṇipallaṅke nisinno nāgehi dibbannapānehi santappito jalathalanivāsino asītikoṭināge saraṇesu ca sīlesu ca patiṭṭhāpetvā tehi namassituṃ pallaṅkañca rājāyatanapādapañca tattha patiṭṭhāpetvā jambudīpamagamāsi.
第三次,是成正觉后第八年。受大腹之舅——摩尼眼龙王祈请,世尊于毗舍佉月满月之日,由五百比丘围绕,前往羯陵伽地区的摩尼眼龙宫。在那里所建的美妙宝殿中,世尊坐于令人悦意的殊胜宝座,受龙王以天馔饮食供养,并由龙众童女围绕,以天华、香等供养。说法后,从座而起,在须摩那峰示现足迹,于山麓作昼间住,并在长池塔、穆比央伽那塔、羯陵伽塔、大菩提处、塔园、大塔等处,与弟子一同坐下,入灭尽定;又立于石塔处,教诫诸天与龙后,返回阎浮洲。如是,应知世尊在世时也曾三次来到此岛。显示巴利原文
Tatiyampi abhisambodhito aṭṭhame saṃvacchare mahodaramātulena maṇiakkhikanāgarājenābhiyācito visākhapuṇṇamadivase pañcabhikkhusataparivuto kalyāṇīpadese maṇiakkhikassa bhavanamupagantvā tattha māpitaruciraratanamaṇḍape manoharavarapallaṅke nisinno nāgarājena dibbannapānehi santappetvā nāgamāṇavikagaṇaparivutena dibbamālāgandhādīhi pūjito tattha dhammaṃ desetvā vuṭṭhāyāsanā sumanakūṭe padaṃ dassetvā pabbatapāde divāvihāraṃ katvā dīghavāpicetiyaṭṭhāne ca mubhiyaṅgaṇacetiyaṭṭhāne ca kalyāṇīcetiyaṭṭhāne ca mahābodhiṭṭhāne ca thūpārāmaṭṭhāne ca mahācetiyaṭṭhāne ca sasāvako nisīditvā nirodhasamāpattiṃ samāpajjitvā silācetiyaṭṭhāneyeva ṭhatvā devanāge samanusāsitvā jambudīpamagamāsi. Evaṃ bhagavā dharamānakālepi imaṃ dīpaṃ tikkhattuṃ āgamāsīti veditabbaṃ.
此处略释那三次到来,即说‘第一次为调伏夜叉’等。‘作守护’,即为了防止夜叉再次侵入而作守护。‘周行’,即遍行各处。‘舅甥’,指小腹与大腹。然而在此,世尊虽与名为成就善心的天子同来,但因后来无有比丘同来,故说‘独自一人而来’。由于适当的障碍已被消除,故说‘平息了热恼’。‘王之弟’,指国王的幼弟。‘无畏’,指仅有的无畏。显示巴利原文
Idāni tadeva tikkhattumāgamanaṃ saṅkhepato vibhāvento āha ‘‘paṭhamaṃ yakkhadamanattha’’ntiādi. Rakkhaṃ karontoti yakkhānaṃ puna apavisanatthāya rakkhaṃ karonto. Āvijjīti samantato vicari. Mātulabhāgineyyānanti cūḷodaramahodarānaṃ. Ettha pana kiñcāpi bhagavā samiddhasumanena nāma devaputtena saddhiṃ āgato, tathāpi pacchāsamaṇena ekenapi bhikkhunā saddhiṃ anāgatattā ‘‘ekakova āgantvā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tadanurūpassa paripanthassa vihatattā ‘‘pariḷāhaṃ vūpasametvā’’ti vuttaṃ. Rañño bhātāti rañño kaniṭṭhabhātā. Abhayoti mattābhayo.
‘阿奴拉王后’:指国王长兄之妻阿奴拉王后。‘前三位正自觉者的菩提树安立’:当名为拘留孙的世尊,见到此岛民众被热病逼迫、遭遇不幸与灾难时,悲心策动其心而来到此岛。他平息了那场疾病之怖,为聚集的众人说法,令八万四千众生得法现观。傍晚时分,世尊来到适宜安立菩提树之处入定,出定后决意:‘愿卢遮难陀比丘尼,从我的尸利沙大菩提树取来南侧大枝,来至此处。’她知晓世尊心意,随即带领克摩王从克摩婆帝王城来到大菩提树前,令克摩王在南侧大枝上画上朱砂印记,自己将其截断,将菩提枝置于金盆中,在五百比丘尼及诸天围绕下,以神通力带来此处。如来伸出右手,将连同金盆的大菩提枝安放掌上,并授予名为无畏的国王。无畏王于彼时,在称为‘大渡场林’的大云林园中将其安立。显示巴利原文
Anuḷā devīti rañño jeṭṭhabhātujāyā anuḷā devī. Purimakānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ sammāsambuddhānaṃ bodhi patiṭṭhāsīti yadā hi so kakusandho nāma bhagavā imasmiṃ dīpe manusse pajjarakābhibhūte anayabyasanamāpajjante disvā karuṇāya sañcoditahadayo imaṃ dīpamāgato, tadā taṃ rogabhayaṃ vūpasametvā sannipatitānaṃ dhammaṃ desento caturāsītiyā pāṇasahassānaṃ dhammābhisamayaṃ katvā sāyanhasamaye bodhipatiṭṭhānārahaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā tattha samāpattiṃ samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya ‘‘mama sirīsamahābodhito dakkhiṇamahāsākhamādāya rucanandā bhikkhunī idhāgacchatū’’ti adhiṭṭhāsi . Sā satthu cittaṃ ñatvā taṅkhaṇaññeva khemavatīrājadhāniyā khemarājānamādāya mahābodhimupagantvā dakkhiṇamahāsākhāya manosilālekhaṃ khemarājena dāpetvā taṃ sayaṃ chijjitvā suvaṇṇakaṭāhe ṭhitaṃ bodhisākhamādāya pañcasatabhikkhunīhi ceva devatāhi ca parivāritā iddhiyā idhānetvā tathāgatena pasārite dakkhiṇahatthe sasuvaṇṇakaṭāhaṃ mahābodhiṃ ṭhapesi. Taṃ tathāgato abhayassa nāma rañño datvā tena tasmiṃ samaye ‘‘mahātitthavana’’nti paññāte mahāmeghavanuyyāne patiṭṭhāpesi.
拘那含佛世尊见到岛上居民遭受旱灾之苦,来到此岛,平息了那场灾难,宣说正法,令八万四千众生安立于道果之中。随后他前往先前的菩提道场,于禅定终了时决意:‘愿持水比丘尼,从我的优昙钵大菩提树取来南侧大枝,来至此处。’她了知世尊的心意,即刻带着须跋王从须跋王都来到大菩提树前,令须跋王在南侧大枝上刻下朱砂印记,然后亲手将其截断,把菩提枝安置在金盆中,与五百比丘尼一起,在天众围绕下,以神通力带来此处,放在导师伸出的右手掌上,连同金盆一起安放大菩提枝。如来将此授予悉密陀王,悉密陀王于彼时,在名为‘大龙林’的大云林园中,将这棵大菩提树栽种下来。显示巴利原文
Koṇāgamano ca bhagavā dubbuṭṭhipīḷite dīpavāsino disvā imaṃ dīpamāgato taṃ bhayaṃ vūpasametvā dhammaṃ desento caturāsīti pāṇasahassāni maggaphalesu patiṭṭhāpetvā pubbabodhiṭṭhānaṃ gantvā samāpattipariyosāne ‘‘mama udumbaramahābodhito dakkhiṇamahāsākhamādāya karakanattā bhikkhunī idhāgacchatū’’ti cintesi. Sā bhagavato adhippāyaṃ viditvā taṅkhaṇaññeva sobharājadhāniyā sobharājānamādāya mahābodhimupagantvā dakkhiṇamahāsākhāya manosilālekhaṃ sobharājena dāpetvā taṃ sayaṃ chijjitvā hemakaṭāhe patiṭṭhitaṃ bodhisākhamādāya pañcasatabhikkhunīhi saddhiṃ suragaṇaparivutā iddhiyā idhāharitvā satthārā pasāritadakkhiṇapāṇitale sahemakaṭāhaṃ mahābodhiṃ ṭhapesi. Taṃ tathāgato samiddhassa rañño datvā tena tasmiṃ samaye ‘‘mahānāgavana’’nti saṅkhyaṃ gate mahāmeghavanuyyāne mahābodhiṃ patiṭṭhāpesi.
迦叶世尊见到众生因即将发生的王族战争而面临毁灭,悲悯心所驱使,来到此岛,平息了那场纷争,宣说正法,令八万四千众生证得道果。然后他前往大菩提道场,入定出定后决意:‘愿善法比丘尼,从我的尼拘律大菩提树取来南侧大枝,来至此处。’她了知世尊的心意,即刻带着梵授王从波罗奈王都来到大菩提树前,令梵授王在南侧大枝上刻下朱砂印记,亲手将其截断,将菩提枝置于金盆中,在五百比丘尼随从及天众围绕下,以神通力带来此处,放在牟尼王伸出的右手掌上,连同金盆安放大菩提枝。世尊将此授予胜敌王,胜敌王于彼时,在名为‘大娑罗林’的大云林园中,将这棵大菩提树栽种下来。如此,在此岛上,前三位正自觉者的菩提树得以栽种。也正是因此,才有言:‘大王,在此岛上,前三位正自觉者的菩提树已栽种。’显示巴利原文
Kassapopi ca bhagavā upaṭṭhitarājūparājayuddhena pāṇino vināsaṃ disvā karuṇāya codito imaṃ dīpamāgantvā taṃ kalahaṃ vūpasametvā dhammaṃ desento caturāsīti pāṇasahassāni maggaphalaṃ pāpetvā mahābodhiṭṭhānaṃ gantvā tattha samāpattiṃ samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya ‘‘mama nigrodhamahābodhito dakkhiṇamahāsākhamādāya sudhammā bhikkhunī idhāgacchatū’’ti adhiṭṭhāsi. Sā bhagavato cittaṃ viditvā taṅkhaṇaññeva bārāṇasīrājadhāniyā brahmadattarājānamādāya mahābodhimupagantvā dakkhiṇamahāsākhāya manosilālekhaṃ brahmadattena dāpetvā taṃ sayaṃ chijjitvā kanakakaṭāhe ṭhitaṃ bodhisākhamādāya pañcasatabhikkhunīparivārā devagaṇaparivutā iddhiyā ettha ānetvā munindena pasārite dakkhiṇakaratale sasuvaṇṇakaṭāhaṃ mahābodhiṃ ṭhapesi. Taṃ bhagavā jayantarañño datvā tena tasmiṃ samaye ‘‘mahāsālavana’’nti saṅkhyaṃ gate mahāmeghavanuyyāne mahābodhiṃ patiṭṭhāpesi. Evaṃ imasmiṃ dīpe purimakānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ sammāsambuddhānaṃ bodhiṃ patiṭṭhāpesi. Taṃ sandhāya evamāha ‘‘imasmiñca mahārāja dīpe purimakānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ sammāsambuddhānaṃ bodhi patiṭṭhāsī’’ti.
「放出流动的光网」:因其润泽而有滋味、富有营养,放出崭新流动的光网。或者,因光网四处流转,如同有生命,活生生地放出光网。或者,如同佛陀在世、住世期间那样放出光网——注疏者们如此解释此处的含义。「一日即至」是关联句。「与五百少女」:即与他自己的五百位随从少女。「令建造精舍」:即令建造比丘尼精舍。「派遣」:即确立了书信教令。「并如此说」:即传达了国王的书信后,为使长老明白口信而如此说道。「期望」:即期待、渴望。显示巴利原文
Sarasaraṃsijālavissajjanakenāti siniddhatāya rasavantaṃ ojavantaṃ abhinavaraṃsijālaṃ vissajjentena. Atha vā ito cito ca saṃsaraṇato sarasaṃ sajīvaṃ jīvamānaṃ viya raṃsijālaṃ vissajjentena. Atha vā sarasakāle dharamānakāle buddhena viya raṃsijālaṃ muñcantenāti evamettha atthaṃ vaṇṇayanti. Ekadivaseneva agamāsīti sambandho. Pañcahi kaññāsatehīti attano paricārikehi pañcahi kaññāsatehi. Upassayaṃ kārāpetvāti bhikkhunupassayaṃ kārāpetvā. Appesīti lekhasāsanaṃ patiṭṭhāpesi. Evañca avocāti rājasandesaṃ appetvā therassa mukhasāsanaṃ viññāpento evaṃ avoca. Udikkhatīti apekkhati pattheti.
「如同断手者」:即如同手被斩断的人。「此人之手已被斩断,故为断手者」——应视为依主释复合词。「以出家为先」:即心向出家,已生起出家之渴望,心想「何时才能出家呢?」并为此精勤努力——这是所说之义。「他等待我」:即他期待我。「不应以刀杀害」:即不应受刀杀。「雪云之胎」:即充满雪的云胎。以神通力所生之雪,也称为「云胎」。「约一斗量」:即依摩揭陀量制,相当于十六升的量。显示巴利原文
Chinnahatthaṃ viyāti chinnahatthavantaṃ viya. Chinnā hatthā etassāti chinnahatthoti aññapadatthasamāso daṭṭhabbo. Pabbajjāpurekkhārāti pabbajjābhimukhā, pabbajjāya sañjātābhilāsā ‘‘kadā nu kho pabbajissāmī’’ti tattha ussukkamāpannāti vuttaṃ hoti. Maṃ paṭimānetīti maṃ udikkhati. Satthena ghātaṃ na arahatīti asatthaghātārahaṃ. Himavalāhakagabbhanti himapuṇṇavalāhakagabbhaṃ. Pāṭihāriyavasena jātaṃ himameva ‘‘valāhakagabbha’’ntipi vadanti. Doṇamattāti magadhanāḷiyā soḷasanāḷippamāṇā.
‘道路’:即七由旬长的道路。‘令修整’:即令清扫,移除树桩、荆棘等,并在那里铺上厚而宽广的沙子——这是所说之意。‘金匠色’:即国王原本的金匠肤色。‘九肘周长’:即其周长为九肘,故为九肘周长,意即周长九肘之量。‘五肘高’等词句,也应依此理路理解其义。‘三肘直径’:即三肘之宽度。‘高悬的幢幡’:即升起的蓝、黄等各色幢幡。‘众宝庄严’:即以各处镶嵌的种种宝石而善加庄严。‘种种装饰品所严饰’:即以净信之人所供奉的手足装饰品等种种饰物所装点。‘遍撒种种鲜花’:即以作为供养而呈献的、具足种种色泽与香气的各种水生、陆生花朵所遍撒。‘种种乐器齐鸣’:即以鼓、钹等五支乐器所奏响。‘其余树枝隐没不见’:此处,注释者们说,如同在说:‘喂,大王,你应取的只是这一枝,此树干是其近因,我们并非你应取者。’其余树枝因导师的威光而隐没不见了。‘如同窗网’:此为抽象中性词,意为做成如同网状窗扇一般。‘有百千次衣袒之举’:即那些人们将上衣在头顶上旋转挥舞,有百千次衣袒之举——这是其义。‘以百条根’:即十道刻痕中,每一道各出十条,共出百条根。‘十条大根’:即从第一道刻痕所出的十条大根。显示巴利原文
Magganti sattayojanikaṃ maggaṃ. Paṭijaggāpetvāti sodhāpetvā, khāṇukaṇṭakādīni harāpetvā tattha bahalavipulavālukaṃ okirāpetvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Kammāravaṇṇanti rañño pakatisuvaṇṇakāravaṇṇaṃ. Navahatthaparikkhepanti navahatthappamāṇo parikkhepo assāti navahatthaparikkhepaṃ, parikkhepato navahatthappamāṇanti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Pañcahatthubbedha’’ntiādīsupi imināva nayena attho veditabbo. Tihatthavikkhambhanti tihatthappamāṇavitthāraṃ. Samussitadhajapaṭākanti ussāpitanīlapītādivividhadhajapaṭākaṃ. Nānāratanavicittanti tattha tattha racitanānāratanehi suvicittaṃ. Anekālaṅkārapaṭimaṇḍitanti pasannajanapūjitehi hatthūpagādīhi nānālaṅkārehi sajjitaṃ. Nānāvidhakusumasamākiṇṇanti upahāravasena upanītehi nānappakārehi vaṇṇagandhasampannehi jalathalapupphehi ākiṇṇaṃ. Anekatūriyasaṅghuṭṭhanti ātabhavitatādipañcaṅgikatūriyasaṅghositaṃ. Avasesaṃ adassanaṃ agamāsīti ettha ‘‘handa, mahārāja, tayā gahetabbā ayaṃ sākhā, tassa upanissayabhūto ayaṃ khandho, na mayaṃ tayā gahetabbā’’ti vadantā viya avasesā sākhā satthu tejasā adassanamagamaṃsūti vadanti. Gavakkhajālasadisanti bhāvanapuṃsakaṃ, jālakavāṭasadisaṃ katvāti attho. Celukkhepasatasahassāni pavattiṃsūti tesaṃ tesaṃ janānaṃ sīsopari bhamantānaṃ uttarāsaṅgacelānaṃ ukkhepasatasahassāni pavattiṃsūti attho. Mūlasatenāti dasasu lekhāsu ekekāya dasa dasa hutvā nikkhantamūlasatena. Dasa mahāmūlāti paṭhamalekhāya nikkhantadasamahāmūlāni.
“天鼓轰鸣”,意指天鼓发出响声。此处所谓天鼓,并非指某种具体的鼓,而是因灾异之相于空中响起的轰鸣声。所谓“天”,即是云。当云呈现透明空色,无雨时发出称为干雷的声响,便得“天鼓”之名。因此,“天鼓轰鸣”即指云发出干雷。所谓“群山舞蹈”,是指因大地震动而来回旋转的群山犹如在起舞。所谓“夜叉的‘兴’声”,是指夜叉们因惊异而发出的“兴”声,他们因惊异而发出“兴、兴”的声音。“赞叹之声”,即称赞之语。“梵天的拍臂声”,是指喜悦的梵天们拍打手臂的举动。喜悦的梵天会弯曲左臂,以右手拍打左臂。“同一喧哗”,即同时生起的喧哗;“同一巨响”,即同时生起的巨响。从果实中射出的六色光芒,笔直上升后,又弯垂下来,触及铁围山的边缘而停住,因此说“如同用宝石椽子将整个铁围山装订起来一般”。从那一刻起,即从安放在金盆中的大菩提树放射六色光芒之时起。进入雪云之胎而住,即与金盆一同上升,进入充满雪水的云胎而住。实际上,大菩提树先是安立在金盆中,随后如前所述,具足种种奇妙庄严,进入雪云之胎而住。正因显示巴利原文
Devadundubhiyo phaliṃsūti devadundubhiyo thaniṃsu. Devadundubhīti ca na ettha kāci bherī adhippetā, atha kho uppātabhāvena ākāsagato nigghosasaddo. Devoti hi megho. Tassa hi acchabhāvena ākāsavaṇṇassa devassābhāvena sukkhagajjitasaññite sadde niccharante devadundubhīti samaññā, tasmā devadundubhiyo phaliṃsūti devo sukkhagajjitaṃ gajjīti vuttaṃ hoti. Pabbatānaṃ naccehīti pathavīkampena ito cito ca bhamantānaṃ pabbatānaṃ naccehi. Yakkhānaṃ hiṅkārehīti vimhayajātānaṃ yakkhānaṃ vimhayappakāsanavasena pavattehi hiṅkārasaddehi. Yakkhā hi vimhayajātā ‘‘hiṃ hi’’nti saddaṃ nicchārenti. Thutijappehīti pasaṃsāvacanehi. Brahmānaṃ apphoṭanehīti pītisomanassajātānaṃ brahmānaṃ bāhāyaṃ paharaṇasaṅkhātehi apphoṭanehi. Pītisomanassajātā hi brahmāno vāmahatthaṃ samiñjitvā dakkhiṇena hatthena bāhāyaṃ pahāraṃ denti. Ekakolāhalanti ekato pavattakolāhalaṃ . Ekaninnādanti ekato pavattanigghosaṃ. Phalato nikkhantā chabbaṇṇarasmiyo ujukaṃ uggantvā onamitvā cakkavāḷapabbatamukhavaṭṭiṃ āhacca tiṭṭhantīti āha ‘‘sakalacakkavāḷaṃ ratanagopānasīvinaddhaṃ viya kurumānā’’ti. Taṅkhaṇato ca pana pabhutīti vuttanayena suvaṇṇakaṭāhe patiṭṭhitassa mahābodhissa chabbaṇṇarasmīnaṃ vissajjitakālato pabhuti. Himavalāhakagabbhaṃ pavisitvā aṭṭhāsīti suvaṇṇakaṭāheneva saddhiṃ uggantvā himodakapuṇṇaṃ valāhakagabbhaṃ pavisitvā aṭṭhāsi. Paṭhamaṃ suvaṇṇakaṭāhe patiṭṭhitoyeva hi bodhi pacchā vuttappakāraacchariyapaṭimaṇḍito hutvā himavalāhakagabbhaṃ pavisitvā aṭṭhāsi. Teneva vakkhati ‘‘paṭhamaṃ suvaṇṇakaṭāhe patiṭṭhahi, tato himagabbhasattāhaṃ abhisekasattāhañca vītināmetvā’’tiādi. Tatoyeva ca mahāvaṃsepi vuttaṃ –
如是,以百数之根,在那香泥之中;
大菩提树安立,令大众生起净信。
其干高十肘,生五枝悦意;
枝各四肘,严饰十半之果;
小枝有千数,是等枝如是;
大菩提树正是如此,具足悦意之祥瑞。
大菩提树安立于金盆的那一刹那,大地震动;
种种神变亦皆显现。
天界与人间的乐器,自然作响;
伴随着天众与梵天众的称善之声。
伴随着云层、走兽、飞鸟、夜叉等众的叫声,
大地震动,巨响轰然,同作一片喧腾。
从菩提树的叶与果间,放出殊妙的六色光芒;
光芒放射而出,令整个铁围山悉皆庄严。
大菩提树从金盆中升起,升入虚空;
于雪胎中安住七日,不为人见。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Evaṃ satena mūlānaṃ, tatthesā gandhakaddame; Patiṭṭhāsi mahābodhi, pasādentī mahājanaṃ. ‘‘Tassā khandho dasahattho, pañca sākhā manoramā; Catuhatthā catuhatthā, dasaḍḍhaphalamaṇḍitā. ‘‘Sahassantu pasākhānaṃ, sākhānaṃ tāsamāsi ca; Evaṃ āsi mahābodhi, manoharasirindharā. ‘‘Kaṭāhamhi mahābodhi, patiṭṭhitakkhaṇe mahī; Akampi pāṭihīrāni, ahesuṃ vividhāni ca. ‘‘Sayaṃ nādehi tūriyānaṃ, devesu mānusesu ca; Sādhukāraninnādehi, devabrahmagaṇassa ca. ‘‘Meghānaṃ migapakkhīnaṃ, yakkhādīnaṃ ravehi ca; Ravehi ca mahīkampe, ekakolāhalaṃ ahu. ‘‘Bodhiyā phalapattehi, chabbaṇṇaraṃsiyo subhā; Nikkhamitvā cakkavāḷaṃ, sakalaṃ sobhayiṃsu ca. ‘‘Sakaṭāhā mahābodhi, uggantvāna tato nabhaṃ; Aṭṭhāsi himagabbhamhi, sattāhāni adassanā’’ti.
因此,应知菩提树先安立于金盆,随后与金盆一同升起,入于雪云胎中而安住。显示巴利原文
Tasmā suvaṇṇakaṭāhe patiṭṭhitoyeva bodhi kaṭāheneva saddhi uggantvā himavalāhakagabbhaṃ pavisitvā aṭṭhāsīti veditabbaṃ.
下面是为显示世尊决意的次第所说:显示巴利原文
Heṭṭhā pana bhagavato adhiṭṭhānakkamaṃ dassentena yaṃ vuttaṃ –
据说,世尊躺在大般涅槃床上,为了在楞伽岛安立大菩提树,阿育大王即将前往迎取大菩提树,那时世尊决意:‘愿大菩提树的南枝自行断下,安立于金盆中。’这是第一个决意。显示巴利原文
‘‘Bhagavā kira mahāparinibbānamañce nipanno laṅkādīpe mahābodhipatiṭṭhāpanatthāya asokamahārājā mahābodhiggahaṇatthaṃ gamissati, tadā mahābodhissa dakkhiṇasākhā sayameva chijjitvā suvaṇṇakaṭāhe patiṭṭhātūti adhiṭṭhāsi, idamekamadhiṭṭhānaṃ.
又在安立之时,世尊决意:‘愿大菩提树进入雪云之胎而安住。’这是第二个决意。显示巴利原文
‘‘Tattha patiṭṭhānakāle ca ‘mahābodhi himavalāhakagabbhaṃ pavisitvā tiṭṭhatū’ti adhiṭṭhāsi, idaṃ dutiyamadhiṭṭhānaṃ.
第七日,他从雪云胎中降下,安立于金盆时,决意道:“愿以叶与果放出六色光芒。”这是第三个决意。显示巴利原文
‘‘Sattame divase himavalāhakagabbhato oruyha suvaṇṇakaṭāhe patiṭṭhahanto pattehi ca phalehi ca chabbaṇṇarasmiyo muñcatūti adhiṭṭhāsi, idaṃ tatiyamadhiṭṭhāna’’nti.
这与本注疏的说法并不相符。因为在那里,先说进入雪云胎,然后于第七日从雪云胎降下,放出六色光芒并安立于金盆,因此注疏前后不一致。然而在《大史》中,即使就决意而言,也是先安立于金盆,随后才放出六色光芒并进入雪云胎。如下所说——显示巴利原文
Taṃ iminā na sameti. Tattha hi paṭhamaṃ himavalāhakagabbhaṃ pavisitvā pacchā sattame divase himavalāhakagabbhato oruyha chabbaṇṇaraṃsivissajjanaṃ suvaṇṇakaṭāhe patiṭṭhahanañca vuttaṃ, tasmā aṭṭhakathāya pubbenāparaṃ na sameti. Mahāvaṃse pana adhiṭṭhānepi paṭhamaṃ suvaṇṇakaṭāhe patiṭṭhahanaṃ pacchāyeva chabbaṇṇaraṃsivissajjanaṃ himavalāhakagabbhapavisanañca. Vuttañhetaṃ –
卧于大般涅槃之床,此即胜者所示;
以五眼,作五种大决意。
阿育王迎取大菩提树南枝时,
愿其自行断落,安立金盆之中。
愿此悦意之枝,与金盆一同升起;
隐而不现七日,安住于雪胎之内。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Parinibbānamañcamhi, nipannena jinena hi; Kataṃ mahāadhiṭṭhānaṃ, pañcakaṃ pañcacakkhunā. ‘‘Gayhamānā mahābodhi-sākhāsokena dakkhiṇā; Chijjitvāna sayaṃyeva, patiṭṭhātu kaṭāhake. ‘‘Patiṭṭhahitvā sā sākhā, chabbaṇṇarasmiyo subhā; Rājayantī disā sabbā, phalapattehi muñcatu. ‘‘Sasuvaṇṇakaṭāhā sā, uggantvāna manoramā; Adissamānā sattāhaṃ, himagabbhamhi tiṭṭhatū’’ti.
在《菩提史》中,也正说到了这一决意次第。因此,对于注疏中所说的决意次第,应当这样审察领会,令其前后不相违。显示巴利原文
Bodhivaṃsepi ca ayameva adhiṭṭhānakkamo vutto, tasmā aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vutto adhiṭṭhānakkamo yathā pubbenāparaṃ na virujjhati, tathā vīmaṃsitvā gahetabbo.
雪与六色光芒旋绕之后,进入了大菩提树。也就是说,覆盖大菩提树而停滞的雪,以及从菩提树射出的六色光芒,旋绕之后,右绕并进入菩提树中,如同融入菩提树一般消失不见了。此处,“雪与光芒”这一读法,在历经百次校订的古本及其他一切本中皆可见。显示巴利原文
Himañca chabbaṇṇaraṃsiyo ca āvattitvā mahābodhimeva pavisiṃsūti mahābodhiṃ paṭicchādetvā ṭhitaṃ himañca bodhito nikkhantachabbaṇṇarasmiyo ca āvattitvā padakkhiṇaṃ katvā bodhimeva pavisiṃsu, bodhipaviṭṭhā viya hutvā antarahitāti vuttaṃ hoti. Ettha pana ‘‘himañca raṃsiyo cā’’ti ayameva pāṭho satasodhitasammate porāṇapotthake sesesu ca sabbapotthakesu dissati. Mahāvaṃsepi cetaṃ vuttaṃ –
在过去的七日中,所有的雪云与那些光芒,都进入了大菩提树。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Atīte tamhi sattāhe, sabbe himavalāhakā; Pavisiṃsu mahābodhiṃ, sabbā tā raṃsiyopi cā’’ti.
然而,有人将经文读作“五光芒”,并说“从一切方向回转五光芒,因从五果出故为五,而这些光芒实为六色”,这应视为只是其痴迷的展现而已。所谓“具足圆满的树干、树枝、小枝并以五果庄严”,意思是:以圆满的树干、树枝、小枝与五种果实而庄严,即周遍装饰之义。“赐予灌顶”是指以无热恼池水赐予灌顶。“即住于大菩提处”是指就安住于菩提树附近。显示巴利原文
Kenaci pana ‘‘pañca raṃsiyo’’ti pāṭhaṃ parikappetvā yaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘sabbadisāhi pañca rasmiyo āvattitvāti pañcahi phalehi nikkhantattā pañca, tā pana chabbaṇṇāvā’’ti, taṃ tassa sammohavijambhitamattanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Paripuṇṇakhandhasākhāpasākhapañcaphalapaṭimaṇḍitoti paripuṇṇakhandhasākhāpasākhāhi ceva pañcahi ca phalehi paṭimaṇḍito, samantato vibhūsitoti attho. Abhisekaṃ datvāti anotattodakena abhisekaṃ datvā. Mahābodhiṭṭhāneyeva aṭṭhāsīti bodhisamīpeyeva vasi.
“前迦提迦自恣日等”:是指阿沙尤迦月的白分满月日。由于是十四日布萨,经过两周后布萨日到来,故说“在黑分的布萨日”,意指阿沙尤迦月黑分的十四日布萨。“安置于东面大娑罗树下”:是指在城市东侧生长的大娑罗树下,令人建造了凉亭后将(菩提树)安置于彼处。“第十七日”:是指从初一日算起的第二日。“见到了迦提迦节供养”:是指善意沙弥见到了为迦提迦节而对菩提树举行的供养,回来后禀告了这一切。正是为此事,长老派遣他去迎取菩提树。显示巴利原文
Pubbakattikapavāraṇādivaseti assayujamāsassa juṇhapakkhapuṇṇamiyaṃ. Cātuddasīuposathattā dvisattāhe jāte uposatho sampattoti āha ‘‘kāḷapakkhassa uposathadivase’’ti, assayujamāsakāḷapakkhassa cātuddasīuposatheti attho. Pācīnamahāsālamūle ṭhapesīti nagarassa pācīnadisābhāge jātassa mahāsālarukkhassa heṭṭhā maṇḍapaṃ kāretvā tattha ṭhapesi. Sattarasame divaseti pāṭipadadivasato dutiyadivase. Kattikachaṇapūjaṃ addasāti kattikachaṇavasena bodhissa kariyamānaṃ pūjaṃ sumanasāmaṇero addasa, disvā ca āgato sabbaṃ taṃ pavattiṃ ārocesi. Taṃ sandhāyeva ca thero bodhiāharaṇatthaṃ pesesi.
“十八个天众家族”:是指围绕大菩提树而住的龙、夜叉等天众家族,与“给予”一词相连。给予大臣家族,是为了商议应为菩提树办理之事;给予婆罗门家族,是为了洒水,因其为世间所公认;给予居士家族,是为了守护为菩提树所做的供养资具。《大义释》中说:“守护者、王家职人以及塔拉恰等。”《义释》中又说:“守护者家族为菩提树洒水,塔拉恰家族为养护乳牛,迦陵伽家族是可信赖的首要人众家族。”关于“迦陵伽家族”,《大义释》中说:“取水等者是迦陵伽。”有人说:“迦陵伽家族是在迦陵伽国土中产生的具种姓家族。”“以此随从”:是俱格,意为与上述种类的随从一起。“越过文阇耶森林”:是指国王亲自前往迎接大菩提树,由军队围绕,从陆路而行,越过名为文阇耶的森林。“到达了多摩梨帝”:是指到达了名为多摩梨帝的渡口。“这是他的第三次”:是就安放在金盆中的大菩提树所行的王国供养而言。在此之前,他曾有一次以信心用整个赡部洲的王国供养大菩提树,因此连同那次,这是第四次王国供养。然而,无论在哪一天以王国供养大菩提树,他都在那一天取用从整个赡部洲王国产生的收显示巴利原文
Aṭṭhārasa devatākulānīti mahābodhiṃ parivāretvā ṭhitanāgayakkhādidevatākulāni datvāti sambandho. Amaccakulāni bodhissa kattabbavicāraṇatthāya adāsi, brāhmaṇakulāni lokasammatattā udakāsiñcanatthāya adāsi, kuṭumbiyakulāni bodhissa kattabbapūjopakaraṇagopanatthāya adāsi. ‘‘Gopakā rājakammino tathā taracchā’’ti mahāgaṇṭhipade vuttaṃ. Gaṇṭhipade pana ‘‘gopakakulāni bodhisiñcanatthaṃ khīradhenupālanatthāya taracchakulāni kāliṅgakulāni vissāsikāni padhānamanussakulānī’’ti vuttaṃ. Kāliṅgakulānīti ettha ‘‘udakādigāhakā kāliṅgā’’ti mahāgaṇṭhipade vuttaṃ. ‘‘Kaliṅgesu janapade jātisampannakulaṃ kāliṅgakula’’nti keci. Iminā parivārenāti sahatthe karaṇavacanaṃ, iminā vuttappakāraparivārena saddhinti attho. Viñjhāṭaviṃ samatikkammāti rājā sayampi mahābodhissa paccuggamanaṃ karonto senaṅgaparivuto thalapathena gacchanto viñjhāṭaviṃ nāma aṭaviṃ atikkamitvā. Tāmalittiṃ anuppattoti tāmalittiṃ nāma titthaṃ sampatto. Idamassa tatiyanti suvaṇṇakaṭāhe patiṭṭhitamahābodhissa rajjasampadānaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tato pubbe panesa ekavāraṃ saddhāya sakalajambudīparajjena mahābodhiṃ pūjesiyeva, tasmā tena saddhiṃ catutthamidaṃ rajjasampadānaṃ. Mahābodhiṃ pana yasmiṃ yasmiṃ divase rajjena pūjesi, tasmiṃ tasmiṃ divase sakalajambudīparajjato uppannaṃ āyaṃ gahetvā mahābodhipūjaṃ kāresi.
“摩伽始罗月”:是指米伽始罗月。“在第一个初一日”:即在白分的初一日。因为它相对于黑分的初一日,被称为“第一个初一日”。这是依据此岛流行的说法而说的。然而在那里,由于从满月到下一个满月算作一个月的习惯,依此习惯应说“在第二个初一日”。因为在那里,黑分的初一日被称为“第一个初一日”。“举起”:是指与在大娑罗树下所给予的十六个具种姓家族一起举起,他们这样说。“他走了,哎呀”中,“哎呀”表示悲伤。因此说“哭泣了”,意思是无法忍受见不到菩提树,所以哭泣、悲叹。“光芒之网”等,此处应依前文所述的方式来理解其义。“与大菩提树一同升起”:是指与大菩提树一起升起。“正在观看者的”:是表示不关切的属格,意思是“正在观看的人”。“跳入大海洋面”:是指跳入大海洋的水面。“周围一由旬”:是指在周围每一侧各一由旬的范围。这是表示极相联的业格。“波浪平息了”:是指波浪没有生起,亦即没有波浪。“发出叫声”:是指发出鸣叫,即发出了声音。“依附于树木等者”:其中以“等”字包含依附于山等的诸天。显示巴利原文
Māgasiramāsassāti migasiramāsassa. Paṭhamapāṭipadadivaseti sukkapakkhapāṭipadadivase. Tañhi kaṇhapakkhapāṭipadadivasaṃ apekkhitvā ‘‘paṭhamapāṭipadadivasa’’nti vuccati. Idañca imasmiṃ dīpe pavattamānavohāraṃ gahetvā vuttaṃ. Tattha pana puṇṇamito paṭṭhāya yāva aparā puṇṇamī, tāva eko māsoti vohārassa pavattattā tena vohārena ‘‘dutiyapāṭipadadivase’’ti vattabbaṃ siyā. Tattha hi kaṇhapakkhapāṭipadadivasaṃ ‘‘paṭhamapāṭipada’’nti vuccati. Ukkhipitvāti mahāsālamūle dinnehi soḷasahi jātisampannakulehi saddhiṃ ukkhipitvāti vadanti. Gacchati vatareti ettha areti khede. Tenevāha ‘‘kanditvā’’ti, bodhiyā adassanaṃ asahamāno roditvā paridevitvāti attho. Sarasaraṃsijālanti ettha pana heṭṭhā vuttanayeneva attho veditabbo. Mahābodhisamāruḷhāti mahābodhinā samāruḷhā. Passato passatoti anādare sāmivacanaṃ, passantassevāti attho . Mahāsamuddatalaṃ pakkhantāti mahāsamuddassa udakatalaṃ pakkhandi. Samantā yojananti samantato ekekena passena yojanappamāṇe padese. Accantasaṃyoge cetaṃ upayogavacanaṃ. Vīciyo vūpasantāti vīciyo na uṭṭhahiṃsu, nāhesunti vuttaṃ hoti. Pavajjiṃsūti viraviṃsu, nādaṃ pavattayiṃsūti attho. Rukkhādisannissitāhīti ettha ādi-saddena pabbatādisannissitā devatā saṅgaṇhāti.
Supaṇṇarūpenāti:现出类似金翅鸟的形貌。使龙族惊恐:意指为取得大菩提树而来的龙族被吓倒,即令它们生起恐惧而逃散。那时,居住海中的龙为了夺取大菩提树,以风、雨、黑暗等施展宏大神变。于是,僧伽蜜多长老尼变化出金翅鸟的形色,以金翅鸟的形象遍布虚空。她以顶髻的光芒之网使天空黑暗,以拍击翅膀之风搅动大海,发出劫末般大海咆哮之声,仿佛击碎了龙的心,如是惊吓它们之后,将它们驱散。那些惊恐的龙又回来:依上述方式被惊吓的龙又返回。那威神力:即称为神通神变的威神力,意为不可思议之事。长老尼被请求后:『圣尼,我们的世尊曾以目真邻陀龙王的盘蜷之身为自己的香室,七日间摄受了他。于成正觉之日,在尼连禅河畔,将自己残食之钵施与大黑龙。他不顾优楼频螺龙所变现的毒烟火燃,赐予彼皈依与戒的庄严。又派遣大目犍连长老调伏了难陀乌巴难达龙王,令其无毒。如是,那位世间导师是我们的恩人。也请您不念我等过失,暂将大菩提树放下,为龙界成就天界与解脱之道吧。』如此请求后。因与大菩提树分离而苦:因显示巴利原文
Supaṇṇarūpenāti supaṇṇasadisena rūpena. Nāgakulāni santāsesīti mahābodhiggahaṇatthaṃ āgatāni nāgakulāni santāsesi, tesaṃ bhayaṃ uppādetvā palāpesīti vuttaṃ hoti. Tadā hi samuddavāsino nāgā mahābodhiṃ gahetuṃ vātavassandhakārādīhi mahantaṃ vikubbanaṃ akaṃsu. Tato saṅghamittattherī garuḷavaṇṇaṃ māpetvā tena garuḷarūpena ākāsaṃ pūrayamānā sikhāmarīcijālena gaganaṃ ekandhakāraṃ katvā pakkhappahāravātena mahāsamuddaṃ āloḷetvā saṃvaṭṭajaladhinādasadisena ravena nāgānaṃ hadayāni bhindantī viya tāsetvā nāge palāpesi. Te ca utrastarūpā nāgā āgantvāti te ca vuttanayena uttāsitā nāgā puna āgantvā. Taṃ vibhūtinti taṃ iddhipāṭihāriyasaṅkhātaṃ vibhūtiṃ, taṃ acchariyanti vuttaṃ hoti. Therī yācitvāti ‘‘ayye, amhākaṃ bhagavā mucalindanāgarājassa bhogāvaliṃ attano gandhakuṭiṃ katvā sattāhaṃ tassa saṅgahaṃ akāsi. Abhisambujjhanadivase nerañjarānadītīre attano ucchiṭṭhapattaṃ mahākāḷanāgassa vissajjesi. Uruvelanāgena māpitaṃ visadhūmadahanaṃ agaṇetvā tassa saraṇasīlābharaṇamadāsi. Mahāmoggallānattheraṃ pesetvā nandopanandanāgarājānaṃ dametvā nibbisaṃ akāsi. Evaṃ so lokanāyako amhākaṃ upakārako, tvampi no dosamassaritvā muhuttaṃ mahābodhiṃ vissajjetvā nāgalokassa saggamokkhamaggaṃ sampādehī’’ti evaṃ yācitvā. Mahābodhiviyogadukkhitoti mahābodhiviyogena dukkhito sañjātamānasikadukkho. Kanditvāti imassa pariyāyavacanamattaṃ roditvāti, guṇakittanavasena vā punappunaṃ roditvā, vilāpaṃ katvāti attho.
Uttaradvāratoti:从阿努罗陀补罗城的北门。令清扫道路:以拔除树桩、荆棘等方式,命人清扫道路。令装饰:以铺撒沙等方式整饰道路。Samuddasālavatthusmiṃ:在近海堂舍的基址处。据说,因站于该处能望见大海,为彰显这奇特之事,便在那里建了一座堂舍,以‘近海堂舍’之名而著称。此即所说:显示巴利原文
Uttaradvāratoti anurādhapurassa uttaradvārato. Maggaṃ sodhāpetvāti khāṇukaṇṭakādīnaṃ uddharāpanavasena maggaṃ sodhāpetvā. Alaṅkārāpetvāti vālukādīnaṃ okirāpanādivasena sajjetvā. Samuddasālavatthusminti samuddāsannasālāya vatthubhūte padese. Tasmiṃ kira padese ṭhitehi samuddassa diṭṭhattā taṃ acchariyaṃ pakāsetuṃ tattha ekā sālā katā. Sā nāmena ‘‘samuddāsannasālā’’ti pākaṭā jātā. Vuttañhetaṃ –
“立于近海堂舍之处,于大海中,”
以大长老的神通力,望见了大菩提树正前来。
于彼处所建之堂舍,为彰显彼一奇迹;
以此‘近海堂舍’之名,著称于此。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Samuddāsannasālāya, ṭhāne ṭhatvā mahaṇṇave; Āgacchantaṃ mahābodhiṃ, mahātheriddhiyāddasa. ‘‘Tasmiṃ ṭhāne katā sālā, pakāsetuṃ tamabbhutaṃ; ‘Samuddāsannasālā’ti, nāmenāsidha pākaṭā’’ti.
“以那种威神力”:即依前面所说的那种供养、恭敬等成就。“长老的”:即大玛欣德长老的。据说,他在道路的两侧,于处处之间,用花建造了形如尖顶屋舍的花塔。正因如此,才说“于处处之间安置花供物”。“Āgato vatare”一句中,“are”是赞叹之词,意为“善哉啊”。以十六个出身高贵的家族:即八大臣家族与八婆罗门家族,如是共以十六个高贵家族。将大菩提树安置于海岸后:即将大菩提树安置在海边装饰完备、令人悦意的凉亭中之后。如此,将整个铜掌岛国供养给大菩提树后,他便把王权托付给那十六个家族,自己站在守门人的位置,于三日中令作种种供养。为了显示这一点,才说“三日”等语。行使王权:即令其行使王权,或由那十六个出身高贵的家族令其行使王权。在第四日:即在星宿月的白分第十日。渐次到达阿努罗陀补罗城:在第十日,将大菩提树安置于装饰齐备的车乘上,作广大供养。他测量了东侧精舍应建立之处,并在那里为僧团备办了早斋。在听闻大玛欣德长老所讲述、十力尊于龙岛调伏诸龙的事迹后,他心想:“在正等觉者曾坐卧等受用之处,我应当用塔等来作礼敬。”于是作了标记,再从那里取来,安置在多瓦迦婆罗门的村门口。显示巴利原文
Tāya vibhūtiyāti tāya vuttappakārāya pūjāsakkārādisampattiyā. Therassāti mahāmahindattherassa. Maggassa kira ubhosu passesu antarantarā pupphehi kūṭāgārasadisasaṇṭhānāni pupphacetiyāni kārāpesi. Taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘antarantare pupphaagghiyāni ṭhapento’’ti. Āgato vatareti ettha areti pasaṃsāyaṃ, sādhu vatāti attho. Soḷasahi jātisampannakulehīti aṭṭhahi amaccakulehi aṭṭhahi ca brāhmaṇakulehīti evaṃ soḷasahi jātisampannakulehi. Samuddatīre mahābodhiṃ ṭhapetvāti samuddavelātale alaṅkatappaṭiyatte ramaṇīye maṇḍape mahābodhiṃ ṭhapetvā. Evaṃ pana katvā sakalatambapaṇṇirajjena mahābodhiṃ pūjetvā soḷasannaṃ kulānaṃ rajjaṃ niyyātetvā sayaṃ dovārikaṭṭhāne ṭhatvā tayo divase anekappakāraṃ pūjaṃ kārāpesi. Taṃ dassento ‘‘tīṇi divasānī’’tiādimāha. Rajjaṃ vicāresīti rajjaṃ vicāretuṃ vissajjesi, soḷasahi vā jātisampannakulehi rajjaṃ vicārāpesīti attho. Catutthe divaseti migasiramāsassa sukkapakkhadasamiyaṃ. Anupubbena anurādhapuraṃ sampattoti dasamiyaṃ alaṅkatappaṭiyattarathe mahābodhiṃ ṭhapetvā uḷārapūjaṃ kurumāno pācīnapassavihārassa patiṭṭhātabbaṭṭhānamānetvā tattha saṅghassa pātarāsaṃ pavattetvā mahindattherena bhāsitaṃ nāgadīpe dasabalena kataṃ nāgadamanaṃ sutvā ‘‘sammāsambuddhena nisajjādinā paribhuttaṭṭhānesu thūpādīhi sakkāraṃ karissāmī’’ti saññāṇaṃ kāretvā tato āharitvā tavakkabrāhmaṇassa gāmadvāre ṭhapetvā pūjetvā evaṃ tasmiṃ tasmiṃ ṭhāne pūjaṃ katvā iminā anukkamena anurādhapuraṃ sampatto. Cātuddasīdivaseti migasiramāsasseva sukkapakkhacātuddase. Vaḍḍhamānakacchāyāyāti chāyāya vaḍḍhamānasamaye, sāyanhasamayeti vuttaṃ hoti. Samāpattinti phalasamāpattiṃ. Tilakabhūteti alaṅkārabhūte. Rājavatthudvārakoṭṭhakaṭṭhāneti rājuyyānassa dvārakoṭṭhakaṭṭhāne. ‘‘Sakalarajjaṃ mahābodhissa dinnapubbattā upacāratthaṃ rājā dovārikavesaṃ gaṇhī’’ti vadanti.
“渐次观”:即对生灭等渐次修习的观照。“令生起”:即开始修习。“于坏灭时”:即于消逝之时。本应说“与菩提座同时”,却作了格的变化,说成“与菩提座同时”,使用了从格。因为“saha”在表伴随义时,原本应当用俱格。而“大地震动”只是略举一例,其他许多稀有之事也发生了。正如与菩提座同时,大地以水为界而震动,那些树根从锅口边缘升起,缠住那口锅,降下地面;四周降下天界之花;空中奏响天乐;大云涌起,降下雨水;空中各处发出吼声;闪电放出光芒。诸天发出善哉之声;聚集而来的全岛居民以香、花等作供养;携带着花蜜的微风轻拂;四周浓密清凉的雪云覆盖了大菩提树。如是,菩提树立于大地,安坐于雪云之中,七日不为世间所见。“安坐于雪云之中”:即处于雪云的内部。“放射”:即放射、四处流转。“放出”:即发出。“显现”:即令得见。“一切岛民”:即一切铜掌岛居民。“从北枝取一果”:即取北枝所结的一颗果实。也有人说是“从东枝取一果”。“于大座之处”:即于东侧大石座安立之处。“于自在化现寺”:即于名为自在化现的迦叶山寺。说“于自在化现寺”,是依先前的约定而说,但现在那座寺……显示巴利原文
Anupubbavipassananti udayabbayādianupubbavipassanaṃ. Paṭṭhapetvāti ārabhitvā. Atthaṅgamiteti atthaṅgate. ‘‘Saha bodhipatiṭṭhānenā’’ti vattabbe vibhattivipariṇāmaṃ katvā ‘‘saha bodhipatiṭṭhānā’’ti nissakkavacanaṃ kataṃ. Sati hi sahayoge karaṇavacanena bhavitabbaṃ. Mahāpathavī akampīti ca idaṃ mukhamattanidassanaṃ, aññānipi anekāni acchariyāni ahesuṃyeva. Tathā hi saha bodhipatiṭṭhānena udakapariyantaṃ katvā mahāpathavī akampi, tāni mūlāni kaṭāhamukhavaṭṭito uggantvā taṃ kaṭāhaṃ vinandhantā pathavītalamotariṃsu, samantato dibbakusumāni vassiṃsu, ākāse dibbatūriyāni vajjiṃsu, mahāmegho uṭṭhahitvā vuṭṭhidhāramakāsi, ākāsapadesā viraviṃsu, vijjulatā nicchariṃsu. Devatā sādhukāramadaṃsu, samāgatā sakaladīpavāsino gandhamālādīhi pūjayiṃsu, gahitamakarandā mandamārutā vāyiṃsu, samantato ghanasītalahimavalāhakā mahābodhiṃ chādayiṃsu. Evaṃ bodhi pathaviyaṃ patiṭṭhahitvā himagabbhe sannisīditvā sattāhaṃ lokassa adassanaṃ agamāsi. Himagabbhe sannisīdīti himagabbhassa anto aṭṭhāsi. Vipphurantāti vipphurantā ito cito ca saṃsarantā. Nicchariṃsūti nikkhamiṃsu. Dassiṃsūti paññāyiṃsu. Sabbe dīpavāsinoti sabbe tambapaṇṇidīpavāsino. Uttarasākhato ekaṃ phalanti uttarasākhāya ṭhitaṃ ekaṃ phalaṃ. ‘‘Pācīnasākhāya ekaṃ phala’’ntipi keci. Mahāāsanaṭṭhāneti pubbapasse mahāsilāsanena patiṭṭhitaṭṭhāne. Issaranimmānavihāreti issaranimmānasaṅkhāte kassapagirivihāre. ‘‘Issaranimmānavihāre’’ti hi pubbasaṅketavasena vuttaṃ, idāni pana so vihāro ‘‘kassapagirī’’ti paññāto. ‘‘Issarasamaṇārāme’’tipi keci paṭhanti. Tathā ca vuttaṃ –
在陀婆迦婆罗门村,在塔园也是如此;
在自在沙门园的第一塔院。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Tavakkabrāhmaṇagāme , thūpārāme tatheva ca; Issarasamaṇārāme, paṭhame cetiyaṅgaṇe’’ti.
“于由旬园中”,是指在阿努罗陀城周围一由旬范围内所建的园林中。此句与“大菩提树遍立”相连,意谓阿努罗陀城周围如此这般,由子孙相续而使大菩提树得以安立。“供养铜殿之处”,即供养了将要建造铜殿的地方。三部《甘提帕达》中说:“虽然天爱帝须大王将会建造铜殿,但因那时尚未存在,故说‘于未来’。”然而有些人说:“铜殿乃杜陀伽摩尼阿巴耶所建。”所谓“其根尚未扎下”,是表明:大王,在此岛上,导师的教法刚刚建立,尚未稳固,此教法的根尚未扎下——此处应如此理解其义。因为“扎下”是用于过去义的现在时动词。因此他说:“尊者,何时根才称为已扎下呢?”那位与五十四位长幼兄弟一同在支提山出家的官员,被称为“大阿利陀比丘”。“于云色阿巴耶官员的精舍之处”,即云色阿巴耶王的官员将要建造精舍的地方。“如幔帐般”意为类似幔帐,他们也把“pakāra”一词解释为相似之义。“我将见教法之根扎下”这句话,表明“我将见到教法善为安立的征相”。显示巴利原文
Yojaniyaārāmesūti anurādhapurassa samantā yojanassa anto kataārāmesu. Samantā patiṭṭhite mahābodhimhīti sambandho. Anurādhapurassa samantā evaṃ puttanattuparamparāya mahābodhimhi patiṭṭhiteti attho. Lohapāsādaṭṭhānaṃ pūjesīti lohapāsādassa kattabbaṭṭhānaṃ pūjesi. ‘‘Kiñcāpi lohapāsādaṃ devānaṃpiyatissoyeva mahārājā kāressati, tathāpi tasmiṃ samaye abhāvato ‘anāgate’ti vutta’’nti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘duṭṭhagāmaṇiabhayeneva kārito lohapāsādo’’ti vadanti. Mūlāni panassa na tāva otarantīti iminā, mahārāja, imasmiṃ dīpe satthusāsanaṃ patiṭṭhitamattameva ahosi, na tāva supatiṭṭhitanti dasseti, assa satthusāsanassa mūlāni pana na tāva otiṇṇānīti evamettha attho veditabbo. Otarantīti hi atītatthe vattamānavacanaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘kadā pana bhante mūlāni otiṇṇāni nāma bhavissantī’’ti. Yo amacco catupaṇṇāsāya jeṭṭhakakaniṭṭhabhātukehi saddhiṃ cetiyagirimhi pabbajito, taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘mahāariṭṭho bhikkhū’’ti. Meghavaṇṇābhayassa amaccassa pariveṇaṭṭhāneti meghavaṇṇābhayassa rañño amaccena kattabbassa pariveṇassa vatthubhūte ṭhāne. Maṇḍapappakāranti maṇḍapasadisaṃ. Sadisatthampi hi pakārasaddaṃ vaṇṇayanti. Sāsanassa mūlāni otarantāni passissāmīti iminā sāsanassa suṭṭhu patiṭṭhānākāraṃ passissāmīti dīpeti.
因为无云而清净的虚空发出吼声,所以说“虚空发出大吼声”。“由各别众师”,是指由各自分众的导师。因为他们各有各自的徒众,所以称为“各别众师”。正如医生对病人出于慈心,唯以治疗为先,舍弃好恶之心,即使面对可厌的疮伤和隐秘之处,也会以涂药等方式进行治疗;同样,世尊也出于慈心,希望那些被烦恼病所逼迫的众生从烦恼病苦中解脱,即使是那些不宜说、涉及隐秘、不适宜的话语,他也予以开示,通过制定学处来治疗众生的烦恼病。因此说“彰显师之悲德”。“作教诫者”,即实行教诫的人,指那些正确奉行世尊教诫的人。“去除身业语业之躁动”,是指去除由身语门违犯所引发的烦恼躁动。显示巴利原文
Meghavirahitassa nimmalasseva ākāsassa viravitattā ‘‘ākāsaṃ mahāviravaṃ ravī’’ti vuttaṃ. Paccekagaṇīhīti visuṃ visuṃ gaṇācariyehi. Paccekaṃ gaṇaṃ etesaṃ atthīti paccekagaṇino. Yathā vejjo gilānesu karuṇāya tikicchanameva purakkhatvā vigatacchandadoso jigucchanīyesu vaṇesu guyhaṭṭhānesu ca bhesajjalepanādinā tikicchanameva karoti, evaṃ bhagavāpi kilesabyādhipīḷitesu sattesu karuṇāya te satte kilesabyādhidukkhato mocetukāmo avattabbārahāni guyhaṭṭhānanissitānipi asappāyāni vadanto vinayapaññattiyā sattānaṃ kilesabyādhiṃ tikicchati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘satthu karuṇāguṇaparidīpaka’’nti. Anusiṭṭhikarānanti anusāsanīkarānaṃ, ye bhagavato anusāsaniṃ sammā paṭipajjanti, tesanti attho. Kāyakammavacīkammavipphanditavinayananti kāyavacīdvāresu ajjhācāravasena pavattassa kilesavipphanditassa vinayanakaraṃ.
“诸王”一词,此处是宾格义上用了属格,意为“他们教导了国王”。“光明”是指智慧之光。“大仙们涅槃”一句,是指大玛欣德长老十二岁时抵达铜叶岛,在那里住了两年,建立了律的传承。据说,他于六十二岁时般涅槃。显示巴利原文
Rājinoti upayogatthe sāmivacanaṃ, rājānamanusāsiṃsūti attho. Ālokanti ñāṇālokaṃ. Nibbāyiṃsu mahesayoti ettha mahāmahindatthero dvādasavassiko hutvā tambapaṇṇidīpaṃ sampatto, tattha dve vassāni vasitvā vinayaṃ patiṭṭhapesi. Dvāsaṭṭhivassiko hutvā parinibbutoti vadanti.
“他们长老的弟子”,是指以大玛欣德长老为首的诸长老的弟子。而提沙达多等则是大阿利陀长老的弟子,故此段应解为:提沙达多、迦罗苏摩那、长苏摩那等,均为大阿利陀长老的弟子。“弟子的弟子”,即依前述两种方式所说之弟子的弟子。此前——显示巴利原文
Tesaṃtherānaṃ antevāsikāti tesaṃ mahāmahindattherappamukhānaṃ therānaṃ antevāsikā. Tissadattādayo pana mahāariṭṭhattherassa antevāsikā, tasmā tissadattakāḷasumanadīghasumanādayo mahāariṭṭhattherassa antevāsikā cāti yojetabbaṃ. Antevāsikānaṃ antevāsikāti ubhayathā vuttaantevāsikānaṃ antevāsikā. Pubbe vuttappakārāti –
继之则有玛欣德、伊提耶、乌提耶、桑婆罗;
以及名为跋达那摩的智者。
这些具大智慧的龙象,从阎浮洲来到此处;
他们诵出了律藏,于铜掌岛诵出了三藏。
他们诵出了五部尼柯耶与七部论;
随后,有智者阿利陀与智者提沙达多;
通达无碍的迦罗苏摩那,以及名为长名的长老。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Tato mahindo iṭṭiyo, uttiyo sambalo tathā; Bhaddanāmo ca paṇḍito. ‘‘Ete nāgā mahāpaññā, jambudīpā idhāgatā; Vinayaṃ te vācayiṃsu, piṭakaṃ tambapaṇṇiyā. ‘‘Nikāye pañca vācesuṃ, satta ceva pakaraṇe; Tato ariṭṭho medhāvī, tissadatto ca paṇḍito. ‘‘Visārado kāḷasumano, thero ca dīghanāmako’’ti. –
如上所述,这便是师承的次第。显示巴利原文
Evamādinā pubbe vuttappakārā ācariyaparamparā.
律之功德说之解释显示巴利原文
Vinayānisaṃsakathāvaṇṇanā
至此,已详细辨析了‘由何带来’这一问题。如今为解答‘安立于何处’的问题,而宣说‘安立于何处’等。其中,‘如油’意指犹如狮子油。于‘具足增上念、行、慧者’一句中:‘念’指忆念,即领受佛语后能持守者;‘行’指领受的能力;‘慧’指决断后安住的智慧。或以另一种方式解释:‘行’指智慧的推进;‘慧’指领受佛语的精进、诵习的精进及持守的精进。‘有惭者’指具备厌恶罪恶相状的惭心之人;‘有愧者’指因见微细过失亦为怖畏,而对适宜与不适宜之事生起愧惧之人;‘乐学戒者’指于增上戒学、增上心学、增上慧学深生爱乐而修学之人。显示巴利原文
Ettāvatā ca ‘‘kenābhata’’nti imaṃ pañhaṃ vitthārato vibhajitvā idāni ‘‘kattha patiṭṭhita’’nti imaṃ pañhaṃ vissajjento āha ‘‘kattha patiṭṭhita’’ntiādi. Tattha telamivāti sīhatelamiva. Adhimattasatigatidhītimantesūti ettha satīti buddhavacanaṃ uggahetvā dhāraṇakasati. Gatīti uggaṇhanakagati. Dhītīti sanniṭṭhānaṃ katvā gaṇhanakañāṇaṃ. Gatīti vā paññāgati. Dhītīti buddhavacanaṃ uggaṇhanavīriyaṃ sajjhāyanavīriyaṃ dhāraṇavīriyañca. Lajjīsūti pāpajigucchanakalakkhaṇāya lajjāya samannāgatesu. Kukkuccakesūti aṇumattesupi vajjesu dosadassāvitāya kappiyākappiyaṃ nissāya kukkuccakārīsu. Sikkhākāmesūti adhisīlaaacittaadhipaññāvasena tisso sikkhā kāmayamānesu sampiyāyitvā sikkhantesu.
因其能遮止不应作之事,并确立应作之事,故称‘如父母之地位’。‘善巧于行仪与行境’是指:远离竹施等邪命及身行轻浮等,完全断除非行仪,成就如《分别》(511)所说‘身无违犯、语无违犯’的比丘相应行仪;远离妓女等非行境,具足为乞食等事而应往的处所——此即行境。如此,便善巧于沙门行仪,亦善巧于沙门行境。再者,若有比丘恭敬尊重导师,恭敬尊重同梵行者,具足惭与愧,善着衣、善覆身,以严整威仪行于进、退、前视、旁视、屈伸及垂目之时,具足威仪,守护根门,饮食知量,勤修觉醒,具足正念正知,少欲知足,精进努力,独处远离,不混杂而住,于增上行仪恭敬、尊重、殷重而住——这便称为行仪。显示巴利原文
Akattabbato nivāretvā kattabbesu patiṭṭhāpanato mātāpituṭṭhāniyoti vuttaṃ. Ācāragocarakusalatāti veḷudānādimicchājīvassa kāyapāgabbhiyādīnañca akaraṇena sabbaso anācāraṃ vajjetvā ‘‘kāyiko avītikkamo vācasiko avītikkamo’’ti (vibha. 511) evaṃ vuttabhikkhusāruppaācārasampattiyā vesiyādiagocaraṃ vajjetvā piṇḍapātādiatthaṃ upasaṅkamituṃ yuttaṭṭhānasaṅkhātagocarena ca sampannattā samaṇācāresu ceva samaṇagocaresu ca kusalatā. Apica yo bhikkhu satthari sagāravo sappatisso sabrahmacārīsu sagāravo sappatisso hirottappasampanno sunivattho supāruto pāsādikena abhikkantena paṭikkantena ālokitena vilokitena samiñjitena pasāritena okkhittacakkhu iriyāpathasampanno indriyesu guttadvāro bhojane mattaññū jāgariyamanuyutto satisampajaññena samannāgato appiccho santuṭṭho āraddhavīriyo pavivitto asaṃsaṭṭho ābhisamācārikesu sakkaccakārī garucittīkārabahulo viharati, ayaṃ vuccati ācāro.
行境则有三种:依止行境、守护行境、系缚行境。其中,具足十种论事功德的善知识,依止他而听闻未闻之法,净化已闻之法,断除疑惑,端正见解,净除心秽;或者随学子彼而从信心、戒行、多闻、布施、智慧得以增长,这是依止行境。有比丘入于村落,行于街道,垂目只见一轭之远,善加防护而行:不观望象,不观望马、车、步兵、女人、男人,不向上望,不向下望,也不环顾四方四维而行,这是守护行境。系缚行境即四念处,比丘将自心系缚于此。正如世尊所说:‘诸比丘,什么是比丘自己的、父所传的行境领域?就是这四念处。’这是系缚行境。如是,因具足这些行仪与行境,故为‘善于行仪及行境’。如此,在断除非行仪与非行境后,令信出家者在上述行仪与行境中善巧,就有赖于持律者——应知这是律藏修学功德的体现。显示巴利原文
Gocaro pana upanissayagocaro ārakkhagocaro upanibandhagocaroti tividho. Tattha dasakathāvatthuguṇasamannāgato kalyāṇamitto, yaṃ nissāya assutaṃ suṇāti, sutaṃ pariyodāpeti, kaṅkhaṃ vitarati , diṭṭhiṃ ujuṃ karoti, cittaṃ pasādeti, yassa vā pana anusikkhamāno saddhāya vaḍḍhati, sīlena, sutena, cāgena, paññāya vaḍḍhati, ayaṃ upanissayagocaro. Yo pana bhikkhu antaragharaṃ paviṭṭho vīthipaṭipanno okkhittacakkhu yugamattadassāvī saṃvuto gacchati, na hatthiṃ olokento, na assaṃ, na rathaṃ, na pattiṃ, na itthiṃ, na purisaṃ olokento, na uddhaṃ olokento, na adho olokento, na disāvidisampi pekkhamāno gacchati, ayaṃ ārakkhagocaro. Upanibandhagocaro pana cattāro satipaṭṭhānā, yattha bhikkhu attano cittaṃ upanibandhati. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā – ‘‘ko ca, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno gocaro sako pettiko visayo, yadidaṃ cattāro satipaṭṭhānā’’ti. Ayaṃ upanibandhagocaro. Iti iminā ca ācārena iminā ca gocarena samannāgatattā ācāragocarakusalatā. Evaṃ anācāraṃ agocarañca vajjetvā saddhāpabbajitānaṃ yathāvuttaācāragocaresu kusalabhāvo vinayadharāyattoti ayamānisaṃso vinayapariyattiyā dassitoti veditabbo.
‘依律藏学习’,即依止律藏的研习。‘自己的戒蕴得以善护、善守’——他的戒蕴如何得以善护、善守呢?犯戒者以六种原因犯戒:无惭、无知、惯于恶作、于不适宜妄执适宜之想、于适宜妄执不适宜之想、失念。持律者则不以此六者而犯戒。显示巴利原文
Vinayapariyattiṃ nissāyāti vinayapariyāpuṇanaṃ nissāya. Attano sīlakkhandho sugutto hotisurakkhitoti kathamassa attano sīlakkhandho sugutto hoti surakkhito? Āpattiñhi āpajjanto chahākārehi āpajjati alajjitā, aññāṇatā, kukkuccapakatatā, akappiye kappiyasaññitā, kappiye akappiyasaññitā, satisammosāti. Vinayadharo pana imehi chahākārehi āpattiṃ nāpajjati.
如何不以无惭犯戒?为了免于遭受‘诸位请看,此人明知适宜与不适宜,却蓄意违犯制戒’这样的他人讥嫌,他虽明知此为不适宜事,也不践踏戒律而蓄意违犯。如此,便不以无惭犯戒。即使因仓促而犯戒,若是可忏悔罪便忏悔清净,若是需出罪者便通过出罪仪式恢复清净。如此了知后,安立于清净之中。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ alajjitāya nāpajjati? So hi ‘‘passatha bho, ayaṃ kappiyākappiyaṃ jānantoyeva paṇṇattivītikkamaṃ karotī’’ti imaṃ parūpavādaṃ rakkhantopi akappiyabhāvaṃ jānantoyeva madditvā vītikkamaṃ na karoti. Evaṃ alajjitāya nāpajjati. Sahasā āpannampi desanāgāminiṃ desetvā vuṭṭhānagāminiyā vuṭṭhahitvā suddhante patiṭṭhāti, tato –
他不以故意犯戒,不覆藏过失;
也不落入非道而行,这样的人可称为有惭之人。’(《附随》359)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Sañcicca āpattiṃ nāpajjati, āpattiṃ na parigūhati; Agatigamanañca na gacchati, ediso vuccati lajjipuggalo’’ti. (pari. 359) –
他便安住于此惭耻之中。显示巴利原文
Imasmiṃ lajjibhāve patiṭṭhitova hoti.
如何不因无知而犯戒呢?因为他了知适宜与不适宜,故只行适宜之事,不行不适宜之事。如此,便不因无知而犯戒。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ aññāṇatāya nāpajjati? So hi kappiyākappiyaṃ jānāti, tasmā kappiyaṃyeva karoti, akappiyaṃ na karoti. Evaṃ aññāṇatāya nāpajjati.
如何不因心生忧悔而犯戒呢?当对适宜与不适宜生起疑虑时,他会审查事由,查阅根本、语句分别、犯与不犯。若是适宜的,便行之;若是不适宜的,便不行。对于已生起的忧悔,他不在未作决断的情况下,便以「可以」为由强行将其压制并违犯。如此,便不因心生忧悔而犯戒。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ kukkuccapakatatāya nāpajjati? Kappiyākappiyaṃ nissāya kukkucce uppanne vatthuṃ oloketvā mātikaṃ padabhājanaṃ antarāpattiṃ anāpattiṃ oloketvā kappiyaṃ ce hoti, karoti, akappiyaṃ ce, na karoti. Uppannaṃ pana kukkuccaṃ avinicchinitvāva ‘‘vaṭṭatī’’ti madditvā na vītikkamati. Evaṃ kukkuccapakatatāya nāpajjati.
如何不因于不适宜事作适宜想等方式而犯戒呢?因为他了知适宜与不适宜,故不会于不适宜事生起适宜想,也不会于适宜事生起不适宜想。他的正念坚固安住,应当决意的便去决意,应当作净的便去作净。如此,以此六种方式而不犯戒。不犯戒者,便成为戒不破损、戒清净者。如是,他自己的戒蕴便得到了善护与善守。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ akappiye kappiyasaññitādīhi nāpajjati? So hi kappiyākappiyaṃ jānāti, tasmā akappiye kappiyasaññī na hoti, kappiye akappiyasaññī na hoti, supatiṭṭhitā cassa sati hoti, adhiṭṭhātabbaṃ adhiṭṭheti, vikappetabbaṃ vikappeti. Iti imehi chahākārehi āpattiṃ nāpajjati, āpattiṃ anāpajjanto akhaṇḍasīlo hoti parisuddhasīlo. Evamassa attano sīlakkhandho sugutto hoti surakkhito.
所谓“被追悔所困者”,是指为如法或不如法之事所生追悔所压倒者。那么,被追悔所困者如何获得依止呢?在异国、异地生起追悔的比丘们,听说“某处寺院住着一位持律师”,便远道而来,向他求问所生之追悔。持律师审视他们所行之事因,辨别有罪与无罪、重罪与轻罪等差别,令其发露可忏悔之罪,于可出罪者令其出罪,使安住于清净之中。如是,被追悔所困者便获得依止。显示巴利原文
Kukkuccapakatānanti kappiyākappiyaṃ nissāya uppannena kukkuccena abhibhūtānaṃ. Kathaṃ pana kukkuccapakatānaṃ paṭisaraṇaṃ hoti? Tiroraṭṭhesu tirojanapadesu ca uppannakukkuccā bhikkhū ‘‘asukasmiṃ kira vihāre vinayadharo vasatī’’ti dūratopi tassa santikaṃ āgantvā kukkuccaṃ pucchanti. So tehi katakammassa vatthuṃ oloketvā āpattānāpattiṃ garukalahukādibhedaṃ sallakkhetvā desanāgāminiṃ desāpetvā vuṭṭhānagāminiyā vuṭṭhāpetvā suddhante patiṭṭhāpeti. Evaṃ kukkuccapakatānaṃ paṭisaraṇaṃ hoti.
“无畏而于僧众中说者”:由于远离了怖畏与恐惧,故称为无畏者,意为不恐惧。因为不通达律者于僧众中宣说时,怖畏与怯懦便会生起;持律师则无此畏惧。什么缘故?因其了知“如此说即有过失,如此说则无过失”而说故。显示巴利原文
Visārado saṅghamajjhe voharatīti vigato sārado bhayaṃ etassāti visārado, abhītoti attho. Avinayadharassa hi saṅghamajjhe kathentassa bhayaṃ sārajjaṃ okkamati, vinayadharassa taṃ na hoti. Kasmā? ‘‘Evaṃ kathentassa doso hoti, evaṃ na doso’’ti ñatvā kathanato.
“以如法而善加制伏反对者”:此处反对者有二种,即自身反对者与教法反对者。其中,自身反对者,如弥提耶与布摩阇迦比丘、离车族的跋陀,以无根据的最重罪来指控者,以及其他恶戒、恶法者,凡是此类,皆为自身反对者。教法反对者,则是持颠倒见者,如阿利咤比丘、甘达迦沙弥、毘舍离的跋耆子比丘、大众部等,将非佛法执取为“佛法”者。他以如法、有理有据的言说,如此制伏所有这些反对者,令非法不能安立,如是善加制伏而制伏之。显示巴利原文
Paccatthikesahadhammena suniggahitaṃ niggaṇhātīti ettha dvidhā paccatthikā nāma attapaccatthikā ca sāsanapaccatthikā ca. Tattha mettiyabhummajakā ca bhikkhū vaḍḍho ca licchavī amūlakena antimavatthunā codesuṃ, ime attapaccatthikā nāma. Ye vā panaññepi dussīlā pāpadhammā, sabbe te attapaccatthikā. Viparītadassanā pana ariṭṭhabhikkhukaṇṭakasāmaṇeravesālikavajjiputtakā mahāsaṅghikādayo ca abuddhasāsanaṃ ‘‘buddhasāsana’’nti vatvā katapaggahā sāsanapaccatthikā nāma. Te sabbepi sahadhammena sahakāraṇena vacanena yathā taṃ asaddhammaṃ patiṭṭhāpetuṃ na sakkonti, evaṃ suniggahitaṃ katvā niggaṇhāti.
为令正法久住而修行者:此处所说正法有三种,即教法正法、行道正法与证得正法。其中,三藏佛语名为教法正法。十三头陀功德、十四犍度仪则、八十二大仪则,此名为行道正法。四道与四果,此名为证得正法。对此,有些长老依据“阿难,我为你们所宣说、所制定的法与律,在我灭度后即是你们的导师”(《长部》2.216)此经,说“教法的根本是教法”。有些长老依据“须跋陀,若这些比丘能正确安住,世间便不空虚于阿罗汉”(《长部》2.214)此经,说“教法的根本是行道”,并说“只要有五位比丘正确行道,教法便得以安住”。其他长老则说:“教法若消失,即使有善行道者,亦无法证悟。”即使只有五位比丘守护四波罗夷,他们也能令具信的善男子出家,在边地给予具足戒,圆满十众僧团,进而在中国也举行具足戒。以此方便,圆满二十众僧团,为自己举行出罪羯磨,令教法增长兴盛。如此,此持律师为令三种正法久住而修行。应知,此持律师如此获得这五种利益。显示巴利原文
Saddhammaṭṭhitiyā paṭipanno hotīti ettha pana tividho saddhammo pariyattipaṭipattiadhigamavasena. Tattha tipiṭakaṃ buddhavacanaṃ pariyattisaddhammo nāma. Terasa dhutaṅgaguṇā cuddasa khandhakavattāni dveasīti mahāvattānīti ayaṃ paṭipattisaddhammo nāma. Cattāro maggā ca cattāri phalāni ca, ayaṃ adhigamasaddhammo nāma. Tattha keci therā ‘‘yo vo, ānanda, mayā dhammo ca vinayo ca desito paññatto, so vo mamaccayena satthā’’ti (dī. ni. 2.216) iminā suttena ‘‘sāsanassa pariyatti mūla’’nti vadanti. Keci therā ‘‘ime ca, subhadda, bhikkhū sammā vihareyyuṃ, asuñño loko arahantehi assā’’ti iminā suttena (dī. ni. 2.214) ‘‘sāsanassa paṭipatti mūla’’nti vatvā ‘‘yāva pañca bhikkhū sammā paṭipannā saṃvijjanti, tāva sāsanaṃ ṭhitaṃ hotī’’ti āhaṃsu. Itare pana therā ‘‘pariyattiyā antarahitāya suppaṭipannassapi dhammābhisamayo natthī’’ti vatvā āhaṃsu. Sacepi pañca bhikkhū cattāri pārājikāni rakkhaṇakā honti, te saddhe kulaputte pabbājetvā paccantime janapade upasampādetvā dasavaggagaṇaṃ pūretvā majjhimajanapadepi upasampadaṃ karissanti. Etenupāyena vīsativaggasaṅghaṃ pūretvā attanopi abbhānakammaṃ katvā sāsanaṃ vuḍḍhiṃ viruḷhiṃ gamayissanti. Evamayaṃ vinayadharo tividhassapi saddhammassa ciraṭṭhitiyā paṭipanno hotīti. Evamayaṃ vinayadharo ime pañcānisaṃse paṭilabhatīti veditabbo.
“律为防护故”等句中:此处“律”指律的学习,或指所制定的律制。因此,一切律制或律的学习,是为了防护身语二门,即是说,它是达到以活命遍净为究竟之戒的近依缘。“无悔”是指不因对已作未作善恶追悔而起的心追悔。“喜悦”是指微弱的、初生的喜。“喜”是指强有力的喜。“轻安”是指身心不安的止息。“乐”是指身乐与心乐。此二种乐皆为定的近依缘。“定”是指心一境性。“如实知见”是指把握有缘的名色。或者说,如实知见是初生的观,这是生灭智的别名。因为心一境性是初生观的近依缘。“厌离”是指达到顶点的、出起的有力观。“离欲”是指圣道。“解脱”是指阿罗汉果。因为四种圣道都是阿罗汉果的近依缘。“解脱知见”是指省察智。“为无取般涅槃故”是指不执取任何法、无余般涅槃,即无因般涅槃之义。因为解脱知见是无因般涅槃的缘,若未证得彼,则必定般涅槃;并非在省察智未生起时会有中般涅槃。显示巴利原文
Vinayo saṃvaratthāyātiādīsu (pari. aṭṭha. 366) vinayoti vinayassa pariyāpuṇanaṃ, vinayoti vā vinayapaññatti vuttā, tasmā sakalāpi vinayapaññatti vinayapariyāpuṇanaṃ vā kāyavacīdvārasaṃvaratthāyāti attho, ājīvapārisuddhipariyosānassa sīlassa upanissayapaccayo hotīti vuttaṃ hoti. Avippaṭisāroti pāpapuññānaṃ katākatānusocanavasena pavattacittavippaṭisārābhāvo. Pāmojjanti dubbalā taruṇapīti. Pītīti balavapīti. Passaddhīti kāyacittadarathapaṭippassaddhi. Sukhanti kāyikaṃ cetasikañca sukhaṃ. Tañhi duvidhampi samādhissa upanissayapaccayo hoti. Samādhīti cittekaggatā. Yathābhūtañāṇadassananti sappaccayanāmarūpapariggaho. Nibbidāti vipassanā. Atha vā yathābhūtañāṇadassanaṃ taruṇavipassanā, udayabbayañāṇassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Cittekaggatā hi taruṇavipassanāya upanissayapaccayo hoti. Nibbidāti sikhāppattā vuṭṭhānagāminibalavavipassanā. Virāgoti ariyamaggo. Vimuttīti arahattaphalaṃ. Catubbidhopi hi ariyamaggo arahattassa upanissayapaccayo hoti. Vimuttiñāṇadassananti paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ. Anupādāparinibbānatthāyāti kañci dhammaṃ aggahetvā anavasesetvā parinibbānatthāya, appaccayaparinibbānatthāyāti attho. Appaccayaparinibbānassa hi vimuttiñāṇadassanaṃ paccayo hoti tasmiṃ anuppatte avassaṃ parinibbāyitabbato, na ca paccavekkhaṇañāṇe anuppanne antarā parinibbānaṃ hoti.
“为此义而说”的意思是:这部名为“律教”的教说,是为了那个目的,即为了无取著般涅槃之义。一切处都应如此理解。讨论也即是律的讨论,即“我们将这样做,我们将不这样做”这样与律相关的商议。“为此义之近因”:果报依止于此,因其有与此相关联的状态,故称为近因,即原因、缘的意思。“律是为了防护”等这一系列原因,就是“为此义”的意思。“为此义而倾听”:对于这一系列缘起的教说,倾听之后所生起的智,也是为此义。“即无取著心的解脱”:其中“yadidaṃ”是不变词。在一切性、格、数的表述中,都应根据各处之义,将那样的词作适当转换。因此,这里应如此理解其关联:所谓由不执取四种取著而有的、称为阿罗汉果的心解脱,那也是为了这个目的,即为了无取著般涅槃。所谓这无取著心的解脱之道,以及前面所说的一切,都只是为了这个目的。如此,便显示了应以大精进成就的、有决定利益的目标。应知下文“为了离贪……乃至……为了涅槃”等,是显示了可获得的功德果报。“专精”是指通过诵习、思惟等方式,一次又一次地投入。显示巴利原文
Etadatthā kathāti ayaṃ vinayakathā nāma etadatthāya, anupādāparinibbānatthāyāti attho. Evaṃ sabbatthapi. Mantanāpi vinayamantanāeva, ‘‘evaṃ karissāma, na karissāmā’’ti vinayapaṭibaddhasaṃsandanā. Etadatthā upanisāti upanisīdati ettha phalaṃ tappaṭibaddhavuttitāyāti upanisā vuccati kāraṇaṃ paccayoti. ‘‘Vinayo saṃvaratthāyā’’tiādikā kāraṇaparamparā etadatthāti attho. Etadatthaṃ sotāvadhānanti imissā paramparapaccayakathāya sotāvadhānaṃ imaṃ kathaṃ sutvā yaṃ uppajjati ñāṇaṃ, tampi etadatthaṃ. Yadidaṃ anupādācittassa vimokkhoti yadidanti nipāto. Sabbaliṅgavibhattivacanesu tādisova tattha tattha atthato pariṇāmetabbo, tasmā evamettha attho veditabbo – yo ayaṃ catūhi upādānehi anupādiyitvā cittassa arahattaphalasaṅkhāto vimokkho, sopi etadatthāya anupādāparinibbānatthāyāti evamettha sambandho veditabbo. Yo ayaṃ anupādācittassa vimokkhasaṅkhāto maggo, heṭṭhā vuttaṃ sabbampi etadatthamevāti. Evañca sati iminā mahussāhato sādhitabbaṃ niyatappayojanaṃ dassitaṃ hoti. Heṭṭhā ‘‘virāgo…pe… nibbānatthāyā’’ti iminā pana labbhamānānisaṃsaphalaṃ dassitanti veditabbaṃ. Āyogoti uggahaṇacintanādivasena punappunaṃ abhiyogo.